<_^v/l£*3 


HaaMBnan 


LIBRARY   OF   TK 

Hniversity  of  California. 


UL  A  TING    B  R  A  N C II . 

_       Pvf 

Return  in  two  week* ;  or  a  week  before  the  end  <k  trS^raL 


GERMAN    GRAMMAR 


\7 


PRACTICAL    GRAMMAR 


OF    THE 


GERMAN   LANGUAGE. 


By    CHARLES    FOLLEN, 

PROFESSOR  OF  THE  GERMAN  LANGUAGE  AND  LITERATURE 
IN  HARVARD  UNIVERSITY. 


THIRD    EDITION. 


BOSTON: 

HILLIARD,    GRAY,    AND    COMPANY 

1835. 


Entered  according  to  the  act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1832, 

by  Hilliard,  Gray,  and  Co. 

in  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  District  Court  of  the  District  of  Massachusetts. 


CAMBRIDGE: 
CHARLES  FOLSOM,  PRINTER  TO  THE  UNIVERSITY. 


PREFACE  TO  THE  FIRST  EDITION. 


The  language,  of  which  this  grammar  contains  the  practical 
rules,  is  frequently  designated  by  the  name  of  the  High  Ger- 
man. This  epithet  was  originally  applied  to  the  language  in 
order  to  distinguish  it  from  the  Low  German,  which  compre- 
hends all  those  dialects  that  are  spoken  in  the  level  coun- 
tries of  the  north  of  Germany.  But  as  the  language  which  is 
called  the  High  German,  diners  from  the  dialects  of  the  south 
of  Germany,  as  well  as  from  those  of  the  north,  this  name  is 
now  applied  exclusively  to  that  general  language,  which  is 
spoken  and  written  by  all  wellbred  Germans.  Accordingly 
it  is  more  properly  called  the  German  language,  without  any 
other  epithet. 

Among  the  various  dialects  which  have  existed  and  still 
exist  in  different  parts  of  Germany,  there  is  a  characteristic 
difference  between  those  of  upper  and  of  lower  Germany.  The 
dialects  of  the  north  of  Germany  are  in  general  softer  than 
those  of  the  south,  and  the  vowels  are  more  protracted ;  while 
the  southern  dialects  are  characterized  by  greater  variety 
and  energy.  In  all  these  various  dialects  we  discover  the 
distinct  traces  of  one  common  and  original  language,  of  which 
each  dialect  may  be  considered  a  more  or  less  perfect 
copy.  But  of  the  time  when  this  original  language  may 
have  been  used  as  the  common  instrument  of  speech  by  the 
whole  German  race,  we  have  as  little  knowledge,  as  of  the 
primeval  history  of  the  nation  itself.  If  we  examine  the  his- 
tory of  Germany,  and  particularly  the  remaining  documents 
of  its  language  from  the  fourth  century  to  the  fifteenth,  we 
find  that  at  different  periods  one  of  the  various  dialects  was 
more  than  the  other  employed  for  literary  productions.     Such 


a" 


VI  PREFACE. 

a  temporary  ascendency  was  owing  partly  to  the  fact,  that 
sometimes  one  of  the  German  tribes  happened  to  possess  a 
greater  number  of  superior  minds,  and  partly  to  political 
circumstances.  As  Germany  was  an  elective  kingdom,  its 
government  sometimes  devolved  on  men  of  different  German 
tribes,  who  had  it  in  their  power  to  increase  the  influence  of 
their  native  dialect,  particularly  if  they  promoted  literature 
and  science.  Thus  in  the  reign  of  the  emperors  from  the 
house  of  Hohenstaufen,  the  Suabian  dialect  gained  the  ascen- 
dency,  and  became  the  classical  language  of  the  polite  or, 
as  it  is  commonly  called,  the  romantic  literature  of  Germany, 
in  the  twelfth  and  thirteenth  centuries. 

In  the  fourteenth  and  fifteenth  centuries,  when  the  spirit 
of  poetry  died  away,  and  writings  in  prose  increased,  the 
language  also  assumed  a  more  prosaic  character.  This 
change  was  effected  by  various  causes,  as,  by  the  language  of 
the  laws  or  customs,  which  were  at  that  time  committed  to 
writing ;  moreover  by  translations,  and  novels,  and  particu- 
larly by  the  writings  of  those  religious  philosophers,  who  are 
known  by  the  name  of  mystics.  Tauler,  who  lived  in  the 
fourteenth  century,  and  whose  works  still  belong  to  the  most 
interesting  documents  of  ancient  German  prose,  is  particular- 
ly celebrated  among  the  German  mystics.  These  thinkers 
in  theology,  although  they  were  frequently  led  into  error  by 
their  imperfect  knowledge  of  natural  objects  and  an  aversion 
to  the  examination  of  facts,  on  the  other  hand  distinguished 
themselves  by  their  independence  of  established  prejudices, 
and  by  intense  thought,  by  which  they  strove  to  sound  the 
essence  of  religion.  Their  merits  in  developing  the  German 
language  cannot  be  doubted.  They  arose  in  different  parts 
of  Germany,  and  seem  to  have  intentionally  avoided  such 
provincial  expressions,  as  might  have  prevented  their  writings 
from  being  generally  diffused ;  and  these  writings  could  not 
but  impress  the  minds  of  others  with  the  difference  between 
the  general  substance   and  the  local  ingredients  of  the  Ian- 


$$ 


PREFACE,         ,N^5'i2  V^ 

guage.  Thus  one  writing  corrected  another,  and  the  language 
gained  in  generality,  as  well  as  in  philosophical  and  grammati- 
cal exactness  ;  while  it  lost  by  degrees  its  ancient  poetical  flow 
and  richness. 

This  prosaic  language,  thus  formed,  is  essentially  the  same 
which  prevailed  at  the  time  of  the  Reformation  in  the  six- 
teenth century,  and  which  at  present,  with  few  alterations,  is 
spoken  and  written  by  all  wellbred  Germans.  It  is  a  false 
notion  which  was  first  spread  by  Adelung,*  that  Luther,  in 
his  writings,  and  particularly  in  his  translation  of  the  Bible, 
availed  himself  of  his  native  dialect  of  the  Electorate  of  Sax- 
ony, which  by  the  signal  success  of  his  books  became  the 
general  language  of  Germany.  Luther  cannot  be  considered 
as  the  father  of  the  general  language  of  his  country  ;  no 
more  than  he  can  be  regarded  as  the  father  of  the  Reforma- 
tion. He  found  them  both  already  existing,  and  promoted 
and  modified  them  according  to  his  own  views.  With  re- 
spect to  the  language,  he  says  himself,  "  I  have  not  a  distinct, 
particular,  and  peculiar  kind  of  German,  but  I  use  the  com- 
mon German  language,  in  order  that  the  inhabitants  of  both 
the  upper  and  lower  countries  may  understand  me."  But 
even  without  these  express  words  of  Luther,  the  above 
statement  would  be  sufficiently  evident  from  a  considerable 
number  of  books  which  were  published  before,  and  at  the 
same  time  with  those  of  Luther,  in  all  of  which  we  find 
essentially  the  same  language  used  for  various  subjects ;  as, 
for  example,  by  the  painter  Albrecht  Diirer  for  laying  down 
the  principles  of  geometry,  drawing,  and  fortification.  But 
the  merit  of  Luther  consists  in  his  having  written  the  com- 
mon  language  with  particular  propriety  and  grammatical  pre- 
cision, and  in  having  extended  it  more  than  any  other  author 
among  the  people  at  large. 

*  This  error  has  lately  been  repeated  by  Noehden  in  the  Preface 
to  his  Grammar, 


Vlll  PREFACE. 

The  poetic  powers  of  this  common  language,  which  had 
been  formed  principally  by  prose  writers,  were  developed 
by  some  eminent  minds  in  the  seventeenth  century,  among 
whom  we  mention  particularly  Frederic  a  Spee,  and  Martin 
Opitz,  the  founder  of  the  Silesian  school  of  poets.  But  in 
the  course  of  the  seventeenth  and  the  beginning  of  the  eigh- 
teenth century,  the  language  was  adulterated  by  French  ex- 
pressions and  modes  of  speaking.  From  this  debasement 
the  language,  as  well  as  the  literature  of  Germany,  was  re- 
deemed by  the  great  authors  who  have  distinguished  themselves 
during  the  last  eighty  years.  They  have  shown  its  suffi- 
ciency for  every  branch  of  literature  and  science,  and  have 
restored  to  it  that  most  precious  of  all  its  properties,  the 
power  of  being  developed  and  increased  out  of  its  own  sub- 
stance. 

The  works  of  these  authors,  the  history  and  the  genius  of 
the  language,  and  the  manner  in  which  it  is  used  by  wellbred 
people  in  different  parts  of  Germany,  are  the  true  standards 
for  speaking  and  writing  it  correctly.  There  is  no  part  of 
Germany  where  the  whole  population  speak  the  language 
correctly.  Neither  the  public  of  Dresden  or  Meissen,  nor 
that  of  Hanover  or  Gottingen,  can  be  looked  to  as  filling  the 
place  of  an  academy  of  the  classical  German  language. 
Slight  shades  of  provincial  dialects  enter  into  the  manner  of 
speaking  even  of  the  best  educated  persons.  Some  faults  in 
pronunciation,  which  are  peculiar  to  different  parts  of  Ger- 
many, may  be  mentioned  here.  Sometimes  b  is  confound- 
ed with  p,  and  d  with  t;  a  and  6  are  pronounced  like  e, 
and  u  like  i;  g  in  the  beginning  of  words  is  pronounced  by 
some  Germans  like  kt  and  by  others  like  j.  Sometimes  s 
before  t  and  p  is  pronounced  like  sh  in  English  ;  and  sch 
when  it  stands  before  a  liquid  consonant  is  sounded  like  s ; 
final  syllables  in  c  (with  or  without  other  letters)  are 
pronounced  too  short,  and  sometimes  with  a  nasal  sound. 
A  gross   grammatical    fault  consists  in  using  the  accusative 


PREFACE.  IX 

instead  of  the  dative,   and  the  dative  instead  of  the  accusa- 
tive case. 

After  these  observations  on  the  history  and  actual  state  of 
the   German  language,  I  will  add   a  few  on  German  gram- 
mar.    It  is  reported  of  Charlemagne,  that  among  other  plans 
for  the  advancement  of  knowledge  he  conceived   also  that  of 
inducing  the  learned  men  of  that  age  to  compose  a  grammar 
of  the  German  language.      But  this  project  remained   unexe- 
cuted.    Some  German  grammars  were  published  in  the  six- 
teenth century  ;  but  none  of  great  eminence  until  the  eigh- 
teenth.     During   the   first   half  of   the   eighteenth    century, 
Gotsched  wrote  his   grammar,   which  held    the  highest  rank 
till,  in  the  last  half  of  the  same  century,  that  of  Adelung  ap- 
peared.    Although  the  bad  taste  of  Gotsched  did  great  injury 
to  the  literature  of  his  country,  yet  his  merit  as  a  German 
grammarian  cannot  be  denied.     He  was  however  far  surpass- 
ed by  Adelung,  the  author  of  the   most  complete  dictionary 
of  the  German  language  in  German.     After  that  of  Adelung 
a  great    number    of  German    grammars   were   published    in 
Germany,  of  which  I  shall  notice  three,   viz.  the  historical 
grammar  by  Grimm,  the  grammar  by  Harnisch,  and  that  by 
Heinsius.      The    grammar    of    Grimm    exhibits    a   profound 
grammatical   inquiry   into  the  gradual   formation  of  the  Ger- 
man language.     The  grammar  of  Harnisch  is  characterized  by 
its    metaphysical    investigation  of  the  German   language  ;    it 
abounds  in  deep  and  ingenious  remarks,  but  sometimes  runs 
into    a   sort    of  philological    mysticism.      The    grammar    of 
Heinsius,  although  it  contains  many  general  observations  on 
the  philosophical  importance  of  each  part  of  speech,  is  chiefly 
of  a  practical  nature,  and  has  on  this  account  been  introduced 
as  a  guide  into  most  German  schools. 

With  respect  to  German  grammars  written  in  foreign  lan- 
guages, I  shall  mention  only  two  which  are  commonly  used 
in  England,  and  which  have  been  employed  in  composing 
this  grammar.      I  mean  the  grammar  of  Noehdcn  (the  fifth 


X  PREFACE. 

4 

edition  of  which  was  published  in  1827),  and  that  of  Rowbo- 
tham (printed  in  1824).  These  grammars  contain  many 
valuable  rules  and  useful  directions,  most  of  which  are  derived 
from  German  grammars,  particularly  that  of  Adelung.  Noeh- 
den  indeed  not  unfrequently  pretends  to  originality ;  but 
those  passages  of  his  grammar  in  which  he  speaks  as  the 
philosopher  of  the  German  language,  and  even  those  practi- 
cal parts  which  he  most  boasts  of,  as  being  of  his  own  in- 
vention, are  certainly  the  weakest  in  his  book.  While  the 
rules  are  better  expressed  in  the  grammar  of  Noehden  than 
in  that  of  Rowbotham,  the  latter  is  more  useful  on  account  of 
the  exercises  which  are  joined  to  each  rule.  The  principal 
defect  of  Rowbotham  consists  in  particularizing  too  much ; 
of  which  method  the  natural  consequence  is,  that  many  cases 
which  belong  together  under  the  same  general  rule  remain  un- 
decided. 

In  the  Grammar  which  I  now  offer  to  the  public,  I  have 
endeavoured  to  preserve  all  that  is  valuable  in  the  two  last 
mentioned  grammars.  I  have  altered  wherever  I  thought  it 
necessary,  and  will  mention  here  some  of  the  most  impor- 
tant changes  that  have  been  made. 

1.  In  the  third  chapter  of  Part  First,  Book  First,  I  have  tried 
to  arrange  the  sounds  of  the  German  language  in  their  natural 
order.  In  this  arrangement  I  was  guided  by  the  excellent 
treatise  of  Mr.  Duponceau  on  Phonology  *  in  which  he  has 
laid  down  general  directions  for  analyzing  the  sounds  of  every 
language,  and  then  applied  them  to  the  English.  In  a  few  in- 
stances I  have  ventured  to  differ  from  the  opinion  of  my  learned 
friend,  particularly  with  respect  to  the  distinction  between 
palatals  and  linguals,  and  in  regard  to  the  consonants  d  and 
t,  which  I  have  not  ranked  with  the  lingua-dentals,  or  dentals 
(as  the  grammarians  commonly  do),  but   with   the   palatals. 

*  Transactions  of  the  American  Philosophical  Society,  at  Phila- 
delphia.    Vol.  I.     New  Series,  No.  xvu. 


PREFACE.  XI 


r 
t 


I  have  thought  it  best  to  found  the  distinction  between  palatals 
and  linguals  on  the  simple  fact  that  some  consonants  are 
formed  by  a  particular  part  of  the  palate  being  touched  by  the 
tongue,  while  others  are  produced  by  the  position  of  the 
tongue  when  brought  near  the  palate  without  touching  it. 
Accordingly  I  and  n  have  been  ranked  with  the  palatals,  and  r 
with  the  linguals.  In  regard  to  d  and  t,  it  may  be  observed, 
that  they  are  pronounced  as  well  by  persons  who  have  lost 
their  teeth,  as  by  those  who  retain  them.  The  tongue  may  in- 
deed touch  the  teeth  in  sounding  these  consonants,  but  if  this 
circumstance  had  any  influence  upon  their  pronunciation,  it 
would  add  a  hissing  sound  to  that  of  d  and  t,  and  consequently 
spoil  the  utterance  of  these  letters.  Accordingly  I  have 
ranked  d  and  t  among  the  palatal  consonants. 

The  limits  of  this  grammar  have  not  allowed  me  to  give 
more  than  a  general  analysis  of  the  sounds  of  the  German  lan- 
guage ;  while  a  more  minute  investigation  would  have  led  to 
more  satisfactory  results.* 

2.  In  representing  the  German  declensions  (which  have 
cost  so  much  trouble  to  all  German  grammarians)  I  have  been 
principally  guided  by  Heinsius,  whose  arrangement  I  have  en- 
deavoured to  render  more  complete  and  systematic ;  so  that 
there  should  remain  no  exception  to  the  principles  laid  down.t 

*  English  students  of  the  German  language,  as  well  as  German 
students  of  the  English,  may  be  surprised  to  find,  that  the  only 
sound  which  Walker,  in  his  Critical  Pronouncing  Dictionary, 
characterizes  as  a  German  sound  (I  mean  the  broad  German  a,  as 
he  calls  it),  does  not  exist  in  the  German  language  ;  that  this 
sound  is  confined  to  some  dialects,  and  is  never  heard  from  the 
mouth  of  a  wellbred  German. 

f  There  is  no  part  of  Noehden's  Grammar  of  which  the  author 
boasts  more  than  of  his  arrangement  of  the  German  declensions. 
To  satisfy  the  reader  in  regard  to  the  foundation  of  these  preten- 
sions, it  is  sufficient  to  observe,  that  Noehden  mentions  only  one 


Xll  PREFACE. 

I  have  added  a  mode  of  signifying  by  two  letters  tne  manner 
in  which  each  noun  is  declined ;  which  method  I  should 
think  would  be  of  still  greater  use  to  the  student,  if  in  the 
dictionary  also  every  noun  were  marked  in  this  manner. 

3.  With  respect  to  the  German  verb,  I  have  thought  it  best 
to  treat  first  of  its  original  parts,  i.  e.  of  those  which  are  form- 
ed by  the  addition  of  letters  to  the  radical  syllables  ;  and 
afterwards  of  those  supplementary  parts  of  the  verb  which  are 
formed  by  means  of  auxiliary  verbs.  This  distribution  is 
evidently  most  congenial  with  the  real  nature  of  the  German 
verb  and  its  inflections ;  but  it  presents  the  additional  advan- 
tage, that  the  distinction  between  regular  and  irregular  verbs 
can,  according  to  this  method,  be  placed  at  the  head  of  this 
doctrine  ,  instead  of  having  the  regular  forms  of  the  verb 
preceded  by  the  irregular  auxiliary  verbs.  Moreover  this 
difference  between  regular  and  irregular  verbs  affects  only 
the  original  parts  of  the  verb,  and  has  no  influence  upon 
those,  which  are  formed  by  means  of  auxiliary  verbs.  But 
according  to  the  common  mode  of  mixing  together  the  origi- 
nal and  supplementary  tenses  (in  order  to  make  the  German 
verb  appear  as  complete  as  the  Latin  or  Greek  verb),  the 
distinction  between  regular  and  irregular  verbs  is  carried  also 
through  those  parts  of  the  verb  which  are  not  at  all  affected 
by  this  difference. 

4.  As  the  German  language  in  this  country,  as  well  as  in 
England,  is  studied  by  many  persons  particularly  on  account  of 
the  polite  literature  of  Germany,  I  have  wished  to  contribute 
to  the  enjoyment  of  lovers  of  poetry  by  giving  (in  the  Third 
Book)  as  full  an  account  of  German  versification  as  the  limits 
of  this  elementary  work  would  admit.  I  have  availed  myself 
of  the  opinions  of  Voss  and  Schlegel  on  German  prosody,  as 

characteristic  of  the  fourth  declension,  viz.  that  it  "  comprehends 
all  those  masculines  and  neuters  which  are  not  included  in  the 
two  foregoing  declensions." 


PREFACE.  Xlll 

far  as  they  coincided  with  those  to  which  I  was  led  in  pursuing 
this  study  with  particular  and  continued  interest. 

To  facilitate  the  pronunciation,  I  have  marked  the  princi- 
pal accent  on  every  word  in  this  grammar ;  and  experience 
has  already  convinced  me  of  the  eminent  usefulness  of  this 
method.  This  idea  was  suggested  to  me  by  my  friend, 
Mr.  Folsom,  to  whose  excellent  judgment  I  am  gratefully 
indebted  for  a  great  number  of  valuable  suggestions  in  the 
definition  of  principles  and  choice  of  expressions. 

In  regard  to  orthography,  which  in  some  points  is  a  matter 
of  dispute  among  German  writers,  I  have  in  general  followed 
the  principle  of  writing  the  words  as  they  are  pronounced,  — 
a  principle,  which  is  generally  acknowledged  as  correct, 
though  with  more  or  fewer  exceptions.  I  have  not  adopted 
any  mode  of  spelling  in  which  I  am  not  supported  by  some 
distinguished  modern  author.  With  regard  to  the  letter  X)  (y), 
and  the  compound  $  (sz),  which  some  authors  use  more  or  less 
frequently,  while  others  entirely  reject  them,  I  have  made  a 
few  remarks  on  the  former  letter,  on  pages  6  and  8.  As  to 
%,  it  is  to  be  observed,  that  whenever  the  \  (z)  modifies  the 
sound  of  the  f  (s),  it  is  not  pronounced  as  J,  but  as  an  addi- 
tional f,  rendering  the  sound  stronger  and  more  acute.  Ac- 
cordingly in  this  Grammar,  whenever  the  J  has  no  effect  on  the 
pronunciation  of  the  f,  the  J  is  omitted  ;  but  whenever  it  modi- 
fies the  pronunciation  of  that  letter,  ff  is  used  instead  of  ji, 
except  at  the  end  of  words,  where  fj  is  retained  instead  of  ft?, 
in  the  same  manner  as  6  is  used  instead  of  f.* 

I  will  conclude  this  preface  by  adding  a  few  observations 
on  the  manner  in  which  I  think  this  (or  any  other)  grammar 
may  be  used  to  the  greatest   advantage  by   beginners.      The 


*  The  $  seemed  preferable  to  f£,  which  is  used  by  Harnish,  sim- 
ply because  the  latter  has  rather  an  unusual  typographical  appear- 
ance.—  In  those  German  writings  which  are  printed  in  Roman 
type,  ss  is  generally  used  instead  of  sz. 

b 


XIV  PREFACE. 

pronunciation  ought,  of  course,  to  be  first  attended  to.* 
Then  the  beginner  should  acquaint  himself  thoroughly  with 
all  the  ordinary  inflections  of  articles,  nouns,  adjectives,  pro- 
nouns, and  verbs.  I  do  not  think  it  advisable  to  attend  in 
this  first  study  of  the  grammar  to  all  the  principles  and  minute 
observations  which  are  contained  in  those  chapters  in  which 
the  grammatical  forms  are  stated.  It  is  sufficient,  that  the 
learner  should  be  able  to  translate  correctly  and  easily  all  the 
exercises  which  are  added  to  illustrate  those  forms.  —  After 
having  acquired  this  elementary  knowledge,  he  ought  to  be- 
gin to  translate  some  easy  German  book.  For  this  purpose 
I  published  about  two  years  ago  a  collection  of  extracts  from 
the  best  modern  German  authors,  under  the  title,  "  Deutsches 
Lesebuch  fur  Anfanger,"  German  Reader  for  Begi?iners, 
Cambridge,  University  Press,  1826.  This  collection  was 
made  with  the  advice  of  my  respected  friend,  Mr.  Ticknor, 
who,  being  at  the  head  of  the  department  of  modern  langua- 
ges in  Harvard  College,  has  introduced  and  most  effectually 
promoted  the  study  of  the  German  language  and  literature  at 
this  University. 

As  the  student  is  making  progress  in  translating,  he  will 
himself  feel  the  necessity  of  a  more  minute  study  of  grammar. 
This  study  ought  to  consist,  partly  in  the  teacher's  referring  the 
learner  to  that  particular  passage  in  the  grammar  which  will 
explain  any  difficulty  he  has  met  with  in  translating,  —  and 
partly  in  a  gradual,  thorough  study  of  the  grammar  from  the 
beginning  to  the  end.  During  this  study,  the  translating  should 
be  continued,  and  be  accompanied  with  exercises  in  writing, 
in  addition  to  those  contained  in  the  grammar. 

After  having   in    this   preface  offered  some  views  of  the 
history  and  actual  state  of  the  German  language  and  German 

*  A  correct  pronunciation  cannot  be  acquired  by  self-instruc- 
tion ;  since  all  the  means  which  are  used  to  explain  the  sounds  of 
one  language  by  those  of  another,  cannot  effect  more  than  an  ap- 
proximation to  the  true  pronunciation. 


PREFACE.  XV 

grammar  in  general,  and  of  the  characteristics  of  this  Gram- 
mar in  particular,  I  present  it  to  the  public,  with  the  assur- 
ance, that  its  severest  critic  cannot  be  more   fully  convinced 

of  its  imperfections,  than 

THE  AUTHOR. 
Harvard  College,  10  May,  1828. 


PREFACE  TO  THE   SECOND  EDITION. 


The  increased  number  of  students  of  the  German  language 
in  this  country  has  called  for  a  new  edition  of  this  Grammar. 
In  preparing  it  I  have  availed  myself  of  the  suggestions  of 
others,  as  well  as  of  those  of  my  own  experience  in  teaching, 
to  improve  the  work,  or  at  least  to  correct  its  defects.  Every 
part  of  the  Grammar  in  its  present  form  will,  I  hope,  bear 
witness  to  the  earnest  endeavour  of  the  author  to  make  it  a 
more  thorough,  correct,  and  practical  book.  In  the  "  Ele- 
ments," the  German  Verb  in  particular  has  been  presented 
and  explained  in  a  somewhat  different  and,  it  is  believed,  more 
satisfactory  manner.  In  the  "  Syntax,"  the  combination  of 
that  part  of  it  which  treats  of  the  agreement  and  government, 
with  that  which  teaches  the  arrangement  of  words,  will  cer- 
tainly meet  with  the  approbation  of  instructers. 

Before  this  edition  of  the  Grammar  could  be  prepared,  a 
new  edition  of  the  "  German  Reader,"  was  called  for,  and 
published,  in  German  type,  carefully  revised  and  improved.* 
About  the  same  time  an  excellent  collection  of  German 
and  English  Phrases  and  Dialogues  was  published  by 
Mr.'  F.  Graeter.f  This  book  has  ably  supplied  a  want  which 
was  equally  felt  by  teachers  and  students. 

Some  alterations  in  this  edition  have  been  suggested  by  a 
perusal  of  the  German  Grammar  of  C.  F.  Becker  (published 

*  German  Reader  for  Beginners,  —  ©attfcljftf  ScjVblldj  fftV 
Zfttfdnget.     Boston.     Hilliard,  Gray,  Little,  &  Wilkins.     1831. 

f  German  and  English  Phrases  and  Dialogues,  &c,  collected  by 
Francis  Graeter.     Boston.    Hilliard,  Gray,  Little,  &  Wilkins.    1831. 


PREFACE    TO    THE    SECOND    EDITION.  XVU 

in  London,  1830),  a  work,  which  must  be  interesting  and  use- 
ful to  those  who,  having  acquired  a  competent  knowledge  of 
German,  wish  to  extend  their  inquiries  further,  to  the  whole 
structure  and  philosophy  of  the  language. 

C.  FOLLEN. 
Cambridge,  10  Dec.  1831. 


PREFACE  TO  THE  THIRD  EDITION. 


In  preparing  the  third  edition  of  this  Grammar,  I  have  en- 
deavoured to  render  it  more  valuable  by  such  improvements  as 
could  be  derived  from  a  constant  philosophical  investigation  of 
the  language,  combined  with  daily  experience  in  teaching, 
from  a  continual  study  of  the  wants  of  learners,  and  from  the 
observations  of  other  instructers.  Those  who  may  take  the 
trouble  to  compare  this  with  the  previous  edition,  will  find 
here  a  number  of  corrections,  and  additional  rules  and  illustra- 
tions, which  I  trust  will  prove  useful  both  to  students  and 
teachers. 

I  am  now  preparing  for  the  press  the  Gospel  of  St.  John  in 
German,  with  a  literal  interlinear  translation  for  beginners,  on 
a  plan  somewhat  different  from  the  Hamiltonian  method.  I 
hope  that  this  book,  together  with  the  Grammar  and  Reader, 
will  form  a  sufficient  preparatory  course  to  enable  the  faithful 
student  to  enter  upon  a  thorough  and  extensive  study  of  Ger- 
man literature. 

C.  FOLLEN. 

Cambridge,  July,  1834. 


CONTENTS. 


BOOK  I.  ELEMENTS. 


PART  I.  ORTHOGRAPHY  AND  PRONUNCIATION. 

Page 

CHAPTER  I.  THE  ALPHABET     ...  1 

CHAPTER  II.  USE  OF  CAPITAL  LETTERS.  .   3 

CHAPTER  III.  GENERAL  RULES  OF  PRONUNCIATION  4 

CHAPTER  IV.  THE  SOUNDS  OF  THE  LANGUAGE     .  4 

§  1.  VOWELS  AND  DIPHTHONGS     .     .  .4 

§  2.  CONSONANTS  7 


PART  II.  PARTS  OF  SPEECH. 

CHAPTER  I.  ARTICLE   .     .     .     .     .  .11 

CHAPTER  II.  SUBSTANTIVE,  OR  NOUN       .     .  12 

§  1.  GENDER 12 

§  2.    DECLENSION         '.....  13 

A.  Declension  of  Common  Nouns  .     14 

B.  Declension  of  Proper  Nouns          .  25 

CHAPTER  III.  ADJECTIVES        .             .             .             .  .34 

§  1.    DECLENSION  OF  ADJECTIVES            .             .  34 

§  2.    COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES                 .  .      44 


XX 


CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER  IV.  NUMERALS 

48 

I. 

Cardinal  Numbers         .... 

48 

II 

.  Ordinal  Numbers      .... 

50 

in.  Numerals  of  Proportion 

52 

i\ 

r.  Numerals  of  Distribution 

52 

v. 

Collective  Numbers        .... 

53 

CHAPTER  V.  PRONOUNS 

54 

§1. 

PERSONAL  PRONOUNS        .... 

54 

§2. 

POSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS 

56 

§3. 

DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS 

59 

§4. 

RELATIVE  PRONOUNS 

61 

§5. 

INTERROGATIVE   PRONOUNS       . 

62 

§6. 

INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS 

63 

§7. 

SUBSTANTIVE  PRONOUNS 

65 

CHAPTER  VI.  VERBS                ..... 

69 

General  Remarks      ..... 

69 

*■>■ 

REGULAR  VERBS              .... 

72 

§2. 

IRREGULAR  VERBS               .... 

74 

§3. 

MIXED  VERBS                    .... 

75 

§4. 

REFLECTIVE  VERBS            .... 

98 

§5. 

IMPERSONAL  VERBS 

101 

§6. 

COMPOUND  VERBS 

104 

§7. 

AUXILIARY  VERBS          .... 

A.  Supplementary  Tenses  of  Active  and 

114 

Neuter  Verbs        .... 

127 

B.  Supplementary    Tenses  of  Reflective 

Verbs           ..... 

136 

C.  Supplementary  Tenses  of  Impersonal 

Verbs           ..... 

137 

D.  Supplementary  Tenses  of  Compound 

Verbs 


138 


§  8.    PASSIVE  VERBS 


139 


CONTENTS.  XXI 

CHAPTER  VII.  ADVERBS     .....  150 

§  1.  DIFFERENT  KINDS  OF  ADVERBS       .  151 
§  2.  FORMATION  OF  ADVERBS     .     .     .156 

A.  Adverbs    derived    from    Nouns    or 
Adjectives         ....  156 

B.  Compound  Adverbs         .         .         .  157 

§  3.    COMPARISON  OF  ADVERBS                .             .  159 

CHAPTER  VIII.  PREPOSITIONS           ....  159 

CHAPTER  IX.    CONJUNCTIONS       ....  160 

CHAPTER  X.   INTERJECTIONS             ....  161 

CHAPTER  XI.  ON  THE  MODE  OF  FORMING  NEW  WORDS  161 

§  1.     MODES     OF     ENRICHING     THE     LANGUAGE 

FROM  WITHIN  ITSELF      .             .             .  162 

§  2.    INTRODUCTION  OF  FOREIGN    WORDS    INTO 

THE  LANGUAGE              ....  170 


BOOK  II.  SYNTAX. 


CHAPTER  I.  THE  ARTICLE     ....  174 

CHAPTER  II.  NOUNS   ......  180 

CHAPTER  III.  ADJECTIVES      ....  195 

CHAPTER  IV.  PRONOUNS     .....  201 

CHAPTER  V.  VERBS 210 

§  1.  AGREEMENT  AND  GOVERNMENT   .     .  210 

A.  Persons  and  Numbers          .         .  210 

B.  Tenses 212 

C.  Moods 215 

D.  The  Passive  Voice  .         .         .223 


r  • 


XXll  CONTENTS. 


E.  The  Auxiliaries           .         .         .  224 

F.  The  Verb  governing  Cases      .         .  225 

§  2.    ARRANGEMENT             ....  234 

A.  Indicative  Mood     ....  234 

B.  Subjunctive  Mood        .         .         .  237 

C.  Imperative  Mood     ....  238 

D.  Infinitive  Mood            .         .         .  238 

E.  Participles              ....  239 

F.  Compound  Verbs          .         .         .  241 

CHAPTER  VI.  ADVERBS            .             .            .  *                     .  242 

CHAPTER  VII.  PREPOSITIONS      ....  245 

CHAPTER  VIII.  CONJUNCTIONS         ....  251 

CHAPTER  IX.  INTERJECTIONS                 .            .            .  259 


BOOK  III.  PROSODY. 


CHAPTER  I.  DIVISION  OF  WORDS  INTO  SYLLABLES  260 

CHAPTER  II.  QUANTITY 261 

CHAPTER  III.  ACCENT    .....  263 

CHAPTER  IV.  GERMAN  VERSE     ....  266 

§  1.  RHYTHM 266 

1.  The  Ancient  Metres         .         .         .  266 

2.  The  German  Rhythm  .         .  268 

<§>  2.  consonance 273 

1.  Rhyme        .....  273 

2.  Assonance       ...  .  274 

3.  Alliteration         ....  274 


CONTENTS. 


tt 


XXUI  ^ 


APPENDIX. 

i.  acts  ix.  1-28,  (in  the  German  version  of 


Van  Esz) 

II.  FAMILIAR  DIALOGUES 

III.  GERMAN  ABBREVIATIONS 


275 

.     277 

282 


NOTICE 


In  this  Grammar,  the  principal  accent  in  each  word  of 
several  syllables  has  been  marked  by  the  sigjn  (')  ;  as, 
^evg'roerf/  mine.  In  German  books  in  general,  no  ac- 
cent  is  marked.  ^| 

In  translating  the*  English  Exercises,  th  ^udent  should 
omit  the  accents  in  writing.  -d|  ^* 

In  the  Exercises,  those  words  which,  thojgdi  expressed  in 
English,  are  to  be  omitted  in  German,  are  m  Bed  in  common 
type  and  enclosed  in  parentheses ;  thus/^which).  Those 
which  are  omitted  in  English,  but  expressjpif  in  German,  are 
printed  in  Italics :  thus,  (which).  In  those  cases  in  which  a 
different  form  of  expression  is  substituted  in  German,  the 
German  idiom  in  a  literal  translation,  enclosed  and  italicized, 
is  added  to  the  English  text.  $ 

The  figures  over  the  English  words  indicate  their  position 
in  German.  Words  without  figures  over  them  stand  in  the  same 
place  as  in  English ;  they  sometimes  separate  one  series  of 
figures  from  another,  in  the  same  sentence.  Example  :  Had 
you  been2  patient1,  you  would  have4  known3  the1  truth2.  The 
words  in  German  are  thus  arranged,  Had  you  patient  been, 
you  would  the  truth  known  have. 

In  studying  the  Elements  of  the  Adjective  and  the  Numeral 
(before  attempting  to  translate  the  exercises  on  pages  46,  47, 
and  53)  the  beginner  should  acquaint  himself  with  the  rules 
concerning  the  use  of  the  declinable  and  indeclinable  forms 
of  them,  contained  in  Book  II.  Ch  III.  §  1.  Rules  i,  n,  in,  and 
iv.  In  the  same  manner,  together  with  the  Elements  of  the 
Pronoun,  the  rules  concerning  the  use  of  the  different  relative 
and  interrogative  pronouns,  should  be  studied,  in  Book  II. 
Ch.  IV.  §  1.  Rule  i.  Obs.  6  and  7. 


GERMAN    GRAMMAR. 


BOOK  I. 

ELEMENTS. 

PART   I. 

ORTHOGRAPHY  AND  PRONUNCIATION. 


CHAPTER  I. 
THE   ALPHABET. 

Simple  Letters. 

Letters.                                 Uaual  Names.  English. 

%,  a,     .     .     .     .     ah, A,  a. 

%,  d/  .     .     .  the  French  ai,    .     .  A,  a. 

25,  b,     .     .     .     .     bay,         ....  B,  b. 

£,  C,        ...       tsay, C,  c. 

2),  t>,      ....     day, D,  d. 

K/m^    f        \    f                                •                   •                   •                    •              Cl«                                                           •                    •                    •                    «  i-J«          C» 

g,  f,     .          .     .      ef, F,  f. 

©/  9/      ....     ghay,        .     .     .     .  G,  g. 

J£j,  fy,        ...       hah,        ....  H,  h. 

<o/  */       .     .     .     .     e,         i,   l. 

3/  h  •    •    •    •      yot,     ....  J,  j. 

8,  f,      ....     kah, K,  k. 

1 


ORTHOGRAPHY.  [BOOK    I. 

if    It  ...  el, •  L,    1. 

SDt,  m,        ...  em, M,  m. 

01,  n,       ...  en, N,  n. 

0/  0,     ....  o, O,  o. 

0,  bf        ...  the  French  euy    .  O,  6. 

sp,  p,  ...  pay,  .     .     .     .  P,  p 

&,  ((,        ...  koo,      .      ...  Q,  q. 

§H;  t/     .     .     .     .  err, R,  r. 

@,  f  (6),      .     .  ess,        ....  S,  s. 

$,  t,     .     .     .     .  tay, T,  t. 

U,  U,       ...  oo,        ....  U,  u. 

II,  U,     .     .     .     .  the  French  u,        .  U,  u. 

^5,  t),      ...      .  fow,       ....  V,  v. 

OB,  »,     .     .     .  way, W,  w. 

jC/     l"/  •         •         •         •  1a.o«  •         •         •         •  .aY.  .     X, 

09,  ty,        ....  ipsilon,        ...  Y,  y. 

^5/  *z      ....  iseit,     .     .     .     .     s  *-* ,  z. 


Letters. 

A), 

a, 

ft 

W/ 

W, 

ft 
ft 
ft 


Compound  Letters, 

Usual  Names. 

.     tsay-hah,       .     . 

tsay-kah,        .     . 
.     ef-ef, 

pay-ef,       .     .     . 
.     pay-hah,      .     . 

ess-tsay-hah, 
.     ess-ess,  . 

ess-tay, 
.    ess-tsett,      .     . 

tay-hah,    . 
.    tay-tsett,      .     . 


English. 

ch. 

ck. 

ff. 

pf. 

ph. 

sch. 


ss. 

St. 

sz  . 

th. 
tz. 


Instead  of  f  X  most  authors  write  ct ;  and  §,  instead  of  }}. 

g  is  used  only  at  the  end  of  words,  either  separate  or  in 
composition. 

J3  is  used  in  this  Grammar  only  at  the  end  of  words,  instead 
of  f£.     (For  the  reasons,  see  page  8.) 


PART    I.  CH.  2.]  USE  OF  CAPITAL  LETTERS.  3 

•  The  following  letters,  from  the  similarity  of  their  form,  may 
be  easily  mistaken  for  one  another. 

Capitals.  Small  Letters. 

25  and  33,  b  and  tj, 

2)  and  0,  f  and  f, 

(£  and  £,  m  and  n>, 

(*5  and  ©,  t  and  %, 

8,  St,  and  SK,  i)  and  l> 
9K  and  OB, 
0  and  &. 


CHAPTER  II. 

USE  OF   CAPITAL  LETTERS. 

With  respect  to  the  use  of  capital  letters,  it  is  to  be 
observed : 

1.  All  substantives,  as  well  as  all  words  used  substantively, 
begin  with  capitals,  and  also  all  sentences ;  as, 

t>ev  $(13,  the  day.  fcie   SBodj'e,  the  week, 

fcer  'SBei'fe,  the  wise  man.  t>ie  SDTeftligCtt/  my  family. 

M$  Wlci'xu,  mine  (my-  prop-     t>a£  ic'fcn,  the  reading. 

erty.) 
@o[>a(t>'   t>U   bOU   UClt   ik'btU     As   soon    as    you   learn    any 

SDTei'niojCU     et'rMS    Steu'eS         news       about       my      dear 

erfdfyt'jV,  gieb  mil'  fcgicicl)'         friends,  send  me  word  im- 

Sflaclj'vicfet.  mediately. 

2.  The  pronouns  answering  to  you,  your,  &c.  must  begin 
with  a  capital,  when  they  refer  to  the  person  whom  we  address; 
as,  @te,  you ;  3tyr,  Sty'tige,  your ;  2)u,  thou ;  3>in,  thine, 
&/C. ;  but  the  pronoun  id),  I,  is  never  written  with  a  capital  but 
at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence,  or  when  it  is  used  as  a  sub- 
stantive, as,  t>a£  %d),  one's  self. 

The  pronoun  fte,  when  it  answers  to  the  pronoun  they,  or 
she,  is  written  with   a  small  letter,  unless  it  begin  a  sentence. 

3.  Every  word  begins  with  a  capital,  when  a  stress 
is  laid  upon  it;  as,  the  numeral  till  in  the  sentence,  (5£ 
gic&t  XiUt  gi'nen  ©fyaffpcavc,  There  is  but  one  Shakspeare.* 

*  Leaving  a  space  between  the  letters  answers  the  same 
purpose ;  thus,  C  i  It  C  It. 


4  GENERAL  RULES  OF  PRONUNCIATION.      [BOOK  I. 

CHAPTER  III. 

GENERAL  RULES  OF  PRONUNCIATION. 

§  1.  In  the  German  language  each  letter  is  pronounced  in 
every  word. 

Some  exceptions  to  this  rule  are  mentioned  in  Chapter  IV. 
Part  I. ;  particularly  with  respect  to  double  vowels,  e  (e)  after 
i  (i),  and  I)  (A)  in  some  cases. 

§  2.  Each  sound  is  constantly  represented  by  the  same 
letter,  and  each  letter  has  only  one  sound.  Thus  the  letter 
a  (a),  which  has  in  English  four  different  sounds,  has  in  Ger- 
man only  one,  and  this  one  sound  is  never  represented  by  any 
other  letter  than  d. 

A  few  exceptions  are  marked  in  Chapter  IV.  Part  I.,  par- 
ticularly in  regard  to  the  letters  g  (g),  t  (t),  i)  (v),  and  \)  (y), 
in  words  taken  from  foreign  languages. 

§  3.  Words  that  belong  to  foreign  languages  preserve  in 
German  their  original  spelling  and  pronunciation.  Thus  the 
word  Cambridge  ((Eamblifcge)  is  sounded  in  German  as  in 
English. 

The  dead  languages  are  pronounced  according  to  the  Ger- 
man idiom.  The  letters  1)  (v)  and  t  (t)  form  exceptions  :  for 
which  see  Chapter  IV.  Part.  I. 


CHAPTER  IV. 
THE  SOUNDS  OF  THE  LANGUAGE. 

§  1.    VOWELS  AND  DIPHTHONGS. 

A.    Vowels . 

The  vowels  in  German  are  either  long  or  short;  which 
distinction  does  not  (as  in  English  pronouncing  dictionaries) 
imply  a  difference  in  the  sound  of  the  vowel,  but  merely 
determines  its  relative  duration. 


PART  I.   CH.  4.]  VOWELS.  5 

The  vowels  are 
a...  an  intermediate   sound   between  a  in  father \    and   a  in 
water ;  it  is 

long  in  (2>va$,  grass  ;  fya'ben,  to  have  ; 
short  in  QTiann,  man  ;  ^at'jc,  cat. 
0*  . .  .  nearly  like  a  in  fat  ;  it  is 

long  in  33&1T/  bear  ;  (Sld'fer,  Glasses  ; 

short  in  dl'ter,  older  ;  Zty'fM/  apples. 
C   ..  nearly  like  a  in  fate;  yet  closer,  and  without  the  sound  ot 
an  e   which   is   slightly  heard   at  the   end  of  long   a  in 
English  ;  it  is 

long  in  @ce,  sea;  gc'fyen,  to  go  ; 
short  in  53ctt,  bed  ;  ef  fen,  to  eat. 
This  vowel  is  in  some  words  frequently  pronounced  like 
short  e  in  English.     But  elegant  pronunciation  in  Germany 
seems  to  prefer  in  every  instance  the  close  and  acute  sound 
which  is  heard  in  @CC,  and  fen'Oen,  to  send. 

The  e  after  i  in  the  same  syllable  is  not  sounded,  but 
merely  protracts  the  sound  of  the  i,  as  in  iit'bt,  love, 
i,  X) . . .  like  e  in  bee ;  it  is 

long  in  mil*,  to  me  ;  Sci'lill'/  Berlin  ; 
short  in  gifrf),  fish ;  SDIit'te,  middle. 
0 . . .  like  o  in  promote ;  it  is 

long  in  ©front/  river ;  SHo'fc,  rose  ; 
sAortf  in  §Kof3,  horse  ;  €>p'fcr,  sacrifice. 
6* . . .  like  the  French  eu  in  pewr,  which  has  no  corresponding 
sound  in  English  ;  it  is 

long  in  fd)6n,  fine  ;  ^6'ttC,  sounds  ; 

short  in  Step'fe,  heads  ;    Of  ittmg,  aperture. 
U . . .  like  oo  in  moon,  and  u  in  y#//  ;  it  is 

long  in  gut,  good  ;  ^hl'ttte,  flower; 

short  in  @d)ll£,  protection ;  Sftut'tfr,  mother. 

*  That  d,  6,  and  ft,  are  simple  sounds,  and  not  diphthongs 
composed  of  (U,  OC,  and  tte,  is  evident ;  for  it  is  impossible 
to  produce  these  three  sounds,  by  any  combination  of  other 
vowels,   however  rapidly   pronounced.     It  is  therefore   better 

to  write  ll^]([f  apples ;  £>DC,  solitude;  tuning/  exercise;  in- 
stead of  2(cpfcf,  £>eoe,  Ucbung:  and  ©otlje,  instead  of  (Boctfyc. 
Two  dots  on  the  top  of  a,  o,  U,  viz.  a,  0/  u\  or  a,  b,  it, 
signify  the  same  sounds  as  the  small  c  on  the  top  of  the  same 
letters,  d,  b,  ft. 
1* 


6  DIPHTHONGS.  [BOOK  I. 

tV,  l)..  .like  the   French  u  in  vu,  to  which  there  is  no  corre- 
sponding sound  in  English  ;  it  is 

long  in  %[)\\V,  door  ;  miVfcC,  tired  ; 

short  in  burnt;  thin  ;  Jpltt'tC,  cottage. 
Observation.  The  letter  V),  which  some  German  authors 
retain  in  more  or  less  words,  and  others  entirely  reject,  has  no 
peculiar  sound  of  its  own.  It  has  the  force  of  i  in  all  words 
that  are  originally  German,  as  well  when  sounded  by  itself, 
ex.  'iil'Ir;,  Tilly,  a  proper  name,  as  in  the  diphthongs,  (see 
B.)  ex.  femt,  to  be ;  CDTai;,  May.  In  words  derived  from  the 
Greek,  in  which  t)  represents  the  letter  v,  it  is  commonly 
sounded  like  ft,  as  in  ©rjflcnV/  which  is  pronounced  as  if 
written  ©uftem'  '•>  ana"  this  mode  of  writing  is  also  preferred 
by  several  modern  scholars.  —  Some  grammarians  retain  this 
letter  wherever  it  serves  to  distinguish  different  words,  which 
are  spelled  alike  in  every  other  respect,  as  fttjtt,  to  be  ;  and 
ffitt/  his.  But  this  reason  seems  insufficient,  as  the  significa- 
tion of  all  such  words  is  determined  by  the  sense  they  have  in 
the  sentence  in  which  they  occur.  Therefore,  according  to 
the  general  rules  above  stated,  (Chap.  III.  §  1.  and  2.)  it  seems 
proper  to  retain  the  X),  only 

1.  In  proper  names,  particularly  names  of  persons,  where 
the  mode  of  writing  them  has  an  importance  of  its  own 
separate  from  that  which  consists  in  their  sound,  as  in  Jpeti'UC, 

ietj'fceu ; 

2.  In  words  derived  from  foreign  languages,  where  the  l) 
has  the  sound  of  the  foreign  letter  it  represents  ;  for  example, 
©UUOUV/mtf,  pronounced  @UU0UlVmt£;  ^OV?,  pronounced 
3ovf.     (The  sound  of  the  consonant  3>  is  given,  §  2.  A.  4.) 

In  all  other  cases  the  t)  should  be  given  up,  and  the  simple  i 
substituted,  as  in  fciu,  to  be ;  SDfar;,  May. 


B.  Diphthongs. 

All  diphthongs  are  long, 
ci,    (et)) . .  .like  i  in  fine;  ex.  ^vci'fycit,  freedom  ;  mciu,  mine, 
at,  (at)) . . .  nearly   the  same    sound    as   d,  only  a  little  more 
open  ;  ex.  Jpaiu,  grove ;  90?ai,  May. 


*  See  note  on  preceding  page. 


PART  I.    CH.  4.]  SIMPLE    CONSONANTS.  7 

oi,  (09) . . .  nearly  as  oi  in  moist ;  it  occurs  only  in  a  few  words, 

particularly  proper  names,  as,  £or/CV. 
lit/  (ut;) . . .  nearly  as  we  ;  it  very  seldom  occurs  ;  ex.  pflti !  fy  ! 
(W. .  .nearly  as  ou  in  mouth  (as  the  Scotch  pronounce  it) ;  ex. 

J^autf/  house;  ftvaut,  herb, 
ett. . .  has  no  corresponding  sound  in  any  modern  language  ;  it 

comes  nearest  to  the  sound  of  oi  in  voice,  ex.  §CU'Cl*,  fire  ; 

gmtnfc/  friend. 
a\l. ..  nearly  the  same  sound  as  en,  only  a  little  more  open ;  ex. 

ipdu'fci',  houses ;  ftrau'tCl*,  herbs. 
There  are  no  triphthongs  in  German. 


§    2.    CONSONANTS. 


A.  Simple  Consonants. 


There  are  in  German  five  sorts  of  consonants,  according  to 
the  different  orgaus  which  are  particularly  employed  in  form- 
ing them. 


1.  Labials. 

p ...  like  p  ;  ex.  sptv'U,  pearl ;  phimp,  clumsy. 

b  . .  .generally  like  b  ;  as  in  SSut'tfl*/  butter;   but  at  the  end  of 

words  like  bp,  as  in  iaub,  foliage. 
tn . . .  like  m ;  ex.  3D?amt,  man  ;  ft  amm,  comb. 
XD  . . .  nearly   like  w,   (omitting  the   sound  of  oo  with  which  w 
begins);  ex.  QGDint>,  wind;  ttc'fycn,  to  blow. 


2.  Labio-dentals. 

f,  t),  ptj...like/;    ex.    %tU,    rock;  jUtf,    stiff;    botf,   full; 

spfyilofopt)',  philosopher. 

Spt)     is    not    originally    German,    but    chiefly   intended    to 

represent   the    Greek    qp,    for    which    some    modern    authors 

substitute    f,    and    accordingly    write    §t(ofof,     instead     of 


8  SIMPLE    CONSONANTS.  [BOOK  I. 

S8  and  f  have  in  all  genuine  German  words  the  same 
sound.* 

SB  has  the  English  sound  of  v  only  in  words  belonging  to 
foreign  languages,  in  which  this  letter  is  sounded  as  in 
English. 


3.  Palatals. 

t . .  .  like  t;  ex.  ^itv'tcltaubc,  turtle-dove;  matt,  faint. 

£> . .  .  generally  like  d;  as  in  ^Dn'fcclfatf,  bagpipe  ;  but  at  the  end 

of  words  it  sounds  like  dt ;  as  in  25a0,  bath. 
tt...like  n;  ex.  ncin,  no.  — 9t  becomes  a  nasal  sound,  when 

followed  by  g  or  %  (as  in  English):  ex.  ©cfang',    song; 

3)anf,  thanks, 
(...like  I;  ex.  il'ixt,  lily;  33aU,  bail. 


4.  Linguals.i 

I*...  like  the  Irish  r;  ex.  vof'fcn,  to  roll;  jtaff,  motionless. 
f  (g)  . . .  like  s  ;  ex.  ©ci'tC,  side  ;  SKeiS,  rice. 

@  is  never  pronounced  like  z,  neither  has  it  the  sharp 
hissing  sound  of  the  English  s,  as  this  is  commonly  pro- 
nounced. 

The  J  is  sometimes  used  as  an  addition  to  the  f  (ft),  but 
then  the  2  is  never  pronounced  ;  it  is  sounded  in  some  in- 
stances like  f£,  as  in  -Jpajj,  hate,  or  like  a  simple  f,  as  in  «£auf$, 
house.  Some  authors,  therefore,  never  use  ft,  but  substitute, 
according  to  its  pronunciation,  either  f$,  (ss)  as  in  $&]$,  or 
$,  as  in  J$au& 


*  As  f  and  t)  have  the  same  sound,  they  seem  to  require 
only  one  sign,  and  f  has  already  taken  the  place  of  t)  in  sev- 
eral words,  as  in  DCjt,  ©vat),  which  are  now  written  fcft,  firm  ; 
©Vaf,  count.  But  it  seems  as  yet  too  bold  a  step,  to  dispense 
with  the  \>  altogether. 

f  The  organic  difference  between  Unguals  and  palatals 
consists  in  the  latter  being  formed  particularly  by  that  part  of 
the  palate  to  which  the  tongue  is  applied,  while  the  former  are 
produced  by  the  position  of  the  tongue,  brought  near  the  roof 
of  the  mouth  without  touching  it. 


^^Qffl^ 


PART  I.  CH.  4.]  SIMPLE    CONSONANTS.  9 

fcf) . . .  like  sk ;  ex.  &d)l\'U,  school ;  23ltfc(),  bush. 

The  soft  sound   zh  is  heard  only  in  words  taken  from  the 

French  language  ;  as  (Scute'  genius;  ^Pa'ge,  page, 
d)  . . .  when  it  is  preceded  by  e,  t,  d,  6,  It,  or  a  consonant,   is 

not  a  guttural,  but  a  lingual,  formed   in  the  fore  part  of  the 

mouth.     There  is  no  sound   corresponding  to  it  in  English. 

Ex.     35ac()'e,     rivulets;    ibdycv,    holes;     >3h'd)ZX,    books; 

SKcc()t,  right;  id),  I;  OMcl),  milk, 
j . . .  like  y  in  year;  ex.  ja,  yes  ;  Qtotyt/  year. 


5.  Guttural. 

ff,  q,  and  in  some  instances,  c,  and  c() . . .  are  pronounced  like 
k;  ex.   Kai'I,  Charles;  £>ttel'(c,  source. 

£  is  pronounced  like  k.  when  it  stands  before  a,  0,  U, 
or  a  consonant,  as  in  SvUlO'nicitS,  prebendary ;  (Evefcit'/ 
credit. 

(Et)  also,  is  in  some  cases  pronounced  like  f,  as  in  (Efya- 
Vac'ter,  character ;  (Tfyvo'ltif,  chronicle. 

Many  German  authors  make  use  of  f,  instead  of  C  and 
d),  when  these  letters  are  sounded  like  f,  particularly  in 
those  foreign  words  which  are  considered  as  naturalized  in 
German.     Accordingly  they  write  ^rcfctt,  RwaHtV* 

a, ...  in  the  beginning  of  words,  like  g  hard  ;  as  in  ©aft,  guest ; 
at  the  end,  and  sometimes  in  the  midst  of  a  word,  it  has 
an  intermediate  sound  between  0,  hard  and  the  lingual  d) ; 
ex.  %%,  day ;  SKc'ont,  rain ;  after  it,  at  the  close  of  a 
syllable,  it   sounds  like  g  in  singing;  ex.    finO/Ctt,  to  sing. 

d) . . .  when  preceded  by  a,  0,  or  it,  is  formed  in  the  throat,  and 
sounded  like  ch  in  the  Scotch  word  Loch ;  ex.  23ad),  rivu- 
let ;  iod),  hole  ;  $5ud),  book. 

fy  . . .  like  h,  when  it  begins  a  syllable,  as  in  ^6'fyc,  height ;  after 
a  vowel,  in  the  midst  or  at  the  end  of  a  syllable,  the  b  is 
silent,  and  merely  protracts  the  sound  of  the  preceding 
vowel,  as  in  ?0?O^U,  poppy  ;  frofy,  joyful ;  and  it  is  silent 
and  entirely  lost,  after  t  or  X,  as  in  ttytm,  to  do  ;  0tfycin, 
the  Rhine. 


• 


10  COMPOUND    CONSONANTS.  [BOOK    I. 

B.    Compound  Consonants. 

The  most  remarkable  are 

f,  ?$,  or  cf$,  and  sometimes  d)£. . .  like  ks,  (never  like  gz) ;  ex. 
2tyt,  ax;  jfracte,  straight  on.  £1)6  is  sounded  like  jr, 
when  it  belongs  to  a  word  in  its  simplest  form,  as  in  t>er 
3)acb5,  the  badger.  But  when  the  final  $  is  added  merely 
by  a  change  of  termination,  as  in  t>a$  2)ad),  the  roof, 
genitive,  t>e£  2)ad)j?,  of  the  roof,  the  original  sound  of  d) 
is  preserved. 

I,  %,  ttf,  and  in  some  instances  C  and  t . . .  are  pronounced  like 
ts  (not  dz)  ;  ex.  $at)n,  tooth  ;   btttitG',  already. 

£  is  pronounced  like  J  (ts),  when  it  precedes  e,  i,  &,  6/ 
ft,  or  X) ;  ex.  O'cean,  ocean ;  SafvlV,  Csesar. 

$  is  commonly  pronounced  like  J,  in  words  of  Latin 
origin,  when  the  t  is  followed  by  i  and  another  vowel ; 
ex.  Station',  nation. 

Many  authors  write  J,  instead  of  C  or  t,  when  these  let- 
ters are  pronounced  like  J,  particularly  in  words  which  are 
considered  as  naturalized  in  German ;  as  Station',  0'£C<Ut. 

fit . . .  both  letters  are  sounded  ;  as  in  SCua'frc,  boy* 

gn .  . .  both  letters  are  sounded  ;  as  in  (Sna'fcC,  mercy. 

pfl. . .  the  three  letters  are  sounded:  as  in  $Pffan'£C/  plant. 

fd)(...the  two  sounds  of  fd),  and  I  are  pronounced,  as  in 
@d)lcu'fc,  sluice. 

fdjtt) . . .  the  two  sounds,  fd),  and  tt),  are  uttered  ;  as  in  ©cftt&afc 
bt,  swallow. 

Observations.  The  doubling  of  vowels,  when  it  does 
not  create  two  syllables,  protracts  the  sound,  as  in  ©cc, 
sea. 

The  doubling  of  consonants  renders  the  sound  stronger 
and  more  acute,  as  in  3)on/ncvtt>ettei*,  thunderstorm. 

There  is  a  slight  difference  in  the  manner  in  which  cer- 
tain sounds  which  are  essentially  the  same  in  both  lan- 
guages, are  pronounced  in  German  and  in  English.  Those 
German  sounds  which  correspond  to  the  English  t,  d,  ly 
r,  5,  sh,  viz.  t,  t>,  (,  V,  f,  $i\),  are  formed  in  the  forepart 
of  the  mouth,  i.  e.  nearer  the  teeth  than  in  English ;  also 
g  (g)  hard  and  k  (f)  are  not  formed  so  deep  in  the  throat 
as  in  English. 


t 


PART    II.    CH.    1.1  PARTS    OF    SPEECH.  11 


PART  II. 

PARTS' OF   SPEECH. 

There  are  ten  parts  of  speech,  viz.  Article,  Substantive  or 
Noun,  Adjective,  Numeral,  Pronoun,  Verb,  Adverb,  Preposi- 
tion, Conjunction,  and  Interjection.  Several  of  them,  viz.  the 
Article,  the  Substantive,  the  Adjective,  some  of  the  Numerals, 
the  Pronoun,  and  the  Verb,  admit  of  inflection,  that  is,  of  a 
change  of  termination,  indicating  the  principal  relations  of 
that  which  is  expressed  by  the  word  inflected.  The  other 
parts  of  speech  are  not  inflected. 

The  inflection  of  Articles,  Substantives,  Adjectives,  Nu- 
merals, and  Pronouns,  is  called  Declension,  and  that  of  Verbs, 
Conjugation.  Declension  comprehends  two  Numbers,  the 
Singular  and  the  Plural,  and  each  number  four  Cases,  or  re- 
lations, which  are  indicated  by  certain  changes  of  termina- 
tion. While  in  English  the  Accusative  or  Objective  case  is 
generally  like  the  Nominative,  and  the  Genitive  and  the 
Dative  are  commonly  indicated  by  the  Prepositions  of  and  to, 
the  German  language  expresses  the  same  relations  by  chang- 
ing the  termination  of  the  Nominative  case. 

That  relation  which  in  the  Latin  Grammar  is  denominated 
the  Ablative  case,  is  in  German  expressed  by  the  Dative,  and 
is  generally  preceded  by  the  Preposition  Doit,  from  ;  as,  fcOU 
&em  ^a'tCV,  from  the  father.  The  Vocative  is  nothing  else 
than  the  Nominative,  as  used  in  an  address  or  exclamation  ; 
ex.  0  Wn'UV !  O  father  ! 


CHAPTER   I. 

ARTICLE. 


There  are  two  articles,  viz.  the  indefinite,  till,  a  or  an,  and 
the  definite,  t>ev,  the ;  which  are  declined  in  three  genders, 
masculine,  feminine,  and  neuter. 


12 


NOUN. 

GENDER. 

[bo 

©in,  a,  is 

thus  declined 

• 
• 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

Nom. 

em, 

ci'ne, 

tin, 

a. 

Gen. 

er'nes, 

ei'ner, 

ti'neg,    of  a. 

Dat. 

ri'nem, 

ei'ner, 

ei'nem,  to  a. 

Ace. 

ei'nen, 

ei'ne, 

em, 

a. 

2)CV,  the,  is  thus  declined 

i: 

Singular. 

Nom. 

t>er, 

t>ie, 

MS, 

the. 

Gen. 

i>e$, 

fcer, 

fce£, 

of  the 

Dat. 

tern, 

fcer, 

fcem, 

to  the. 

Ace. 

bn\, 

Me, 

MS, 

the. 

• 

Plural,  for 

a//  Me  genders. 

Nom. 

t>te,   the. 

Gen. 

t>et*,  of  the. 

Dat. 

i>en,  to  the. 

Ace. 

fcte,  the. 

CHAPTER  II. 

SUBSTANTIVE,  or  NOUN. 

§    ].    GENDER. 

All  substantives,  or  nouns,  are  either  masculine,  or  feminine, 
or  neuter. 

The  gender  of  most  nouns  is  determined  by  the  following 
rules. 

1.  Of  the  masculine  gender  are 

The  names  of  male  animals,  and  most  nouns  which  convey 
the  idea  of  superior  power  and  energy ;  as  t>Ct*  SDtoim,  the 
man ;  t>et*  ^a'tCV,  the  father ;  fcet*  kb'Wt,  the  lion ;  t>ev  33aitm, 
the  tree ;  fcet*  £am'tttcr,  the  hammer ;  feci*  SQTutfy,  courage. 

2.  Of  the  feminine  gender  are 

a.  Most  of  the  names  of  female  animals,  and  most  nouns 
which  express  what  is  tender  and  delicate  ;  as,  t>ie  §V(IU,  the 
lady,  or  wife  ;  t>ie  SDmt'ter,  the  mother ;  i>te  %m'bt,  the  dove  ; 


PART    II.    CH.   2.]  GENDER.  13 

tic  SBfa'mc,  the  flower ;    tic  SU'tcf,    the  needle  ;  tic  ik'bt, 
love. 

6.  All  proper  names  of  countries  and  places  made  by  the 
affix  ei ;  as,  Die  %Mti',  tic  QBallacljci' ;  and  the  following, 
Die  *an'ft§,  tic  spfalj,  tic  ©efcweij. 

3.  Of  the  neuter  gender  are 

a.  The  letters  of  the  alphabet ;  as,  tag  11,  tag  23. 

b.  All  diminutive  nouns  ending  in  c()Clt  or  (cin ;  as,  b<X$ 
spfcvb'cljcn,  the  little  horse  ;  tag  35itd)'fcin,  the  little  book. 

c.  All  infinitives  used  as  substantives  ;  as  ta£  (Sf'fcit/  the 
eating ;  tag  ^riiif  en,  the  drinking. 

d.  The  proper  names  of  countries  and  places,  which  are 
not  comprehended  under  2.  6.,  and  the  gender  of  which  is  not 
otherwise  determined  by  the  following  rule. 

4.  The  gender  of  compound  substantives  is  determined  by 
the  last  word  which  enters  into  the  composition,  expressing 
the  general  idea  of  the  word  ;  as,  tag  spia'ttnabcrgrocvf,  the 
platina  mine;  from  tic  spia'tina,/.  platina,  tcr  SScrg,  m.  the 
mountain,  and  tag  <2Ucrf,  n.  the  work  ;  —tic  -Hkt'tcrfatync,/. 
the  weathercock  ;  from  tag  ^DBct'tcr,  n.  the  weather,  and  tic 
Safy'nc,  f.  the  banner  ;  —  tcr  ©teu'ermann,  m,  the  steersman  ; 
from  tag  ©tcit'er,  n.  the  helm,  and  tcr  SDlaiUl/  m.  the  man. 
For  the  same  reason  all  proper  names  compounded  with  iant, 
n.  land,  and  with  SHctcl)/  n.  kingdom,  are  neuter ;  such  as, 
©cntfdj'fant,    Germany ;    (gno/lant,    England ;     granf'rcicf), 

France;  Ojt'rcicf),  Austria. 

Some  nouns  vary  their  gender,  according  to  their  significa- 
tions ;  as, 

tcv  25ant,  the  volume,  tag  25ant,  the  ribbon  ; 

tec  23unt,  the  alliance,  tag  35unt,  the  bundle  ; 

tcr  (Sx'bt,  the  heir,  tag  &bt,  the  inheritance  ; 

tcr  ©ci'fcl,  the  hostage,  tic   (Sci'fcf,  the  scourge  ; 

tic  SDlavf,  the  mark,  boundary,    tag  €0tarf,  the  marrow  ; 

tcr  SKeig,  the  rice,  tag  SHeig,  the  twig ; 

tet*  @ee,  the  lake,  tic   ©ee,  the  sea  ; 

tet*  ^tyor,  the  fool,  tag  SEfyor,  the  gate. 


§    2.    DECLENSION. 

In    many    cases,   a,  0,  and  n    are,    in  the  plural    number, 
changed   into  the  corresponding  vowels  ft,  e,   and  u  :  and  the 

2 


14  DECLENSION  OF  COMMON  NOUNS.        [BOOK  I. 

diphthong  au  into  the  corresponding  ail',  as,  %§&[,  valley, 
plur.  %fflkv,  valleys  ;  ©ofyn,  son,  plur.  ©ofy'UC,  sons  ;  33ru's 
&cr,  brother,  plur.  23nV&CV,  brothers ;  ^attS,  house,  plur. 
^dlt'fcr/  houses. 

The  endings  of  the  nominative  singular  are  various,  and 
cannot  be  brought  under  certain  rules. 

The  nominative,  genitive,  and  accusative  plural,  have  the 
same  ending  in  all  the  declensions,  and  are  distinguished  only 
by  the  article  ;  as,  fc»ic  35nYDCV,  the  brothers,  gen.  t>Cl*  23vu'Dev, 
of  the  brothers,  ace.  fcic  SSrft'fcet;  the  brothers. 

The  dative  plural,  in  all  the  declensions  of  nouns  and  ad- 
jectives, as  well  as  of  the  article,  ends  in  n;  ex.  %&n'bt,  dove, 
dot.  plur.   $au'ben ;  SDfanfel),   man,   dot.  plur.  SERen'fcfeen ; 

%$m,  animal,  dat.  plur.  Xtyl'XtW, 

All  those  nouns,  which  make  the  nominative  plural  in  n, 
or  en,  retain  the  same  termination  in  all  the  other  cases  of  the 
plural  number,  without  an  additional  it  in  the  dative  plural ; 
as,  ^aw'ben,  doves  ;  &ua'6en,   boys  ;  2ht'gCtt,  eyes. 

The  mode  of  declining  common  nouns  is  different  from  that 
of  nouns  proper. 


A.  Declension  of  Common  Nouns. 

The  principal  changes  of  termination  in  common  nouns, 
are  comprehended  under  three  declensions. 

The  characteristic  of  each  declension  is  the  genitive  case 
singular.  In  this  case  some  nouns  retain  the  ending  of  the 
nominative,  as,  &ic  95Ut'mc  the  flower,  gen.  Dcr  SSllt'mc,  of  the 
flower;  while  other  nouns  receive  an  additional  n,  as  t>Cl* 
&na'be,  the  boy,  gen.  t>CS  SCna'bcn,  of  the  boy  ;  and  others  take 
an  additional  $,  as,  fcaS  *C'bcn,  the  life,  gen.  bt$  ie'bentf,  of  the 
life. 


First  Declension. 

The  first  declension  comprehends  all  those  nouns  which 
remain  unchanged  in  the  genitive  singular. 

These  noun3  retain  the  termination  of  the  nominative 
through  all  the  cases  of  the  singular  number  ;  but  they  differ 
in  the  nominative  plural,  where  some  of  them  keep  the  ending 
of  the  singular,  as,  Die  fOlllt'UX,  the  mother,  nom.  plur.  Me 


PART  II.    CH.  2.]       DECLENSION  OF  COMMON  NOUNS.  15 

SOTiit'ter,  the  mothers  ;  while  others  add  e,  as,  Die  SSefora'nifi, 
the  apprehension,  nom.  plur.  Die  SScfotNJ'nifle,  the  apprehen- 
sions ;  others  U,  as,  Die  SBhl'tttC,  the  flower,  nom.  plur.  Die 
SBltl'meil,  the  flowers  ;  others  en,  as,  Die  gtatt,  the  lady,  nom. 
plur.  Die  grau'eu,  the  ladies ;  others  nen,  as,  Die  gveun'Din,  the 
female  friend,  nom.  plur.  Die  gmtn'Dinnen,  the  female  friends. 

Accordingly  the  first  declension  contains  only  one  form  of 
the  singular,  but  five  forms  of  the  plural  number. 

All  nouns  of  the  first  declension  are  feminine  ;  and  all  femi- 
nine nouns  belong  to  the  first  declension. 


Second   Declension. 

The  second  declension  comprehends  all  those  nouns  which 
form  the  genitive  singular  by  adding  to  the  nominative  a  final 
It,  cither  with  or  loithout  another  letter. 

If  these  nouns  in  the  nominative  singular  terminate  in  t, 
they  receive  only  an  additional  u  in  the  genitive,  as,  Dei* 
ftna'be,  the  boy,  gen.  DeS  fttta'ben,  of  the  boy  ;  but  if  they  end 
in  any  other  letter,  the  genitive  is  formed  by  adding  en  to  the 
nominative,  as,  Dei*  §el£,  the  rock,  gen.  DeS  gcl'fCtt/  of  the 
rock. 

With  the  exception  of  the  nominative  singular,  all  the  cases 
of  the  singular  and  plural  are  like  the  genitive  singular,  and 
therefore  always  end  in  en. 

Accordingly,  the  second  declension  comprehends  only  one 
form  of  the  plural,  but  two  forms  of  the  singular  number :  the 
genitive  singular  being  formed  by  the  addition  sometimes  of 
n,  and  sometimes  of  en. 

All  nouns  which  belong  to  the  second  declension  are  mascu- 
line ;  and  all  masculine  nouns  belong  either  to  this  or  to  the 
third  declension. 


Third   Declension. 

The  third  declension  contains  all  those  nouns  which  form 
the  genitive  singular  by  adding  to  the  nominative  a  final  6, 
either  with  or  without  other  letters. 

This  declension  comprehends  four  forms  of  the  singular, 
and  five  of  the  plural  number. 

Singular.     Some  nouns  receive  in  the  genitive  case  merely 


16  DECLENSION    OF    COMMON    NOUNS.  [BOOK  I. 

an  additional  $,  as,  t>n  333  an' t>  cm,  the  traveller,  gen.  fceS 
SJOBail'&em'S/  of  the  traveller  ;  others  C6,  as,  taS  spfevfc,  the 
horse,  gen.  DCS  spfcr'&CS,  of  the  horse;  others  \\$,  as,  t>er 
(gcfcanN,  the  thought,  gen.  U$  ©cDanf'CttS,  of  the  thought ; 
and  one  noun,  tul£  £evj;  the  heart,  makes  the  genitive  in  cn£, 
H&  #Zt!ym&,  of  the  heart. 

Plural.  Some  nouns  retain  the  termination  of  the  singular 
nominative,  as,  fcer  f2Ban/t>cm,/  nom.  plur.  tie  QOBan'fcCfCr ; 
other  nouns  add  C,  as,  &a$  spfcvb,  the  horse,  nom.  plur.  t>ie 
spfcr'&e ;  others  n,  as,  tier  ^e&attf'e,  the  thought,  nom. 
plur.  tic  ©cfcanf'cn;  others  en,  as,  t>ci'  @taat,  the  state, 
num.  plur.  tic  @tiUVteil ;  and  others  et*,  as,  M$  §clt>,  the  field, 
nom.  plur.  £)tC  ^cl'DCf. 

All  neuter  nouns  are  of  the  third  declension. 

The  following  table  exhibits  the  endings  of  nouns  in  each 
declension  in  all  the  cases  except  the  nominative  singular. 
The  different  declensions  are  marked  by  the  figures,  1,  2,  3: 
the  different  forms  of  the  singular  by  Roman  letters,  a,  b, 
c,  d,  and  those  of  the  plural  by  German  letters,  a,  b,  C,  t>   C. 


TABLE 


OF     THE 


DECLENSION  OF   GERMAN   COMMON   NOUNS 


2* 


O 

o 


o 
o 

W 
O 

fa 
O 

o 

I— I 

m 

O 

w 


• 


-    vj 

i>©    ** 


SQ 


O 

w 

O 
fa 
Q 

Eh 

QQ 

fa 


<fc. 


"*o 


Cb 


55    so 

•to 
E 


o     ♦ 


'-*       '—*       <^       '— r 


60       *      m    Cfj    *X>    <£> 


o 

*8    <- 
C/J       <W 

§  « 

co    ^jn 
C    8^ 

a   8 

•«.      SO 

•  p*»  ^^ 
8    £ 


W 

P< 

3 

< 


in        f<i  w<i  u<5  "Ct 
I       I       I       I 


>•*>  «  <*  <s  <s 
l    i     I     I 


Crf  c*  <^  <^ 

tt  S  £J  « 

►  ^  »  »  si  a 

i  i  i  i 

O^l      ■!_►  -t_>  <_»  -l_k 

*>          .«-.*—«-.  J5 

J?  ^^       £^  «-^  ^*  ^— • 

H                 *U*  O  <^»  C^ 

I  I  I  I 


<~*  <_.  <^.   '_^ 


o 
o 


c^    <»    <J»    c* 


t-»      «-»      <irf      c* 

%S3  «s  co  «a 


*<S  ^^i  <*S  »rs 

i    I    I    I 


i— ( 
m 


^>    *k    i-» 

^  ^>  >=»  ^ 


<s  <s  <s  « 

I    I    I    I 


^_    ^.    <_,    '^, 

H  S  H  H 
I    i    I    i 


'—r      <^       '_       •w. 

i    i    i    i 


j->  >*  j-  j-> 
^_,  ^^  -^  <_. 


v£2  w*^   ^^  w^* 


t*   u    s   o 
■«    A    /»    ^O 


fei  ci  ei  ^ 


< 

PS 

p 


02 

p 


^  tf  q  ^ 

«^     ^     '^*     <^     c^ 
*^     ^*     *^     ^* 

^*    «i»    <i*    «J#    ^» 

C^s:  «  8  « 

•£>*»•  ^»  s  <>* 

faD 

a 

QQ 


£;^      ^^    sg; 


O  <D  CD 

■5  ^3  ,£3 

■*->  -*j  -*j 

m  co  tw 

rt  cd  efl 


-a -5 


CO 


CO 


QQ 

03 


9p 
s 


e 

K 

s 


So 


55 

O 

i— i 

m 
fa 

fa 
Q 

Q 

O 

fa 

c72 


C  ' 

a 


"w        ^       C^ 

""C  ►'-'  ,"-*  ,,_* 


8 


02 

Ph 


-  a 


•«« 
8 

-8 

8P 


h— i1         '       ^      —      .—      <— ► 

Gx    ^>    *^    ^^    t^ 


i    i    i 


t*  ^  a  a 

C^    W    ^     ^-^ 
A*    A*    £*    6J 


o 


8 


PS 
< 

P 

o 

sz; 
t— * 

m 


■^     '~*     <-r 


e 

=8 


a 


a  a  a 


^^'C;^ 


^^q^i       ^c^'      Q 


st  st  st  st 

^,  '_,  -_,  -_, 


^  -^  <■*  *_ * 

!_i  r  i 


«^  *■*  S5  SS 

^  2  2  S 

o   ^   S   o 
•«-»   ^*  ^*  -<— . 

A  A  A  A 


< 

- 


St   St   St  St 

«•*     <•*     <-+     <-r 


«  st  e  st 


StfcH 


o 

st 


3 

.s 

§ 

Hi 


st  ^ 
o    *  o 

^    X  rt 


.1 

OS 


a^  at,  *- *-*  o-> 

O  J-i  C2  i—  ^*  •— ■» 

£     .   o  o  o   o 

I      I      I      I 


«»  C* 


02 

W 


3      ^<£^^^ 

co  ^>  ^  sj  "u> 

fS  «rf  «^  <S 

A   A  A   /j 


-_^    -_^     ■*--  -_, 

-   O  i_,  a_>  i»->  iJ-k 

*e°0           ♦""    *~*    JS  tS 

So  55-s  < 

2  A   AAA 

I    I    I  I 

*>    ~  ^ 


— 
e 


•.O  £>  i 


o  _Q    S3    S5   St    St 

I-  «V_*         *L-»  €*»  «*k 


'.^  '— • 


c0  eo&s&oeo 
i   i   i    i 


•  2"-  «°  sTJ  - 

<        .     }_►    V>     C     £* 

CO    **    <>*    <-»    <i» 
A   A   A   A 


o 

l-H 

x 


"O 


St   S  JC3 


•>!>    ^     — 

St    **    ~ 


02 

o 

I— c 

o 


^ 


m 
«3 


ctf 


2    m 

^  ^'  ci  ^' 


'^  '_     v»     --» 

•ii_»  ^u.   ii-  ^t* 

vO  vO  <A  ■'<■> 

I  I        I        I 


St   St   St   St 

•-.    '-,    ■-,    '-^ 

e^O  *^*C)  *■*©  ♦^iO 

"i*  !-►  l->  i* 

0^       '_»       '—*       '—r 

I    I    I    I 


'^.  '^-  '-^-     ^ 

>2-»  ^-  il->  4^ 

5  5  5  5 

r-.  r-.  /^.  r- 

i  i  i    i. 


o  «*  ««►  <>* 

/o    >o    /=,    /j 


'-^     '.^    '-^     ^> 

I    I    I    I 


ts^  *3j  '3;  rst> 

«*  ^  s  « 

6*AA 


.     •        •        • 

^  ^>   t>   st   ^ 

>_^  <i*    «*    5->    ^* 

iO    ~    =   s 

^^  64    w   6* 


^     ^  *■*     ^     *^    *^ 


s£»     «^     '-* 

05 

«« 

fe- 

— ^3  *j 

9 

st^ 

co    to 

tn 

■     •        •        *        • 


20  DECLENSION  OF  COMMON  NOUNS.         [BOOK  I. 


Observations  on  the  Jirst  Declension. 

1.  ft.  —  There  are  only  two  nouns  which  retain  in  the  nomina- 
tive plural  the  termination  of  the  singular,  viz.  %2l\\t'ttX, 
mother,  and  ^ocb'tiT,  daughter. 

1.  b. —  The  plural  in  C  occurs  particularly  in  those  words 
which  end  in  ft,  ft,  and  nig ;  as,  fttraft,  power  ;  ftmtft, 
art;  SSctl'ut'ttijJ,  sorrow. 

1.  C.  — The  plural  in  n  belongs  to  feminine  nouns  which  end 
in  e,  el,  and  er;  as,  Qtyve,  honor;  ^i'bel,  bible;  @d)n>ef; 
ter,  sister ;  plur.  (Styvm,  SSt'bcln,  @c()n>cftent. 

1.  t>.  —  The  plural  in  en  is  to  be  found  in  most  words  which 
end  in  ci  (ct)),  cut),  fyeit,  feit,  fdjftft,  ling,  It,  andl't;  as, 
gifdjerei',  fishery ;  £tt'fl|Cn&,  virtue  ;  gm'fycit,  freedom  ; 
(5'ttUgfrtt,  eternity;  gmm&'fdjftft,  friendship;  Wtung, 
esteem  ;  Q33clt,  world  ;  2tvt,  manner  ;  &,c. 

1.  e. —  The  plural  form  netl  is  peculiar  to  those  feminine 
nouns,  which  end  in  in,  and  have  the  accent  not  on  their 
final  syllable ;  as,  (Sat'tilt,  wife ;  $6  ttHtl,  lioness.  This 
form  was  originally  no  other  than  the  preceding  1.  t>.,  the 
nouns  in  in  being  formerly  written  with  final  tut/  as, 
(Bat'ttmt,  &c.  But  this  practice  of  doubling  the  it  in  the 
singular,  is  retained   by  few  modern  authors. 

Some  nouns  of  the  first  declension,  as,  grait,  lady; 
©Olt'lte,  sun ;  ©ee'fe,  soul  ;  gr'fce,  earth ;  are,  according 
to  an   old   usage,   still  sometimes  inflected  in  the  genitive 

singular,  as,  grftu'eit,  ©on'tten,  ©ee'Ien,  (Sv'&en. 


EXERCISES. 


To  the  actions,  J^anb'hmg. 

Of  the  Grecian  women,  (Srie'djilt. 

The  forks,  (Sft'bef. 

To  the  sciences,  QODtffenfdjaft. 

The  daughters,  ^octj'ter. 

Of  the  balls,  £n'ge(. 

To  the  pens,  ge'bev. 


Observations  on  the  Second  Declension. 

2.  a.  —  The  termination  of  the  genitive  in  n  is  common  ia 
masculine  nouns  which  end  in  e  ;  as,  bet  $6'tt>e,  the  lion ; 


PART  II.  CH.  2.]   DECLENSION  OF  COMMON  NOUNS.  21 

fc(T  55o'tC,  the  messenger.  The  names  of  nations  which 
end  in  C,  are  inflected  in  the  same  manner;  as,  fcCV  (Sfic'clK, 
the  Greek  ;  frcr  Scut'fcfoc,  the  German. 
2.  b.  — The  genitive  in  en  is  common  in  masculine  nouns  not 
ending  in  c;  as,  fccr  90?C.nfcl),  man;  fccv  23drr  the  bear.  In 
some  cases  euphony  demands  the  omission  of  the  C ;  as, 
t>Cf  £cfr,  the  master,  gen.  t>c£  JpclTlt. 

In  poetry  the  dative  and  accusative  singular  are  some- 
times formed  like  the  nominative ;  as,  t>cm  §efc/  and  Den 

gefe. 

Almost  all  the  nouns  of  this  declension    signify  living 
beings.     Exception,  t>cv  §cl£,  2.  b.  the  rock. 


Observations  on  the   Third  Declension. 

3.  a.  &  b.  —  It  depends  on  euphony  whether  the  genitive  sin- 
gular ends  in  &  or  c£.  Nouns  of  more  than  one  syllable, 
which  end  in  one  of  the  unaccented  syllables  cf,  Clt,  CV, 
and  (cin,  take  only  an  $ ;  as,  glu'gcf,  wing ;  SCKd&'cijcn, 
girl ;  SJa'tet,  father ;  SDTdnn'fetn,  little  man.  But  all 
those  nouns  of  the  third  declension  which  end  in  6  or  J, 
make  their  genitive  singular  in  C6 ;  as,  $Ko|3,  steed,  gen. 
SHef  fc£,  of  a  steed  ;  ©a£,  sentence,  gen.  @a§'c$/  of  a 
sentence.  Those  nouns  of  one  syllable  which  terminate 
in  any  other  letter,  make  their  genitive  singular  in  the  same 
manner,  by  adding  c£ ;  but  this  is  frequently  contracted 
into  $ ;  as,  Det  2Bc$,  the  way,  gen.  t>c6  ^Bc'gcS,  or  QQBcgS, 
of  the  way. 

These  rules  apply  also  to  some  proper  nouns ;  as,  2)c= 
ctmbtc,  3.  a.  a. ;  t>cr  9tl)cm,  3.  b.  6.,  the  Rhine. 

It  depends  on  euphony  whether  the  c  which  is  added  to 
nouns  of  the  second  form  of  the  singular  in  order  to  form 
the  dative  case,  be  omitted  or  retained.  Ex.  t>cm  (Sol'DC, 
or  (Bolt),  to  the  gold ;  bent  ©tnv'mc,  or  ©titvm,  to  the 
storm.  The  C  is  generally  omitted  when  the  noun,  pre- 
ceded by  a  preposition,  and  without  an  article  or  adjective 
or  pronoun  before  it,  is  used  in  a  general  and  indefinite 
signification,  in  the  place  of  an  adjective  or  an  adverb,  to 
express  either  the  material  of  which  a  thing  consists  or  the 
manner  in  which  something  is  performed.  Ex.  cin  Sting 
Von  (Soli),  a  ring  of  gold ;  mtt  @tnrm  cin'uctjmcn,  to  take 
by  storm.     But  if  the  noun  be  rendered  more  definite  by 


22  DECLENSION    OF    COMMON    NOUNS.  [BOOK    I. 

an  adjective  or  pronoun  before  it,  the  regular  ending  in  C  is 
used,  unless  euphony  should  require  its  omission,  par- 
ticularly for  the  purpose  of  avoiding  the  monotonous  re- 
currence of  the  same  sound.  Thus  we  say,  ciu  Sting  fcOlt 
fcic'fem  (Sol'be  or  Q5o(D,  a  ring  of  this  gold;  in  bem  Cf'jtcn 
©tttr/me  or  @tnnn,  in  the  first  storm. 

The  accusative  of  those  nouns  which  have  g  or  eg  in  the 
genitive,  is  always  like  the  nominative  case. 
3.  c.  —  The  addition  of  ng  in  the  genitive  is  peculiar  to  those 
nouns,  the  nominative  of  which  formerly  ended  in  en,  but  is 
now  commonly  spelled  without  the  final  n,  as,  gvie'be 
(gric'bcn),  peace ;  gunf'e  (gnnt'en,)  spark ;  gng'jtapfe 
(gttg'jtapfcn),  footstep;  (Stau'bc  (©lau'ben),  belief;  £an'fe 
(J^au'fen),   heap ;     sfta'me    (Sfta'men),    name ;     ©aa'mc 

(@aa'men),  seed  ;  @cl)a'be  (@ct)a'bcn)/  damage.  But  the 
old  termination  in  en  is  not  yet  entirely  out  of  use. 

Some  nouns  of  the  second  declension  are  sometimes, 
though  not  properly,  inflected  according  to  the  form  3.  c.  ; 
as,  bev  $M'bt,  the  boy,  gen.  U$  Stna'bcng ;  properly,  t»Cg 

£na'ben. 

If  the  genitive  is  formed  by  adding  ng  to  the  nomina- 
tive, the  dative  and  accusative  singular  always  end  in  en. 
3.  d.  —  The  substantive  £evj,  heart,  is  the  only  noun  which 
forms  its  genitive  by  adding  eng  to  the  nominative. 

The  nominative  formerly  was  bag  ^Cf'jC,  which  is  still 
used  in  poetry. 

^udj'jtab/  letter,  is  declined  either  according  to  3.  b.  b., 
or  according  to  3.  c.  C.,  and  in  this  case  the  nominative  is 

23ud)'|tabe. 

3.  a.  — The  nominative  plural  is  like  the  nominative  singular 
in  almost  all  those  nouns  masculine  and  neuter,  which  end 
in  el,  en,  ev,  and  lein;  as,  Rv  ©djluffef,  the  key;  MS 
SOtdt)  ct)CU,  the  girl ;  bet*  llljv'macljcv,  the  watchmaker;  bag 
gfdnlein,  the  young  lady. 

The  plural  form,  SQiab'riKW?,  gran'teing,  is  incorrect, 
though  sometimes  used  by  good  authors  in  derision  of  bad 
taste. 

3.  b.  —  The  addition  of  e  to  the  nominative  singular  is  the 
most  common  plural  form  of  nouns  of  the  third  declension  ; 
as,  bag  $f)ier,  the  animal;  bev  93aum,  the  tree;  ber 
©tein,  the  stone  ;  &c, 

3.  C.  —  All  those  nouns  which  make  their  genitive  singular  in 


J»ART  II.  CH.  2.]       DECLENSION    OF    COMMON    NOUNS.  23 

n£  (see  p.  21,  under  3.  c),  form  their  nominative  plural  by 
adding  U  to  the  nominative  singular. 

o  *—■* 

3.  t>.  —  There  are  comparatively  only  a  few  nouns  of  this  de- 
clension, which  form  their  plural  by  adding  en ;  as,  t>a£ 
SjWlt  tne  heart;  t>ct*  ©tviat,  the  state;  t>ev  @trat)l,  the 
ray  ;  Datf  01)1*/  the  ear. 

3.  e.  —  The  singular  of  those  nouns,  which  make  their  nom- 
inative plural  by  adding  et',  is  declined  according  to  the 
second  form  of  the  singular,  3.  b. ;  as,  fcev  ^Baft),  the 
wood,  gen.  sing,  t>c6  ^at'fcCS.  In  the  same  manner- are 
declined,  £lctb,  dress ;  (Belt),  money  ;  tiib,  body  ;  (&ti\\, 
spirit. 

The  nominative  plural  cannot  always  be  determined  by 
the  genitive  singular.  Ex.  &a$  Tlll'M,  3.  a.  C,  the  eye, 
gen.  sing.  t>c£  2Ui'geS,  nom.  plur.  l'\Z  Ztll'gcn. 

EXERCISES. 

The  travellers,  ^DBan'bercr. 
Of  the  footstep,  gnS'ftapfe. 
Of  the  swords,  SDc'gcn. 
Of  the  floweret,  SSlum'fcht. 
The  horses,  Spfevb. 
The  sparks,  gimf'e. 
Of  the  treasure,  @c()a§. 


Some  nouns  have  no  plural  number;  for  example,  many 
infinitives  which  are  used  as  substantives.  This  peculiarity 
is,  in  this  Grammar,  marked  by  omitting  the  German  letter  by 
which  the  form  of  the  plural  is  indicated ;  as,  t>a£  $ad)'cn,  3. 
a.,  the  laughing  ;  fcaS  QBci'lten,  3.  a.,  the  weeping. 

Other  nouns  have  no  singular.  This  peculiarity  is  marked 
by  omitting  the  Roman  letter  which  indicates  the  form  of  the 

singular;  as,  tk  2M'tcrn,  3.  C,  the  parents;  fcic  kll'tc,  3.  6./ 
people  ;  t>ie  ©elunV&cr,  3.  a.,  the  brothers. 

Some  nouns  have  two  plural  forms;  as,  t>a£  $ullt>,  3.  b.  6.  &> 
e.,  the  land,  nom. plur.  frie  Utl'be  and  t>ic  Sdll'fcCV,  the  lands; 
bi\$  (ScrcanD',  3.  b.  b,  &  c,  the  dress,  nom.  plur.  Die  ©ciiKvn'&C 
and  bie  (Scwdn'fcer,  the  dresses. 

The  compounds  of  Sftantt  (man)  change  SDiann  into  UWtt 
(people)  in  the  plural ;    as,  frcv  itUrt'nunU/  the  countryman, 


24 


DECLENSION  OF  COMMON    NOUNS. 


[BOOK  I. 


plur.  Die  JflnMctttC,  country  people ;  t»Ct*  gufyv'mamt,  the  wag- 
goner, plur.  Die  ^ufyr'kute.  So  form  the  plural  of  lie? evmann, 
husbandman;  (5'Dtimanu,  nobleman;  Jpaitpt'maun,  captain; 
SCaufmaun,  merchant.  But  the  plural  of  t>CL*  Qjfyemann,  the 
husband  or  married  man,  is  Die  (S^emannev,  the  husbands 
or  married  men  ;  (S'fyeleute,  means  married  people. 

In  some  nouns  the  different  formation  of  the  plural,  or  the 
change  of  a,  0,  XX,  into  a,  b,  and  u,  expresses  a  different  signi- 
fication ;  as, 


Singular. 


Plural. 


Dev   425anD,    the   volume,    or     t>ie  ^San'De,  the  volumes, 
binding. 


DaS  23anD,  the  ribbon. 
M$  35anD,  the  bond. 
Die  $5anF,  the  bench. 
Die  SBanf,  the  bank. 
Dei*  35au'CV,  the  peasant. 
DaS  S5au'Cf,  the  cage. 


Die  SSan'DCV,  the  ribbons. 

Die  SSan'&f/  the  bonds. 

Die  S5dnf'C/  the  benches. 

Die  SSanf'cU;  the  banks. 

Die  23au'evn,  the  peasants. 

Die  S5au'et*/  the  cashes. 


Der  950'geil/  the  sheet  of  paper.    Die  25ogCU,  the  sheets  of  paper. 


Dev  23o'geu,  the  bow. 
Da6  (Scfic()t',  the  vision. 
MS  ©cfidjt',  the  face. 
Dei*  ia'Den,  the  shutter. 
Dev  Ja'Dcn,  the  shop. 
Der  ©cl)tlD,  the  shield. 
&a£  @e()ilD,  the  sign. 
Det*  @tvatt6,  the  ostrich. 
Dev  <&tti\Xl$,  the  nosegay. 
Del*  $1)01*,  the  fool. 
Da$  %i)VV,  the  gate. 


Die  256'gcit/  the  bows. 

Die  (Scfictyte,  the  visions. 

Die  (Seficlytev,  the  faces. 

Die  id'DCtt,  the  shutters, 

Die  ia'btXX,  the  shops. 

Die  ©elril'DC,  the  shields. 

Die  ©clni'Dev,  the  signs. 

Die  ©tvaufen,  the  ostriches. 

Die  ©trau'fc,  the  nosegays. 

Die  'Jtyo'ven,  the  fools. 


Die  S^o'v,  the  gates. 

With  respect  to  those  common  nouns  which  are  derived 
from  foreign  languages,  the  following  particular  rules  are  to 
be  observed. 

These  nouns  either  retain  their  original  termination,  as, 
gif'CUS/  S^e'ttta,  5)0'fl$;  or  take  a  German  one.  This  is 
done,  either  by  retrenching  their  foreign  ending,  as  in  £VcevUi 
(oceanus),  ocean  ;  ©iplom'  (diploma) ;  or  by  transforming  it 
into  another  more  idiomatic  termination ;  as,  Die  SHc'gel  (reg- 
ula),  rule;  Die  ©l)l'bc  (syllaba),  syllable. 

The  rule  is,  —  that  all  those  foreign  common  nouns,  the 
endings  of  which  bear  a  similarity  to  German  nouns,  are  de- 
clined like  these,  in  the  regular  way.     Thus  : 


PART  II.  CH.  2.]       DECLENSION  OF    PROPER    NOUNS.  25 

1.  All  foreign  common  nouns  feminine  belong  to  the  first 
declension,  and  add  in  the  nominative  plural  either  U  or  CU ; 
as,  tikll'vic,  1.  C,  the  tune;  bit  gov'mef,  1.  C,  the   formula; 

&ic  spoeftc',  1.  t>.,  the  poetry;  t>ic  spevfon',  1.  b. ;  Die  Stqnt* 

biilt i  1.  0. ;  bt«  %X)K<mm',   I.   t>.,  the  tyranny. 

2.  Most  of  those  foreign  nouns  masculine  which  end  in  ant, 
(IV  d),  at,  Ct,  it,  and  Og,  are  of  the  second  declension,  2.  b. ; 
as,  %V)\xu\\\t',  spatviavd)',  Zttwocat',  Spoct',  ©vcmit',  ^colog/. 

3.  Most  of  the  foreign  nouns  neuter  or  masculine  which  end 
in  cv,  ti,  al,  an,  in,  on,  av,  at,  cm,  am,  amm,  cm,  ov,  belong 
to  the  third  declension;  as,  £t)avac'tcv,  3.  a.  t\;  (Tapt'tcl, 
3.  a.  a.,  chapter ;  spovtal',  3.  b.  b. ;  gapettan',  3.  b.  b.,  chap- 
lain;  Kamitt',  3.  b.  b.,  chimney;  spottilioiV,  3.  a.  b.  ;  (Srcm* 

plav',  3.  b.  b.,  specimen  ;  SDfoigijtvat',  3.  b.  b. ;  Sttabem',  3.  b. 
b.;  35al'fam,  3.  b.  b. ;  Spigvamm',  3.  b.  6. ;  Siplorn',  3.  b.  b. ; 
spvofcffov,  3.  a.  o. 

B.  Declension  of  Proper  Nouns. 

Proper  names  terminating  in  one  of  the  unaccented  sylla- 
bles as,  es,  is,  os,  or  wo,  such  as  S&ox'Hs,  Scv'ves,  (£  (is, 

21'tttOS,  Sopcv'niCUS,  do  not  change  their  termination  in  any 
case  of  the  singular  or  plural.  If  the  connexion  in  which 
they  occur  does  not  indicate  the  case  or  number  in  which  they 
are  used,  the  definite  article,  or  a  preposition  is  used  to  express 
the  relation  in  which  they  stand.  Ex.  $)<i$  ©rijtcm'  OCS  £o= 
pcv  lltCUS,  or  Don  Sopcv'lUCltS,  the  system  of  Copernicus;  t>aS 
(Scfdjlcdjf  Oev  23avtaS  (plur.),  the  family  of  (the)  Barcas. 

Most  proper  nouns,*  particularly  names  of  persons  and  coun- 
tries, are  declined  either  with  or  without  the  article  ;  and  this 
circumstance  has  an  influence  upon  the  declension  of  the 
singular  number. 

Singular.  If  the  proper  name  is  declined  with  the  definite 
or  indefinite  article,  the  article  alone  is  inflected,  the  noun 
itself  remaining  unaltered;  as,  per  @cl)le'gct,  gen.  PCS  @cl)(e's 
gel,  &c  ;  t>te  %n'm,  gen.  pcv  2ln'na,  &c;  cm  (Ea'to,  gen. 
ci 'lies  £a'to. 

If  proper  nouns  are  declined  without  the  article,  they  com- 
monly take,   in   the  genitive   singular,   an  additional  S  or  CS. 

*  Some  proper  nouns  are  declined  like  common  nouns. 
Page  20,  under  2.  a. ;  and  page  21,  under  3.  a.  &  b. 


26  DECLENSION  OF  PROPER  NOUNS.  [BOOK  I. 

In  some  nouns,  particularly  those  which  end  in  g,  g,  £,  fd),  £, 
and  feminines  in  e,  the  genitive  singular  is  formed  by  adding 
ett£  or  n$  to  the  nominative.     In  the  dative  and  accusative 
they  commonly  remain  unaltered,  or  take  n  or  Ctt. 

Singular. 

N.     @c()[c'ge[  2(n/iia           Seib'nifc  Ca'to 

G.     ©dtfc'gete  %\\'\\*$         ieib'nifcett*  Sa'tos 

n   (  @d)(e'gc(  or )  (  Ttn'.na  or  {  i ietb'nifc  or  >  ff  ,, 

■"•  i  ©cble'gcln    J  tfln'ncii    M  *eifc'ni§en  (  ^at0 

f  @d)(c'gcl  or )  (  2iu'na  or  i  (  icib'nifc  or  \  ~.. 

4  \  ©cfelc'gcfo    J  tfln'ncii    JUei6'm&en  f  eat0 

Uli'fc  and  other  nouns  in  e,  are  declined  like  $eib'ni§,  with- 
out an  additional  e  ;  as,  hti'fc,  gen.  htt'fCUS,  dat.  &  ace.  Sui'fe 

or  hti'fen. 

Even  the  genitive,  dative,  and  accusative  cases  of  those 
nouns  which  end  in  a  are  sometimes  formed  in  en£,  and  en, 
the  a  being  dropped :  as,  ^Dta'na,  gen.  Sta'naS  or  SM&'nCttS/ 
dat.  &  ace.  SMa'na  or  2)uVuen.  It  seems  better  not  to  change 
the  ending  of  the  noun  in  the  dative  and  accusative,  except 
for  the  sake  of  distinctness.  Thus  we  say,  CDTavi'C  faf)  iui'fe, 
Mary  saw  Louisa ;  but  if  the  order  of  the  nouns  be  inverted, 
we  say,  hti'fen  fal)  SITavi'e,  Mary  saw  Louisa. 

Names  of  countries  compounded  with  $ant>,  land,  or  SKeid), 
kingdom,  are  declined  only  in  the  genitive  case,  in  which  they 
take  an  additional  g  ;  as,  2)eutfd)'lant>$,  of  Germany  ;  gratify 
VCid)£,  of  France. 

Plural.  In  the  plural  number,  proper  names  are  generally 
declined  like  common  nouns,  whether  they  be  preceded  by 
the  article  or  not ;  sometimes  they  preserve  their  foreign  ter- 
mination entirely  or  in  part,  as, 

Plural. 

N.    Die  ©cfcfe'gel         2Ctt'nen       ieib'nige    j  zwm* } 

G.    t>er  @d)(e'get         Tfn'nm       Seib'ni&e    {  f  Jf^0* } 
D.    fcen  @d)(e'ge(n       Hn'nra       ieib'nigen     (Eato'nen 
A.    i>ie  ©dtfe'gef         lln'mn       *eib'ni|e    { |^nor } 

Observations.     I.   The  mode  of  declining  proper  nouns  with 


PART    II.  CH.  2.]       DECLENSION  OF  PROPER  NOUNS.  27 

the  article,  is  the  same,  whether  the  noun  stands  alone,  or  is 
preceded  by  an  adjective  or  pronoun. 

Accordingly  we  say,  Da6  SBcrDicnfV  SEBaffj'ingtonS,  the  merit 
of  Washington;  but  Das  SBcvfcicujV  Des  3Bafl?'ington,  or,  Des 
gro'fen  (of  the  great)  SXBafb'mjtfon:  and  Die  %)mt,bathxt 
iitat'aS,  the  gratitude  of  Mary;  but  tie  3)anf'barfcit  Dct* 
fvom'mcn  (of  the  pious)  SOlavi'a. 

If  the  name  of  a  person  is  immediately  preceded  by  a  com- 
mon noun,  expressing  the  office  or  character  of  that  person, 
the  proper  noun  alone  is  declined,  if  the  common  noun  is  not 
preceded  by  the  definite  article;  as,  ©oc'tor  granHinS  Qfrs 
fht'Dungett,  the  discoveries  of  Doctor  Franklin  ;  ^o'ltio,  i\\X>'; 
roigS  c£oD,  the  death  of  King  Louis  ;  but  if  the  definite  article 
precedes,  the  common  noun  is  declined,  and  the  proper  noun 
remains  unaltered;  as,  Dcr  ^oD  De£  fto'nigS  SttD'tttg ;  Die  (Si** 
ftn'Dungen  Dct?  2)oc'tov$  gvavd'lin.  The  same  is  true  of 
names  of  places,  towns,  or  countries,  being  used  without  the 
article  and  preceded  by  a  common  noun  which  serves  to  define 
the  proper  name  or  is  defined  by  it ;  as  Die  (Scfcl)ic()'te  DcS 
^o'nigieicftg  Stea'pcf,  the  history  of  the  kingdom  of  Naples. 

If  the  name  of  a  person  is  preceded  by  one  or  more  chris- 
tian names,  none  of  these  is  declined,  if  they  have  the  definite 
article  before  them  ;  as,  Die  @d)rif  ten  DeS  SiOtyamt'  3<L'M 
SRoilf  fCiltt,  the  works  of  John  Jaques  Rousseau :  but  when 
they  are  not  preceded  by  the  article,  the  family  name  of  the 
person  is  declined,  the  christian  names  remaining  unaltered  ; 
as,  ^oljamt'  Sfyriftopf)  2CDe(ung6  ©pradylcfyrc,  the  Grammar 
of  John  Christopher  Adelung. 

But  there  is  an  exception  to  this  rule,  when  the  family  name 
is  separated  from  the  christian  name  (or  names)  by  a  prepo- 
sition, particularly  by  V>0U  (being  commonly  the  mark  of  noble 
descent) :  in  this  case  the  christian  names  alone  are  inflected ; 
as,  Die  (SeDtdyte  £em'l*icf)6  fcon  OftevDingen,  the  poems  of 
Henry  of  Ofterdingen  ;  Dcr  Dp'fm<rt  Ztr'nolDS  ©tnttt' tjanS 
ben  3BinrvelrieD,  the  sacrifice  of  Arnold  Strutthan  of  Winkel- 
ried.  But  even  in  this  case,  if  the  genitive  precedes  the  sub- 
stantive by  which  it  is  governed,  the  family  name  alone  is 
inflected ;  as,  Sofycm'neS  UOU  SQiul'lcrS  SQBcv'f  C,  the  works  of 
John  of  Muller. 

II.  It  was  formerly  usuaj  to  decline  nouns  of  Roman  origin 
according  to  the  rules  of  the  Latin  Grammar  ;  but  this  mode 
of  declining  has  gone  out  of  use,  except  in  a  few  instances  ; 
as,  £l)vif  ti  (SebttVf,  the  birth,  of  Christ. 


28 


DECLENSION  OF  NOUNS. 


[BOOK  I. 


Promiscuous  Exercises  on  the  Declensions  of  Nouns. 

The  following  list  of  nouns  possesses  the  advantage  of  having 
the  gender  and  declension  marked,  the  former  by  the  let- 
ters, m.f.  »..,  and  the  latter  by  the  numbers,  1,  2,  3;  with 
the  different  forms  of  the  singular  and  the  plural  number, 
those  of  the  singular  being  denoted  by  Roman,  and  those  of 
the  plural  by  German  letters.  The  asterisk  (*)  prefixed  to 
a  noun  in  the  singular,  signifies  that  a,  0,  U,  are  in  the  plu- 
ral changed  into  d/  6/  U.  If  more  than  one  of  these  letters, 
or  any  one  of  them  more  than  once,  should  occur  in  the 
same  noun,  that  one  alone  is  changed  which  occurs  last ; 
as,  TlltAV',  plur.  '#ltate :  the  diphthong  Alt  excepted,  in 
which  the  a,  and  not  the  U,  is  changed,  whenever  an  aster- 
isk is  prefixed  to  the  noun. 


Of  the  eels, 

The  evening,  (Ace.) 

To  the  abbots, 

Of  the  field  or  acre, 

Of  the  fields, 

The  shoulders, 

Of  the  nobility, 

To  the  ape, 

To  the  apes, 

Of  the  altars, 

To  the  age, 

Of  the  antiquities, 

To  the  blackbirds, 

The  offices, 

The  ants, 

The  nurses, 

Of  the  devotion, 

The  preparations, 

To  the  replies, 


Tlai,  m.  3.  b.  b.  eel. 
21  bent)/  in.  3.  b.  b.  evening. 
*2lbt,  m.  3.  b.  b,  abbot. 
*%t'Ht,\  m-  3.  a.  a.  field  or  acre. 

2tc()'fef,/.  1.  C.  shoulder. 
21'fccl,  m.  3.  a.  nobility. 
if  fe,  m.  2.  a.  ape. 
........... 

*WW,  m.  3.  b.  k  altar. 
2U'tcr,  n.  3.  a.  a.  age. 
*2U/tevtfyum,  n.  3.  b.  e.  antiquity. 
%m'fd,f.  1.  C.  blackbird. 
*7lmt,  n.  3.  b.  c.  office. 
21'mcife,  /.  1.  C.  ant. 
%\\\'m,f.  1.  C.  nurse. 
%nfpQ$tff>  1-  devotion. 
7l\\'\1<\\t,f.  1.  t>.  preparation. 
ilnt'WOVt,/.  1.  t>.  reply. 


f  The  beginner  must  not  forget  that  the  asterisk  being  pre- 
fixed to  a  noun  signifies  that  a  change  of  vowels  takes  place 
only  when  the  noun  is  in  the  plural  number,  as,  of  the  acres, 
t>ev  Ztcf CV ;  but  not  when  it  is  the  singular  number,  as,  of  the 
acre,  t>e£  2fcfcr£. 


PART  II.  CH.  2.]  DECLENSION    OF   NOUNS. 


29 


Of  the  labors, 

To  the  eves, 

Of  the  oyster, 

The  brooks, 

The  path, 

Of  the  ball, 

To  the  ribbons, 

To  the  ideas, 

Of  the  mountain, 

To  the  bed, 

To  the  beds, 

Of  the  proofs, 

To  the  pictures, 

Of  the  pears, 

Of  the  flowers, 

To  the  letters, 

The  breasts, 

To  the  books, 

The  books, 

To  the  canals, 

To  the  cardinals, 

To  the  roofs, 

Of  the  badgers, 

The  dikes, 

To  the  thumbs, 

Of  the  swords, 

To  the  poets, 

To  the  villages, 

To  the  heirs, 

The  eggs, 

To  the  fables, 

Of  the  threads, 

Of  the  barrels, 

To  the  fists, 

Of  the  enemies, 

To  the  fields, 

Of  the  rocks, 

To  the  fetters, 

Of  the  plains, 

To  the  rivers, 

The  wives, 

Of  the  female  friends, 

To  the  feet, 


3* 


Tiv'UiUf.  1.  t>.  labor. 

siu'cic  n-  3. a-  f«  eye- 

lill'pt,  /.  1.  C.  oyster. 
*25aci)/  m.  3.  b.  b.  brook. 
25atju,/.  1-  &«  path. 
*25atl,  m.  3.  b.  b.  ball. 
*£5<Ulb/  n.  3.  b.  C.  ribbon. 

SScguMf'/ m-  3.  b-  &• idea- 
S5CVCJ,  m.  3.  b.  b.  mountain. 
s33ctt,  n.  3.  b.  t>.  bed. 

35eroei$'/  m.  3.  b.  b.  proof. 
25tlb/  n.  3.  b.  e.  picture. 
Vd'xxW/f.  1.  t>.  pear. 
251u'mc,/.  I.e.  flower. 
25ricf,  m.  3.  b.  b.  letter. 
*23nt|i,/.  1.  b.  breast. 
*25ucl),  n.  3.  b.  c.  book. 

*£ana(',  m.  3.  b.  b.  canal. 
*£av&iiival/,  m.  3.  b.  b.  cardinal. 
*S)ac(')/  n.  3.  b.  e.  roof. 
*3)acl)6,  m.  6.  b.  b.  badger. 
*3)amm,  m.  3.  b.  b.  dike. 
2)ati'mcu,  m.  3.  a.  a.  thumb. 
2)c'flcn,  m.  3.  a.  a.  sword. 
SDiciytcr,  m.  3.  a.  a.  poet. 
*2)orf,  n.  3.  b.  c.  village. 
(St'bc,  m.  2.  a.  heir. 
G£i,  n.  3.  b.  c.  egg. 

ga'bel,/  l.  c.  fable. 

*§a't»en,  w.  3.  a.  a.  thread. 
*§ilf$,  ».  3.  b.  c.  barrel. 
*§aufl,/.  1.  b.  fist, 
gtiut),  m.  3.  b.  b.  enemy. 
gcli>,  w.  3.  b.  c.  field. 
§c(«?,  «?.  2.  b.  rock, 
gcf'fcf,/.  1.  C.  fetter, 
glur,/.  1.  t).  plain. 
*§luf$,  m.  3.  b.  b.  river. 
grau,/.  1.  &.  wife, 
gxcun'fciu,/.  I.e.  (female) friend. 
*§U$,  m.  3.  b.  b.  foot. 


30 


DECLENSION    OF    NOUNS. 


[book  I. 


The  forks, 
The  geese, 
To  the  guest, 
The  prayers, 
Of  the  dangers, 
The  countries, 
The  spirits, 
Of  the  money, 
The  ghosts, 
To  the  conversation, 
To  the  limbs, 
The   gods, 
The  graves, 
Of  the  count, 
The  property, 
The  cocks, 
Of  the  -hands, 
Of  the  skins, 
Of  the  heroes, 
Of  the  master, 
To  the  wood, 
To  the  fowl, 
Of  the  hats, 
Of  the  islands, 
To  the  year, 
Of  the  Jew, 
Of  the  boy, 
To  the  calves, 
To  the  children, 
Of  the  churches, 
To  the  coats, 
The  cloisters, 
Of  the  buttons, 
To  the  heads, 
Of  the  salmon, 
To  the  countries, 
Of  the  burdens, 
To  the  holes. 


(Sa'btU  f.  1.  c.  fork. 
*(£an£,  f.l.b*  goose. 
*C8ft|t/   w.  3.  b.  b.  guest. 
(Scbct'/   n.  3.  b.  b.  prayer. 
©cfatyv'/  /.  1.  t>.  danger. 
©e'getlfc/  f.  1.  t>.  country. 
(£cijt,   m.  3.  b.  e.  spirit. 
(Sell),   n.  3.  b.  e.  money. 
(Sefpenff,  n.  3.  b.  e,  ghost. 
(Sefpvdd)',  n.  3.b.b.  conversation. 
CBliefc/  n.  3.  b.  e.  limb. 
*<8ott,  m.  3.  b.  c.  God. 
*©fab/  n.  3.  b.  c.  grave. 
(Sl*af,  m.  2.  b.  count. 
*@5ltt,  rc.  3.  b.  C.  property. 
*£afyn,  »».  3.  b.  b.  cock. 
*£aut>,/.  1.  b.  hand. 
*J?aut,  /.  1.  b.  skin. 
Jxll),  m-  2.  b.  hero. 
JfpClT,   m.  2.  b.  master. 
*£o(j,  n.  3.  b.  e.  wood. 
*J?Ut)tt,  w.  3.  b.  C.  fowl. 
*jj?Ut,  m.  3.  b.  b.  hat. 
Stt'fef,  /.  1.  C.  island. 
3<tljt:,  w-  3.  b.  b.  year. 
^U'fce,  ro.  2.  a.  Jew. 
3un<j'e,  »i.  2.  a.  boy. 
*£alb,  n.  3.  b.  e.  calf. 
£mt>,  n.  3.  b.  e.  child, 
ft'tv'cbe,  /.  1.  C.  churcn. 
£(eit>,  rc.  3.  b.  e.  coat. 
*&lo'|Uv,  n.  3.  a.  a.  cloister. 
*Sfrtopf,  wi.  3.  b.  b.  button. 
*kopf,  w.  3.  b.  b.  head. 
$ad)6,  m.  3.  b.  b.  salmon. 
*$anfc/  n.  3.  b.  b.  &  C.t  country, 
iftjt/,/".  1.  t>.  burden. 
**od),  ?i.  3.  b.  e.  hole. 


f  The  a  in  $ant>  is  changed  into  d,   and  the  £>  in  Ott  into 

£>  (in  the  plural  number),  only  when  these  nouns  are  declined 
according  to  3.  b.  e. ;  but  they  preserve  their  original  vowels, 
when  declined  according  to  3.  b.  b. 


PART  II.  CH.  2.]  DECLENSION  OF  NOUNS. 


31 


Of  the  maids, 

To  the  almonds, 

Of  the  mice, 

Of  the  mothers, 

To  the  nightingales, 

Of  the  fools, 

The  nuts, 

Of  the  places, 

To  the  popes, 

Of  the  path, 

The  plants, 

Of  the  jaw, 

The  borders, 

Of  the  rank, 

The  spaces, 

The  riches, 

To  the  judge, 

To  the  juices, 

To  the  songstresses, 

The  troops, 

Of  the  shadow, 

The  treasures, 

To  the  ships, 

The  shields, 

To  the  serpents, 

The  castles, 

The  debts, 

The  swallows, 

Of  the  soldier, 

Of  the  looking-glass, 

The  storks, 
The  stockings, 
Of  the  actions, 
To  the  daughters, 
To  the  dreams, 
The  cloths, 
Of  the  virtues, 
Of  the  watches, 
The  nations, 
To  the  forests, 


ii 


SDTagt),  /.  1.  b.  maid. 
SDton'&ef,  /.  1.  C.  almond. 
*99?au$,/.  1.  b.  mouse. 
*SJtot'tev,  /.  1.  a.  mother. 
DTadytigatt,  /.  1. 1>.  nightingale. 
Statt,  m.  2.  b.  fool. 
*SJlug,  /.  1.  fc.  nut. 
*£)rt,  m.  3.  b.  b.  &l  C.t  place. 
*spap|t,  m.  3.  b.  b.  pope. 
SPfat),  m.  3.  b.  b.  path. 
SPffon'je,/.  1.  C.  plant. 
$tad}'en,  m.  3.  a.  a.  jaw. 
*9tant>,  m.  3.  b.  e.  border. 
SHattg,  m.  3.  b.  rank. 
*3ftaum/  m.  3.  b.  b.  space. 
*SHcic()'t^um/  m.  3.  b.  e.  riches. 
dti&yttv,  m.  3.  a.  a.  judge. 
*©aft,  m.  3.  b.  b.  juice, 
©anjj'evin,/.  1.  C.  songstress. 

©djaar,/.  1. t>.  troop. 

©djat'tcn,  m.  3.  a.  a.  shadow. 
*©d)a£,  m.  3.  b.  b.  treasure. 
@d)iff,  w.  3.  b.  b.  ship. 
@cl)ilt>,  m.  3.  b.  b.  shield, 
©djfang'e,/.  1.  c.  serpent. 
*©d}Io|3,  ?i.  3.  b.  c.  castle. 
@d)ul&,/.  1.  &.  debt, 
©dntnafbc,/.  1.  c.  swallow. 
<£?olt>at',  m.  2.  b.  soldier, 
©ptegct,   w».   3.   a.  a.  looking- 
glass. 
*©tord),  m.  3.  b.  b.  stork. 
*©ti*imipf,  w*.  3.  b.  b.  stocking. 
^tyxtff.  1.  t>.  action. 
*^od)'ter,/.  1.  0.  daughter. 
*%VCmm,  m.  3.  b.  b.  dream. 
^ud),  n.  3.  b.  c.  cloth. 
Itt'geilt,/.  ].  t>.  virtue. 
Ut)V,f.  1.  t>.  watch. 
*35otf,  w.  3.  b.  e.  nation. 
*3B«fo,  m.  3.  b.  c.  forest. 


f  See  note  on  preceding  page. 


32 


RECAPITULATORY     EXERCISES. 


[BOOK  I. 


Of  the  walls, 
Of  the  women, 
Of  the  worlds, 
Of  the  wind, 
The  wishes, 
The  worms, 
Of  the  numbers, 
To  the  tooth, 
To  the  times, 
To  the  tents, 
Of  the  circle, 
The  tolls, 
The  aims, 
Of  the  onion, 

Of  Catherine, 

Of  the  Hague, 

Of  Huss, 

Of  the  Indies, 

To  the  Netherlands, 

Of  the  Sibyl, 


*2DanD,/  1.  6.  wall. 

^tib,  n.  3.  b.  e.  woman. 
SBelt,/.  1.  D.  world. 
^tnD,  m.  3.  b.  6,  wind. 
*2Bunfd7\  m.  3.  b.  b.  wish. 
*3£uvm,  m.  3.  b.  e.  worm. 
$<xtyl,f.  1.  D.  number. 
*£al)n,  m.  3.  b.  b.  tooth. 
jScit,/.  1.  D.  time. 
j3c(t,  n,  3.  b.  b.  tent. 
jJiv'M,  m.  3.  a.  a.  circle. 
*3oil,  m.  3.  b.  b.  toll. 
jBroctf,  m.  3.  b.  b.  aim. 
SttW'fccl,/.  1.  c.  onion. 

^atfyavi'na,  Catherine. 

£>Cf  £aag,  the  Hague. 

£tt£,  Huss. 

3u'Dien,  n.  India. 

SDtC  STie'DcrlanDC,  the  Neth- 
erlands. 

©tool'If,  Sibyl. 


Recapitulatory  Exercises. 

Sic  S336^cf  fltc'gcn  in  Dev  fafc 

£>ie  gifciye  fcfjimrn'men  in  Dcm  QQBaffetr. 

2)ie  33ldt'tcr  fdu'feln  in  tern  SBin'De. 

3)ie  ©cljmet'rerftnge  flat'teni  urn  tie  25fa'men. 

£>tc  25tc'ncn  fam'mefa  J^o'nig  Don  Den  SSfa'men  unD  tva'gen 
ifyn  nacl)  Den  SSie'nentfafccn  fur  tfy've  jSef'len. 

2)ie  ©per'iinge  Ic  fen  £afme  auf  unD  bau'm  Stefter  fur 
ify're  S3rut. 

3>ie  Sn'genD  ifl  Die  griifj'ftngtfjeic  Dc6  ie'ben^. 


*25o'ge(,  m.  3.  a.  a.  bird. 

jtte'gen,  fly. 

in,  in.  (Bat.) 
*iuft,f.  1.  b.  air. 
gifct),  m.  3.  b.  b.  fish. 

fcfcnum'men,  swim. 
Gaffer,  n.  3.  a.  a.  water. 
*23fott,  w.  3.  b.  e,  leaf. 


fdu'fefa,  rustle. 
^BinD,  m.  3.  b.  {\  wind, 
©clnnet'tcrltng,    m.    3. 
butterfly. 

ftat'tent,  flutter. 

Um,   about.  (Ace.) 
33 fame,/.  1.  c.  flower. 
fBie'ne,/.  1.  c.  bee. 


b.    6. 


PART  II.  CH.  2.]   RECAPITULATORY  EXERCISES.  33 

fanVmelu,  collect.  ©pcv'liug,  m.  3.  b.  b.  sparrow. 

^O'uig,  m.  3.  b.  b.  honey.  le'feit-auf,   pickup, 

fcon,  from.  (Bat.)  Jpalm,  m.  3.  b.  b.  straw. 

ttnt>,  and.  bau'cn,  build, 

tva'gen,   carry.  9tc|t,  ?*.  3.  b.  e» 

tfjtt,  it.  S3vut,  /.  1.  brood, 

nacb,  to.  (Dot.)  tue  Su'gcnD,/.  1.  youth. 

•SSie'ncnforb,  wi.  3.  b.  b.  bee-   ift,  is. 

hive.  Svulj'IingSjeit,  /.  1.  b.   spring- 

fuv,  for.  (Ace.)  time. 

tfy're,   their.  t>a£  k'bcit,   ».  3.  a.  a.  life. 
3el1c,/.  1.  C.  cell. 


The  hen  sees  the  kite  in  the  air,  and  gathers  her  chickens 
under  her  wings. 

Fire  has  its  uses  and  its  dangers  ;  we  call  it  a  good  servant, 
but   a  cruel   master. 

The  Thebans,  under  the  command  of  Pelopidas  and  Epami- 
nondas,  freed  themselves  from  the  yoke  of  the  Spartans. 

By  a  sloop  we  understand  a  boat  with  one  mast,  and  four  or 
five  sails. 

Truth  triumphs  over  superstition  and  skepticism,  by  means 
of  investigation  and  reflection. 

The  whole  earth  appears,  to  the  philanthropist,  as  one  fam- 
ily mansion. 

hen,  J^cn'nc,/.  1.  c.  we,  nut\ 

sees,  ftet)t.  call,  nen'nen. 

kite,  (Sei'cv,  m.  3.  a.  a.  it,  c$. 

in,  in.  (Dat.)  good,  gu'tcn. 

air,  *iuft,  f.  1.  L\  servant,  SMe'ner,  m.  3.  a.  0. 

and,  ttnb.  but,  a'ber. 

gathers,  foerfam'meft.  cruel,  grau'famen. 

her,  itf'tt,  master,  QtXX,  m.  2.  a. 

chickens,  £ud)'[ettt,  n.  3.  a.  a.    Theban,  ^bctnVnetr,  m.  3.  a.  0. 

under,  tui'tcr,  (Dat.)  command,  iftt'fufyntUg,  /.  1. 

her,  ifyttn.  of,  def.  art.  sing. 

wing,  glu'gel,  m.  3.  a.  0.  freed,  bcfvet'teu. 

fire,  ba£  gcu'ey,  n.  3.  a.  a.  themselves,  ftd). 

has,  t)<Xt  from,  fcon.  (Dat.) 

its,  fet'ne.  yoke,  ^ocb,  n.  3.  b.  b. 

use,  ^or'tfyeif,  m.  3.  b.  b.  Spartan,  ©pavta'uer,  m.  3.  a.  0. 

danger,  ©efafjv',  /.  1.  D.  by,  uu'ter.  f-Da*.,) 


34                                                      ADJECTIVES.  [BOOK  I. 

sloop,  ©djafap'pe,/.  1.  C.  by  means,  mit  feet*  Jpftl'fc. 

we  understand,  tov\Wt}tn  ttUt.  of,  fcou.  (Dat.) 

boat,  gafyr'jeug,  w.  3.  b.  6.  investigation,  Untevfu'djung, 

with,  mit.  (Dat.)  f.  1.  t>. 

one,  ei'nem.  reflection,  9tad)'t>enfrn,  /i.  3.  a. 

mast,  S0?a|t,  w*.  3.  b.  fc.  whole,  gan'jf. 

four,  Diet:.  earth,  (Ev'&e,  /.  1.  c. 

or,   o'fcet*.  appears,  erfefoeint'. 

five,  fftttf.  to,  (Dat.) 

sail,  @e'gef,  rc.  3.  a.  a.  philanthropist,           £D?en'fd)en= 

truth,  t>ie  QODafyv'fyeit,/.  1. t>.  fmmt>,  *».  3.  b.  6. 

triumphs,  triumph  iff.  as,  afc. 

over,  u'bei*.  (Ace.)  one,  Sin. 

superstition,  WbtV&liMlbt,  m.  family     mansion,       *@tamm's 

3.  c.  fyau£,  n.  3.  b.  e» 
skepticism,  ^rcei'feffucljt,/.  1. 


CHAPTER  III. 

ADJECTIVES. 

The  Adjective  appears  in  its  simple  or  adverbial  form,  when 
its  termination  is  not  affected  by  gender  or  declension ;  as, 
2)ie  33fu:'gcv,  gut  UUt>  frei,  The  citizens,  good  and  free. 

§  1.    DECLENSION    OF    ADJECTIVES. 

Adjectives  are  declined  by  adding  certain  letters  to  their 
simple  form. 

For  the  use  of  the  simple  and  the  declinable  forms  see  Book 
II.  Chapter  3.  §  1.  Rules  i.  n.  and  m. 

Every  adjective  is  declined  in  three  different  forms. 

First  Declension. 

Adjectives  are  inflected  according  to  the  first  declension, 
when  they  are  not  preceded  by  an  article  or  a  pronoun.  The 
form  of  this  declension  is  nearly  like  that  of  the  article,  t>Cl*, 
fcie,  fca£.  The  adjective  gut,  good,  for  example,  is  thus 
declined  : 


PART  II.  CH.  3.]       DECLENSION    OF    ADJECTIVES.  35 

Singular. 

Masc.  Fern.  Neut. 

N.    gu'ter,  gu'te,  gu'teg,  good. 

G.    gu'tes,  or  gu'teu'*  gu'ter,  gu'tetf,  or  gu'teu,*  of  good. 

i>.   gu'tem,  gu'ter,  gu'tem,  to  good. 

A.   gu'teu,  gu'te,  gu'tes,  good. 

Plural  for  the  three  genders. 

gu'te,  good, 

gu'ter,  of  good, 

gu'teu,  to  good, 

gu'te,  good. 

The  following  is  an  example  of  an  adjective  in  the  first  de- 
clension, as  joined  to  nouns  of  different  genders  : 

Singular. 

Masc. 

N.     gu'ter  'vXBciu,  good  wine. 

G.    gu'teu  or  gu'tes  3£ei'ue$,  of  good  wine. 

D.    gu'tem  (2Dei/ne,  to  good  wine. 

A.     gu'teu  3Bettt,  good  wine. 

N.  gu'te  grucfjt,  good  fruit. 

G.  gu'ter  gruel)  t,  of  good  fruit. 

D.  gu'ter  grucfjt,  to  good  fruit. 

A.  gu'te  grudjt,  good  fruit. 

Neut. 

N.  gu'tetf  95ro&,  good  bread. 

(r.  gu'tes  or  gu'teu  35ro'&e$,  of  good  bread. 

D.  gu'tem  35ro&e,  to  good  bread. 

A.  gu'tem  S5ro&,  good  bread. 

Plural  for  the   three  genders. 

N.  gu'te   <2Dei/ne,    grucvVte,  23rot>e,    good  wines,  fruits, 

G.  gu'ter  <2Bei'ue,    grucfj'te,  SSro'&e,    of  good,  &c.  [loaves. 

D.  gu'teu  SOBci'ueit,  gruct'teu,  SBro'&eu,  to  good,  &c. 

A.  gu'te    QODei'ue,   gnWte,  33ro't>e,  good,  &c. 

So  decline  gro'fer  *9Dftontt,  3.  b.  e.,  great  man ;  toatytt  @e* 
f(t)tc()'te,  1.  C.,  true  history ;  Ue'beS  ftiuD,  3.  b.  e.,  dear  child. 

*  The  use   of  the   one  or  the  other  of  these  two   forms 
(gu'tem,   gu'teu,)  depends  on  euphony  alone. 


36  DECLENSION   OF    ADJECTIVES.  [BOOK  I. 

Second   Declension. 

Adjectives  are  inflected  according  to  the  second  declension, 
when  they  are  preceded  by  the  definite  article,  Der,  Die,  $>&$  ; 
or  by  a  demonstrative  or  relative  pronoun ;  as,  Die'fer,  this ; 
je'ltev,  that;  Der'jenige,  that;  Derfef'fce,  the  same;  ml'tfwx, 
who  :  or  by  the  indefinite  pronouns,  je'Der,  jeg'ltdKV,  jeD'tt>eDer, 
every,  (the  last  three  having  no  plural.)     Ex. 

Singular. 
Masc.  Fern.  Ncut. 

N.  Der  gu'te,  fete  gu'te,  b<\$  gu'te,  the  good. 

G.  Des  gu'ten,  Der  gu'ten,  Des  gu'tcn,  of  the  good. 

D.  Dem  gu'ten,  Der  gu'ten,  Dem  gu'ten,  to  the  good. 

A.  t>en  gu'ten,  Die  gu'te,  Das  gu'te,  the  good. 

Plural,  for  the  three  genders. 

N.  Die  gu'ten,  the  good. 

G.  Der  gu'ten,  of  the  good. 

D.  Den  gu'ten,  to  the  good. 

A.  Die  gu'ten,  the  good. 

2)et*  gu'te,  with  a  masculine  noun,  is  thus  declined  : 

Singular. 

N.  Der  gu'te  SDfann,  the  good  man. 

G.  DeS  gu'ten  SDTau'neS,  of  the  good  man. 

2>.  Dem  gu'ten  SOTan'ne,  to  the  good  man. 

A.  ten  gu'ten  50Zann,  the  good  man. 

2)ie  gu'te,  with  a  feminine  noun,  is  thus  declined  : 

Singular. 

N.  Die  gu'te  §rau,  the  good  woman. 

G.  Der  gu'tcn  $va\lf  of  the  good  woman. 

D.  Der  gu'ten  gran,  to  the  good  woman. 

A.  Die  gu'te  grau,  the  good  woman. 

2)a£  gu'te,  with  a  neuter  noun,  is  thus  declined  : 

Singular. 

N.  DaS  gu'te  QOBerf,  the  good  work. 

G.  DeS  gu'ten  9Ber'frg,  of  the  good  work. 

D.  Dem  gu'ten  ^cr'f  e,  to  the  good  work. 

A.  Das  gu'te  QBerf,  the  good  work. 


PART  II.  CH.  3.]       DECLENSION  OF  ADJECTIVES.  37 

Plural  for  the  three  genders. 

N.  tie  gu'ten  93?dn'uev,  gvau'en,  QOBev'fe, 

the  good     men  women,    works. 

G.  t>er  gu'ten  SDTdn'ner,  grau'eu,  <3Bcv/fc,  of  the  good,  &c. 
D.  t>en  gu'ten  SDTdn'ncrn,  grau'eu,  IBer'feu,  to  the  good,  &c 
^4.  Die  gu'ten  SDTdn'ner,    grau'en,  333ev  te,   the  good,  &c. 

So  decline,  t»Ct*  ffet'ne  Snb'U,  2.  a.,  the  little  boy ;  tue  Htt'ge 
grait,  1.  t>.,  the  prudent  woman  ;  M$  Uu'nt  93?dt>'c()en,  3.  a. 
0.,  the  little  girl. 

* 

Third   Declension. 

Adjectives  are  inflected  according  to  the  third  declension, 
when  they  are  preceded  by  the  indefinite  article,  cilt,  ei'UC,  Ctn ; 
or  by  a  personal  or  a  possessive  pronoun,  as,  id),  I ;  Ml,  thou  ; 
(V,  he,  &,c. ;  mein,  mine ;  fccin,  thine  ;  fein,  his,  &c,  or  the 
indefinite  pronoun  hill,  none.  This  declension  is  like  the 
first  in  the  accusative  and  nominative  singular,  and  like  the 
second  in  the  genitive  and  dative  singular  and  in  all  the  cases 
of  the  plural. 

The  declension  is  as  follows  : 

Singular. 

Masc.  Fern.  Neut. 

N.  mein  gu'ter,       mei'ne  gu'te,  mein  gu'tes,     my  good. 

G.  tnei'nes  gu'ten,  mei'ner.  gu'ten,  met'nes  gu'ten,  of  my  good. 

D.  mei'nem  gu'ten,  mei'ner  gu'ten,  mei'nem  gu'ten,  to  my  good. 

A.  met'nen  gu'ten,  mei'ne  gu'te,  mein  gu'tes,      my  good. 

Plural  for  the  three  genders. 

N.  mei'ne  gu'ten,  my  good, 

G.  mei'ner  gu'ten,  of  my  good. 

D.  met'nen  gu'ten,  to  my  good. 

A.  xmi'm  gu'ten,  my  good. 

CDtein  gu'tev,  with  a  masculine  noun,  is  thus  declined  : 

Singular. 

N.  mein  gu'ter  23nt'fcer,  my  good  brother. 

G.   mei'ueg  gu'ten  ^ru'fcert?,  of  my  good  brother. 

D.  mei'nem  gu'ten  33vu'fccr,  to  my  good  brother. 

A.  met'nen  gu'ten  23vu't>ev,  my  good  brother. 
4 


38  DECLENSION  OF    ADJECTIVES.  [BOOK  I. 

SDTci'tte  gn'te,  with  a  feminine  noun,  is  thus  declined  : 

Singular. 

N.  mei'ne  gn'te  ©cfrwef'tet,  my  good  sister. 

G.  mei'net*  gn'ten  ©clwcf  tev,  of  my  good  sister. 

D.  met'nev  gn'ten  ©cljrocf'tcr,  to  my  good  sister. 

-4.  mei'ne  gn'te  ©cljrocf'tCV,  my  good  sister. 

£D?ciu   gtl'teS/  with  a  neuter  noun,  is  thus  declined  : 

N.   mcitt  gll'teS  £illt>,  my  good  child. 

G.   mct'HCS  gn'ten  fttn'beS,      of  my  good  child. 

Z>.  mct'nem  gn'ten  ft'in'fce,      to  my  good  child. 
A.  metn  gn'tes  ftinfc,  my  good  child. 

Plural  for  the  three  genders. 

N.  mei'ne  gn'ten  25nVt>er,    ©djroef'tcnt,  £in't>ei*, 

my        good     brothers,     sisters,  children. 

G.  mei'nev  gn'ten  2$nV&ev,  ©cftrcef  tent,  £in't>cr,  of  my,  &c. 
D.  mei'nen  gn'ten  SSnVfccnt,  ©ctjraeftern,  £tn't>evn,  tomy,&c. 
A.  mei'ne   gn'ten  25nV&er,    ©cftrcef'tern,  ftin'fcev,    my,  &c. 

So  decline,  ein  roei'fev  *93tami,  3.  b.  e.,  a  wise  man  ;  ei'ne 
fcl)6'nc  gvau,  1.  t>.,  a  fair  lady  ;  ein  Hti'MG  JpanS,  3.  b.  e.,  a 
small  house  ;  fcet'ne  tVCtt'C  grcun'&tn,  1.  e.,  thy  faithful  (female) 
friend. 

The  following  table  exhibits  the  terminations  of  the  adjec- 
tives, according  to  the  three  declensions. 


First  Declension,  like  gu'tet*. 

SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

Nom. 

er 

C 

eg 

e 

Gen. 

e^  or  en 

er 

eg  or  en 

ev- 

Dat. 

em 

er 

em 

en 

Ace. 

en 

e 

eg 

e 

Second  Declension,  like  fcer  gll'te. 

SINGULAR. 

PLURAL 

Masc. 

jPem. 

Neut. 

en 

Nom. 

e 

e 

c 

Gen. 

en 

en 

en 

en 

Dat. 

en 

en                en 

en 

Ace. 

en 

«     1     ' 

en 

Third  Declension,  like  mcin  gn'ter. 

SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

Nom. 

ev- 

e 

eg 

en 

Gen. 

en 

en 

en 

en 

Dat. 

en 

en 

en 

en 

Ace. 

1         en 

e 

eg 

en 

40  DECLENSION    OF    ADJECTIVES.  [BOOK  I. 

Promiscuous  Exercises  on  the  Adjectives  and  Nouns. 

Of  the  fine  children. 

To  a  fine  child. 

Of  happy  days. 

Of  good  men. 

The  ignorant  people. 

The  liquid  air. 

The  industrious  maid. 

An  easy  work. 

Of  hard  labor. 

My  frugal  meal. 

Tall  firs. 

Of  the  hard  oak. 

A  shady  elm. 

Of  hard  iron. 

The  early  lark. 

An  unknown  land. 

Of  the  Trojan  hero. 

Of  civilized  Europe. 

Free  America. 

To  the  fiery  Hecla. 

Of  the  fair  Helen. 

The  chaste  Diana. 

The  geographical  miles. 

Terrible  thunder. 

The  Olympic  games. 

Of  distant  valleys. 

Of  fine  flowers. 

To  my  pious  father. 

To  fresh  butter. 

To  a  red  coat. 

Black  bread. 

Observation  I.  When  several  adjectives  are,  one  after 
another,  joined  to  the  same  substantive,  they  are  generally 
declined  as  each  of  them  would  be,  if  it  stood  alone,  according 
to  the  above  rules.  Thus,  in  the  example,  mcin  gu'tcr  al'cer 
gTCUUD,  my  good  old  friend,  both  adjectives,  gu'tCl*  and  ai'UV, 
are  inflected  according  to  the  third  declension ;  in  oie  rrcit'C 
jdrt'ltelK  SDfatt'tcr,  the  faithful,  tender  mother,  both  adjectives 
are  inflected  according  to  the  second  declension  ;  only  when 
adjectives   are  put   together    without  being  preceded    by    an 


fcl)5tt. 

£iut>,  n.  3.  b.  e. 

gtftcf'lid). 

$ag,  m.  3.  b.  b. 

gut 

*2D?ann,  m.  3.  b.  e. 

xm'w  tjfcno. 

itu'te,  m.  3.  b. 

Pffig. 

**ufc,  /.  1.  b. 

jlei'fig. 

•saragD,  /.  i.  &. 

leicl)t. 

lix'beit,  f.  1.  *. 

fcljroer. 
fpav'fam. 

SDiafjCjctf,  /.  1.  &. 

erfya'bcit. 

giclyte, /.  1.  c. 

fyart. 

ei'cfee,  /.  1.  c. 

f&)<\t'ti$. 

XM'm,  f.  1.  c. 

(javfc 

(Ei'fcn,  n.  3.  a.  a. 

frul). 

kv'd)e,  f.  1.  c 

tm'fceftmnt. 

**an&,  n.  3.  b.  b.  &  e 

troja'nifcfj. 

Jjpcfb,  »».  2.  b. 

geftt'tet. 

(Suro'pa,  n. 

fret. 

^mc'nr'a,  n. 

feu'stg. 

J£cHa,  m. 

fctjen. 

%t'imb,f. 

fcufd). 

SMa'na,  /. 

gcogva'pfyifd). 

mti'U,/.  j.  c. 

fdjrctf'ttcl). 

©on'ncr,  ™.  3.  a.  a. 

oli;m'pifc(). 

©picl,  w.  3.  b.  b. 

cnrfmtt'. 

*Xt)<tl,  n.  3.  b.  c. 

fit  on. 

231u'me, /.  1.  c. 

fro  mm. 

*33a'tcr,  »i.  3.  a.  a. 

frifefc 

SSut'tcv,  /.  1. 

rotl;. 

£(cio,  n.  3.  b.  e. 

fdjroarj. 

23100,  n.  3.  b.  b. 

lil 


41 


PART  II.  CH.  3.]       DECLENSION    OF    ADJECTIVES. 


article  or  pronoun,  as,  gu'tcr  ro'tfycr  ^CtU,  good  red  wine  ; 
gu'te  ro'tfye  gar'be,  good  red  color ;  glt'tCS  ro'tfycS  ^ud), 
good  red  cloth,  the  first  adjective  is  inflected  according 
to  the  first  declension,  while  the  subsequent  adjectives  may 
be  inflected  either  according  to  the  first  or  third;  except 
the  genitive  case  singular  of  the  masculine  and  the  neuter 
genders,  in  which  the  subsequent  adjectives  must  be  inflected 
after  the  third  declension.  The  following  examples  exhibit 
these  two  modes  of  declining. 

Masculine. 


Singular. 

N.  gu'tcr  ro'tfyer  SBctn, 

G.  gu'tes  or  gu'ten*  ro'tben  ^ci'nee?, 

D.  gu'tem  ro'tfyemor  ro'ttyen  SBei'ne, 

A.  gu'ten  ro'tfyen  \85cin, 

Feminine. 

Singular. 

N.  gu'te  ro'tfye  gar'be, 

G.  gu'tcr  ro'tfycr  or  ro'tfycn  gar'fce, 

D.  gu'tcr  ro'tfycr  or  ro'tben  gar'fcc, 

4.  gu'te  ro'tfye  gar' be, 

Neuter. 

Singular. 

N.  gu'tcr  ro'tfyes  ^uc^, 

G.  gu'tcr  or  gu'ten*  ro'tfyen  ^u'efjes, 

D.  gu'tcm  ro'tfyem  or  ro'tfyen  ^u'ebe, 

A.  gu'tcr  ro'tfyes  ^luc^, 


good  red  wine, 
of  good  red  wine, 
to  good  red  wine, 
good  red  wine. 


good  red  color, 
of  good  red  color, 
to  good  red  color, 
good  red  color. 


good  red  cloth, 
of  good  red  cloth, 
to  good  red  cloth, 
good  red  cloth. 


*  The  difference  between  e£  and  en  in  the  genitive  singular 
of  the  first  adjective  masculine  or  neuter,  has  nothing  to  do 
with  the  two  modes  of  declining  here  exhibited,  but  is  a  matter 
of  euphony,  as  has  been  before  observed,  page  35.  But  the 
genitive  of  the  subsequent  adjectives  never  ends  in  c£,  accord- 
ing to  the  first  declension,  but  always  in  CU,  according  to  the 
third.     Thus  we  cannot  say,    gtt'tC6  V  0'  t  f)  C  g  Seines,    but 

we  must  say,  gu'tetf  (or  gu'ten)  r  o'  t  fy  e  n  ^Bci'uetf. 


4* 


42  DECLENSION    OF    ADJECTIVES.  [BOOK  I. 

Plural  for   the   three  genders. 

N.  gn'te  vo'tfye  or  vo't&en  SBci'nc,     gar'ten,  Xft'djtt, 
good  red  wines,         colors,      cloths. 

6r.  gn'terro'tfyerorro'tfycn^ei'nc,    gav'fccn,  ^tVcfeer,  of,  &c. 
D.  gn'ten  vo'ttjm  QQBei'ncn,  gav'fcen,  ^it'djew,  to,  &c. 

A.  gn'te  ro't^e  or  ro'tfyen   'JBci'nc,    gav'ben,  £iVd)ev,  fine,  &c. 

In  good  writing  and  speaking,  the  choice  between  these 
two  modes  of  declining  an  adjective  when  subsequent  to  an- 
other, though  frequently  depending  on  euphony,  is  sometimes 
determined  by  the  degree  of  importance  assigned  to  the  sub- 
sequent adjective.  Thus,  in  speaking  of  "  good  domestic 
cloths,"  we  may  design  either  to  distinguish  good  domestic 
from  good  foreign  cloths,  or  good  domestic  from  bad  domestic 
cloths.  The  first  meaning  is  expressed  in  German  by  inflect- 
ing the  subsequent  like  the  preceding  adjective,  according  to 
the  first  declension  ;  as,  gti'ttt  cin'fycimtfdjcr  Stft'cbci*,  of  good 
domestic  cloths  ;  but  in  order  to  express  the  last  mentioned 
meaning  we  decline  the  subsequent  adjective  according  to  the 
third  declension ;  as,  gn'tCl*  cin'fyeimifdjcn  $u'c!)ev,  of  good 
domestic  cloths. 

The  above  observation  concerning  the  declension  of  an 
adjective  subsequent  to  another,  applies  also  to  adjectives  pre- 
ceded by  the  indefinite  pronouns,  mcfy'VCre,  several ;  ei'nige, 
some ;  et'lidjc,  some  ;  ttcl'dK,  some* ;  man'dje,  some  ;  rot'- 
ntge,  few  ;  toie'le,  many  ;  ctf'Ic,  all.  Thus  to  distinguish  "  all 
good  men,"  from  all  that  are  not  so,  we  say,  <xi'U  gn'te  Often'* 
fefcen;  but  in  order  to  distinguish  "  all  good  men"  from  some 
good  ones,  we  say,  al'k  gn'ten  9ftcn'fd)Cn. 

Observation  II.  When  indeclinable  words  precede,  wheth- 
er numerals,  adjectives,  or  adverbs,  they  have  no  influence 
upon  the  adjective ;    as, 

(St'iMS  gn'tcr  QOBdtt,  some  good  wine. 

33iel  frifctye  Sfttfdj,  much  fresh  milk. 

<2J3e/nig  fai'm  IB^n,  a  little  cold  water. 

<3ef)r  gn'te  9ften'fd)cn,  very  good  men. 


*  This  indefinite  pronoun  is  not  to  be  confounded  with  the 
relative,  Wtl'fitt,  Wet'dje,  wcl'djftf,  who,  which.  If  the  latter 
precedes  an  adjective,  this  is  always  inflected  according  to 
the  second  declension,  as  has  been  remarked,  page  36. 


a 


PART  II.  CH.  3.]       DECLENSION    OF    ADJECTIVES.  4 

^tcv  baa've  XtjU'Uv,  four  dollars  in  cash. 

Siinf  lang'e  3»afy're,  five  long  years. 

§Ucl)  jcfyn  lang'en  ^afy'vcn,        after  ten  long  years. 

But  the  adjective  is  declined  according  to  the  above  rules 
concerning  subsequent  adjectives  (Obs.  I.),  when  it  is  pre- 
ceded by  jroei  or  t>m,  as  these  two  numerals  may  be  declined 
in  the  genitive  and  dative.     Examples  : 

G.  jSroet'er.  Ung'er.  or  fang'en  'ia'ge,     of  two  long  days. 

G.  Sbrei'eu  baa'mor  baa'ren  Scaler,  of  three  dollars  in  cash. 

D.  SH'ei'en  gu'tcn  SDfan'fctjen,  to  three  good  men. 

Observation  III.  If  an  adjective  in  its  simple  form  is  put 
before  another  adjective,  the  termination  of  which  agrees  with 
the  following  substantive,  in  gender,  number,  and  case,  the 
first  adjective  is  not  to  be  considered  as  denoting  a  quality 
of  the  substantive,  but  as  an  adverb,  qualifying  the  adjective 
after  it.     The  following  examples  will   explain  this  difference. 

Sin  gan'jetf  ncu'cS  §Mi$,  a  whole,  new  house. 

Sin  ganj   ncu'e^  JpauS,  a  house  wholly  or  quite  new. 

Sin  neu'etf  ein'gebuntmeS  25  net),  a  new  book,  bound  up. 
Sin  lieu  ein'gebunoncj?  SBuct),     a  book  newly  bound. 
Stll  t)al'6e6   gCblM'tCUC^  £ltl)n,    half  a  roasted  chicken. 
Sin  tyalb   gcbra'tcneS   £ut)n,       a  chicken  half  roasted. 

Observation  IV.  In  familiar  language,  and  in  poetry,  the 
termination  of  an  adjective,  when  it  precedes  a  neuter  noun, 
is  sometimes  dropped  in  the  nominative  and  accusative  case 
singular,  and  its  simple  form  alone  is  retained ;  as,  fd)btl 
QGBet'ter,  fine  weather,  instead  of  fdj&'netf  333et'ter ;  ein  fro  I) 
©C'jtdjt,  a  cheerful  face,  instead  of  eill  fvo'ljcS  ©eftcl)t'. 

Observation  V.  When  two  adjectives  of  the  same  termina- 
tion come  together,  coupled  by  the  conjunction  unt>,  and,  it  is 
usual  in  familiar  discourse,  to  drop  the  termination  of  the  first; 
as,  eill  rotty*  UllD  roeiffeS  @eftel)t',  a  red  and  white  face  ;  eill 
gcnug's  UU0  ar'bcitfvimci*  90?enfef),  a  contented  and  industrious 
man. 

Adjectives  may  be  used  as  substantives,  both  in  the  singular 
and  plural ;  as,  t>Cf  ^Beife,  the  wise  man  ;  Ote  ^GBci'fe,  the 
wise  woman ;  tie  ^Betfcn,  the  sages ;  Pas?  Svtya'bene,  the 
sublime ;  bet*  (ScUfyt'tt,  the  learned  man ;  t>ic  @d)6  lie,  the 
fair  woman  ;  oer  Skfailit'te,  the  male  acquaintance ;  Me  SSc- 
rNlllll'te,  the  female  acquaintance ;  t>ev  Skvroano'te,  the  male 


44 


COMPARISON    OF    ADJECTIVES. 


[book  I. 


relative ;    fctC   33ertMnt)'tC,   the   female  relative ;    tttt'fcre  25c- 
fruui'ttn  UUt>  ^JerwanD'tCtt,  our  acquaintances  and  relations. 

§  2.    COMPARISON    OF    ADJECTIVES. 

The  degrees  of  comparison  are  the  positive,  the  compara- 
tive, and  the  superlative.  The  comparative  is  formed  by 
adding  t*  or  er,  and  the  superlative  by  adding  \\  or  e|t,  to  the 
end  of  the  simple  word,  or  positive  ;  as, 


Positive. 
5\Iein,  little ; 
Q&ei'fe,  wise ; 
£>tei|t,  bold ; 


Comparative. 
Heftier;  less  ; 
roci'fet*/  wiser ; 
t>m'|ter,  bolder ; 

So  form  : 


Superlative. 
fteinft,  least, 
irjci'fcjt,  wisest. 
mi'pft,*  boldest. 


tjOtjl,  hollow, 
ratify,  rough. 
bfatt,  blue. 
fd)Iec()t,  bad. 
fanft,  soft. 
rmVfcC,  weary. 


lafym,  lame, 
jtolj,  proud. 
vol),  raw. 
fcjt,  firm. 
jal}m,  tame, 
fdjlanf;  slender. 


The  preceding  adjectives  do  not  change  their  vowels  in  the 
comparative  and  superlative,  but  most  adjectives  change  the 
vowels  a,  0,  it,  into  a,  b,  ft,  in  the  comparative  and  superla- 
tive :   as.    . 


Positive. 
alt,  old ; 
VOtfy,  red ; 
fttrj,  short 


Comparative. 
after,  older; 
ro'tfyer,  redder ; 
ft'trjcr,  shorter ; 

So  form : 


*arm,  poor. 
*6ana/e,  fearful. 
*&umm,  stupid. 


Superlative. 
aPtejt,  oldest. 
r6'tt)Cjt,  reddest, 
fftr^ejt,  shortest. 

*faft,  cold. 
*ftug,  prudent. 
*nag;  wet. 


*  The  superlative  degree  is  seldom  used  in  its  simple  form, 
but  is  commonly  made  to  agree,  in  gender,  number,  and  case, 
with  the  noun  to  which  it  refers,  by  adding  to  the  superlative 
such  endings  as  the  declension  of  adjectives  requires  (see  page 

39);  ex.  Heinle  (Sa'bc,  smallest  gift;  t>er  roei'fejte  SKatt;,  the 
wisest  counsel ;  fetn  fcrei'jtejtctf  Unterncfy'men,  his  boldest 
enterprise. 


PART  II.  CH.  3.]       COMPARISON    OF    ADJECTIVES.  45 

*gvo6,  coarse.  *fdjroadj,  weak. 

*3V0£/  great.  *jtwf,  strong. 

Some  adjectives  form  their  comparison  irregularly  ;  as, 

Positive.  Comparative.  Superlative. 

gut,  good ;  fcef'fet,  better ;  6e|t,  best, 

ijoci),  high ;  tyb'tjn,  higher ;  t)bd)\l,  highest. 

Ma'fyc,  near ;  ua'tyev,  nearer ;  nart)|t,  nearest, 

tnef,  much  ;  metyf,  more  ;  mcijt,  most. 

Tlie  comparative  and  superlative  of  adjectives  are  declined 
like  the  positive. 

The  adjective  vein,  pure,  comparative  rci'nct*,  superlative 
VCiltjl,  is  thus  declined  in  its  comparative  degree  : 

First  Declension : 
Masc.         Fern.         Neut. 

vei'nem,    rei'nere,    vei'neves,  purer,  &c. 
Second  Declension  : 

fcer  rei'nere,      Me  rei'nere,    M$  xti'nttt,    the  purer,  &c. 

Third  Declension  : 
mem  rei'uerer,   mci'ne  rei'nere,  mcin  rei'nere^,  my  purer,  &c. 

In  the  same  manner  is  declined  the  superlative  of  rein ;  viz. 

First  Declension  : 

mn'jUr,    rein'fte,    rcin'jJcs,    purest,  &c 

Second  Declension  : 

t>cv  rcin'fte,    Die  rein  t^e,    fcae?  rein'fte,    the  purest,  &c. 

Third  Declension  : 

mein  tein'jter,  tnei'ne  rein'fie,   mcin  rein'jtcs,  my  purest,  &c. 

Thus  inflect  through  the  three  declensions : 

Sin  ett'tcver    *9Q?aun,  3..b.  c,  a  more  noble  man. 

SBcfttt  gl*eun&,  3.  b.  i\,  best  friend. 

2)tc  rcar'mere  *htft,  1.  b„  warmer  air. 

SCftetn  jwig'creS  Sviltt*,  3.  b.  e.,  my  younger  child. 

2)aS  fvei'jU  *ian&,  3.  b.  c,  the  freest  country. 


46  RECAPITULATORY    EXERCISES.  [bOOK  I. 

Observations  on  the  Comparison  of  Adjectives. 

I.  The  e  is  often  dropped  in  the  comparative  of  adjectives 
ending  in  el,  en,  and  ev  ;  as, 

Positive.  Comparative. 

Cfcef,  noble  ;  et'let*,  nobler,  (for  e'telet*.) 

ftdj'er,  safe;  ftcl)'m,  safer,  (for  ftdyem.) 

feoilfom'men,  perfect ;  VOllfomm'ncr,      more     perfect, 

(for  vMtfom'mcncv.) 

II.  Most  primitives  change  their  vowels  in  the  comparative 
and  superlative ;  as,  jtavf,  strong ;  ftarter,  stronger ;  tCX 
jMff'ltC,  the  strongest ;  fnrj,  short ;  ftVjer,  t>CV  tttr'jejte.  But 
the  following  are  exceptions,  as  well  as  some  others  previously 
noticed,  (page  44) ;  falfdj,  false ;  gei\Vte,  straight ;  fyott, 
affectionate  ;  [ryfe,  loose  ;  glatt,  smooth  ;  matt,  faint ;  natft, 
naked ;  runt,  round  ;  jtumpf,  dull ;  p(att,  flat ;  fatt,  satiated  ; 
fd){aff,  slack.  Derivatives  never  change  their  vowels ;  as, 
faf  tevtjaft,  vicious ;  U\[ tevfyaftcr,  more  vicious ;  fret*  laf  tetfyaf; 
tCjU,  the  most  vicious. 

Recapitulatory  Exercises  on  Adjectives. 

2Me  STatuV  jctgt  m\€  fcfjo'ncve  ©e'gcntfanfce  ate  tie  £un|t. 

£>te  6cvg'td)ten  ©e'genten  ftnt  au'genefymer  ate  Me  e'beuen. 

2)ie  SBol'te  Dcr  fddyftfdnni  @d)aa'fe  i|t  fei'net*  ate  Me (2Bo[(e 
tei*  eng'lifcben. 

2)ie  SDton'&efa  fya'ben  cineu  fei'neveu  ©cfefemarf7  ate  Me 
Sdftffe. 

2)ie  giguf  tee;  3if  fete  ijt  Me  fcotfforo'mentte  untcr  ten  ge-- 
ome'trifefoen  gigu'ren. 

2Me  ©rie'efcen  roa'ren  ein  geMt'tetereS  ^oll?  ate  tie  sjtS'mer. 

2)ev  tvetf  (ic()e  SDtann  fant  un'ter  <2Bit/Den  et'ne  freunt'lic&ere 
Hufnaljme  ate  in  tern  gefit'tcten  Suro'pa. 

tie  SRatitr,  nature.  f(nt,  are. 

jetgt,  exhibits.  angenefyttt,  pleasant. 

im£,  to  us.  cben,  plain, 

fdj&n,  fine.  SBolie,  wool. 

*©egen|tant,  object.  fdd)ftfd),  Saxon.  ' 

ate,  than.  ©efjaaf,  sheep, 

tie  £un|t,  art.  i|t;  is. 

6cvgici)t,  mountainous.  fetn,  fine. 

Regent,  country.  engtifel),  English. 


PART  n.  CH.  3.]   RECAPITULATORY  EXERCISES. 


47 


SDtanfcel,  almond, 
fyaben,  have, 
feefdjmacf,  taste. 
Sflug,  nut. 
gigW,  figure. 
Jtvfef/  circle. 
Vodfommcn,  complete. 
ItntCl',  among, 
gcometrifdj,  geometrical. 
t>cr  (5ried)e,  the  Greek, 
irarcit/  were. 


gclnffcct,  cultivated, 
^olf,  people, 
fcct*  SK&mcr,  the  Roman. 
tt'Cfflicl),  excellent. 
SDfann,  man. 
fanfc,  found. 
tt>i(fc,  savage, 
fmmfclirt),  friendly. 
2(ufnaf)mc,  reception, 
gcftttct,  civilized. 


The  English  and  the  German  are  kindred  languages. 

These  little  things  are  great  to  little  men. 

His  style,  though  uncultivated,  is  the  richest  and  boldest  in 
(the)  modern  literature. 

The  strange  man  gave  the  cloak  to  me,  poor  forsaken  child. 

This  gentleman  possesses  the  choicest  collection  of  ancient 
and  modern  historical  works. 

You  find  in  this  public  library  a  smaller  number  of  volumes, 
but  a  larger  number  of  excellent  old  manuscripts  than  in  the 
other. 

To  whom  belongs  the  glory  of  this  wonderful  discovery  ; 
to  Leibnitz,  or  to  Newton? 


English,  en'gdfdj. 

and,  ttnb. 

German,  t>eittf(f). 

are,  ftut>, 

kindred,  fceWNUtbt'. 

language,  @pva'd)e,/.  1.  C. 

these,  fcic'fe. 

little,  ftcin. 

thing,  SMng,  n.  3.  b.  6. 

are,  ftttfc. 

great,  gvo$. 

to,  fur.  (Ace.) 

man,  ^OTcufct),  m.  2.  b. 

his,  fei'ne. 

style,  @d)rcifc'att,  /.  1. 1>. 

though,  nue'roofyf. 

uncultivated,  un'gelnfoct. 

is,  i|t. 

rich,  rcicf). 


bold,  fftfjtt. 

in,  in.  (Dat.) 

modern,  nett'Ct'. 

literature,  Mteratltr',/.  I.  fc. 

strange,  frcmD. 

man,  *2D?cmn,  m.  3.  b.  c. 

gave,  gab. 

cloak,  *SDtan'tel/  m.  3.  a,  0. 

to  me,  mil*. 

poor,  arm. 

forsaken,  focrfaf  fctt. 

child,  £int>,  n.  3.  b.  e. 

this,  fcic'fer. 

gentleman,  J^CIT.  m.  2.  b. 

possesses,  beft^t'. 

choice,  aus'crfefen. 

collection,  ©amnvluna,,  /.  1. 1>. 

of,  (Gen.) 
ancient,  (lit. 


48 


NUMERALS. 


[book  I. 


historical,  gefcfcic&t'fid). 
work,  OBevf,  n.  3.  b.  b. 

you,  ifyr. 
find,  fin'fcet. 

in,  in.  (Dat.) 

this,  fcie'fer. 

public,  offcnflicl). 

library,  SSibtiOtfyef",/.  1.  D. 

small,  gcrtng'. 

number,  Sln'Jdf)!,/.  1. 

of,  fcon.  (Z>otf.) 

volume,  *23ant>,  m.  3.  b.  6. 

but,  a'bev. 

large,  *gro$. 

excellent,  tufiid). 


old,  aft. 

manuscript,  £ant>'fd)rift,/.  1.  t>. 

than,  al£. 

in,  in.  (Dat.) 

other,  cm'&er. 

to  whom,  n?cm. 

belongs,  gefyiwt'. 

glory,  SKitfym,  m.  3.  b. 

of,  (Gen.) 

this,  t>ic'fa\ 

wonderful,  rounder  to. 

discovery,  Qsntfccd'ttng,  /.  1.  fc. 
to,  (Z>a£.) 
or,  O'fcCf 


CHAPTER  IV. 

NUMERALS. 

The  numbers  are  divided  into  cardinal,  ordinal,  proportion- 
al, distributive,  and  collective. 

I.  The  cardinal  numbers  are  as  follows  : 


(SlttU  or  $t'X0,  nothing.) 
(£in  or  ein£,  one. 
3roci  (or  tmi)),  two. 
£>vei  (or  tvci;),  three, 
■^tcv,  four, 
guilf,  five. 
@ed)6,  six. 
©ic'bcn,  seven. 
7ld)t,  eight. 
SfUittt,  nine. 
3e'l?en  or  $cfyn,  ten. 
£lf  (or  cdf),  eleven. 
3n?6tf,  twelve, 
jfevci'jcfyn,  thirteen. 
SBier'jJctyn,  fourteen. 

gunf  jcijn  or  fiinfjetjn,  fifteen. 

©edj'jctyn,  sixteen. 

@tc'ben$cj;n  or  ftcb'jcfyn,  sev- 
enteen. 


ZCdjt'jeljn,  eighteen. 
Sftetm'jcljn,  nineteen. 
3ir»an/£ig,  twenty. 
(£in    nn&    jroan'jig,    one    and 

twenty, 
groct  tint)  jroan'^ig,    two  and 

twenty,  &c. 
SH-ei'jtg,  thirty. 
Sin  nnt)    fcrei'ftg,     thirty-one, 

&c. 
SJicr'jig,  forty,  &,c. 
gitnf Jig  or  giinfjtg,  fifty,  &c. 
©cdj'jig,  sixty,  &c. 
©ie'bcnjig  or  ftcb'jtg,  seventy, 

&C. 

2ld)t'Jtg,  eighty,  &c. 
SRcim'jig,  ninety,  &c. 
Jgwn'&evt,  a  hundred. 


PART  II.  CH.  4.]  NUMERALS.  49 

Jpun'fcevt  unt>  em  or  eins,  a    $ttyn  tau'fenfc,  ten  thousand. 

hundred  and  one.  St'ne  SDTtKion',  one  million, 

^itn'fcert  U\Xt>  jrcci,   a  hundred  $voa  SOiidtO'nen,  two  millions. 

and  two,  &c.  2)vet  93itUtO'nen,  three  mil- 
3n>ei  fytm'fcert,   two   hundred,         lions,  &c. 

&c  Sin  tau'fcut)  acf)t  Imn'&evt  unt> 

£au'fent>,  a  thousand.  ein  uut>  ta-ei'ftg,  1831. 

Some  of  the  cardinal  numbers  are  declinable. 

The  numeral  ein,  one,  when  put  before  a  substantive,  is 
commonly  declined  like  the  article  ein,  a  ;  but,  when  it  stands 
by  itself,  it  is  inflected  according  to  the  three  declensions  of 
adjectives  ;  as, 

1.  (St'ner,  ei'ne,  ei'ne$  one;  gen.  et'netf,  ti'ntx,  ti'nt$,  of 
one ;  &lc. 

2.  2)er  ei'ne,  fcie  ei'ne,  M$  ei'ne,  the  one ;  gen.  t>es  ei'nen, 
t>ct*  ei'neit/  t?e^  ei'nen,  of  the  one ;  &c. 

3.  SDtein  ei'ner,  mei'ne  ei'ne,  mem  ei'uc^,  my  one ;  gen. 
mei'nes  ei'nen,  tnei'ner  ei'nen,  mei'nes  ei'nen,  of  my  one ;  &c. 
3»ci*  and  t>rci  make  jwet'ev  and  fcrei'er  in  the  genitive,  jroet'en 
and  fcvet'en  in  the  dative  (see  page  43) ;  most  of  the  other 
numerals  admit  of  declension  in  the  dative  only,  by  adding  en, 

as,  tue'ren,  fim'fen,  &c 

Observations  on  the  Cardinal  Numbers. 

1.  Sin  is  joined  to  the  noun ;  as,  ein  SDUnit/  one  man ;  ei'ne 
§rau,  one  woman ;  and  in  order  to  distinguish  it  from  the 
article,  it  is  pronounced  with  a  stronger  accent.  Qsi'nev  is 
used  when  the  noun  is  understood  ;  as,  fytev  tft  et'nev,  here  is 
one,  (that  is,  one  man,  or  one  thing,  understood)  &c. ;  fytev 
t|t  ei'ne,  here  is  one,  (that  is,  one  woman)  Sic.  Sin'nuil  ein£ 
ijt  ein£,  once  one  is  one.  £a'ben  @ie  em  SDtef  fer,  have  you 
a  knife?  t)M  ijt  ei'nen,  here  is  one,  (that  is,  one  knife.) 

2.  The  cardinal  numbers  are  converted  into  substantives, 
by  the  addition  of  ft,  and  in ;  as,  ein  gfmf  jigCV,  a  man  of 
fifty  ;  ei'ne  3X*ei'ftgerin,  a  woman  of  thirty. 

3.  The  ordinal  numbers  are  formed  by  adding  tt  to  the 
cardinal ;  except,  t>er  er'jte,  the  first ;  t>er  fcrit'te,  the  third ;  but 
after  the  number  nineteen,  jte  is  added. 

*  The  cardinal  number,  $tt?et,  two,  admits  of  three  genders ; 
as,  Masc.  jrocen,  Fern,  jroo,  Neut.  jwei,  two.  But,  in  modern 
German,  jwet  is  commonly  used  for  all  the  genders. 

5 


50  NUMERALS. 

II.  The  ordinal  numbers  are  as  follows 


[book  i. 


2>et*  ev'jte,  the  first. 

£>Cr  imi'U,  the  second. 

3)cf  fcrit'tc,  the  third. 

3)et*  bicr'tC,  the  fourth. 

2)er  fttnfte,  the  fifth. 

2>ctr  fcd/Jte,  the  sixth. 

S)er  fte'bCtttC,  the  seventh. 

Set*  adyu,  the  eight. 

lX>Cl*  nctm'te,  the  ninth. 

2)Cf  je^tt'te,  the  tenth. 

2>Ct*  clftc  or  ctffte,  the  elev- 
enth. 

S)cr  Jtt>SIf  te,  the  twelfth. 

2)cf  fcm'jefyltte,  the  thirteenth. 

SDer  fctcr'jcfyntc,  the  four- 
teenth. 

£>cr  funf  jefynte  or  funf  jefjnte, 

the  fifteenth. 

2)cv  fccfo'jefyntf,  the  sixteenth. 

3)cr  ftc'knjctjnte  or  ficb^efyutc, 
the  seventeenth. 

2)cv  actjt'jcfyntc,  the  eigh- 
teenth. 

3)et*  UCim'jetyntC,  the  nine- 
teenth. 

3)ev  jroan'jigjte,  the  twentieth. 

3)cr  em  unfc  &n>an'&ig|te,  the 
one  and  twentieth. 


2)er  jrcei  unt>  jwan^tgjU,  the 

two  and  twentieth. 

2>cir  fcrei  tint)  jn>an'jig|te,  the 

three  and  twentieth. 
3>er  t>m'ftg|te,  the  thirtieth. 

Set*  ein  tint)   Dvct'ftgiU,    the 

one  and  thirtieth,  &,c. 
2)CI*  tncr'jigfU,  the  fortieth. 

2)cr  funf jtgjle  or  fimfjigfte, 

the  fiftieth. 
3)cr  fcdVjigjfe,  the  sixtieth. 
£>cr  fte'bcnjigjtc  or  ftefc'jtgjte, 

the  seventieth. 

3)cr  adjt'jigjU/  the  eightieth. 

SDer  ncun'jigjtC;  the  ninetieth. 

2)cr  ^lin'tettftc,  the  hun- 
dredth. 

2)er  jroet  fyuu'fecvtfU,  the  two 

hundredth. 

SDcv  torci  fyun'&CVtfU,  the  three 
hundredth,  &x. 

2)CV  tau'fen&jte,  the  thou- 
sandth. 

2\t  jroet  tau'fent^e,  the  two 

thousandth. 
£>cr  fcvci  t<Ul'fenbffe#  the  three 

thousandth,  &c. 


In  compound  numbers  the  last  only  assumes  the  form  of  an 

ordinal ;  as,  &ei*  tau'fenb  ad)t  fyun'fccvt  uut>  fcici*  ttnb  jwan'jigjtc, 

the  one  thousand  eight  hundred  and  twenty-fourth. 
These  adjectives  may  be  declined  in  all  three  forms. 

1.  Without  the  article  ;  as, 


G. 


Masc.  Fern. 

jwei'ter,       poti'tt, 

}  imi'tc*     I  wetter, 
\  or  jwci'ten,  S  *         ' 


Neut. 

jroci'tctf, 
jroet'tcS 
or  jwci'ten 


,i 


second. 

of    a  second, 

&c. 


PART  II.  CH.  4.]  NUMERALS.  51 

2.  With  the  definite  article  ;  as, 

N.  tar  jroci'tc,    tic  jrcci'tc,      MS  jmci'tc,    the  second. 

G.  tas  groci'tcn,  tat*  groci'ten,   tat?  jroci'tcn,  of  the  second,  &c. 

2)cv  an'tafC,  the  other,  is  used  as  synonymous  with  tar 
JttKt'tc,  where  there  are  only  two  persons  or  things  spoken  of. 

3.  With  the  indefinite  article ;  as, 

N.  tin  jwei'ter,     ei'nc  groei'tc,       eiti  gwci'tcs,      a  second. 
G.  ei'itc*  groci'tcn,  ci'ncr  gttai'tcn,  ci'nctf  jvoci'tcn,  of  a  second, 

&,c. 

The  Germans  always  say,  Ctn  lint)  groan'jigtU/  one  and 
twentieth  ;  jroci  tint)  taci'flg|t"C/  two  and  thirtieth,  and  the  like ; 
but  never,  as  in  English,  jwan'jig  tt'fit,  twenty-first;  tact 'fig 
gtrci'tc,  thirty-second,  &lc. 

Observations.  Partitive  and  fractional  numbers  are  formed 
by  a  composition  of  ordinal  and  cardinal  numbers,  with  various 
words  or  letters. 

1.  Withljafo  (half),  thus: 

Itn'tartfyaib,*  (for  jroci'tctyalfc,)  one  and  a  half. 

2)rtt'tcbalb,  two  and  a  half. 

^Bicr'tcfyalb,  three  and  a  half. 

gunf  tebalb,  four  and  a  half. 

©ccl)'|tcf?a(b,   five  and  a  half. 

©ic'tantctjalfc,  or  ftcb'tcMb,  six  and  a  half, 

^efyn'tcfyalb,  nine  and  a  half,  &c. 

Examples.  "330V  au'tartbalb  3afy'rcn,  a  year  and  a  half 
ago;  in  taiftC&alb  ©tun'taU/  in  two  hours  and  a  half;  but  in 
speaking  of  the  hour  of  the  day,  the  Germans  say,  fyalb  ciuS/ 
half  past  twelve  ;  fyalb  jvcci,  half  past  one,  &,c. 

2.  With  tfyctt  (part),  as  : 

£>a£  SDrit'tfjcil,  the  third  or  third  part. 

3)a$  'SSicr'tfycU,  the  quarter  or  fourth  part. 

£Vt6  gitnf  ttjcU,  the  fifth  or  fifth  part. 

£as  33icr'tfycU  ipuntart,  or  M$  33icr'trt  £un'tart,  the 

quarter  of  a  hundred,  &,c. 


*  This  mode  of  compounding  seldom  exceeds  Jtt>Mf  tcfyrtlb/ 
eleven  and  a  half. 


52  NUMERALS.  [BOOK  I. 

In  the  above  compound  words,  tfycif  is  frequently  contracted 
into  td ;  as, 

Sin  SH'it'td,  a  third  part,  or  one  third. 

Sin  SBtCf'tcl,  a  fourth  part,  or  quarter. 

Sin  gftnf  te(,  a  fifth,  or  one  fifth. 

Sill  ©Ccl/ffcf,  one  sixth. 

Sin  jSctyn'tef,  one  tenth. 

Sill  jJttMn'jigjM,  one  twentieth,  &c. 

So  in  the  plural,  as  : 

gwei  ©vit'tcl,  two  thirds. 

3)rei  ^3icr'tel,  three  fourths. 

Witt  (&u'bn\ttl,  four  sevenths,  &c. 

These  are  regarded  as  substantives,  and  of  the  neuter  gen- 
der; but  Xljtii,  when  used  separately,  is  masculine. 

III.  Numerals  of  proportion  are  : 

Sin'fad)  or  ttn'fftftig,   single, 
groei'fadj  or  jwet'faftig,  double. 

2)l*ci'fad)  or  DVCi'fattig,  treble. 

93tcr'faclj  or  \nctwfa(tig,  fourfold,  &c. 

Jpun'fceufacl)  or  f)UU/&evtfa(tici,  centuple,  or  a  hundredfold. 

^au'fcilt^ad)  or  tau'fci^fdltig,  a  thousand  fold,  &c. 

The   above   numerals,    in  fvxcl),  or  ftU'tig,    are  regularly  de- 
clined, like  other  adjectives. 

IV.  Numbers  of  distribution  are  thus  formed  : 

Sr'ftCUS,  or  evfHtd),  firstly,  or  in  the  first  place. 
3roci'ten$,  or  jum  an'fcmt,  secondly. 
Srit'tcns,  or  jum  fcvit'ten,  thirdly. 
3$ier'ten$,  or  jum  feiev'tcn,  fourthly. 
Sin'jchl,  singly,  or  etn  Ultt)  Cin,  one  by  one. 
$X0ti  tint)  jn?Ct/  two  and  two,  or  two  by  two. 
3)rci  tint)  itti,  three  and  three,  &c. 
spaav'weife,  in  pairs,  &c. 

To  denote  the  same  thing,  or  different  sorts  of  things,   Ct'lci 
is  added  to  the  cardinal  numbers  ;  as, 
Si'ncvlct,  of  one  sort,  or  the  same. 
jmti'tttti,  of  two  sorts,  or  two  different  things,  &c. 
3>e  einS,  je  jroci,  )t  £>VCi,  one,  two,  three,  at  a  time. 


PART  II.  CH.  4.]       RECAPITULATORY     EXERCISES.  53 

V.   Collective  numbers  are  : 

SMe  £ctffte,  the  half. 

G£h\  spaar,  a  pair,  or  couple,  a  few. 

(£in  2)ut/JCtt&,  a  dozen. 

G£in  fyaCbcS  (or  fyalb)  2)ut'$cn&,  half  a  dozen. 

(gi'ne  Wlan'btl,  fifteen,  &,c. 

The  English  word,  time,  or  times,  is  expressed  by  the  ter- 
mination mal* ;  as, 

Qjilt'maf,  once.  SDtancb'maf,  many  a  time. 

$mi'\m[,  twice,  &c.  £>ft'ma(,  oftentimes. 

(Sill  an'Dennaf,  another  time,  35icfmal,  many  times. 

S)te'f*$ttKlfr  this  time.  SIBic  fctcfmal?how  many  times  ? 

50?a(  is  also  used  in  multiplying ;  as,  jrcct  mat  jrcci  flub  tncr, 
twice  two  are  four  (that  is,  literally,  two  times  two  are  four) ; 
U'Ct  mat  t>rei  futt>  nam,  three  times  three  are  nine,  &c. 

Recapitulatory  Exercises  on  the  Numerals,  &c. 

One  and  one  make  two. 

Ten  times  ten  make  a  hundred. 

A  Roman  legion  consisted  of  six  thousand  six  hundred  and 
sixty-six  soldiers. 

Germany  was  divided4  into1  ten2  circles3. 

America  was  discovered  by  Christopher  Columbus  in  the 
fifteenth  century  after  the  birth  of  Christ. 

Vienna,  the  capital  of  Austria,  lies  in  the  sixteenth  degree 
of  (the)  longitude,  and  forty-eighth  degree  of  (the)  latitude. 

Your  friends  live  seven  miles  and  a  half  from  this  place. 

The  meat  weighs  four  pounds  and  three  quarters. 

One  half  of  this  apple  is  mellow,  but  the  other  is  still  hard. 

He  wore  a  treble  coat  of  mail. 

I  saw  three  kinds  of  roses  on  one  bush. 

times,  maf.  consisted,  l>cftant>'. 

make,  madjt.  of,  au$.  (Dat.) 

Roman,  r&'mtfcf),  soldier,  £ne'$cr,  m.  3.  a.  a. 

legion,  icgion'//.  1.  fc.  Germany,  £)eutfct)'fan&. 


*  The  word  mat,  in  old  German,  signifies  time. 

5* 


54  pronouns.  [book  I. 

was,  tt>ar.  live,  ttJofy'nettt 

into,  in.  (Ace.)  mile,  SDTct'Ie,/.   1.  C. 

circle,  £m£,  m.  3.  b.  b.  from,  bon.  (Dat.) 

divided,  getfyetft'.  this,  Dtc'fem, 

America,  TJLmt'vifa.  place,  *spia§,  m.  3.  b.  6. 

was,  ronv'fre,  meat,  g(eifcl),  n.  3.  b. 

discovered,  entfcfrft'.  weighs,  mt^t.  (Ace.) 

by,  fcon.  pounds,  spfitttt). 

Christopher  Columbus,  Serifs  of,   (Gen.) 

topi;  <Eofam'fcu$.  this,  bie'fes. 

in,  in.  (Dotf.)  apple,  *2(r/fc(,  m.  3.  a.  0. 

century,  3<\t)X$)M\'H?tf  n.S.b.k.  is,  tjt. 

after,  nad).  mellow,  roeid). 

Christ,  £f)rif  tlt£.  but,  a'kr. 

birth,  ©ebuvt',  /.   1.  t>,    (See  other,  an'OCr. 

page  27^]  is,  ijh 

Vienna,  "SBint.  still,  nod), 

capital,  $aiiyt'\UM,f.  1.  i\  hard,  fyavt. 

of,  4) On.    „  he,  Ct\ 

Austria,  £>|Vvetd).  wore,  tvng. 

lies,  liectf.  coat  of   mail,   span'jet*,  m.  3. 
in,  in.  (Dat.)  a.  a. 

degree,  (5vat>,  »».  3.  b.  6.  I,  id), 

longitude,  $dng'C,/.  1.  C.  saw,  fafy. 

latitude,  ^Bvei'te,/.  1.  C.  rose,  ^Hofe,  /.  1.  C. 

your,  %tyte.  on,  an.  (Z>«£.) 

friend,  gvennb,  m.  3.  b.  b.  bush,  *25ufd),  3.  b.  6. 


CHAPTER  V. 
PRONOUNS. 

There  are  seven  kinds  of  pronouns,  viz  personal,  possessive, 
demonstrative,  relative,  interrogative,  indefinite,  and  substan- 
tive. 

§  1.    PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. 

In  German,  as  in  English  there  are  five  personal  pronouns ; 
viz.  id),  I ;  bit,  thou ;  ev,  he ;  fie,  she ;  e$,  it ;  with  their 
plurals,  ttuv,  we  ;  ifyv,  you  ;  fte,  they. 

The  personal  pronouns  are  declined  as  follows  : 


PART  II.  CH.  5.]      PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. 


55 


First 

Person. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

N. 

id), 

I. 

N: 

It)  if, 

we. 

G. 

mei'ner  or  mein, 

of  me. 

G. 

un'fcr, 

of  us. 

D. 

mix, 

to  me. 

D. 

un^, 

to  us. 

A. 

mid), 

Singular. 

me. 
Second 

A. 

Person. 

Plural. 

us. 

N. 

t>U, 

thou. 

N. 

tyx, 

you. 

G. 

fcei'ucr  or  t>ciu, 

of  thee. 

G. 

cu'cr, 

of  you. 

D. 

t>ir, 

to  thee. 

D. 

cud), 

to  you. 

A. 

Sid), 

thee. 
Third 

A. 

Person. 

cud), 

you. 

Singular. 

Masc.  Fern.  Ncut. 

N.  tX,  he.  ftc,       she.  e£,                     it. 

G.  fci'nci*  or  fciu,  of  him.  ify'vCf,  of  her.  fei'nci*  or  fein,  of  it. 

D.  ifym,  to  him.  iljr,      to  her.  itjxa,                 to  it. 

A.  iljtt,  him.  ftc,       her.  e£,                     it. 

Plural,  for  the  three  genders. 

N.  flC,  they. 

G.  ify'm,  of  them. 

D.  illicit,  to  them. 

A.  ftc,  them.  > 

The  personal  pronouns,  in  the  genitive,  dative,  and  accusa- 
tive cases,  are  used  also  as  reflective  pronouns,  particularly 
with  reflective  verbs,  as,  id)  lic'bc  ttttct),  I  love  myself;  £>u 
flci'fc>C|t  t>id),  thou  dressest  thyself.  The  personal  pronouns 
when  used  with  reflective  verbs,  are  declined  in  the  same 
manner,  except  in  the  dative  and  accusative  cases,  singular 
and  plural,  of  the  third  personal  pronoun.  In  these  cases  the 
reflective  pronoun  fid)  takes  the  place  of  the  datives,  ifym, 
it)V,  it)m,  and  ify'ncn,  and  of  the  accusatives,  tyn,  ftc,  C£, 
and  ftc.  Ex.  er,  ftc,  or,  C6  Cffaubt'  ftd)  (dat.  sing.),  he,  she, 
or  it  permits  himself,  herself,  or  itself;  ftc  Ctlau'fccu  ftd), 
(dat.  plur.)  they  permit  themselves;  tt,  ftc,  or  c£  iitbt  fid) 
(ace.  sing.)  he,  she,  or  it  loves  himself,  herself,  or  itself:  f(C 


56 


POSSESSIVE    PRONOUNS. 


[BOOK  I. 


Ite'b CU  fid)  (ace.  plur.)  they  love  themselves.  —  In  the  plural 
number,  reflective  pronouns  are  also  used  to  signify  a  recip- 
rocal relation.  Thus,  fie  (ie'bcn  fid),  may  mean,  they  love 
themselves  (reflective),  or  they  love  one  another  (reciprocal). 
But  in  order  to  prevent  confusion  of  ideas,  the  adverb 
einau'fcctr,  one  another,  is  frequently  put  instead  of  ftd) ;  as, 
fie   [U'bm  etnan'fcCt*,   they  love  one   another. 

Sometimes,  to  give  a  greater  stress  to  the  meaning  of  a 
personal  pronoun,  or  noun,  one  of  the  indeclinable  words, 
fclbft,  or  fel'fcet*,  is  added;  as,  id)  fclbjt  (or  fcl'bcr),  I  myself; 
fti'tltV  fetofi;  of  himself ;  roil*  fetbft,  we  ourselves ;  fid)  fc(b|t, 
to  himself,  or,  himself;  to  themselves,  or,  themselves,  (as  the 
sentence  may  require) ;  Sa'frtV  felbjt,  Caesar  himself. 


§  2.    POSSESSIVE      PRONOUNS. 

Possessive  pronouns  are  either  conjunctive,  or  absolute. 

Conjunctive  Possessive  Pronouns. 

The  conjunctive  possessive  pronouns,  which  are  formed 
from  the  personal  pronouns  in  the  genitive  (or  possessive)  case, 
are  as  follows : 

Singular.  Plural. 

Masc.  Fern. 

mcin,  mei'ne, 

fccin,  fcei'ne, 

fein,  fei'ne, 

il)t,  ify're, 

uu'fev,  uu  fere  or  un'fve,    mt'fev, 

en'er,  eu'eve  or  eu've, 

itft,  ify've, 

These  pronouns  are  declined  in  the  singular  like  the  article 
titi,  a,  and  in  the  plural  like  the  adjective  gut,  good,  in  the 
first  declension ;  as, 


Neut. 

M.F.  # 

N. 

mcin, 

mei'ne, 

my. 

t>cin, 

fcei'ne, 

thy. 

fcin, 

fei'ne, 

his,  its. 

it)t, 

ify're, 

her. 

uu'fer, 

ttn'fere  or  un'fre, 

our. 

cu'eu, 

eu'eve  or  eu've, 

your. 

tyr, 

ify've, 

their. 

Si 

ngular. 

Plural. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

M.  F.  $  N. 

N. 

mein, 

mei'ne, 

mein, 

mei'ne,     my. 

G. 

mei'ne^, 

met'nev, 

mei'ne^, 

mei'nev,   of  my 

D. 

mei'nem, 

mei'nev, 

mei'nem, 

mei'nen,  to  my 

A. 

mei'nen, 

mei'ne, 

mein, 

mei'ne/     my. 

PART  II.  CH.  5.]  POSSESSIVE    PRONOUNS.  57 

These  possessive  pronouns  are  called  conjunctive,  because 
they  are  joined  to  substantives.  The  pronouns  fctH,  itjV,  CU'Ct, 
&c,  agree  in  gender,  respectively,  with  the  possessor  ;  but  the 
termination  must  agree  in  gender,  number,  and  case,  with  the 
thing  possessed. 

According  to  this  rule,  the  following  examples  may  be  easily 
declined ;  mcin  25ru'ber,  m.  3.  a.  a.,  my  brother  ;  met'UC 
@cl)rr>cfter,  /.  1.  C,  my  sister ;  mein  *25ucl),  n,  3.  b.  c,  my 
book ;  fccin  ^Ct'tCV,  m.  3.  a.  C,  thy  male  cousin  ;  fei'UC  ^3a'fc, 
/.  1.  C,  his  female  cousin ;  i()V  gmmb,  m.  3.  b.  l\,  her  friend ; 
mt'fci*  91  ef  fc,  m.  2.  a.,  our  nephew  ;  tu'tt  $flid)'tt,f.  1.  C,  your 
niece ;  it)X  *£ait£,  n.  3.  b.  c,  their  house. 


Absolute  Possessive  Pronouns. 

They  are  called  absolute  possessive  pronouns,  because  they 
stand  for  some  noun,  which  precedes  them,  expressed  or 
understood,  and  with  which  they  must  agree  in  gender,  num- 
ber, and  case.  They  are  inflected  like  adjectives.  In  most 
cases  they  are  preceded  by  the  definite  article,  and  on  this 
account  inflected  according  to  the  second  declension,  like  bCV 
glt'tc,  Me  gu'tc,  fcciS  gu'tc.     So  decline  the  following  : 


Masc. 

bet*  ntci'nigc, 
bcr.  bci'nigc, 
bcv  fei'nigc, 
bcr  ify'vigf, 
bet*  mi'fvige, 
bcv  cu'rige, 
bev  ifytige, 


Fern. 

bic  mci'nigc, 

bic  bci'ntgc, 

tic  fei'nigc, 

t>ic  ity'vige, 

bic  nn'fvige, 

bic  cn'rige, 
fcie  ify'rigc, 


Neut. 

MS  mci'nigc, 
bag  bei'nigc, 
bag  fci'njge, 
tvi^  ify'rigc, 
bag  nn'frigc, 
bag  cn'vigc, 
bag  ify'rige, 


mine,  &c. 
thine,  &,c. 
his,  its,  &c. 
hers,  &c. 
ours,  &/C. 
yours,  &c 
theirs,  &C. 


Plural. 


bie  mct'nigcn, 
biz  bei'nigen, 
bie  fct'mgcn, 
bic  ify'rigcn, 
bic  nn'frigen, 
bie  cn'vigcn, 
tic  ify'vigcn, 


mine,  &,c. 
thine,  &c. 
his,  its,  &lc. 
hers,  &c. 
ours,  &c. 
yours,  &x. 
theirs,  &c. 


58 


POSSESSIVE    mONOUNS. 


[book  I. 


The  substantive  §\\t,  hat,  with  a  conjunctive  possessive  pro- 
noun before  it,  and  an  absolute  possessive  pronoun  after  it, 
is  thus  declined  : 


Singular. 

N.  fcin  %\\t  nnD  Der  mri'ttige, 
G.  fei'nes  s*>u'tt$  nnD  Des  mei'nigen, 
D.  fei'nem  J^u'tc  nnD  Dem  mei'nigen, 
A.  fei'nen  £nt  unt>  Den  mei'nigen, 

Plural. 

N.  fei'ne  £ft'te  nnD  Die  mei'nigen, 
G.  fei'ner  £ft'te  nnt»  Der  mei'nigen, 
D.  fei'nen  J^iVten  nnD  Den  mei'nigen, 
A.  fei'ne  Jfpn'te  nnt>  Die  mei'nigen, 

So  decline : 

mem  grennD  nnD  Der  fei'nige, 
fei'ne  grenn'Din  nnD  Die  mei'nige, 


his  hat  and  mine, 
of  his  hat  and  mine, 
to  his  hat  and  mine, 
his  hat  and  mine. 


his  hats  and  mine, 
of  his  hats  and  mine, 
to  his  hats  and  mine, 
his  hats  and  mine. 


my  friend  and  his. 

his  {female)  friend  and 

mine, 
their  brother  and  thine, 
my  brother  and   yours, 
my  sister  and  his. 
his  sister  and  hers, 
her  mother  and  mine. 
my  book  and  his. 
our  country  and  theirs, 
their  country  and  ours. 


tt)r  23rn'Der  nnt>  bet:  Det'nige, 
mein  23rn'Der  nnl>  t>ev  en'rige, 
mei'ne  @c()rcef'ter  nnt>  Die  fei'nige, 
fei'ne  @c()roef'ter  una  Die  ify'rige, 
tfy're  SDlut'tcr  nnD  Die  mei'nige, 
mein  S5ucl)  nnD  Das?  fei'nige, 
nn'fer  SSa'tertanD  nnD  Das  il)'rige, 
\\)x  ^a'tertanD  nnD  Das  nn'frige, 

Instead  of  the  pronouns,  Der  mei'ntge,  Die  mei'nige,  Dasmei'* 

Jttge,  mine,  the  Germans  make  use,  also,  of  the  pronouns,  Dei* 
mei'ne,  t>k  mei'ne,  DaS  mei'ne,  as  synonymous  terms,  declined 
in  the  same  manner.  In  the  same  way  the  pronouns,  Der 
Dei'ne,  Der  fei'ne,  Der  ifyxt,  Der  nn'fere,  Dei*  en're,  Der  ify're,  are 
used  instead  of  the  complete  forms,  Der  Dei'llige,  Der  fei'nige, 
Der  ify'rige,  Der  nn'frige,  Der  en'rige,  Der  ify'rige. 

There  are  also  absolute  possessive  pronouns,  not  preceded 
by  the  article,  and  consequently  inflected  according  to  the  first 
declension.     Such  are  the  following  : 


Masc. 

mei'ner, 
Dei'ner, 


Singular. 
Fern. 

mei'ne, 
Dei'ne, 


Ncut. 
mei'nes, 
Dci'netf, 


Plural. 

31.  F.  $  N. 

mei'ne, 
Dei'ne, 


mine, 
thine. 


FART  II.  CH.  5.]   DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS.  59 

fei'ner,  fei'ne,  fci'ncs,  fei'ne,         his,  its. 

ityxtv,  ityn,  ityxts,  ify've,  hers. 

itnfem  or )    ttn'feve  or  )   im'fewS  or  )  uu'fetre  or )  ourg 

cu'cm*  or )      eu'cre  or )     eu'eves  or )      eu'euc  or ) 
eu'ver,      )      eu're,      j     eu'vcs,      J      eu've,      j  y 
ityxtv,  ify're,  ifj'ves,  itj'rc,  theirs. 

The  absolute  possessive  pronouns  are  always  used  without 
a  noun,  the  noun  being  understood  or  referred  to  ;  as,  That 
is  my  hat,  2)a6  i|t  mcin  Jput;  No,  it  is  mine,  SRcin,  CS  ift 
mci'ner,  or,  t>ei*  mei'ne,  or,  &ev  met'nige. 

The  pronouns,  mci'UCr,  mine  ;  fcet'ltev,  thine,  &c.,  are  de- 
clined like  gtt'tev,  $ll'tt,  gU'teS,  according  to  the  first  declen- 
sion ;  and  t>cr  met'ne,  l>ct*  Mi'nt,  &c.  like  t>ev  gu'te,  t>ic  glt'te, 
fcttS  gu'te,   according  to  the  second  declension. 

Observation.  In  addressing  a  person,  where  in  English  the 
pronouns,  you,  your,  and  yours,  are  used,  the  Germans,  in 
speaking  to  intimate  friends,  make  use  of  t>U,  thou;  fcetn,  thy  ; 
bti'MX,  thine ;  but  in  addressing  others  they  employ  the  plural 
of  the  third  person,  @ie,  which  in  this  case  does  not  mean 
they  but  you.  This  alteration  of  the  original  meaning  of  the 
pronoun,  is  denoted  by  writing  it  with  a  capital  letter  (see  p. 
3.)  in  all  its  cases;  as,  Nom.  fy  Ace.  ©ic,  you  ;  Gen.  ^fy'vei', 
of  you  ;  Dat.  ^fy'NCU,  to  you.  The  same  remark  applies  to 
the  corresponding  possessive  pronouns,  3t)v,  %tyxt,  3»t)V,  your  ; 

Styxtx,  Sty're,  3t?'re$,  or  t>ev  3fy'rtge,  t>ie  3t)'vige,  t>a$  Sfy'vige, 
or  frcr  31)  re,  Die  31} 're,  fcae>  3b'i-e,  yours.  Ex.  @ie  you  fuifc 
are  3l)v  your  ei'genev  own   J5etT  master. 

In  the  old  German  language,  the  pronouns  ^t)X,  you,  Qsu'Cl*, 
your,  were  used  to  address  a  person  in  a  dignified  manner, 
and  this  mode  (which  corresponds  to  the  English),  is  still 
sometimes  used  in  poetry.  But  in  common  life  this  mode  of 
addressing  persons  is  rarely  used,  except  in  speaking  to  infe- 
riors in  rank,  for  which  purpose,  also,  the  third  person  singu- 
lar, ev,  he,  or  ftC/  she,  is  sometimes  employed. 

§  3.     DEMONSTRATIVE    PRONOUNS. 

The  demonstrative  pronouns  are  those  which  point  out  the 
persons  or  things  spoken  of.  They  are  declined  generally 
like  adjectives  ;  and  as  most  of  them  are  not  preceded  by  the 


60  DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS.         [BOOK  I. 

definite  article,  they  are  inflected  according  to  the  first  de- 
clension.    Ex. 

Singular. 
Masc.  Fern.  Neut. 

N.    fcie'fcr,  Me'fC/  fcie'fcs  or  fcies,       this,  &c. 

Plural,  for  the  three  genders. 
N.     fcte'fC/      these.  &c. 
So  decline  the  following  : 
Masc.  Fern.  Neut.  Plural. 

je'ner,  je'ne,  je'nes,  that ;  je'ne,     those. 

fct'Hgev,        fcl'bige,       fel'MfleS,  fcl'bigc,  the  same, 

fol'cfeev,         fol'etie,        fol'efoes,  fol'clje,    such. 

The  demonstrative  pronouns,  like  adjectives,  are  joined  to 
substantives  with  which  they  must  agree  in  gender,  number, 
and  case.     So  decline  the  following  : 

SMc'fev  ^ttci'k,  m.  %  a.,  this  boy. 
3e'ne6  50?at>'cl)en,  n.  3.  a.  a.,  that  girl. 
c^c'UCt*  *25nt'&er,  m.  3.  a.  a.,  that  brother. 
©OPdje  SKacb'ridjt,  /.  1.  t>.,  such  a  report. 
©ot'djcS  (2Bct/tcr/  n.  3.  a.,  such  weather. 

The  pronoun  t)Ci*'jcnigC,  he  that,  is  declined  like  t»et*  gtt'te, 
according  to  the  second  declension  of  adjectives. 

Singular. 
Masc.  Fern.  Neut. 

N.  fcer'jenige,    fcic'jenigc,    fcas'jcnige,  he,  she,  it,  or  that,  &c. 

Plural,  for  the  three  genders. 
N.     tic'jcnigen,       they  or  those,  &c. 

So  decline  : 

Masc.  Fern.  Neut.         Plural. 

fcerfcl'fce,     fcicfel'fcc,    ^ajfcl'bc,      fricfct'fccn,    the  same,  or  he, 

she,  it, — they 
fecrfct'bige,  fcicfet' Inge,  fcaftH'lugc,  fciefel'tugen,  the  same,  &c. 


PART  II.  CH.  5.]      RELATIVE  PRONOUNS.  61 

So  decline  the  following  : 

2)crfef'6c  *2ttaim,  m.  3.  b.  c,  the  same  man. 
SDer'jcnige  *33?ann,  that  man. 
^tC'jCUtgC  itt'gettb,/.  1.  fc>.,  that  virtue. 
SMffePbe  ^fctt'genb,  the  same  virtue. 
Satf'jenige,  *23ud),  rc.  3.  b.  e.,  that  book. 
Sajfel'fcc,  *23uri),  the  same  book. 

The   demonstrative   pronoun   t»CV,    that,    is   declined   in   a 
peculiar  manner,  nearly  like  the  article  t>Ct*,  the  : 


Singular. 

Masc.                Fern.                    Ncut. 

N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 

Dev,                   fcie,                   M$, 
t>cg  or  bcffett,     t>er  or  frc'ren,      fccg  or  fcef'fcn, 
Dem,                 t>er,                  t>cm, 
fcen,                   i>ie,                   Da^, 

that, 
of  that 
to  that, 
that. 

Plural,  for  the  three  genders. 

N.  Die,  those. 

G.  fce'm*  or  Dc'VCU,  of  those. 

D.  fce'ncn,  to  those. 

A.  tuc,  those. 


§  4.    RELATIVE    PRONOUNS. 

Relative   pronouns   relate  to  some   word  or   phrase   going 
before,  which  word  or  phrase  is  called  the  antecedem . 
They  are  declined  in  the  following  manner. 

^GBcl'ctKt:,  who,  is  declined  according  to  the  first  declension 
of  adjectives : 

Singular. 

Masc.  Fern.         Neut. 

N.  ml'd)tx,       WCl'd)t,     \Ml'd)t$,     who,  which,  or  that,  &c. 

Plural,  for  the  three  genders. 

N.  wl'd)t,         who,  which,  or  that,  &c. 
6 


62  INTERROGATIVE    PRONOUNS.  [BOOK  I. 

The  relative  pronoun,  fccr,  Me,  M$,  that,  is  declined  like 
the  demonstrative  pronoun,  t>er,  t>te,  t>a£,  that. 

93}er,  who,   and  roaS,  what,  as  relatives,  are  used  in  the 
singular  only,  and  are  thus  declined  : 

Masc.  fy  Fern.  Ncut. 

N.  WV,  who,  whosoever,  which,     N.  IMS,  what. 

he  who,  she  who. 
G.  rocffeu,  »ef,  of  whom,  of    G.  wef'fcn,  roeg,  of  what. 

whomsoever,  of  which,  dec. 
D.  VMm,  to  whom,  to  whomso-     D.  Vt>Cttt,  to  what. 

ever,  &c. 
A.  rDCU,  whom,  whomsoever,  &,c.     A.   U?a£,  what. 


Observations.  ^OBcv  and  VE»a6  are  sometimes  relative  and 
sometimes  interrogative  pronouns. 

^Cf,  is  sometimes  Englished  by  he  who,  or  whoever ;  as, 
QQBci*  ifyn  hunt,  [kbt  ityn,  whoever  knows  him,  loves  him. 
^aS,  is  sometimes  Englished  by  that  which ;  as,  ^aS  id) 
gefagt'  fya'be,  ift  tr-afyr,  That  which,  or  what,  I  have  said,  is 
true. 

The  ancient  relative  fo,  which,  who,  is  indeclinable  ;  ex. 
3)ic  grnm&'fcbaft  fo  ifyr  mix  benrie'fen  fyabt,  The  friendship 
which  you  have  shown  me. 

For  the  use  of  the  different  relative  pronouns,  see  Syntax, 
Book  II.  Chapter  4.  §  1.  Obs.  6  and  7. 


§  5.    INTERROGATIVE    PRONOUNS. 

The  interrogative  pronouns  are,  tt»er,  who?  rM6,  what? 
Wd'cfjcr,  who?  which?  tMg  fur  Cut,  what  sort  of?  or,  V0a$ 
fur,  what? 

The  interrogative  iKfcfyer,  is  declined  like  the  relative  XOtV* 
d)Ct\     QGDcr,  n>a$,  are  thus  declined  : 


PART  II.  CH.  5.]  INDEFINITE    PRONOUNS.  63 

Singular  and  Plural. 
Masc.  fy  Fern.  Neut. 

N.   wer,  who?  N.  V&a$,  what? 

G.  weffeu,  weft,  whose  ?  G.  fcon  roa£  or  wobon',  of  what  ? 

2>.  wcm,  to  whom  ?  Z>.  ju  roa£  or  wont',  to  what  ? 

-4.   wen,  whom  ?  A.  wag,  what  ? 

^vttf  fur  tin,  what?  or,  what  sort  of?  is  thus  declined  : 

Singular. 
Masc.  Fern.  Neut. 

N-  ™VJ" (in  or  \ »*«  *  **»  I ww,  $ cin  Sr, riT f* 

erncr.  J  '  (       what?  or  what  sort  of? 

G.  roaS  fuv  ei'ueg,  wag  fur  ti'ntt,  was  fur  ei'ncg,  of  what? 
Z).  n>a^  fur  ei'ncm,  vo*$  fur  ci'ucr,  wag  fur  ei'nem,  to  what  ? 
A.  wag  fuv  ei'nen,   wa^  fuv  ci'ne,      wag  fitv  cin    or    ci'neg, 

what? 

Plural,  for  the  three  genders. 

N.   l»a$  fur,  what?  or,  what  sort  of? 

No  genitive. 

D.  voa$  fur,  to  what  ? 

A.   voa$  fur,  what? 

Instead  of  wag  fur  ciu,  the  synonymous  pronoun  wcfcl)  cin 
is  used,  and  declined  like  the  former  ;  ex.  tJBdd)  ci'ue  ^fyat ! 
what  a  deed  !  deleft  ei'nen  2D?cn'fd)Ctt  fya'bc  id)  geliefct',  what  a 
man  have  I  loved  ! 


§  6.    INDEFINITE    PRONOUNS. 

Indefinite  pronouns  are  so  called,  because  they  refer  to 
things  in  an  indefinite  manner.     Some  are  numeral;  as,  ei'ner, 

*  333a£  fur  Ciu  is  always  used  before  a  noun  with  which  it 
agrees;  roa^  fuv  ei'ner,  and  \X>A$  fill*  ei'UCg  (or  cing),  are  used 
by  themselves,  with  reference  to  a  preceding  noun.  Ex. 
Quest.  Jpa  ben  @ic  M$  ©emal'fce  gefe't)cu  ?  Have  you  seen 
the  picture?  Ans.  ^ag  fill*  cin  (Semal'&C?  What  picture? 
or  simply,  ^vlg  fur  ci'neg  ?     Which  one? 


64 


INDEFINITE    PRONOUNS. 


[book  I. 


one;    M'ner,  no   one,   &c. ;    others  distributive;    as,    je'oei*, 
each,  every,  &c. 

These  pronouns  are  generally  declined  like  adjectives,  in 
the  first,  the  second,  or  the  third  declension,  according  to  the 
general  rules. 


So  decline  the  following 


Masc. 

h'x'mx, 

folder, 
cinjigcr, 

ei'nigcr, 

man'djer, 

atleir, 

je'oer, 

jeo'roeoev, 

jeg'iidjei*, 

ei'ner, 

fold)  ei'ner, 

ri'nev  Don  kt'oen, 


Fern. 

fei'ne, 

fol'ck, 

ei'ntge, 

mait'ck, 

al'fe, 

je'fce, 

jco'voeoe, 

jes'lidje, 

et'ne, 

fold)  ei'ne, 
ei'ne  Don  kt'oen, 


hi'iw  Don  kt'oen,  fci'ne  Don  kt'oen, 


Neut. 

£et'ne£,     no     one     or 

none. 
fo('d)C6,  such. 
ein'£tge6,  only. 
Ci'ntge£,  some   or  any. 
man'djctf,  many  a  one. 
aVk$,  all. 

JC'0C6,  every  or  each. 
JCD'I&C&CS,  every. 
jeg'lid)e£,  every. 
Ct'ne6,  one  or  some  one. 
fold)  ei'ncS,  such  a  one. 
ei'ncs  Don  ki'oen,  ei- 
ther, 
fci'nes    Don    ki'oen, 

neither. 


Plural  for  the  three  genders. 


Mm, 

none. 

fo('d)e, 

such. 

ein'jige, 

only. 

ei'ntge, 

some  or  any 

man'd)e, 

many. 

al'le, 

all. 

3e'oev,  jeo'roeoev,  jttfli&tt,  ei'ner,  et'nev  Don  kt'Oen,  and 

Ui'MK  Don  ki'oen,  have  no  plural. 

The  plural,  ki'oe,  both,  is  declined  like  that"  of  fei'ner. 
The  singular  of  that  pronoun  is  used  only  in  the  neuter  gen- 
der ;  viz.  N.  ki'oetf,  both ;  G.  ki'octf,  of  both ;  D.  bet'Oem, 
to  both  ;  A.  ki't>e6,  both. 

Some  of  these  pronouns  are  declined  as  adjectives,  with  ein 
ort>ei\  Thus,  ein  je'oer,  ci'ne  je'Oe,  ein  je'Octf,  each,  is  inflected 
according  to  the  third  declension,  and  in  the  singular  number 


PART  II.  CH.  5.]  SUBSTANTIVE    PRONOUNS.  65 

only.     S)cr   ei'ne,  tit  ei'ne,  t>(l6  ei'ne,   is  inflected  according 
to  the  second  declension,  singular  and  plural. 

So  decline : 

Masc.  Fern.  Neut. 

cin  an'bttx,  et'ne  an't>ve,  eitt  an'fcvetf,  another. 

fc>ei*  an'fcre,  tne  an'tore,  t>a6  an'fcve,  the  other. 

tin  ein'jiger,  ei'ne  ein'jige,  etn  ein'jigeS/  an  only  one. 

fcer  ein'jige,  Me  em'jigc,  $a$  ein'jige,  the  only  one. 

ein  ei'niger,  ei'ne  ei'nige,  eiu  ci'niges,  an  only  one. 

t>ev  ei'nige,  fcie  ei'nige,  i>a6  ei'nige,  the  only  one. 

etn  jeb'roefcev,*  ei'ne  jeb'roebe,  ein  jcfc'roefces,  every. 

tin  jeg'licfjetr,  ei'ne  jeg'licfoe,  ein  Jeg'lidjeS,  any,  every  one. 

The  indefinite  pronoun  Fein,  tti'nt,  {"'ein,  which  is  joined  to 
substantives,  like  the  conjunctive  possessive  pronouns,  mein, 
fceilt,  fein,  &c,  is  also  declined  like  them. 


§  7.    SUBSTANTIVE    PRONOUNS. 

The  substantive  pronouns,  ^e'mant),  some  or  any  body  ; 
9Tie/man&,  nobody,  are  used  in  the  singular  only,  and  are 
declined  both  as  adjectives  and  as  nouns,  as  follows : 

N.  je'manfc,  somebody. 

G.  )e'mant>S  or  je'mant>e$,  of  somebody. 

D.  je'manfc  or  jc'man&cm,  to  somebody. 

A.  je'mant>  or  jc'man&cn,    somebody. 

N.  nie'mant),  nobody. 
G.  nie'mant>6  or  nic'manfceg,  of  nobody. 
D.  nie'manfc    or  nie'manfcem,  to  nobody. 
A.  nie'manb    or  nic'manfcen,  nobody. 

3iC't>ennan/  every  body,  is  declined  as  a  noun. 

N.  je'fcennan,  every  body. 

G.   je'fcennanS,  of  every  body. 

D.  je't>ennan,  to  every  body. 

A.  je'fcerman,  every  body.  " 


*  3iC&'\r»et»er  is  generally  used  without  the  article,  and  is 
then  inflected  like  je'fcei*,  or  fei'ner,  according  to  the  first  de- 
clension. 


06  RECAPITULATORY    EXERCISES.  [BOOK  I. 

The  substantive  pronouns,  man,  one ;  et'roa6,  something ; 
and  uid)t6,  nothing,  are  indeclinable. 

£D?an,  one,  we,  people,  they,  &c,  like  the  French  pronoun, 
on,  is  used  only  in  the  third  person  singular ;  ex.  2D?an  fagt/ 
Der  $vieg  fei  geen'Digt,  people  say  the  war  is  ended. 


Recapitulatory  Exercises  on  all  the  Pronouns. 

TOv  ftnt)  SDten'fdjm  unD  voir  flnD  jfcvb'ltd). 

itjo'trett/  t>ie  \§x  feiD,  intern'  it)v  fyoffet,  Dag  ttyr  ofy'ne  cud) 
SDfaVlje  ju  ge'bcn,  gclefyrt'  unD  wet'fe  wcv'Den  fon'net. 

©o'frate^  fag'te  oft  ju  fei'neu  gmro'Dcn:  SDtein  ie'ben  ijt 
mir  nidjt  fo  fd)d£'bav  alt?  Die  ^u'geuD. 

5D?etn  ©cfdnnacf'  ij!  ntd)t  Dcv  Det'ntge,  unD  Dein  (Bcfdnnatf' 
iff  nid)t  Dev  mei'nige ;  id)  ftn'De  ^cvgmVgen  an  (Bemdl'Dcn  aus 
Der  Cftte'DevfdnDifdKn  ©dnt'te,  unt)  Du,  an  ©emdl'Den  aus  Dcr 
Staltd'mfdKU. 

SIBofyev'  Differ  Un'tcvfdneD  ?  Da  Dod)  fonft  mei'ne  Stei'gung 
tnitDer  Det'utgen  Imitate  ganj  lUemn'ftimmt, 

©in  je'bei-  fd)6pft  aus  Dev  CimVU  fei'nev  *et'Denfd)aften,  fein 
(Mid  o'Det  Un'glftd. 

3d)  fraa/te  nad)  jc'manb,  fanD  a'bet  uie'ntanDcn  ju  ^att'fe. 

^e'Des  SanD  t)at  fehte  ©cbvdu'd^. 

£$  gtebt  %itytix  De'ren  man  ftd)  nid)t  leid)t  6eroufl*t'  mvt>, 
uuD  ml'tfyt  man  fovg'fdftig  fccrbivgt'. 

ftnD,  are.  ate,  as. 

ftetMidj,  mortal.  Die  ^ugcnD,  virtue. 

%tjOY,  fool.  (Sefd)macf,  taste. 

fciD,  are.  ftuDe  Skt'gnugClt  an,  am  pleas- 

tuDem  if)i*  bojfct,  to  hope.  ed  with. 

Dag,  that.  Dag  QxmdfDe,  picture. 

Ofyne  JU  geben,  without  giving.  auS,  (out)  of. 

STRitfje,  trouble.  UtcDcvldnDifd),  Flemish. 

voerDen  rennet,  can  become.  @d)\\U,  school. 

gelefylt,  learned.  ttaUduifd),  Italian. 

roeifc,  wise.  voofyev,  whence. 

fagte  oft,  often  said.  UntcvfclncD,  difference. 

£U,  to.  Da  Docfj,  since. 

gl'CltnD/  friend.  fonft,  otherwise. 

icben,  life.  SReigung,  inclination. 

i||  nidjt  fo  fd)d^6av,  is  not  so  bcinafye    ganj    ubeveinjtimmt, 
valuable.  coincides  almost  entirely. 


PART  II.  CH.  5.]    RECAPITULATORY  EXERCISES.  67 

fc()6pft,  draws.  Saul),  country. 

au£,  from.  fyat,  has. 

Quelle,  source.  (Scirattd),  custom. 

icit>cnfct)aft,  passion.  0;$  gicfct,  there  are. 

(Bind  oDit  Unglucf,  good  or   gefylcv,  fault. 

ill  fortune.  (cicl)t,  easily, 

fragte,  inquired.  fid)  ben>ufft  roift),  becomes  con- 

ltad),  after.  scious. 

fanfc,  found.  forgfaitig,  carefully. 

JU  §mf(,  at  home.  Wvluvgt,  conceals. 


I  know  him.  He  knows  them.  She  knows  us.  You  know 
her.  They  know  them.  He  gives  it  to  them.  We  give  it  to 
him.  She  gives  it  to  me.  They  give  it  to  us.  Tell  it  to 
him.  He  told  it  to  them.  Take  pity  on  (of)  me.  He  is 
ashamed  (shames  himself)  of  thee.  We  remember  (ourselves 
of)  you.  There  are  ten2  of1  us1.  There  are  six2  of1  them1. 
Thou  shalt  love  thy  neighbour  as  thyself.  I  deny  it  to  my- 
self. He  was  not2  master3  of1  himself1.  When  thy  days  are2 
dark,1  then3  thy5  false^  friends7  depart4  from8  thee9,  but  thy 
true  friends  forsake  thee  not. 

They  gave  it  not  to  my  friend,  but  to  thine. 

We  owe  it  not  to  your  desert,  but  to  theirs. 

This  is  not  thy  lot  but  mine.     I  mean  this  house. 

This  is  the  man  (this  man  is  it)  of  whom  I  speak. 

Thou  must  do2  this/  but  not2  leave3  that1  (undone). 

This  is  his  own  estate. 

He  does  as  those  people  of  the  torrid  zone,  who  shoot5 
arrows1  at2  the3  sun4. 

Who  is  the  most  estimable  among  men  1  The  most  vir- 
tuous. 

What  (which)  man  can  promise4  himself1  constant2  happi- 
ness3 ? 

Which  season  is  the  pleasantest? 

know,  fcn'ne.  told,  fag'te. 

knows,  faint.  take  pity,  ettw'met  tud). 

you  —  know,   f  en'nct.  ashamed,  fdjdmt. 

they  —  know,  frn'UClt.  remember,  CVin'ntM. 

gives,  gtcbt.  there  are,  c£  ftut>. 

give,  gc'fcen.  shalt,  fellft. 

tell,  fa'ge.  love,  tic  ben* 


68 


RECAPITULATORY    EXERCISES. 


[book  I. 


neighbor,  Dtaclj'bav,  m.  3.  a.  C. 

as,  rote. 

deny,  fcerfa'ge. 

was,  roar. 

not,  ni d)t. 

master,  J^etT/  m.  2.  b. 

when,  wctUl. 

day,  %<X§,  m.  3.  b.  b. 

dark,  fcuvtf'el. 

are,  ftut). 

then,  fcann. 

depart,  roei'djen. 

false,  falfcl). 

friend,  gmtltb,  m.  3.  b.  b. 

from,  ftOU.  (Dat.) 

but,  a'ber. 

true,  real)  v. 

forsake,  fccvfaf  fen. 

gave,  ga'ben. 

but,  fou' bent. 

owe,  wrbanf'cn. 

desert,  33erbten|V,  m,  3.  b.  b. 

lot,  400^,  ».  3.  b.  6. 

mean,  mei'ne. 

house,  *£au6,  w.  3.  b.  C 

man,  20iann,  m.  3.  b.  e. 

is,  i\\.  » 

of,  t>on.  (Daf.) 

speak,  ve'fce. 


must,  mufft. 

this,   (Ace.  Neut.) 

do,  tfyun. 
but,  a'bev. 

that,  (^Icc.  Neut.) 

not  leave,  ntcl)t  (af  fen. 

own,  ei'gen. 

estate,  *©ut,  ?i.  3.  b.  e. 

does,  roac()t  eg. 

as,  roie. 

people,  *:Bolf,  ?i.  3.  b.  e. 

torrid,  f)ei§, 

zone,  Ufa'11*//-  1-  t» 
arrow,  spfctl,  m.  3.  b.  b. 
at,  gc'gen. 

sun,  ©on'ne,/.  1.  c. 
to  shoot,  ab'febicfetu 
estimable,  frijag'bar. 
among,  un'tcr.  (Dat.) 
man,  Dei*  ?0Tenfc(),  m.  2.  b. 
virtuous,  tu'gent>f)aft. 
can,  Hnn. 
himself.  (Dat.) 
constant,  beftan'btg. 
happiness,  (Btftcf,  n.  3.  b. 
promise,  tocvfprcdj'en. 
season,  ^afyr'jeit,/.  1.  b. 
pleasant,  an'gcnefjm. 


Many  persons  suffer  themselves  to5  be5  deceived5  by1  no- 
body2 except3  themselves4. 

Apply  thyself  to  virtue  ;  this  will  never2  forsake3  thee1. 

Whoever  is6  not4  diligent5  in1  his2  youth3,  will1  not6  know9 
(how)  to7  employ8  himself5  in2  his3  manhood4. 

Who  did  (has1  done3)  that2?  his  brother  or  your  sister? 

His  sister  and  mine. 

Which  house  (do)  you2  mean1  ? 

What  book  is  this? 

Who  will  get3  the1  prize2?  my  cousin  or  his? 

Judges  must  be8  just7  towards1  every  one2,  even3  towards4 
their5  enemies6. 


PART  II.  CH.  6.] 


VERBS. 


Put  these  coins  again  in  their  places. 
I  know  no  one  who  is3  so1  happy2  as  he. 
(We  must  give)  to  every  one  his  own. 


person,  9D?cnfdj. 

suffer,  faffen. 

by,  fcon.   (Dat.) 

except,  au'fcr, 

to  be  deceived,   bttl'lVgCtl. 

apply,  bejlci'ftge. 

to,  (Gen.) 

virtue,  Me  %\x'$txft,f.  1.  t>. 

will,  r»iv&. 

never,  nic. 

forsake,  wrfaffen. 

in,  in.  (Dat.) 

youth,  Su'genb,/.  l. 

not,  nicbt. 

diligent,  flctftg. 

is,  ijr. 

will,  ttirt>. 

manhood,   SOtan'ncSaltcr,   m. 

o.  a. 
to  employ,  jn  bcfdjaf tigeu. 
know,  nnffen. 

has,  t)at. 

that,  t>a$. 

done,  ^etf)au', 

brother,  *iSvn/Der/  m.  3.  a.  a. 


or,  o'fccr. 

sister,  ©djrocf'ter,/.  I.  C. 

mean,  mci'nct. 

what,  n>ag  fitv  tin. 

book,  * 95 ltd)/  ft.  3.  b.  e. 

will,  n>it&. 

prize,  spvci^/  m,  3.  b.  b. 

get,  fcafcon'tvagcn. 

cousin,  3$et'tor,  m.  3.  a.  C. 

judge,  SHidj'tcv,  m.  3.  a.  a, 

must,  mitf'fen. 

towards,  ge'gcn. 

even,  fclbji  (^4cc.) 

enemy,  gcint),  m,  3.  b.  6. 

put,  Ic'gCt. 

just  be,  gewffeC  fcin. 

coin,  Stfiin'je,  /.  1.  C. 

again,  iDic'bev. 

in,  auf.  (^lcc.) 

place,  *?pia£,  w.  3.  b.  b. 

know,  fcn'nc. 

happy,  gtftcf'lid). 

as,  al£. 

his  own,  fca£  fei'nigc. 


CHAPTER  VI. 


VERBS. 
General  Remarks. 

Verbs  express  the  connexion  between  subjects  (nouns), 
and  qualities  (adjectives  or  adverbs).  The  various  modes  in 
which  qualities  are  connected  with  subjects,  are  expressed  by 
different  kinds  of  verbs  and  the  different  parts  of  each  verb. 

I.  Verbs  are  divided  into  neuter,  active,  reflective,  and  pas- 
sive. Some  verbs  are  defective,  as  the  impersonal  verbs.  A 
complete  verb  comprehends,  besides  the  participles,  four  moods, 


70  VERBS.  [BOOK  I. 

the  infinitive,  the  indicative,  the  subjunctive,  and  the  impera* 
tive ;  and  these  principal  parts  of  the  verb  contain  different 
tenses  ;  with  the  exception  of  the  imperative,  which  has  only 
the  present  tense.  Each  tense  contains  two  numbers,  and 
three  persons  in  each  number. 

II.  Some  of  the  different  forms  of  the  verb  are  original, 
and  others  supplementary. 

The  original  forms  are  the  infinitive  present  of  the  active  or 
neuter  verb,  and  all  those  parts  which  are  formed  from  the 
infinitive  mood,  by  altering,  increasing,  or  diminishing  it, 
viz.  the  Present,  Imperfect,  Imperative,  and  the  Participles. 
Thus  from  the  infinitive  lie'ben,  to  love,  is  formed  the  imper- 
fect, idj  (ieb'te,  I  loved. 

The   supplementary   forms   are  made   by  joining  the    past 
participle,  or  the  infinitive  mood,  to  an  auxiliary  verb ;  as,  id) 

l;a  be  geliebt',  I  have  loved ;  id)  mv'bt  lie'ben,  I  shall  love. 

III.  In  their  original  forms,  all  German  verbs  are  active  or 
neuter  ;  except  the  past  participle,  which,  when  it  stands  by 
itself,  has  (as  in  English)  a.  passive  meaning  ;  as  geltebt',  loved. 
This  passive  meaning  is  preserved  when  the  past  participle  is 
joined  to  the  auxiliary  voev'fcen,  to  become,  which  in  this  in- 
stance is  Englished  to  be,  and  forms  the  passive  voice  ;  as,  id) 
WCt'tiC  geliebt',  I  am  loved.  But  the  past  participle  takes  an 
active  signification  when  it  is  joined  to  the  auxiliary  fya'ben,  to 
have ;  as,  id)  fya'be  geliebt',  I  have  loved. 

The  indicative  and  the  subjunctive  contain  two  original 
tenses,  the  present  and  the  imperfect. 

There  is  no  difference  between  active  and  neuter  verbs 
with  respect  to  the  original  tenses. 

IV.  The  verb  is  inflected  by  adding  certain  letters  to  the 
substance  of  the  verb.  The  substance  of  the  verb  consists  of 
those  letters  which,  in  the  infinitive  mood,  precede  the  final 
letters  en  (or  the  final  letter  n,  in  those  which  do  not  end  in 
en).  Thus  the  substance  of  the  verb  lie'ben,  to  love,  is  licb ; 
that  of  txmi'Utn,  to  enlarge,  is  evwci'tCf ;  and  that  of  ttyltn, 
to  do,  is  tl)lt. 

V.  The  additional  letters,  by  means  of  which  the  verb  is 
inflected,  are  joined  to  the  end  of  the  substance  of  the  verb  ; 
as,  id)  lieb-e,  I  love ;  tut  licb-ejl,  thou  lovest ;  id)  (terete,  I 
loved,  &c.  But  in  the  past  participle  most  verbs  have  also 
the  augment,  i.  e.  the  syllable  ge,  prefixed  to  the  substance  of 
the  word;  as,  lie'ben,  to  love,  past.  part,  geliebt',  loved;  fed)'= 
ten,  to  fight,  past.  part,  gefodyten,  fought. 


PART  II.  CH.  6.]  VERBS.  71 

VI.  The  augment  ge  is  not  prefixed,  when  the  verb  is  com- 
pounded with  be,  emp,  ent,  n,  fcet',  JCV,  or  ge,  which  are  fre- 
quently prefixed  to  it  to  express  particular  modifications  of  the 
original  meaning  of  the  verb.  Thus,  the  past  participle  of 
the  regular  verb,  gefo'bctl,  to  vow  (derived  from  (o'bcn,  to 
praise),  is  not  gegctobt,  but  gclobt'.  But  when  the  above- 
mentioned  syllables  are  not  prefixed  by  way  of  composi- 
tion, but  are  part  of  the  original  verb  itself,  the  syllable  ge  is 
prefixed  ;  as  in  bt'ttn,  to  pray,  past.  part,  gebe'tct,  pray- 
ed ;  and  in  the  irregular  verb,  ge'ben,  to  give,  past.  part. 
gege'ben,  given. 

VII.  All  the  original  forms  of  the  verb  which  are  made  of 
the  infinitive,  are  either  regular  or  irregular,  or  partly  regular 
and  partly  irregular.*  This  variety  of  forms,  though  it  is 
found  in  all  parts  of  the  verb,  occurs  particularly  in  the  form- 
ation of  the  imperfect  tense  and  the  past  participle.  Upon 
this  difference  three  modes  of  conjugation  are  founded,  the 
regular,  or  modern,  the  irregular,  or  ancient,  and  the  mixed 
conjugation. 

VIII.  A  verb  is  regular,  if,  in  its  conjugation,  the  letters  of 
the  substantial  part  remain  unchanged,  and  if,  at  the  same 
time,  the  imperfect  tense,  in  the  first  and  the  third  person  of 
the  singular  number,  ends  in  te  or  ete,  and  the  past  participle 
in  et,  or  t;  as,  fte'ben,  to  love,  imp.  id)  (or  er)  lieb'te,  or  lie'bete, 
I  (or  he)  loved  ;  past.  part,  gelte'bet,  or  gcltcbt',  loved. 

A  verb  is  irregular,  if,  in  its  conjugation,  one  or  several  of 
the  substantial  letters  of  the  word  are  changed,  and  if,  in  the 
first  and  third  person  singular  of  the  imperfect  tense,  the 
letters  te  or  ete  are  not  added,  and  the  past  participle  ends  in 
en  or  n  ;  as,  flic'fycn,  to  flee,  id)  (or  er)  jlofy,  I  (or  he)  fled, 
gejio'tycn,  or  gcflotyn',  fled. 

A  verb  is  mixed,  if,  in  its  conjugation,  one  or  the  other  of 
the  substantial  letters  is  changed,  but  at  the  same  time  the 
imperfect  and  the  past  participle  are  formed  in  the  regular 
way,  in  te,  and  t ;  as,  bvmg'en,  to  bring;  tc()  (or  er)  bradj'te, 
I  (or  he)  brought ;  gebradjt',  brought. 

IX.  The  substance  of  all  primitive  verbs,  that  is,  of  all 
those  which  are  not  formed  by  composition  or  derivation, 
consists  of  one  syllable. 

*  This  division  affects  the  supplementary  forms  only  in  as 
much  as  most  of  them  are  made  by  joining  an  auxiliary  verb 
to  the  past  participle,  which  is  either  regular  or  irregular. 


72 


REGULAR  VERBS. 


[book  I. 


§  1.    REGULAR   VERBS. 

In  every  regular  verb  the  additional  syllables  are  conform- 
able to  the  following  table. 

All  those  verbs,  the  substance  of  which  consists  of  more 
than  one  syllable,  are  regular. 


Indicative. 

Present. 

Subjunctive. 

1st  Per. 

2d  Per. 

3d  Per. 

1st  Per. 

2d  Per. 

3d  Per. 

Sing.          t 

1 

Plur.l      en 

i 

\\  or  ejt 
tor  et 

toret 

en 

e 
en 

eft 

et 

e 
en 

Imperfect, 

Singt 
Plur. 

te  or  ete 
ten  or  ttcn 

tejt  or  eteft 
ut  or  etet 

te  or  ete 
tenor  eten 

ete 
eten 

etejt 
Utt 

ete 
eten 

Imperative. 

Participle. 

Sing* 

— 

e 

e 

Present,  cnt). 
Past,  gc  —  etor  t. 

Plur. 

en 

et  or  t 

en 

Infinitive. 
Present,  en. 

Observation.  The  choice  between  the  endings  ft  and  eft, 
t  and  et,  te  and  ete,  U\l  and  ctcjt,  ten  and  eten,  M  and  CtCt, 
depends  on  euphony.  Thus,  in  the  imperfect  tense  of  the 
verb  lo'fcen,  to  praise,  we  may  use  either  tob'tC,  or  fo'cete ; 
but  in  ve'fcen,  to  speak,  we  must  say,  id)  VC'betC,  I  spoke,  and 
not  vefc'te,  because,  in  pronouncing,  this  could  not  be  distin- 
guished from  the  present,  id)  ve'fce,  I  speak. 


PART  II.  CH.  6.] 


REGULAR  VERBS. 


73 


Conjugation  of  the  Regular  Verb,  lie'beu,  to  love. 
Infinitive.  Participle. 

(ie'beit,  to  love.  Present.    Itc'bcnt),  loving. 

Past.        geliebt',  loved. 


Indicative. 


Subjunctive. 


Present. 


Singular.  Singular. 

id)  (ie'be,  I  love,  do  love,  or     id)  (ic'be,  I  may  love. 

am  loving, 
bit  liebjt  or  (tc'bcjt,  thou  lov-     tot  lic'bcft,  thou  mayst  love. 

est,  dost  love,  or  art  loving, 
er,  fie,  or  es  licbt  or  lie'bct,     cr  lic'bc,  he  may  love. 

he,    she,    or   it  loves,  does 

love,  or  is  loving. 

Plural.  Plural. 

voiv  (tc'bcn,  we  love,  do  love,  roir  Ue'ben,  we  may  love. 

or  are  loving. 

tf)V  licbt  or   lic'bct,   you  love,  ifyv  lic'bct,  you  may  love, 

fte   ItC'bcn,  they  love.  fte  Ue'ben,  they  may  love. 

Imperfect. 
Singular.  Singular. 

id)  licb'tt  or  (te'bete,  I  loved    id)  lie'bete,  I  might  love. 

or  did  love, 
tot  fieb'tefl  or  (tc'bctfft,   thou     tot  Ite'bctCft,  thou  mightst  love 

lovedst. 
CV  Ucb'tC  or  licb'cte,  he  loved.       er  fie'bcte,  he  might  love. 

Plural.  Plural. 

Xb'vc  Ueb'tcn  or  lic'bctctt,  we    n>iv  (ic'bctcn,  we  might  love 

loved. 

tfyr  licb'tct  or  lie'betct,    you    ifyu  lie'betct,  you  might  love, 
loved. 

fie  fteb'ten  or  lit'biton,  they    fte  lie'beten,  they  might  love. 

loved. 


74  IRREGULAR  VERBS.  [BOOK  1. 

Imperative. 
Singular. 


iu'bt  (Ml),  love  (thou), 
iu'bt  tv,  let  him  love. 


Plural. 

lit'bm  toiv,  let  us  love. 

iu'Ut  or  tiebt  (ifyt*)/  love  (yow)  or  do  (you)  love. 

lic'ben  fie,  let  them  love. 

So  conjugate,  [o'ben,  to  praise ;  g(au'6cn,  to  believe. 


§  2.    IRREGULAR  VERBS. 

The  change  of  letters  in  the  substantial  part  of  irregular 
verbs  commonly  affects  only  the  vowels ;  and,  in  this  case, 
the  first  and  the  third  person  of  the  imperfect  indicative  end 
with  the  final  letter  of  the  substantial  part ;  as,  fpring'Ctt,  to 
spring,  imperf.  indie,  icf)  fpvang,  I  sprang;  tt  fpvang,  he 
sprang  ;  past  part,  gcfpvuttg'cn.  But  sometimes  the  change 
affects  also  the  consonants ;  as,  fdjnci'bltt/  to  cut,  imperf.  id) 
fcfenif t ;  fein,  to  be,  pres.  id)  bill,  imperf.  id)  roar ;  past  part. 

geroe'fen.* 

The  imperfect  subjunctive  is  formed  by  adding  Z  to  the 
imperfect  indicative,  and  is  inflected  like  the  present  subjunc- 
tive ;  as,  fpving'CU,  to  spring,  imperf.  indie,  id)  fpvaug ;  imperf. 
subj.  id)  fpuftng'e,  &,c. 

When  either  of  the  vowels  a,  0,  or  U,  occurs  in  the  imper- 
fect indicative,  they  are  changed  into  d,.  b,  or  U,  in  the  sub- 
junctive ;  as,  fiic'gctl/  to  fly  ;  imperf  indie-.  ic()  flog  ;  imperf 
subj.  id)  jW'ge. 


*  The  different  tenses  of  the  substantive  verb,  feitt,  to  be, 
are,  in  German,  as  well  as  in  English,  composed  of  three 
distinct  verbs,  which  have  ceased  to  exist,  except  in  those 
tenses. 


PART  II.  CH.  6.]  MIXED  VERBS.  75 

Conjugation  of  the  Irregular  Verb,  ftng'en,  to  sing. 
Infinitive.  Participle. 

Present,    ftttg'cn,  to  sing.  Present,  ftng'enfc,   singing. 

Past,       gefnng'en,  sung. 


Indicative. 


Singular. 

1.  ftng'e. 

2.  ftng'et*. 

3.  ftng'et. 


Singular. 


1.  fang. 

2.  frtng'ejr. 

3.  fang. 


Plural. 

ftng'en. 
ftng'et. 
ftng'en. 


Plural. 

fang'en. 
fang'et. 
fang'en. 


Subjunctive. 


Present. 


Singular. 

ftng'e. 

ftng'eft. 

ftng'e. 


Imperfect. 


Singular. 

fdng'e. 

fdng'ejt. 

fdng'e. 


Imperative. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


Plural. 

fing'en. 
ftng'et. 
fing'en. 


Plural. 

fdng'en. 
fdng'et. 
fdng'en. 


2.  ftng'e  (tm). 

3.  ftng'e  ev. 


fing'en  reiv. 
ftng'et  (it}i-). 
ftng'en  fte. 


§  3.     MIXED    VERBS. 

The  conjugation  of  the  mixed  verb  is  like  that  of  regular 
verbs,  with  regard  to  the  endings  of  the  imperfect  tense  and 
the  past  participle,  and  it  resembles  that  of  the  irregular  verbs 
as  to  the  change  of  letters  in  the  substance  of  the  verb. 

Conjugation  of  the  Mixed  Verb,  fcenf'en,  to  think. 

Infinitive.  Participle. 

Present,    fcenf'en,  to  think.        Present.  &en£'cn&,  thinking. 

Past.       gcfcacl)t',  thought. 


76 


IRREGULAR    AND    MIXED    VERBS. 


[book  1. 


Indicative.                                   Subjunctive. 

Present. 

1. 

2. 

3' 

Singular. 

feenf'e. 
fccnfet. 

Plural.                                    Singular. 

fcenfett.                  frenfe. 
t»cnfet.                  fccnt'cft. 
fcenfen.                  fcenf'e. 

Imperfect. 

Plural. 

fcenfen. 
fcenfet. 
fcenf'cn. 

1. 

2. 
3. 

Singular. 

Mdyte. 

t>actytc|t. 

ti\dyu. 

Plural.                                      Singular. 

fcadytnt.                   fc&clytc. 
fcartytet.                   t>dd)tct^. 
fcaclyten.                  fcdcr/te. 

Imperative. 

Plural. 

fcdciyten. 
t>dct)  tet. 

fcdcr/tcn. 

Singular.                                      Plural. 

1 fcent'en 

2.  fcenf'e  (Mt).              bmt'tt 

3.  fcent'e  er.                 fcenf'm 

n>ii\ 
% 

A  List  of  all  the  Irregular  and  Mixed  Verbs. 

The  following  list  of  irregular  and  mixed  verbs  exhibits  in 
alphabetical  order  all  the  anomalous  forms  of  each.  Those 
parts  of  the  verb  which  are  not  given,  are  regular,  except 
when  the  sign  "&c.;'  is  put  after  the  first  or  second  person  of 
a  tense,  to  indicate  that  the  other  persons  of  that  tense  are 
formed  in  the  same  irregular  way,  according  to  page  75. 

If  for  the  same  tense  or  person,  two  or  more  forms  are  set 
down,  the  first  of  them  is  to  be  considered  as  the  most  usual ; 
and  when  the  regular  form  is  also  in  use,  it  is  inserted  in  a 
parenthesis. 

This  table  is  complete  in  regard  to  simple  verbs ;  but  of 
the  compound  verbs  it  contains  only  such  as  either  occur  very 
frequently,  or  are  not  easy  to  be  traced  to  their  origin,  or  differ 
in  some  respect  from  the  simple  verbs  from  which  they  are 
derived.  (The  section  on  Compound  Verbs,  containing  a  list 
of  the  particles  with  which  simple  verbs  are  most  frequently 
compounded,  will  enable  the  learner  to  trace  any  compound 
verb  to  the  simple  one  from  which  it  is  derived,  and  by  this 
means  to  find  out  any  irregularity  of  the  former  by  referring 
to  the  latter  in  the  following  list.) 


PART  II.  CH.  6.] 


IRREGULAR    VERBS. 


77 


to 

tm                 St* 
*■*  —i          "» 

'— *           ^* 

S3         C_^-»          ^* 
o        .^"  o         o 

•                     . 

%> 

r 
s 

•  *                   . 

1—1            d  6  «* 

o  o        o        o 

^i 

d           °3  <<3  -*" 

o        o 

«^^  .  d     d 

Ho 

u 

^^^—        ^C3- 

.5  «o  ,*^  !p  ,-  cti.  ^ 
«  ?"^  *■*  «■  s->  t3- 

-t-S 
O 

a, 

S 

»— i 

<s 

^*-.  •£-»  ^^>  ^j    J-»  ^i,    *-► 

• 

•*- 
3 

S3  ~    <u    «*•          ,--». 

O 

•    *-    o    ^* 

^^      .     d 

5^  *>  .  —  «        o  rt3_ 
•-=-»  ^1»  ^^^  ,^2^        ^   J_^ 

-go-e-e    ^e^ 

•  ^-fc                    •  ■*-*• 

•^^      -<-* 

>«^        -»-►  ••^        -^* 

S3    3 

„_ 

««=- 

JQ    O 

i->                       * 

«^    :-<■ 

«• 

CS3-'P 

o          .     • 

«^                       . 

.              •                   ♦> 

•»-» 

S3 

<-> 

W           V>*3- 

B 

CD 

S-i 

*53 

si  w-3     . 

Ph 

"fl 

tt-^  to      . 

'— - 

•  >**           ^~  S3 

<X» 

S3    O 

«■£ 

•^ 

»*          ^f 

^* 

«-♦              • 

•     «—            jO 

A 

JO 

X>           

<D 

~1     ^^ 

a)            B* 

S              o 

.3           15 

^     s  g     1 

&    O 

a            o  o       o 

^ 

**            ~ 

CO 

a>  ^       -S  -^        ■«-» 

^ 

S3          S3    O 

CO    <■• 

^*          «^   ■•-' 

en    S3          ^*    S3          S3 

S           2s 

-     -~I         S   «>         ^» 

va->                S3 

5>           JS 

O    S3         ^-— <35        tti. 

<3              «J. 

<**                    <_*     *  «** 

1     83         $ 

»         » 

8R     ^^     8R 

7# 


78 


IRREGULAR    VERBS. 


[book 


so 


f^o 

U 
•eo 

SO 


JO 


$3  ** 


•jo  js 


-$*->  <3D-Cl 

goo 

53  JO  .JO 

>jO    *5D  <3D 


JO  JO  JO 
<«►     fc*     *rf 

<3T)  <5D  «S3 


~    S3  **         *■»         i_i 


o  « 


iiii  .O  s£j  --> 

<^    i-.    o  c^  c*  ^ 

»yj  <3"j  <3j  <3j  <3D  <X> 


O 

— 

a. 


so 


•?o 

So 

s 

5q 


iO 


U«3 


-«o  . 


JO  JO 


<i»  oO  «0 


o 


"T  "ii  •«-» 


jo  -     *_►   e*1^ 

^rf    '— »     c^    -o. 


J3-    o 


o-e-e    -e«e*e    «««    ^e 


£5 

Jp- J=*  jo 


*2 


© 


>JO 


a) 

>- 

Oh 


So 


$*  %$ 

^^°©    „ 

S3    5  ^  CD 

o    ^r    c*    ^* 
,£> — I  sTjsO 


^  d  ■ 

O     o 
<irf    o    o 


08  J88 

>o        -yT 


•e-e^e    -e^-^e 


^>-^  °  °  d 

6  6  6  06  ^4c8 

.21  .ii  -2i  £  <s  <s  t*  <s 

..,",  .  *-f  .  ^(i    r£    *~>.  >•>          -  ^> 

Ei  is 


so 

e 

•to 


O    n 

^.  o 


O 
-t-k 


•«  41. 


*-■  JO 

-    O 

z     » 

iO 


I 

So 

u 


•I:  "w 
■/J     ^> 


v     V  9]     U 

»Cf  S  en  JO 

<*—  O  Ci-  >-i 

•^  _► .  — 

-   O  ^  r»   a) 

s  ^  «  «)  ? 

&  .»  .£!":->  o 

^    "+«^  ^     ^    -«-^ 


0  o 

9  © 

o  Jq  -Q 

j*  *».  "•■• 

CTj  SS  S3 

■v  *»  «* 

>•  Q>  <^ 


^3     -  > 

G   be  s 

-°  -O  J3 

Boo 

*^    *j    ->-> 

J3  e*  ^* 
^^   *•  ^* 

^  **  »** 

S3  X*  "rS 


rt 


A3 

a. 

i  - 

S  2  ^ 

S^    bC  O 

*"    /-,  ^ 

2^  o 


«  <>»   5- 


S3 


I  I 

-T  bfl 

S  c 

Q  © 


B    B    B 


PART  II.  CH.  6.]  IRREGULAR    VERBS. 


79 


«■-»              *^ 

j^ 

*** 

j^ 

— 

«-» 

^* 

ttt 

2        si        ^ 

^ 

&. 

<3i 
.5 

o 

SS 

*■*          *^-    *~*    *~? 

Vrf-      ♦— 

a               55 

^^ 

<*^ 

<*±— 

1  fa 

a        .„ .  ^    » j 

<s  55 

a               a 

«-» 

a~ 

U- 

a. 

t*        -— »  o   0 

JO    iO 

jo               jo 

JO 

«-^ 

«sl 

H 

•<-►        -^  j->  — 

o    <-» 

'_*                '-» 

ft> 

«-* 

S            U    ^   }* 

<3D  <D 

<X                 <3} 

<3D 

«^ 

<-> 

«* 

-_.             o    <1*    <«> 

hi 

«m 

S-i   s—^> 

*              * 

>s 

• 

o   «> 

•     •   O  S 

•             • 

» 

.?*           • 

• 

•            •      »          <>* 

•              • 

— *    a   55 

• 

c  w  *- 

► 

^s"vo 

• 

a   JO  JO       . 

JO 

• 

«* 

•~    a 

•-    —          >- 
O    O  ^-^  O 

d 

d 

6 

6  6. 

.  o 
o 

6.66 

d 

3 

3 

3 

"*-    55  !i3-   ^^£3> 

*5  '■'0  •—  -r*  0i_ 

*->  £J  r>j  •«»  «S 

•«-*  ti  ^a  it-  ^-» 

»a.~  <•>  <■**> 
«s  -^  "^  «■ 

■8  S3 3 

w   ^    ^    <3->  C* 

}<*s  T2  ""S*  •<£  —■ 
;  a  ^-r*—  a  r: 

3 

vO 

g 

/=> 

a- 

s 

jo          Si 

*— • 

jO  «a    s*   ^»  «_ 

/W 

%*> 

«* 

'-^ 

£T  ^*  ^»  ^  «-► 

•55 

'■"3 

_    h»     a             a 

*-^  ^   »-^ 

•^•^  j» 

/i» 

•g  JO    JO^/O 

*-> 

<->    **    "-»   <_>   t_» 

»^»  .<«» 

»**                      »^» 

•  •^ 

•** 

.** 

■♦*• 

••^        -^*  ••-*  -«^ 

•    ~— 

I-       !-                 '— 

• 

•        • 

• 

•     • 

O    o 

O    ©          O 

o 

o  o 

O 

o  o 

6^  d 

d 

3  S3^  6 
>a*ii£La  s 

d 

3 

o3  o£) 

3 

j- 

3  4   d     .   d 

r*      a      <^     "i          -w 

-^  —  ^,  ^_,  ^ 

55    ^    ^    ;_»    ^ 

#o     ^-v 

*— 

/^»     O     '_    jO     « 

JO 

«* 

<-> 

O 

t^            t*    c*    «^ 

i- 

« 

_  :_►  J_>         h» 

i- 

S-i 

^e-e  o 

/=* 

-g-io  /o-e/=* 

*e 

^ 

<-»   ^  *ci  'T^  '^ 

- «—  •*■* 

-<*>*                     .«-* 

»«■* 

■•* 

•** 

■«— 

- 

o 


&'a 
-Zra 

55 
so 


/o 


JO 


JO 


s     s 


«5 


55   55   ^'J&" 

5   2   s   i» 


55 
JO 


s 

'3 

en 

•a    bD 

<r> 

^3    »-< 

J-H 

.  JB  ^ 

■♦-i 

o 

-»5 

*- 

r+    ^- 

^> 

«>»    <»     0 

.  <*> 

CO 


s 


> 

•  — . 

o 

hi 


o 
o 

hi 


,0) 


©  ^ 


Q« 


Q 


«^  55 

5   '-   a 


"3  S 

a,  o 

^  o  g 

g  o^ 
be  2 

O    O  *5 

^  o 

O    55          55  +"  .j? 


a. 
o 

CO 


.« 


a-      a-g 

55  55    £ 

{5         ^ 


C*  •-    55 

«-  <D   a 

S    ^55 


.a-  55  '^  o 

--  S^  c 

■a  ^a->  ■ — k  nj 
a  a  a 


au 

IRREGULAR 

VERBS. 

[BOOK  I. 

Past 
articiple. 

O 

o 

O 

*•   ^>   »•   ^^ 
^*   <—  \*  a_fc 

S*  /*  .5  ,o 

Si  S 

Si                  Si 

o         o 

Rh 

;_► 

$^ 

i-t   *♦   *^ 

<-.       '-f       '^,      <L» 

<_,  s* 

o         '-» 

Ct> 

O 

«^»          <Si 

«j  *3D  «D  <S: 

♦3D  <X) 

•5D          «D 

It 

!- 

J- 

^ N                 ^ V 

B 

o  «* 

«* 

•     •     •    o 

•   o 

•~                         -~- 

Ho 

0r^«-> 

y 

-~>0                        0 

(3 

*■      t> 

fc . 

•                   »                  • 

■*-*«>»              ^*  .,0. 

>j.   fSi  **>  J—-  <-» 

C  x*  **  «*  "* 

<* 

-"— 

*         *         '     '<£_ 

^?i- 

^-^-           v_^ 

O        <i* 

d    d 

*J 

^ 

a©  °3 

^"^  d 

' 

;    d 

-4-> 

o 

•to 

(■a 

4 

^   0 

°<3  «**  « 

•/S  .«  .—  «o 

<+^<Ci- 

•             -    • 

o        o 

M-* 

*— *■ 

^*  <—  o 

?->■_» 

w    <-*    ^-^    ^* 

w     v^ 

^^           1_» 

*4-«* 

'-*          -  — 

<«^  ■«*  -^^  -^* 

•V-*     >«^ 

•o^               -<— » 

•8S 

d   d 

o 

i— i 

<-> 

O    C    «* 

d    d 

o     •   d   «5 

*-*     ^*     *B^     ^ 

■                     • 

c        o 

.£3-    ° 

°3  -e  o 

si3-  •^3'  >£?  •^3- 

•  ♦^ 

■•■* 

•  «**            -  — * 

•  ♦i^  •«-*  ••■*  »*^ 

•  *^  -*^ 

•  ^-*              '*^ 

w 

♦  ,                   -^   -«-» 

3>+ 

'      g 

js~  si 

:%► 

h 

«j  ■«-►•—  >5i. 

S-i 

S3 

HO 

53 
It" 

o 

«f  wJ  rt<  '>?J> 

trf        ^>        ^-»        i-» 

•     4-^ 

*  >* 

** 

•  cti. 

*-  ^— x        ^£3- 

o    *-      ^  <-» 
O  »±i-  S3 

■S*>«>-^  S3 

st'S 

sc-tj  «^ 

5 

^:  s  v-^s 

s. 

•*A 

gg  ."?  t2  i^ 

*«£. 

4-* 

» 

*■+         4-^         — *         *^ 

*^ 

S3         /» 

A 

A 

A    AAA 

/s 

/a        - — 

i 

G 

„G 

G 

H3 

bD 

J-, 

O 

fH 

a 

•  i— i 

a> 

bo 

3 

o 

* 

t3 

o 

2 

w 

0) 

CO 

j3 

4-1 

o 

o 

°                  .  3  =   rt   bo 

G   5 
*    O 

03 

o 

<*» 

6* 

CD 

si        o 

o  -  o  o 

o  ♦* 

o       is 

*-> 

s 

"r* 

^T3 

<3D            ^ 

£i   *♦ 

e       5  >■» 

r3 

**"                             *^ 

<_>     ri     <-_^     o 

S  *~* 

*->       <*►  nj 

«    G 

Si      <^ 

S 

&) 

b)    © 

»D»D»0»0 

80«0 

£>    So 

PART  II.   CH.  6.]  IRREGULAR    VERBS. 


81 


**■* 

»* 

'~» 

•-• 

•rfS-'— *    CD  cD 

o 

.  .. 

o 

4& 
o 

— - 

o 

—   <i   <S   — 

0 

Q* 

te- 

<xi 

<*t 

cr. 

x> 

«3i 

>a 

/a  <*1  cd-S 

cr. 

JS 

«» 

'-. 

<*► 

c* 

«rf 

'— 

6* 

<-.   «•»  <^  «^ 

<L-> 

«* 

«p 

CD 

CD 

cr. 

en 

<SD 

«j 

CD  CD  CD  CD 

cr 

CD 

— 

^^^ 

\\ 

/ — ^ 

M 

• 

O 

'^N     * 

• 

>-. 

u 

•             •              •             • 

O 

o 

<3D 

o 

• 

• 

. 

^ 

•              •              •              • 

«j 

• 

7*» 

• 

^^; 

^^^ 

•                             •             • 

-«_» 

i*    CTj  «j 

jM 

<-> 

C- 

» — * 

«3j 

v - 

*CD 

u 

o 

u> 

O 

O 

6  6^6 

o   Crf    ,J-  ,** 

• 

o 

o 

d 

d 

6 

■U4 

d   ^         d 
°$  ^   d  °^ 

d 

d 

ir~  cd  <->  ?"" 

<-* 

cc 

CD 

<)o 

CD  CD  CD  ^ 
^C  *C  "C  "«> 

4_> 

^Cl 

cr. 

W    CD 

«o 

*^*  •** 

-  — * 

k«M* 

*^^ 

•^^ 

•*-* 

•  *^ 

-—    »^J>   *«-^     <—* 

••i^ 

•^* 

t. 

• 

>M 

o 

o 

O 

^*— s 

•a 

CD 

# 

«                                    • 

1^  II 

<*e2}sr<ff 

• 

o 

o 

5  « 

d 

** 

• 

— 
o 

•A 

0     •        0 
•^  .Si  «  S 

• 

O 

d 
If 

a£s 

,»■» 

e 

«3D 

<35 

CD  CD  CD  ^ 

«xt 

ill 
0 

^e-e^- 

c 

B 

o-e 

^e 

5 

CD^J 

•♦^  -*^ 

■*■► 

-*■* 

-«^ 

•^^ 

•  ^^ 

-^^ 

•— •  •—  -— >  «•> 

■♦* 

•*" * 

>-i 

$1 

•— *^^» 

v\  — ^ 

o 

o 

_    ■*-► 

*tih 

•         -i—                  •                  • 

-<-► 

•it             .                 . 

<£i 

cr> 

<-> 

CD 

4_» 

'CD 

o  *»,£ 

.       ^k      *       . 

t*    -  cd 

t<* 

>*-> 

>**. 

.2^ 

^ 

r?  *-»    S» 

"§     ' 

■u» 

S) 

•^»    CD 

CD 

J->    «-* 

#■* 

JO 

SJ 

3 

•   S3     •.     • 

•2* 

*>*    jO 

a 

/o 

x> 

A 

x> 

O 

0 

M 

^C 

-<-» 

■M 

0> 

M 

-4-> 

T3 

> 

3 

i- 

C 

M         ^ 

^^ 

0 

O 

-i-> 

c2 

cd 

<^       ^^       C3       .  * 

^3 

0 

to  flow 
to  ask 

> 

cd 

O 

N 

o 

C 

s 

©o 

to 

B 

•  ^-* 

O 

> 

3d 
o 

s 
s 

0 
0 

0 

8  s  ^  S 

O    r>    ° 
*  2    be 

O 
0) 
O 

0) 

O     Cd 

<-* 

05- 

2 

8 

•5-    Ms 

<b# 

"J* 

««5 

«k» 

^> 

«> 

c*    ^^    ^>    c^     **•* 

^,    f 

-<    ^*    — 

toife 

to 

© 

©     i 

S 

© 

@©©S) 

© 

© 

82 

IRREGULAR    VERBS. 

[book  I. 

^* 

• 

j5^ 

** 

Q# 

£ 

1         « 

~  «  S 
<«*  S  .P 

»^ 

J^-e* 

>v  **    c 

i?- 

4->     CD 

O 

g^  s 

^cj  3 

e 

7Z 

u  £Z- 

<SD  <X)  <X) 

<R  <3D 

J3~J=?- 

fti 

«>> 

<-,  <-> 

<rf         «>> 

<^ .    <^    *^,. 

<-.    '^ 

«-»     <^» 

CD 

CD  CD 

<D          «) 

<5D  <T)  <Xs 

«3D  <*} 

CD  CD 

^— x 

^— ^ 

. 

J-> 

>-i 

*      •       • 

•             • 

•             • 

So 

o  • 

tf> 

O 

6* 

tc» 

<-* 

•       •       • 

• 

•             • 

1 

CD 

CD 

•          ^.      «h>      •      •      • 

•  • 

•  • 

•  • 

•  • 

v_^ 

v—»' 

d  d 

o    ^* 

•to 

S 

• 

d  d 

4  4 

«-*    o 

^«€* 

4  4 
^  «?  d 

o  o       5 

4  4  £  s 

^-^«a:  -tr 

»cs  .21.2 

o 

5Q 

CD 

CD  <3:>  <3D 

.<-.  «■* 

-«— k           •** 

•  ♦^  .fc^  -^^ 

•  •^  *^^ 

•  «^.  .«^  •♦>* 

• 

>-> 

a. 
S 

so 

d 

4 

d  d 

^1 

4^ 

^     •   d 

u 

{xc 

"£  cs 

^. 

^  -  - 

1?* 

o 

CD 

<*cd 

at,  *■* 

£*/—  cd 

« 

*©*> 

-e  o-e 

e^e^e  «^ 

•** 

•4-ft        W 

•  ^*        ••-k 

•**  --^  .^* 

.♦-*  -~^ 

•  **  .^*  .*^ 

J5- 

<-> 

J5 

i* 

>u» 

4-> 

a 

0 

•<S1 

so 

CD 

cd 

<•* 

CD 
CS  JS-^^ 

tn 

w 

o 

**. 

&» 

^^^  i* 

<D 

is 

•—      1, 

y      ^ 

<-►      . 

t*  ^ 

Ih 

^3 

^fc 

r»*   y 

M 

iu   o* 

Ph 

►5 

rft* 

■X2-  <^ 

o 

^ 
>*■> 

*  jj 

«C$,i^ 

>*■» 

s£>      * 

*■  ■~—  CD 

^*- 

•  .  .<-► 

6* 

»><s 

CD 

"Si 

4 

CD 

CJ   w<Ji  t><i 

;_> 

3  -y> 

j-> 

»      . 

*^     -^     w 

^^     ^H      ^o 

«»» 

>o   «> 

<-► 

A 

AAA 

O 

O         3 

O 

O 

*j 

■«->          .  — 

-»-> 

■p 

o    . 

Oh   =0 

O, 

.S        o 

5    § 

>> 

cti          -^ 

£      -a 

N 

'a? 

o 

.ts  9s 
o 

-4-> 

J— 

3      § 

Oh 

qj  id  -a 

en  ^    to 

o  .a 

2  2  ^  ^ 

•  ^4 

bo  5 

'^   o 
o  * 

bD 

L-   i— i     CS 

o   o  +* 

<** 

*•  —  *^  a 

o  S   s   s 

■ -  •  -  S  a 
^r  Ji  ^  bo 

«   ?    CL 

"^-f    ^         CO 

ss  *-  ^* 
g^  •>-»    CD 

"cj  ^5  5 

© 

©S) 

©    © 

©S)© 

©0 

tp-^tQ' 

PART  II.  CH.  6.] 


IRREGULAR    VERBS. 


83 


n 

ft 

^> 

'-* 

-^ 

n 

o 

<* 

6* 

«i  <3D 

8  « 


<«►  o 


£  si 

ft*      Si 

ft 
ft* 

ft    •!->     ft>     ~ 

-,          ** 

s 

<u 

u—  ~  Xr  ft 
<i—  ~  o  o 

Sitr 

a 

~ 

.          .— 

•o 

O 

J_  *«_►  it*  CU» 

■j->  a-> 

<St* 

a- 

^    «-.    c«    '-» 

«*  ft* 

ft* 

'-. 

<X>  <Tj  <Z)  <Tj 

<X>  <35 

<3D 

<X> 

o 


ft 


itr^* 


- 
o 


-   - 
o  o 


•§ -8  «,  |  •* J  «$ 


o 

ft*    «» 


o 

eg 

.ft* 


iw 


o 


2    «2«8 


21- 

d  SI  <£** 


3 


*3 

■it* 


o 

4 


■a- 


O 


.    O 


— 

o 


^-v.         it*  iU  it- 


d 


o 


£    <*$$ 


o 

•  ■— -►UW  ■*•*    <5 
0  4*  '-*  it* 


o 

4 


o 

ft* 

U 

<4-> 

si 

^ 

S3 

►** 

o 

si 

4* 

^T 

^* 

& 

it- 

ft* 

j=j- 

t-» 

^k 

m 

.  i* 

rfa* 

>=>     . 

«* 

r*-» 

si 

o 

•  «£ 

si 

si 

s=T^ 

<Z- 

si 

o 

<— • 

J-. 

v  fS    <-» 

•J5- 

0 

it*  s 

•  «■» 

** 

jS 

4 

•g'au 

jO 

/^ 

CD 

V 

s  ° 

S 

J  « 

a, 

W3 

"O    O    4)7| 

3  a 

o 

T3  ^ 

ed 

•2    C  — '    ° 

o  -5 

o 

Q) 

J8.S 

X3    rC 

<n-5 

^■Zts 

5  o 

o 

— 

X2 
O 

2  o 

©  5 

o 

o  «  -^  j. 

-SiE 

♦5L<E- 

A*     b* 

ft* 

-  «  SS  2J 

si  S  S  si 

**-  -T*  -      si 

_-~       —    '-*     S- 

ss  «»► 

ft* 

S 
S 

o 

ft* 

** 
^* 

<p^ 

<r^»i-> 

«n 

^(^(ss;^ 

^^ 

^ 

s*s 

84 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


BOOK 

I 

*•+ 

«*» 

<^< 

^ 

/S* 

<2 

« 

s 

*4 

«* 

^> 

<3i  <35 

c/j     "ea1 


o 


<35 


<3D 


5$ 


^   ^*   j5 

*-»  ^»>  JT"" 

•  ■—  .«-    <*> 

fe*      <•»       «»► 

<X)  <33  «3D 


So 

Si 


J-4 

o 

**  JO 


c 

J-H 

CD 

a. 


so 
5Q 


o 

4 


•3 


JO 


6 
4 

o 
4 

•         • 

o  o 

*8^ 

w^^  ..^>  «-^2*  *^*  w^* 

u    u   w  t-  Ti 


O 

<3 


a 

•co 
so 


^ 


o 


/o 

Si 


o        o  S  o 

<3  og^og 


-«-►  «^  2* 


o  o 


^*e    ^e-e 


o 

JO 

•  — 

s 


1=1 

CD 

CD 

■— 


io 


■fl 


op 

■S    1 


JO 


o 


o 


iO 


«^  ^*    ^ 


JO 
JO 


*£ 


JO  /o 


•-i 
O 


&Z? 


f^  <-f 


JO 


&. 

• 

CD 

ft 

CD 

■*o 

O 

s 

o 

«^ 

e 

•*. 

--> 

•«■* 

j-> 

(^ 

T3 
O 


o       o 

+5  -^ 


a 
d 


3^  S 


en  '       cd 
O    »-i 

O 


O  2 


CD 

I  o 

CD     CD*" 

S  ~  "O 

oog 

^   w    o 


JO 


<^    <->    — 
JO  Xf-  £ 

<^    <^    *> 

v^V   w»*   v*V 


•g  o 


bfl 


03 


5    Q 


S   g    to 


«   « 


-      JO 


6 


PART  II.  CH.  6.] 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


85 


^  CD 

•— 

1=              6 

_    *j            ►*    CD 

^:           «iL  cd      ^— 

o 

o     ,_ 

'-. 

v»—  o 

r                 o 

cs               »^_)5i-        i*    u,   ^ 

jj 

£  6 

B 

5 

cr- 

cd 

CD 
o 

C   CD 

CD                        CD 

CD                 CD  CD          CD 

CD 

j-i 

o 

■j 

i                «     •          • 

O 

o 

>^^^' 

'**—*' 

r-> 

/■_» 

^. 

^ 

•     •           • 

<-» 

'-* 

♦—* 

d 

5* 

S 

5  j& 

»                •     •           • 

3^" 

o  ^^ 

^T*  d 

• 

d     . 

^  «-   CD     ^ 

d 

£L 

s 

J3> 

C  CD-     ^* 

«o  ^_ 

n 

._  «o 

•« 

u—  »-♦*■  ~> 

» 

n  3 

»■*    j5 

#■*■ 

a--~^-—,a- 

CJ^ 

«~*    #•*- 

>_ 

■^    S* 

•— * 

<-»    <-» 

e-e  o^g- 

■e 

>«■* 

•  «^  -«* 

**^ 

»**  •  — •        **i^ 

■  *-— 

c 

d   o 

C 

d 

J? 

d 

«3 

1     £ 

i                          o 

•      -  is}    ° 

►                 ^    CD  CD     ^ 

• 

3    O 

£ 

1            s 

F                    JEr- 

»   ^  *2    °  •>£> 

— . *    -^ 

J« 

*- 
#■ 

:           »-     ^-s»- 

cr 

.»  s 

.*~> 

*^T    .  ^7~ 

>               .  ^> 

*- 

^             ^i?   o-S" 

^ 

<_»     ' 

■_^ 

*w         -w 

c 

•                 <_* 

■- 

»               ^.^   <-^    w    <«. 

v^» 

»•* 

•  •^ 

.«*  ■  — * 

-*- 

*                -^— 

*              ■•*  *^*        ■•^ 

*■ 

3-1   , — » 


^> 


•n  en      cc= 


r*—      f^J 


~ *        *>+       ++        ++        — t 


s 


c 

e 


S       c 


a 


iO   .w  .— . 


CD     fafl 

C3  .-.  (V) 

^=     CO  fcb 

.22    ^  «  -a 

O  -Q    -^  CD 
o    ^    ^ 

<4—  CD—1  ST 

'■°  >      O  "S" 


CD 

a 

CD 

s 

o 


S> 


CD 


§    § 


0)  ^3 

ai 

o 

fcfl's 

S 

crt 

to    s- 

•a  cd 

E^ 

C 

o 

ft.  ^  ° 
^2  2 

o 

w  o 

» 

•~.  •« 

^. 

.-= 

S 

s  s 

--» 

CD 

—     CO 

~ 

<*—  CD 

cd 

w    bD 

— 

— 

o    C 

S)       ^)  ^"CT*      fe^ 


8 


Q 


SG 

IRREGULAR  VERBS. 

[book  I. 

^ 

^*o 

CD 

ho  .a- 

<-t 

-Sss?«     55H      « 

*""                    <"^—         .»-                Cat            ^"*            ^^ '                                 **»                    #»^>         «*■•*                                    f_^A 

0          0 

e 

»  o 

•<3    u.    :_»    :_    :-»    :->          }-•    t->    u.          i-f 

Oi 

«i»  > — ' 

;_,     ^     -._     <_     c-.     ^»              •_     c     c»>              «■* 

z*       «^ 

«30 

«}  *33  00  <X>  <*D          00  00  00          00 

«3          <3D 

to 

• 

•  • 

•  • 

S 

•                   • 

6 

o 

a 

a3    o 

•                                                   •       • 

Si 

to 
u 
K 

3 

*«3 

<s>        **                                              ^    ^     ^*    **%* 

<->  <.>  c^-  •«_►        i*  ^  ~  s  o 

S      0 

JS 

.**  -—  ■•_>  ■«->                   oO  «f5  "'i    ~-      ■  <-* 

uO           »0 

+■! 

SO 

^— v 

<-*     •— •     «-*     «^                        «^     •— *     •.*     ^^     ^* 

*  ^             *.*— 

o 

^ 

!m 

*-v                                                       *-.               <*< 

& 

>g  o 

*_»       <— <      «U»      <_•           •                   »_»       •_       '— <       *^      *— ' 

••!-* 

-^^   •♦.*   **^    -  ^^                        -^^    -^*    ••^              •*■* 

-*— .              -^^ 

• 

"      ^~N                                                                   »-< 

Ih 

O-, 

o 

%  6                     ° 

O 

a 

SO 

•a 

# 

*  08             .      ^ 

*->* 

to 

J-   o 

^JjI'Sp^   ^J 

6  0 

1   -a* 

1?* 

«-* 

t*^^t^       ^t^^t*           **— 

'-^-        ^..—  iT3 

0                         55 

.0          ^3-  ,** 

•  .-^ 

.«■*  •♦.*  •  «^  •  ^*  -^^           *^-»  **^  - *i^           »*^ 

■  *~*           **"— 

-*-j 

w 
a 

s£>      ....                ... 

,-«-» 

U— 

r— 

•<•* 

"tS 

^^ 

03 

to 

j^.    .     .     .     .          ... 

t2_ 

0H 

2» 

•• 

•^ 

^ 

"ii.    ....           ...           . 

«ti     .     .     .     .           .     .»    . 

_            .             •             .            .                           ...                           a 

a, 

^^ 

0 
1-1 

t2^ 

13 

"£  S 

i 
1 

1 

1 

1 

• 

S3 

'  (TO 

"to 
•ea 

a 

bo 
C 

*•* 

«                      —  ^  2 

to  •»* 

to    s 

s  2  s 

j 

tr«C 

TS    <»*    c*    «rf    <i*          -— .  •—  •—  ^~^  •* 

5    S    «ri 

j 

e 

rSwww      www      w 

©        t$ 

PART  II.  CH.  6.] 


IRREGULAR    VERBS. 


,ft* 

it- 

ft* 

ft* 

— » 

ft* 

ft* 

O 

ft* 

ft* 
**  fc 

o 

C  5* 

C  ft* 

<^-_CD 

»* 

*^    *^ 

ft*  r* 

*-> 

.  **^ 

.  ^"> 

.  **-?» 

.  *-> 

*-^s 

*»>  „  ^-> 

^-C-"  -  ^"*N 

•*£*  ,rv 

e 

s£? 

<— » 

"C    ■ 

*— >     ■— • 

■-*■    u» 

(_• 

*  ». 

*  ^ 

*  .»      *  r- 

*<■     *^ 

*  »       *  m 

* , 

-^ 

ft* 

cd 

<3S 

cD 

CD 

CD 

CD 

CD  CD 

CD  CD 

rr,  «> 

CD 

CD 

x-v  ° 

ft* 

*-*  *■*  l_k 

_  .j—    erf 
ft*    «^  ■  — 


O 

^*    *~ 

.—    ft* 


6  6  <i   °, 


£*  w    S    *» 


— 
O 


ft* 

*"ft* 


-8 


** 

ft* 

V* 


O 
08 


t)    O    o    o 


i   o   o 


9  o 


j  .8  «3  «§  .8  «8  3     "8.8 


*~  -.*■  **  ~^ «-  «*     .?* 
s  aj.io  £  <*-  cd    ;p 
«-»  ^*  «>  v_»     <-* 


o 

■8 


■""c*     Ti      <_» 


^if-er 


4 


*-      »** 


—  .—         .—        «o 


w  — -» ,  ~   ft*         ft*         ^r         ^         —      ^  — -  •—   *-,  •—  »ii        •—  •  ■—         •—        «ft* 
♦V  *^   c»  ty*        >^*        >'->        *£*        ■*£  X  ""Ci  ~^f  .~  *\i  *C        t<-'  ^C?        *C*        *C 


o 


d    o    «    8 
u^w   *J**o 

1*^^— *     -L-*      ft* 
w      ft*    .^~        ■•"^ 

.*•>  ,  **^  ,ft*       *-N 


s     6 

«8     08 


.s     « 


o 

«3 


o 


O    O 


0) 

■*-> 
cd 


S3 
.0 


ft* 


0)  T3 

a, 

0) 

ca 

Oh 

S  s 

CO 

Uh 

£;  0 

ed 

O    w 

/-s 

o 
o 


*-> 

ctf 

a> 

*c 

cc 


*G 

CO 

3 

a, 


<+^  CD 

«^S«CJ 


JO    iC* 


^  TS 

cd 

ctf    C3 

•*-> 

Dh    W 

QJ  .S 

2  ^ 

cu  -Q 

C      fr, 

O      CS 

0 

X      kfl 

fC  qs 

co 

CO        Q 

O      © 

o2 

O  *" 

-^  -is 

CO 


^*   *-'  5i   *i  ft*   Hi  *- 

*-*  ft*  *  ~      ft*      *■     c* 

*^     -  "^  co  *§■  O  **^ 


ft* 


"8.    M 


co 


*^         *—  — *  »  ^         ""  *■  ~  «-*^  *^  ft*    *—    —    S  JS 


CU 

3 


wO 


-      .ifi  ■-»•—**  .—  ft*  ^ 

c*    cj  .—    ft*    «^    ;-    «^»   ^j  .-*  "Tt 

co  ""S"  'S  "^  ■'S'  "k  ^S"  — 


*-*      Q      C—     S  CS     CJ    •  —      ft*     ft*      ctf      ft*     ■»-> 


©®     ®     ®     ©     ©     ©     ®®     ®®     ©©     ©    (S) 


88 

IRREGULAR    VERBS 

[book  I. 

CD 

^  0 

•3  £±  0*  <-  —        s 

*^    •"*    Ji    ^* 

Tr*  -?*  ir*  Vs-* 
•L*    <^    -u-»    0 

O 

a 

.8-8 

£      2  "8  S      « 

n  ^  u  s 

'& 

g 

.->   <_><_»    r* 

t>    ^-^    »~  .  <->      ^-»    ^_^    i-t 

'^~  *^.~  ^~>  ^-> 
-  <_,  0  <^  ^— > 

~c 

'™*       ^~>     -^ 

rt  <_  «■• 

*  m 

«~  '»  * .      *•* 

c<    t  "^i  >^   <-*    h;  ^ 

cJ-  *—  ** 

A, 

'~* 

&»•    <->    «*    »^o          CD   O  *--—  «»    "35  O  •«. 

-  -—  -i>  '—  --» 

<^> 

CD  c-.  — ► 

CD 

CD  CD 

v_^                  CTjn_^ 

CTj  CD  <3j  <SD 

CD 

CD 

"to 

•                                            ■              • 

Q 

«-*5 

«*5 

j„ 

•     "»■» 

r           •                                   •           • 

.   C   0 

^^^         *                                   *           * 

*"    »*"                            -<    **""*» 

•<o 
to 

8 

O 

2> 

6  6 

"^»  "°           erf       -°3 

^s-  y-—       i*  *w  «c> 

0    .  d  c>' 

w»     ^     ^       %* 

m     <t*    X^  vO 

6 

0 

O 
6* 

lS> 

di 

8  8 

ty   '-1       '2  5  ?t 

*       t             •      v             »      ^            C*^ 

£ 

& 

a 

o. 

sC*   «£> 

"'               sJP    "^  >'-' 

^  ^">  ,  ^->  ^^->     ^*>> 

-fcf> 

■C*" 

5Q 

w 

'— '     *— » 

•        •     "— »  <**  ^™~ 

V-*      %- •      v^      %-* 

^—* 

-i-> 

O        O     <^,il     fcn 

*^ 

o 

c 

•^^e 

•^^  4  -e^e^ 

■—     '— '   "^     '^» 

J- 
03 

•  *»^ 

•«t»  •*— ► 

.«■*       >«-* « #^ 

•  ^*   •  »•*   ■•-*   -•<* 

**^ 

*  *■* 

^  *"        -! 

Cl, 

«>*>»&        0 

a 
i— i 

•<o 
•to 

d 

CD 

c^4 

2  2      .4  0 

2  Ct.      «3  -  ^. 

0*    •  0  0 

d 

CD 

• 

0 

*w 

-.-   0 

5.  fcT     .i  5  ^ 

^-0     s^e 

<U»     <i*    •«-»    O 

O 

*§ 

5 

8  8 

"S'S'S  s 

'g 

S 

3 

£. 

O    *^->     .'-*       Vrf 

» j   >  j 

O    O  Ci-^^-^ 

-  m 

'■^ 

*e 

-e^e 

•^  o3  "^  -g"  *g-  O 

xi  v->  <- >  <~* 

.^S1 

•*^ 

>  «-^  >  «—* 

>•■*                             >«^    •  «—* 

■  «M*      •*■*      -^*      «^* 

•*-k 

**"^ 

<4-» 

.    ♦*» 

^J* 

4-» 

•      *•• 

>«irt 

^3" 

^ 

w 

S3 

w 

0 

■u 

s> 

i* 

' 

d 

"<S> 

w 

03 

to 

f*-» 

t: 

<x> 

.   *> 

*k 

is 

•  8 
"Si 

•  ^* 

t 

S 

O 

-t-> 

c 

w 

a 

S 

•  •■* 

In 

O  ^ 

-5  a 

0*           §  " 

03          0)   2 

(1) 

•  l-H 

CO 

en 

"to 

O 

0  0 

2          22 

0  °      2 
^  o2 

•i*  <-►  -1^  ^* 

O 

O 

"cD 

CP    ,^- 

«-    CD 
3  .— 

*-* 

J^ 

«-»  ^» 

e+                         'T*      *~* 

.^-  .~^-» .—  </<^ 

CL  <-► 

o» 

•  <-* 

c  c 

*3i                           ^*      f^ 

•:->     <^»    ^-»     <_j 

CL  » 

g 

^^     *-* 

*-^                            *-•      J-» 

J-»       ?-►       J-»       5i 

r-l       "" 

sf*> 

^,*">  xft* 

^r-p*                          '■.f7s   JP* 

•^5"  -^"^  „f7*  ^ 

—>    .  «^N 

-% 

s 

•— »     ■— * 

*-*                CS  ^3 

'w>    <_*<—»<—> 

J.       w 

& 

®® 

©       ®® 

®®®@ 

^ 

® 

PARI'  II.  CII.  6.] 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


89 


it            jj 

* 

cd       ?* 

S3          o 

♦^ 

4-* 

■*-*    £* 

si  •-*  j3 
'-^  ^  '-^ 

_. 

w 

&  - 

g 

S       B 

<-> 

>=»    £ 

cdo->  .r* 

>7* 

m 

,  *-->    *^ 

£3 

<—.  «■»  <-» 

.<** 

g 

►**     ° 

5  5  o 

» j 

£- 

>  J 

*  i^ 

■^.   S3 

c* 

/-» 

C    <*»    ««► 

<-. 

o 

•^     -^ 

'.-*■+'— 

w 

'_» 

CD 

CD 

cd       cd 

CD 

CD 

cd  cd 

CD  <5D  CD 

cd 

CD 

o  •J- 


■8 

/J 


o 

VCD 


o   o 


s    "s?   ?  s  $ 


a 


«o 


»  g  ~ 


«-CS 


g  O 

5  °  °  S        d 

-  -  eg** 

70    ~  ~  S3    7L  >""j. 


j&  -i-   *» 


w     w     »    u  C  ~     >■'     %i  ^^ 


o  o 

$4 


S3    S 

g  2 


-g-  © 


JO 


CD 


o 
d  °^     . 
°^  ,"  S   °*   o   o 


*-»  >o  -t-T 

ii>  ~i>  -*-»   ct.cj-,    5; 


^^  ^■*-  ^-*  l^»  *— .     *^*      ^     *-^     •«*     '.^  *«^ 


££ 


^>      .^ 


O 

+j 

s 

en 

C 

^ 
^J 

«3 

o 

c3 

> 

O 

O 

0) 
CO 

C  7Z 

3 
o  ^ 

^* 

-»j 

•♦-> 

O 

CI) 

O     o 

*j    O    o- 

J5 

«*. 

^. 

■*-" 

o 

cc  ^ 

m    cc    o 

•55  -2    cc 

g 

*-• 
CD 

o 

o 

-a 

o 

22 

*>* 

S  ^  «^ 

O    ©    O 

^3    +J    *-• 

~  s  s 

fi 

& 

g 

s 

JO 

cd5-.  -T" 

o 

e*s"t^  •— • 

S 

<-. 

•^* 

o 

S3   ^* 

3   s   » 

£ 

^ 

© 

© 

^ 

® 

® 

®® 

®®$ 

®^® 

8 


90 

IRREGULAR    VERBS. 

[ 

BOOK  I. 

hS 

*-» 

« 

«_» 

rs 

o    «-» 

*^-# 

ft*  ~-  - 

♦-► 

4— >                               *^          *** 

Past 
artici]. 

our 

o 

£LcD 

*  ^        «— • 

0   » 

CM 

0 

0      .i:  0 

»2 

"i±- 

d*    «*► 

ft* 

O      -L-* 

«m 

&* 

<_,            o»    &« 

v 

1    CD  CD 

CD 

<X)  00 

CD 

CD 

CD           CD  CD 

CD 

Ih 

•        • 

h* 

• 

^  . — ^     .     ^ 

, J     . 

tJ 

o   *, 

O 

O   8          O 

8 

e 

,*—^' ^^*N. 

— ^/=>        — « 

jO 

|4 

is 

• 
• 

s 

»£t 

A 

r^*    ~^~ 

# 

l*g 

-» — ». 

h 

>H 

• 

•  0 

t- 

O 

O 

S3 
•to 

s 

2Q 

set. 

o 

1^ 

«o  »C5 

O 

d 
08 

d        d   0 

d 

•** 

Jo 

<£ 

•e 

l-i 
03 

•*•*     •  •«* 

•^* 

•  *^   »*^ 

•*^      »*i^ 

•  *^ 

•  <-*           »^*  »^^ 

•«H* 

sq-> 

U 

^ 

CL, 

« 

O 

O 

• 

S3 
So 

e 

g        • 

d 

ci 

0  «$ 

d       ^T 

•8     2 
■e    *b 

^S_      fit. 

d 
.0 

«3             • 

8             O    *^~  *""~ 

d 

O 

1|»^>  ^-> 

i£3> 

^>    *2^ 

.  ^~>            .  ^":^ 

■«C' 

r*-^  .  *p>>  H-*  .,*->  ^  *^> 

>^J- 

%-»  •-» 

w 

*— •    «-^ 

■— *               '— • 

v> 

*■"  <-»    *~  <->     <-» 

w 

■  •^ 

+-* 

,  ^"> 

>b» 

s 

<^_^ 

+j 

S3 

a 

•co 

ri-.                 -j— 

so 

;-t 

cE 

*~"             .  f*-» 

CO 

u 

<*• 

i^ 

"8 

•** 

Oil 

3§      .*t 

J3>               si> 

$-> 

'—                   J- 

tg». 

■♦•* 

■  «^                                    •  *»*■ 

fji. 

»y               >*» 

St 

—          • 

8            •   8 

i» 

A 

/=»                    JO 

■o 

0 

O 

O 

-»-» 

•H 

*j 

♦j 

c* 

•\ 

S3 

i 

«5 

■  in      * 

a, 

m  o 

o  ** 

^    u    V 

0) 

CO 

0 

2  S- 

5.CO 

CO 

«  s 

fcXI 

a 

•a        M 

O              M 
**              O 

T3 

.<— > 

CO 

O 

en,  to  steal 

en,  to  ascend 
en,  to  die 

GO 

S 
O 

■£•  ."i*  ca 

*S" 

0    55    Q-,^    d  'Ji* 

<i* 

tr1        cd1^ 

•^>    tJ 

55    '-.     o 

ft* 

4-»               4-»    4-» 

tl     CO 

®® 

® 

®® 

S     © 

® 

^             ®® 

® 

PART  II.  CH.  6.] 


IRREGULAR    VERBS. 


91 


S3          ~ 
-3"*   Si  5* 

«« 

J-   S3 

«-* 

S3 
«^» 

_CO 

*^ 

S3^.H 

S3   o    u» 

rj-»    r*-»    r*-> 

■M 

-t-» 

5 

vCO 

a- 

■<-► 

±->  •<_» 

*-+      -U-. 

-I-. 

-u* 

5^ 

Crf     «>*     W 

O 

<^ 

'-*   '— . 

'-^    '-^ 

«k> 

«M 

<i» 

a* 

«5<X<35 

CO 

co 

CD  CO 

co  co 

co 

CO 

;> 

» 

a         •         • 

•    J-  ■ — ■ 

•       !-    ^ — ■ 

. 

>v     /"-^\               »» 

... 

O    =3 
— -/a 

O    S3 

. 

*-»    S3 

co^  ^ 

<£ 

<4* 

4-» 

.^       co^»       ii 

•         .         . 

•  Cfcr  <^ 

• 

• 

->    0^s> 

•         •          . 

.   -u* 

•  -<-» 

. 

^5S> 

>N-X 

o    •  d 

6 

. 

d 

•                            • 

o  o 

d 

4 

o 

eg 

6* 

4-» 

CR«SI- 

^  £S 

«5 

j- 

^o 

H-»  i**  r*-* 

.U 

cS3  »ct 

4-»    J_> 

*CJ 

sC-s3--J3- 

»  .-> 

t  .■-> 

<kp  £2- 

t  ^>  t  ^-> 

^? 

.  ^-> 

■^2"    O 

»-> 

<-><->    t^ 

c 

'_» 

•-*     ■— 

<_r      '_- 

•.»«* 

S 

w      ^ 

*— * 

•  ♦■^  •  *»^  •  •— » 

•  ♦^ 

■  «-^ 

■*.• 

>«^ 

d   d 

4*2 

d 

■«-» 
o 

6    ^  d 

f*->  r*-»   rjp> 

d 

d 

cr.'^ 

S3    *S 

4->     -I— > 

d 

d 

o 

d 

4-» 

"coco 

ct  o 

.  ^->  .  ^*>  .  **-> 

,  *-> 

.  .— > 

^C-^3- 

.  ^->  t  .— > 

sC1 

.  ^> 

s£?    O 

^>  ' 

w     <-.     *-» 

G 

V^ 

•—     •-» 

<— >      <-. 

c 

•_> 

<-.    ^^ 

<_. 

.4-*     >«-^     -«^ 

■«** 

-  n« 

•  *^  -*-. 

•  «^   -—+ 

•*-* 

•  — * 

■♦^ 

>4p* 

— * 

co 

5-  ■ 

<l. 

i^ 

^.21 

4-» 

s-> 

rfr* 

~ 

-ii  iJ 

«^ 

tS3- 

**        • 

U 

— ^ 

52  s-»  +-» 
i"^    *^    S3 

^ 

CO 

••*          ■  *•% 

*   »*"       * 

*. 

*ct  .— 

S->  "*3_  S 
^   S3^ 

•  ^_ 

■*-► 

4-> 

<l>* 

«» 

.  s    . 

S3   S3 

S3 

S3          O 

x» 

iO 

#o  .o 

A 

«o 

A 

o 

o 

■+-> 

■*-> 

^„ 

«s 

rt 

S3 

O 

^ 

*      2 

0) 

o  *■ 
**  o 

^ 

c 
o 

m    3    o 

©    ^ 

,*  +■>    S3 

c 
o 
o 

o     ^ 

rt   S3 

6V  0 

o 

«S3 

o 

.s 

's-i 

O 
>    S3 

o 

CO 

o 

«>    <—  .SB- 

Ck» 

4^ 

^_         *t* 

^. 

•  —   o   :-» 

-t->      i->      4-t 

•»* 

1^ 

«-►    S3 

_co 

"O  -rt 

®®@ 

9 

WW 

4^ 

^ 

^ 

92 


IRREGULAR    VERBS. 


[rook  I. 


5a  5a 


»^L         SJ 


5a 


5a 


*^    ~    <-»    <* 


^€,0  0 

J-r"  J-f    J-r  i* 

•L^       <_»      <_»  T-* 

5a  5a   5i  5a 


JT   -»  o  i->  «*   <--» 

«*  -— *  JZ  .«-  ;_,  ~ 

u  ^  S  ^  'f  o    *r  o   J- 

--.    v  c    o  &    p    O  S    u 

5a  5a  5a  — -               5> 


ft. 


±1  *•> 
.—  xa 
xa  ** 

^*  5a 
5a 


* — xa 


S-»    J-r 

5a  5a 


o 

CD 


» 

<a 
s 
s 


£*  «J"  ^ 


^>  5a  ■-=> 


-3 


o  o 


o      <v^ 


O 

Xa 


o 


5a 


■^ 
o 


C  vO 


O 


ty^j 


~*  ._  </0  '^O    <-. 

i->  i-»  s-t  ** 

t>       C^.  '...  -^, 

5a  5a  5a  5a 


xa  *s? 


=        «       -r-  fi       erf 


5         J~»  .o 


5a 


-to 


<->         '->  ■_»  <_   <_.  s — '^ 


5a 


t-       5a  ~   o  •— 
5a 
6 


g-  ^  o^  ^g1  og  sg-  d§    J^^g 


O 

«8 


o 


«D 


•a  I 


rsr. 


$^ 


»o 


°3  J 


jO  •_ 


«-  -r 


xa         £J        JJ 


5         C  «» 

5a 


*?  5a 


-3 


5a 


•c^    <«.    <_* 
5a  5a  5a 


u,   o 


5a 


O  i* 

o        o   o  5a 


<w 

+J 

55 

c 

CD 

MS 

Ph 

^ 

.o 


1^ 

5a 


5a 


5a 


<X2 


5a 


xa  ^ 


«rf  Ta 
/a 


r^-<D  Ci 


5a 


5a 


^ 

^ 


en 
Cu> 


—    <i* 
■s^>  xa 


^^ 


CD 


fa 

OS1 

?5 


•r  c 

J-»    CD 

d  o 


CD 
bJ3 


i 

c 

•  ^* 

X 
CD 


P    CD 

S  ^5  «  © 

o!  o^3 

^  5  Q  ** 


t  d   ^  i    M 


D 
O 

^3     CD 
> 


■  ^^ 

O 


2    -       ss 
—   **        xa 


2^       si        S 


M 

CD 

Oh 

C 


CO 

> 

•  — 

bo 

— 


-  —  w  & 


&   &   &&&&      ^^ 


a 
m  .Si  9 

u      Ri     f)      U 


e» 


PART  II.   CH.  6.]  IRREGULAR    VERBS. 


•^ 


93 


<2    <2 

ft* 
sft 

ft 

l>4 

o 

£  c:  £ 

<->  «*  ~ 

^> 

•v. 

ft 
0 

1 

—       «* 

v.       S          ■<0 

1    Xm 

2  fi 

g 

gfig 

s 

fi 

9«bS1- 

ft 

•^  '-. 

ft* 

•^*  ^  <_» 

<3--<    o 

ft* 

ft* 

ft*^'^ 

'-— » 

^^ 

«>  <30 

<D 

<SD  <>:  <3D 

<35 

<D 

<D 

<3D 

<d 

rr. 

>H 

j-  - 

•             • 

•  o 

3"  • 

O 

,     r              • 

ft 

• 

•             • 

1 

£- 

• 

•              • 

ft 

ft      • 

e 

ft 

ft      . 

ft* 

ft. 

• 

•             • 

•"§ 

'a 

• 

IM 

x-^    i- 

In 

6  d 

O 

• 

• 

6  ° 
<«  o 

d 

• 

d 

d 

«* 

ftrf 
sft 

~-  -?*  .«-  ft 
•w  -ft"  ^^  S 

^  .ft 

^ 

ft* 

-c* 

•Jw   1~ 

£o 

^  .£  .Si  v« 

ft  '<5S 

*S^ 

v5 

<cs 

a  a 

g 

^^     +»     -++     +~ 

i&< 

Ss 

fi 

• 

g  6 

g 

fi 

g  ^?s^i? 

■*"*    '-^    <^    *-^ 

O  ^j-j. 

e-e 

•^~ 

2>er 

»ft- 

sft^ 

•— 

.— 

.— 

.«* 

.«rt 

in 

• 

,^"^s 

—  ~ 

*k 

■ 

d    . 

o 

0  jS 

• 

0 

ft 

0 
$ 

d 

*— - ■     *— * 

6 

il   u   o  <3 

'—     ^ 
ft    « 

ft 
ft* 

ft> 

•v.     • 

s  0 

ft*     O 

it 

ft   <£ 

• 

O 

d 
ft 

«* 

a  a 

fi- 

ei'2fi 

ff    ft 

ft 

«4 

H  2 

g 

fi 

fi 

•e^e 

O  ,52. 
% — '  <-* 

ft 

fi>g 

.*-> 
W 

•  *^  ■>«■* 

•** 

-«•*  •*■*  ■  — * 

-<— * 

•  •^ 

-«■* 

•«-* 

•  ^^ 

•  ^^ 

:£  ~ 

•  —   ■  — 

■» ** 

gfi 

"S   o*£ 

ft 

w-  fi  ^* 

ft 

ft 

^-  *^ 

■  — * 

ft 

ft      «n 

a 
ft 

e 

fi 

fi  fi 

rfr*    ft* 

o 

ft 

^ 

•-*     «—• ■ 

ft* 

ft  ft 

=J   0 

ft 

ft 

ft 
fi 

a  a 

»  £ 

•-^ 

^ 

SS 

jO  ^^" 

z. 

ft 

K> 

•-*  ■♦* 

o 

O 

0 

^ 

•^ 

•M 

♦* 

be 

^* 

d 

<D 

^2 

^ 

TD 

■  — 

,  to  grow 
,  to  wash 

> 

C 
•** 

3|S 

•  —    o    — 

°    ^    o 

0) 

O 

E 
0 
0 

tS 

-Q 

O 

0 

Ih 

0 

■<-> 

bfi 

•  ^ 

-4-9 

-a 

■5 

)2 

s1 

0  © 

C  -P 

*    O 
O  -^ 

c   ft* 
•— •  *-«— 

ft* 
ft* 

«»  s  c» 

^  ,«rf     jC» 

C»    <k>    «>» 

c  ft 

ft 

«* 

*•* 
«* 
ft  c 

—    — 

88 

8 

^^8 

8 

8 

8 

8 

^ 

m~ 

94 


IRREGULAR    VERBS. 


V 

«-^ 

i««S 

*■* 

s-    .& 

*«*      ♦-► 

ft* 

vi       ^j 

^,      ^"» 

Pa 

Parti 

»-tO  <*3 

<-t© 

C      '_, 

ft* 

<3D  <!T3 

<X> 

^— ^ 

# 

'              J-. 

■v* 

o 

cs 

sv. 

• 

I" 

•Si  S 

d 

to 

ii 

3 

8 

*». 

<53 

m 

*<* 

>5? 

ft*  ~i^ 

e 

4-> 

o 

5Q 

<*5  «NO 

«ho 

a 

«e*e 

*& 

S-i 

CD 

•*^  «*^ 

*•*■* 

Oh 

s 

B 

HH 

• 

O 

B 

ij 

is 

5 

•«S 

2 

«-to  *^o 

<^o 

w^*' 

w 

•*•*    •*-* 

■^* 

^ 

*  ^*I 

^~—  *■-?* 

■^-*  — ^ 

•<s> 

>fcj 

r*5 

03 
CO 
03 

8 

ft* 

s 

ft* 

w 

«*3^— V 

«-*     • 

M 

«fc> 

»      ° 

«-*=> 

•    A* 

~—- ' 

i      t 

O 

"3 

•*-> 

C-c 

«+- 

•\ 

o  o 

03 
O 

03    ^ 

(h 

<*> 

CO 

3    £ 

<2 

8 

no,  cd  ^ 

o 

% 
S 

o  o 

«"3 

je-    O- 

<x  S 

Xi-jC- 

s  ° 

■">    <H» 

^»  ° 

<^  •  — 

S3 

00,00, 

00, 

."S3  XJ 

C  03 

C  co 

D  03 
hJD  G 

03  03 

s  s 

E  bD 


•«t)  o    r 

•    3   *^ 


CO 

03    nJ  g 

bfi2 

-§  SI  «u 

-w    3    g    S 


T3 
**    v"    S 

~   iV.       « 

a;   3  -S: 


BOOK  I. 

3  TJ 


cd 


3 
03 


?    O 


f 

o 

•  — 
-4-> 

CO 

o 


s  * 

S5    > 

1*    ° 


03    «-    c»    *• 


03  .3   »    bJj-s-ilf 

03     .         M 


CO 
O 


°    03  ^^    ^  £S 

3    .^  C    3.  03 


^~S 


?-0 
-   .V. 


13 
3 
O 

o 

03 
CO 


3,  3 
O    ^ 


P    -    cfi  3    h 


3  'S  -^ 

2  w>r3    O  "^  "£ 

03  ^  C^  03     O  « 

r|    *^    «<     (C     J)     O  ^ 

-»->>>.       3  JD    ♦"" 

_n    ^  co 

O                  03    O    »-  03 
g     Q3.5ri       ^^W 

«2  o  ss  o?  s  *;  ^ 


o  ss  « 

«j  5*  03 

3  i^  -^ 

c  ^  -^ 

:  in  *~ 


03 
co 


i.    ft* 


o 
o 

03 


t^JS-  03 

33  #*  -3 

cd 
3 
co 


c    ? 


°"3    3 


ft* 
ft*  .~i-» 

cd    «>: 


J5  .2  ^> 


co 

O  _c  ^*  cd  .3"  ^  *~ 
•-  ^  <C--3  *-  "O  ^ 
^3  <-.    3    o    03  ^—^ 

.2  d  S  t      -S  > 

•"    03  ^=  -e     2 
c    i:    ♦*  «3    cd 

~  be  03  >  Ja  ^  "^ 

o  *-  -s  cd  o^;  s 

cd    if  cd    ft«  «-X- 


-  b£T3 
S  3  3 
**  -3    cd 

>7    co      -^ 

cd  .3    co 


h    3    bfi 


03  _r 


CO 
JO 

03 
> 

o  JS 
-3    a 


.o 


03  O  03 

03  O  S 

"•^  O 

u,  CO  o 

03  03 

3  2^ 

03  O 


-j         ^0 

03  'TJ  ~T^ 
^  3  «- 
co    cd  sJS 


03 


3 
cd 


& 


3      ^ 
bfl_^ 

03     o 

S  o 

•        s-« 

3      ^. 
03    ^ 

9-- 


5s 


03 
O 


'P 
03 

CO 

3 
03 

>>  3 

03  "^ 
J3     o 

**    +j 

S  s 

->^ 

u.    g 

cd    c> 

*3  ^ 

03  ^3 

>-    3 

03     rt 

3    ^ 

03 

> 

o 

3 


cd 
o 

3    O 

be*- 


03  -?J 


03  CO 

>  cd 
cd 

•        *— «  *  »s 

§P  03     .' 

vx  g  i: 

13     >  "fc. 

«3J    >  »-    bD 

O    co  g  'S 

2  g  §  o 

22     03  ~ 

ft*    3  C    SS 

•r*  ^  cd  "<* 

s  S"s 


PART  II.  CH.  6.]   RECAPITULATORY  EXERCISES. 


95 


The  following  verbs,  which  are  similar  to  each  other,   are 
to  be  distinguished. 


©(Ut'gCtt,  to  suck,  irr. 
©djroim'meit/  to  swim,  irr. 

©inf'en,  to  sink,  irr. 

©pving'en,  to  spring,  irr. 
$Vin£'ett/  to  drink,  irr. 


©du'gen,  to  suckle,  reg. 
©djroem'men,    to  wash  away, 

reg. 
©cuf'cn,    to   sink,    let   down, 

reg. 
©pvcng'CU,  to  sprinkle,  reg. 
^vdilf'cn/  to  give  to  drink,  reg. 


Promiscuous  Exercises  on  the  Irregular  and  Mixed  Verbs. 

When  the  verb  to  do  is  an  auxiliary  to  another  verb,  the 
auxiliary  is  not  expressed  in  German.  Thus  the  phrases,  do 
you  know  ?  or  do  you  not  knoio  ?  are  expressed  in  German  as 
if  the  English  were,  knoio  you?  or  know  you  not?  roiffet  ifyt*  ? 
or  roif  fet  tf}%  uid)t  ? 

The  position  of  the  negative  nid)t  is  immediately  after  the 
verb,  except  with  the  infinitive  and  the  participles,  where  it 
stands  before  the  verb  ;  and  in  questions,  where  it  stands  after 
the  pronoun.  Ex.  I  am  not,  id)  bin  mcljt;  are  you  not?  fcit> 
li)V  nid)t  ?   not  to  be,  nid)t  fctn  ;  he  might  not  come,  CV  M'me 

ntcl)t. 

Indicative. 


Present. 


I  know, 

» if  fen. 

May  I? 

Imv'fen. 

I  must  not, 

muffen. 

Can  I  not  ? 

ftn'ncn. 

Thou  fallest, 

fallen. 

Dost  thou  catch? 

fang'en. 

Thou  dost  not  hold, 

fyal'ten. 

Dost  thou  not  hang  ? 

f)  dug' en. 

You  must, 

muffen. 

May  he  ? 

mo 'gen. 

He  does  not  let, 

laffen. 

Does  he  not  sleep? 

fd)fa'fen. 

She  advises, 

va'ttjen. 

96 


RECAPITULATORY    EXERCISES. 


[book  I. 


Does  she  go  ? 

She  does  not  dig, 

Does  she  not  strike  ? 

It  grows, 

Does  it  see  ? 

It  does  not  eat, 

Does  it  not  happen  ? 

We  give, 

Do  we  step? 

We  do  not  forget, 

You  read, 

Do  you  measure  ? 

You  do  not  hew, 

Do  you  not  carry  1 

They  are, 

Do  they  remain  ? 

They  do  not  seize, 

They  do  not  go, 


fafy'ven. 

gra'ben. 

fcbla'gen. 

wadj'fen. 

fe'tyen. 

ef'fen. 

gefdje'Den. 

ge'ben. 

tve'ten. 

fcergef'fen. 

le'fen, 

mcf'fen. 

fyau'en. 

tra'gen. 

fein. 

blei'ben. 

gm'fen. 

ge'tyen. 


Imperfect. 


I  might, 

Did  I  eat? 

I  did  not  dig, 

Did  I  not  step  ? 

Thou  remainedst, 

Didst  thou  lend  ? 

Thou  didst  not  avoid, 

Didst  thou  not  fight  ? 

He  induced, 

Did  he  heave,  or  lift? 

He  did  not  conceal, 

Did  he  not  take  ? 

He  commanded, 

Did  she  speak  ? 

She  did  not  write, 

We  nominated, 

It  bit, 

Did  it  glide  1 

He  did  not  think, 


m&'gen. 

cf'fen. 

gra'ben. 

tre'ten. 

Mei'ben. 

lei'fyen. 

met'fcen. 

fed) 'ten. 

berce'gen. 

fye'ben. 

bev'gen. 

net/men. 

befefy'len. 

fpveciyen. 

favti'ben. 

evnen'nen. 

beiffen. 

g(ei'ten. 

benf'en. 


PART  II.  CH.  6.]   RECAPITULATORY  EXERCISES. 


97 


Subjunctive. 
Present. 


I  may  fall, 

I  may  not  be  able, 

Thou  mayst  not, 

Thou  must, 

He  may  be  willing, 

We  may  beat, 

They  may  not  bear, 


fallen. 

Hn'ntn. 

m&'ge*. 

tnuffeu. 

XDoi'lm. 
fra'gen. 


Imperfect. 

I  might  dig, 

He  might  not  bring, 

Thou  mightst  break, 

Thou  mightst  not  command, 

He  might  conceal, 

She  might  not  help, 

It  might  eat, 

He  might  not, 

We  might  not  lose, 

You  might  not  creep, 

They  might  not  contuse, 

They  might  not  spoil, 


gra'bett, 
bring' etu 

breeb'en. 

bcfctylen. 

ber'.qcn. 

fyrf'fen, 

cf  fen. 

mo'geu, 

fccrlic'rcu. 

frte'eben. 

fcertmr'rett. 

wrbcr'ben. 


Imperative. 


Read  (thou), 

Ic'fcn. 

Give, 

ge'bcn. 

Take, 

nefy'men. 

Do  not  step, 

tve'ten. 

Eat,  or  do  you  eat, 

ef'fcn. 

Do  not  forget, 

fcergeffen. 

Let  him  come, 

fem'men; 

Let  him  not  give, 

ge'bcn. 

Let  us  go, 

ge'fyen. 

Speak,  or  do  you  speak, 

fprccb'cn. 

Let  them  enjoy, 

genie'fen. 

Do  not  speak, 

fprcdj'en. 

98  REFLECTIVE  VERBS.  [BOOK  I. 

Past  Participle. 

Begun,  fccgin'nen. 

Spoken,  fprcdj'en. 

Not  deceived.  bctl'ie'gtn. 

Fled,  fUd)cn. 

Flowed,  fttefen, 

Not  sheared,  fdje'rett. 

Burnt,  wvbveu'ncn. 

Recommended,  empfcfy'fen. 

Brought,  bring'en. 

Valued,  gel'ten. 

Given,  gc'kn. 

Helped,  ^cl'feit. 

Requested,  bit'tcn. 

Called,  tjti'ftri. 

§  4.    REFLECTIVE    VERBS. 

Active  verbs,  when  they  reflect  upon  the  agent,  are  called 
reflective  verbs.  They  are  formed  with  the  pronouns  mid), 
Did),  (or  mil'/  t>iv,)  ftd),  XUVo,  end),  fid),  answering  to  the  En- 
glish pronouns,  myself;  thyself;  himself,  herself,  itself;  our- 
selves;  yourselves;  themselves.  They  are  conjugated  like 
active    verbs,  and  are  either  regular  or  irregular. 

Conjugation  of  the  Reflective  Verb,  fid)  Ut'bttl,  to  love  one's  self. 

Infinitive. 

Present. 
ftd)   Ue'bcn,  to  love  one's  self. 

Participle, 
ftd)  iit'btUb,  loving  himself,  herself,  or  itself. 

Indicative.  Subjunctive. 

Present. 

Singular.  Singular. 

id)  lit'bc  mid),  I  love  myself.        id)    ik'bt   mid),    I   may   love 

myself, 
tot  Utb\\  bid),  thou  lovest  thy-     tot   Ke'tcfl    Met),   thou    mays* 
self.  love  thyself. 


PART  II.  CH.  6.]  REFLECTIVE    VERBS.  99 

er,  fte,  or  e£  ikbt  fid),  he,  she,    it,  fte,  or  e£  lie'be  fid),  he, 

it  loves   himself,  herself,  or         she,    it   may   love    himself, 
itself.  herself,  or  itself. 

Plural.  Plural. 

tt)it*  fte'beit  tmS,  we  love  our-  ttnr  ItC'beu  \\\\€,  we  may  love 

selves.  ourselves, 

ifyr  lit'btt  end),  you  love  your-  ifyt  Uc'bct  eud),  you  may  love 

selves.  yourselves, 

fte  lie'ben  fid),  they  love  them-  f(e  lie' belt  ftd),  they  may  love 

selves.  themselves. 

Imperfect. 

Singular.  Singular. 

id)   Utb'tt  mid),  I  loved  my-     id)  lie'bete  mid),  I  might  love 
self.  myself. 

Du  Iieb'te|t  bid),  thou,  &c.  im  lie'betejt  bid),  thou,  &c. 

Plural.  Plural. 

rok   (ieb'ten    nn$,  we  loved    nur  lu'bttm  itn^,  we  might 

ourselves.  love  ourselves, 

ifyr  lieb'tet  euet),  you,  &c  ifyt  (ie'bctct  eucb,  you,  &c. 

Imperative. 

Singular.  Plural. 

lie'ben  wiv  un£,  let  us  love 
ourselves, 
(ie'be  bid),  love  thyself.  (iebt  or  lie'bet  end),  love  your- 

selves, 
lie'be  tx  fid),  let  him  love  him-     lie'ben  fte  ftdj,  let  them  love 
self.  themselves. 

Exercises  on  the  Reflective  Verbs. 
Indicative. 

Present. 

I  am  ashamed,  fid)  fd)a'tttett,  to  be  ashamed. 

He  blames  himself,  fid)  U\'b(U\,  to  blame  one's  self. 

We  unite  together,  fid)  fcevei'ntflen,  to  unite. 

You  forget  yourselves,  fid)  bevgef  fen,   irr.    to  forget 

one's  self. 


100 


REFLECTIVE    VERES. 


[BOOK  I. 


Imperfect. 


We  rejoiced, 

He  betook  himself, 

They  heloed  themselves, 


fid)  frcu'en,  to  rejoice. 

ftd)    bcge'ben,   irr.   to    betake 

one's  self, 
ftcl)   tjcCfcn,  irr.  to  help  one's 

self. 


Imperative. 


Do  not  offend, 

Grieve  not, 
Do  not  complain, 
Do  not  burn  yourself, 
Be  not  afraid, 


ftcl)  fccvge'fycn,  irr.  to  offend,  to 

fail  in  one's  duty. 
ftcl)  gr&'mCU,  to  grieve, 
fid)  bcHa'gen,  to  complain. 
fid)  fcevbren'ncn,  mix.  to  bum. 
fid)  fitvdj'tcn,  to  be  afraid. 


Observations  on  the  Reflective  Verbs. 

1.  There  are  many  reflective  verbs  in  German,  which  are 
not  so  in  English ;  as,  ftcl)  cvbav'mcn,  to  pity ;  fid)  frctt'en,  to 
rejoice ;  and  many  others,  as  in  the  above  exercises,  are  em- 
ployed only  in  the  reflective  form  ;  as,    . 

ftd)  bcgc'ben,  to  repair  to.  fid)  gv&'men,  to  be  grieved, 

fid)  bcmddytigen,  to  get  pos-  fid)  b  mil? 'men,  to  boast  one's 

session  of.  self,  &c. 

ftd)  befeanf  en,  to  thank. 

2.  All  active  verbs,  if  the  sense  admits  of  it,  may  be  used 
as  reflective  verbs,  by  the  addition  of  the  reflective  pronouns ; 
in  which  case  they  frequently  assume  an  intransitive  meaning  ; 
as,  fnrcfj'tCH,  act.  to  fear  ;  and  ftd)  fuvcfo'ten,  to  fear,  or  to  be 
afraid.  Some  verbs,  however,  are  employed  in  both  forms ; 
as, 

iv'ren,  to  err,  or  ftd)  tvi'Cn,  to  be  mistaken. 

janf'en,  to  quarrel,  or  fid)  janf'Ctt/  to  embroil  one's  self. 

fdjcu'cn,  to  shun,  or  ftd)  fcl)CU'nt,  to  be  shy. 

3.  Most  reflective  verbs  take  the  pronoun  in  the  accusa 
tive;  as,  id)  cvbav'me  mid),  I  pity;   id)  bcftn'nc  mid),  I  reflect; 
but  some  few  require  the  pronoun  in  the  dative ;  as,  id)  ma'f* 
mtv  utd)t  an,  I  do  not  assume;  id)  bii'lc  mil*  nid)t  cm,  I  do 
not  imagine. 


PART  II.  CH.  6.]       IMPERSONAL  VERBS.  101 

§  5.  IMPERSONAL  VERBS. 

A  verb  is  called  impersonal  if,  in  those  tenses  which  com- 
monly have  three  persons,  it  is  used,  in  its  proper  and  peculiar 
sense,  only  in  the  third  person  singular,  with  the  pronoun  C£  be- 
fore it.  Thus  the  verb  ge'6cn,  v,  a.  irr.  to  give,  which  is  a  com- 
plete verb,  has  a  peculiar  meaning  when  used  impersonally  : 
indie,  pres.  C$  gicbt,  there  is ;  imperf.  e<?  gab,  there  was  or 
were.  Ex.  (£S  giebt  SJiCll'fdjCU,  there  are  men  {literally,  it 
gives  men). 

Most  impersonal  verbs,  though  generally  used  as  such,  are 
sometimes  employed  as  complete  verbs,  particularly  in  a  poetic 
sense.  Thus  the  verbs  fcOU'UCVll,  to  thunder,  Mtt'jCU,  to 
lighten,  are  commonly  used  as  impersonal  verbs  ;  as,  t$ 
fcOU'ltert,  it  thunders;  C6  Mit'JCt,  it  lightens;  but  sometimes 
as  complete  verbs  ;  as,  fcie  ^6'^cn  fcon'ncvn,  the  heights  thun- 
der ;  fei'ne  ^Ut'gCU  Mi^tCU,  his  eyes  threw  out  lightning. 

Impersonal  verbs  are  either  intransitive,  or  active,  or  re- 
flective, as  they  are  used  either  by  themselves,  or  with  a 
personal,  or  a  reflective  pronoun  after  them. 

I.  Conjugation  of  the  Impersonal  Intransitive  Verb. 

Conjugation  of  the  Regular  Impersonal  Verb,  veg'nen, 

to  rain. 

Indicative.  Subjunctive. 

Present. 

CS  VCg'net/  it  rains.  C6  reg'UC,  it  may  rain. 

Imperfect. 
eg  VCg'UCte,  it  rained.  C6  veg'ncte,  it  might  rain. 

The  following  verbs  may  be  conjugated  in  a  similar  manner 

fcon'uevn,  to  thunder.  6fit'jcn,  to  lighten, 

fdmci'cvt,  to  snow.  tfyau'en,  to  thaw, 

fya'gelu,  or  fcljloffen,  to  hail.  ta'gen,  to  dawn. 

9* 


102  IMPERSONAL  VERBS.  [BOOK  I. 

Conjugation  of  the  Irregular  Impersonal  Verb,  frtc'reu,  to  freeze. 

Indicative.  Subjunctive. 

Present. 
eg  fricvt,  it  freezes.  eg  frte're,  it  may  freeze. 

Imperfect. 
eg  fror,  it  froze.  eg  ftb'tt,  it  might  freeze. 

II.  Conjugation  of  the  Impersonal  Active  Verb. 
Conjugation  of  the  Regular  Impersonal  Verb,  dr'gCt'U,  to  vex. 

Indicative.  Subjunctive. 

Present. 
Singular.  Singular. 

eg  dv'gert  mid),  or  mid)  dr'=    eg  dr'gcremid),  or  mid)  dr'gere, 

gert,  I  am  vexed.  I  may  be  vexed, 

eg  dv'gcvt  Md),  or  t>tcC)  dv'gevt,    eg  dv'geve  t>ic(),  or  fctdj  dv'geve, 
thou  art  vexed.  thou  mayst  be  vexed. 

eg  dv'gcvt  i()it,  or  tfyn  dv'gcvt,    eg  dv'geve  ityu,  or  tfyu  dv'geve, 

he  is  vexed.  he  may  be  vexed. 

Plural.  Plural. 

eg  dv'gevt  uug,  or  tm^  dv'gevt,    eg  dv'geve  un^,  or  un$  dv'geve, 

we  are  vexed.  we  may  be  vexed, 

eg  dv'gert  md),  or  cud)  df'gevt,    eg  dv'geve  cud),  or  cud)  dv'geve, 
you  are  vexed.  you  may  be  vexed. 

eg  dv'gcvt  fie,  or  ftc  dv'gert,    eg  dr'gcrc  ftc,  or  ftc  dr'gcrc, 

they  are  vexed.  they  may  be  vexed. 

Imperfect. 
Singular.  Singular. 

e^  dr'gerte  mid),  or  mtdj  dv'--    eg  dr'gertc  mid),  or  mid)  dv'* 

gerte,  I  was  vexed,  &c.  gertC,  I  might  be  vexed,  &c. 

The  personal  pronoun  is  generally  in  the  accusative,  but 
sometimes  in  the  dative  case.  Thus  the  verb  gefaCfcu,  v.  n. 
irreg.  to  please,  is  used  impersonally,  with  the  personal  pro- 
noun in  the  dative  case ;  as,  eg  gcfd((t'  mir,  or  mil*  gcfdttt',  I 
am  pleased,  &c. ;  eg  geftel'  mil',  or  mir  gcjtel',  I  was  pleased,  &c. 


PART  II.  CH.  6.]  IMPERSONAL    VERBS. 

Exercises  on  the  Impersonal  Active  Verb. 
Indicative. 


103 


Present. 


I  am  hungry, 
Thou  art  cold, 
We  are  thirsty, 
They  are  sleepy, 
He  is  pleased, 


It  seems  to  me, 

We  were  grieved, 
You  were  grieved, 
They  were  discomforted, 
He  was  displeased, 


(ntttg'ern,  to  be  hungry, 
frie'ren,  irr.  to  freeze, 
tmv'jtcn,  to  be  thirsty. 
fcWa'fmi,  to  be  sleepy, 
gefal'ieit/  irr.  to  please,  (Dat.) 


Imperfect. 


buu^CU,   to    seem,    (Dat.   or 

Ace.) 
grd'mcn,  to  grieve. 


VCVtaue'fcrt/  irr.  to  discomfort. 
mtSfal'lcn,    irr.    to    displease, 
(Dat.) 


In  all  the  instances  mentioned  under  II,  the  personal  pro- 
noun in  the  accusative  or  dative  case  is  evidently  governed 
by  the  impersonal  verb,  which  is  governed  by  the  pronoun  c£, 
it,  expressed  or  understood.  In  other  cases,  c£  is  an  expletive 
which  does  not  govern  the  verb,  and  is  either  not  translated 
or  answers  to  the  English  there;  ex.  eg  frllttt  tl)U  uic'manfc, 
there  is  no  one  that  knows  him  ;  C6  fa'gcil  t)ic  Uu'U,  people  say. 

III.  Conjugation  of  the  Impersonal  Reflective  Verb. 

Conjugation  of  the  Irregular  Impersonal   Verb  t)cv|tc'l)Ctt/ 

to  understand. 

Indicative.  Subjunctive. 

Present. 

C£  berjtefyt'  fid),  it  is  under-     c$   fccrftc'fje   ftel),    it    may   be 
stood    {literally,   it    under-         understood, 
stands  itself.) 

Imperfect. 

C6  fcer|tatt&'  ftdj,  it  was  under-     cS  fccrfian'&c  ftel),  it  might  be 
stood.  understood. 


104  COMPOUND  VERBS.  [BOOK  I. 

Exercises  on  the  Impersonal  Reflective  Verb. 


It  is  becoming, 
It  is  not*  proper, 
It  is  evident. 


It  came  to  pass, 

It  subsided, 

It  was  protracted, 


Present. 


ftd)  fdjic'tcit,  to  be  becoming, 
fid)  gefy&'l'Cn,  to  be  proper, 
ftd)  ergc'bcil/  irr.  to  be  evident. 


Imperfect. 


ftd)  ffl'gcu,  to  come  to  pass, 
ftd)  ge'beit,  irr.  to  subside, 
ftd)  fcevjic'fyctl,  irr.  to  be  pro- 
tracted. 


§  6.    COMPOUND     VERBS. 

Simple  verbs  being  regular  or  irregular,  their  compounds 
are  the  same. 

Compound  verbs  are  compounded  either  with  separable  or 
inseparable  particles. 

Those  which  are  compounded  with  inseparable  particles, 
are  conjugated  like  the  simple  verbs  without  the  additional 
particle ;  except  in  the  past  participle,  in  which  they  do  not 
receive  the  augment  ge.  Thus  the  verb  Cl'fut'lcu,  to  fulfill,  is 
conjugated  like  ffd'U'U/  reg.  to  fill ;  except  the  past  participle, 
which  is  erfullt'  (instead  of  gcerftU(t). 

The  separable  particles  are  joined  to  the  verbs  in  the  infini- 
tive and  participle,  except  when  the  conjunction  £tt,  to,  is 
added  to  the  infinitive,  which  is  then  put  between  the  particle 
and  the  verb;  as,  attf  t)tt(ten,  to  detain  ;  he  endeavoured  to  de- 
tain him,  u  fudytc  i(m  attf  jtt  tjai'tcn  (or  attfjul)a(fcu). —  In 

the  original  tenses  of  the  indicative  and  subjunctive,  and  in 
the  imperative,  the  separable  particles  are  separated  and  put 
after  the  verb  ;  except  when  for  some  reason  (to  be  stated  in 
the  Syntax)  the  verb  must  be  put  at  the  end  of  the  sentence. 
Ex.  you  detain,  i(}t*  tjai'tct  attf;  take  care  that  you  do  not 
detain  me,  fc'bct  ju,  t>afe"  ifyt*  mid)  md)t  attfl;altct. 


*  The  negation  is  to  be  put  after  the  reflective  pronoun. 


PART  II.  CH.  6.] 


COMPOUND  VERBS. 


105 


Conjugation  of   the   Separable   Compound   (irregular)   Verb 
auf  fyalteit,  to  detain  or  stop. 


Infinitive, 
auf  fatten,  to  detain. 

Indicative. 


Participle. 

Present,  auf  fyafteufc,  detaining. 
Past.       auf  gcfyalten,  detained. 


Subjunctive. 


Present. 


Singular.  Singular. 

id)   fyat'te    auf,    I   detain,   am  '  id}  fyaf'te  auf,  I  may  detain, 
detaining,  or  do  detain. 

fcu  t)ait\l  auf,  thou  detainest.       t>U  fyaCteff  auf,  thou  mayest  de- 
tain. 

it,  ftC,  or  eg  fyatt  auf,  he,  she,     tt,  fie,  or  eg  fyaCte   auf,   he, 

she,  or  it  may  detain. 


or  it  detains 

Plural. 
rrnr  fyal'teu  auf,  we  detain. 

i()V  ^al'tef  auf,  you  detain. 

ftC  fyat'teit  auf,  they  detain. 


Plural. 

xovt  fyaPteu  auf,  we  may  de 
tain. 

lf)V  fyaf'tet  auf,  you  may  de- 
tain. 

fie     {jiXVtm  auf,  they  may  de- 
tain. 


Imperfect. 


Singutar. 


Singular. 

id)  fyteit  auf,  I  detained,  id)  fyiel'te  auf,  I  might  detain. 

t)U  fyiel'tejt   auf,   thou  detain-     tot  fyieCtejt  auf,  thou  mightst 


edst. 
er  tjiclt  auf,  he  detained. 

Plural. 

volt  l}ic('teu  auf,  we  detained. 
it)V  fyiei'tet  auf,  you  detained. 
fie  fytcl'tCU  auf,  they  detained. 


detain. 

it  tjid'tc  auf,    he    might    de- 
tain. 

Plural. 

rcir  fyiePteu  auf,  we  might,  &c. 
il)v  fyiel'tet  auf,  you  might,  &c. 
fie   fyiel'teit  auf,    they   might, 
&c. 


106 


COMPOUND    VERBS. 


[book  I. 


Imperative. 


Singular. 


fyal'te  (bit)  auf,  detain  (thou). 
ijal'te  Ct'  auf,  let  him  detain. 


Plural. 

fyat'teu  roir  auf,  let  us  detain, 
fjat'tet  (it)r)  auf,  detain  (you). 
tjat'tCU   ftC  auf,   let   them   de- 
tain. 


So  conjugate 


auf  UCfymeu,  irr.  to  take  up. 
weA/gebcu,  zrr.  to  give  away. 

ab'tjokn,  to  fetch. 


aug'fprecheu,  irr.  to  pronounce. 
VOf'fomtUCU,  irr.  to  come  be- 
fore. 
ehl'brtUgeu,  mix.  to  bring  in. 


Exercises  on  the  Separable  Compound  Verbs. 

Indicative. 


Present. 


I  take  off, 
Thou  acceptest, 
It  devolves, 

We  give  up, 
You  except, 
They  assist, 


ab'uefymeu,  irr,  to  take  off. 
au'UCtytttCU,  irr.  to  accept. 

autyctm'falleu,  or   fyctm'fatfeu, 

irr.  to  devolve, 
auf  gcbcit,  irr.  to  give  up. 
auS'uetymClt,  irr.  to  except, 
kei'ficfycil/   irr.  to  stand  by,  to 

assist. 


Imperfect. 


I  presented, 
Thou  rannest  off, 
He  took  in, 
We  pursued, 
You  sent  home, 
They  came  hither, 


fcav'mdKU,  to  present. 
fcafcOU'laufCU,  irr.  to  run  off. 
ehl'UCfymctt,  irr.  to  take  in. 
foi't'fcfcCU,  to  pursue, 
fyeim'fcfcttfeu,  to  send  home. 
fyct't'ommCU,  irr.  to  come  hith- 


er. 


Imperative. 


Look  (thou)  to, 
Keep  (you)  back, 


jufefrcu,  irr.  to  look  to. 
juvfttf'ljalten,     irr.    to 
back. 


keep 


PART  II.  CII.  6.] 


COMPOUND  VERBS. 


107 


Composing, 
Composed, 


Participles. 

jufam'mcnfegeu,  to  compose. 


Observations  on  the  Compound  Verbs. 

1.  The  compound  verbs  generally  follow  the  conjugation  of 
the  simple  verbs,  some  of  which  are  regular,  and  others  irreg- 
ular ;  thus,  an'vefcen,  to  address,  and  bere'fceil,  to  persuade, 
from  rc'&CH,  to  speak,  are  regular;  attffdjmben,  to  write 
down,  and  befcferet'bcn,  to  describe,  from  fcfetei'fcett,  to  write, 
are  irregular.  But  fcl)affcn,  to  create,  is  irregular,  and 
fccrfcfoaffcn,  to  procure,  regular;  I6fd)'en,  to  quench,  regular, 
and  erldfciycvt/  to  become  extinct,  irregular. 

2.  All  separable  particles  have  a  distinct  meaning,  when 
taken  by  themselves,  and  are  therefore  easily  distinguished 
when  used  in  composition  ;  as, 


<\{\  off,  or  down, 
an,  on,  or  at. 
auf,  up,  or  upon. 
anS,  out  of. 
bci,  at,  by,  near. 


fcar,  there, 
ein,  in,  or  into, 
fret,  free. 
mit,  with, 
nacl),  after. 


Examples. 


2tb'fe£en,  to  depose, 

2Cn'fpvcc()en,  to  address, 

ShtfltcfyCH;  to  arise, 
2Ut6"'fc§cn,  to  expose, 
Set'ltefyen,  to  assist,  to  stand 

Siu'fcMicfen,  to  inclose, 
grci'fprccbcn,  to  acquit, 

50tit'gc()CU,  to  accompany, 
SKacl)'fo(gCU,  to  succeed, 


from  fCt'^Ctt,  to  put,   and  db, 
down. 

fpredj'en,  to  speak,  an, 

to. 
fte'fyen,  to  stand,  anf,  up. 
fet'jen,  to  put,  an£,  out. 
jtc'tjen,  to  stand,  bci,  by, 

or  near, 
fcblic'fcn,  to  lock,  cin,  in. 
fprcclj'cn,  to  speak,  fret, 

free. 

gdjen,  to  go,  mit,  with, 
fol'ant,  to  follow,  nadj, 
after. 


108  COMPOUND  VERBS.  [BOOK  I. 

JFJitt,  thither,  or  there,  and  t)(V,  hither,  or  here,  are  oftener 
employed  in  German  than  in  English.  Both  express  motion 
towards  an  object ;  but  fycv,  when  used  in  opposition  to  fyin, 
denotes  a  motion  towards  the  place  where  the  person  who 
speaks  actually  is,  and  fyin  a  motion  towards  another  place. 
Thus,  fyitt'fommen,  signifies  to  get  or  arrive  there,  in  opposi- 
tion to  tjn'hmmm,  to  come  hither ;  as,  %d)  f2 onn'te  nic()t 
Ijin't ommen,  I  could  not  get  there ;  £om'mcu  ©te  fyer,  Come 
here. 

3.  The  inseparable  particles,  as  their  name  announces,  are 
used  only  in  composition.  Of  these,  the  following  are  the 
principal : 

55c,  (1.)  in  composition  with  verbs,  denotes  an  expansion  of 
the  action  over  an  object,  or  its  influence  upon  it ;  as,  bcttMcl)'; 
fen,  to  overgrow  ;  bcftveit'CU,  to  bestrew  ;  berau'dKvn,  to  be- 
smoke  or  smoke.  By  the  use  of  this  particle,  many  neuter 
verbs  are  changed  into  active  ;  as,  av'bciten,  to  work,  tin 
@tucf  J^olj  bear'beiten,  to  work  on  a  piece  of  wood  ;  vei'tcn, 
to   ride,   ein  $pfcr&    bcrei'ten,  to   train    a    horse ;    fol'gcu,   to 

follow,  ei'nen  SHatl)  bcfot'gen,  to  follow  counsel ;  fpredj'cn,  to 

speak,  et'maS  kfpvedj'en,  to  bespeak  a  thing,  &c. 

(2.)  In  composition  with  nouns  and  other  parts  of  speech, 
it  denotes  a  communication  of  one  object  or  quality  to  another  ; 
as,  bcfhVgcfu,  to  wing,  or  provide  with  wings,  from  gliVgel,  a 
wing ;  beb&lt'bent,  to  adorn  with  ribbons,  from  S3ant>,  ribbon  ; 
bcau'gcn,  to  give  an  eye  to,  from  2ht'ge,  eye  ;  bcfau'ben,  to 
cover  with  leaves,  from  k\\ub,  leaf;  berci'c()Cru,  to  enrich, 
from  veid),  &c.  In  the  application  of  this  particle,  there  is 
but  little  difference  between  the  two  languages. 

Qnttp,  which  occurs  only  in  three  verbs,  stands  instead  of 
inbc  (in,  in,  and  the  particle  be),  and  signifies  that  the  action, 
which  is  expressed  by  the  verb,  is  of  an  internal  nature ; 
as,  ftn'bcn,  to  find,  erapjtn'bCU  (to  find  imvardly)  to  feel ;  fang'fll 
(ox  fa'fycn)  to  catch,  cmpfang'en,  to  receive;  befefy'fcn,  to  com-: 
mand,  or  commend,  etnpfcty'lcn,  to  recommend. 

Qhtt  denotes  (1.)  removal  from  a  place,  and  nearly  corre- 
sponds to  the  English  from,  or  away;  as,  Cntjfte'gen,  to  fly 
away;  cntfcr'UCH,  to  remove;  entfaffen,  to  send  away  or 
dismiss. 


PART  II.  CH.  6.] 


COMPOUND  VERBS. 


109 


(2.)  Deprivation ;  as,   cntcfy'l'CH,  to  dishonor ;  cntMn'&CU,  to 
unbind ;    cntfcf  feftt,    to    unfetter ;    mttjClWp'tm,   to    behead 
UlttjWim,  to  unveil. 

(3.)  It  sometimes  denotes  the  commencement  of  an  action; 
as,  eutbrcn'uen,  to  kindle;  entjfin'&ttt,  to  set  on  fire;  etttfrfjfok 
fen,  to  fall  asleep ;  cutfpcing'cn,  to  spring  ;  ctUjtc'fycu,  to 
arise. 

Q?t*  denotes  (1.)  elevation,  in  the  sense  of  the  particle  auf, 
up  ;  as,  cvfyc'ben,  to  elevate,  or  lift  up  ;  cvhut'cu,  to  build  up  ; 

erjie'fjcn,  to  bring  up ;  cvroaclj'fcn,  to  grow  up. 

(2.)  Obtaining  by  means  of  exertion,  or  trouble  ;  as,  cvfc'd)'- 
ten,  to  obtain  by  fighting  ;  crfdjmci'rbellt,  to  wheedle  ;  etftfrfj's 
CU,  to  fish  out ;  crar/briteu,  to  work  out ;  ttHu'fttl,  to  pur- 
chase ;  evfafy'VCU,  to  learn  by  experience  ;  thus,  St*  crfocfjt' 
Ci'lKlt  ©icg,  He  obtained  a  victory  ;  (£v  t)M  fchie  ©unjt  CV-- 
fcljmci'djclt,  He  has  wheedled  himself  into  his  favor,  &c.  So 
likewise  in  regard  to  mental  exertions ;  as,  Cl'fiu'rtcn,  to  devise  ; 
erfcen^CU,  to  contrive  ;  CfftU'fcCU,  to  invent,  &c. 

(3.)  Taking  out,  bringing  out,  coming  out,  in  the  sense  of 
the  particle  au$,  out ;  CVWdty'lcn,  to  elect,  or  choose  out  of; 
ttnttt'tltn,  to  nominate  ;  etgie'fftt/  to  flow  out ;  ivlafftll,  to 
issue ;  erfcfoSp'fcn,  to  exhaust ;  crbml)'crt,  to  break  open,  or 
break  out  from. 

(4.)  A  bringing  or  coming  into  a  condition,  which  is  indi- 
cated by  the  words  with  which  it  is  compounded  ;  as,  CTtt) ci'- 
ttVXi,  to  enlarge,  from  Xdtit,  wide  or  large ;  eirroav'mcn,  to 
warm,  from  warm,  warm ;  Cfgfau'CU,  to  grow  grey,  from  <\vau, 
grey  ;  Cl'fyar'tcn,  to  grow  hard,  from  fj&tt,  hard ;  CvMct'djcn, 
to  turn  or  grow  pale,  from  Mctcl),  pale ;  erbiilt'tcn,  to  grow 
blind,  from  blint),  blind;  tvHl'ttXl,  to  grow  cold,  from  Hit, 
cold;  tVVb'ttyn,  to  redden  or  blush,  from  vott),  red  ;  crar'mcn, 
to  grow  poor,  from  antt,  poor;  cvfl&'vcn,  to  explain,  or  clear 
up,  from  UdX,  clear ;  Cffric'VCH,  to  freeze,  from  ftit'ttn,  to 
freeze;  CVJltV'ncn,  to  make  angry,  from  $0V\\,  anger;  tV\\tt's 
Un,  to  expire,  from  jicv'bcn,  to  die,  &c. 

@C  gives  simply  an  extension  or  force  to  the  primitive  ;  as, 
kau'djcn,  to  use,  gcbiau'dxn,  to  employ  ;  fccnfcn,  to  think, 
9Ct>CHi'CU,   to  think  of,  or  bear  in   mind  ;  frie'rcit,  to  freeze, 

10 


110  COMPOUND  VERBS.  [BOOK.  I. 

gcfric'fcn,  to  become  frozen  ;  fcnffccn,  to  bear,  ftrf)  gefcml'fccn, 
to  endure,  or  have  patience  with  ;  lang'Clt,  to  reach,  gelang'Cll, 
to  arrive  at,  or  come  to,  &c. 

^cr  denotes  (1.)  removal,  answering  to  the  particle  away ; 
as,  Wrja'gen,  to  drive  away  ;  fccvfctKnf'cn,  to  give  away  ;  bcv- 
pflan^cn,  to  transplant;  tocvfct'JCH,  to  transpose;  focvrocciyfcfn, 
to  change ;  fccrfrtn'fen,  to  sell  :  or  away,  as  implying  waste, 
loss,  or  consumption  ;  as,  toci'trinf 'HI,  to  drink  away,  to  spend 
by  drinking ;  Dcvfpic'IcU/  to  game  away ;  Derlie'fCU,  to  lose  ; 
bnat'bnUll,  to  work  up;  fcerMlVfycn,  to  fadeaway;  V>ClTau'= 
dbcn,  to  evaporate ;  focrfdjmadj'tcn,  to  pine  ;  fccrbln'tcn,  to 
bleed  to  death  ;  btvtDtVhn,  to  wither  away. 

(2.)  Putting  out  of  order,  or  doing  wrong,  answering  gene- 
rally to  mis;  as,  fccvlc'gcn,  to  mislay ;  fccrfltfy'vcn,  to  seduce; 
Dcvfc^VCt'bcn,  to  write  wrong  ;  fccr&re'fycil,  to  pervert ;  fcCl'fdt'; 
fel)Cn,  to  adulterate ;  fccrfal'jcn,  to  oversalt ;  fccrgef'fcit,  to  for- 
get ;  ^cvfdjicbcn,  to  dislocate ;  l>crnacl)1afftgen,  to  neglect ; 
tKtTecl)'ncn,  to  miscalculate  ;   fcCVVUC'fcn,  to  derange. 

(3.)  Putting  in  the  way,  obstructing;  as,  beirbic'tcn,  to 
forbid  ;  tHTfa'gcn,  to  deny ;  foerbit'tcn,  to  refuse  ;  tocrrocty'reit/ 
to   prohibit ;    btxfytn'bnn,   to   prevent ;     fecrfdjlie'fen,   to   lock 

up  ;  Der&am'meit,  to  dam  up ;  wrfic'geht,  to  seal  up ;  fcerfpcr'* 

ten,  to  bar  up  or  out ;    tommitt'Cftt/  to  wall  up,  &c. 

(4.)  Putting  or  coming  into  a  condition  ;  as,  fceval'tdt,  to 
grow  obsolete,  from  ait,  old ;  Wvfdng'CVJt,  to  lengthen,  from 
tang,  long  ;  fccrftiv'jen,  to  shorten,  from  fttrj,  short ;  ttetctr's 
men,  to  grow  poor,  from  arm,  poor  ;  VCVC'fccln,  to  ennoble,  from 
e'fccl,  noble  ;  toevg&t'tmt,  to  deify,  from  (Sett,  God  ;  fcevbvtV* 
t>Cin,  to  fraternize,  from  33w't>CV,  brother,  &,c.  Sometimes  it 
adds  force  to  the  primitive  ;  as,  l)CVCf)'VCn,  to  venerate,  from 
cfy'ien,  to  honor  ;  fccvfpot'tcn,  to  mock,  from  fpot'tCtt,  to  jeer; 
fccdaclj'cn,  to  deride,  from  fadj'CU,  to  laugh  :  ttcvlci'fyen,  to 
grant,  from  lei'fyen,  to  lend,  &c. 

3d*  denotes  a  thorough  separation  of  the  parts ;  as,  jcvbrcdj'- 
Cit,  to  break  in  pieces;  jcrfclwiCt'tCl'll;  to  dash  in  pieces; 
jemU'tCU,  to  shake  in  pieces ;  jerjU'Ctt'cn,  to  dissipate ;  gttjtf'* 
VCH,  to  destroy  ;   jevfcl)nct'fccn,  to  cut  to  pieces. 

The  particles  Wt'htt,  against,  and  fyin'ter,  behind,  though 
inseparable  in  composition,  are  employed  as  distinct  words. 


PART  II.  CH.  6.]       COMPOUND  VERBS.  Ill 

Verbs  compounded  with  mt6,  which  answer  to  the  English 
mis  and  disy  commonly  take  the  augment  ge  before  the  partici- 
ple, and  the  preposition  $tt  before  the  infinitive ;  as,  misbil'* 
ligen,  to  disapprove,  getttigbil'Uget,  disapproved,  ju  miebtl'li-' 
gen,  to  disapprove ;  misbrau'eijen,  to  misuse,  gcmte'braudjt, 
misused,  ju  miSbvau'djcn,  to  misuse. 

Some  few  neuter  and  active  verbs  drop  the  participial  aug- 
ment gc;  as,  mi&fMtn,  to  displease,  es  l)at  miv  misfal'leu, 
it  has  displeased  me  :  miSlci'tcn,  to  mislead,  mtSlct'tet,  misled  ; 
mi^Iing'cn,  to  fail,  eg  i|t  mighmg'en,  it  has  failed ;  mtgra'tfyeu, 
to  miscarry,  eg  t|t  ttttgva'tfyen,  it  has  miscarried  ;  mtg'fcer= 
fiefyen,  to  misunderstand,  man  t)&t  e^  mig'kerltanc-en,  it  has 
been  misunderstood. 

4.  Some  prepositions  are  both  separable  and  inseparable, 
as,  tmvd),  through;  Vita,  about;  ft'bcr,  over;  to  which  may 
be  added  rcie'fcet',  again.  The  first  three  are  separable  in 
the  i?itransitive}  and  inseparable  in  the  transitive  sense  of  the 
verb.  Thus,  DttTctybreclKtt,  intrans.  sep.  to  break  through; 
er  brtdjt  t>Utd),  he  breaks  through  ;  &urcf)'gcbvodjcn,  having 
broken  through :  but  et'Wag  totvd)bvcd)'cn,  trans,  insep.  to 
break  through  a  thing  ;  ev  &Ul*djbrid)t'  et'ne  WflMtt,  he  breaks 
through  a  wall;  fcUVclbvodj'Ctt,  being  broken  through.  Thus, 
Um'laufen,  intrans.  sep.  to  go  or  run  round ;  er  taitft  Itm,  he 
runs  round ;  UttVgelaufen,  having  run  round  :  but  tt'wa6  Utn- 
iau'fen,  trans,  insep.  to  run  round  a  thing  ;  ei*  ttmtattft'  t>te 
©tafct,  he  runs  round  the  town ;  umlau'fcn,  being  run  round. 
Thus,  iVbevfe^en,  intrans.  sep.  to  leap  or  pass  over ;  et*  fe£t 
U'bev,  he  leaps  over ;  tVbcrgefe^t,  having  passed  over  :  but 
itbevfet'jen,  trans,  insep.  to  translate  ;  er  ftbevfe^t'  bie  bi'tcn 
©(bvtft'jUller,  he  translates  the  ancient  authors ;  ubevfe^t', 
translated. 

QOBie'fcec  in  composition  is  separable  in  the  proper  sense, 
but  inseparable  in  the  figurative  sense  ;  as,  VMe'fcevfyofen,  prop, 
sep.  to  fetch  back  ;  id)  fyol'te  eg  nne'Der,  I  fetched  it  back  : 
but  nnet>evt)o'(ert,  figur.  insep.  to  repeat;  id)  nnefcevfyof'te  t>te 
QBov'te,  I  repeated  the  words. 

In  the  above  verbs  the  accent  is  laid  upon  the  particle  when 
it  is  separable,  but  upon  the  verb  when  it  is  inseparable. 


112 


COMPOUND    VERBS. 


[book  I. 


5.  Verbs  compounded   with   nouns  or  adverbs  are  mostly 
inseparable ;  but  take  the  augment  ge  in  the  participle ;  as, 

Infinitive.  Pres.  Ind.  Participle. 

sfiatfy'fdjfoaw/  to  consult,    icb  ratfy'fdtfage.     geratf)'fcl)faget. 
Zfnt'roovten,  to  answer.       id)  ant'roorte.       geant'roortet. 


ftrg'wofynen,  to  suspect. 
grol)locteu,  to  exult. 

gTulyjtutfen,  to  breakfast, 
gud^'fcftroanjen,  to  fawn. 
J^an&'fyaben,  to  handle. 
J^ei'vatfyen,  to  marry, 
iieb'dttgeht,  to  ogle, 
iieb'fofeu,  to  caress. 
SDTutfy'mafeu,  to  conjecture 


So  the  following ; 

CUtacf  falbern,  to  quack. 
SHafc'bredjen,  to  break  on  the 

wheel. 
SKedtf'fertigen,  to  justify. 
\Xt'ti}tiUn,  to  judge. 
ttt'ftm&en,  to  testify. 
•^XBeif'fagen,  to  prophesy, 
^ett'eifent,  to  emulate. 
'IBillfafy'ren,  to  gratify. 


Verbs  compounded  with  fooff,  drop  the  augment  ge ;  as, 
kollen'fcen,  to  finish  ;  imp.  id)  boficu'bete,  I  finished  ;  part,  bol- 
Un'btt,  finished  :  so,  bOtlbnug'CU,  to  bring  about ;  fcolljie'fyeu, 
to  execute ;  footfffreCfett/  to  accomplish ;  fcollfltfy'veu,  to  con- 
summate. 


List  of  the  principal  Particles  with  ivhich  Compound  Verbs 

are  formed. 

1.  The  following  particles  are  generally  inseparable  from 
the  verbs. 


after 

as,  afterrefceu, 

to  backbite. 

be 

befeeufen, 

reflect,  consider. 

emp 

empfana/cn, 

receive. 

ent 

entftc'fyen, 

arise. 

er 

erftn'fcen, 

invent. 

W 

gefcei'fyen, 

prosper. 

Jointer 

fyiutevMei'ben, 

remain  behind. 

mis 

taisfaVUn, 

displease. 

fcer 

feerjcfj'ren, 

consume. 

fcerab 

fcevabfolgen, 

deliver. 

Pentad) 

toevnadj'lafllgcn, 

neglect. 

fcerun 

Devun'ctyrcn, 

dishonor. 

PART  II.  CH.  6.] 

uv 

jer 


COMPOUND    VERBS. 


113 


fcotlbring'en, 

ur'tfyeilen, 

jerjU'ren, 


to  complete, 
judge, 
destroy. 


2.  The  following  are  the  principal  particles,  which  in  cer- 
tain tenses  before  mentioned  (page  104),  are  generally  to  be 
separated  from  the  verbs. 


at 

auf 

fcafcotv 

oarun'ter 

fcurd) 

fort 

ijeim 

tyerab' 

fyerbei' 

fyernad)' 

fyenuvter 

ijinab' 

fyinaus' 

in'nen 

nie'oer 

fiber  em' 

fcor 

korft'ber 
roie'Der 


an 

m$ 

oafur' 

oaroi'oer 

ein 

fur 

j?in 

ijerauf 

foettotrd)' 

tjeru'ber 

fyerbor' 

fcinan' 

fjimVber 

mit 

ob 

un'tcr 

tor  an' 

fcorbei' 

l« 


anfyeim' 

bet,  oabei' 

oabor' 

oajroifdyen 

einfyer' 

gieid) 

tyer 

fyerauS' 

herein' 

fyerum' 

jjerjur 

Jjinauf 

nad) 

fiber 

Doll 

fc  or  auS' 

roeg 

juroi'oer 


These  particles  have  a  meaning  of  themselves,  independ- 
ent of  the  verbs  with  which  they  are  connected ;  some  of 
their  meanings  may  be  seen  in  the  following  examples ; 

21b'fdjreibcn,  to  copy,        from  fdjrei'ben,  to  write,  ab,  from. 


2(ug'fdjreiben,  to  extract, 

ifaf  baueu,  to  erect, 
Sltadj'gefyen,  to  go  after, 
SCTCit'nefymen,  to  take  along 

with, 
9tie'Derrennen,torundown, 
J^er'bringen,  to  bring  hither 

or  here, 

10* 


fd)rei'ben,  to  write,  au$,  out 

of,  or  from. 

ban' en,  to  build,  auf,  up. 
ge'fyen,  to  go,  nadj,  after, 
nefy'men,  to  take,  mit,  with. 

ren'nen,  to  run,  nie'oer,  down. 

bring'en,  to  bring,  fyer,  hither. 


114  AUXILIARY    VERBS.  [BOOK  I. 

J^er^ot'bringcn,   to   bring  king'en,   to    bring,    fyctDor', 

forth,  forth. 

§in't)tlfm,  to  forward,  fyel'fen,  to  help,  ()itt,  forth. 

^inu'berfommen,  to  come  fom'men,  to  come,  fyhuVber, 

over,  over, 

ttn'tevftnfen,  to  go  to  the  jtnf  en,  to  sink,  un'Uv,  under, 
bottom, 

trberftiefen,  to  overflow,  flie'fm,  to  flow,  iVbcr,  over. 

SSor'Ifommen,  to  occur,  rorn'mew,  to  come,  fcor,  before. 

SJonin'gcfyen,  to  go  before,  ge'fycn,  to  go,  boran',  before. 

SSovbei'gefycn,  to  pass  by,  ge'ljen,  to  go,  fcorfcri',  by. 

^cg'nct^men,  to  take  away,  nefy'men,  to  take,  roeg,  away. 

9Q3ie'&etfommen,  to  come  fom'men,   to   come,   nne'fcer, 

again,  again. 

3tt'bet(fctt/  to  bite  eagerly,  bciffen,  to  bite,  $U,  at. 


§  7.    AUXILIARY   VERBS. 

-Oa'ben,  to  have,  fein  (fci;n),  to  be,  and  roer'&en,  to  become, 
are  the  three  most  important  auxiliary  verbs. 

VBtt'Hn,  is  used  as  an  auxiliary  with  every  verb  ;  fya'bett, 
with  all  the  active  and  most  of  the  neuter  verbs ;  and  feitt 
with  many  neuter  verbs. 

These  auxiliary  verbs  are  also  used  as  such  with  one  an- 
other, to  form  the  supplementary  tenses  of  each  of  them  ;  and 
their  supplementary  as  well  as  their  original  tenses  are  used 
with  other  verbs.  Thus  the  future  of  fya'ben,  id)  M?U  fya'bett, 
I  shall  have,  is  a  simple  supplementary  tense,  formed  by 
joining  the  present  id)  ttm*'be,  to  the  infinitive  fya'ben ;  and 
this  future  of  fya'ben  used  with  gelicbt',  loved,  the  past  partici- 
ple of  lic'bctt,  to  love,  forms  a  compound  supplementary  tense, 

the  compound  future  of  lie'ben,  id)  roer'fce  geliebt'  fya'ben,  I 

shall  have  loved. 

By  thus  joining  the  auxiliary  verbs  to  others,  the  following 
supplementary  tenses  are  formed : 

1.  The  two  supplementary  past  tenses,  viz.  the  perfect  and 
the  pluperfect. 

2.  The  two  future  tenses,  viz.  the  simple  and  the  compound. 


AUXILIARY    VERBS. 


115 


PART  II.  CH.  6.] 

3.  The  two  conditional  tenses,  viz.  the  simple  and  the 
compound. 

4.  All  the  tenses  of  the  passive  voice. 

The  perfect  is  formed  by  joining  the  past  participle  of  the 
verb  to  the  present,  and  the  pluperfect  by  joining  the 
same  to  the  imperfect,  of  the  auxiliary  k)(x'bcxx,  or  the  auxiliary 
fein ;  as,  id)  fya'fce  gettebt',  I  have  loved ;  id)  fyat'te  geliebt', 
I  had  loved  ;  and  id)  bin  geveifV,  I  have  travelled  ;  id)  roar 
gevctft'/  I  had  travelled.  (The  auxiliary  fcin,  in  all  neuter 
verbs,  is  Englished  to  have.) 

The  simple  future  is  formed  of  the  present  indicative  or 
subjunctive  of  roer'&en,  joined  to  the  present  infinitive  of  the 
verb ;  as,  id)  mt'tt  lit'btn,  I  shall  love  :  and  the  simple 
conditional  is  formed  of  the  imperfect  subjunctive  of  roet'fcen, 
joined  to  the  present  infinitive  of  the  verb  ;  as,  id)  roitr'fcC 
iit'bttt,  I  should  love.  The  compound  future  is  formed  of 
the  simple  future  of  fya'bcn,  or  of  fein,  joined  to  the  past 
participle  of  the  verb  ;  as,  id)  roev'fce  geltebt'  tjd'imx,  I  shall 
have  loved  ;  icl)  ton'M  gcvcijl'  fein,  I  shall  have  travelled  : 
and  the  compound  conditional  is  formed  of  the  simple  con- 
ditional of  fya'bcn,  or  of  fein,  joined  to  the  past  participle  of 
the  verb;  as,  icf)  roiir'&C  geltebt'  tyx'bm,  I  should  have  loved ; 
id)  roftr'&e  gcceijt'  fein,  I  should  have  travelled. 

The  different  tenses  of  the  passive  are  formed  by  joining 
the  past  participle  of  the  verb  to  the  original  and  the  supple- 
mentary tenses  of  roeffcen,   which  then   is  Englished  to  be ; 

as,  id)  roer'fce  geltebt',  I  am  loved ;  icl)  wur'&e  geltebt',  I  was 
loved. 

The  following  paradigms  contain  the  original  and  the  sup- 
plementary tenses  of  fya'ben,  fcin,  and  roer'fcen. 


Conjugation  of  the  Auxiliary  Verb,  QtibtXX,  to  have. 

Infinitive.  Participle. 

Prcs.  fya'ben,  to  have.  Pres.  fya'ben&,  having. 

Perf.  gefyabt'  fya'fcen,  to  have     Past,  gefyabt',  had. 
had. 


116 


AUXILIARY    VERBS. 


[book  I. 


Indicative. 


Subjunctive 


Present. 


Singular. 

id)  f)a'6e,  I  have. 

t>U  fyajt,  thou  hast. 

Ct*,  fte,  e£  fyat,  he,  she,  it  has. 

Plural. 

wir  fya'ben,  we  have. 

it)t  fyabt  or  fya'bet,  you  have. 

fte  fya'fcen,  they  have. 


Singular. 

id)  fya'&e,  I  may  have. 

t>U  §&'bt\t,  thou  may st  have. 

ev,  fte,  e^  fya'be,  he,  she,  it 

may  have. 

Plural. 

Xt>iv  fya'fren,  we  may  nave, 
ifyv  fya'lu't,  you  may  have, 
fte  I) a' 6  en,  they  may  have. 


Imperfect. 


Singular. 

id)  fyat'te,  I  had. 

felt  fyat'tejt,  thou  hadst. 
CV  ^t'U,  he  had. 

Plural. 

tt>ir  fyat'tett,  we  had. 
itjt  tyxt'ttt,  you  had. 
fte  fyrtt'ten,  they  had. 


Singular. 


id)  tybt'tt,  I  might  have. 

t>U  fyat'tejt,  thou  mightst  have. 

er  tyfrt'U,  he  might  have. 

Plural. 

tOXX  fydt'ten,  we  might  have, 
ifyr  tyat'ttt,  you  might  have, 
fte  fy&t'tett,  they  might  have. 


Perfect. 
Singular.  Singular. 

id)  ha'be  gcfyabt', 1  have  had.      id)  fya'be  gefyabt',  I  may  have 

had. 

tu  tjtft  gefyabt',  &c.  tot  tja'fceff  gcfyabr,  &c. 


Pluperfect. 
Singular.  Singular. 

id)  fjat'te  geljabt',  I  had  had.      id)    Ij&t'te  gefyabt',   I   might 

have  had. 

bu  fjat'tcft  gefyabt',  &c.  t»u  (jfa'tejt  ge^6f,  &c. 


PART  II.  CH.  6.]  AUXILIARY    VERBS.  117 

Simple  Future. 

Singular.  Singular. 

id)  mx't>C  t)A'bm,  I  shall  have,  id)  wcr'&e  fya'ben,  I  shall  have. 

i>u   xt>ix\\    fya'ben,    thou    wilt  t>u  rocr'&c|t  fya'ben,  thou  wilt 

have.  have. 

tx  ttrivt>  fja'ben,  he  will  have.  tx  xotx'bt  fya'ben,  he  will  have. 

Plural.  Plural. 

wix  wer'&en  fya'ben,  we  shall  nut  mx'tim  fya'ben,  we  shall 

have.  have. 

tf)x  mx'bet  fya'ben,  you  will  ifyt*  roev'fcet  fya'ben,  you  will 

have.  have. 

fte  rocr'&en  fya'ben,  they  will    fie  mt'totn  fya'ben,  they  will 

have.  have. 

Compound  Future. 
Singular.  Singular. 

id)  roev'be  gefyabt'  fya'ben,  I  shall    id)  roer'&e   gefyabt'  fya'ben,  I 

have  had.  shall  have  had. 

fru  mx\l  getjabt'  fya'beu,  &c.       i>u  nw&cjt  gefyabt'  Ija'ben,  &c. 

(Conditional  Tenses.) 

Indicative  and  Subjunctive. 
Simple  Conditional.  Compound  Conditional. 

Singular.  Singular. 

id)  nnV&c   fya'ben,  I  should    id)  nnVfce  gefyabt'  fya'bcn,   I 

have.  should  have  had. 

t>u    roitv'bejt     fya'ben,     thou    t>u   wutr'Dcjt   gefyabt'    fya'ben, 

wouldst  have.  &c. 

ev  roitr'be  fya'ben,  he  would 

have. 

Plural. 

xoix  Ycux'bcn  fya'ben,  we  should  have. 
it)f  ttnif'fcet  tnVben,  you  would  have, 
fte  ttmv'fcett  tijcCbtn,  they  would  have. 


113 


AUXILIARY    VERBS. 


[book  I. 


Imperative. 


Singular, 

fya'be  (t>tt),  have  (thou). 
tjtfbt  et'/  let  him  have. 


Plural. 


fya'ben  mv,  let  us  have, 
fyabt    or    r/a'bet    (\t)V),    have 

(you),  or  do  (you)  have, 
fya'ben  fie,  let  them  have. 


Exercises  on  the  Auxiliary  Verb,  fya'beit/  to  have. 

This  verb,  as  well  as  all  others,  may  be  conjugated  in  four 
forms ;  that  is, 

Affirmatively,  id)  tytfkt,  I  have. 

Negatively,  id)  fya'be  \\id)t,  I  have  not. 

Interrogatively,  fya'be  id)  ?   have  I  ? 

Negatively  and  interrogatively,  fya'bc  id)  ttic()t  ?  have  I  not  ? 

So  likewise  through  all  the  tenses,  as  in  the  following 
exercise. 

Pres.  Ind.  Have  I  ?  Have  I  not  ?  He  has  not.  Hast 
thou  ?  She  has  not.  Have  we  ?  We  have  not.  You  have 
not.     Have  they  ?     They  have  not.     Have  they  not  ? 


Imp.     Had  I?     He  had.      Had  she  not? 
Had  you  not  ?     They  had.     Had  they  not  ? 


Had  we  not? 


Perf.  Have  I  had  ?  Hast  thou  not  had  ?  Has  he  not 
had  ?  Have  you  not  had  ?  She  has  not  had.  Have  they  not 
had  ?  We  have  not  had  ?  Have  they  had  1  They  have  not 
had. 

Pluperfect.  I  had  not  had.  Had  I  not  had  ?  Hadst  thou 
had  ?  She  has  not  had.  Had  he  not  had  ?  Had  we  had  ? 
They  had  not  had.     They  had  had.     Had  they  not  had  ? 

Simple  Put.  Shall  I  not  have  ?  Wilt  thou  have  ?  I  shall 
not  have.  We  shall  not  have.  Will  you  not  have  ?  You 
will  not  have. 

Compound  Put.  He  will  have  had.  They  will  not  have 
had.  Will  they  not  have  had  ?  We  shall  have  had.  Will 
you  not  have  had  ? 


/ 


PART  II.  CH.  6.]  AUXILIARY  VERBS.  119 

Simple  Cond.  Should  I  have?  Thou  wouldst  not  have. 
Would  he  not  have  1  We  should  not  have.  Should  we  have  ? 
Should  we  not  have  ?  You  would  not  have.  Would  you  not 
have  1     They  would  not  have.     Would  they  not  have  1 

Compound  Cond.  I  should  not  have  had.  Would  he  not 
have  had  ?  We  should  not  have  had.  Would  you  have  had  1 
They  would  not  have  had. 

Pres.  Subj.  I  may  have.  I  may  not  have.  Thou  mayst 
not  have.  We  may  have.  We  may  not  have.  They  may 
have.     They  may  not  have. 

Imp.  Thou  mightst  not  have.  Hadst*  thou  not.  Had 
we.  Had  we  not.  Had  you  not.  Had  they  not.  They 
might  not  have. 

Perf.  Thou  mayst  not  have  had.  We  may  not  have  had. 
You  may  have  had.     They  may  not  have  had. 

Plup.  I  might  not  have  had.  Thou  mightst  have  had. 
He  might  have  had.  He  might  not  have  had.  We  might 
not  have  had.     They  might  not  have  had. 

Imper.  Have  (thou).  Let  us  have.  Have  (ye).  Let 
them  not  have. 


Conjugation  of  the  Auxiliary  Verb  @eilt,  (@C^tt),  to  be. 
Infinitive.  Participle. 

Pres.  fein,  to  be.  Pres.  fci'Cttfc,  being. 

Perf.  geroc'fen    fcin,  to  have    Past,  geroe'fcu,  been, 
been. 


*  The  phrases  beginning  with  the  verb  are  not  interrogative 
in  the  subjunctive  mood,  but  have  the  same  meaning  as  when 
preceded  by  if. 


120 


AUXILIARY   VERBS. 


[book  I. 


Indicative. 

Singular. 

id)  (nit,  I  am. 
i)U  M|t,  thou  art. 

cr,  fit,  e£  ift,  he,  she,  it  is. 

Plural. 

Wit'  ftnt>,  we  are. 
if*a*  fctfc,  you  are. 
fte  ftu^/  they  are. 


Subjunctive. 

Present. 

Singular. 

id)  fei,  I  may  be. 

t>U  fei'ejt,  or  fet|f,  thou  mayst 

be. 
CI*  fei/  he  may  be. 

Plural. 

roil*  fci'ett,  or  fein,  we  may  be. 
\t)V  fei'tt,  or  feit>,  you  may  be. 
fie  fci'CU,  or  fetlt,  they  may  be. 


Imperfect. 
Singular.  Singular. 

id)  roai*,  I  was.  idj  rod're,  I  might  be. 

&tt  ro<U'|t,  or  roa'rejT,  thou  wast.     t>u  rod'reft,  thou  mightst  be. 
Ct*  roar,  he  was.  CI*  rod'fC,  he  might  be. 


Plural. 

roil*  roci'rctt,  we  were, 
ifyl*  roa'iet,  you  were, 
fte  ttHVl'en,  they  were. 


Plural. 

roil*  rod'fen,  we  might  be. 
tfyt*  rod'vet,  you  might  be. 
fte  rod'fen,  they  might  be. 


Perfect. 
Singular.  Singular. 

id)  tun  geroe'fen,  I  have  been,     id)  fei  geroe'fen,  I  may  have 

been. 

tot  bijt  geroe'fen,  &,c.  tot  fci'c|f  geroe'fen,  &c 

Pluperfect. 
Singular.  Singular. 

id)  roai*  geroefen,  I  had  been,      id)  rod're   geroe'fen,  I  might 

have  been. 

tot  roartf  geroe'fen,  &c.  tot  rod'vett  geroe'fen,  &c. 


l\ 


PART  II.  CH.  6.] 


AUXILIARY    VERBS. 


121 


Simple  Future. 


Singular. 


id)  roev'be  fein,  I  shall  be. 
&U  mx\l  fcin,  thou  wilt  be. 
et*  rohrt>  fein,  he  will  be. 

Plural. 

voix  roet'fcen  fein,  we  shall  be. 
ifyr.  mev^ct  fcin,  you  will  be. 
fte  roev'fcen  fctn,  they  will  be. 


Singular, 
id)  mx'H  fein,  I  shall  be: 
tut  tt>cv't>cft  fein,  thou  wilt  be. 
er  mx'u  fein,  he  will  be. 

Plural. 

Yoix  XOtt'ten  fein,  we  shall  be. 
it)x  n>er'&ct  fcin,  you  will  be. 
fte  roev'fceu  fcin,  they  will  be. 


Compound  Future. 
Singular.  Singular. 

id)  roer'be  gcroe'fcn  fcin,  I  shall    id)  tucr'be  gcrcc'fcn  fcin,  I  shall 

have  been.  have  been. 

bu  w\x\l  gcroc'fen  fcin,  &c.         fcn  roer'fccjl  gcrcc'fcn  fein,  &c. 


(Conditional  Tenses.) 

Indicative  and  Subjunctive. 
Simple  Conditional.  Compound  Conditional. 


Singular. 

U§  rottr'be  fein,  I  should  be. 
t>n  nmv'fccjf  fein,  &,c. 


Singular. 


id)    nntr'fce   gcroe'fen   fcin,   I 

should  have  been. 

tm  nmr'&ejt  gcroc'fen  fcin,  &c. 


Singular. 


fct  (t>n),  be  (thou), 
fet  ev,  let  him  be. 


Imperative. 


Plural. 


fei'en,  or  fcin  wiv,  let  us  be. 
fcifc    (it)r),   be    (you),   or   do 

(you)  be. 
fcin  or  fei'en  fte,  let  them  be. 


11 


122  AUXILIARY  VERBS. 


BOOK  I. 


Exercises  on  the  Auxiliary  Verb,  <&ti\\,  to  be. 

Pres.  Ind.  Art  thou?  Is  he  not?  We  are  not.  Are  they 
not?  They  are  not.  Are  you  not?  You  are.  Are  we 
not? 

Imp.  Was  I?  Thou  wast  not.  It  was  not.  She  was. 
Were  we  ?  Were  we  not  ?  Were  you  not  ?  You  were  not. 
Were  they  ? 

Perf.  I  have  been.  Have  I  been?  I  have  not  been. 
Have  I  not  been  ?  Hast  thou  been  ?  She  has  been.  Has 
she  not  been?  It  has  been.  He  has  not  been.  Have  we 
been  ?  Have  you  not  been  ?  They  have  been.  They  have 
not  been.     Have  they  not  been  ? 

Plup.  Had  I  been  ?  I  had  not  been.  Thou  hast  been. 
She  had  not  been.  Had  he  not  been  ?  Had  he  been  ?  You 
had  not  been.  They  had  not  been.  Had  they  been  ?  Had 
they  not  been  ?     We  had  not  been.     Had  we  not  been  ? 

Simple  Fut.  I  shall  not  be.  Wilt  thou  not  be  ?  He  will 
be.  Will  she  not  be  ?  It  will  not  be.  You  will  be.  Will 
you  not  be  ?  Shall  we  be  ?  We  shall  not  be.  They  will  not 
be.     Will  they  not  be  1 

Comp.  Fut.  Shall  I  not  have  been  ?  Wilt  thou  not  have 
been.  He  will  have  been.  Will  she  not  have  been?  It 
will  not  have  been.  We  shall  have  been.  Shall  we  not  have 
been  ?     You  will  not  have  been.     Will  they  not  have  been  ? 

Simple  Cond.  Should  I  be  ?  Wouldst  thou  not  be  ?  It 
would  be.  Would  she  not  be  ?  He  would  not  be.  We 
should  not  be.  Would  you  not  be  ?  You  would  not  be. 
Would  they  not  be  ?     They  would  not  be. 

Comp.  Cond.  I  should  not  have  been.  Would  it  not  have 
been  ?  Should  we  not  have  been  ?  We  should  not  have 
been.  Would  you  not  have  been  1  They  would  not  have 
been. 

Pres.  Subj.  I  may  not  be.  Thou  mayst  be.  It  may  not 
be.  He  may  not  be.  We  may  be.  You  may  not  be.  They 
may  not  be. 


PART  II.  CH.  6.]  AUXILIARY    VERBS.  123 

Imp.  I  might  not  be.  She  might  be.  It  might  not  be. 
We  might  not  be.     You  might  be.     They  might  not  be. 

Perf.  I  may  not  have  been.  Thou  mayst  have  been.  He 
may  have  been.  It  may  have  been.  We  may  not  have  been. 
You  may  have  been.     They  may  not  have  been. 

Plup,  I  might  not  have  been.  Thou  mightst  have  been. 
She  might  not  have  been.  We  might  have  been.  You  might 
have  been.     They  might  not  have  been. 

Simple  Put.  I  shall  not  be.  Thou  wilt  be.  He  will  not 
be.  It  will  be.  We  shall  not  be.  You  will  not  be.  They 
will  not  be. 

Comp.  Put.  I  shall  not  have  been.  She  will  have  been. 
We  shall  not  have  been.  You  will  not  have  been.  They  will 
not  have  been. 

Imper.  Be  (thou).  Let  him  be.  Let  him  not  be.  Let 
us  not  be.  Be,  or  do  (you)  be.  Do  (you)  not  be.  Let  them 
not  be. 


Conjugation  of  the  Auxiliary  Verb,  QODer'feen,  to  become. 

Infinitive.  Participle. 

Pres.  wet'fecn,  to  become.  Pres.  ttCf'feenfe,  becoming. 

Perf.  genWfem  fcitt,  to  have     Past,  gCttOV'feett,  become, 
become. 

Indicative.  -  Subjunctive. 

Present. 

Singular.  Singular. 

id)  WCtr'fee,  I  become.  id)  mt'U,  I  may  become. 

felt  n>ir|t,  thou  becomest.  feu   wcr'feeft,   thou   mayst    be- 

come, 
er,  fte,   c$  roivfe,  he,  she,  it    er,  fie,  e£  rocr'fec,  he,  she,  it 
becomes.  may  become. 


124  AUXILIARY  VERBS.  [BOOK  I. 

Plural.  Plural. 

roix  roer'ben,  we  become.  tt»il*  wetr'tatt,  we  may  become. 

it)V  WU'btt,  you  become.  it)f  roev'fcct,  you  may  become, 

fie  tt>etwfcen,  they  become.  fie  roer'fcCU,  they  may  become. 

Imperfect. 

Singular.  Singular. 

id)  ttntV'fcC,  or  »ir&,  I  became.  ic()  ttnVfce,  I  might  become, 

tat   mw'bcft,   or   wavbjt/  thou  tat  ttHtf'talt,  thou  mightst  be- 

becamest.  come. 

Ct*   nwv'&e,   or   n>avt>,    he   be-  tx  nntv'ta,  he  might  become. 

came. 

Plural.  Plural. 

tOtX  \mx"btn,  we  became.  Wit    wht'btXl,    we    might   be- 

come. 

if; l*  ttmr'&et,  you  became.  it)X   roftv'&Ct,    you   might    bo- 

come. 

fie  ttUtV'fcen,  they  became.  fie   nnVfcen,   they   might    be- 

come. 

Perfect. 
Singular.  Singular. 

id)  bin  gewov'tan,  I  have  be-    idj  fet  gcroor'tan,  I  may  have 

come.  become. 

tat  bift  geroov'tan,  &c.  tat  feift  geroor'&en,  &c. 

Pluperfect. 
Singular.  Singular. 

id)  J»dv  geroov'tan,  I  had  be-    id)  ro&'ve  geroov'tan,  I  might 

come.  have  become. 

tat  n>a'vc(l  genWfcen,  &c.  tat  ro&'i-ejt  geroov'tan,  &c 

First  Future. 
Singular.  Singular. 

id)  roev'ta  roev'tan,  I  shall  be-    id)  wcv'fce  roer'tan,  I  shall  be- 
come, come, 
tat  nuvjt  roev'tan,  &c.                tat  mx'Mft  rcev'tan,  &c. 


PART  II.  CH.  6.]  AUXILIARY    VERBS.  125 

Second  Future. 
Singular.  Singular. 

id)   wx'U  geroov'fcen  fein,  I    ic()   roev't>e  geroor'fccn  fein,  I 

shall  have  become.  shall  have  become. 

tin  nnv|t  geroov'&en  fein,  &c.       Dtt  rocu'&ejt  geroou'fcen  fein,  &c. 

(Conditional  Tenses.) 

Indicative  and  Subjunctive. 

Simple  Conditional.  Compound  Conditional. 

Singular.  Singular. 

id)  n»Vt>e  mx'ton,  I  should    id)  nht'te  gercov'fccn  fcin,  I 

become.  should  have  become. 

fcn  ttnVfcejt  roer'fcen,  &c  tot    nnVfceit   scroor'&en   fein, 

&c. 

Imperative. 

Singular.  Plural. 

XOCt'Hn  »it?/  let  us  become. 
tt>etwt>e  (t>tt),  become  (thou).         tt>CV't>Ct  (ifyr),  become  (you)  or 

do  (you)  become. 
WX'tt  er,  let  him  become.  W&en  fte,  let  them  become. 

Exercises  on  the  Auxiliary  Verb,  ^ct'feen,  to  become. 

Pres.  Ind.  Does  he  become  1  Does  she  not  become  ? 
Thou  dost  not  become.  Do  we  become?  Do  you  not  be- 
come ?     They  do  not  become. 

Imp.  I  did  not  become.  Did  I  not  become  1  Did  we  be- 
come ?  She  became.  She  did  not  become.  Did  we  not 
become  ?     Did  you  not  become  ?     They  did  not  become. 

Perf.  I  have  become.  Have  I  not  become  ?  Hast  thou 
not  become  ?  She  has  not  become.  Have  we  not  become  ? 
Have  you  not  become  ?     Have  they  become  ? 

11* 


126  AUXILIARY    VERBS.  [BOOK.  I. 

Plup.  I  had  become.  Had  I  become  ?  Had  I  not  be- 
come? I  had  not  become.  Hadst  thou  become?  He  had 
not  become.  Had  she  not  become  ?  Had  we  become  ?  Had 
you  not  become?  They  had  become.  They  had  not  be- 
come.    Had  they  become  ?     Had  they  not  become  ? 

Simple  Fut.  Shall  I  become  ?  Shall  we  become  ?  Wilt 
thou  become?  Wilt  thou  not  become?  He  will  become. 
She  will  not  become.  Will  you  become  ?  They  will  not 
become. 

Comp.  Fut.  I  shall  have  become.  Will  he  have  become  ? 
Shall  we  have  become?  You  will  not  have  become.  Will 
they  have  become  ?  They  will  not  have  become.  Will  they 
not  have  become  ? 

Simple  Cond.  Should  I  become  ?  Wouldst  thou  become  ? 
It  would  become.  Would  he  not  become  ?  We  should  not 
become.     Would  you  become  ?     They  would  not  become. 

Comp.   Cond.      I    should   have   become.  Would   it   have 

become?      Should  we  have  become?      We  should  not  have 

become.      Would  you  not  have  become  ?  You  would  have 
become.     Would  they  have  become  ? 

Pres.  Subj.  I  may  not  become.  She  may  not  become. 
Thou  mayst  become.  He  may  not  become.  We  may  not 
become.     They  may  become. 

Imp.  I  might  become.  Thou  mightst  become.  She  might 
not  become.  We  might  n»t  become.  You  might  become. 
They  might  not  become. 

Perf.  I  may  have  become.  He  may  not  have  become. 
You  may  have  become.     They  may  not  have  become. 

Plup.  Thou  mightst  have  become.  She  might  not  have 
become.  It  might  not  have  become.  You  might  have  be- 
come.    They  might  not  have  become. 

Imper.  Become  thou.  Become  (you)  not.  Let  them  be- 
come.    Let  them  not  become. 


/ 


PART  II.  CH.  6.]  AUXILIARY  VERBS.  12^ 

A.  Supplementary  Tenses  of  Active  and  Neuter  Verbs. 
1.  Supplementary  Tenses  of  a  Verb   conjugated  with  Jpa'beit 

Irifin.  iit'Utl,  to  love. 

Pres.  id)  iit'bt.  Imp.  id)  (kb'te.  Imperat.  {ii'bi  tot. 

Pres.  Part.  (ie'6ent>.  Past  Part.  geUcbt'. 

Infinitive. 

Perfect. 
gcliebt'  fyci'ben,  to  have  loved. 

Indicative.  Subjunctive. 

Perfect. 
id)  \)<X'bt  geftcbt',  I  have  loved,     id)  fya'bc  geliebt',  I  have  loved. 

Du  fyaft  getiebt',  &c.  tot  fya'bejt  gdicbt',  &c. 

Pluperfect. 

id)  tjdt'tt  geliebt7,  I  had  loved,     id)  fyht'tt  gcficbt',  I  had  loved, 
tot  fjat'tejt  gcfiebt',  &c.  t>tt  fydt'tejt  gcliebt',  &c 

Simple  Future. 

id)  rccv'fce  (ie'bcn,  I  shall  love,    id)  mv'bt  lichen,  I  shall  love, 
tot  rrnvjt  (ie'bcn,  &c.  tot  roer'toft  Ue'bcn,  &c 

Compound  Future. 

id)  recv'fce  gctiebt'  fya'ben,  I    id)  roer'&e  geliebt'   fya'ben,  I 
shall  have  loved.  shall  have  loved. 

fcu  roirjt  geliebt'  fya'ben,  &c.       tot  reev'toft  geliebt'  \)<x'U\\,  &c 

Simple  Conditional. 

id)  roftt'fce  lie'ben,  I  should  love, 
tot  wut'&ejt  lie'ben,  &c. 


128 


AUXILIARY    VERBS. 


[book  I. 


Compound  Conditional. 

id)  xtxxx'tz  geliebt'  fya'kn,  I  should  have  loved, 
fcu  nntv'&eft  geliefct'  fya'ben,  &c. 


Exercises  on  Active  and  Neuter  Verbs  conjugated  with  JFJa'&eiU 


I  have  hoped, 

Have  I  been  zealous  ? 

I  have  not  seen, 

Have  I  not  trembled  1 

Thou  hast  quaked, 

Thou  hast  not  praised, 

Hast  thou  not  finished  1 

It  has  thundered, 

Has  he  not  mentioned  1 

Has  she  inquired  1 

Has  she  not  been  penurious? 

We  have  adorned, 

Have  we  not  slept  ? 

Have  you  not  suffered  ? 

You  have  not  lived, 

They  have  not  blossomed, 

Had  I  not  starved  ? 

Hast  thou  pined  1 

Thou  hast  not  found, 

It  had  been  worth, 

Had  she  known, 

He  had  not  stood, 

Had  he  not  sat  ? 

It  had  not  frozen, 

We  had  not  dreamed, 

They  had  been  called, 

They  had  not  grown  old, 

Had  they  demanded  ? 


fyof  feu,  to  hope. 
Ct'few,  to  be  zealous, 
fc'fyen,  irr.  to  see. 
Jtt'tmt,  to  tremble, 
bc'bcn,  to  quake. 
io'btn,  to  praise, 
eu'fcl'tt,  to  finish. 
fcOU'llcni/  to  thunder, 
etro&b'nen,  to  mention. 
fot*'fcl)en,  to  inquire, 
fvtv'gcn,  to  be  penurious, 
fcfomuc'fatt,  to  adorn, 
fdjta'fcii/  irr.  to  sleep, 
(ei'fccn,  irr.  to  suffer. 
Wbtti,  to  live. 
Mft'fycn,  to  blossom, 
fcat'ten,  to  starve. 
fdjmadytcU;  to  pine, 
ftn'fcen,  irr.  to  find, 
tau'geit/  to  be  worth. 
Wif'feit;  mix.  to  know, 
jte'fyett,  irr.  to  stand, 
jlt'jen,  irr.  to  sit. 
ftic'vcn,  irr.  to  freeze, 
tr&u'mcn,  to  dream, 
fyet'fcn,  irr.  to  be  called. 
al'ttXXi,  to  grow  old. 
foment,  to  demand. 


PART  II.  CH.  6.]  AUXILIARY   VERBS.  129 

2.  Supplementary  Tenses  of  a  Verb  conjugated  with  ©eitt. 

Infin.  SHci'fen,  to  travel. 

Pres.  id)  rci'fc.        Imp.  id)  rei'fle.        Imperat.  rci'fc  tou 

Pres.  Part,  rci  fc«K  Past  Part.  gcmjV. 

Infinitive. 

Perfect. 

gCVCift'  fcin,  to  have  travelled. 

Indicative.  Subjunctive. 

Perfect, 

id)  tun  gcrcijV,  I  have  travel-     id)  fei  gercijl',  I  have  travel- 
led, led. 

Du  bijt  aereijV,  &c.  t>«  fei'etf  screijV,  &c. 

P/wper/ec£. 

ic^  ttar  gCVCijV,  I  had  travel-    id)  rofc've  gereijV,  I  had  travel- 
led, led. 

t>n  aa'reji  geveijV,  &c  tot  a&'reft  gcvcijV,  &c. 

Simple  Future. 

xd)  wer'fce  VCt'fcn,  I  shall  travel,     id)  rocr'&e  VCifcn,  I  shall  travel, 
tot  roivjt  rei'fett;  &c.  tot  rocr'&ejt  vci'fcn,  &c. 

Compound  Future. 

id)  wcr'be  geretfi'  fcin,  I  shall    id)  mtt'U  gcrcijV  fcin,  I  shall 

have  travelled.  have  travelled. 

tot  roirjt  gereijV  fcin,  &c.  fru  »er'&e|l  gcrctjV  fcin,  &c. 


130 


AUXILIARY   VERBS. 


[book  I. 


Simple  Conditional. 

id)  roiVbe  m'fen,  I  should  travel, 
bit  voftx'Hfi  m'fen,  &c 

Compound  Conditional. 

id)  ttnVfce  geteijV  fein,  I  should  have  travelled. 
t»u  rouv'fcejt  gcvcijV  fcin,  &,c. 


Exercises  on  the  Neuter  Verbs  conjugated  with  ©ettt. 


I  have  stayed, 

Have  I  not  stayed  ? 

I  have  not  stayed, 

Hast  thou  run  1 

Thou  hast  not  climbed, 

Thou  hast  travelled, 

He  has  stumbled, 

Has  he  sailed  1 

He  is  not  come, 

Will  they  not  have  gone  1 

Has  she  followed  1 

It  will  have  burst, 

We  have  proceeded, 

Have  we  run  1 

We  have  not  wandered, 

Have  we  not  slidden  1 

You  have  swum, 

Have  you  swum  ? 

You  have  not  crept, 

Have  you  not  embarked? 

They  have  ridden, 

Have  they  ridden  ? 
They  have  not  ridden, 
Have  they  not  ridden  ? 
I  had  walked, 
Had  I  drawn  near  ? 
We  should  not  have  fled, 
Would  you  have  fallen  1 
Thou  hadst  slipped, 


Mci'beil/  irr.  to  stay. 


vcn'ncn,  mix.  to  run. 
fitm'mcn,  irr.  to  climb, 
tei'fcn,  to  travel, 
jtol'pent,  to  stumble, 
fe'oicfn,  to  sail. 
fOttl'men,  irr.  to  come. 
gC'tyCU,  irr.  to  go. 

fof'gen,  to  follow, 
ber'jten,  irr.  to  burst, 
fort'filfyrett,  irr.  to  proceed, 
iau'fcn,  irr.  to  rim. 
wan'&mt,  to  wander, 
gkt'teit,  irr.  to  slide, 
fdjnnm'mcn,  irr.  to  swim. 

ftrte'djen,  irr.  to  creep. 
ettt'fdjiffett/  to  embark. 
VCi'tCH,  irr.  to  ride  on  horse- 
back. 


ge'tyCU,  irr.  to  walk, 
tta'tjev  rftc'fen,  to  draw  near. 
fUc't)Ctt,  irr.  to  flee, 
fa  Wen,  irr.  to  fall. 

fc()lup'feu,  to  slip. 


PART  II.  CH.  6.] 


AUXILIARY  VERBS. 


131 


Wouldst  thou  not  have  sunk  ? 
Thou  hadst  not  penetrated, 
He  had  departed, 
Had  he  not  departed  ? 
It  would  have  darted, 
Had  it  not  slipped  ? 
We  had  not  pressed, 
You  had  not  recovered, 
They  had  not  slunk, 


ftllf'nt,  irr.  to  sink, 
fcvtng'en,  irr.  to  penetrate. 
fc()Ci't>cn,  irr.  to  depart. 

fcfncfcu,  irr.  to  dart. 
fd)(ujyfcu,  to  slip, 
fcring'en,  irr.  to  press, 
genc'fen,  irr.  to  recover. 
fdj(ei'el) en,  irr.  to  slink. 


3.  List  of  the  Neuter  Verbs  conjugated  with  £a'6cn. 

Regular   Verbs. 


Arisen,  to  groan. 
di'ttvn,  to  grow  old. 
ang'eltt,  to  angle, 
anient,  to  anchor, 
atty'meil/  to  breathe. 

ftct)  bal'gen,  to  fight. 

6e'ten,  to  pray, 
bct'tcln,  to  beg  alms. 
blitt'JCtt,  to  blink. 
MlVfyen,  to  bloom. 
tu'Um'mcn,  to  grumble. 
tMtv'gen,  to  bail, 
bu'fen,  to  suffer  for. 
tuut'ern,  to  last,  to  endure, 
fon'nmi,  to  thunder. 
fcur'ftCtt,   to  be  thirsty,  or   to 

thirst, 
ei'fcnt/  to  be  zealous, 
ei'len,  to  hasten. 
ei'tcvn,  to  suppurate, 
entfa'gen,  to  renounce, 
cv'ben,  to  inherit. 
mu'ita,  to  putrefy. 
feb len,  to  fail. 
tec'frn,  to  stain. 
jUt'cl)cn,  to  curse, 
fov'fcljcn,  to  inquire, 
fiinf'eht,  to  glimmer. 


g&fy'ncn,  to  yawn, 
gan'feln,  to  juggle, 
gei'jen,  to  covet. 
tjan'Min,  to  trade. 
fyrtV'veu,  to  wait  for. 
fyaufctfyie'ren,  to  trade,  to  bus- 
tle, 
fyaufl'vcn,  to  hawk  about. 
(jetrfefcen,  to  govern. 
(Jinf'en,  to  limp. 
fyoVcfyen,  to  listen, 
fyung'cnt,  to  hunger, 
fyttp'fen,  to  leap, 
fyn'jtcn,  to  cough. 
it'ttn,  to  err. 
janeVjcn,  to  shout. 
HVbcw,  to  calve. 
f&ttVpfcu,  to  combat. 
faf'gCU/  to  be  penurious, 
iei'tttcit,  to  shoot  out,  or  bud. 
frv'rcit,  to  coo,  or  creak. 
Haf  fen,  to  cleave, 
fla'gen,  to  complain. 
Hat'fcl)en,  to  clap,  to  applaud, 
ffe'ben,  to  cleave,  or  stick. 
M'gcln,  to  refine, 
fnac'fen,  to  crack. 
fnWren,  to  creak. 


132 


AUXILIARY    VERBS. 


[book  I 


hlic'hvn,    to    haggle,  to   act 

niggardly, 
fni'en,  to  kneel. 
Mkvn,  to  be  unruly,  to  roll. 
M'tyeit/  to  crow, 
fra'men,  to  trade, 
franf'en,  to  be  ill. 
htb'ftti,  to  catch  crabs, 
ftrte'gen,  to  wage  war. 
Iarf)'Ctt,  to  laugh. 
lan'fceU/  to  land. 
Idv'mcn,  to  make  a  noise, 
(au'evn,  to  watch. 
[au'ten,  to  sound. 
When,  to  live, 
mang'dn,  to  want, 
tttei'ncn,  to  mean. 
nWX'mtln,  to  grumble. 
OV'gcltt,  to  play  the  hand-organ, 
ta'fen,  to  be  mad. 

raf  ten,  to  rest. 

tau'djen,  to  smoke. 

rdu'men,  to  remove. 

vau 'fcl)cn,  to  rush. 

rdu'fpcnt,  to  clear  the  throat. 

Vt(i)'lUn,  to  reckon. 

Vtdytcn,  to  right,  to  go  to  law. 

fe'fcCU/  to  speak. 

m'fen,  to  ripen. 

1'Ct'men,  to  rhyme. 

VU'Htn,  to  row. 

fdu'men,  to  tarry. 

fau'fett,  to  whiz. 
fctja'Dcn,  to  hurt. 
fid)  fdjd'mcn,  to  be  ashamed, 
fdxut'fccnt,  to  shiver, 
fdjcv'&en,  to  joke, 
fdjim'meln,  to  mould, 
fdjhtc'tcn,  to  swallow. 


fdjmadj'tctt,  to  languish, 
fduttat'jcn,  to  smack. 
fdjmdfy'Icn,  to  scold, 
fcljmau'fcn,  to  feast, 
fdnmtt'jen,  to  soil,  to  dirty, 

fdjn&kfa,  to  bill. 

fdjnav'djen,  to  snore, 
fdjnat'tmt,  to  gabble, 
fdjrodr'men,  to  swarm. 
fd)ttnn'fceht,  to  grow  giddy, 
fdjroit'jen,  to  sweat, 
fe'gcht,  to  sail, 
feuf  jc«,  to  sigh. 
fOf'gCU,  to  care, 
fpie'len,  to  play. 
jtCU'eru,  to  steer  a  ship. 
jftt&i'ren,  to  study. 
JKtr'mcu,  to  storm. 
Itut'jcn,  to  butt  at. 
fu'bcln,  to  soil, 
fum'men,  to  hum. 
fun'fcigcn,  to  sin. 
rap'pen,  to  grope. 
ttjXe'Mn,  to  be  enthroned, 
to'bcn,  to  rage, 
to'nen,  to  sound. 
tttob'tttl,  to  endeavour. 
tt'CUt'cnt,  to  mourn. 

triumpfji'ren,  to  triumph. 
ti'5'dchl,  to  deal  in  frippery. 
tt>acl)'cit,   to   wake,   or   to    be 
awake. 

roei'uen,  to  cry. 

mllfatj'tm,  to  comply. 
Jft'gcn,  to  despair,  to  despond, 
janf'en,  to  quarrel. 
jie'Ien,  to  aim. 
jOt'tcln,  to  stagger. 
jUf'nnt,  to  be  angry. 


PART  II.  CH.  6.] 


AUXILIARY    VERBS. 


133 


Irregular  Verbs. 


ftd)  fccflei'fCtt,  to  be  studious, 
ftd)' ten,  to  fight, 
gcfat'len,  to  please. 
g(ei'd)Clt,  to  resemble, 
fei'fcn,  to  scold. 
fting'en,  to  sound. 

(ei'fccn,  to  suffer. 
vei'ten,  to  ride. 
VUl<Vcn,  to  wrestle, 
fait' fen,  to  drink  hard. 
fcl)ci'nen,  to  appear, 
fcrjla'fen,  to  sleep. 


fdman'bcn,  to  snort, 
fdn'ci'en,  to  cry. 
fcbwei'flen,  to  be  silent, 
febrmm'men,  to  swim, 
fdjroin'&en,   to  be  reduced,  to 

dwindle  away. 
fd)tt>6'ren,  to  swear, 
fin'nen,  to  think,  to  meditate. 

flt'jen,  to  sit. 

jh'Ct'tcn,  to  combat. 
Vevlu'edj'en,  to  commit  a  crime. 


4.  List  of  the  Neuter  Verbs  conjugated  with  ©cill. 


Regular 


ttttS'avtcn,  to  degenerate, 
begeci'nen,  to  meet, 
bctyau'ven,  to  continue. 
crMin^cn,  to  grow  blind, 
evflvini'men,  to  grow  angry, 
cvt'al'tcn,  to  grow  cold. 
evjUv'vcn,  to  be  chilled. 
evjTau'ncn,  to  be  astonished. 
flat'tevn,  to  flit,  to  flutter, 
gclang'en,  to  get,  to  attain. 
<Kroot)'nen,  to  be  accustomed. 
{•'Ict'tcvn,  to  climb, 
vci'fen,  to  travel, 
tcn'nen,  mix.  to  run. 
fe'geln,  to  sail. 
fcaji'ren,  to  take  a  walk. 
pl'peni,  to  stumble. 


Verbs. 

jtran'ben,  to  strand. 
JH'ait  d)c[n,  to  trip, 
jhtt'jen,  to  start. 

tra'ben,  to  trot. 
Veval'ten,  to  grow  old. 
fcevav'men,  to  grow  poor, 
fcerfwm'men,  to  grow  crooked, 
fcevlafy'mcn,  to  grow  lame, 
tocvfait'evn,   to   grow   sour,   to 
sour. 

fccv|inm'men,  to  grow  dumb, 
fcerroe'fen,  to  decay, 
fcevnn  I'fccvn,  to  grow  wild. 
fcerja'gen,  to  despond. 
nutn'bebt,  to  walk. 

roan'fcmt,  to  wander. 


afr'fatten,  to  fall  down, 
bcr'ften,  to  burst, 
blci'ben,  to  remain. 

12 


Irregular  Verbs. 


cvfrte'vcn,  to  freeze  to  death, 
ctfdjal'len,  to  resound, 
erfdjrcc'fcn,  to  be  terrified. 


134 


AUXILIARY    VERBS. 


[book  I. 


fafy't'Clt,  to  ride  in  a  vehicle. 

fallen,  to  fall, 
jiie'gcu,  to  fly. 
fie'fyen,  to  flee, 
flic'fen,  to  flow, 
frie'ren,  to  freeze, 
gcfcct'fyeu,  to  prosper. 

ge'ljen,  to  go. 

gCUC'fcn,  to  recover, 
glct'tcrt,  to  slide,  to  slip, 
tlim'mcn,  to  climb, 
f emmen,  to  come. 
hit'efyn,  to  creep, 
fau' fen,  to  run. 
Vet'ten,  to  ride  on  horseback, 
vin'nen,  to  leak,  to  run. 
'fdJfct'clKH,  to  sneak. 


fcfovct'tcn,  to  stride. 

fdjrocl'fcn,  to  swell. 

fcljroim'mcu,  to  swim. 

fdjttHtt'&en,  to  shrink,  to  dwin- 
dle. 

ftt'jeit,  to  sit. 

fpviug'en,  to  jump. 

jk'fycn,  to  stand. 

jtei'gen,  to  mount. 

flcv'ben,  to  die. 

VCfbki'clKU,  to  grow  pale. 

^Ct'lofdycn,  to  become  extin- 
guished. 

fcerfdjnnn'&en,  to  disappear, 
roaclyfen,  to  grow. 
n>Ct'c()en,  to  yield. 
TOCf'tCtt/  to  become. 


Obs.  Those  verbs  which  occur  in  both  lists  are  sometimes 
conjugated  with  fya'ben,  and  sometimes  with  fein.  (See  under 
the  next  head.) 


5.  Of  Neuter  Verbs  conjugated   with  either  Qa'btXl  or  ©ein, 
according  to  their  signification. 

1.  Some  take  fyaben,  to  denote  the  completion  of  an  ac- 
tion or  a  state,  and  fcin  to  denote  the  condition  of  a  thing  ; 
as, 

3)a$  gtn'er  fyat  ans'gebrannt,  the  fire  has  burnt  out. 

£>a£  StamtU'  ijt  attg'gebrciMtf,  the  chimney  is  burnt  out. 

3)ic  ^oty'fcn  fya'ben  au6,/gc&ampft,  the  coals  have  done  smoking. 

2>ie  gendytigfett  i|t  anS'getKimpft,  the  damp  is  evaporated. 

£Mc  (Sv'kt  \\i  gefvo'ren,  the  earth  is  frozen. 

035 ir  fya'beit  gefro'ren,  we  have  been  frozen. 

©6  t)i\t  gefro'ren,  it  has  frozen. 

2.  Verbs  expressive  of  motion  take  fcin,  when  the  place, 
or  the  manner  of  the  motion,  is  referred  to ;  but  take  fyil'bcn, 
when  the  simple  action  is  designated,  or  whenever  they  are 
used  as  reflective  or  reciprocal  verbs  ;   as, 

3d)  bin  in  t>ic  @tat>t  gmt'ten,  I  have  ridden  or  rode  into  the 
city. 


PART  II.  CH.  6.]  AUXILIARY    VERBS.  13) 

25i|?  fcn  gcgang'cn  o'fcct  gerit'tcn  ?   did  you  walk  or  ride? 

3d)  bin  lang'fam  gcrit'ten,  I  have  ridden  or  rode  slowly. 

^d)  bin  fcCU  gan'JClt  £ag  get*  ittCU/  I  have  been  riding  the  whole 

day. 
3d)  ija'be  *>a£  spfcrb  gerit'tcn,  I  have  ridden  the  horse. 
QODif    futfc    ilt  Die   @tat>t  geci'Ict,  we  have  hastened  into  the 

city. 
^Biv  fya'bcn  ttltt  &CV  @ac()'e  geei'Ict,  we  have  hastened  with  the 

atfair. 
2)ei*  330'gef  ifl   in  &a$  gefo  geflat'tcvt,  the  bird  has  fluttered 

into  the  field. 
£r  t)\\t  lang'C  gefiat'tert,  it  has  been  long  fluttering. 
2)ie  SHci'tCV  ftllt)  fd)0ll  auf  gefeffen,  the  horsemen  are  already 

seated. 
3d)  fya'be  t>ie  gan'je  Sttadjt  anfgefeffen,  I  have  sat  up  the  whole 

night. 
3d)  bin  in  fcclS  £ait£  gCgang'cn,  I  have  gone  into  the  house. 
3d)   fyd'bc  mid)  miVfce   gegang'Clt,   I   have   tired   myself   with 

walking. 

3.  Some  verbs  expressive  of  motion  require  fcin  when 
taken  in  the  proper  sense,  and  fya'bcn  in  the  figurative  sense ; 
as, 

(2Dtr  ffnt>  gefau'fen,  we  have  run. 

£>a£  ftfajj  i)At  gciatl'fcn,  the  cask  has  leaked. 

2)ie  ibfd'ncn  ftni>  gefloffen,  the  tears  have  flowed. 

2)tc  Eftoty'rc  fyat  gefloffen,  the  pipe  has  leaked. 

(£r  iff  ifym  gcfolgt',  he  has  followed  him. 

(El*  ijat  mei'nen  ittyUll  gcfolgt',  he  has  followed  my  precepts. 

2)er  gcinb  i|t  in  tic  ©ta^t  gctoutng'cn,  the  enemy  has  pene- 
trated into  the  city. 

G5v  fyat  in  mid)  gcfcvtmg'en,  he  has  urged  me. 

QBtv  fint)  fort'gefafyrcn,  we  have  left  or  gone  on  in  a  vehicle. 

'JBtu  ^vVbcn  fovt'gefafyrcn  jn  ar'beiten,  we  have  continued  to 
labor. 


136 


AUXILIARY    VERBS. 


[book  I. 


B.  Supplementary  Tenses  of  Reflective  Verbs. 
©id)  lic'ben,  to  love  one's  self.     (See  page  98.) 

Infinitive. 
Perfect. 

fid)  gcliebt'  fya'JJett/  to  have  loved  one's  self. 


Indicative. 


Subjunctive. 


Perfect. 

id)  fya'be  mid)  gcUcbt',  I  have    id)  Ija'bt  mid)  gelicbt',  I  have 
loved  myself.  loved  myself. 

tot  fyajt  bid)  gettcbt',  &c.  tot  tya'bcjt  tod)  geliebt',  &c. 


Pluperfect. 

id)  fyat'te  mid)  gelicfct',  I  had    id)  fydt'tc  mid)  gcficbt',  I  had 

loved  myself.  loved  myself. 

tot  bat'tejt  tod)  gclicbt',  &c.        tot  fydt'tcji  Did)  geliebt',  &c. 


Simple  Future, 
id)  rccv'to  mid)  lic'bcn,  I  shall    id)  nm-'&e  mid)  fie'bcn,  I  shall 

love  myself.  love  myself. 

tot  rcivft  Did)  lic'bcn,  &,c.  tot  roev'&efl  bid)  (ie'ben,  &c. 


Compound  Future. 

id)  rccv'to  mid)  geliebt'  tya'bcn,    id)  wcv'be  mid)  gcficbt'  fya'ben, 

I  shall  have  loved  myself.  I  shall  have  loved  myself. 

tot  nuvft  t>id)  gcficbt'  (ja'bcn,    tot  roci'toft  Did)  gclicbt'  fya'bcn, 

&C.  &.C. 


PART  II.  CH.  6.]  AUXILIARY  VERBS.  137 

Simple  Conditional. 

td)  ttntv'&e  mid)  tie'beit,  I  should  love  myself, 
fcu  rouv'fcejt  t>td)  lie'beu,  &c. 

Compound  Conditional. 

id)  ttuv'fce  mid)  gefiebt'  fya'ben,  I  should  have  loved  myself, 
fcu  roftv'&ejt  bid)  geliebt'  fya'ben,  &c. 


C.  Supplementary  Tenses  of  Impersonal  Verbs. 

The  supplementary  tenses  of  impersonal  verbs  are  formed 
exactly  like  those  of  complete  (active  or  reflective)  verbs  ;  as, 

SHcg'nen,  to  rain.     (See  page  101.) 

Indicative,  perf.  e6  t)Clt  geveg'net ;  pluperf.  e£  fyat'te  ge= 
reg'net ;  simp.  fut.  e£  rcivD  reg'nen ;  comp.  fut.  e$  <»ivt)  ge-- 
veg'net  fya'ben. 

Subjunctive,     perf.  eg   fya'be   gefCg'itCt ;  pluperf.   e£  fyttt'tC 

gcvcg'nct ;  simp.  fut.  e$  mv'U  reg'ueu ;  comp.  fut.  es  von'U 
geveg'net  fya'ben. 

simp.  cond.  e£  nntv'be  t'cg'nen ;  comp.  cond.  eg  yoxxx'U  gc-- 
veg'net  fya'ben. 

fc'gent/  to  be  vexed.     (See  page  102.) 

Indicative,  perf.  C6  \)&t  mid)  gedv'get't ;  pluperf.  eg  tjdt'tt 
mid)  gedv'gevt ;  simp.  fut.  e£  nnrt>  mid)  dr'gevn ;  comp.  fut. 
eg  rcivb  mid)  gedv'gevt  fya'bcn. 

Subjunctive,  perf.  eg  fya'be  mid)  gcdv'gert ;  pluperf.  eg 
\)at'u  mid)  gedv'gevt;  simp.  fut.  eg  tvev'fce  mid)  dv'gcnt;  comp. 
fut.  eg  rcev'c-e  mid)  gedv'gevt  fya'ben. 

simp.  cond.  eg  tvuv'fce  mid)  dv'gevn ;  comp.  cond.  eg  rouv'fce 
raid)  gedv'gevt  fya'ben. 


12* 


138  AUXILIARY    VERBS.  [BOOK  I. 

©ic()  fctt'fte'fjCtt,  to  be  understood.     (See  page  103.) 
Indicative.      perf.    eg    t)Ht   fid)    fcCVjlau'&Ctt ;    pluperf.    eg 

fyat'te  fid)  vevftan'&en ;  simp.  fut.  eg  roivt>  ftcl)  toevjte'fyeu;  comp. 
fut.  c^  n>ivt>  fid)  Devftau'&eu  tya'fceu. 

^Subjunctive,  perf.  eg  fya'be  f(c()  l>ev|tau'fccu  ;  plup.  eg 
fydt're  ftcl)  fcevjTau'fceu ;  simp.  fut.  eg  rcev'fce  fid)  fccrjtc'tyen ; 
comp.  fut.  eg  nw'Defidj  Derflan'^ett  &a'6en. 

simp.  cond.  eg  nu'iv'&e  ftcl)  fcevjte'fyeu ;  comp.  cond.  eg  wur'fte 
fid)  Dei-jtaufceu  fya'ben. 


D.  Supplementary  Tenses  of  Compound   Verbs. 

The  particle,  with  which  the  simple  verb  is  compounded,  is 
never  separated  from  it  in  any  of  the  supplementary  tenses.* 
Accordingly  there  is  no  difference  between  separable  and 
inseparable  compound  verbs,  with  respect  to  the  supplement- 
ary tenses  ;  they  are  formed  exactly  like  those  of  simple  verbs. 
Examples  : 

Tluffyalton,  to  detain.     (See  page  105.) 

Infinitive,    perf.  aufgefyaften  fya'bcn. 

Indicative,  perf.  id)  fya'be  aufgefyafteu ;  pluperf.  iff) 
fyat'te  auf gcfyalten ;  simp.  fut.  id)  von'U  auf fatten;  comp. 
fut.  id)  roer'fce  auf  gcfyalten  fya'fccn. 

Subjunctive,  perf.  id)  fya'be  auf gefyedceu ;  pluperf.  id) 
fyat're  aufgefyafreu;  simp.  fut.  id)  rcev'fce  auftjatteu;  comp. 
fut.  id)  roet'De  aufgefyalteu  tja'bm. 

simp.  cond.  id)  nn'ir'&e  auf  fatten ;  comp.  cond.  id)  rofir'fce 
aufgefyatteu  fya'beu. 

SBefyaf'teu,  to  retain. 

Infinitive,    perf.  frcfyapteu  fya'bcn. 

Indicative,    perf.  id)  fya'be  befyal'teu;  pluperf.  id)  fyat'tt 

*  The  reason  is  obvious  ;  since  all  the  supplementary  tenses 
are  formed  by  joining  the  auxiliary  verb  either  to  the  infinitive 
mood  or  to  the  past  participle ;  in  neither  of  which  does  such 
a  separation  of  the  simple  verb  from  the  preposition  take  place. 


PART  II.  CII.  6.]  PASSIVE  VERBS.  139 

befyal'tcn ;  simp.  fut.  id)  rocv'fce  bcfycd'tcu ;  comp.  fut.  id) 
ttev'fce  bctyal'ten  fya'ben. 

Subjunctive,  perf.  icf)  fya'be  befyal'tcu ;  pluperf.  id)  fyat'te 
fcctyaf  ten  ;  simp.  fut.  id)  roev'fcc  betyal'tcn ;  comp.  fut.  id) 
ron'U  bcfyal'ten  fya'ben. 

simp.  cond.  id)  nmv'&c  bcfyal'ten;  comp.  cond.  id)  nmr'fce 
befyal'teu  fya'beiu 


§  8.  passive   verbs. 

The  passive  voice  of  active  verbs  is  formed  by  joining 
the  past  participle  of  the  verb  with  the  different  moods  and 
tenses  of  the  auxiliary  tt>cc't>en ;  with  only  this  difference, 
that  the  first  syllable,  gc,  of  the  past  participle  gCWOv'fccn, 
is  dropt  in  all  its  combinations  with  the  verb.  Thus  we  say, 
id)  bin  gcliebt'  rpor'&cn,  I  have  been  loved,  (instead  of  id)  bin 
gcliebt  gcroovbcn.) 


Conjugation  of  the  Passive  Verb,  (Gcliebt'  roer'&CU,  to  be  loved. 

Infinitive.  Participle. 

Pres.  gcliebt'  roet'fcen,  to  be  gelicbt',  loved 

loved. 

Perf.  gcliebt'  rcov'ben  {tin,  to 

have  been  loved. 

Indicative. 

Present. 

Singular. 

id)  rcev'be  gelicbt',  I  am  loved. 

fcu  mii'ft  gelicbt',  thou  art  loved. 

er,  fie,  or  eg  nnvfc  gcliebt',  he,  she,  or  it  is  loved. 

Plural. 

»iv  mermen  gcliebt',  we  are  loved. 
if)U  tt>cv't)Ct  gcliebt',  you  are  loved, 
ftc  roev'&Ctt  gelicbt',  they  are  loved. 


140  PASSIVE  VERBS.  [BOOK  I, 

Imperfect. 
Singular. 

id)  xtxxx'tz  or  roart>  gelicbt',  I  was  loved. 

tW  WUV'&cfl:  or  wav&jt  gcliebt',  thou  wast  loved. 

tx  nmi*'t>e  or  n>avt>  gcliebt',  he  was  loved. 

Plural. 

mx  mvc'Uu  gcliebt',  we  were  loved. 
\\)x  nntv'fcct  gelicbt',  you  were  loved, 
fte  nntt'fcen  gelicbt',  they  were  loved. 

Perfect. 

Singular. 

id)  bin  gelicbt'  worsen,  I  have  been  loved. 
&tt  bijt  gcliebt'  rcov'ben,  thou  hast  been  loved. 
tt  t|t  gelicbt'  roov'fcen,  he  has  been  loved. 

Plural. 

wix  f(nt>  gcliebt'  tt>ov't>en,  we  have  been  loved. 
\l)x  fcit>  gelicbt'  n?0V>CU,  you  have  been  loved.  -" 
jie  f(Ht>  gelicbt'  tt>0V'i>en,  they  have  been  loved. 

jP/«per/ec£. 

id)  voax  gcliebt'  tt>or't>cu,  I  had  been  loved 

t>tt  \Vi\Y\l  gcliebt'  roov'fcClt,  thou  hadst  been  loved. 

ZX  Xtxxx  gcliebt'  worsen,  he  had  been  loved. 

Plural. 

xoix  roa'vcn  gcliebt'  worsen,  we  had  been  loved. 
tl)f  iM'vet  gcliebt'  roov'&en,  you  had  been  loved, 
fte  ttHl'veit  gcliebt'  worsen,  they  had  been  loved. 


PART  II.   CH.  6.]  PASSIVE    VERBS.  141 

Simple  Future. 
Singular. 


"& 


id)  nw'be  geliebt'  rocv'frcn,  I  shall  be  loved, 
fctt  roivfl  <Klic(?t'  roer'Dcn,  thou  wilt  be  loved. 
er  it>tr£>  geliebt'  rocr'fcen,  he  will  be  loved. 

Plural. 

ttik  roev'&Ctt  gcltctf  Wcr'&Ctt,  we  shall  be  loved. 
ifyr  rocr'fcet  geliebt'  roev'c-en,  you  will  be  loved, 
ftc  rocv'&cn  geliebt'  rocv'&en,  they  will  be  loved. 

Compound  Future. 

Singular. 

id)  XDW'bt  geliebt'  worsen  fcin,  I  shall  have  been  loved. 
t>U  ttirjt  gcliebt'  roor'&cn  fcin,  thou  wilt  have  been  loved. 
tv  Wil'D  geliebt'  roov'&CU  fcin,  he  will  have  been  loved. 

Plural. 

n>ir  ttev'&en  geliebt'  worsen  fcin,  we  shall  have  been  loved. 
ifyr  rccv'c-et  geliebt'  worsen  fcin,  you  will  have  been  loved, 
ftc  roef'&Cit  geliebt'  WOr'OCU  fcin,  they  will  have  been  loved. 

Subjunctive. 

Present. 

Singular. 

id)  tt>ev't>e  geliebt',  I  may  be  loved. 

bit  tt»ev't>C|t  geliebt',  thou  mayst  be  loved. 

ei*  roev'&e  geliebt',  he  may  be  loved. 

Plural. 

»il*  ttev'feett  geliebt',  we  may  be  loved. 
it)f  roev'fcet  geliebt',  you  may  be  loved, 
fte  roev'fcen  geliebt',  they  may  be  loved. 


142  PASSIVE    VERBS.  [BOOK  I 

Imperfect. 

Singular. 

id)  ttftV'be  geliebt',  I  might  be  loved. 

fru  rouv'&ejt  geliebt',  thou  mightst  be  loved. 

it  ttHlf'De  geUebt',  he  might  be  loved. 

Plural. 

XOVt  ttnVt>CU  geltebf,  we  might  be  loved. 
itjt  tttnr'bet  geliebt',  you  might  be  loved. 
f(e  NHtf'fcen  geltebt',  they  might  be  loved. 

Perfect. 

Singular. 

id)  fei  geftebt'  WOV'fccn,  I  may  have  been  loved. 

fclt  fetjt  gcCicbt'  roov'&CU,  thou  mayst  have  been  loved. 

it  fci  geltebt'  w?0t*'t)Cn,  he  may  have  been  loved. 

Plural. 

Xb'\X  fet'en  geliebt7  ttJOffreit,  we  may  have  been  loved, 
ifytr  fei'et  geliebt'  WOr'ten,  you  may  have  been  loved, 
fie  fet'en  geltebt'  roov'fcen,  they  may  have  been  loved. 

Pluperfect. 

Singular. 

tcf)  roa'vt  geftebt'  worsen,  I  might  have  been  loved. 

&U  tt&'veff  getiebt'  WOV'&ftt,  thou  mightst  have  been  loved. 

tv  rod're  geltebt'  WOV'fcen,  he  might  have  been  loved. 

Plural. 

Wit  Wd'rcn  geliebt'  worsen,  we  might  have  been  loved. 
it)V  W&'ret  gettebt'  WCV'Uw,  you  might  have  been  loved, 
fie  roa'ven  geltebt'  rooffccn,  they  might  have  been  loved. 


PART  II.  CH.  6.]  PASSIVE    VERBS.  143 

Simple  Future. 
Singular. 

id)  roct'fce  geficbt'  wev'fcen,  I  shall  be  loved, 
fru  wcr'^cft  $&UM  roev'fcen,  thou  wilt  be  loved, 
et*  MV'H  gcltebt'  xccx'Uxx,  he  will  be  loved. 

Plural. 

wxv  wct'ben  gefiebt'  rocr'bcn,  we  shall  be  loved. 
i()v  rocv'bet  geliebt'  rocv'ben,  you  will  be  loved, 
fie  wcr'bcn  gclicbt'  rocv'&cn,  they  will  be  loved. 

Compound  Future. 

Singular. 

id)  roer'fce  geftebt'  roov'twt  fein,  I  shall  have  been  loved, 
fcu  n>Cl*'&C|t  gcttcbf  roor'ben  fcilt,  thou  wilt  have  been  loved, 
er  n>cv'^c  gclicbt'  roor'&cn  fein,  he  will  have  been  loved. 

Plural. 

XOXV  WCr'bCU  gcticbt'  WOV'bCtt  fctU,  we  shall  have  been  loved. 
ix)v  aer'bet  gefiebt'  roor'&cn  fein,  you  will  have  been  loved, 
fie  rocr'&cn  geltebt'  worsen  fein,  they  will  have  been  loved. 

Simple  Conditional. 
Singular. 

id)  rofir'&c  geliebf  mt'Uxx,  I  should  be  loved. 
l\x  roftv'Kcjt  geficbf  roci-'fecn,  thou  wouldst  be  loved, 
ev  n>uv'&e  gettebf  rocv'&cn,  he  would  be  loved. 

Plural. 

roiv  nmv'fcen  gefiebt'  wev'ben,  we  should  be  loved. 
il)i*  wiiv'&ct  gelicbt'  mt'tom,  you  would  be  loved, 
fie  tmVftei  gclicbt'  rocv'fccn,  they  would  be  loved. 


144  PASSIVE    VERBS.  [BOOK  Ic 

Compound  Conditional. 

Singular. 

id)  ttUV'be  gdicbt'  WOt'fcCtt  fcin,  I  should  have  been  loved. 

in  nntv'fccjt  gcltcbt'  ttw'fccn  fcin,  thou  wouldst  have  been  loved. 

et*  TOUX'bt  gdicbt'  worsen  fcin,  he  would  have  been  loved. 

Plural. 

Wit  ttnVfccn  gcttcbt'  WOt'fcftt  feitt,  we  should  have  been  loved. 
itjV  rouv'&et  gcUcbt'  worsen  fcin,  you  would  have  been  loved. 
ftC  ttiVftCU  gclicbt'  worsen  fctu,  they  would  have  been  loved. . 

Imperative. 

Singular. 

ttCt'&e  (felt)  gtfiebf,  be  (thou)  loved. 
mx'U  Ct*  gclicbt',  let  him  be  loved. 

Plural. 

nw'fccn  roit  gcttcbt',  let  us  be  loved. 

roev'&et  (il)r)  gclicbt',  be  (ye  or  you)  loved, 
wer'den  ftc  gcticbt',  let  them  be  loved. 

Observations.  I.  The  past  participle  of  the  verb  is  pre- 
served throughout  the  passive  voice,  whether  that  participle  be 
regularly  or  irregularly  formed.  There  is,  accordingly,  no 
dhTerence  between  regular  and  irregular  verbs  in  regard  to 
the  formation  and  inflection  of  their  passive  voice.  Thus 
the  passive  of  the  irregular  verb  fc'fydt,  to  see,  is  formed  in 
the  same  manner  as  that  of  the  regular  verb  lic'ben,  to  love, 
by  joining  the  past  participle  gcfc'fycn,   seen,  to  the  auxiliary 

verb  rccr'fccn ;  as,  gefe'fyen  rocv'fccn,  to  be  seen ;  id)  rocv'fcc 
gefe'fyen,  I  am  seen;  id)  bin  gcfc'fycn  root'fccn,  I  have  been 
seen,  &/C. 

II.  The  verb  fcin,  to  be,  with  the  past  participle,  must  not 
be  confounded  with  the  passive  voice.  In  the  former  case 
the  past  participle  is  used  as  an  adjective,  expressing  the  actual 
condition  of  a  thing,  while  the  passive  voice  signifies  a  state  of 


PART  II.  CH.  6.]  PASSIVE  VERBS.  145 

being  acted  upon.  Ex.  2)a$  £iUt£  \\l  gcfraut',  the  house  is 
built;  Dai?  ipaut?  »ir&  gcbcutt',  the  house  is  building;  ta£ 
(Sf'fcii  roar  auf  gctvacjcn,  the  dinner  was  served  up ;  fcat?  Sffett 
WliV'De  aufgctuagCll/  the  dinner  was  serving  up  (or  being 
served  up). 


ju^crcises  on  the  Passive  Verbs  {regular,  irregular,  and  mixed.) 

Indicative. 

Present. 

Am  I  not  praised?  [o'frnt,  to  praise. 

Is  it  not  lost  ?  fccvlie'veil,  irr.  to  lose. 

Are  they  not  rubbed  1  vei  frcn,  irr.  to  rub. 

You  are  called,  UCu'llClt,  mix.  to  call. 

^Imperfect. 

Was  he  not  beaten  1  fc()(a'gcn,  irr.  to  beat. 

We  were  not  taught,  (d)'vcu,  to  teach. 

Were  you  not  preferred  ?  iUH'^iC^CU,  irr.  to  prefer. 

They  were  read,  Ic'fen,  irr,  to  read. 

Perfect. 

Thou  hast  been  blamed,  ta'c-cfn,  to  blame. 

He  has  been  bitten,  bcif'fcu,  irr.  to  bite. 

You  have  not  been  punished,  |h\Vfen,  to  punish. 

Have  they  been  loaded  1  Ux'tXM,  irr.  to  load. 

Pluperfect. 

Had  it  been  measured  1  mcf  fen,  irr.  to  measure. 

We  bad  been  hindered,  biit'DCVlt,  to  hinder. 

They  had  not  been  given,  gc  bc\\,  irr.  to  give. 

You  had  been  misunderstood,     Vcvr'en'ncu,  mix.  to  misunder- 
stand. 

Futures. 

I  shall  be  weakened,  fcbwdcfj'CU,  to  weaken. 

Shall  we  not  be  seized  ?  grci'fen,  irr.  to  seize. 

Will  they  not  be  washed  ?  wafd)  en,  irr.  to  wash. 

13 


^48 


PASSIVE  VERBS. 


[ 


BOOK  I. 


You  will  have  been  seen, 
Will  they  not  have  been  re- 
warded 1 


fc'fynt,  irr.  to  see. 
bclofy'ueu,  to  reward. 


Subjunctive. 
Present. 


He  may  be  used, 
They  may  be  borne, 
You  may  not  be  sent, 


bv<XU'd)(\\,  to  use. 
tra'gCU,  irr.  to  bear. 
fcu'fcCU/  mix.  to  send. 


Imperfect. 


Thou  mightst  be  honored, 
It  might  be  excused, 
We  might  be  overtaken, 
They  might  be  written, 


cfy'rcn,  to  honor. 

entfclwl'fcigen,  to  excuse. 

Cin'tyolen,  to  overtake. 
fclH'Ct'kn,  irr.  to  write. 


Perfect. 


They  may  have  been  found,        fin'frCtt,  irr.  to  find. 
It  may  have  been  brought,  tu'ini.yCH,  mix.  to  bring. 

You  may  have  been  chosen,        roafy'leu,  to  choose. 

Pluperfect. 


It  might  not  have  been  felt, 
We  might  have  been  absolved, 
Thou  mightst  have  been  es- 
teemed. 


cmpfin'&cn,  irr.  to  feel. 
(o$'f|n-ec()cn,  irr.  to  absolve, 
actytcn,  to  esteem. 


Futures. 

We  shall  be  asked,  fra'^CU,  to  ask. 

It  will  not  have  been  denied,       Icug'licn,  to  deny. 
Thou  wilt  be  justified,  vccrjt'fevtigcn,  to  justify. 

Conditional  Tenses. 

Should  I  not  be  shunned  ?  mci'bnt,  irr.  to  shun. 

He  would  not  be  revenged,  rdc()'CU/  reg.  fy  irr.  to  revenge. 

Would  it  not  be  stolen  1  flcfy'lm,  irr.  to  steal. 


PART  II.  CH.  6.] 


PASSIVE    VERBS. 


147 


Should     we    not    have    been     fang'eit,  irr.  to  catch. 

caught  1 
You    would    not    have    been     ber'gett,  irr.  to  hide. 

hidden, 
They   would  not    have   been     beibireil'llClt,  mix.  to  burn. 

burnt. 


Let  them  be  judged, 
Let  it  be  repeated, 
Be  {thou)  not  driven, 


Imperative. 


Vtcb'teit,  to  judge, 
nucbeirfyo'leit,  to  repeat, 
tret' ben,  to  drive. 


Promiscuous  Exercises. 

^a'etttts  crjatjff  toon  ben  al'ten  SDcnt'fcfjen,  „fte  gfou'bftt,  bag 
e£  bet:4  Srfya'bcnfycit5  bitnm'ltfcbev6  QOfVfen7  nicbt2  an'gcmcjfcn3 
fei1,  t>tc3  (Softer4  in5  SBdn'be6  etn2  ju1  fcblie'fen2,  o'ber  fie3  in4 
men'fcbetiartiger5  (Se|U(t/6  bar2  jit1  ttellen2.  ©ie  tyei'ligen 
^al'ber  nub  Jpai'ne  unt>  mit  SRa'mcn  Don  ©ot'tern  bejetefc's 
nen2  fie1  ta^  gefyetm'ttigtoolle  ^23c'fcn,  mefefces  fie  mtr  in  2ln'- 
bactjt  febatt'en." 

©te  jeub'neten  flel)  au$  buret)  gret'l)eit£[tebe  ttnb  ^rett'e;  t»te 
gtrau'en  roa'reu  bet  tfy'itett  fyo'fyer  geaeb'tet  ate  bei  ben  mit 
gebtl'betereu  ©rie'efoen  nub  SKo'meru ;  tie  S'fyeit  rour'ben  fyei's 
lig  getyal'tett:  twfc  gtt'te  ©tt'tcn  gal'ten  bci  itfxttn  mefyr  ate 
an'bern>drtt?  gtt'te  ©cfct'jc. 

2lnadjftt'ft$  [acfe'te  ate  er  fafy  roie  ©o'lou  ficb  bemufy're  t>ic3 
Uu'gerecbtigfeit4  ttnb5  Jpab'fucbt6  fet'tier7  SDTtt'burger8  buret)9 
g  e f  eb  t  i  t'b  t  n  e10  (S  c  f  c  t'  J  e11  jit1  toertrei'ben2.  Sic'fc  febie'; 
nen  ifym  ben4  ©pin'tteitgerocben4  dfyn'lieb3  jtt1  fein2,  wel'ebe  bat?2 
©ebttuVebc3  unb4  ftlet'ite5  M$5  ficb6  in7  tb'neu8  ftug'e6  fefl's 
fyielten1,  toon4  ben5  ©tar'fen6  ttttb7  (Svo'fcn8  a'ber1  jerif'feu3 
nntrben2  3)arauf  foil2  ©o'teu1  gcaut'rcortet  fya'ben,  tk  Sfoen's 
febett  fytet'teii  ify're  SSun&'nifle,  roenn  e6  Ifei'nero3  Von4  beiben5 
S^et'len6  ntt^licb2  fei1  fie9  jtt7  breeb'en8;  ttnb  ev  roofle  fet'nc2 
(Sefet'je3  fo4  ju'trdglteb5  fur6  fei'ne7  25ftiwgcv8  tnacb'en1,  bag  c$ 
fur4  je'beu5  bef'fet3  fein9  fotte1  fte11  jit6  fyat'ten7,  ate8  jn9  fiber* 
trc'teu10. 

SEol'le  n>a$  bit  famtjt,  fo  fannft  bit  was  bit  rctfljt. 


148 


PROMISCUOUS    EXERCISES. 


[book  I. 


er$&l)fett/  to  relate, 
alt,  ancient, 
fretltfcl),  German, 
glaubnt,  to  believe, 
fcafj,  that. 

angcmctfcn,  becoming.     ; 
(5rl)abcnl)eit,  dignity. 
(}tmmlifc(),  heavenly. 

SQBefm,  being. 

(£>0tt,  god. 

cinfcbliefen,  to  inclose. 
SOGanD,  wall. 
Ofccr,  or. 

fcarftclleu,  to  represent, 
menfcbciltivtig,  human. 
(Sejtalt,  form, 
bciligcn,  to  consecrate. 
QBalD,  wood. 
Jpain,  grove. 
ttllt,  by. 
Sftame,  name. 

Sejetcbiten,  to  signify. 

gcl)eimut|3\)0((,  mysterious. 

fcbaucn,  to  contemplate. 

ttttV,  only. 

2iu^ad:t/  devotion. 

attSjeiclmett,  to  distinguish. 

tUtrcl),  through. 

gretbeitSlicbe,  love  of  liberty. 

$l*cue,  faithfulness. 

§l'ilU,  woman. 

hti,  anions. 

acbtcn,  to  esteem. 

fyod),  high. 

alt?,  than. 

Wit,  far. 

gebil&et,  cultivated. 

Stye,  marriage. 

fyalteu,  to  hold. 

f)ciltg,  sacred. 

©itte,  custom. 

gel  ten,  to  have  effect. 

(§cfc£,  law. 


aufccircarts?,  elsewhere. 

Uxd) en,  to  laugh. 

ai£,  when. 

fefycit/  to  see. 

rote,  how. 

ftc()    bcmftfycn,    to   exert  one's 

self, 
fcevtreibett,  to  expel. 

Ungerecbtigffit,  injustice. 

Jpabfurbt,  avarice. 
SDfttbuvgcr,  fellow-citizen. 
fdjfeibCtt,  to  write. 
fcbeinetl/  to  appear. 
atynlid),  similar, 
©pimtcngcrocbe,  cobweb, 
feftfyalten,  to  arrest, 
fdjroad),  weak. 
iU'm,  small. 

ftcb  fangeu,  to  be  caught. 
abei*,  but. 
jerrciffeit/  to  tear. 

frai'f,  strong. 

gl*0$,  great. 

fcavauf,  thereupon. 

fo((  (from  foHen),  is  said. 

untroovtcn,  to  answer. 

baftcit/  to  keep. 

SBftirtuig,  bond. 

rocim,  when. 

mifcficb,  profitable. 

%t)tii,  party. 

brecben,  to  break. 

ttcfleit/  to  will. 

maebcu,  to  make. 

Jlltrdglicl),  advantageous. 

23uvgCl*,  citizen. 

t$  fofle  (from  fo(len),  it  shall. 

fur,  for. 

ftbcvtrctCtt,  to  transgress. 

rooden,  to  will. 

UlllUn,  to  be  able. 

fo,  thus 


PART  II.  CH.  6.]     PROMISCUOUS  EXERCISES. 


149 


It  is  reported4  of1  the2  Sybarites3,  that  they  killed3  all1 
(the)  cocks2,  that  they  might6  dream5  out5  their1  morning2 
dreams2  without3  disturbance4. 

The  philosopher  Bias  being  asked,  what  animal  he  thought4 
(for1)  the2  most3  hurtful3,  replied,  "  Of  wild  creatures,  a  tyrant; 
and  of  tame  (ones),  a  flatterer." 

Praise,  like  gold  and  diamonds,  owes  its  value  only  to  its 
scarcity. 

The  Tears. 

Hillel  was  walking  in  a  moonlight  night  with  his  disciple 
Sadi,  in  the  gardens  of  the  Mount  of  Olives. 

Sadi  said,  "  See  yonder,  that  man  in  the  light  of  the  moon, 
what  is  he  about  (begins  he)  1  " 

Hillel  answered,  "  It  is  Zadoc  ;  he  is  sitting  by  the  grave 
of  his  son  weeping  (and  weeps)." 

"  Cannot9  Zadoc3  then2,"  said4  the5  young6  man,6  "  mod- 
erate10 his7  grief8?  The  people  call  him  the  just  and  the  wise." 

Hillel  replied,  "  Shall  he,  on  this  account,  not3  feel4  the1 
pain2  ?  " 

"But,"  asked  Sadi,  "what  advantage  has  the  wise  man 
over  the  fool  ?  " 

Then  his2  teacher3  answered1,  "  Behold,  the  bitter  tear  of 
his  eye  falls  to  the  earth,  but  his  countenance  is  turned2  to- 
ward1 heaven1." 


of,  1>CU.  (Dat.) 

the  Sybarite, fcer  @i;6at4i'te,2.a. 

to  report,  cqdty'feit. 

that,  t>a£. 

cock,  *Jj)afm,  m.  3.  b.  6. 

to  kill,  t&D'tcn. 

that,  fcamit'. 

morning     dream,    *50?ClwgCU' 

traum,  m.  3.  b.  {\ 
without,  of)'ue. 

disturbance,  ©toning,/.  1.  fc. 
to  dream  out,  aus'tvaumcu. 
I  may,  tc()  faun,  mix.  (Subj.) 
philosopher,  spijilofopj)',-  m. 
being  asked,  translate,   when 

he  was2   asked1  ;  when,  fca, 

to  ask,  fva'gcn. 

13* 


what,  wcl'dKtf. 

animal,  ^tyicr,  n.  3.  b.  b. 

for,  fur.  (Accus.) 

hurtful,  fcl)&Micl). 

to  think,  batten.  (Subj.) 

to  reply,  aut'roortcn. 

of,  un'tcr.  (Dat.) 

wild,  »tfo, 

creature,  (ScjVljepf ,  n.  3.  b.  fc. 

tyrant,  Xxj/IWXVL' ,  m.  2.  b. 

tame,  $al)m. 

flatterer,    @d)mcicl)'lcv,   m.  3i 

a.  a. 
praise,  iob,  n.  3.  b. 
like,  roie. 

gold,  ©olfc,  n.  3.  b. 
and,  UUt>. 


150 


PROMISCUOUS    EXERCISES. 


[book  I. 


diamond,  SHatttOllt'/ m.  3.  b.  b. 

to  owe,  Devbanf'cn. 

value,  \d3mt),  m.  3.  b.  b. 

only,  allctn'. 

scarcity,  &ll'ttnf)tit,  f.  1.  t>. 

tear,  'itjrd'ne,/.  1.  c. 

to  walk,  ttXttl'beftt* 

in,  in.  (Dat.) 

moonlight,  monb'fyefl. 

night,  *Sflacl)t//.  1.  6. 
with,  mit.  (Dat.) 
disciple,  ®d)iV(cr,  m.  3.  a.  a. 
garden,  *(£av/tcn/  w.  3.  a.  a. 
mount  of  Olives,  £>['bcvg,  m. 
3.  b.  b. 

to  say,  fa'gen. 

to  see,  fc'fyen,  irr. 

yonder,  bOVt. 

man,  *33tami/  m.  3.  b.  C. 

light,  i\d)t,  n.  3.  b.  e. 

moon,  50?ont»,  m.  3.  b.  b. 

to  be  about,  bcgin'nen,  irr. 

to  answer,  ant'WOVti'U. 

to  sit,  ftt'jcn,  irr. 

by,  an.  (Dat.) 

grave,  *@5fab,  n.  3.  b.  C 

son,  *©o()n/  m.  3.  b.  b. 

to  weep,  roci'nen. 

(can),  to  be  able,  Ufal'lUtl,  mix. 

then,  benn. 

to  say,  fa'gcn. 

young  man,  3ltng'Iittg/  m.  3. 
b.  b. 


grief,  XtMltt,  /.  1. 

not,  nietjt. 

to  moderate,  tnaf'jigcn. 

people,  ^olt1,  n.    3.  b.  e. 

to  call,  nen'ncn,  mix. 

just,  gevedjt'. 

wise,  roei'fe. 

to  reply,  cmne'bern. 

(shall),  to  be  obliged,  forfeit/ 

irr. 
on  this  account,  fca'wttt. 
pain,  ©cljmcrj,  m.  3.  b.  b. 
to  feel,  empftn'bcn,  irr. 
but,  a'bcr. 
to  ask,  fra'gcn. 
what,  rccl'djcr.  (Ace.) 
advantage,  *33or'£itg,  m.  3.  b.  b. 
over,  foOV.  (Dat.) 
fool,  3:I)0V,  m.  2.  b. 
then,  brt. 

teacher,  UtytW,  m.  3.  a.  a. 
to  behold,  fc'fycn,  irr. 
bitter,  bit'tcr. 
eye,  2Ut'ge,  re.  3.  a.  c. 
to  fall,  ftnt'Cn,  irr. 
to  the,  Jltv.  (Z>«f.) 
earth,  &X't>(,f.  1.  C. 
but,  a'ftev. 
countenance,  2(nt'(ift,  w.  3.  b. 

b. 

toward,  (Dat.) 

heaven,  bet*  J^tm'mcf,  w.  3.  a. 

a. 
to  turn,  ju'rcenben,  mix. 


CHAPTER  VII. 


ADVERBS. 


Every  adjective  in  its  simple  form,  may  be  used  as  an  ad- 
verb ;  as,  bie'fH*  SOTdtttt  t|l  efyv'ltd),  this  man  is  honest ;  and 
bic'fcv  SDIann  fyan'fcclt  cfyv'lid),  this  man  acts  honestly. 


PART  II.  CH-  1.]  ADVERBS.  151 

The  following  are  the  adverbs  which  most  frequently  occur 
in  writing  and  conversation. 


§  1.    DIFFERENT  KINDS    OF   ADVERBS. 


A.  Adverbs 

WO,  where? 

wofycv',  whence? 

IDOtj in',  whither? 

tyicr,  allbicr',  here. 

fyic'fyev,  hither. 

fca,  text,  frafettft',  there. 

t>a'()CV,  DOVt'biT,  thence. 

fcabin,  oovt'bin,  thither. 

fctef'feit,  McffeitS/  on  this  side. 

Jen'fett,  jcn'fcitS,  on  the  oppo- 
site side. 

if'gcnOS,  iv'gcuM»D,  some- 
where. 

gur'genfe*/ 

where. 

an'ocv^roo, 


in'ncvfyaflj,      in- 
au'fcvtyalfc, 


out- 


ntv'gcntwo,     no- 
an'ocvrodvts, 


or 

elsewhere. 
an^crSrcotyer ,    from    another 

place. 
<m'&crSn>obin  ,  to  another  place. 
aUcnttjal'bcn,    allcrroc'gcii,    or 

allcror'tcn,  everywhere, 
in'ncn,  bavin'nen,  or  orin'nen, 

within. 

au'fen,  brau'fen,  without. 

in'rocnoifl,  internally. 
(Ute'rocnoig,     externally,     out- 
ward. 


of  Place. 

in'ncvlicf), 

wardly. 
dtt'fcvlid), 

wardly. 
o'ben,  bvo'btn,  above. 
fcarouf/    or    oranf,    upon  it, 

thereon, 
ab,  off,  down. 

anf  tint*  nie'&ev,  or  anf  nno  ab, 

up  and  down. 
Ctll  ltnt>  au£,  in  and  out. 
fyilt  lint)  fycr,  to  and  from, 
{jicu  nut)   t»a  (Dort),  here  and 

there, 
fort,  forth. 

i)0nt,  before,  fronting, 
fyin'tcn,  behind. 
Von  roan'nen,  whence. 
bOlt  Ijin'nen,  from  hence. 
nat),  nafy'e,  near, 
fern,  feme,  far. 
vocit  ab,  far  off. 
ua  t)C  bet,  hard  by. 

ftti'mefeub,    or    gc'gcnroartio,, 

present, 
ab'rocfcnt),  absent. 


B.  Adverbs  of  Time. 


jbann,  when, 
oann,  atebann',  then, 
nun,  je$t,  now. 
bait>,  soon. 

foglcid)',  un^evjug'lid),  imme- 
diately. 


fib OU,  already. 

fnify,  early. 

fpdt,  late. 

jc,  jc'mate,  ever. 

nic,  nie'mafe,  never. 

nod),  still,  yet. 


152 


ADVERBS. 


[book  I. 


nod)  md)t,  not  yet. 
kijei'tCU,  betimes, 
al'lejett,  always, 
jttjei'tcn,   jnwei'leu/    or    bi& 

XOti'Utt,  sometimes. 

drift,  etn'jientf/  once. 

llCU'Iid),  lately,  newly. 

lefc'tens,  U^t'iid),  fytfjln , 
lastly,  lately. 

einfVmtfte/  at  some  times. 

VOt'tttatS,  or  C^emali?,  for- 
merly. 

nadj'mate,  or  nadjfyer',  after- 
wards. 

Wit'tott,  tme'&crutn,  again. 

fcitfyev',  feit,  since. 

IjCU'te,  to  day. 


gef  tent,  yesterday. 
Vov'gcjtent,  e't)cge|tet*u,  the  day 

before  yesterday, 
mit'tagtf,  at  noon. 
VOt'mtttagS,  before  noon. 
nacl)'mittag$,  afternoon, 
im'mcr,  always. 
jU'tS,      continually,      always, 

ever, 
fo  t'bttt,  just  now. 
lang'e,  febou  lang'e,  or  langjt, 

long  ago,  a  long  time  since. 
VOfldngjl',  long  ago,  &c. 

unl&ngfr,  or  ofynlangjV,   not 

long  ago. 
luSfyer',  hitherto. 
fca'malS,  at  that  time,  &c. 


C.  Adverbs  of  Affirmation  and  Negation. 


)<\,  yes. 

netn,  no. 

niel)t,  not. 

roafyv'Iidj,  truly,  verily. 

fm'Iid),    ji\    frei'ttel),   or   ja 

tt>otyl,  yes  to  be  sure,  surely, 

yes. 
aflcv&ingtf',    entirely,    by    all 

means, 
gav  \\id)t,  not  at  all. 
MttesroegS,  mit  nicfyten,  by 

no  means. 


f'aum,  hardly. 
ilt  feci*  ^tl^at,  indeed, 
nnfefyl'bar,  doubtless. 
fcWediterfcingS',  absolutely, 
rotvt'tid),  really, 
im'mcvmefyr,  ever, 
nim'mermcfyr,  never. 
giauHtd),  credibly. 
4>ieKcicC)t,/  perhaps. 
VenttUtty'lid),  probably. 
fcurdjauS'  nid)t,  absolutely  not. 
imglautvfid),  incredibly.  ' 


D.  Adverbs  of  Various  Use. 


tneift,  faji,  fclner,  almost. 

fcetna^e,  nearly. 

genng',  genung',  enough. 

Doll,  fcol'lig,  completely, 
obenfytu',  superficially. 
^oI'lcnD^  fully. 
tfyfUS,  partly. 

nn'gefdljt,  or  ofyn'gefafyr,  about, 


ate,  nue,  as. 
nne,  how. 
rcanrnt',  why. 
fca'rmn,  therefore. 
an't>er£,  otherwise, 
gfciclyfalte,  likewise, 
glcicfoimc',  gleid)  &U,  like  as 
fo,  so. 


vX 


PART  II.  CH.  7.] 


ADVERBS. 


153 


fcfyt'/  9M,  very,  much. 

pi,  all'ju,  too. 

ganj/  gdnj'Ud),  whole,  wholly. 

n?ol)(,  gut,  well. 

ft'bel,  fcblecbt,  ill. 

M'fe#  badly. 

al'fO,  thus. 

uugcmcin',  uncommonly. 

g(cid),  directly,  equally. 

fibcrauS',  exceedingly. 

jug(ctd)',  at  the  same  time. 

jufam'men,  together. 


fammt'ltdj,  all  together. 
faclj'te,  softly. 

fon'ccvlid),    6cfou'DCV6,    espe- 
cially. 
Ht},  in  short. 
l)auptfad)'(td),  chiefly. 
mit  §lei£,  on  purpose, 
tnctmcfyv',  rather. 
VCt'licl^,  sincerely. 
ved)t,  right. 
uu'rcd)t,  wrong. 
Cll&'lid),  lastly. 


The   following  adverbs   seem   to   require    some   particular 
notice. 

|  SBetjl,  03301, 

is  often  found,  where  the  English  can  affix  no  distinct  mean- 
ing to  it.     It  is  not,  however,  a  mere  expletive  ;  but  serves  to 
give  to  a  sentence  a  peculiar  modification.       Sometimes  the 
expressions,  may  be,  perhaps,  probably,  about,  nearly,  indeed, 
may  correspond  with  it.      It  occurs  in  questions;  as,  £>abett 
®ie  tt)0t)(  gefyert',  IMS  man  fcafcou'  fagt?  Have  you  by  chance 
heard,   what  is  said  of  it?  —  and   accompanies  verbs  in  an  in- 
determinate and  conditional  construction;  as,  2>d)  mod)'tC  tt>o()( 
Ic'fcn,  I  should  like  to  read  (if  I  could).    Instead  of  the  adverb 
W0l)t,  well,  denoting,  of  a  good   quality,  in  a  good  manner,  not 
ill,   gut   is   frequently   used;    by  which  means  the   confusion, 
that  might   arise  between  this  signification  and  the  expletive, 
is  obviated.     For  example:   3d)   n>ciS  nid)t,  rco  man   fcie'fc 
@ad)'cu  gut  fau'fcn   faun,   I   know  not,  where  one  may  buy 
these  things  iccll.      In  this   instance,  if   tt>ot)(  were  used,   it 
would,  by  the  generality   of  readers,   be   understood  as  an  ex- 
pletive.    When   used   as   an  expletive,  it  is  pronounced  short, 
and  some,  in  this  case,  write  ttol  instead  of  Xt>ot)U 

(SCV'UC  or  gent,  willingly  :  comparative,  lie'frcr,  more  willing- 
ly :  superlative,  am  Ucb'jUu,  most  willingly. 

By  this  adverb,  the  idea,  to  like,  to  be  fond  of,  is  expressed  ; 
as,  ct'roaS  gcv'ne  tbltn,  to  do  a  thing  willingly,  to  like  to  do  it ; 
et'roaS  gcvu  cf'fcn,  to  eat  a  thing  willingly,  that  is,  to  like  it; 


154  ADVERBS.  [BOOK  I. 

Ct'tM£  gCVtt  mb'$tlt,  to  like  a  thing.  (St'rociS  gent  fc'fyen,  to  see 
a  thing  willingly,  to  see  it  with  approbation  ;  hence,  to  like,  to 
approve.  (5i*  i|ft  ©CimVfe  lic'fccv  alt?  g(cifcl),  He  likes  vegetables 
better  than  meat ;  literally,  he  eats  more  willingly,  ©ic  fe'tyen 
CS  am  lteb'|Un,  They  see  it  with  most  pleasure,  that  is,  they  like 
it  best.  The  use  of  Uz'btt,  and  am  Ucb'^CU,  will  be  readily 
understood  from  that  of  gent. 

Jptn  and  J|?ei\ 
See  page  108. 

SDa, 

combined  with  prepositions,  and  followed  by  the  conjunction 
fcaft,  serves  as  a  substitute  for  the  English  participle,  united 
with  a  preposition.  Examples  :  By  reading  much  he  became 
learned ;  2)a'&Ul*cl)  &ftg  it  tnc(  (a£,  WUX'M  it  gclefylt'.  From 
talking  too  much,  mischief  often  comes  ;  3)av'au6  fcafe  man  £U 
X>k{  febmaftt,  mtjte^l'   eft  Itlt'fycif.     Justice  consists  in  giving 

every  one  his  own;  (Bevedytiafrit  bejiefyt'  oa'tun,  t»af3  man 
je'&erman  fca<?  fei'ue  gibt, 

Sect), 

put  after  an  imperative,  has  the  power  of  entreating  and  ex- 
horting, and  answers,  in  general,  to  the  French  done,  and, 
frequently,  to  the  English  pray.  Examples  :  ©a'gen  ©ie  mil* 
tod),  Pray  tell  me.  ©cut  ©ie  bod)  $0  QUt,  Pray,  be  so  good. 
'vIDati  fag/te  er  tod)  ?  Pray,  what  did  he  say  ?  ^Bat  MS  tod) 
Ctlt  $antt,  What  a  noise  that  was  !  Occasionally  it  may  be  ren- 
dered by  somehow;  as,  3>d)  fano  mid)  tod)  ba(t>  WXt'btV,  I  some- 
how soon  found  my  way  again.  —  In  common  conversation,  it 
is  sometimes  used  for  the  affirmative  ja,  when  a  negative  pre- 
cedes. 


3*, 

besides  its  affirmative  signification,  yes,  nas  an  expletive  use, 
in  which  it  may  be  often  translated  by,  indeed,  truly,  certainly, 
see,  I  see,  I  wonder,  forsooth.  Examples  :  ©tc  fom'mcu  ja  fyfc, 
You  certainly  are  come  late,  or,  I  wonder  you  come  so  late. 


PART  II.  CH.  7.]  ADVERBS.  155 

@ic  finfc  ja  t*cc()t  9VO6  a,crDOv'fceil,  You,  indeed,  are  grown  very 
tall.  £v  jtclit  fid)  )&  fcfyf  fon'DcvbvU*  an,  He,  forsooth  !  behaves 
in  a  very  singular  manner.  —  3a  xootji,  certainly,  yes,  certainly. 
3a,  combined  with  a  negative,  be  it  with  the  particle  nid)t,  or 
lite,  or  the  adjective  fein,  may  be  rendered  by  the  same  exple- 
tive terms,  pray,  certainly,  see,  &,c. ;  but  frequently  it  strength- 
ens the  expression ;  as,  )<\  nicl)t,  on  no  account ;  ja  ilie,  never, 
spoken  emphatically. 

SDiit'ten, 

before  the  prepositions  in  and  ttn'tCf,  signifies  in  the  midst  of; 
as,  mit'tcn  in  fci'net  SHc'fcC,  in  the  midst  of  his  discourse ;  nut'; 
U\\  un'ter.  DCU  gctll'fcClt,  in  the  midst  of  the  enemies. 

9Torf), 

signifies  an  addition,  where  the  English  use  more.  Sftotf)  Ctlt£, 
one  thing  more;  nod)  etll'mat,  once  more;  nod)  im'mcr,  still, 
by  continuance,  constantly.  (£v  bkibt  nod)  tlll'mei*  ill  Soil'DOlt, 
He  still  continues  in  London. 

A  Comparison 

of  things  equal,  is,  in  English,  made  by  the  repetition  of  as: 
for  example,  '  as  brave  as  Leonidas.'  In  German,  the  first 
particle  is  rendered  by  fo,  and  the  second  by  al6,  or  n?ic  :  fo 
tap'fci*  a(t>  ico'ui&aS.  The  word  than,  after  the  comparative 
more,  is  expressed  by  a(S.  Sometimes  the  English  put  but 
after  a  comparative  degree,  instead  of  than :  for  example, 
"  There  was  nothing  farther  to  be  done,  but  to  fight."  The 
German  al£,  must  here  be  retained.  QOBtC  is  occasionally 
substituted  for  a(S,  and  then  the  fo  may  be  omitted ;  as,  t^'- 

for  wit  ico'ni&atf. 

The  Negative 

ntd)t  is  often  used  by  the  Germans,  where  the  English  would 
deem  it  superfluous  ;  as,  Q;!?  t|t  u'bcv  ei'llCU  SOTo'ltat,  fettOCtn' 
id)  @ie  utd)C  gefe'^ett  fya'bc,  It  is  above  a  month,  since  1  have 
[not)  seen  you. 

In  interrogative  exclamations,  the  negative  gives  emphasis. 

^GDie  vuele  SQfan'fdjcn  ftno  nid)t  in  oic'fcm  ftrie'ge  nm'gcfom* 


156  ADVERBS.  [BOOK  I. 

UtCU/  How  many  men  have  (not)  perished  in  this  war  !  3£ic 
)\cl%  fcl)teu  er  Utcl)t,  How  proud  did  he  (not)  appear  !  (The 
French  also  make  use  of  the  negative.  Quel  bruit  ces  hom- 
mes  n'auraient-ils  pas  fait,  s'ils  m'avaient  attrape  &  un  tel  ban- 
quet!) 

Not  a,  not  any,  are,  in  German,  commonly  expressed  by 
h'\\\,  none  ;  as,  not  a  single  line,  fct'ne  cin'jigc  $M'k, 

Two  negatives,  in  the  same  sentence,  are  in  general  im- 
proper ;  although  they  sometimes  occur  not  only  in  the  lan- 
guage of  common  life,  but  also  in  the  best  writers.  Sometimes, 
indeed,  there  may  appear  to  be  energy  in  the  repetition  of 
the  negative ;  but,  on  the  whole,  it  should  be  rather  considered 
as  a  species  of  negligence  in  composition. 

About,  nearly. 

This  idea,  accompanying  numbers,  is  differently  expressed. 
1.  By  certain  adverbs,  viz.  fceiua'fyc,  ct'roa,  fa|t,  UU'gcfafyr, 
l»ol;I,  H$.  Q?£  ftnt>  roofyl  fcvei  Saty're,  It  is  about  three  years, 
tw'gefttijf  jefyu  spfunfc,  about  ten  pounds ;  ycozx  bi$  fcrci  SBod)'* 
Cn,  from  two  to  three  weeks.  2.  By  the  use  of  the  preposi- 
tion, an,  hex,  ge'gen.  %n  tit  }U>asi'}lg/  nearly  twenty  ;  bei 
(or  ge'gCU)  foier'jig,  nearly  forty. 


§  2.  OF  THE  FORMATION  OF  ADVERBS. 

Adverbs  are  either  original  words,  as,  ja,  yes  ;  itcin,  no  ; 
tt»0,  where ;  tt>ie,  how ;  or  adjectives  used  as  adverbs ;  or 
they  are  formed  from  nouns  or  adjectives,  or  by  composition. 

A.  Adverbs  derived  from  Nouns  or  Adjectives. 

A  noun  or  adjective  is  formed  into  an  adverb  by  adding 
either  the  letter  S  (the  ancient  characteristic  of  the  genitive 
case  for  nouns  of  all  declensions)  or  the  syllable  lid)  to  the 
noun  or  adjective.  The  additional  £  always  makes  the  word 
an  adverb,  without  making  it  an  adjective  ;  while  most  of  the 
words  formed  by  adding  (id)  are  properly  adjectives,  which 
may  be  used  also  as  adverbs. 


PART  II.  CH.  7.]  ADVERBS.  157 

1.  The  following  substantives,  denoting  parts  of  the  natural 
day,  are  changed  into  adverbs  by  an  additional  S. 

Substantives.  Adverbs. 

in  *£ag,  the  day  ;  tagS,  or  t>c6  £ag£,  in  the  day- 

time. 

Die  3Tac()t,  the  night;  ttftcfetf,  or  freS  3Ucl)t3,  in  the 

nisfht. 

btt  SDtOV'gcu,  the  morning;         mov'^cni?,  or  t>Ct?  ^TRov'genS,  in 

the  morning. 

t>Ct*  2i'6cilt>,  the  evening  ;  a'bcnfcS,  or  t>e£  ll'bn\b$,  in  the 

evening. 

fcer  ^ov'mittag,  the  forenoon  ;     toor'mittagS,  or  t>e$  33cr'mit; 

tag£,  in  the  forenoon. 

fret*  Staclymittag,  the  after-  nadymittags,  or  H6  SRaciymtt'- 
noon  ;  trtg£,  in  the  afternoon. 

t)CV  SO^it'tag,  the  noon ;  mit'tagS,  or  bc$  SDiit'tagS,  at 

noon. 

So,  also,  some  adjectives  become  adverbs,  by  means  of  an 
additional  6  ;  as,  bevcitt?',  already,  from  bcrcit',  ready  ;  jlctS, 
constantly,  from  jiet,  constant;  bcfon'fccrS,  particularly,  from 
bcfon'fccv,  particular ;  an'fccvS,  otherwise,  from  au'fccr,  other; 
rattS,  to  the  right  hand,  from  veefct,  right:  litlfS,  to  the  left, 
from  [int,  left,  &-c.  Numerals  become  adverbs  by  the  addi- 
tion of  ClU*  or  tenS  ;  as,  ev'|icu£,  in  the  first  place,  or  first; 
jvpei'tcnev  secondly;  frvtt'tCUS,  thirdly,  &c.  And  the  following 
words ;  bef  tCllS,  in  the  best  manner  ;  itiet'jiCUS,  mostly  ;  C'bcjb 
CltS,  by  the  first  opportunity;  fyoclVjiCUt?,  at  the  most;  il'bvu 
gen£,  as  for  the  rest. 

2.  There  are  some  adverbs  formed  by  the  addition  of  {id), 
which  cannot  be  used  as  adjectives  ;  as,  fvei'licl),  indeed,  from 
firei,  free  ;  IMtjr'licl),  truly,  from  tt>at)V,  true  ;  gut'ltcl),  goodly, 
from  gut,  good. 

B.   Compound  Adverbs. 

Among  compound  adverbs,  those  which  are  composed  of  a 
preposition  and  the  adverbs  fyicr,  t)k,  here,  t>a,  there,  \x>0, 
where,  l)tn,  thither,  fyev,  hither,  deserve  a  particular  notice. 
In  these  cases,  if  the  preposition  begin  with  a  vowel  or  \\, 
an  V  is  often  added  to  the  adverbs  t>rt  and  tt>o. 

14 


158  ADVERBS  [BOOK  I. 

1.  With  t>a,  t>av,  instead  of  t>er,  fcie'fer,  t>crfet  be. 


iidhd't  by  it,  with  it,  thereby. 

fcaran'/  on  it  or  that,  thereon. 

fcarauf ,  upon  it  or  that,  there- 
upon. 

fcavautf',  from  thence,  it,  that. 

fcarcin',  thereinto,  into  it  or 
that. 

twill',  therein,  in  it,  within. 

fcamacl)',  after  it,  thereafter. 

fcaa.e'gCU,  against  it  or  that. 

fcamit',  with  that  or  it,  by  it, 
therewith. 

fcane'ben,  near  that  or  it,  next 
to  it. 


fcantm',  for  it  or  that,  there- 
fore. 

fcawi^cr,  against  that  or  it. 

fcrtjll',  for  that  or  it,  thereto. 

batiOl*',  before  that  or  it. 

fcarit'beu,  on  that  account,  at 
it. 

tuxnut'tcr,  under  it  or  that. 

fcafur',  for  that. 

t>a\)0U',  of  that  or  it,  thereof, 
therefrom. 

t>a$rc>tfcl)'en,  between,  amidst 
that. 


2.  With  fytCi',  or  fyie,  are  compounded  the  same  prepositions 
as  above. 

fyievan',  on  this  or  it,  &c.  fytevauf,  upon  this  or  it,  &c. 


3.  With  U50,  n>0l*,  instead  of  mi'(\)(V,  MS. 


n^CVan',  on  which,  whereon. 

KDOVauf,  upon  which,  where- 
upon. 

worm',  in  which,  wherein. 

womit'/  with  which,  where- 
with. 

rcofcuvcl)',  by  or  through  which. 

Wantm',  for  which,  why. 

IDOgC'gCU,  against  which. 


VttODOV',  before  which. 

tt>o$lt',  to  which,  whereto. 

WOuartV/  according  to  which. 

WOltc'bcu,  next  to  which. 

ttonVbcr,  upon  which,  where- 
upon. 

Wofuv',  for  which,  wherefore. 

IDOruu'tCV/  under  which,  among 
which,  Slc. 


4.  With  fycr  and  fyin,  as  adverbs. 

tjcxab',  binafc',  tyvun'ttv,  down,    fyemtf',  out,  &c. 
fyevauf ,  tyinauf,  up. 


PART  II.  CH.  8.]  PREPOSITIONS.  159 

§  3.    THE  COMPARISON  OF  ADVERBS. 

Adverbs  are  invariable,  except  that  some  admit  the  degrees 
of  comparison,  as ; 

Positive.         Comparative.  Superlative. 

$\lt,  or  YbOt)[,     beffer,  better;        am  (jum)  bcpten,*  best, 
well ; 

h'btl,  ill ;  fcljlim'mer, worse: fdjfimm'ffett/  worst. 

t)ic(,  much ;  mdjv,  more ;  tttci'|tcn,  most. 

roc'nia,,  little,  m'ni$tt,  less;  WnigfiCII/  least. 

few  : 

m't)C,  near;  Xia'tjW,  nearer;  nacb'ffcit,  nearest. 

tyod),  high  ;  t)b't}W,  higher  ;  fjocft'ftcn,  highest. 

t'tjt,  before;  Cfycr,  sooner;  e'fyeflcu,  soonest. 

Sent/  readily,  lit'btt,  more  rea-  (icb'flcn,  most  rea- 

or willingly;         dily,    or   rath-  dily,  or  most  wil- 

er ;  lingly. 


Observation.  The  syllable  \\n  changes  adverbs  from  affirma- 
tive to  negative,  in  the  same  manner  as  in,  im,  or  un,  in 
English ;  as,  qJauMtcl),  credibly  ;  mtA.UuMtd),  incredibly  ; 
recl)t1ic(),  justly;  un'VCC^tUcl),  unjustly. 


CHAPTER  VIII. 

PREPOSITIONS. 
Some  prepositions  are  always  separated ;  as, 

um-wiCfen,  for  the  sake  of;  as,  urn  t>c^  grie'fccns  widen,  for  the 

sake  of  peace. 
fcOnsWe'gen,  in  the  name  of;  as,  t)0tt   <Serid)t$'  »e'gen,  in  the 

name  of  the  court. 

Some  are  separated  or  not  according  to  the  construction  ;  as, 

Itm^Cf,  round  about ;  as,  3c()  gillg  tint  t>a$  @d}[og  t)CV,  I  walk- 
ed about  the  castle;  and  ^c()  ging  umfycv',  I  walked  about. 


* 


Or  mtfs  (anf  Das)  SScf'te. 


160  CONJUNCTIONS.  [BOOK  I. 

fyinter-fyer',   Muter-brent',   behind ;  as,   id)  gino,  fyn'tn  bem 

COTvUl'llC  t)ft  or  Drcin,  I  walked  after  the  man,  I  followed  the 
man ;  and  %d\  ging  fytuterfyer',  or  ^iutClDt'Cin',  I  walked  be- 
hind. 

ABBREVIATION  OF  PREPOSITIONS. 

In  the  familiar  or  colloquial   style,  the  definite  article  and 
the  preposition  are  generally  contracted    into  one  word  ;   as, 

am,  for  an  bem. 

Examples. 

as,  am  ^en'jfer,  at  the  window. 
dWd  ild)t,  into  the  light. 
aufS  JpauS,  upon  the  house, 
beim  93a'ter,  by  the  father. 
burcl)S    gcit'cr,     through    the 

fire. 
furs?  @eft>,  for  money, 
im  Jpim'mct,  in  heaven, 
im?  QBaffer,  in  the  water. 

foom  tt'bff,  from  evil. 

foOfg  Seu'jUl*/  before  the  win- 
dow. 

foOlttl  %t)CiC,  before  the  door. 

tVbevm  geit'er,  upon  the  fire. 

iVberS  99?eer,  beyond  the  sea. 

un'tcrm  SCop'fe,  under  the 
head. 

£ttm  $$ad)'t,  to  the  rivulet. 

Jill*  St) 're,  for  the  honor. 

Some  of  these  abbreviations  occur,  not  only  in  the  familiar, 
but  in  every  kind  of  style  ;  as,  am,  im,  fcom,  jum,  JUt\ 


CHAPTER  IX. 

CONJUNCTIONS. 

The  conjunctions  a'ber,  and  fon'Dern,  which  are  both  Eng- 
lished  but,    have  a  distinct    meaning    and    use    in   German. 


am, 
an  6, 
aufi>, 
beim, 

for  an  bem, 
an  bas, 
auf  Das, 
bci  Dem, 
buvd)  baS, 

furs, 

im, 

ins, 

fur  bas, 
in  bem, 
in  ba$, 

bom, 
Dors, 

fcon  bem, 
bor  bas, 

feorm, 
u'bcrm, 
iVberS, 
un'term, 

fcor  bem, 
ft'ber  bem, 
u'bcr  Das, 
un'ter  bem, 

jum, 

ju  bem, 
ju  i>er, 

PART  II.  CH.  10,  11.]  INTERJECTIONS.  161 

©Olt'Dcm  is  used  only  after  a  negative,  and  always  expresses 
a  contradiction ;  as,  <£v  i\\  \\\d)t  vctd),  fou'fcent  arm,  He  is  not 
rich,  but  poor ;  (E$  fricut  nic()t,  fou'Dmi  Ct?  tfyattt,  It  does  not 
freeze,  but  it  thaws.  —  2Cbcx  is  used  to  connect  two  sen- 
tences, of  which  the  subsequent  contains  a  limitation  or  mod- 
ification of  the  antecedent ;  as,  (5r  ift  arm,  a'bcr  gufne'&cn,  He 
is  poor,  but  contented ;  Q?V  fpricljt  fccutfcl),  a'bcv  nicl)t  gctau'ftg, 
He  speaks  German,  but  not  fluently. 


CHAPTER  X. 

INTERJECTIONS. 

The  following  is  a  list  of  some  of  the  interjections  used  in 
German. 

ad)  !  ah  !  afy  !  ah  !  toiUHttl'XMXl !  welcome  ! 

[ei'fcev  !  alas  !  fie'tyc !  lo  !  behold  ! 

Of)  !  0  !  oh  !  ftc'fye  M  !   behold  here  ! 

mi) !  roe'fye !  woe  !  yfut  !  fie  ! 

Ci !  l)Ut  !  heigh  !  iit'btt !  pray  ! 

ttofjUn' !  well  then  !  bd)u'U  ©Ott !   God  forbid  ! 

ijiif  CSott !  God  help  !  jjol'fo  !  YjZ  !  holla! 

(Jiff  iptm'mcl !  Heaven  help  !      ft  !  jtiU  !  hush  !  hist ! 

tjait !  halt !  or  stop ! 


CHAPTER  XL 


ADDITIONAL  REMARKS,  ON  THE  MODE  OF  FORMING  NEW 

WORDS. 

General  Remarks. 

The  number  of  German  words  has  been  and  may  still  be 
increased  in  two  ways  : 

I.  The  language  admits  of  being  enriched  out  of  its  own 
substance. 

a.  One  part  of  speech  may  be  used  for  another.  Thus 
the  infinitive  of  the  verb  Ic'bcn,  to  live,  is  used  as  a  substan- 
tive, fca6  Wbtllf  the  life  ;  and  the  neuter  gender  of  the  adjec- 

14* 


162  FORMATION  OF  NEW  WORDS.  [BOOK  I. 

tive  cvfya'frCH/  sublime,  may  be  used  as  a  noun,  bag  Sl'fja'frene, 
the  sublime. 

b.  A  word  may  be  derived  from  another ;  as,  glYttg,  kind, 
from  gut,  good. 

c.  Several  words  may  be  compounded  into  one  ;  as, 
©U'bci'bcrgrocvf/  silver  mine,  composed  of  ©U'6er,  silver, 
23evg,  mountain,  and  '^EBei'f;  work. 

II.  A  number  01  foreign  words  have  been  introduced  into 
the  German  language,  and  have  become  more  or  less  natural- 
ized ;  as,  StatUf',  nature;  ©tjmpatfyie'  (SDtit'gefufyf),  sym- 
pathy. 


§  1.      OF  THE  MOST    IMPORTANT  MODES  OF  ENRICHING  THE  LAN- 
GUAGE FROM  WITHIN  ITSELF. 

A.   Of  the  Infinitive  Mood  and  Adjectives,  used  as  Nouns. 

Among  the  various  modes  in  which  a  word  may  be  changed 
from  one  part  of  speech  to  another,  there  is  none  of  so  much 
practical  importance  as  the  use  of  infinitives  and  adjectives  as 
nouns. 

1.  The  Germans  use  the  infinitive  of  every  verb  as  a  noun, 
in  the  same  manner  as  the  English  do  the  present  participle; 
as,  fraS  gitt)'(cn,  the  feeling;  MS  Jfpo'VCtt,  the  hearing;  MS 
gov'fcbcn;  the  searching,  &c. 

2.  An  adjective  may  be  used  as  a  noun  in  each  of  its  three 
genders,  and  ought   then  to  have  a  capital   letter  for  its  initial. 

a.  When  the  adjective  in  its  masculine  or  feminine  gender 
is  used  as  a  noun,  it  denotes  most  generally  a  man  or  a  woman 
of  such  description  as  the  adjective  imports  ;  as,  fccv  ©U'te, 
the  good  man  ;  t>ie  (Su'tC,  the  good  woman ;  cin  gvOttVmev, 
a  pious  man  ;  ei'ite  grom'me,  a  pious  woman. 

The  noun  should  always  be  preceded  by  the  definite  or  in- 
definite article,  except  in  the  vocative  case  ;  as,  33  cf  ttt,  best 
man  ;  23cf'tc,  best  woman. 

Sometimes  the  adjective  stands  without  the  noun  to  which 
it  refers,  this  noun  being  understood.  In  this  case  the  adjec- 
tive is  not  changed  into  a  noun  but  remains  an  adjective  ;  as, 
£t>  gicbt  iw'x'zkUx  SDfcn'fcfocn,  gu'te  unt>  bo'jc-  2)w  66'feit 
ge'bcn  fid)  oft  MS  Sln'fcljn  bCV  glt'tcn.  There  are  two  sorts  of 
men,  good  and  bad.  The  bad  oftentimes  give  themselves  the 
appearance  of  the  good, 


PART  II.  CH.   11.]      FORMATION  OF  NEW  WORDS.  163 

b.  When  the  neuter  of  the  adjective  is  used  as  a  noun,  if  it 
is  preceded  by  the  definite  article,  it  denotes  the  whole  class 
of  things  to  which  the  quality  expressed  by  the  adjective  is 
ascribed;  or  it  designates  the  quality  itself ;  as,  t>a£  &<X)h'\\t, 
the  beautiful  ;  t>a6  Qh'fya'bcue,  the  sublime. 

If  the  neuter  adjective,  when  used  as  a  noun,  is  not  pre- 
ceded by  the  article,  it  means  any  thing  having  that  quality 
which  the  adjective  expresses;  as,  ©cbo'lKS,  any  thing  beau- 
tiful ;  3WtC£,  any  thing  tender. 

While  in  English  (at  least  in  prose)  only  a  few  adjectives 
are  used  as  nouns,  the  German  language  allows  every  adjective 
to  be  used  in  that  manner ;  as,  t>ci£  $dt'tt/  that  which  is  ten- 
der;  fca£  ©tav'f'c,  that  which  is  strong  ;  t>a$  9Utur'lid>e,  that 
which  is  natural ;  fca£  StunjVlirfK,  that  which  is  artificial.* 

Sometimes  the  simple  form  of  the  adjective  is  used  instead 
of  the  neuter  ;  as,  fcatf  (£>ell>  lint)  fca6  SKetfy,  the  yellow  and  the 
red  ;  or  without  the  article,  (Selfr  lint  SKotl)  ftltfc  jrect  (Smut)7; 
fvU'bcn,  Yellow  and  red  are  two  primary  colors. 

In  a  few  instances  the  indefinite  article  is  used  before  the 
simple  form  or  the  neuter  of  the  adjective  ;  as,  etn  SKotfy,  a 
red  (color)  ;  ctu  SDTclj'vcvctf,  something  further. 

B.   Of  the  Derivation  of  Words  from  Others. 

Among  the  various  modes  in  which  derivative  words  may  be 
formed,  we  notice  two,  as  particularly  important. 

1.  In  the  formation  of  nouns,  by  adding  to  adjectives,  nume- 
rals, nouns,  or  radical  syllables  of  verbs,  the  syllables,  ci   (ei)), 

fyeit,   hit,   img,   tfynm,   fdwft,   nifj ;    as,   gifdjem',  fishery, 

(Sifdj'cr,  fisherman)  ;  SBolifrem'menfyeit,  perfection,  (fcoflfOttl's 
men,  perfect) ;  £tn't)cit,  unity,  (ein,  one) ;  35te'&cv{?cit,  righ- 
teousness, (fcte'fccr,  righteous);  Sftei'gnng,  inclination,  (fid) 
nei'gen,  to  incline);  Sftit'tCVtfyum,  chivalry,  (SKit'ter,  knight)  ; 
<233 i f  f c ii f d) aft ,  science,  (wtffen,  to  know) ;  ianfc'fdwft,  land- 
scape, (huit>,  land)  ;  SBcfOCg'ftlg/  apprehension,  (befov'gen,  to 
apprehend). 

2.  The  formation  of  adjectives,  by  the  addition  of  the  syl- 
lables [\w,  fam,  en,  evn,  ig,  id)t,  ifel),  (id),  fyaft ;  as,  efyv'tw, 


*  The  great  advantage  that  arises  from  this  mode  of  using 
every  adjective  as  a  noun,  to  designate  certain  classes  of  things, 
or  certain  qualities,  is  evident,  particularly  in  philosophy. 


164  FORMATION  OF  NEW  WORDS.  [BOOK  I. 

decent,  (Qsfy're,  honor) ;  av'fccitfam,  industrious,  (Tiv'Wlt,  labor)  ; 
golden,  golden,  ((Soft,  gold)  ;  jiei'llCVU,  of  stone,  (©tcttt, 
stone)  ;  fflt'vtg,  fiery,  (geu'CV,  fire)  ;  tfyo'ricfct,  foolish,  (^tyor, 
fool) ;  bid)'t(vtfd),  poetical,  (£>td)'tev,  poet)  ;  fadj'fifd),  Saxon, 
(t»CV  @acl)'(V,  the  Saxon);  fin  Difd),  childish,  (ftint),  child); 
frnfc'fid),  childlike;  muuD'ltd),  oral,  (SDhmfc,  mouth);  t^CVj'- 
^aft,  hearty,  (£ct:$,  heart). 

C.    Of  the  Composition  of  Words. 

A  compound  word  is  produced  by  uniting  two  or  more 
terms  into  one.  Such  expressions,  therefore,  as  neiospaper, 
seaport,  vainglory,  belong  to  this  class. 

The  rules  for  composition,  which  are  tacitly  acknowledg- 
ed in  German,  and  ought  to  be  uniformly  observed,  are  these 
two  : 

Rule  I.  —  The  several  terms  which  enter  into  the  composi- 
tion should  suggest  so  many  distinct  ideas  ;  and  these  ought 
to  be  so  perspicuous,  that,  when  combined,  they  shall  render 
the  word  intelligible  at  the  first  glance. 

Rule  II  —  The  prior  term  of  the  compound  should  define 
and  limit  the  other.  Hence  the  first  component  may  be  called 
the  particular  term ;  and  the  second,  the  general.  For  ex- 
ample :  SD?onD'itd)t,  moonlight ;  the  general  term  itcl)t,  light, 
being  defined  by  the  more  particular  term,  5D?ont>,  moon  : 
fum'men>0uf/  sorrowful ;  the  general  term  Doll,  full,  being  de- 
fined by  the  particular  term,  ^urn'mer,  sorrow. 

To  these  two  rules  of  composition,  are  to  be  added  the  fol- 
lowing observations. 

1.  In  compound  substantives,  the  second  component,  or 
general  term,  furnishes  the  gender  ;  as,  t>a£  SRatfy'fyauS,  the 
council-house,  from  t>a*  Statf),  the  council,  and  t>a£  <§(lll£,  the 
house  ;  fccv  2(rbcttjS(ot)n,  wages  for  work,  from  Die  %x'bt\t, 
labor,  and  t>cr  iok)\\,  the  reward  ;  SDTcn'friKnliefcc,  love  of  man, 
from  &cr  SDicnfd),  man,  and  Die  $ie'6e,  love. 

2.  The  compound  should  be  neither  too  long,  nor  harsh  to 
the  ear. 

3.  Though  one  of  the  terms  be  a  compound  word,  yet, 
when  it  enters  into  a  new  composition,  it  is  supposed  to  convey 
only  a  single  idea.  For  example,  MG  &l'bttbtt$totxtt  the 
silver  mine,  consisting  of   ©ifljcr,  silver,  and    SSerg'rocvf/  a 


PART  II.   C1I.   11.]     FORMATION  OF  NEW  WORDS.  165 

mine,  has  for  its  second  term,  a  compound  word,  SScrg'rocrf. 
This  may  be  resolved  into  23erg,  mountain,  and  QGDcvf, 
work  ;  yet,  the  idea  which  it  suggests  as  a  component  of 
©ifbcvbcvgrDCrf,  is  only  one.  Consequently,  words  may  be 
twice  or  oftener  compounded,  without  being  disqualified  for 
serving  in  a  new  composition  according  to  the  second  rule; 
care  being  taken  not  to  make  the  compound  too  long.  But 
whenever  such  words  are  admitted,  a  hyphen  (:)  is  resorted  to, 
in  order  to  break  their  extended  appearance:  as,  (£encval':$;c(t>- 
JCltg'mcijUr,  Master  General  of  the  Ordnance;  $Hcicl)$; 
(Scucval'^clfcmav'fdjaK/  Field-marshal  General  of  the  Empire. 

4.  A  hyphen  is,  moreover,  employed,  when  either  one  or 
both  of  the  components  are  foreign  words  ;  as,  fca£  EHctcbe'; 
Collegium,  the  council  of  the  Empire  ;  fcat>  Criminal'  ;(&(\:id)t, 
the  criminal  court  of  justice  ;  t>ci*  Justiz' ^SKatfy ,  a  council,  or 
counsellor  of  justice  ;  Da£  Intclligenz 's23Utt /  a  paper  for  ad- 
vertisements; t>a£  Intclligenz' -Comptoir,  the  advertising  of- 
fice; fcatf  Justiz'- Collegium,  the  court  of  justice.  The  foreign 
words  are  written  either  in  their  own  type,  as  is  done  in  these 
examples,  or  in  the  German  character ;  as,  2?nfcUtgtflj's!5fatfc 
But  if  the  words  are  not  too  long,  it  is  rather  more  usual 
to  write  them  without  the  hyphen,  as  one  word ;  as, 
3ntelligen$'bUtt. 

5.  By  the  process  of  composition  are  produced,  in  the  fol- 
lowing manner, 

(1)  Substantives. 

a.  Both  terms  being  Substantives.  Examples  :  3)ie  2CbCHte 
fhtnfce,  the  evening-hour  —  from  tcv  2t'bent>,  the  evening,  and 
t>tc  ©ttm'fcc,  the  hour;  frcr  'Zlp'fclbaum,  the  apple-tree — t>er 
Sty'fcl,  and  fcer  23aum ;  fcev  ©cmi'tag,  Sunday  —  tic  ©on'ne, 
feci*  ^ag;  t>ct*  (Sot'tcSbicnjl,  divine  service  —  ®ott,  God,  t>cv 
SMcnjt,  the  service;  tcv  J^cl'fremnutfy,  heroic  courage  —  fcct* 
«£>elt>,  the  hero,  bet  9Tiut(),  courage ;  Me  J^ci^cnSgutC,  good- 
ness of  heart — fcaS  £cvj,  Me  (Sll'te. 

b.  The  first  term  being  an  Adjective.  3Mc  Q5vo£'mutf),  mag- 
nanimity —  gvoe,  great,  t>cr  99?utl),  spirit ;  Me  ©eljrocr'muttj, 
heaviness  of  spirit,  melancholy — fiercer,  heavy,  fcctr  50Tltt^/* 
spirit;  tic  Si'gcnltcbc,  self-love  —  ci'gcu,  own,  and  Me  ik'bc. 

*  It  will  be  noticed,  that  in  these  two  last  examples,  there 
is  a  deviation  from  the  first  observation  (under  Rule  II.)  rela- 
tive to  the  gender  of  compound  substantives. 


166 


FORMATION  OF  NEW  WORDS. 


[book  I. 


c.  A  Numeral  the  first  term.  3)et  T>V(i'faS,  the  tripod  — 
fcrei,  three,  tn  $US,  the  foot;  MS  ^tcfecf,  the  square  —  Dicv 
four,  Die  (Sctc,*  the  corner;  MS  ZCc^t'ecf,*  the  octagon  —  ac()t, 
eight. 

d.  The  Pronoun  fclbjt  the  first  term.  3^a^  ©eftyt'ttertrauCtt, 
self-confidence  —  DaS  33evtvau'en ;  t>ie  ©cIb|Vprufung,  self- 
examination  —  t>ie  spnVfung ;  Der  @elb|Vbetntg,  self-delusion  — 
Der.  93ctrug'. 

e.  A  Verb  the  first  term.  2)CV  §Ccf)t'boDcU/  the  fencing- 
school —  fectytCU,  to  fence,  t>cr  SSo'Dcn,  the  floor ;  Die  SHett'baljn, 
the  riding-school  —  ret'ten,  to  ride,  Die  *5at)U,  the  course,  the 
ground  ;  Da6  QOBavt'getD,  pay  for  waiting,  for  attendance  — 
XDM'ttll,  to  wait,  MS  (5e(D,  money. 

f.  A  Particle  the  first  term,  such  as  <\b,  ait,  Ctn,  &c.  3)k 
TCb'VCife,  the  departure;  t)ie  Zln'htuft,  the  arrival;  t>ev  Pitt's 
gang/  the  entrance. 

(2)  Adjectives. 

a.  A  Substantive  being  the  first  term.  ^tl'gcnU'Cict),  rich  in 
virtue  —  bie  ^u'genD,  virtue,  vetcb,  rich;  fraft'VolI,  full  of 
strength  or  power  —  Die  £vaft,  fcoll ;  eiS'falt,  cold  as  ice  — 
MS  §tS,  fait ;  golD'gelb,  yellow  as  gold  —  DaS  <25olD,  gelb ; 
pcc()'fri)»arj,  black  as  pitch  —  Datf  tycd),  febroarj;  got'teSfurcl); 
tig,  pious,  fearing  God  —  ©Ott,  God,  and  fuvd)'fig  (an  adjec- 
tive, not  usual  except  in  composition) ;  f)idf£'bcDuifttg/  destitute, 
wanting  help —  Die  fiht'ft,  beDfllftig. 

b.  An  Adjective  the  first  term.  $cid)t'fcvtig,  thoughtless, 
flighty;  fyell'blau,  light  blue;  fm'vmllig,  voluntary;  alt'ftug, 
wise  as  an  old  man. 

c.  A  Numeral  the  first  term.  SH'Ci'ctftg,  three-cornered, 
triangular ;  biev'erfig,  quadrangular,  square ;  fed^'fllftg,  six- 
footed  ;  acfyt'feitig,  having  eight  sides. 

d.  A  Particle  the  first  term.  2(b'fydngig,  dependent  ;  an': 
jTanDig,  becoming ;  iVbcvmutfytg,  overbearing,  insolent ;  Jtt's 
huif  tig,  future ;  un'gl&ufcig,  unbelieving ;  tm'gcvccljt,  unjust. 

e.  A  Verb  the  first  term.  2)enf 'rofU'Dig,  memorable  —  Dcnf'en, 
to  think  of,   and  nnif'Dtg,   worthy;    fyab'fud)tig,    avaricious  — 


See  note  on  preceding  page. 


PART  II.  CH.  11.]      FORMATION  OF  NEW  WORDS.  167 

(ja'fccn,  to  have,  and  Me  ©ltrijt,  eager  desire  ;  Ite'benSttmvMg, 
lovely,  amiable  —  lie'ben,  to  love,  rtmr'fcig,  worthy;  lobcn^ 
rotvtij,  praiseworthy  —  lo'beu  to  praise,  mxtt),  deserving. 

(3)  Verbs. 

a.  A  Substantive  being  the  first  term.  Svanfc'fdjagfU/  to 
raise  contributions,  by  the  menace  of  fire  —  t>CT  33l\Ull>/  fire, 
fcbat^en,  to  raise  contributions;  hijVroanbcIn/  to  walk  for 
pleasure,  to  take  a  walk  —  fcic  htft,  pleasure,  tDan'bclll/  to 
walk  ;  mtt'nftvn,  to  emulate  —  £)ie  QBct'te,  the  wager,  com- 
petition, et'fcnt,  to  be  eager  or  zealous ;  wct'tci'lcudjtcn,  to 
lighten  without  thunder  —  &a$  Wrt'tZV,  the  weather,  the  tem- 
pest, itwtytm,  to  shine;  fyanfc'fyaben,  to  handle  —  Me  £ftttt>/ 
the  hand,  tya'bdX,  to  have. 

b.  An  Adjective  the  first  term.  SBoffln'ing'en,  to  accomplish 
—  Mil,  full,  bring'cn,  to  bring ;  fcofljie'tyen,  to  execute  —  pt'tjCM, 
to  draw. 

c.  A  Particle  the  first  term.  This  species  of  composition 
has  been  treated  of  at  large,  from  page  107  to  page  114. 

(4)  Participles. 

A  Substantive  being  the  first  term,  (a.)  The  present  partici- 
ple :  etyr'liebcub,  loving  honor,  generous  —  t»ie  (£f)'re,  honor, 
jie'benD,  loving;  gcfe^'gebcnt),  legislative  —  t>a£  C8efe$'/  the  Jaw, 
ge'bfltt),  giving  ;  tMcb'fyabcnt),  having  the  guard,  being  on  duty, 
as  an  officer  —  l>ie  IBtxdyt,  the  guard,  tya'bentv  having,  (b.)  The 
past  participle:  blu'menbch'dujt,  crowned  with  flowers  —  lit 
sBUt'me,  the  flower,  befrdlljt',  crowned  ;  fcbncc'tcfcctft,  covered 
with  snow  —  t>ei*  ©cfyuee,  the  snow,  bc&ccft',  covered  ;  fce'gebo- 
fen,  born  of  the  sea  —  tie  @ee,  the  sea,  gebo'ren,  born. 

(5)  Particles. 

Compounded  zoith  Particles.  SBor'rcdvtS,  forward,  jttt'ficf', 
back;  tytncin',  into;  fycvautf',  out  of ;  mitfytu',  therefore  ;  fcafyer', 
thence ;  mtumefyv',  now. 

6.  The  components  often  remain  unaltered  ;  as,  2(p'fc(baum, 
apple-tree ;  Ubr'macfccr,  watchmaker ;  tu'gcnfcveid),  rich  in 
virtue  :  but  in  many  instances,  the  first  term  undergoes  some 
change,  by  letters  being  either  added  or  omitted. 


168 


FORMATION  OF  NEW  WORDS. 


[book  I. 


(1)  Letters  added. 


eg:  as,  bet*  (5ot'tC£t>icn|t,  divine  service  —  from  @ott ; 
<33ei'|U$fraft,  power  of  mind  —  t>CV  ©cijt ;  tie  ^o'&egnotfy, 
agony  of  death  —  bet*  c£ot>. 

g  :  as,  t>ag  Jfptm'mefsndjt,  the  light  of  heaven  —  feev  Jpittt's 
mcl ;  tag  (S'felgofyr,  an  ass's  ear,  the  corner  of  a  leaf  of  a 
book  turned  down  —  t>ev  (S'jYf;  tag  2C* 'beitgfyailg,  the  work- 
house—  Me  2(r'bett;  t>er  (Sebnvtg'tag,  the  birth-day  —  tit 
©cbttvt';  tag  J^illfg'mittel,  means  of  assistance,  resource  — 
tit  Wfe. 

ng,  en$  :  as,  Die  grie'&engfeiev,  the  celebration  of  peace  — 

ton  grieve ;  tit  J^et'jenggute,  goodness  of  heart  —  tag  £ev$. 

The  above  additional  letters  mark  the  genitive  case,  in  the 
first  component. 

e :  as,  frag  §tt'%tUit,  affliction  of  heart  —  tag  Jperj ;  bet* 
spfev'fcefng,  the  horse's  foot  —  tag  spfcvfc ;  ttx  ©an'febvaten, 
the  roasted  goose  —  tit  (Sang,  the  goose. 

In  some  of  these  examples,  the  inserted  e  may  be  considered 
as  the  characteristic  letter  of  the  plural  number. 

n,  or  en :  as,  tag  grcMenfrjt,  the  festival  of  joy,  the  jubi- 
lee—  tit  gven'fee ;  tag  IDvacb'enblut,  dragon's  blood  —  Dei* 
2H'ac()'e ;  tn  Jpel'&enmntfy,  heroic  courage — ttv  $dt,  the 
hero;  tag  J^iv'tenlcben,  pastoral  life  —  t>er  %\tt,  the  herdsman; 
tn  SSau'CVUpoIj/  vulgar  pride — ttx.  ?&ai\'CX,  the  rustic,  the 
clown. 

The  additional  n,  or  en,  may,  in  some  instances,  indicate  the 
genitive  case,  in  others  the  plural  number. 

et*:  as,  ttv  Ci'crfttcfjCU/  the  omelet — tag  Si,  the  egg,  and 
t>ev  ^tt'cben,  the  cake;  fcte  SSU'Dcvfcbrift,  ideographic  writing 
—  tag  53ilt>,  the  image,  figure,  and  t>te  ©d)l*ift,  the  writing  ; 
tit  30Bet'bevii|t,  craft  of  women  —  tag  QBcib,  the  woman,  and 
tit  U\l,  cunning. 

The  letters  ev  correspond,  in  these  words,  with  the  termina- 
tion of  the  plural. 


PART  II.  CH.  11.]      FORMATION  OF  NEW  WORDS.  1 G9 

i :    this  occurs  only  in  two  very  ancient  compounds  ;  Die 
Sdadj'tijjaH,  the  nightingale,  and   Dei*  StfiU'tigfim,  the   bride- 


groom. 


(2)  Letters  omitted. 

e,  in  substantives:  as,  Die  QsnD'ftlfce,  the  final  syllable  —  0at5 
Qht'De,  the  end;  Die  ©fO'folge,  the  succession  —  Da6  Qft'be,  the 
inheritance,   t>ie   got'gc,  the  act  of  following  or  succeeding; 

act*  ©onn'tag,  Sunday — t>ie  ©onne;   Der  ^irfdj'baum,  the 

cherry-tree  —  Me  fttt'fcfr. 

en,  in  infinitives  :  as,  Der.  gcefjt'boDCtt,  the  fencing-school  — 
fcd)'ten,  to  fence;  Die  Sfteifbatjlt,  the  riding-school  —  VU'Utl,  to 
ride ;  benf'fflftfliig,  memorable  —  Dennett,  to  think  of,  and 
WltV'&ig,  worthy;  fyab'fucfetig,  avaricious  —  fya'kn,  to  have. 

These  omissions  take  place  because  only  the  radical  syllable 
of  the  first  component  is  employed  in  composition. 

7.  It  is  not  settled  by  rule  when  and  how  these  changes  in 
the  first  component  are  to  be  made.  Analogy  and  euphony 
alone  determine  the  question.  Sometimes  a  diversity  occurs 
in  the  state  of  the  first  component,  as  it  is  combined  with  dif- 
ferent words;  as,  Dev  *8au'evf)of,  the  farm,  and  Dcv  25au's 
fttlfttCg/  the  war  of  peasants  —  both  from  Dei*  SStol'tV,  the 
husbandman,  the  peasant ;  Die  S^r'flirdjt,  reverence,  and  Dei* 
gtVVCUvdufccr,  the  reviler — from  Die  Stj'rc;  DCf  gcu'crfycrD,  the 
hearth,  and  Die  gcu'CVJjtn'UUjt,  a  great  fire  —  from  DC16  gdl'CV; 
&a$  J?CV'£c(ctD,  affliction  of  heart,  and  Die  ipeu'jensaua.ft,  anxi- 
ety of  heart  —  from  Da£  £crj.  But  even  in  regard  to  the  same 
compounds,  an  uncertainty  occasionally  prevails:  for  example, 
Der  (gi'clKnbatUtt/  or  Dev  Stctybaum,  the  oak-tree  —  from  Die 
(gi'cfje,  the  oak  ;  (SvD'HoS,  or  ©r'Dcnt'fot?,  the  clod  of  earth 
—  from  Die  (£r'De. 

8,  There  are  a  few  instances  in  which  a  change  of  significa- 
tion is  produced  by  the  mode  of  composition  ;  as,  Dei*  SanD'; 
maun,  the  husbandman,  the  peasant,  and  Der  $anD£'ttl(inn,  the 
compatriot;  Jpeil'mtttel,  medicine,  and  JpcUs'mittel,  means  of 
salvation ;  gcfo'nnvtljfcljaft,  agriculture,  and  gel'DevttHVtfyfcljaft, 
rotation  in  crops. 

15 


170  FORMATION  OF  NEW  WORDS.  [BOOK  I. 

9.  The  more  ancient  compounds  cannot  always  be  reduced 
to  that  analogy,  by  which  the  composition  of  words  is  now 
regulated. 

10.  When  it  happens  that  two  or  more  compound  words 
occur  in  a  sentence,  having  the  second  component  the  same, 
this  component  is  frequently  omitted  in  the  first  word,  or  words, 
and  only  expressed  in  the  word  that  is  last :  as,  spfaf' fen--  Utti) 
^Bzi'bwlift,  craft  of  priests  and  women ;  £riC3$*  Mtt>  grte'* 
!>enS£eitcn,  times  of  war  and  peace ;  35ct-  33 US-  \Mb  &\pta$, 
day  of  prayer,  repentance,  and  fasting.  The  hyphen  is  then 
put  after  the  first  word  or  words. 

§  2.    OF  THE  INTRODUCTION  OF  FOREIGN  WORDS  INTO  THE 

GERMAN  LANGUAGE. 

The  German  language  is  sufficiently  copious  and  produc- 
tive, to  furnish  native  words  for  any  idea  that  can  be  expressed 
at  all.  Moreover,  it  is  so  old,  that  none  of  the  known 
languages  of  the  earth  can  be  considered  as  its  parent ;  and 
the  radical  words  as  well  as  the  manner  of  forming  new  terms, 
are  so  peculiar,  that  the  German  cannot  borrow  expressions 
from  foreign  languages  without  violating  its  own  idiom.  This 
being  the  character  of  the  language,  the  best  German  scholars 
have  laid  down  the  general  rule,  that  in  speaking  and  writing, 
all  those  terms  which  are  not  of  genuine  German  growth,  but 
imported  from  foreign  languages,  should  be  avoided.  It  was  by 
disregarding  this  principle,  that,  particularly  from  the  last  half 
of  the  sixteenth,  until  the  last  half  of  the  eighteenth  century, 
a  considerable  number  of  Latin  and  French  terms  were  intro- 
duced into  the  language;  many  of  which  are  still  in  common 
use.  But  a  sounder  taste,  and  a  better  knowledge  of  the  native 
riches  and  powers  of  the  language,  have  already  cleared  it  of 
many  of  those  heterogeneous  ingredients  ;  and  there  is  reason 
to  hope  that  this  purifying  principle  will  by  degrees  succeed 
in  removing  all  these  inconsistencies,  without  indulging  in  the 
blind  zeal  of  an  over-hasty  and  extravagant  "  purism." 

According  to  this  principle,  we  ought  to  be  directed  by  the 
following  rules. 

1.  No  foreign  word  should  be  used,  if  the  same  idea  may 
be  conveyed  by  a  native  term,  equally  expressive  and  usual. 
It  is  improper,  for  example,  to  say  cjccuftvctt,  instead  of  cntfcW* 


PART  II.  CH.  11.]      FORMATION  OF  NEW  WORDS.  171 

fcigen,  to  excuse  ;  or  SDfrfcicamcnt',  instead  of  Qtil'mittti, 
medicine  ;  or  Stationafttlilij,  instead  of  iano'WCfyr,  national 
militia. 

2.  A  genuine  German  word  should  be  preferred  to  a  for- 
eign one,  if  the  former,  although  less  usual,  is  equally  expres- 
sive, and  not  yet  wholly  obsolete.  Thus,  SBor'fyut,  advanced 
guard,  is  better  than  ifoant'gar&e ;  Sftacr/fyut,  rear  guard,  is 
better  than  ftrtere'garoe  ;  and  SJttC'teltrejfeu,  centre  of  the 
army,  is  better  than  (Een'trum. 

3.  If  we  find  no  word  already  formed  to  express  a  particular 
idea,  we  should,  instead  of  resorting  to  foreign  languages, 
rather  try  to  form  a  new  word,  in  the  true  German  style,  either 
by  derivation,  or  composition,  which  have  been  treated  of  in 
the  preceding  section. 

a.  By  derivation,  for  example,  the  words  SBolfS'tfyum,  na- 
tionality, fcotfg'tfyitmttdj,  national,  and  SJoffS'tfyumUritf'eit, 
national  peculiarity,  have  lately  been  formed  from  the  radical 
word  ^olf,  people  or  nation  ;  and  those  words  have  already, 
in  a  great  measure,  displaced  the  foreign  terms,  Sftationalttat', 
national',  and  SUtional^tgcntfyumltdSt'cit. 

b.  In  the  way  of  composition,  a  foreign  word  may  be  ren- 
dered in  German,  by  resolving  its  meaning  into  the  component 
ideas. 

Take  for  example  the  French  word  courrier,  which  means  a 
messenger  who  is  to  proceed  with  speed.  In  this  instance, 
the  more  general  idea  of  a  messenger  is  defined  by  the  par- 
ticular idea  of  speed.  Messenger,  in  German,  is  23o'tc,  and 
speed,  Ct'lc;  and  these  two  words  being  put  together  accord- 
ing to  Rule  II.  of  the  preceding  section,  form  the  word 
(Stf'POte.  This  is  preferable  to  Courier',  which  ought  not  to 
be  considered  a  German  word,  as  it  is  needlessly  borrowed 
from  a  foreign  language.  —  In  the  same  manner  the  French 
word  diligence,  which  is  frequently  used  in  Germany  to  deuote 
a  carriage  which  is  to  travel  with  despatch,  may  be  rendered 
by  CU'tDOgen  ;  from  <2Ba'gcit,  carriage,  and  CKc,  despatch  ; 
and  this  German  word  has  already  displaced  in  a  great  meas- 
ure the  barbarous  term  JH'ftgCUCC. 

But  in  seeking  native  for  foreign  words,  we  ought  to  guard 
against  mere  literal  translations.  It  is  the  sense  of  the  foreign 
words  which  is  to  be  rendered  in  German,  and  not  the  man- 


172  FORMATION  OF  NEW  WORDS.  [BOOK  I. 

ner  in  which  this  sense  is  expressed  in  the  language  to  which 
they  belong.  Thus  the  French  word  alike,  which  is  sometimes 
used  in  Germany  as  signifying  a  walk  planted  with  trees,  can- 
not be  rendered  simply  by  ©aug,  walk ;  but  by  SatmVgang, 
from  (Sang,  walk,  and  95aum,  tree. 

4.  The  general  language  which  is  at  present  spoken  by  all 
well-bred  persons  in  Germany,  may  be  recruited,  by  antiquated 
German  words,  and  by  local  or  provincial  expressions.  But 
they  cannot  be  considered  as  parts  of  the  general  and  living 
language,  until  good  German  writers  have  obtained  for  them 
the  sanction  of  public  opinion. 

a.  The  word  Cur'nen,  to  perform  gymnastic  exercises,  is  an 
example  of  an  antiquated  term,  which  has  been  restored  to  the 
living  language.  This  word,  having  lately  been  revived  by 
Jahn,  is  now,  with  all  the  derivative  and  compound  words 
which  have  been  formed  from  it,  a  legitimate  German  term. 

b.  "  Provincial  terms,"  says  Jahn,  "  are  the  militia,  which 
take  the  field  when  the  standing  army  of  book-words  is  defeat- 
ed." Thus  the  Swiss  word  k&wi'nt,  avalanche,  has  become  a 
classical  German  word. 

5.  A  number  of  foreign  words  which  have  taken  a  German 
termination,  and  of  which  many  derivative  and  compound 
words  have  been  formed,  may  now  be  considered  as  natural- 
ized ;  as,  the  word  Sftatur',  nature,  which  has  been  employed 
in  forming  the  derivative  expressions  Itll'mUUV,  unnatural 
state ;  natitv'ficl),  natural,  STcatuvltcfyfctt,  natural  appearance  ; 
and  the  compound  words,  9TatUl''ftaut>,  state  of  nature  ;  9ta= 
tUU'redjt,  natural  right;  and  many  others.  The  words,  SKc'gel, 
rule,  and  gami'Ite,  family,  are  similar  instances  of  naturalized 
words. 

6.  There  are  some  expressions,  borrowed  from  foreign 
languages,  which  may  be  considered  almost,  in  the  light  of 
proper  names,  peculiarly  and  exclusively  belonging  to  the 
objects  which  they  designate.  Of  this  kind  are  ^()ce,  tea ; 
&af  fee,  coffee  ;  ©cfcof  oU'&C,  chocolate  ;  %Qb*P,  tobacco.  To 
attempt  to  Germanize  such  terms  would  be  an  absurdity. 

7.  There  are  some  foreign  terms,  which,  according  to  their 
general  and  permanent  signification,    might   be   rendered   in 


PART  II.  CH.  11.]      FORMATION  OF  NEW  WORDS.  173 

German,  but  are  nevertheless  preserved  by  good  writers,  be- 
cause they  have  a  reference  to  peculiar  circumstances  and 
times.  Thus  the  native  words,  ^olf,  people,  and  J£m*,  army, 
are  in  general  to  be  preferred  to  the  foreign  terms,  SiattOU7, 
and  Tlvmw' ;  but  in  the  time  of  Napoleon,  the  expressions,  t>ic 
gVO'fc  ftnrtec',  the  Grand  Army,  and  t>ic  gvo'fe  Station',  the 
Great  Nation,  had  a  special  and  .transitory  meaning,  for  which 
the  foreign  appellatives  were  better  suited  than  the  true  Ger- 
man expressions. 

8.  As  the  process  of  purifying  the  language  from  improper 
mixtures  must  be  a  gradual  one,  it  is  particularly  desirable  that 
they  should  be  most  carefully  avoided  in  works  which  are  likely 
to  be  of  lasting  importance.  From  works  of  this  character, 
the  changes  may  and  will  proceed,  by  degrees,  to  lighter  kinds 
of  literature,  and  conversation  ;  while  a  precipitate  or  pre- 
posterous attempt  at  purification,  which  would  obstruct  the 
natural  flow  of  thought  and  expression,  is  as  much  averse  to 
the  genius  of  the  language,  as  those  very  impurities  which  it  is 
intended  to  remove. 


15 


:^# 


BOOK  II. 


SYNTAX. 


AGREEMENT,  GOVERNMENT,  AND  ARRANGEMENT 

OF  WORDS. 

The  agreement  of  words  consists  in  their  being  put  in  the 
same  gender,  number,  case,  and  person. 

One  word  is  said  to  govern  another,  when,  by  the  power  of 
the  former,  the  latter  is  made  to  assume  a  particular  form  ;  for 
example,  a  certain  case  in  declension,  or  mood  in  conjugation. 

The  arrangement  of  words  consists  in  placing  them  in  the 
proper  order  in  which  they  should  succeed  each  other. 


CHAPTER  I. 


THE  ARTICLE. 


§    1.    AGREEMENT  AND  GOVERNMENT. 


RULE  I. 

The  articles  em  and  feet*  are  generally  used  in  German,  as 
a  and  the  in  English.  In  German,  moreover,  they  must  agree 
with  the  noun  in  gender,  number,  and  case,  whether  the  noun 
be  preceded  by  an  adjective  or  not ;  as,  citt  2D?antt,  a  man ; 
ei'nem  p'ten  SDtan'ne,  to  a  good  man ;  ei'nev  treff'Iicfoen  §vau, 
to  an  excellent  woman  ;  fcaS  tfyCU'VC  ftn'fceufen  ei'neS  getiek'tett 
Kin'Mt  the  dear  remembrance  of  a  beloved  child. 


CH.  1.  §  1.]        SYNTAX  OF  THE  ARTICLE.  175 

Obs.  1.  The  article  is  never  placed  between  the  noun  and 
its  adjective,  but  always  before  the  adjective  ;  as,  cill  ^at'bcv 
SSo'gcn,  half  a  sheet;  et'nc  fyctf'be  ©tun'fcc,  half  an  hour;  cin 
fyal'betf  3<u)v,  half  a  year  ;  Me  bci'tim  ian'ber,  both  the  coun- 
tries ;  t>a$  gan'^e  3<Ht)V,  all  the  year ;  &ei*  bal'be  £ag,  half  the 
day. 

Obs.  2.  In  compounds  the  article  agrees  with  the  gender  of 
the  last  word  ;  as,  &et*  iic'bctfbvicf,  the  love  letter  ;  Me  (333et/ s 
tCVfa^UC,  the  weathercock  ;  ba£  ©ta&t'fyaitS,  the  town-house. 

Exercises. 

Give  me  the  book.  Bring  me  a  pen.  Here  is  a  knife.  Lend 
him  the  penknife.  He  has  the  ink.  Write  an  answer.  I  saw 
the  friends. 

to  give,  ge'ben,  irr.  penknife,  ge'bcrmeffer,  rc.  3.a.  <U 

book,  tdwd),  n.  3.  b.  e.  ink,  SMn'tc,  /.  1.  C. 

to  bring,  bvittg'en.  to  write,  feljvci'bm. 

pen,  ge'Det',  /.l.C  answer,  int'roovt,  f.  1.  t). 

here,  fytcr.  to  see,  fc'fycil,  irr. 

knife,  SOTcffcr,  w.  3.  a.  a.  friend,  gvcunb,  w.  3.  b.  6. 

to  lend,  Ict'tyCU. 

RULE  II. 

The  article  fcet*  is  used  in  German,  though  not  in  English, 
before  most  nouns  in  a  universal  sense,  or  where  a  common 
noun  is,  as  it  were,  personified;  as,  t>a$  ic'bcn,  life;  ba€  IXi'ttK, 
age ;  fret'  gvufy'ltng,  spring ;  bet*  ©om'mcr,  summer ;  bet* 
SEftcnfd),  man ;  Me  SOten'fdjCU/  men  or  mankind  ;  also  before 
all  common  nouns  in  the  oblique  cases ;  as,  t>a6  $utt>  fceS 
35nt'bcv$,  the  brother's  child. 

Also  before  most  adjectives  taken  substantively ;  as,  ba$ 
©U'tc,  good  or  goodness;  etu  ©clc^V'CCV,  a  learned  man;  bet* 
(Belcfyv'tC,  the  learned. 

RULE    III. 

Before  proper  names  the  article  is  generally  omitted. 

1.  Before  the  proper  names  of  places,  the  article  is  most 
commonly  omitted,  particularly  in  the  nominative  ;  as,  Son'bOU/ 


176 


SYNTAX  OP  THE  ARTICLE. 


[BOOK  II. 


spc'tcvsfcurg,  (SttVO'pa,  (Eng'tanb.     But  the  following  nouns  are 
exceptions  to  this  rule  : 

fcie  ^urfei'/  Turkey.  t>Ct*  £aag,  the  Hague, 

fcie  iombav&ci',  Lombardy.  t)ic  <&Sd)n>eij,  Switzerland, 

tie  9tic'&cvfant>c,  the   Nether-  fcte  ietoau'tc,  the  Levant, 

lands.  Die  spf&f}/  the  Palatinate. 

Also  the  Germans  say,  Die  @tat)t  Son'DOU,  the  city  of  Lon- 
don ;  to$  ^6'nigVCid)  gvanf  VCtct),  the  kingdom  of  France,  &c. 

2.  The  proper  names  of  persons  generally  take  no  article  in 
the  nominative,  nor,  when  they  have  a  change  of  termination, 
in  the  oblique  cases ;  as,  (Ti'CCt'06  SHe'Den,  Cicero's  Orations. 
In  the  oblique  cases,  when  there  is  no  change  of  termination, 
the  article  may  be  used  ;  as,  23w'ttt$  tb'UU  t>en  S&'jav,  Bru- 
tus killed  Caesar. 

In  speaking  familiarly  of  well-known  persons,  the  definite 
article  is  sometimes  used,  even  in  the  nominative  case ;  as, 
fcer  5tav(,  Charles  ;  Die  htt'fc,  Louisa. 

A  proper  name  when  used  as  a  common  noun,  requires  the 
article  before  it ;  as  fcer  spia'to  fet'ncS  Jfit'altetS,  the  Plato  of  | 
his  age. 

Exercises. 

Death  itself  is  not  so  dreadful. 

Man  is  rational,  man  is  mortal. 

He  has  a  house  in  (the)  town. 

We  are  going  to  (the)  church. 

They  come  from  (the)  church. 

Neptune  was  the  god  of  the  seas. 

I  am  going  to  London. 

I  come  from  Holland. 

Cicero  was  an  excellent  orator. 

The  temple  of  Solomon  was  magnificent. 


Death,  'Jot),  m,  3.  b.  6 

itself,  fclbjt. 

not,  me()t. 

so,  fo. 

dreadful,  furd)'tcv(id). 

man,  SOTenfcl),  m.  2.  b. 

rational,  fcCVUitnf tig. 


mortal,  ftcr'6lid). 

house,  J£>au£,  n.  3.  b.  c. 

in,  in.  (Dot.) 

town,  @tat>t,  /.  1.  l\ 

to  go,  ge'fycu,  followed   by  irt. 

(Ace.) 
church,  ftir'djc,  /.  1.  C. 


CH.  1.  §  1.] 


SYNTAX  OF  THE  ARTICLE. 


177 


to  come,  fom'men. 

from,  Doit.  (Dat.) 
Neptune,  SRcptUtt'. 
was,  wax. 

god,  <S>0tt,  m.  3.  b.  C. 
sea,  SOtCCf,  n.  3.  b.  b. 

to  go,  ge'fyen. 
to,  nacl). 


to  come,  fom'men. 

from,  Von. 
Cicero,  (Et'CCfO. 
excellent,  tvefflicf). 
orator,  SKcr'nctr,  m.  3.  a.  0. 
temple,  ^em'pel,  m.  3.  a.  a. 
Solomon,  ©a'lomo. 
magnificent,  pvacb'tig. 


RULE  IV. 


The  article  is  repeated  before  nouns  of  different  genders ; 
as,  t>CV  Sk'tcr,  t>ie  SDtut'tCt*  UUD  fcilS  ftiUD,  the  father,  mother, 
and  child  :  but  before  nouns  each  of  which  requires  the  same 
article,  it  should  be  put  only  before  the  first;  as,  liX  SHoef  tint) 
S$\\t,  the  coat  and  hat. 

Sometimes,  however,  the  article  is  repeated  before  each  of 
several  nouns  of  the  same  gender,  for  the  purpose  of  express- 
ing the  importance  of  each  one  of  them :  for  example,  when 
different  subjects  are  enumerated  in  a  title,  or  superscription  ; 
as  in  that  of  the  fable,  2>CV  gucl)$  ttut>  MX  SHa'be,  The  Fox  and 
the  Raven. 


Exercises. 

The  man,  woman,  and  child  are  gone  out. 

The  hare  and  pigeon. 

The  father,  mother,  son,  and  daughter  are  in  the  country. 

The  sheep,  cow,  and  dog. 

I  left  the  book  and  ruler  upon  the  table. 

Give  me  the  pen  and  penknife. 

The  father  and  son  (do)  not3  resemble1  each2  other2. 


man,  *SOTantt/  m.  3.  b.  C. 
woman,  $X<X\l,  f>  1.  t>. 
child,  £iut>,  n.  3.  b.  t. 
to  go  out,  au6'gct)CU,  irr. 
hare,  JpvVfe,  m.  2.  a. 
pigeon,  ^cut'bc,  /.  1.  C. 
in,  auf.  (Dat.) 
country,  $ant>,  n.  3.  b.  C. 
sheep,  ©cfoaf,  n.  3.  b.  b, 
cow,  kill),  /.  1.  b. 
dog,  Jjuufc;  m.  3.  b.  b. 


to  leave,  laf'fcu,  irr. 
book,  33ucl),  n.  3.  b.  e. 
ruler,  iiueal',  n.  3.  b.  [\  (Ace.) 
upon,  auf.  (Dat.) 
table,  $ifct),  m.  3.  b.  b. 
pen,  ge'frer,  /.  1.  C. 
penknife, gc'DcvincjTcr,  n.  3.  a.  0. 
father,  *33a'tcr,  m.  3.  a.  a. 
son,  igofyn,  m.  3.  b.  b. 
to  resemble,  g(ci'c()cn. 
each  other,  fid). 


178  SYNTAX  OF  THE  ARTICLE.  [BOOK  II. 


RULE   V. 

In  an  emphatic  manner  of  speaking,  the  article  is  frequent- 
ly omitted  where  it  ought  to  be  used,  according  to  Rule  II, 
and  Rule  IV,  particularly  in  the  plural  number ;  as,  Q5ei*ed) 'U 
tmt>  ltn'gcred)te,  30?cn'fc{)cn  uni>  'Sfyie've  fan'&en  in  Den  333cl'ten 
ifyl*  @t'al\  The  just  and  the  unjust,  men  and  beasts  found  their 
grave  in  the  waves. 

RULE  VI. 

The  article  is  omitted,  whenever  the  substantive  expresses 
a  part  of  a  thing,  which  in  English  is  denoted  by  the  word 
some,  (answering  to  the  French  du,  de  la,  de  V ,  des) ;  as, 
35ring'en  @te  mil*  2>rot>,  Bring  me  some  bread  ;  Jjpa'ben  @tc 
^papier',  Qin'tt,  &c.  ?  Have  you  some  paper,  ink,  &c? 

Exercises. 

Have  you  eaten2  bread1  and  drunk2  water1  ? 
Bring  me  some  wine  and  water. 
I  have  bought3  some2  silk2  to-day1. 
Give  me  some  paper,  ink,  and  pens. 

bread,  23rot>,  n.  3.  b.  6.  to-day,  ()eu'te. 

to  eat,  ef'fcn,  irr.  silk,  ©et'fce,  /.  1. 

water,  ^XBaffCt4,  n.  3.  a.  a.  to  buy,  frut'fcit. 

to  drink,  ttinf'Ctt/  irr.  to  give,  ge'beit/  irr. 

wine,  ^33eitt/  m.  3.  b.  6.  paper,  papier',  n.  3.  b.  6, 

RULE  VII. 

In  some  phrases  the  article  is  commonly  omitted  in  German, 
where  it  is  in  English  either  expressed,  or  has  a  pronoun  put 

in  its  place;  as,  itberbnng'er  fctc'fetf,  the  bearer  of  this;  in 
bef'tet*  £H*t>'nung,  in  the  best  order ;  t)ov  ©n'&igung  t>($  @ct)au'-- 

fpic[£,  before  the  conclusion  of  the  drama ;  id)  fyci'be  C£  in 
J&iitt'&ett,  I  have  it  in  my  hands ;  id)  fya'fce  t$  fcor  2(u'gcU/  I 
have  it  before  my  eyes.  —  The  same  peculiarity  is  to  be  observ- 
ed in  regard  to  some  adjectives  and  participles  ;  as,  tt'fttttC, 
the  former  ;  Utfttttt',  the  latter  ;  btf<X$'tCXl  the  aforesaid  ; 
evroafyn'tCV,  or  get>ac()'tiT,  the  abovementioned  ;  gcnann'tcr,  the 


CII.  1.  §  2.]        SYNTAX  OF  THE  ARTICLE.  17$ 

abovenamed  ;  foCgCUfccr,  the  following  :  also  with  respect  to 
some  proper  names;  as,  CjUn'kicn,  the  East  Indies;  QODcfHn'* 
fcten,  the  West  Indies. 

§   2.    ARRANGEMENT. 

The  article  must  be  put  immediately  before  the  noun  to 
which  it  belongs,  if  the  noun  is  not  preceded  by  other  words 
which  qualify  it;  as,  CM  SOTauu,  a  man;  t>ic  §rau,  the  woman 
If  the  noun  is  preceded  by  other  qualifying  words,  the  article 
must  be  put  before  them.  Thus,  if  the  noun  be  preceded  by 
an  adjective,  the  article  must  be  placed  before  the  adjective , 
as,  fcer.  glt'te  £Dtauu ;  and  if  the  adjective  is  qualified  by  an  ad- 
verb or  a  participial  construction,  the  article  precedes  this ; 
as,  cine  fci;t*  gu'tc  grau,  a  very  good  woman  ;  fcic  al'ti$  fiber- 
mc'gcnfce  iw'bt  jum  SHufym,  the  all-surpassing  love  of  glory.  If 
the  adjective,  for  the  sake  of  emphasis,  is  put  after  the  noun 
in  the  way  of  apposition,  the  article  immediately  precedes  the 
adjective,  or  the  adverb,  or  participial  construction,  by  which 
it  is  qualified  ;  as,  StatUl*',  fcte  fyet'Iige,  sacred  nature;  uu'fct' 
gmm&  fcet  fefomcrj'Itd)  VCrmijf  tc,  our  deeply  regretted  friend ; 
£vieg,  feet*  ian'&Cl*  fccrfyee'l'enfce,  war  which  desolates  countries. 

Exercises. 

Of  the  celebrated  painter.  An  ill  fed  horse.  The  sea3 
connecting2  (the)  nations1.  The2  most3  hearty3  joy1.  For- 
bearance, (the)  never  tiring.  He  was  a  victim  of  (the)  passion, 
(the)  deluding  the  heart,  corrupting  the  taste,  deranging  the 
intellect. 

celebrated,  fcciutfymt'.  never,  nic. 

painter,  SERa'ter,    m.  3.  a.  a.        to  tire,  cvtmV&en. 

ill,  fc()lcd)t.  victim,  Cp'fcr,  n. 

fed,  gefut'tcrt.  passion,  iei'fccnfdjaft,  /. 

horse,  spfcrt),  n.  3.  a.  a.  to  delude,  bct^'vcn. 

nation,  *33o(t\  n.  3.  b.  e.  heart,  «£erj,  n. 

to  connect,  l)cr£uu't>Clt.  to  corrupt,  foevfrCl'fceil. 

sea,  ©ec,  /.  taste,  ©cfdjmacf ,  m.  3.  b. 

joy,  gtCtt'&C,  /.  to  derange,  jevnit'tCH. 

hearty,  fyev^'Ucl).  intellect,  ©ei|t,  m.  3.  b.  C. 

forbearance,  langmutt),  f. 


180 


SYNTAX  OF  THE  NOUN. 


[book  II. 


CHAPTER  II. 


NOUNS. 


§  1.  AGREEMENT  AND  GOVERNMENT. 
RULE  I. 

Two  or  more  nouns  are  put  in  the  same  case, 

1.  When  they  are  brought  together  only  to  show  their  com- 
mon relation   to   another   object ;    as,   ©cveefe'tigfeit,   ^ofyf; 

tt)ati$hit  tint)  gvim'micjfeit  finfc  Me  SOtcvfmale  ei'ncs  £fyvif ten, 

Justice,  charity,  and  piety  are  the  characteristics  of  a  Chris- 
tian. 

2.  When  they  are  put  together  to  denote  the  same  object, 
so  that  one  of  them  either  completes  or  explains*  the  other  ; 
as,  fcer.  ODTo'uat  SXftai,  the  month  of  May ;  Dev  dibttj  fcei'nes 
25nt't>cr;£,  t>e£  SHecfytS'gelefyrten,  the  advice  of  thy  brother,  the 
lawyer. 

RULE  II. 

When  one  noun  is  qualified  by  another,  the  latter  is  gener- 
ally put  in  the  genitive  case  ;  as,  tit  gmt'fceit  t)Ct*  3iU'geut>,  the 
pleasures  of  youth  ;  fcic  §vuc()t  t>ev  (Srfcnnfnifj  tu'6  (Su'tcn  imt> 
256'fcn,  the  fruit  of  the  knowledge  of  good  and  evil. 

An  exception  is  made  when  the  noun  which  qualifies  anoth- 
er, denotes  the  object,  of  which  the  other  is  a  part,  only  in  a 
general  manner ;  especially,  if  the  qualifying  noun  expresses 
an  object  which  may  be  measured,  weighed,  or  numbered.  In 
such  instances  the  qualifying  noun  remains  in  the  nominative, 
singular  or  plural ;  as,  £et)U  SiTcn  %ud)  (instead  of  ^U'cbctf), 
ten  yards  of  cloth ;  eitt  ©titer'  533l'0t>  (instead  of  2Sve'r>C$),  a 
piece  of  bread  ;  cm  (SlaS  QOBctlt  (instead  of  ^ei'ttCt?),  a  glass 
of  wine ;  eitt  3)ltt'jCttt>  iidyttv,  a  dozen  candles. 


*  When  the  preceding  is  explained  by  the  subsequent  noun, 
the  latter  is  said  to  be  in  apposition  with  the  former. 


CH.   2.  §  1.]  SYNTAX  OF  THE  NOUN.  181 

But  the  genitive  is  required  if  the  qualifying  noun  is  more 
exactly  designated  by  a  pronoun  or  an  adjective  ;  as,  jcfylt 
<E('(cn  Mc'fCt?  £n'cl)C$,  ten  yards  of  this  cloth  ;  £tt>ci  gaf  fct* 
(Ut'tClt  3Bci'nc6,  two  casks  of  good  wine. 

Observation,  Nouns  of  the  masculine  and  neuter  genders, 
expressing  measure,  weight,  or  number,  remain,  after  numerals, 
in  the  nominative  singular  ;  as,  jwan'jtg  §U6  (instead  of  giVfc) 
J&ng'C,  twenty  feet  in  length  ;  orct  Boll  (instead  of  3ol'lc)  bvctt, 
three  inches  in  breadth ;  jroct  spaav  (instead  of  spaa're) 
©tvutll'pfc,  three  pairs  of  stockings.  Measures  of  time,  as, 
3*ifyl*,  year,  %a$,  day,  and  names  of  coins,  as,  ©coining,  shil- 
ling, are  excepted. 

RULE    III. 

The  genitive  case  is,  frequently,  supplied  by  the  preposition 
toon,  of,  with  the  dative.     This  is  done, 

1.  When  the  article  is  excluded ;  as,  &cr  ll&r&'liclje  $f)ctf 
toon  ©ttg'tanD;  the  northern  part  of  England ;  tie  QH'CU'£Cn 
toon  grattf'VCid),  the  boundaries  of  France. 

2.  When  quality,  condition,  or  proportion,  is  implied  ;  as, 
cm  SDfann  toon  ^cvftan'oc,  a  man  of  sense ;  cm  fiitt  ton 
Ci>'lci*  ©enfung^avt,  a  gentleman  of  a  noble  character  ;  ci'nc 
SJtct'fc  toon  jctm  SDfai'lcn,  a  journey  of  ten  miles;  cut  @cl)ijf 
l>0lt  JWCi  tyun'&CVt  ^on'UCtt,  a  ship  of  two  hundred  tons  ;    cine 

©itm'mc  toon  jwan'jig  ©ul'ccn  nno  ffmf  ©rofcfj'cn,  a  sum 

of  twenty   guilders   and  five  groats;    cin    SDtamt   toon  tic&t'jig 
Zfifj'Xttoi  a  man  of  eighty  years. 

3.  When  the  material  is  mentioned,  of  which  any  thing  is 
made  ;  as,  ci'nc  XI  for  toon  (Sol'OC,  the  same  as,  ci'nc  gol'&cnc 
XII) r;  a  gold  watch  ;  cm  SScctyer  toon  ©tl'bcr,  a  silver  cup;  cin 
©tlttyl  toon  (Sl'fcnbcm,  an  ivory  chair. 

4.  Before  the  indefinite  article,  to  denote  character ;  as, 
Cin  2tb'fc()CU  toon  ci'ncm  SDten'fcfjcn,  a  horrible  villain,  (literally, 
a  horror  of  a  man) ;  cin  2ut6  bttno  toon  ci'ncm  cfyv'UclKn 
SDfan  nc,  a  pattern  of  an  honest  man. 

5.  To  prevent  an  inelegant  repetition  of  the  same  endings; 
as,  tic  llv'facrjc  toon  ocm  fon'ocrbaven  s3etra'gcn  M  OJTan'nce, 
the  reason  of  the  singular  conduct  of  the  mja.n,  —  instead  of  pit 

Xlr'fadjc  ocs  fon'cevbaven  95cttra'gcne  cc£  9D?an'nc£. 

16 


182  SYNTAX  OF  THE  NOUN.  [BOOK.  II. 

Sometimes  it  is  indifferent,  whether  VOW  be  made  use  of,  or 
the  genitive  case  :  for  example,  t>m  ©cl)Cill  VOW  §Hct>'(ic()feit 
fya'ben,  or  t»cn  ©cbctit  OCX  SHc^'ficfiteit  fya'ben,  to  have  the  ap- 
pearance of  honesty  ;  t»CV  n&rfc'lidjc  S^cil  t)0U  Qsilg'laufc,  or, 
Oct*  uot'fc'liebe  Xtjcil  Sng'UnM,  the  northern  part  of  England  ; 

ei'ncv  von  mei'ncn  gmm^cn,  or  ct'nct*  mei'ner  greun'&c,  one 

of  my  friends.  But  where  the  genitive  is  not  distinguished  by 
the  article,  or  the  termination,  Von  must  be  employed.  Before 
the  article  it  is  often  superfluous ;  as,  fccit  ©cl)Cin  Von  OtX 
$!H'gCtt&  fya'fccn,  to  have  the  show  of  virtue.  £>et*  $u'gen&/ 
as  the  genitive  case,  would  be  sufficient,  without  the  prepo- 
sition. 

Exercises. 

The  friends  of  right  and  order  are  contending  against  the 
passions  and  prejudices  of  the  oppressors  and  the  oppressed. 

The  town  of  Schwytz  is  the  capital  of  the  canton  of 
Schwytz. 

You  confounded  John  the  Baptist  with  John  the  Evangelist. 

The  merits  of  the  first  President  of  the  United  States. 

What  is  the  price  of  a  hundred  weight  of  lead  ? 

I  see  a  great  number  of  children. 

I  want  three  cords  of  that  wood. 

He  gave  me  a  canister  of  genuine  imperial  tea. 

I  bought  ten  pounds  of  meat. 

Natives  of  Europe  displaced  the  aborigines  of  America. 

He  is  a  man  of  high  rank  and  great  pretensions,  but  no 
merit. 

A  helmet  of  steel  with  ornaments  of  silver. 

Is  he  not  a  model  of  a  good  son  1 

friend,  grctmfc,  m.  3.  b.  b.  oppressed,  UUtCffctntcft'. 

right,  SHcc^t,  m.  3.  b.  b.  town,  glec'fen,  m.  3.  a.  a. 

order,  Orfc'nung,  /.  1.  t>.  capital,  £aupt'ort,  m.  3.  b.  b. 

to  contend,  fthtipfert.  canton,  Canton',  m.  3.  b.  b. 

against,  ge'gett,  (Ace.)  to  confound,  Vcrroecr/fcltt. 

passion,  Wi'oenfdjaft,  /.  1.  i>.      John,  3fofyan'nc$. 

and,  tmt>.  Baptist,  S&u'fer,  m.  3.  a.  0, 

prejudice,   ^Qet'nxttjtii,  n.   3.  with,  mit.  (Dat.) 

b.  b.  Evangelist,  €toangc(ifV/m.2.b. 

oppressor,  UntCtOnVfcr,  m.  3.  merit,  33et't>icn|V,  n.  3.  b.  b. 

a.  a.  the  first,  t>Cf  cr'ftf. 


CH.  2.  §  1.] 


SYNTAX  OF  THE  NOUN. 


183 


president,  tythfLbtnt1 ,  m.  2.  b. 

united,  fcerei'nigt. 

state,  ©tciat,  m.  3.  b.  t>. 
price,  spvcitf,  m.  3.  b.  b. 
hundred  weight,  (Eent'lKV,  m. 

3.  a.  a. 
lead,  $5(ei,  n.  3.  b.  b. 
to  see,  fc'fyeu. 
great,  gV0£. 

number,  ^DTeng'C,  /.  1.  C. 
child,  fttut),  ».  3.  b.  C. 

to  want,  brau'djcn. 
cord,  Klafut,  /.  1.  a. 

wood,  £o(£,  w.  3.  b.  C. 

to  give,  gc'bcn,  2rr. 

canister,  SSltcfo'fC,  /.  1.  C. 

genuine,  ad)t. 

imperial   tea,    ^ai'fCVt^CC/   m. 

3.  a. 
to  buy,  fau'fen. 
pound,  spfmtt),  n.  3.  b.  b. 


meat,  gtfctfcf),  w.  3.  b.  b. 
native,  cin'gcboren. 
Europe,  Suro'po. 
to  displace,  fcertrdttg'ett. 
aborigines,     ilv'bcrootyner,    m. 

3.  a.  a. 
man,  *SD?ann,  m.  3.  b.  c. 
high,  t)cc(). 
rank,  SHang,  m.  3.  b. 
pretension,    *2tn'fpntd),  m.  3. 

b.  b. 
but,  a'bcr. 
no,  fein. 

helmet,  Jjpcfm,  »ra.  3.  b.  b. 

steel,  @M^f,  »«.  3.  b.  b. 

with,  mtt.  (Dat.) 

ornament,  jSie'vaffy,  /.  1.  t>. 

silver,  ©tl'bcv,  n,  3.  a.  a. 

not,  nicbt. 

model,  SDhtftet/  »•  3.  a.  a. 

good,  gut. 

son,  ©ofyn,  w.  3.  b.  b. 


RULE   IV. 

The  genitive  case  often  occurs,  where  there  is  apparently 
no  word  to  govern  it.     Thus  it  expresses  : 

I.  Relation  of  time.  2>c$  2f  bcirttf,  in  the  evening  ;  De£ 
SDtor'gClltf/*  in  the  morning ;  &CS  SDiit'tagS,  at  noon  ;  t>eg 
Sfla(()t6,t  in  the  night ;  (Sonn'abcnfcS,  on  Saturday  ;  SOXon'- 
tag6,  on  Monday ;  ei'uc£  $a'ge$,  one  day,  on  a  certain  day; 
fyeu'tigcs  ^a'ges,  this  day ;  ein'mal  t>c£  SDio'nates,  once  in  a 
month;  fcicv'uhU  &C£  Safy'VCS,  four  times  in  a  year. 


*  The  same  idiom  prevails  in  the  Greek  language ;  as, 
og&gov,  early  in  the  morning  ;  vvxtoc,  in  the  night. 

t  Here  the  article  corresponds  with  the  termination,  and 
not  with  the  gender,  of  the  substantive ;  the  addition  of  £  (to 
£ftac()t,  f.  1.  b.)  being  formerly  the  characteristic  of  the  geni- 
tive singular  in  all  declensions. 


184  SYNTAX  OF  THE  NOUN.  [BOOK  II. 

2.  Relation  of  place.  Sie'fctf  Dt'tCG,  in  this  place ;  gct)6's 
rigftt  Ol'ttti,  in  or  at  a  proper  place;  al'lei*  Ov'fC/  in  all  places, 
every  where. 

3.  Way  and  manner.  ©cra'&CS  (or  gcva'fccn)  QOBc'geS, 
straightways ;  fie'tyenfctn  gu'fcS,  immediately  ;  fcic'fer  ©Cjtalt', 
in  this  manner  ;  foI'gcn&Cl*  ©CfUft',  in  the  following  manner ; 
mei'ttetf  S^fifc/  on  my  part;  nn'fertt  ^fyeilS,  on  our  part; 
mei'ne*  <23E3if/fcu^/  to  my  knowledge ;  mei'nes  SSctftnf'en^/  in 
my  opinion ;  ei'niger  SDTci'fcU/  in  some  measure ;  gewtffev 
SDfrl'fftt/  in  a  certain  degree;  nn'foervidjtetei*  ©ac()'e,  not  hav- 
ing effected  one's  purpose.  Also  the  following  phrases:  fling's 
erg  jlcv'bcn,  to  die  of  hunger;  ci'UC^  fd)mevj1ld)CU  io'DcS 
fttx'btft,  to  die  a  painful  death  ;  feci*  £  Off 'tiling  le'betl,  to  live 
in  hope ;  t>Ct?  3u/tvattcn6  fe'ben,  to  live  with  confidence,  that 
is,  to  entertain  a  confident  opinion  with  regard  to  a  thing. 
With  the  verb  fcin :  as,  '■HMf'fcnS  fcin,  to  intend ;  bn  SOfahlltltg 
frill,  to  be  of  an  opinion ;  fceS  ^to'DcS  fctU/  to  perish. 

RULE  V. 

The  accusative  case  is  employed  to  denote  time,  both  as  to 
date  and  duration.  —  Date  :  fcCU  jefyn'tClt  *£ag  Itad)  &ei*  ©d)Iacl)t, 
the  tenth  day  after  the  battle ;  fo  ttOt  t$  fcag  tx'\U  %*t}V,  thus 
it  was  (in)  the  first  year;  fceit  tlltttl'tett  Slt'li,  the  ninth  of  July ; 
VO'vtgCU  2)ienf'tag,  last  Tuesday;  fcrei  mat  t>ie  (2Bod)'e  (Ace), 
three  times  a  week.  —Duration:  id)  bill  Den  gau'jcn  $ag  $n 
•Qatt'fe  get&e'fen,  I  have  been  at  home  the  whole  day ;   id)  VtHT'= 

be  nod)  ei'nen  SDTo'nat  in  fcer  ©tafct  bfei'beu,  I  shall  remain 

yet  a  month  in  town  ;  fecrroci'Ieil  @te  Cl'llCU  Ztu'gcnblirf,  stay 
one  moment.  The  adverb  iailg,  long,  is  frequently  subjoined 
to  mark  the  duration  ;  as,  jefyn  3>afy'l*e  (attg,  for  ten  years. 

After  certain  adjectives  and  verbs,  signifying  weight,  mea- 
sure, extent,  age,  price,  value,  such  as,  gro£,  great,  bttXt,  broad, 
fd)ir»ev,  heavy,  mie'gen,  to  weigh,  Hfttn,  to  coast,  the  accusa- 
tive follows.  (Si'ncn  §116  bttit,  a  foot  broad  ;  ei'nen  SOTo'uat 
alt,  a  month  old ;  CS  »iegt  ei'nen  Beut'ltcr,  it  weighs  a  hundred 
weight. 
v  Space  and  motion  are  indicated  by  the  accusative,     ©hint 

[ang'en  QQBcg  gc'fycn,  to  go  a  long  way ;  &en  2Jrtg  fyintin'tci: 
lau'feit,  to  run  down  the  mountain ;  CV  gefyt  chicit  gn'tcn 
@d)Vitt,  he  walks  a  good  pace. 


CH.  2.  §  1.]  SYNTAX  OF  THE  NOUN.  185 

RULE  VI. 

The  gender  is  deviated  from,  when  the  meaning  of  the 
word  is  more  regarded,  than  its  grammatical  nature.  3)ie'feS 
gxau'cnjimmcr  iff  am  fcbftn'fien,  roeun  fie  fid)  niefct  fcfeminft, 
This  lady  is  most  handsome  when  she  does  not  paint  herself. 
grail'enjimmev  is  of  the  neuter  gender,  but  the  pronoun  fie, 
she,  is  feminine,  because  this  is  the  gender  which  the  subject 
naturally  has.  (Er  (icbt  fetn  Q33cib  ntrijt,  fon'fcmt  nuftbau'fcelt 
fie,  He  does  not  love  his  wife,  but  treats  her  ill.  c2J3cib  is  neuter, 
and  the  feminine  fie  answers  to  it. 

RULE  VII. 

The  English  often  admits  a  different  number,  in  the  verb, 
from  what  its  subject,  according  to  strict  grammar,  would 
require;  as,  "All  the  company  were  present;"  "The  army 
of  martyrs  praise  thee."  The  German,  however,  does  not 
allow  this  deviation,  but  always  requires  the  verb  to  agree  in 
number   with    its   subject ;    as,    t>ic    gan'JC   (ScfeU'fcfoaft    rcai* 

juge'gen. 

On  the  other  hand,  in  German  the  singular  number  is  some- 
times used  collectively,  in  reference  to  more  than  one  subject, 
where  in  English  the  plural  would  be  employed.  For  example  : 
3et)U  attcu'fcf)CU  t^fcett  ifjt  iz'bttt  ettt'gefclttt,  Ten  persons  have 
lost  their   life ;  according  to   the   English,  lives.     5D?ct)V    a(6 

ijun'Mxt  SSw'get*  fya'beu  ify'ren  Sta'mcn  unterjcidj'net,  More  than 

a  hundred  citizens  have  subscribed  their  name,  —  in  English, 
names.  2>ie  VO'tfye,  bfalt'e,  ItnD  get'Be  gav'fcc,  the  red,  blue, 
and  yellow  color,  —  in  English,  colors.  2)ie  gvanjo'fifeljc  UUt» 
3tatid/nifd)e  ©pva'dje,  the  French  and  Italian  language,  —  in 
English,  languages.  In  these  two  last  examples,  the  German 
idiom  may  be  accounted   for  by  the  figure  ellipsis,  thus  ;   Die 

rotfye  (gar'fce),  bUu't  (gau'bc),  tint)  ge('6e  gar'be,  the  red 

(color),  the  blue  (color),  and  the  yellow  color;  3)iC  %VQto$'* 
fifd)e  (@pra'et)c)  tint)  Stati&'nifdje  ©ptft'dje,  The  French  (lan- 
guage), and  Italian  language. 

Exercises. 

The  people  call  them  time-pleasers,  flatterers.  We  are 
wholly  of  your  opinion.  He  walks  ten  miles,  twice  a  day. 
Their  faces  are  turned3  to1  (the)  East2.     In  the  forenoon  I  am 

16* 


186  SYNTAX  OF  THE  NOUN.  [BOOK  II. 

commonly  at  home,  but  in  the  afternoon  I2  ride   out.     He  did1 
not2  yield1  a2  finger's  breadth  (a  Jinger  broad.) 

people,  *33o(f,  n.  3.  b.  c.  East,  SOTot'gen,  m.  3.  a.  a. 

to  call,  ncn'ncn,  mix.  to  turn,  vDen'fcen,  mix. 
time-pleaser,  ^Bct'tetfafylte,  /.     forenoon,    ^ov'mtttag,   m.  3. 

1.  C.  b.  b. 

flatterer,    ©djmeidylev,  m.  3.     commonly,  gerrjotyn'ficf). 

a.  a.  at  home,  ju  Jpau'fe. 

wholly,  ganj.  afternoon,  OTaclymittag,  w*.  3. 
opinion,  sJ*iei'uung,  /.  1.  t>.  b.  b. 

to  walk,  gc'fyeu,  zrr.  to  ride  out,  <\\\$'Vt\tm,  irr. 

mile,  SOtci'Ic,  /.  I.e.  to  yield,  mi'dWXl,  irr. 

day,  ^ag,  m.  3.  b.  b.  not  a,  tcilt. 

face,  (Scftcfof,  w.  3.  b.  e.  finger,  gttlg'er,  m.  3.  a.  rt. 

to,  nacl).  (Da*. )  broad,  bvett. 


§  2.    ARRANGEMENT. 
RULE   I. 

The  noun,  in  the  nominative  case,  being  the  subject  of  a 
sentence,  is  generally  placed  before  the  verb. 

Note.  —  The  subject  is  to  be  distinguished  from  the  object : 
the  former  governs  the  verb,  and  the  latter  is  governed  by  the 
verb  :  for  instance,  Set*  SSa'tet'  litbt  fei'nen  @ot)lt,  The  father 
loves  his  son.  Here,  bet*  ^a'tCV  is  the  subject,  which  governs 
the  verb,  that  is  to  say,  the  verb  must  agree  with  it,  in  number 
and  person  ;  fci'ncit  ©otyit'  is  the  object,  which  is  governed  by 
the  verb,  because  it  must,  in  compliance  with  the  nature  of 
the  verb,  stand  in  a  particular  case. 

Exceptions  to  the  jirst  Rule. 

The  subject  is  put  after  the  verb, 

1.  In  a  direct  question  ;  as,  ©cljrcifct  bet*  STttcutn  ?  Does  the 
man  write?  ©djreitt,  the  verb  —  t>er  SDTamt,  the  subject.  It 
is  the  same,  when  the  question  begins  with  an  interrogative 
pronoun,  or  interrogative  adverb  ;  as,  QBaS  fagt  t>CV  SSa'tCt*  ? 
What  says  the  father?  9£e('cl)CS  fSlU't)  Uejl  MX  @c()lV(cv?  Which 


CH.  2.  §  2.]  SYNTAX  OF  THE  NOUN.  187 

book  does  the  pupil  read  ?  9Bantm'  U\d)t  fceir  ^lia'be  ?  Why 
does  the  boy  laugh?  ^esroe'scn  rociut  Me  ©cftrocf'ter  ?  What 
does  the  sister  weep  for? 

2.  When  instead  of  the  subject,  some  other  word  or  phrase, 
generally  for  the  purpose  of  emphasis,  is  placed  at  the  head  of 
the  sentence ;  particularly  in  the  following  cases : 

a.  When  the  object  is  placed  at  the  head  of  a  sentence. 
For  instance ;  ©ie'fetf  ®(ucf  geiiicjV  fcer  ^u'gcn&fyafte,  This 
happiness  the  virtuous  man  enjoys.  2)CV  %a  genfcfyaftc,  is 
the  subject,  which  follows  after  the  verb  geilicfV;  because 
the  object,  Me'fetf  ©tucf,  begins  the  sentence. 

b.  When  the  dative  or  accusative  case  of  the  person  stands 
first ;  as,  £)cm  SDTen'fclKlt  ift  t>a$  it'bttl  tfytU'tt,  To  man  life  is 
dear;  2)ie'fen  kna'ben  t)*t mciu  grcimfc  Me  gvanjoftfclK  ©pra'cljc 
HtUtjVt',  To  this  boy  my  friend  taught  the  French  language. 
The  sentences  here  begin  with  a  case  of  person,  and  the  sub- 
ject is  found  after  the  verb.  This,  and  the  preceding  excep- 
tion, may  perhaps  be  together  comprehended  in  these  words, 
viz.  When  any  oblique  case  of  declension  begins  a  sentence, 
the  subject  must  come  after  the  verb. 

c.  When  an  adjective  or  pronoun,  belonging  to  the  subject 
or  object,  begins  the  sentence.  (£>Ut  \\l  &CV  ^Bcilt  Jttttt4,  a'btt 
ami)  tfyeu'cr,  The  wine  indeed  is  good,  but  also  dear.  The 
adjective  gut,  in  this  instance,  belongs  to  the  subject,  and, 
beginning  the  sentence,  displaces  the  subject,  bet  "333c ill.  &Ut 
fin'bct  mciu  33a'ter  t>m  QOBctil,  &c.  My  father  finds  the  wine 
good.  Here  gut  belongs  to  the  object,  &C11  333cill,  and  has  the 
same  influence  on  the  subject.  The  same  is  also  to  be  observed 
of  the  pronoun,  when  it  belongs  to  the  subject  or  object  ;  as, 
SDteitt  i|t  to&$  #au$,  Mine  is  the  house;  mciu  belongs  to  fca£ 
Jpaui?,  which  is  the  subject,  and  is  put  after  the  verb. 

d.  When  the  pronoun  cS  begins  the  sentence :  for  example, 
©S  Ummt  fccr  @rn-ccl)'er,  The  speaker  is  coming ;  £$  fa'gcit 
Me  icn'te,  People  say. 

e.  When  an  infinitive  is  put  at  the  beginning,  either  as  a 
member  of   the   sentence,  or  for  the   sake  of  emphasis  :    for 

example,  Urn  SKu'fye  $u  gcuic'feu,  mftffen  tie  ©efet'je  erfitflt' 


188  SYNTAX  OF  THE  NOUN.  [BOOK  II. 

lKr'fceit,  In  order  to  enjoy  peace,  must  the  laws  be  fulfilled ; 
^3cl)0i-'d)CU  woi'kn  fctc  Uu'U  Utd)t,  Obey  will  the  people  not ;  — 
for,  the  laws  must,  the  people  will  not. 

f.  The  participles,  with  an  adverbial  power,  to  express  the 
manner  of  being,  acting,  or  suffering,  and  participles  generally, 
when  placed  at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence,  cause  the  subject 
to  follow  the  verb.  For  instance :  QOBei'UCltt*  fpvacf)  t>cr  SBa'ter, 
Weeping  the  father  spoke ;  $vau'cvn&  ging'Clt  t»ic  (gefdfyr'tcn  JU 
tern  (Svab'tttillC/  Mourning  the  companions  went  to  the  sepul- 
chre. Thus  with  the  past  participle ;  ®c(tcfct'  unfc  an'gchctet 
Writes'  t>cr  £clD  fci'ne  SEKit'&ftrgei  unt>  eil'te  in  t>a£  @d)lad)t'- 

filbf  UCU'e  ht'btxn  pi  erring'en,  Beloved  and  adored,  the 
hero  left  his  fellow  citizens  and  hastened  into  the  field  of  bat- 
tle, to  obtain  new  laurels. 

g.  The  subject  must  come  after  the  verb,  when  an  adverb 
or  certain  cases  of  nouns  used  in  an  adverbial  signification,  or 
absolute  cases,  commence  the  sentence.  25a(t>  femmt  t>er  QGBtn'- 
tu,  Soon  winter  comes  ;  @d)UCll  gefyt  &ie  $?it  t>afyhl',  Quickly 

time  passes ;  Itn'glutfltdjer  'IBei'fe  traf  fcas  *oos  fei'nen  S5ru's 

t»Cl*,  Unfortunately  the  lot  fell  upon  his  brother. 

h.  When  a  preposition,  with  its  case,  takes  the  lead,  93?tt 

freu'&iger  SOtie'nc  ging'en  tk  <£'m'mt)\m  intern  95cfrei'er  enfc 

ge'gCH,  With  a  joyful  countenance  the  inhabitants  went  to  meet 
their  deliverer.  When,  however,  the  preposition,  with  its 
case,  forms  an  exclamation,  it  is  considered  as  an  interjec- 
tion, and  does  not  move  the  subject  from  its  place  ;  as,  25ct 
met'ltet*  (Styvt,  &er  SDTcnfd)  ijt  un'fcljufoig,  Upon  my  honor,  the 
man  is  innocent. 

3.  The  following  conjunctions  have  the  same  effect,  in 
transposing  the  subject,  when  they  commence  the  sentence  : 
but  they  may  themselves  be  placed  after  the  verb.  2d'f0, 
signifying,  so,  thus ;  fcafyev',  thence,  therefore ;  fcavaitf , 
thereupon,  then ;  fcaritm',  for  that  reason  ;  fcemnad)',  con- 
sequently ;  fonad)',  accordingly ;  fcami,  then ;  fceiS'tyafb,  be$s 
fyal'bftt,  for  that  reason ;  t>c6'VDCgen,  on  that  account ;  betfglet's 
d)Ot,  likewise  ;  bod),  yet,  still,  (it  does  not  always  affect  the 
situation  of  the  subject)  ;  fer/ttCV,  moreover ;  folg'lid),  con- 
sequently ;  g[cid)'»ol)(,  nevertheless  ;  inbef'fen,  in  the  mean- 
while;  jeftt,  now;  t'ttltm,  scarcely;  mitfyill',  consequently; 
HOd),  yet,  nor;  nun,   now;  tfycUtf,  partly;  fo,  either  meaning 


CH.  2.  §  2.]  SYNTAX  OF  THE  NOUN.  189 

so,  or  beginning  the  subsequent  member  of  a  sentence ;  iVbct'- 
fcicS,  aufevfccm',  besides;  u'brigcuS,  in  other  respects;  t)<xr 
then  (which  must  always  precede  the  verb).  — When  the  con- 
junctions, and),  also ;  cntwe'fccr,  either;  £tt>ar,  indeed,  are  in 
the  beginning  of  the  sentence,  the  subject  may  be  put  after 
the  verb,  by  which  means  a  stress  falls  either  upon  the  sub- 
ject, or  the  verb ;  as,  Tilld)  fief  fca$  33oIr\  The  people  even 
exclaimed ;  (£ntt»c'&cv  licft  fccr  ^na'be,  o'fccv  ev  fcljreibt,  The 
boy  either  reads  or  writes  ;  $WM  fdjci'HCt  t>ie  @on'ne,  a'bci* 
&c,  The  sun  indeed  shines,  but,  &c.  When  the  emphasis  is 
on  the  subject,  it  should  remain  before  the  verb ;  as,  Tilid)  fca£ 
^clf  rief,  Even  the  people  cried  out.  — In  old  and  formal  lan- 
guage, the  subject  is  sometimes  placed  after  the  verb,  when 
Utlfc,  and,  precedes.  Unt>  ()at  SScflag'ter  CVttic'fcn,  And  the 
defendant  has  proved.  Here  SBcfUg'tCV/  the  subject,  is  after 
the  verb. 

4.  In  quoting,  the  subject  is  put  after  frt'gCtt,  or  any  simi- 
lar verb,  when  part  of  the  quotation  goes  before ;  as,  2)a$ 
(Siutf,  fagt  fccr  ^DBci'fc,  i|i  t>ct*vd  tt7evifc()/  Fortune;  says  the  wise 
man,  is  treacherous. 

5.  The  subject  always  follows  the  verb,  in  the  subsequent 
member  of  a  sentence. 

Note.  ■ —  The  subsequent  member  of  a  sentence  is  that,  which 
comes  after  one  beginning  with  a  relative  pronoun  (such  as 
ttHXt?,  what),  or  a  relative  adverb  (such  as  rc>0,  where),  or  a 
conditional,  causal,  or  consecutive  conjunction  (such  as  VPCUU, 
if;  rocil,  because;  tut,  when).  Examples:  ^aS  frcr  ^3a'tCt* 
fagt,  ttjlit  tier  @ot)tt,  what  the  father  says,  the  son  does.  The 
first  member  of  this  sentence  begins  with  the  relative  pronoun, 
tt»a£  ;  in  the  second  or  subsequent  member,  therefore,  the  sub- 
ject, t>cr  ©obn,  stands  after  the  verb,  tl;nt.  ^S3c  ta$  2(a$  ijt, 
fccvfam'mcln  fid)  t>ic  %Vln,  Where  the  carrion  is,  the  eagles  are 
collected.  Here,  the  first  member  commences  with  the  rela- 
tive adverb,  voo  ;  and  the  subject  in  the  following  member,  is 

after  the  verb.*    3£cnn  t>a$  defter  gitn'|ti$  btcibt,  fo  femmt 

*  Strictly  speaking,  we  ought,  in  the  second,  here  called 
the  subsequent,  member,  to  supply  some  demonstrative  word, 
corresponding  to  the  relative,  in  the  first ;  namely  M£,  in 
reference  to  the  preceding  tt>rti?  ;   and  fca;  in  correspondence 


190  SYNTAX  OF  THE  NOUN.  [BOOK  II. 

twin  gxciml)  in  WnigCll  ^a'gCU,  If  the  weather  continues 
favorable,  my  friend  comes  (or  will  come)  in  a  few  days.  This 
sentence  also  consists  of  two  members  :  the  first,  if  the  weath- 
er continues  favorable  ;  the  second,  my  friend  comes,  or  will 
come ;  in  the  latter,  which  is  the  subsequent  member,  the  sub- 
ject is  placed  after  the  verb.     So  likewise,  ^ed  t>ie  ^Ctt  fdjnctf 

tocrffrficbf;  fo  bcnitfct'  oct*  2Bet'fe  je'fceit  'ZUt'genbUrf,  Because 

time  passes  quickly,  the  wise  man  turns  every  moment  to  ac- 
count. Here  are  again  two  members,  the  antecedent,  because 
time  passes ;  and  the  subsequent,  the  wise  man  turns  every 
moment  to  account.  The  subject  in  the  latter,  of  course, 
stands  after  the  verb.  2)  a  Sa'fav  ftcl)  na'tycrtc,  cntifict)  en  Die 
gem'fce,  When  Caesar  approached  (antecedent),  the  enemy  with- 
drew (subsequent).  —  The  subsequent  member,  after  an  ante- 
cedent, with  a  conjunction  of  the  description  alluded  to,  fre- 
quently begins  with  the  particle  fo,  concerning  which  it  is 
proper  to  refer  to  Book  II.  Ch.  8.  §  1.  This  particle  serves 
as  a  connecting  link,  between  the  antecedent  and  subsequent 
members.*  For  example  :  QOB&'ire  t>cr.  §(u£  fd)i|f  bav,  (or 
^QBenii  fret*  gfug  fd)i|f  bav  roa've,)  fo  nmv'oe  fcer  Jpan'oel  Mil's 
fyeit,  If  the  river  were  navigable,  trade  would  flourish.  —  The 
conjunction  DeftO,  and  also  je,  when  equivalent  to  Def'tO,  con- 
stitute a  subsequent  member.  Ex.  3e  mefyf  DU  fragft,  DeftO 
nje'niget*  WV'bt  id)  ant'roovten,  The  more  you  ask,  the  less  I 
shall  answer.  —  A  subsequent  member  is  likewise  produced, 
when  an  infinitive  begins  the  sentence,  expressing  purpose  and 
design.  Urn  .re  id)  £u  roer'oen,  unterjietyt'  fid)  oer  SKenfdj  oft 
t>en  grd'flett  SDlfl^'fcItgfeiten,  In  order  to  grow  rich,  man  under- 
goes the  greatest  hardships.  "Man  undergoes,"  &lc.  is  the 
subsequent  member,  in  which  the  subject  must  be  put  after  the 
verb. 

In  order  to  lay  more  stress  upon  the  subject  in  the  subse- 
quent member  of  the  sentence,  it  is  sometimes,  by  way  of 
exception,  placed   after  the  verb.     Ex.  Jjpcvr,  ro&'rejt   DU  fyier 


with  WO.  The  subsequent  member  may,  perhaps,  in  every 
instance,  be  said  to  depend  upon  connecting  words,  which  are 
understood. 

*  Such  a  link  between  the  antecedent  and  subsequent 
members,  may  always  be  supposed  ;  and  if  not  expressed,  it  is 
understood. 


1 


CH.  2.  §  2.]  SYNTAX  OF  THE  NOUN.  191 

gcroc'fcn,  mem  SBru'&cr  rcd'vc  uic()t  gcjbv'bcn,  Sir,  if  thou  hadst 
been  here,  my  brother  would  not  have  died. 

6.  The  last  instance,  in  which  the  verb  precedes  the 
subject,  is  where  the  conjunction  roeim,  if,  is  to  be  supplied ; 
as,  3£d're  mem  33a'tcr  frier  gcroc'fcn,  fo  roa're  t>ae?  tln'glucf 
md)C  gcfdje'fyen,  Had  my  father  been  here,  the  misfortune 
would  not  have  happened.  SBd'rc  mcin  35a' ter  frier  geroe'fen, 
stands  for,  rocnn  mcin  33a'ter  frier  gcroe'fen  roa're,  if  my  father 
had  been  here;  and  the  subject,  as  appears,  is  after  the 
verb. 

Exercises. 

The  enemy  approached  the  suburbs. 
(Do)  you2  see1  this  temple  ? 
Why  did  our  teacher  change  his  plan  1 
This  measure  nobody  can  excuse. 
The  courageous,  God  assists. 
Short  was  his  life,  but  eternal  are  his  deeds. 
The  command  was  given. 
They  never  saw  him  weep. 
The  Spartan  died  composed  and  smiling. 
Man  commonly  believes. 
Without  altercation,  they  divided  the  prize. 
We  therefore  determined  to  stay. 
The  papers  indeed  mention  it,  but  I  do  not  believe  it. 
Not  every  thing  which  glistens,  is  gold,  says  the  proverb. 
Because  he  saw  it  in  others,  he  imitated  it. 
If  you  had  not  walked  so  slowly,  you  would  have  overtak- 
en us. 

enemy,  gcinfc,  m.  I  can,  id)  faun,  mix. 

to  approach,  na'frett.  (Dot.)  to  excuse,  entfdwf  fcigen. 

suburb,  *33ov'ftai>t,  f.  1.  b.  courageous,  mu'tfrig. 

to  see,  fe'fren,  irr.  to  assist,  frel'fett,  irr.  (Dat.) 

temple,  Xtm'ytl,  m.  3.  a.  0.  God,  (Sett. 

why,  roarum'.  short,  fttrj. 

to  change,  dn'fcem.  life,  ie'ben. 

teacher,  Utyvtt,  m.  3.  a.  a.  but,  a'ber. 

plan,  sp(an,  m.  3.  b.  b.  eternal,  e'roig. 

measure,  93?aS'vegel,  /.  deed,  £t)at,  f.  1.  &, 

nobody,  ttie'mant>.  command,  SSefefyf',  »*. 


192 


SYNTAX  OF  THE  NOUN. 


[book  II. 


to  be  given,  Ct'ge'fyett,  irr. 

to  weep,  Wi'tim. 

they,  man. 

never,  nit. 

composed,  gefajft'. 

smiling,  lacfyetnt*. 

to  die,  jtetr'bcit,  irr. 

the  Spartan,  tot  <&yma'ntV. 

commonly,  gettofynlid). 

to  believe,  ajau'ben. 

man,  fccr  2DtCUfd). 

without,  ofy'ne. 

altercation,  ©tfei'tigfeit. 

to  divide,  tfyei'Ictt. 

prize,  sprei^/  m.  3.  b.  6. 

therefore,  fcafyei'7. 

to  determine,  bcfc^fic'fcit,  irr. 

to  stay,  Mei'fcen. 

paper,  j&t'tung,  /.  1.  &. 


to  mention,  CVttafy'ttCn. 
indeed,  JttXIV. 

but,  a'btv. 

to  believe,  gfau'fcnt. 

not,  tticl)t. 

every  thing,  ai'lt$. 

to  glisten,  glan'jen. 

gold,  (golfc. 

to  say,  fa'gen. 

proverb,  ©pridyiDOft,  w. 

because,  tt>cif. 

in,  fcon. 

others,  an'fcere. 

to  imitate,  naclytttadjett.     (See 

Book  II.  Ch.  5.  §  2.  F.) 
slowly,  [ang'fam. 

to  walk,  ge'fyctt,  2>r.  (with  feitt.) 
to  overtake,  cin'fyolctt. 


RULE  II. 

The  Substantive,  being  the  object,  is  generally  put  after  the 
verb  :  for  example,  %d)  Iie'6e  mci'nen  33a'tcr,  I  love  my  father ; 

mei'nen  ^x'ttv  is  the  object. 

Exceptions : 

1.  When  a  stress  is  laid  upon  the  object,  it  may  be  placed 
at  the  beginning  of  the  sentence  ;  as,  2)cn  Jj3omer'  It'fr  id)  mtt 
SBevgmVgCU  ltnl>  35eroun'&mtng,  Homer  I  read  with  pleasure 
and  admiration. 

2.  In  certain  cases  the  verb  is  removed  to  the  end  of  the 
sentence  ;  *  then  the  object  naturally  comes  before  it. 

RULE    III. 

The  Substantive  in  the  Genitive  case,  not  being  the  object,f 


*  See  Book  II.  Ch.  5.  §  2. 

f  The  genitive  may  be  the  object,  viz.  when  it  is  governed 
by  the  verb.     See  Book  II.  Ch.  5.  §  1.  F.  Rule  n. 


CH.  2.  §  2.]  SYNTAX  OF  THE  NOUN.  193 

generally  stands  after  the  word   by  which   it  is  governed ;  as, 
t>Ci*  ©Ofyn  mci'ncS  gveun'betf,  the  son  of  my  friend. 

But  it  is  found, 

1.  Before  the  substantive   that  governs  it,  when  it  bears  an 

emphasis.  2>e6  ^a'tcvi?  @c'gcn  bau'et  ben  fttu'Dcvu  Jpdufer, 
a'bcv  ton  SDfott'tcr  §fud)  reiffet  fie  nie'ber,  A  father's  blessing 

builds  houses  for  the  children,  but  a  mother's  curse  pulls  them 
down. 

When  the  noun  in  the  genitive  precedes  the  governing 
word,  the  latter  loses  its  article  ;  for  example,  Dc£  k'benS 
Sl'CU'&C;  life's  joy ;  for,  bie  gxcu'bc  &C6  it'btnti,  the  joy  of  life. 
It  may  happen  that  the  governing  word,  though  put  after  the 
genitive,  keeps  the  article  ;  but  then  the  genitive  is  deprived 
of  it;  as,  3JoIf$  Die  3Kcng'e,  a  multitude  of  people;  gxcu'be 
Ik  guile,  abundance  of  joy.  This,  however,  is  not  to  be 
extended  beyond  the  phrases  established  by  custom. 

The  position  of  the  genitive,  before  the  governing  word, 
should  be  easy  and  unaffected ;  otherwise  it  is  better  to  leave 
that  case  in  its  natural  place.  Thus  two,  or  more,  genitive 
cases,  when  transposed,  produce  a  heavy  and  unharmonious 
sound,  as  in  this  example  ;  betf  gfO'ftn  spi)ilofo'pfyen  ftant 
ie'ben;  better  thus,  batf  Se'fccn  beg  gvofen  spfyilcfo'pljcn  ftant, 

the  life  of  the  great  philosopher  Kant.  And  it  is  worse, 
when  of  two  genitives,  before  a  third  word,  one  governs  the 
other ;  as,  t>c6  fto'lligS  bet*  granf'en  Sftft'lUttlg,  instead  of  bie 
^fO'ltUUg  tt$  ft&'nigg  bet*  grailf  CU,  the  coronation  of  the  king 
of  the  Franks. 

2.  Before  adjectives  ;  as,  bet?  33erl*reci*7cni?  fc^ltl'&tg/  guilty 
of  the  crime  ;  beg  io'bctf  nnVbtg,  worthy  of  the  praise  ;  bet* 
©OV'ge  iin'wevtl',  undeserving  of  the  care. 

3.  Before  some  prepositions. 


* 


RULE  IV. 


The  Dative  has  its  place   commonlv  after  the  verb,  and  if 
there  be   an   accusative  case  besides,  it  generally  depends  on 

*  See  Book  II.  Ch.  7.  §  2. 
17 


194  SYNTAX  OF  THE  NOUN.  [BOOK  II. 

emphasis  or  euphony  whether  the  dative  or  accusative  is  to  be 
put  first.  The  emphasis  is  generally  on  the  last  word.  Ex. 
£t  gtbt  t>cm  SDtan'iie  MS  25uc(),  He  gives  the  book  to  the  man, 
or  £v  gtbt  M$  25ucl)  Dcm  Sttan'ne. 

When  it  is  to  be  marked  with  peculiar  emphasis,  it  should 
be  moved  from  its  place,  and  stand  before  the  verb :  as,  2)cm 
sD?an'ne  gibt  CV  t>at?  SSltd).  If  the  object  be  a  monosyllable,  or 
a  short  word,  and  the  dative  case  consist  of  more  syllables,  the 
former  should  be  put  first,  because  a  long  word  commonly 
finishes  the  sentence  better  than  a  short  one  ;  for  example,  Qsr. 
fctg'tc  fcicS  fccm  'iBa'tcr,  He  told  this  to  the  father. 

RULE  V. 

Two  accusatives  are  sometimes  used  after  the  same  verb, 
one  expressing  a  person,  and  the  other  a  thing.  The  former 
is  then  placed  in  the  same  manner  as  the  dative,  according  to 
the  preceding  rule.     Examples  :  3d)  ttCU'tte  t>en  SDfanil  grcimfc, 

I  call  the  man  friend ;  3d)  fyei'fe  ei'iwn  fol'djen  SDTann  ci'nen 
£c(t>eu,  I  call  such  a  man  a  hero ;  ©V  Icljvt  fcetl  ©Cttvpro'ntutf 
OtC  SHcdj'cnfuttjt,  He  teaches  Sempronius  arithmetic. 

When  the  subject,  the  object,  and  the  case  of  person  meet 
together,  either  before  or  after  the  verb,  they  commonly  follow 
in  this  order :  subject,  case  of  person,  object.  For  example, 
before  the  verb  ;  £>a  UX  gctfc'fyctT  fcCttt  gchl'&e  t>CU  grie'&Ctt 
an'gcbotcu  l)at,  Since  the  general  has  offered  peace  to  the  ene- 
my. After  the  verb ;  2luf  fcie'fe  c2Bcife  tm-fdjaff'te  gafav  fei'* 
nen  gvcun'&cu  (Semtg'ttymmg  uut>  benatjm'  fei'nen  getn'fccn af'le 
Jfjoff'mmg  jur  §Had)'e,  In  this  manner  Caesar  procured  satisfac- 
tion for  his  friends,  and  deprived  his  enenues  of  all  hope  of 
revenge. 

RULE  VI. 

The  Dative  and  Accusative  cases  stand  before  the  adjec- 
tives,* by  which  they  are  governed.! 

RULE  VII. 

The  Vocative  case  may  be  put  either  before  or  after  the 
verb,  at  the  option  of  the  speaker. 

*  See  Book  II.  Ch.  3.  §  1.  Rule  v.  —  2  and  3. 
f  Compare  Book  II.  Ch.  3.  §  2.  Rule  n. 


CH.  3.  §  1.]  SYNTAX  OF  THE  ADJECTIVE.  195 

Exercises. 

Give  me  the  book.  Such  men  I  like.  The  fruits  of  the 
earth.     Love's  labor  is  in  vain.     He  is  tired  of  life. 

He  mentioned  it  to  me  afterward,  but  to  her  he  entrusted 
it  first. 

When  they  had  told  me  every  thing,  I2  appointed1  them  a 
time  of  meeting. 

to  give,  ge'bttt/  irr.  to  mention,  ertt&fy'ltcn. 

book,  *£$udj,  n.  3.  b.  c.  afterwards,  fpd'tevfytn. 

such,  fot'cvjcv-c-cs.  but,  a'bcv. 

man,  *93?amt,  3.  l\  c.  to  entrust,  Vcrtrau'en. 

to  like,  (te'beit,  first,  jUCfjV. 

fruit,  "gvudjt,  /.  1.  fc.  when,  nad)t>cm'. 

earth,  <£?'$t,  f.  every  thing,  al'k$. 

love,  hc'fce,  /.  to  tell,  fa'gen. 

labor,  %yiu't)t,  f.  to  appoint,  bcjtim'meu. 

in  vain,  UttlfOttjt'.  time,  3eit,  f.l.h. 

life,  k'bm,  n.  3.  a.  meeting,  jSufam'mcnftmft,/.  1. 

tired,  u'krfcvufffg.  (Gen.) 


CHAPTER  III. 
ADJECTIVES. 

§  1.  AGREEMENT  AND  GOVERNMENT. 
RULE  I. 

Every  adjective  may  be  used,  not  only  as  such,  to  qualify  a 
noun,  as,  tic  fyo'fye  Ut'mc,  the  high  elm;  but  also  as  an  adverb, 
to  qualify  either  a  verb,  or  another  adjective ;  as,  Xue'fc  spjlau'je 
road)\\  (ang'fam,  This  plant  grows  slowly  ;  cin  grun&'ltd)  gekfyt'- 
ttt  SDtauU/  a  thoroughly  learned  man. 

RULE  II. 

Every  adjective  when  used  in  its  declinable  form  must  agree 
with  its  substantive  in  gender,  number,  and  case. 


196  SYNTAX  OF  THE  ADJECTIVE.  [BOOK   II. 

This  rule  applies  to  the  adjective  not  only  in  its  first,  or 
positive,  state,  but  also  in  the  degrees  of  comparison.  The 
substantive  is  sometimes  understood,  yet  the  agreement  re- 
mains :  for  example,  t>er  gu'te  SQiann,  unt>  fccr  bo'fe  (WHann 

understood),  the  good  man,  and  the  bad  (man) ;  t)Ctl  JU)Mf  tetl 
bU'ftti  SDTo'natCit,  the  twelfth  of  this  month  (iag,  day,  under- 
stood) ;  95effere  SOlcn'fcljcn,  t)tt%'li<btn  im&  trtu'ert  fya'be  icfy 
lUV'gen&S  gcfuu'fccn,  Better  men,  more  hearty  and  faithful  ones, 
I  have  nowhere  found. 

RULE    III. 

Every  adjective  must  be  used  in  its  declinable  form,  when- 
ever it  is  in  its  natural  position,  i.  e.  immediately  before  the 
substantive  which  it  qualifies.  The  substantive  itself  may  be 
either  expressed  or  understood.  Examples  :  t>Cl*  tcip'fcvc  3Q?anit, 
the  brave  man;  ei'UC  ro'ttyc  SKo'jC/  a  red  rose;  t>te  frci'Clt  im& 
gU'tCU  Sftf'geV/  the  free  and  good   citizens  ;  ©r   tttjUitf   ei'ne 

2Cnfn>ovt,  a'bcv  ntefjt  ei'ne  genefy'mtgenfcc, fon'fcmt  cine  ab'fct)(a= 
5CU&C  CZtut'roovt  understood),  He  received  an  answer,  yet  not  a 
permitting  but  a  refusing  one. 

In  all  other  cases  the  adjective  is  used  in  its  simple,  inde- 
clinable form  ;  as,  Me  SSfur'ger,  gut  Mllfc  fl'Ct,  the  citizens, 
good  and  free  ;  2)ev  SDfcinit  iff  tap'feir,  The  man  is  brave  ;  £>ie 
gvuclj'tc  wefDctt  vetf,  The  fruits  become  ripe;  @te  mtjftm  fid) 
tap'fer,  They  defended  themselves  bravely. 

RULE  IV. 

Cardinal  numbers  are  generally  not  declined,  except  (in, 
ei'ne,  till,  or  li'MV,  ei'ne,  ei'tlt?;  one,  and  the  other  cardinal 
numbers  when  they  do  not  stand  before  nouns  but  take  the 
place  of  nouns ;  as,  (Sr  fvtfyrt  Xtlit  toitV  Spfcr'&Cll,  He  drives  with 
four  horses  ;  <£x  fdt)l*t  mit  fcie'ren,  He  drives  with  four.  (Sin, 
ei'ne,  eiu,  is  used  when  it  precedes  a  noun ;  as,  3d)  £ auf  te  etil 
spfllUfc  $uVttt,  I  bought  one  pound  of  sugar :  ei'netr,  ei'ne, 
ci'netf,  is  used  when  it  takes  the  place  of  a  noun  ;  as,  3d) 
ftlllfte  nut'  ei'llCS  (or  etnS),  I  bought  only  one. 

RULE   V. 

Some  adjectives  govern  cases. 

1.  The  following  adjectives,  most  of  which  are  in  English 


CH.  3.  §  1.]  SYNTAX  OF  THE  ADJECTIVE.  197 

followed  by  of,  govern  the  genitive  ;  bcoiivf tig,  in  want  of; 
6eu6'tl)tgt,  in  need  of;  octmtp',  conscious,  (with  the  reciprocal 
dative,  and  the  genitive  of  the  object ;  as,  3d)  bin  mil*  bet  ©adVc 
Hid)t  bcnw|ft',  I  am  not  conscious  of  that  thing)  ;  cin'gcocnlf, 
mindful ;  fd'tjig,  capable  of,  (it  is  also  joined  with  the  prepo- 
sition ju) ;  ffOt),  glad,  satisfied,  (also  with  the  prep,  il'itt,  and 
the  accusative)  ;  gcwcit)l*'/  informed  of,  aware  of,  (also  with  the 
accusative :  it  generally  occurs  with  the  verb  nw'&CU,  to  be- 
come ;  as,  (£r  toavo  ttt  ©efatyr'  [genitive],  or,  Die  ©efafyv'  [ac- 
cusative], gcn>a^r'/  He  perceived  the  danger)  ;  gcttdt'tig,  ex- 
pecting;  gCHUfj'/  certain  ;  gcrcofynt',  accustomed  to,  (also  with 
the  accusative) ;  frtu'Dig,  skilled  in,  experienced  in  ;  IDS,  free 
from,  rid  of;  tttdctytig,  in  possession  of;  mu'De,  tired  of;  quitt, 
rid  of ;  fatt,  tired  of ;  fdnd'Otg,  guilty  :  t^cil'^aft,  partaking  of ; 
u'bci'Dritpg,  tired  with ;  fcero&dj'tig,  suspected  ;  berltff ttg, 
having  forfeited  or  lost;  tooll,  full  of,  (also  with  botl)  ;*  mttif, 
worth,  deserving  ;  toftr'oig,  worthy  ;  and  the  negatives  corres- 
ponding to  these  adjectives,  as,  un'nmv&ig,  unttmoig,  Wll's 
fccnmp,  un'geroofynt,  un'fdl)ig,  &c. 

2.  The  following  adjectives,  most  of  which  are  in  English 
followed  by  to,  govern  the  dative  case ;  dtyn'licl),  like,  re- 
sembling ;  an'gCUtejfen,  adapted,  suitable ;  an'gciicbm,  agree- 
able; bcfrmnt',  known  to  ;  bcqucm',  convenient;  bang'c,  anx- 
ious, fearful,  (as,  SDtir  \\\  bang'c,  I  am  fearful) ;  befcfe&er'ftd), 
troublesome  :  Dicu'ltd),  serviceable  ;  furd)t'bar,  formidable  ; 
gcfyof'fam,  obedient  ;  gemdf}',  suited  to  ;  getrcu',  faithful : 
gCWO'gClt,  inclined  to,  favorable ;  gfctcl),  like ;  ntftjt,  near ; 
fcevroanot',  related  to ;  !t6'tfyig,  necessary ;  intfc'lid),  useful : 
fd)dD'(id),  hurtful ;  Jlt'trdglid),  conducive,  useful  ;  and  others, 
signifying  advantage,  or  disadvantage. — In  many  instances, 
the  above  adjectives  take  after  them  prepositions  governing 
their  appropriate  cases ;  such  as,  fuv,  for  ;  ge'gcn,  towards, 
against ;   ju,  to,  &c. 

3.  Those  which  imply  measure,  weight,  age,  value,  gen- 
erally with  a  numeral  preceding,  require  the  accusative,  and 
are  put  after  the  noun  in  their  simple  (indeclinable)  form.     Of 


*  Sometimes  the  substantive,  dependent  on  V»c(I,  remains 
undeclined  after  it ;  as,  Doll  SOlllt^/  instead  of  3Rtt't(e6;  full 
of  courage. 

17* 


198  SYNTAX  OF  THE  ADJECTIVE.  [BOOK  II. 

this  kind  are  (ang,  long;  brctt,  broad;  fyodj,  high;  tief,  deep; 
gVOS,  great;  fcljrocr,  heavy;  ait,  old  ;  WXtij,  worth;  fc()n('t>ig, 
indebted,  owing.  For  example  :  jcfyn  §U$  (ang,  ten  feet  long; 
ptbif  $Pfun&  fdjwcr,  weighing  twelve  pounds;  funfjig  %at)V 
ait,  fifty  years  old;  tV(i  itya'ia  mxty,  worth  three  dollars; 
(Er  ijt  t)tc(  (Sc(D  fc()U(^igrHe  owes  a  great  deal  of  money.  Sang, 
joined  in  this  manner  to  words  denoting  time,  expresses  dura- 
tion :  as,  jeijlt  3<tfyte  (ang,  for  ten  years ;  ci'ne  $tit  (ang,  for  a 
time. 

Observations.  (1.)  The  cardinal  numbers,  and  the  words 
i)ic(,  much  or  many,  and  wc'llig,  little  or  few,  govern  the 
genitive  ;  and  are  always  put  after  it.  They  are  frequently 
combined  with  the  personal  pronouns  ;  as,  tltl'fer  &tt>o(f, 
twelve  of  us ;  cn'Cl'  jwan'jig,  twenty  of  you  ;  ifyr'er  fcrei'flg, 
thirty  of  them:  lin'ftt  tne'le,  many  of  us;  ty'ttt  roe'ntge,  few  of 
them. 

(2.)  The  word  all,  in  English,  commonly  has  the  definite 
article  after  it;  as,  all  the  world. — %i\,  in  German,  is  com- 
monly without  the  article ;  as,  ai'U  ^dt,  all  the  world ;  al'= 
(e$  ©c(t>,  all  the  money.  There  is  only  one  construction  in 
which  this  word  requires  the  article,  namely,  before  possessive 
pronouns,  when  used  substantively ;  as,  al'(c  t>ie  ^Dtci'nigen, 
all  my  friends ;  a('(e£  t>a£  Un'fvige,  all  we  possess.  The  article 
may  also  stand  before  adjectives,  which  are  employed  as  sub- 
stantives; as,  ai'U  t>te  (Sll'ttn,  all  the  good  people ;  a('(c6  t>a$ 
23o fc,  all  the  evil.  Otherwise  it  is  not  necessary,  except  when 
a  relative  follows,  nor  even  then  always  ;  as,  ai'U  t>ic  nac()'« 
t()Ct(igcn  gorgftt,  V0(i'd)(  fcavaitS'  cntjtan'DClt,  all  the  disadvan- 
tageous consequences,  which  arose  from  it.  The  truth  is  that 
in  the  instances  first  adduced,  the  article  should  not  be  con- 
sidered as  belonging  to  ai'U,  but  to  the  possessive  pronouns. 
—  '#((  sometimes  follows  the  word  to  which  it  belongs  :  for 
example,  tie  SBei'fpiefc  ai'U,  all  the  examples;  t>ic  ^fyr&'nctt 
al'(c,  all  the  tears;  VOn  t>Clt  iVLu'tgClt  aClcn,  of  all  the  rest: 

fcic'fes  aClcs,  all  this,  for  ai'U$  fcic'fes ;  M$  ai'its,  for  Mt$ 

t>a$,  all  that.  It  is  always  put  after  the  personal  and  relative 
pronouns  ;  as,  tt)iv  ai'U,  all  of  us  ;  flc  ai'U,  all  of  them  ;  Me 
hu'tt  n?cl'd)C  ai'U  jugc'gen  ttNl'mt,  the  people  who  all  were 
present. 


CH.  3.  §  2.]  SYNTAX  OF  THE  ADJECTIVE. 

Exercises. 


199 


After  Alfred  the  Great,  succeeded  his  son,  Edward  the 
elder. 

The  Romans,  brave  in  war,  and  wise  in  their  legislation. 

Ten  dollars  Saxon  money  are  eighteen  florins  Rhenish. 

Although  conscious3  of1  his1  guilt2,  he5  was4  incapable  of 
remorse. 

It  is  pleasant  to  the  eye,  but  dangerous  to  the  soul. 

Three  good  leagues  off. 

He  pleased  all  of  us. 

They  are  stirring  {stir  themselves)  by  thousands. 


after,  nac().  (Dat.) 

great,  gvo£. 

to  succeed,  fof'gCH. 

son,  ©ofytt,  m.  3.  b.  6. 

old,  Hit 

the  Roman,  t>Cf  SHS'inCi:. 

brave,  tap'fcv. 

in,  im.  (Dat.) 

war,  £vicg,  m.  3.  b.  b. 

wise,  roei'fe. 

in,  in.  (Dat) 

legislation,     ©cfc^'gcbuug,   /. 

1.  t>. 
dollar,  ^fya'fcr,  m.  3.  a.  a. 
Saxon,  @dd)'ftfc(). 
florin,  (Bill  fcCtt/  m.  3.  a.  a. 


Rhenish,  9tl)ei'iufd), 

although,  nneroofyk 

guilt,  <gd)u(t>,  f.  1.  D. 

conscious,  bcftntfft'. 

incapable,  un'fdtyig. 

remorse,  SHcit'e,  /.  1. 

pleasant,  an'gcnefym. 

but,  a7 bar. 

dangerous,  gefdfyf'lid). 

good,  gut. 

league,  ©tttU^C,  /.  1.  C. 

off,  wett. 

to  please,  gefal'leU/  irr.  (Dat.) 

to  stir,  fid)  thtyvtXU 

by,  ju.  (Z>af.) 


§  2.    ARRANGEMENT. 


RULE  I. 


The  place  of  the  adjective  is  before  the  substantive ;  as, 
&ei*  fdj&'lte  £ag,  the  fine  day. 

Except : 

1.  When  it  is  joined  to  a  proper  name,  as  a  title  of  distinc- 
tion ;  as,  Start  bet  Stitb'ne,  Charles  the  Bold ;  Sttcjran'&cr  t>er 
(Svo'fC/  Alexander  the  Great. 


200  SYNTAX  OF  THE  ADJECTIVE.  [BOOK  Ii. 

2.  When  it  is  connected  with  the  substantive  by  a  verb  ;  in 
this  case  the  adjective  is  put  after  the  verb ;  as,  2)ci*  50taun  ijt 
gltt ;  or  before  it  with  an  emphasis,  (Silt  ift  Dcv  93iann. 

3.  When  the  adjective  stands  as  it  were  in  apposition  to 
the  noun ;  for  example,  t>cv  £c(t>,  nt&cft'ttg  im  gef'fcc  UU& 
lt>et'fe  im  5Ka'tt)C,  the  hero,  powerful  in  the  field,  and  wise  in 
the  council.  This  stands  for  wi'dw  m&cfc'tig  im  gd'fce,  imfc 
roci'fc  im  SHa'tfye  i\\,  who  is  powerful  in  the  field,  and  wise  in 
the  council. 

4.  Adjectives  derived  from  names  of  places  and  countries 
are,  in  certain  phrases,  put  after  substantives  ;  as,  £c()n  spfuut) 
Qntg'Ufd),  ten  pounds  English;  jwan'jig  Wftaxt  hVkdtfd), 
twenty  marks  of  Lubeck  ;  Ijim'&ert  gu$>  §Ktycin/l&n&ifd)/  one 
hundred  feet  Rhenish. 

RULE  II. 

The  numerals  are  placed  before  other  adjectives,  preced- 
ing a  substantive  ;  as,  3)m  QU'te,  cfyt'ltdje  SDicn'fdjen,  three 
good,  honest  men. 

When  cardinal  and  ordinal  numbers  meet  before  a  substan- 
tive, it  depends  on  the  emphasis,  which  of  them  is  to  be  put 
first :  whether,  for  instance,  it  be,  fcic  fcvei  CV'ftCn,  the  three 
first ;  or,  t»ie  CV'ftcit  M'Ci,  the  first  three.  This  applies  also  to 
the  words,  t)ie  an'&evn,  the  others,  t>ic  (cfc'ten,  the  last,  and 
generally  to  adjectives  in  the  superlative  degree,  which  may 
be  put  either  before  or  after  the  cardinals.  Examples,  t>ie 
fcvet  leg'ten,  or,  t>te  Ufytcn  t>t*ei,  the  three  last;  fcte  flier  an1- 
fcern,  or,  Die  anfcern  flier,  the  other  four ;  tic  fed) 6  kef' ten, 
or,  Die  fcef'ten  fcd)S,  the  six  best;  t>tc  jetyu  fc^on'ttcn,  or,  tuc 
fd)6n/|U,n  $et)n,  the  ten  finest.  It  is  to  be  noticed  that  the 
emphasis,  in  these  instances,  falls  upon  the  word,  which  is 
put  last.  —  The  words  cd'le,  all ;  man'd)e,  several ;  flie'Ie, 
many;  je'&er,  each,  stand  before  both  the  numerals,  and  the 
adjectives. 

RULE    III. 

Adjectives  usually  follow  the  cases  they  govern  ;  as,  bic'fet 
(Ety'rc  roiV&tg,  worthy  of  this  honor  ;  Dctf  33 cr bred) 'ntt?  frijttP&ig, 
guilty  of  the  crime  ;  fcem  SBvVtCf  dl)U lid),  like  the  father ;  JcJ)U 
fel'lcn  (dug,  ten  yards  long  ;  fcrei  §11$  bvcit,  three  feet  broad  ; 


CH.  4.  §  ].]         SYNTAX  OF  THE  PRONOUN.  201 

fcrf)6  spfmtt)  fitter,  weighing  six  pounds.  They  are  likewise 
frequently  put  after,  when  they  are  connected  with  nouns  that 
are  governed  by  prepositions ;  as,  (£6  \\l  juv  UntCirfyal'tUUg  fef)V 
nft§'(k(),  It  is  very  useful  for  entertainment ;  ©clfyVjufriefccnfyeit 
tft  JUV  ©luct'fe'ttgfcit  nncntbefyr'ltcl),  Self-content  is  indispensa- 
bly necessary  to  happiness. 

Exercises. 

An  old  man,  as  vigorous  and  active  as  a  youth. 

Their  attacks  were  violent,  but  calm  was  his  reply. 

Six  beautiful,  spirited  horses. 

The  three  most  dangerous. 

Many  honest  men. 

Tired  of  the  confusion.     Recollecting  his  menaces. 

old,  alt.  reply,  llnt'WCVt,  f. 

as,  e'benfo.  beautiful,  fd)cn. 

vigorous,  ft'dfttg.  spirited,  fcu'rig. 

active,  tfyd'ttg.  horse,  SKof},  n.  3.  b.  (j. 

as,  ate.  dangerous,  gefdtyf'licf). 

youth,  Sftng'Thta,,  m.  honest,  efyvliclj. 

attack,  Tfn'griff,  m.  3.  b.  i\  confusion,  'iBevnnv'tung,  /. 

violent,  fycf  tig.  tired,  u'bevfcvufftg. 

but,  a'bcr.  menace,  SX-o'bung,  /.  1.  fc. 

calm,  gclaf fen.  recollecting,  cin'gc&enf. 


CHAPTER  IV. 

PRONOUNS. 

§    1.    AGREEMENT  AND  GOVERNMENT. 
RULE  I. 

Pronouns  agree  with  the  substantives  to  which  they  are 
prefixed,  in  gender,  number,  and  case ;  and  the  relative  cor- 
responds with  the  antecedent  substantive  to  which  it  belongs, 
in  gender  and  number,  the  case  depending  upon  other  cir- 
cumstances ;  as,  (Slau'bct  un$,  eu'rett  gmm'fccn,  fce'ren  liuf - 

tidjttgfeit  ifyl*  hnilt,  Believe  us,  your  friends,  whose  sincerity 
you  know.  Here,  the  genitive  bc'rcn,  whose,  depends  upon 
ilufficljtig'feit,  sincerity. 


202  SYNTAX  OF  THE  PRONOUN.  [BOOK  II. 

The  personal  pronouns  are  not  combined  with  substantives, 
as  the  others  are,  but  only  bear  a  reference  to  them,  and,  in 
that  reference,  they  agree  with  them  in  number,  and  the  third 
also  in  gender;  as,  %d)  will  CU(()  UHt)  ifym  glcicl)  VOOtji,  {literally, 
I  will  to  you  and  to  him  equally  well),  I  am  equally  a  friend 
to  you  and  to  him.  This  is  likewise  to  be  observed  of  pronouns 
demonstrative  and  interrogative,  when  they  stand  by  them- 
selves ;  and  the  connexion  between  the  relative,  and  its  ante- 
cedent, is  of  a  similar  description;  as,  ^el'clKV  fcon  bei'fccit 
fyat  CS  gcfagt'  ?  Which  one  of  the  two  has  said  it?  Scv'jcuigc, 
WCi'd)W  fell'  gCgemVbcr.  ft§t.  The  one  who  sits  opposite  to  you. 

Observations.  —  1.  Speaking  of  any  inanimate  object,  the 
English  use  the  neuter  of  the  pronoun  of  the  third  person,  it, 
all  such  objects  being  considered  as  of  the  neuter  gender  ; 
the  Germans,  having  three  distinct  genders,  even  for  lifeless 
things,  apply  the  pronouns  accordingly.  J£JtCt*  i)\  Ctn  tlCU'Ci* 
§Ut,  Here  is  a  new  hat;  <£v  ift  fefyl*  few,  (He)  It  is  very  fine; 
<2Bo  fya'ben  @te  ifytt  gcfrutft7  ?  Where  did  you  buy  (him)  it?  Jput 
is  of  the  masculine  gender  ;  therefore,  the  masculine  pronoun 
appertains  to  it.  So,  SH31C  gefallt'  Sfy'ucn  biefe  ^tt'tcnmg  ? 
How  do  you  like  this  weather?  ©ie  i\l  fefyi*  un'attgcucfym, 
(She)  It  is  very  unpleasant.  The  personal  pronoun  is  in  the 
feminine  gender,  on  account  of  the  substantive.  2)a£  spfeib 
gefyt  vcdjt  gut,  a'bcr  e$  ift  JU  fyif  Jtg,  The  horse  goes  very  well, 
but  it  is  too  fiery.  The  neuter,  C6,  it,  is  used  because  I>a6 
spfct'b  is  of  that  gender. 

2.  The  personal,  or  reflective,  or  reciprocal  pronoun,  in  the 
dative  case,  with  the  definite  article  after  it,  frequently  supplies 
the  office  of  a  possessive  pronoun  ;  as,  Si*  nunf'te  tfym  mit  bcv 
JfJCMD/  He  beckoned  to  him  with  Ms  hand;  %d)  fya'bc  mil*  ba£ 
23etU  foervenff,  I  have  sprained  my  leg;  Qri;  tyat  ft  ct)  bcit  J?al£ 
ab'gefcljnittcn,  He  has  cut  his  throat;  ©tc  mact)'cn  ftcfy  t>a£ 
Wbm  fau'ev,  They  embitter  each  other's  life. 

3.  A  demonstrative  pronoun  or  an  equivalent  adjective,  is 
sometimes  preferred  to  the  pronoun  of  the  third  person,  espe- 
cially in  the  oblique  cases,  for  the  sake  both  of  distinction,  and 
of  sound.  When  a  nearer  object  is  alluded  to,  b'w'fcv,  or  ber 
Ic£'tCt*C,  the  latter,  is  used ;  when  a  distant  one,  jt'nn,  or  bet* 
Ct'ftevc,  the  former ;  or  the  whole  sentence  is  changed.  Exam- 
ples :  hti'fe  wax  bet  ftavoti'ue  auf  SJcfncl)',  ate  flc  bte  Utacfo'vidjt 


CH.  4.  §  1.]         SYNTAX  OF  THE  PRONOUN.  203 

Ct'fyictt',  Louisa  was  on  a  visit  to  Caroline,  when  she  received 
the  news.  In  this  case,  ffc  may  refer  either  to  Louisa,  or  to 
Caroline ;  and  therefore,  if  we  mean  the  former,  it  is  better  to 
use  jc'nc;  and  if  the  latter,  bicfc;  instead  of  the  ambiguous 
[ic.  2)ic  £Kad)'ficl)t/  Me  er  ifym  jetg'tc,  roar,  fcin  ^crc-cr'bcn,  The 
indulgence  he  showed  him  was  his  ruin.  If  in  this  instance 
we  mean  the  ruin  of  the  person  to  whom  the  indulgence  was 
shown,  it  would  be  better,  instead  of  fcin  ^CffcCV'bcn,  to  say 
fcat?  33cf&Ct'kn  DCS  UtyttVttl,  the  ruin  of  the  latter ;  but  if  we 
refer  to  the  one  who  showed  indulgence,  we  say,  t>a£  'SJcv&CV* 
kn  &CS  cr'jtcrcn,  the  ruin  of  the  former. 

SDcrfcl'bc  is  sometimes  substituted  for  a  personal  pronoun  ; 
as,  933cnn  man  rue  @alj'anflcfmtg  nod)  mcfyr  erfyi^t',  fo  l)cr- 
tmn'jtct  Mefcl'bc,  or  fie,  If  we  heat  the  solution  of  salt  still 
more,  it  evaporates.* 

4.  The  genitive  case  of  the  demonstrative  pronoun,  fcer, 
t)ic,  t>a£,  viz.  fccf'fcn,  M'Xtn,  t)Cf  fen,  in  the  singular,  and  DC'rcr 
or  DC'vcn,  in  the  plural,  is  put  instead  of  the  possessive,  to 
avoid  confusion  ;  for  example,  (Tl'CCVO  (ic£  DtC  9O?tt't)CVfd)n>0; 
renen  bc$  Katili'na  in  fcef'fen  ipan'fc  ergrci'fen,  Cicero  ordered 
the  accomplices  of  Catiline  to  be  seized  in  his  (Catiline's) 
house.  Here  Dcffcn  stands  for  fctncm,  and  prevents,  at  once, 
all  misconception  ;  but  fct'nem,  his,  might  be  referred  to  Cic- 
ero. £>cr  Scn'fnl  roan&'te  fid)  an  dch  <§>tmt',  rrcil  cr  auf  bffs 
fen  50tlltfy  trait'tc,  The  consul  applied  to  the  senate,  because 
he  trusted  to  its  (the  senate's)  courage.  If  it  were  fci'ncit/ 
his,  (@cnaf  being  of  the  masculine  gender,)  it  would  be  un- 
certain, whether  the  courage  of  the  consul,  or  that  of  the  sen- 
ate, was  intended. 

5.  It  has  been  observed,  already,  that  the  neuter  of  the  pro- 
noun of  the  third  person  often  begins  a  sentence,  in  connexion 

*  In  the  ceremonial  style  which  is  used  in  speaking  of  per- 
sons of  high  rank,  the  pronouns  fctcfcl'kn,  fyod)  fricfcUwn, 
tyodijt'Dtcfcttwn,  and  aUcrtyM)jVt>icfcl(?cn,  with  the  verb  in  the 
plural  after  them,  are  used  instead  of  the  personal  pronouns. 
The  words  fyocl),  high  ;  fy6d)fi,  highest.  ;  and  al(crt)6d)ft', 
highest  of  all,  with  which  Dicfd'kn  is  compounded,  mark 
the  degree  of  nobility  belonging  to  the  person  addressed,  or 
spoken  of. 


204  SYNTAX  OF  THE  PRONOUN.  [BOOK  II. 

with  a  noun  of  a  different  gender  and  number  ;  for  example, 
£6  ijt  cin  SDtomt,  It  is  a  man ;  (£$  i|t  ci'UC  gvait,  It  is  a  woman. 
(Si?  here  corresponds  with  a  masculine,  and  a  feminine. 
However,  the  English  language  admits  the  same  mode  of  ex- 
pression in  these  instances.  The  peculiarity  of  the  German 
appears  in  the  following  ;  £6  fint)  fcie'le  9JiCU'fd)en  t>a,  There 
are  many  people ;  (£g  vuft  fccr.  33a' til',  The  father  is  calling  ; 
(£$  torn 'men  itU'tt,  People  are  coining.  This  frequently 
answers  to  the  English  there  ;  as,  There  is  a  quarrel  in  the 
house ;  <£$  i\\  CtU  @tt*eit  ittl  <§au'ft ;  There  is  a  doubt  among 
the  learned,  &S  ift  cin  $mi'fd  iin'tCV  fcen  <Btki)t'ttn.  Some- 
times this  way  of  opening  a  sentence  is  calculated  to  give  it 
more  effect,  than  if  the  subject  itself  were  placed  at  the  be- 
ginning ;  for  the  attention  of  the  hearer  is  excited  by  the  ex- 
pectation of  the  word  which  is  to  follow.  It  is,  therefore,  often 
used  with  the  subjunctive  mood,  to  convey  a  forcible  senti- 
ment :  for  example,  &$  [c'bc  t>a£  ^a'tcvlant* !  (Long)  live  (the) 
our  country  !  gS  fom'mc  mil*  rci'ltCV  £U  na'fye !  Let  no  one  come 
too  near  me !  The  neuters  of  the  demonstrative  pronouns  are 
used  in  a  similar  manner;  as,  2)k6  (instead  of  fctc'fcS)  \\\  mciu 
gmmfc,  This  is  my  friend  ;  3e'nc$  meilt  geiltfc>,  That  is  my 
enemy ;  £>a£  ftttfc  ©ofoa'tcn,  Those  are  soldiers. 

6.  In  regard  to  the  manner,  in  which  the  two  relative  pro- 
nouns, n>cl'c()CV  and  fcer,  are  used,  it  may  here  be  remarked, 
that  the  genitive  of  fcev  is,  in  general,  preferred  to  that  of 
ttcl'djct*;  as,  2)ev  Wlann,  Deffen  id)  gefcadyte,  The  man  I 
mentioned  ;  2)ic  Sfy're,  fce'reu  cr  fo  rcur'tug  i|t,  The  honor  of 
which  he  is  so  deserving;  2)te  5D?aii  iter,  fce'ven  SBerMen'jle  fo 
groS  ftnt>,  Those  men,  whose  merits  are  so  great.  —  2)ei*  must 
be  made  use  of,  when  a  vocative  case  precedes  ;  as,   0   1£>XI, 

bev  bit  al'fes  mit  ^OBei^eit  t>enMfteft,  O  Thou,  who  governest 

all  things  with  wisdom.  The  repetition  of  the  personal  pro- 
noun, which,  in  such  instances,  is  necessary,  after  the  rela- 
tive t>ev,  gives  force  to  the  sentence. — The  particle  ate  is 
sometimes  found   before   VDtl'd)tV,   as   a  mere   expletive ;    3)if 

grem'fcen,  ate  n?el'd)e  cvjt  fuvj'lid)  fyier  an'scfommen  flirt,  The 
strangers,  who  have  but  lately  arrived  here.  Now  and  then 
it  may  have  an  explanatory  force,  similar  to  the  Latin  quippe 
qui,  but,  generally  speaking,  it  is  superfluous  and  improper. 

7.  The  relative  pronoun  roefdjcr,  Wel'dje,  mld)t$,  (or  fc>ev, 
tie,  feaS,)   is  used   in  preference  to  the  relative  pronoun  VOtv, 


CH.  4.  §  1.]        SYNTAX  OF  THE  PRONOUN.  205 

IMS,  if  the  object  to  which  it  relates  is  a  distinct  one  ;  but  if 
it  is  vague  or  only  vaguely  referred  to,  the  relative  pronoun 
WW,  n>a$,  should  be  used.  Examples  :  DCV  SDTami,  roc  I'd)  ci:  (or 
btv)  fcic'fe  "Xijat  gctfyau'  l)at,  the  man  who  has  done  this  deed: 
3>cl)  roeis  nicl)t  rocv  fcie'fe  i^u  getfyau'  M/ 1  know  not  who  has 
done  this  deed;  jEi'jtei:  von  bct'Dcn  mug  c$  gctbair  fya'ben,  a'&er 

id)  roeiS  ntd)t,  Wefdjer,  one  of  the  two  must  have  done  it,  but 
I  know  not  which  ;  Wits,  roaS  id)  fat),  geftet'  mil:,  All  (that)  I 
saw  pleased  me ;  al'Ic  hie  So'lcn,  vdcI'cI)c  fitr  Die  SBafyr'beit 
gcflor'pen  flllD,  all  the  excellent  (persons)  who  have  died  for 
the  truth. 

The  choice  between  the  two  interrogative  pronouns,  roc('d)CV, 
\T>ci'd)t,  roel'cbcS,  and  MX,  \va$,  depends,  in  the  same  manner, 
on  the  distinctness  or  indistinctness  of  the  object.     Examples  : 

§'ux  ftn&  t>m  C5cm&f'fce ;  roel'cljes  aefdllt'  t>tv  am  beften  ?  Here 

are  three  pictures;  which  do  you  like  best?  3£a£  tnetlift  Ctt  ? 
What  do  you  mean?  35ou  rocm  rc'ocft  t>lt  ?  Of  whom  do  you 
sDeak  ? 

8.  The  Relative  Pronoun  is,  in  English,  sometimes  omitted, 
and  understood  :  in  German  it  must  always  be  expressed ;  as, 
The  man  I  love,  2>cn  50?ann,  Dcu  (or  roc('d)cn)  id)  lie'be.  With 
and)  or  and)  im'incv,  following,  it  signifies  whoever,  whosoever, 
whatever,  whatsoever ;  as,  ^H3cv  and)  Dct*  5D?ann  fctn  mag, 
Whoever  may  be  the  man  ;  ^BaS  aud)  iin'mcr  Me  §&l'ge  fctn 
Wag,  Whatever  may  be  the  consequence. 

9.  The  Dative  Singular  of  the  Pronouns  of  the  first  and 
second  person,  mil',  Div,  is,  in  familiar  language,  often  inserted, 
merely  as  an  expletive:  X>lt  fcijt  mir  cm  fd)6'ncv  (Scfcl'fe,  Thou 
art  a  fine  fellow  ;  3d)  lobe  mil*  t>CU  StfyeiH'WDCilt,  I  give  the 
preference  to  Rhenish  wine ;  SDaS  wag  Ml*  Ct'llC  grcu'bc  QtVM'* 
)(n  fctn  !  That  must  have  been  a  (great)  joy  !  The  plural  is 
also  thus  found,  especially  in  the  second  person  :  £Da£  rear 
cud)  ci'uc  iuft !  That  was  a  pleasure  !  vDa6  H>ar  end)  ctu  geft ! 
That  was  a  festivity !  Or,  in  speaking  to  a  person  with  whom 
we  are  not  familiar,  3)aS  war  3»t)'iicit  ciu  §c|t  !  That  was  a  fes- 
tivity !  The  third  person  likewise  is  to  be  met  with  in  another 
connexion  ;  as,  Silt  ftrAttftt;  t>Cf  ifym  ffavfc',  One  of  his  pa- 
tients who  died  :  here  the  personal  tfytn,  to  him,  represents,  in 
fact,  the  possessive  his. 

10.  The  Possessive  Pronoun  is,  sometimes,  put  after  the 
genitive  case;  as,  ted  ^a'tevs?  feill  35ru'i;?r,  the  father's  his 

18 


206  SYNTAX  OF  THE  PRONOUN.  [BOOK  II. 

brother  ;  t>e$  ftna'tcn  fci'nc  SDTut'tCU,  the  boy's  his  mother  ; 
fcct*  §vau  it)?  &UID,  the  woman's  7*er  child,  instead  of  the 
father's  brother,  the  boy's  mother,  the  woman's  child.  In  these 
cases  the  addition  of  \i\\\,  fci'UC,  il)l*,  is  in  most  cases  useless 
and  inelegant,  and  ought  to  be  avoided. 

When,  in  English,  an  individual  object  of  possession  is  to 
be  indicated,  out  of  a  greater  number  of  the  same  kind,  the 
possessive  pronoun  absolute,  with  of  before  it,  is  placed  after 
the  substantive  ;  as,  a  friend  of  mine,  a  servant  of  yours,  an 
acquaintance  of  ours,  a  book  of  his.  In  German  this  must  be 
differently  expressed ;  as,  Sin  gmtno  Von  mil*,  a  friend  of 
me,  or  ©i'ncv  Von  met'nen  gmtnfecn,  one  of  my  friends :  (Sin 
•35eDicn'tet'  von  ims,  a  servant  of  us,  or  Qsi'net  Von  un'fevn  23e- 
iHCU'ten,  one  of  our  servants  ;    (Si'ncS  Von  fei'ncn  SSu'djevn, 

one  of  his  books ;  or  Shut*  mei'nev  grcun'&e ;  Si'ner  liu'fcm 
25et>ten'tm ;  Qst'ncs  met'nei*  S5iVdjer. 

11.  The  Demonstrative  fcic'fet,  Dte'fe,  t>ie'j>6/  may  relate  to 
what  is  past,  present,  or  future.  SMc'fe  0tacC)t  may  signify  this 
night,  that  is  to  say,  the  night  which  is  now  present,  or  which 
is  to  come,  and  also  last  night. 

12.  The  substantive  pronouns  et'ivatf,  something,  and  nid)t£, 
nothing,  are  sometimes  used  by  themselves ;  as,  (3\(b  ityltt 
ct'roaS,  Give  him  something  ;  (Sicb  il)m  ttidjttf,  Give  him  noth- 
ing. St'roatt  is  also  used  adjectively  before  nouns ;  as,  Ct'lVilS 
23v00,  some  bread  ;  and  adverbially  before  adjectives  and  ad- 
verbs ;  as,  (5i*  bcfano'  fid)  in  ei'ncv  ct'roas  mitj'Iidjen  $a'g?,  He 
found  himself  in  a  somewhat  uneasy  situation  ;  (£v  frcnimmt' 
ftd)  Ct'ttHlS  IMtn'&Cvlid),  He  conducts  (himself)  somewhat 
strangely.  2fttd)t6,  never  occurs  as  an  adjective  except  before 
an  adjective  in  the  neuter  gender  being  used  as  a  substantive  ; 

as,  (£6  i\\  nidjts  SBafy'rel  an  oic'fcm  feen'tcfe'te,  There  is  no 

truth  {literally  nothing  true)  in  this  report. 

13.  (Si'ltigc,  and  Ct/(id)C,  some,  joined  with  numerals,  denote 
an  undetermined  excess  of  the  number  mentioned  ;  as,  Ct'ntgC 
or  ct'Iid)C  aroan'Jtfli  spfltnD,  some  twenty  pounds,  that  is,  twenty 
odd  pounds.  When  prefixed  to  a  hundred,  or  a  higher  number, 
they  intimate  a  repetition  of  the  same  ;  as,  ci'nigc  (utt'Dftt 
93icn'fd)cn,  some  hundreds  of  men  ;  ct'ltd)C  trtlt'frttt)  ifya'Icr, 
some  thousands  of  dollars. 


CH.  4.  §  1.]        SYNTAX  OF  THE  PRONOUN.  207 

14.  %['U,  in  familiar  language,  signifies,  sometimes,  that  a 
thing  is  consumed,  finished,  that  nothing  of  it  is  left ;  as,  5)cv 
QGBem  \\\  al'le,  The  wine  is  finished  (all  gone)  ;  £>ic  Srft'freeven 
ftllb  oi'IC/  The  strawberries  are  eaten. 

Exercises. 

She,  the  youngest  of  the  three  sisters  whom  we  saw2  yes- 
terday1, deserves  all  the  praise  that  was5  bestowed4  on1  the1 
two2  others.3 

Here  are  the  portraits  ;  which  of  them  (do)  you2  like1  best? 

The  man  who  does3  his1  duty2,  despises  the  dangers  which 
surround2  him1. 

This  painting  is  better  than  that  which  you  have7  honored6 
with1  such3  a2  rich4  frame5. 

Which  of  the  two  suppositions  appears  to  you  most  probable, 
this  or  that  ? 

How  (do)  you2  find1  this  pen?  It  is  not  sufficiently2  pointed1. 

He  told  him  that  his  bills  of  exchange  had2  arrived1. 

After  they  had4  found3  the1  place2,  they6  searched5  it 
thoroughly. 

Is  this  or  that  one  the  gentleman  you  mentioned  ?  It  is 
neither  of  the  two. 

It  is  a  difficult  task. 

These  are  his  own  words. 

This  is  the  man  whose  works  we  all  so  much  admire. 

Is  he  a  relation  of  yours?  He  is  not  a  relation,  but  a  friend 
of  mine. 

Last  night  I2  dreamt1  I  was  walking  through  fifty  odd  rooms 
which  contained4  some1  millions2  of3  books3. 

Whatever  be4  the1  cause2  of3  it3,  I  shall  know4  it1  this2 
night3. 

young,  jtmg.  portrait,  35il&'ttifj,  ».  3.  b.  i\ 

sister,  @cl)WCf  ter,  /.  1.  C.  I  like,  mil*   gefMtf   (from  gc* 

yesterday,  gcf'tCVtt.  fallen,  to  please). 

to  see,  fe'fycn,  irr.  best,  am  kf'tCU. 

to  deserve,  tocvftie'ncn.  man,  3J?ann,  m.  3.  b.  c. 

praise,  $ob,  n.  3.  b.  duty,  spjttcl)t,  /.  1.  t>. 

on,  Dat.  to  do,  ttjlXW,  irr. 

the  other,  fcCV  an'fceve.  to  despise,  iHTacb'tCu. 

to  bestow,  ettfyei'krt.  danger,  ©cfafyr',  /.  1.  t>. 

here,  fytev.  to  surround,  umviUg'cn. 


208 


SYNTAX  OF  THE  PtfONOUN. 


[book  II. 


painting,  (ScttnU'&e,  n.  3.  a.  a. 

better,  bcffcr. 

than,  a(tf. 

with,  mit.  (Dat.) 

such,  fol'djer-e-es. 

rich,  fo|Vbar. 

frame,  Sftafy'mcn,  m.  3.  a.  a. 
to  honor,  beefy'ven. 
supposition,      SSonwS'fffcling, 

f.  1.  i>. 
to  appear,  fcljci'ncn. 
most,  am  mct'jh'u. 
probable,  roatyv'fcbcinliclj. 
or,  o'&ft*. 
how,  roti'. 

to  find,  ftn'&CU,  irr. 
pen,  gc'Dci,  /.  1.  C. 
not,  mc()t. 
pointed,  fptft. 
sufficiently,  gctlllg'. 
to  tell,  fa'gen.  (Dat.) 
that,  Cag. 
bill  of  exchange,  ^ccfy'fef,  m. 

3.  a.  A* 
to  arrive,  (M'f  Oitimcn,  irr.  (with 

fein.) 

after,  nacl)&em'. 


place,  ^Pfa^t,  m.  3.  b.  (\ 

to  search,  fcuvcbflt'clKU. 

thoroughly,  grimb'ttcl). 

gentleman,  £cw,  m.  2.  b. 

to  mention,  cvrodty'nen.  (Gen.) 

none,  tct'nci'. 

of,  \)0\\.  (Dat.) 

the  two,  bct'bc. 

difficult,  fd)it>ie'vig. 

task,  ZCc'beit,  f.  1.  t>. 

own,  ct'gcnci--c-c£. 

word,  QOBort,  ».  3.  b.  (\ 

work,  ^OBcvf,  rc.  3.  b.  6. 

much,  fefyv. 

to  admire,  fcenwu'Dcvn. 

relation,  ^CHMUb'tcr. 

but,  abet*. 

night,  9lacl)t,  /.  1.  6. 

I  dream,  tvaumt  mit. 

to  be  walking,  gC'fyCit,  irr. 

through,  Durd). 

room,  *@5cuueb',  n.  3.  b.  c. 

book,  *iBuc()/  n.  3.  b.  e, 

to  contain,  CiUtyal'teu,  irr. 

cause,  tlv'filcl)C,  f.  1 .  C. 

of  it,  fcafeon'. 

to  know,  cvfafy'rcn. 


§  2.    ARRANGEMENT. 

The  Pronoun  either  stands  in  the  room  of  a  substantive, 
or  is  connected  with  it  in  the  character  of  an  adjective ; 
and  has  accordingly  either  the  position  of  the  one  or  the 
other. 

Therefore,  when  used  substantively,  it  may  serve  as  the 
subject,  or  as  the  object,  in  a  sentence,  and  is  placed  accord- 
ingly. The  personal  pronouns  never  occur  otherwise  than  as 
substantives ;  and  the  demonstrative  pronouns  occasionally 
assume  this  character.  When  the  latter  are  employed  as  ad- 
jectives, they  occupy  the  place  of  the  article,  and  go  before 
any  other  .word,  that  may  be  joined  with  the  substantive  ;  as, 
2)tc'fc  Dvci  gu'feil  Ull'tt,  These  three  good  people  ;  3e'ttC  fold* 
eir'jUn   fap'fcvn   STOn'UCV,   Those   four  first   brave  men.     The 


CH.  4.  §  2.]        SYNTAX  OF  THE  PRONOUN.  209 

word  all,  however,  may  precede  them.  —  In  93a' tei*  tttt'fc**  our 
father,  which  is  the  beginning  of  the  Lord's  Prayer,  it  might 
seem,  as  if  the  possessive  were  put  after  the  substantive,  "33a'; 
ttv  ;  but  uu'fci*,  is  there  the  genitive  plural  of  the  pronoun  of 
the  first  person,  in  imitation  of  the  Greek. 

The  personal  pronoun,  in  the  accusative  case,  is  commonly 
put  before  the  dative  ;  as,  St*  gtbt  CS  mil*,  He  gives  it  to  me;  — 
eg,  the  accusative  case,  before  the  dative  miv.  <&d)ic'h  fie 
it)ttt,  Send  them  to  him;  —  fte,  them,  preceding  ifym,  to  him.* 
The  dative  is  found  before  the  object ;  as,  (£ib  mil*  e£ ;  but  not 
so  frequently  as  after  it ;  and  then  it  is  often  contracted  in 
familiar  language;  as,  mil*  CS,  into  mtVS,  t>iv  C6,  into  fcivS. 

Farther,  the  personal  pronoun,  in  the  dative,  or  accusative, 
is  sometimes  placed  before  the  subject,  when  the  verb  is  at 
the  end  of  the  sentence,  '■JBemi  mil*  &a$  ©Ificf  guu'ttta,  t|t,  If 
fortune  is  propitious  to  me ;  SBeil  bid)  Drill  SSa'tCi:  liebt,  Be- 
cause thy  father  loves  thee. 

The  relative  pronoun  has  its  place,  naturally,  at  the  begin- 
ning of  that  part  of  the  sentence,  to  which  it  belongs.  The 
word  ad  may  sometimes  stand  before  it. 

Exercises. 

Those  last  free  Romans. 

They  refused  it  to  him.     Grant  him  his  request. 

As  long  as  misfortune  persecuted  him. 

the  last,  bet*  le^'te.  request,  (Stflld)',  n.  3.  b.  6. 

free,  fret.  as  long  as,  fo  (ano/e  afc. 

Roman,  SftS'mcr,  m.  3.  a.  a.         misfortune,  ba<?  UU'glM, 
to  refuse,  roci'gent.  to  persecute,  ttcvfol'geu. 

to  grant,  gero&lj'tm 


Book  II.  Ch.  2.  §  2.  Rule  iv. 


18* 


210  SYNTAX  OP  THE  VERB.  [BOOK  II. 

CHAPTER  V. 
VERBS. 

§  1.  AGREEMENT  AND  GOVERNMENT. 

A.  Persons  and  Numbers. 

RULE  I. 

The  verb  must  agree  with  its  subject  in  number  and  per- 
son ;  as,  IBiv  Ue'Ben  itjn  n>ie  er  wis  geliebt'  tjut,  We  love  him 

as  he  has  loved  us. 

Observations. —  1.  When  the  verb  belongs  to  two  or  more 
substantives  of  the  singular  number,  it  is  commonly  put  in 
the  plural ;  as,  iu'bt,  $n§  imt>  ©i'fevfudjf  f(nt>  fycf  tige  Set'Den- 
fc()viftcn,  Love,  hatred,  and  jealousy,  are  violent  passions. 
Sometimes,  the  verb  stands  in  the  singular  after  two  or  more 
substantives  :  for  example,  SDtOfD  tint)  33evroiY|Utng  fyev'fcl)Ct 
tm  $ttn't>e,  Murder  and  destruction  reign  in  the  land.  It  is  a 
sort  of  elliptical   form,  which   should    be  thus  supplied,  3D?0Vt> 

hev'fcl)ct  tm  Un'oe,  tint)  S8etrou'finng  ^ct*'fc()ct  im  kn'oe. 

2.  When  the  subjects  are  of  different  persons,  the  first  per- 
son is  preferred  to  the  second ;  and  the  second  to  the  third  : 
consequently,  the  verb  will  be  in  the  first  person  plural,  when 
one  of  the  subjects  is  of  the  first  person,  and  in  the  second,  if 
there  is  a  second  and  no  first  person  :  for  example,  S)u,  tcill 
23ru'bei*  nut)  id)  roof  fen  fpajic'rcn  ge'fyen,  You,  your  brother, 

and  I  will  take  a  walk.  Q&oflcn  is  in  the  first  person  plural, 
because  one  of  the  subjects  (Ml,  fcein  SSnt'&er  ttnt>  iel))  happens 
to  be  in  the  first  person,  namely,  id).  £>U,  beitt  25ru'bcr,  Mlb 
bei'ne  ©djroefte*  feib  fyeu'te  ein'gelaben  roov'ben,  You,  your 

brother,  and  your  sister,  have  been  invited  to-day.  ©eib,  is 
the  second  person  of  the  verb,  on  account  of  bit,  the  second 
person,  which  takes  the  lead  in  the  absence  of  the  first. 

3.  The  verb  is  put  in  the  plural  number,  with  a  subject  in 
the  singular,  in  titles  of  address ;  as,  (Elt've  Sjfceilenj'  fya'fcen 
befob'lcit,  Your  excellency  has  ordered  ;  Qnt've  SOtajejldt'  (or 
abbreviated  (Sro.  SDUjejMt)  genffyen,  Your  Majesty  is  graciously 


CH.  5.  §  1.]  SYNTAX  OF  THE  VERB.  2l  . 

pleased  ;  3^'vc  (or,  according  to  an  antiquated  form,  ^t)'vo) 
<SmVt>CU  bcmer'foll,  Your  Lordship  observes.  In  the  above, 
fya'bcn,  gcvil'bcn,  bemeirtcn,  are  in  the  plural  number.  Per- 
sons of  title,  or  rank,  are  sometimes  spoken  of  in  this  form, 
even  when  absent ;  as,  2)cv  £cit  33avon'  filtt)  fyicr  gcwe'fcn, 
My  Lord   Baron   has   been  here.     But  persons  of  good  taste 

always  say,  2)cr  Qat  23ai*ou'  \\\  fyier  gerce'feiL 


RULE  II. 

The  personal  pronouns  are  generally  to  be  expressed. 

Observations.  —  1.  The  imperative  mood  takes  no  pronoun 
in  the  second  person,  except  for  the  sake  of  emphasis  and  dis- 
tinction. But  the  third  person  singular  and  plural,  and  the  first 
person  plural,  cannot  be  used  without  the  pronoun.  See  the 
Conjugation  of  Verbs. 

2.  When  two  or  more  verbs,  of  the  same  person,  come  to- 
gether, one  pronoun  (or  substantive)  may  serve  for  them  all  : 
for  example,  %d)  tc'fc  lint)  fc()vci'bi\  I  read  and  write  ;  (£r  tarn 
pt  mil*/  gtug  a'ba*  baft>  tme'tw  t»eg,  He  came  to  me,  but  soon 
went  away  again ;  ^iv  tya'bcu  3fy've  ©m'fotnmfl  Cl*l)af  ten, 
fcaufen  fnv  3fy're  (5&'te,  nnt>  roer'fcen  nns  t>as  SJergmYgcn  mad/* 

Clt,  @ic  Jit  bcftt'cbcn,  We  have  received  your  invitation,  thank 
you  for  your  kindness,  and  will  do  ourselves  the  pleasure  of 
calling  upon  you  ;  £)cr  gctnfc  friro,  im&  focrfyccv'tc  M$  ianfc, 
The  enemy  came,  and  desolated  the  country. 

3.  The  pronoun  of  the  first  person  is  sometimes  omitted 
in  antiquated  and  formal  language,  particularly  in  addressing 
persons  of  superior  rank  ;  as,  (Su're  ©na'&en  f'anu  fyicrmiF 
fcerftcfo'cvtt,  I  can  herewith  assure  your  Lordship  ;  £>e'ro 
©cl)rct'kn  fya'bc  crfyaftcn,  I  have  received  your  letter.  This 
notion  seems  to  have  sprung  from  an  imaginary  kind  of  rev- 
erence, by  which  he  that  spoke,  or  wrote,  was  too  modest  to 
mention  his  own  person,  at  the  same  time  with  the  person 
spoken  to.  But  this  awkward  form  of  affected  modesty  is 
going  out  of  use. 

4.  In  familiar  language,  and  in  poetry,  the  pronouns  of 
the  first  and  the  second  person  are  sometimes  omitted  ;  as, 
35itt  (instead  of  id)  bin)  fo  gait}  t>er(af'fcn  tyicr,  I  am  so  entirely 


212 


SYNTAX  OF  THE   VERB. 


[book  II. 


forsaken  here ;   S5ift  (instead  of  bi\l  &tt)  mil*  gut?     Are  you 
kindly  disposed  toward  me  ? 


Exercises. 

Exorbitant  riches,  and  extreme  poverty,  beget  ambition 
and  servility,  and  undermine  the  freedom  and  order  of  so- 
ciety. 

Your  father,  you,  and  I,  have  accepted3  the1  invitation2. 

You  and  her  youngest  brother  were  classmates. 

Urge  me  no  further. 

Stand  thou  at  his  right  hand,  and  let  him  stand4  at1  his9 
left3. 

Let  us  go2  hence1. 

Be  so  kind  as  to  hand  me  that  book. 


exorbitant,    u'bevm&fftg. 
riches,  (Plural  of)    *SKek()'= 

tfyttm,  n.  3.  b.  c. 
extreme,  du'fcr|lcv-C-et?. 
poverty,  Wmittl),  /. 

to  beget,  eqcu'geu. 
ambition,  Q£()r'gct£,  m.  3.  b. 
servility,  Untcvtljd'mgfeit,  f. 
to  undermine,  ttntcirgva'bcu. 
freedom,  gm'fyCU,  /. 
order,  £)i*t>'nung,  /. 
society,  ©cfcll'fcijaft,  /. 
father,  33a'ter. 
invitation,  Qnn'fatntltg,  /. 
to  accept,  an'nefymen,  irr. 
young,  *jung, 
brother,  55vu'fca\ 
class-mate,    @djltl/fmm&/    m. 
3.  b.  b. 


to  urge,  fcrdng'en. 

no,  nic()t. 

further,  rPei'tCV. 

to  stand,  ftc'fyCU. 

at,  ju.  (Dat.) 

the  right  hand,  t»ic  SKccfo'te,  (an 
adjective  used  as  a  noun, 
Jfpantv  hand,  being  under- 
stood.) 

to  let,  faf  fen. 

the  left   hand,   Die  ttltfe,  (an 

adjective  used  as  a  noun), 
to  go,  ge'fycil. 
hence,  t)0U  fyin'ttCll. 
so,  fo. 

kind,  git'ttg. 
as  to,  ttnt>. 

to  hand,  rct'cl)CU.  (Impcrat.) 
book,  *35uc();  n.  3.  b.  C. 


'  B.    Tenses. 

1.  To  signify  past  time,  the  German  language  has  one  ab- 
solute tense,  the  Perfect ;  and  two  relative  tenses,  the  Imper- 
fect and  the  Pluperfect. 

The  Perfect  tense  is  commonly  employed  to  express  an 
action  past,  without  any  particular  reference  to  other  events ; 


CH.  2.  §  1.]  SYNTAX  OF  THE  VERB.  213 

as,  (£r  f^at  ftd)  gefetpfcrti  He  has  become  better ,  2Me  @d)if  fc 
t)cu  3>n'Mcn  ftnt>  an'gcfommcn,  The  vessels  from  India  have 
arrived. 

The  two  relative  tenses  are  used  to  denote  an  event  in 
reference  to  another. 

The  Pluperfect  indicates  an  event  in  its  relation  to  another 
successive  event ;  as,  3d)  war  fauin  an'gct'ommcn  (pluperfect), 
ate  t>cr  ^ricg  cvt'l&vt'  rouv'&C,  I  had  scarcely  arrived  when  war 
was  declared. 

The  Imperfect  designates  an  event  in  its  relation  to  another, 
which  is  either  past,  or  cotemporary,  or  correlative  (i.  c.  con- 
nected by  the  relation  of  cause  and  effect.)  Accordingly, 
with  respect  to  past  events,  we  cannot  say,  %d)  rear  t\utm 
an'gct'ommcn,  ate  bet  $rtcg  cvtlart'  itort'ton  ift  (perfect"),  but 
we  must  say,  crHart'  MJW£'&'ei —  If  those  two  events,  my  arrival, 
and  the  declaration  of  war,  are  to  be  represented  as  content* 
poraneous,  we  ought  to  say,  %d)  ram  gcra'oe  an,  ate  ocr  £rtcg 
txflfotf  Itfur'DC,  I  just  arrived  when  war  was  declared.  Cor- 
relative events  also  are  to  be  expressed  in  the  same  manner  ; 
as,  2>a  id)  fci'nc  ©cftn'nnng  fann'tc,  trail' te  id)  ifnti  nid)t,  As  I 
knew  his  character,  I  did  not  trust  him.  Sometimes  the 
choice  of  the  perfect  or  imperfect  depends  on  euphony. 

2.  In  the  historical  style,  the  present  tense  is  frequently 
substituted  for  the  imperfect,  to  enliven  the  representation. 
This  is  sometimes  done  in  English,  but  more  seldom  than  in 
German. 

3.  The  present  tense  is  occasionally  applied  to  a  future 
action.  %d)  rei'jc  mor'gen  ab,  I  (shall)  set  off  to-morrow  ;  3>n 
orci  QBodvcn  fe'tyen  ©ic  mid)  nne'&er  t)tcr,  In  three  weeks'  time 
you  (will)  see  me  here  again  ;  %d)  t'om'tnc  g(cid)  ttnc'OCt,  I 
(shall)  come  back  immediately. 

4.  The  imperfect  subjunctive  is  frequently  used  for  the 
simple  conditional ;  as,  3d)  ttMinfcb'tc,  cr  fcbric'bc  mir,  (in- 
stead of,  Sr  untrue  mir  fd)t*ci'tcn,)  I  wish  he  would  write  to 
me. 

5.  The  pluperfect  subjunctive  is  frequently  used  instead  of 
the  compound  conditional ;  as,  3Bcnn  cr  an'gctommcu  ware, 
fo  fyat'tc  man  mir  cs  ol)'ne  Broci'fd  gefdme'ben  (instead  of 
@o  nnir'oc  man  mir  c$  ot)'nc  ^rcci'fct  gcfcljrtc'ben  baben,)  If 


214  SYNTAX  OF  THE  VERB.  [iJOOK  II 

he  had   arrived,   they  would  without   doubt  have   written   it 
to  me. 

6.  The  perfect  is  often  used  for  the  compound  future ;  as, 
©ofcalfc'  id)  fei'itcn  ©eg'nev  gefj&rt'  fya'be  (instead  of  gct)6ut'  i)a'= 
ten  roer'fce),  rocr'fce  id)  mei'ncn  (£utfd)luff  faf'fcn,  As  soon  as  I 

have  heard  (shall  have  heard)   his  adversary,  I  shall  form  my 
resolution. 

7.  In  quoting,  the  verb  of  the  sentence  quoted  is  generally 
put  in  the  present,  perfect,  or  future,  though  the  imperfect  or 
pluperfect  should  precede.  Ex.  3d)  \)Cvftd)'CVte  ifym  M>  **  f*d) 
tV'VC,  I  assured  him  that  he  was  mistaken  ;  ©ic  fci^te  if)ltt 
fcoraus',  er  rccr'fce  fid)  nidjt  gfitcf'ttdj  fhtylm,  She  foretold  him 
that  he  would  not  feel  happy;  ©r  bcfyattp'tCtC,  CV  fci  (tan? 
gCfflt'jCtt/  He  asserted  he  had  been  sick. 

Exercises. 

He  has  begun4  his1  great2  work3,  but  not2  yet1  finished. 

He  had  packed4  all1  his2  things3,  and  was  about  to  depart, 
when  he  received3  this1  news2. 

Had  you  learned3  our1  language2  before  you  came4  to1  this2 
country3 1 

When  he  saw5  the1  consequences2  of3  his3  conduct4,  he 
repented  (was  he  penitent),  and  endeavoured  to  repair  (to8 
make9  good?)  the1  injury2  which3  he4  had6  done5. 

When  he  arrived,  she2  had1  already  died. 

As  their  whole  business  was4  carried3  on3  upon1  credit2, 
(so)  they7  must5  fail  when  the  political  affairs  of  the  country 
were  changed. 

If  he  had3  known2  it1,  he5  would4  have4  come8  with6  me7. 

When  I  shall4  have4  learned3  his1  decision2,  I6  will5  com- 
municate9 it7  to8  you8. 

great,  grog,  to  pack,  pac'fen. 

work,  3£evf ,  n.  3.  b.  b.  about,  im  23cgnf  fe. 

to  begin,  bcgin'nen,  irr.  to  depart,  ab  £U  VCi'fCU. 

but,  a'Uv.  when,  al$. 

yet,  nod).  news,  Sladyridtf,  /. 

to  finish,  Ctt'OtgCU.  to  receive,  Cffyal'tCU,  irr. 

all,  al'ie.  language,  ©pra'cfoe,  /. 

thing,  @ad)'e,  /.l.C.  to  learn,  cvlcv'ncn. 


CH.  o.  §  1.] 


SYNTAX  OF  THE  VERB. 


215 


before,  e'fye. 

to,  in.  (Ace.) 

country,  idtlb,  n  3.  b.  e. 

to  come,  fom'men,  irr. 

consequence,  §ol'ge,  f.  1.  C. 

conduct,  SSctva'gcn,  n.  3.  a. 

to  see,  fe'bcn,  »Yr. 

to  repent,  ren'tg  rocr'fcen. 

to  endeavour,  fid)  bemiYfycn. 

injury,  @d)a't>en,  m.  3.  a.  a. 

to  do,  tbltn,  irr. 

to  repair,  gttt  mad)'en. 

to  arrive,  an' fang  en. 

already,  bercitS'. 

to  die,  jlev'bcn,  irr.  (with  fcin). 

as,  to. 

whole,  ganj. 


business,  ©cfdjdft',  n. 

upon,  anf. 

credit,  £rct»if,  m.  3.  b. 

to  carry  on,  futj'vcn. 

so,  fo. 

I  must,  id)  mnff,  mix. 

to  fail,  jafjl'imfdjjig  roev'ben. 

political,  of  fentlid). 

affair,  Tin'gclegenfycit,  /.  1.  t>. 

to  be  changed,  fid)  dn'omt. 

if,  roenn. 

to  know,  » if  fen,  mix. 

with,  mit.  (Dat.) 

when,  fobafo'. 

decision,  £ntfd)et'Mtng,  /. 

to  learn,  evfafy'Ven,  irr. 

to  communicate,  mit'tfyetfen. 


C.  Moods. 


The  Indicative  and  Imperative  require  no  elucidation. 


RULE   I. 


The  Subjunctive  is  to  be  used  ;  1.  When  a  state  of  uncer- 
tainty is  implied.  It  is,  therefore,  to  be  found  after  some 
conjunctions>  which  convey  that  idea.  Such  are  in  many  cases 
roenn,  if;  afo  roenn,  as  if;  oh,  whether  ;  t>amit',  in  order  that ; 
to§,  that.  But  the  subjunctive  mood  must  not  be  supposed  to 
be  governed  by  those  conjunctions.  It  solely  depends  upon  the 
uncertainty,  or  doubtfulness,  with  which  the  action  of  the 
verb  is  conceived.  Thus  the  subjunctive  occurs  after  ba$, 
when  any  one  of  these  verbs  precedes :  btt'ten,  to  beg  ; 
va'tfyen,  to  advise;  evmafy'nen,  to  exhort;  befov'gen,  to  ap- 
prehend ;  futd)'ten,  to  fear ;  fd)ei'ncn,  to  appear,  to  seem ; 
bcbillg'en,  to  make  conditions;  rcnn'fdKn,  to  wish;  wcl'len, 
to  desire;  jroei'feln,  to  doubt,  &c.  For,  when  we  beg,  advise, 
exhort,  apprehend,  fear,  wish,  desire,  that  a  thing  may  be  done, 
a  degree  of  uncertainty  exists,  as  to  the  event.  This  is 
farther  manifest  from  the  verb  fa'gen,  to  say,  and  similar 
ones ;  as,  ant'n>ovten,  to  answer ;  bebaur/ten,  to  maintain, 
&lc.  When  that  which  is  said  or  maintained,  remains,  in  our 
opinion,  liable  to  doubt,  the  subjunctive  should  follow  after 


216  SYNTAX  OF  THE  VERB.  [BOOK  II. 

bag:    for  example,  93ian  fagt  mir,  fcag  o?  gc&on'ncvt  fya'bc, 

They  tell  me  that  there  has  been  thunder ;    Xln'fcr  §rcttnt)  bt- 

fyatqrtet,  t>aft"  ties  cin  frudjt'barcs  3atyv  feiu  wcv'&e,  Our  friend 

maintains  that  this  will  be  a  fruitful  year.  When,  on  the  other 
hand,  the  idea  is  considered  as  positive,  and  unquestionable,  the 
indicative  must  be  made  use  of;  for  instance,  when  a  person 
speaks  of  himself;  as,  3d)  bcfyaup'te,  fcafe"  e6  \mt)V  iff,  I  main- 
tain that  it  is  true.  Here  the  subjunctive  would  be  wrong, 
because  the  notion  is  strongly  affirmative.  If  what  a  person 
maintains  be  not  certain  in  his  own  conception,  he  should 
look  for  another  expression,  such  as,  id)  Alau'be,  id)  fcott'e,  I 
believe,  I  think.  3d)  rocis,  t>a£  cv  l>a£  ©elo  bcfom'mot  l)at, 
I  know  that  he  has  received  the  money ;  the  indicative,  for 
the  same  reason.  —  The  conjunction,  room,  does  not  require 
the  subjunctive  mood  after  it,  except  when  the  sentence  to 
which  it  belongs  is  connected  with  one  that  contains  a 
conditional  future  ;  as,  3d)  wfir'&e  C6"  ttjmx,  worn  e$  mog'lid) 
ID&'tC/  I  should  do  it,  if  it  were  possible.  Here  rod've,  the 
verb  belonging  to  room,  is  in  the  subjunctive  mood,  because 
the  preceding  sentence  contains  a  conditional  future,  I  should 
do  it.  It  is  evident,  that  the  subjunctive  rests  upon  the 
opinion  that  is  formed  of  the  certainty  or  uncertainty  in 
the  action  of  the  verb.  It  is  a  natural  consequence  of  this, 
that,  in  some  circumstances,  it  may  be  questioned,  whether 
the  indicative  or  the  subjunctive  be  more  proper;  the  de- 
cision will  be  according  to  the  point  of  view,  in  which  the 
sentence  is  contemplated. 

2.  The  subjunctive  mood  is  used  when  room  or  tag  is  to  be 
supplied,  in  the  following  cases. 

a.  The  subjunctive  must  be  used  at  the  beginning  of  a 
sentence  when  the  conjunction  room,  if,  is  to  be  supplied  be- 
fore the  imperfect  or  pluperfect  tense ;  as  in  the  following, 
rod've  id)  an  3fy'l'W  ©teflc,  were  I  in  your  place,  instead  of 
room  id)  an  Sft'tft  ©tcl'fc  rod're,  if  I  were  in  your  place  : 
tjat'U  a  t>te  ©dldt'jc  t>C6  (WfuS,  had  he  the  treasures  of 
Croesus,  for  Wltttt  cr  Die  ©d)dt^c  U$  (Evo'juS  tydt'te,  if  he  had 
the  treasures  of  Croesus.  —  But  when  the  conjunction  room  is 
to  be  understood  before  the  present  tense,  it  must  be  in  the 
indicative  mood.  Examples  ;  25i|i  t>U  rod),  fo  gib  t)tc(;  H|t-  Ml 
arm,  fo  gib  fccin  QOBc'nigo?  go'nc,  if  thou  art  rich,  give  much  ; 
if  thou  art  poor,  give  thy  little  cheerfully.     Jpo'VCft   tot  was? 


CH.  6.  §  J-]  SYNTAX  OF  THE  VERB.  217 

66'jte/  fcaS  fa'ge  nidjt  nadj,  if  thou  hearest  any  thing  bad,  do 
not  repeat  it. 

6.  The  subjunctive  is  generally  used  when  bag  is  to  be  sup- 
plied ;  as,  <Ex  gfaubt,  C6  fct  nicl)t  mdg'Ud),  He  thinks  (that)  it  is 
not  possible ;  2ttan  fagt,  t>er  £ai'fcr  fya'bc  gric'tcn  gemadjt', 
They  say  (that)  the  Emperor  has  made  peace. 

3.  It  frequently  has  a  potential  signification,  expressing, 
either  a  wish  ;  as,  X>Cl*  J&im'mel  ge'be  C£,  May  heaven  grant  it ; 
(£)0tt  befyll'tt,  God  forbid  ;  — or  a  permission,  and  concession  ; 
as,  (gx  gc'tye  roofyin'  IX  xooi'k,  Let  him  go  where  he  pleases  :  — 
or  a  supposition  ;  as,  £$  roa've  fcffcr,  rocnn  roit  Sfy'uen  SHatfy 
befolgt'  fatten,  It  would  be  better  if  we  had  followed  your 
advice ;  £>tc  granjofen  fyat'ten  t>ic  <&d)U\d)t  uidn  gnron'ncn, 

n>cnn  fie  uid)t  ci'nc  fo  gro'fe  U'bennadjt  an  tas'tea  gcijatt'  ftat'* 

ten,  The  French  would  not  have  gained  the  battle,  if  they  had 
not  had  such  superior  numbers  :  —  or  surprise,  or  wonder ;  as, 
$bt'tc  id)$  tod)  n\d)t  geglaubt'!  I  should  not  have  thought  it! 


RULE  II. 


The  Infinitive  Mood  occurs  either  without  the  preposition 
$U,  or  with  it. 

a.  Without  ju. 

1.  When  it  stands  by  itself  and  unconnected,  for  example, 
in  a  vocabulary  ;  as,  lic'bcn,  to  love;  jVfycn,  to  see. 

2.  When  it  is  in  the  room  of  a  substantive,  either  as  the 
subject,  or  as  the  object;  as,  33crfprcd)'ctt  ttnfc  ftfftCfot  fiilD 
jn?ct  i>erfd)ie'&ene  @ad)'cn,  To  promise  and  to  fulfill  are  two 
different  things  ;  2)a$  HCU'rtC  id)  fedyten,  That  I  call  to  fight,  or 
fighting  ;  £\u"  fyct'fc  id)  gvau'fam  fettfafyteit,  That  I  call  to  act 
cruelly,  or  acting  cruelly. 

3.  When  for  the  purpose  of  laying  peculiar  stress  on  the 
simple  action  or  condition  expressed  by  the  verb,  the  infinitive 
is  used  without  an  auxiliary  ;  as,  3d)  ttiet'nctf  23nt'&CV$  Still's 
fcev  nidjt  ericn'nen?  3d)  ffc  mrijt  crrcn'nen?  I  not  recognise 
the  children  of  my  brother?  I  not  recognise  them? 

4.  After   the  verbs   f^n'nen   to  be  able ;   me'gcn,    to   like  ; 

19 


218  SYNTAX  OF  THE  VERB.  [BOOK  II. 

faf'jvH,  to  permit,  or  cause  ;  tmv'feit,  to  be  permitted  ;  foWcn, 
to  be  obliged  ;  wol'leil,  to  will ;  mftf'fctl,  to  be  forced  ;  and 
IfCl'Df  1!/  when  it  is  the  auxiliary  to  the  future  tense ;  as,  3^) 
Wev'fce  fra'gen,  I  shall  ask ;  and  similar  verbs. 

5.  After  the  verbs,  bct'fcit,  to  bid  ;  fyel'fctt,  to  help  ;  (cfy'VClt, 
to  teach;  Ifv'ncn,  to  learn;  fyo'VCU,  to  hear;  fd)eu,  to  see; 
fufy'fatt,  to  feel.  For  example  :  3d)  fytCS  t()n  ge'fyen,  I  bid  him 
go ;  St*  tyilft  mil'  fd)fci'ben,  He  helps  me  to  write,  that  is,  he 
assists  me  in  writing ;  Dcr  ^Ba'tCV  UtjXt  t>itt?  &in&  U'fm,  The 
father  teaches  the  child  to  read ;  c333tl*  lev'uen  tauten,  We  learn 
to  dance  ;  3C<0  W've  fie  ftng'nt,  I  hear  them  sing;  3$  W¥  $n 
fom'ntcn,  I  see  him  come  or  coming;  (£r  fitfyfte  fciu  23lut  gafy'= 
VCn,  He  felt  his  blood  boil  or  boiling.  —  After  some  of  these 
verbs,  the  English  more  commonly  use  the  participle  ;  but  the 
Germans  constantly  employ  the  infinitive.  icfy'VCtt  and  iev'nctl 
sometimes  admit  £lt  before  the  infinitive  that  follows  them. 

6.  Some  verbs  are  joined  to  an  infinitive,  without  £U,  in 
particular  phrases.     These  are  : 

SSIci'bcn,  to  remain — with  the  infinitive,  it  signifies  con- 
tinuance of  locality;  as,  @v  hUibt  lie'gen,  He  continues  lying; 
Sr  bUibt  ftt'^Clt/  He  continues  sitting,  he  keeps  his  seat,  he  does 
not  move  from  his  seat ;  (St*  blcibt  ftCtycn,  He  continues  stand- 
ing. It  is  used  in  the  same  manner  with  jlCC'h'U,  to  stick  fast ; 
fyang'cn,  to  hang ;  fni'CU,  to  kneel ;  Ht'btXl,  to  adhere,  to  stick. 

gafy'vnt,  to  go  in  a  carriage,  with  fpajie'ren ;  as,  3d)  f&tytt 
fpctyie't'CU,  I  drive  out  for  exercise,  for  an  airing. 

§in'fcClt,  to  find,  is  occasionally  followed  by  the  infinitive, 
where  the  English  put  the  participle,  ©u  fiUlfc  ftc  (djU'fim, 
He  found  them  sleeping  or  asleep ;  3 (ft  fan&  t>aS  S3ud)  auf 
&em  ^tfd)'e  lic'gcu,  I  found  the  book  lying  upon  the  table. 
The  participle  might  here  be  used,  even  in  German. 

(Sc'tjCU,  to  go;  as,  %d)  gc'fye  fpajte'ven,  I  take  a  walk;  (£i* 
gd)t  fd)(a'fen;  He  goes  to  bed,  (literally,  he  goes  to  sleep)  ;  and 
with  some  other  verbs. 

ipa'bcn,  to  have,  in  these  and  similar  phrases  ;  (£v  t)at  gut 
vci'fen,  It  is  easy  for  him  to  travel ;  ©ie  t}i\'bcn  gut  fprccfo'en,  You 
may  well  say  so;  9QBtV  tya'bcil  ©cl&  ftttf  3itlTeil  jU'tyen,  We  have 
money  out  on  interest. 

©id)  le'geit;  to  lay  one's  self  down,  with  fd)(a'fen,  to  sleep ; 
as,  3$  l*'8e  wid)  fcfcfa'fttl/  I  lay  myself  down  to  sleep. 


CH.  5.  §  1.]  SYNTAX  OF  THE  VERB.  219 

3D?ad)'CU,  when  it  signifies  to  cause,  or  occasion  ;  as,  (£r 
mad)t  mtcfc  Itob'm,  He  makes  me  laugh ;  Sr  mad)t  mid)  roci'ncn, 
He  makes  me  cry. 

SHci'tcn,  to  ride  on  horseback,  with  fpajtc'rcn ;  as,  3d)  rci'tc 
fpajie'rcil,  I  take  a  ride. 

it)uu,  to  do,  with  uid)t£  ate,  after  it;  as,  25 tc  gratt  tt)ut 
ltid)t£  ate  janf'CU,  The  woman  does  nothing  but  quarrel ;  2)cr 
SDTann  ttyut  nid)tS  ate  fdjcl'teii/  The  man  does  nothing  but 
scold. 

b.  With  1% 

1.  After  substantives  and  adjectives,  when  in  English  either 
to,  with  the  infinitive,  or  of,  with  the  participle,  is  used  :  for 
example,  after  a  substantive,  hl|t  Jtt  fpif'tcit,  an  inclination 
to  play  ;  0a£  'iBcramt'gcn  @ic  JU  fc'tycn,  the  pleasure  of  seeing 
you  ;  OCt*  SDBimfd)  gclobt'  JU  mv'btn,  the  wish  of  being 
praised  :  —  after  an  adjective,  3»d)  war  fro  I)  mci'ucn  grCUUO  n>ie's 
OCr  Jll  fc'fym,  I  was  happy  to  see  my  friend  again  ;  miVoc  Jit 
ftc'fycn,  tired  of  standing  ;  tlCU'gicrig  JU  roif'fcn,  curious  to 
know  ;   bcgie'rig  £lt  crfafy'ren,  anxious  to  be  informed. 

2.  After  verbs,  when  purpose  or  design  is  intimated.  3$ 
ging  ju  Ocm  SDlau'ne,  it)tn  etc  @ad)'e  t>or'jufkl(cn  uuo  mil  ibm 
OanVber  Jtl  fprcd)'CU,  I  went  to  the  man,  to  represent  the  thing 
to  him,  and  to  converse  with  him  about  it.  And  here  the  par- 
ticle um  is  frequently  joined  with  Jti,  which  expresses  design 
still  more  distinctly  ;  as,  iu'btt  Oic  Kv'bcit,  ttitt  glucflid)  Jit 
fciu,  Love  labor  (in  order)  to  be  happy. 

3.  After  the  following  verbs  and  others  of  a  similar  signifi- 
cation :  fttt'fttngen,  to  begin  ;  auf't)6rcu,  to  cease  ;  bcfcb'ieu,  to 
command;  bitten,  to  beg;  etUXlt'tCtt;  to  expect;  fyoffeit,  to 
hope;  filXityttn,  to  fear;  Oro'tym,  to  threaten;  pfle'gen,  to  be 
wont ;  bcljaup'tCU,  to.  maintain  ;  erfen'nen,  to  acknowledge, 
with  the  infinitive  in  the  perfect  tense ;  as,  (£r  crrcnnt',  fid) 
grirrt'  Jtt  baben,  He  acknowledges  himself  to  have  been  mis- 
taken :   bet'en'iten,  to   confess,  with   the   infinitive  perfect;   as, 

Sr  betemtf ,  t>a$  (Sclo  erbal'ren  ju  ba'bcn,  He  confesses  having 
received  the  money  :  fdjei'ncn,  to  appear,  to  seem  ;  roitn'fdwt, 
to  wish ;  foerfang'en,  to  desire ;  ermang'eln,  to  fail ;  crlaubeu, 
to  permit;  geftat'ten,  to  allow ;  fccrote'ucn,  to  deserve  ;  wa'gcn. 
to  venture  ;   fyvl'bett,  to  have  ;  as,  3>d)  tjl'bt  3t)'ncn  Ct'roaS  JU  fa'= 


220  SYNTAX  OF  THE  VERB.  [BOOK  II. 

gen,  I  have  something  to  tell  you  :  fcilt/  to  be ;  as,  Q£g  ift  £U 
fuidj'tcn,  It  is  to  be  feared;  ifif'fen,  to  know  how;  as,  (£v  ttetS 
eg  £U  ma'dKU,  He  knows  how  to  do  it;  and  these  verbs;  tyel's 
fen,  mrt'jcn,  fvcm'tticn,  when  they  signify  to  be  of  use,  to  an- 
swer a  purpose. 

4.  The  prepositions  ofy'UC,  without,  and  jlatt  or  anffatt',  in- 
stead of,  require  ju  before  the  infinitive.  The  English  con- 
strue these  with  the  participle  ;  as,  ofy'ne  JU  n>if  fett,  without 
knowing,  (French,  saws  savoir)  ;  ftatt  Jtt  fd)la'fen,  instead  of 
sleeping  ;  OllftAtt'  JU  fd)t*ei'ben,  instead  of  writing. 

In  English,  the  infinitive,  with  to,  is  put  after  some  verbs, 
where  the  Germans  prefer  the  conjunction  tag,  with  the  in- 
dicative or  subjunctive :  for  example,  I  knew  him  to  be  the 
man,  3>d)  rMjf'tc,  tag  er  ter  SDTann  mar ;  They  thought  me  to  be 
mistaken,  ©ie  tad)  ten,  tag  id)  mid)  tv'rete ;  He  believed  it  true, 
(£r  gfaub'tc,  tag  eg  rrnxfyt:  nnVve. —  The  infinitive  with  ta,  is  also 
employed  by  the  English,  after  such  words  as,  when,  where, 
hoto,  which,  ichat,  whose,  whom,  when  certain  verbs,  such  as, 
to  hww,  to  tell,  to  be  told,  and  the  like,  precede.  For 
example,  You  know  how  to  write  it ;  I  will  tell  you  ichat  to  do ; 
Teach  me  what  to  say.  In  German,  the  indicative  or  subjunc- 
tive of  some  helping  verb,  such  as,  mng,  fcU,  must,  ought, 
shall,  is  to  be  made  use  of;  as,  ©ie  reiffen,  tt)ie  ©ie  eg  fdjrci's 
kit  muffen,  You  know  how  you  must  write  it ;  3d)  tt?t((  3ty's 
nen  fa'gen,  wag  ©ie  tfytm  muffen,  I  will  tell  you  what  you  must 
do ;  *el)'ren  ©ie  mid),  roag  id)  fa'gen  foil,  Teach  me  what  I 
shall  say.* 

The  Infinitive,  with  yw,  is  used,  where  the  English  employ 
the  participle,  with  a  preposition,  such  as  of,  from,  and  others. 
For  example,  tag  33ergmVgen  ci'neu  gveunt  ju  fe'fyeu,  the 
pleasure  of  seeing  a  friend. 

Observations. — 1.  The  Infinitive  of  the  active  voice,  after 
certain  verbs  seems  to  have  a  passive   signification,   while   in 


*  In  a  sentence  like  this,  He  knows  how  to  make  it,  if  the  ob- 
ject is  to  express  the  simple  fact  that  he  can  make  it  (no  matter 
how),  we  say,  in  German,  (5r  roeig  eg  JU  mad)'en;  but  if  the 
manner  be  the  prominent  object,  we  say,  (5t  AH' it?  tt>ic   ei*  Cg 

mad/en  foil  (or  mug). 


CH.  6.  §  1.]  SYNTAX  OF  THE  VERB.  221 

fact  this  peculiarity  arises  from  the  omission  of  the  immediate 
object  of  these  verbs.  Saft  ifyn  ru'fen,  Let  him  call ;  may  also 
signify,  Let  him  be  called,  in  which  case  it  stands  for  iajj  jc'^ 
mauDen  ityll  ru'fen,  Let  some  one  call  him.  The  same  remark 
applies  to  other  similar  expressions  ;  as,  C£)(X  $Ktcl)'tev  t)tC6  it)lt 
bill'fccn,  The  judge  ordered  him  to  bind,  also  to  be  bound  ;  90Btt* 
fa'tyen  itm  fcfola'gcn,  We  saw  him  beating,  Also  beaten.  In 
phrases  like  these,  2)ie'fcr  ItnVjlanfc  i|t  JU  CVTOa'gCtt,  literally, 
this  circumstance  is  to  consider,  for,  to  be  considered,  the 
infinitive  is  used  as  a  noun  ;  as,  SDie'fer  Um'ftanfc  ift  Jltm  (or  ju 
fccm)Srtt>d'gcn,  This  circumstance  is  for  considering,  i.  e.  worth 
considering  or  to  be  considered.  But  in  the  use  of  this  con- 
struction,  care  must  be  taken  to  avoid  ambiguity. 

2.  The  Infinitive  of  the  verbs  bill*  fen,  fol'len,  feu'nen,  mb'- 
gen,  (af'fen,  tmtf'fen,  rcoHen,  fye'ven,  fc'^cu,  is  substituted  for 

the  Past  Participle,  when  an  infinitive  precedes.  %d)  fya'bc 
e£  nic()t  tfyltu  DUV'fcn  (for  getmvft'),  I  was  not  allowed  to  do  it: 
2)u  ty&t'tcjt  fom'men  fol'leu  (for  gcfollt'),  You  ought  to  have 
come;  £v  fyat  ein  Jpaue"  bau'ett  laffen  (for  gelaffen),  He 
has  caused  a  house  to  be  built;  %d)  t)«  be  il)U  an'tyoueu  muf'feu 
(for  gemujft '),  I  have  been  obliged  to  listen  to  him  ;  Jjpdt'ten 
ttur  auS'gcben  M&oClcn  (for  gcroollt'),  Had  we  been  inclined  to 
go  out ;  3d)  fya'be  it)ii  ret'tcn  fc'fyen  (for  gefe'^en),  I  have 
seen  him  ride. — kfy'veu,  to  teach,  and  ler'nen,  to  learn,  like- 
wise allow  the  use  of  this  infinitive ;  though  the  past  par- 
ticiple is,  at  present,  more  frequently  employed  ;  as,  Q£r  tyrtt 
mid)  fcftm'ben  Utj'Xttt,  or  $tUt)Xt',  He  has  taught  me  to  write ; 
3d)  fya'be  bet  ibm  jeicfc'uen  ler'nen,  or  gcleunt',  I  have  learnt  of 
him  to  draw. 

RULE    HI. 

The  participle,  besides  its  connexion  with  the  verb,  is,  in 
Syntax,  liable  to  the  rules  of  the  adjective. 

There  are  some  participles,  which  may  be  said  to  represent 
pronouns,  having  a  demonstrative  signification.  Of  this  de- 
scription are  :  befagf,  aforesaid ;  get>acl)t',  evrodfynt',  aforemen- 
tioned ;  geuannt',  aforenamed;  fofgeilD,  the  following. 

The  Present  Participle,  with  JU,  to,  before  it,  and  used  as 
an  adjective,  expresses  futurity,  with  the  implied  notion  of 
necessity  or  possibility ;    as,  em  forgfdltig    ju   t)mnci'&cnt>cv 

19* 


222  SYNTAX  OF  THE  VERB.  [BOOK  II. 

Itm'jTant*/  a  circumstance  carefully  to  be  avoided  ;  tin  leidjt 
JU  focntici'&en&er  Um'flanfc,  a  circumstance  that  may  easily  be 
avoided. 

The  Past  Participle  of  certain  Verbs,  is  united  with  the 
verb  fom'tnnt/  to  come,  in  an  active  signification,  to  express 
the  manner  of  coming;  as,  (£i*  ffoitttlt  gevit'tcn,  He  comes  rid- 
ing on  horseback ;  (£r  fftmmt  gegang'en,  He  comes  walking  ; 
©r  fommt  cjefaJj'vcn,  He  comes  riding  in  a  carriage. 

The  past  participle  is  combined  in  a  particular  way,  with  the 

verbs  wol'Un,  fya'ben,  and  roif'fcn ;  as,  3d)  rooll'te  ©ic  gcfragt' 

fya'bcu, 1  would  have  you  asked,  that  is,  I  should  wish  to  ask  you. 

SJMc'fcs  3tobrecb'en  wol'ltn  roiv  geafyn'fcet  imf'fcn,  We  would 

know  this  crime  punished,  that  is,  we  wish  to  have  it  punished. 

Cases  Absolute.  The  accusative  case  joined  to  past  parti- 
ciples is  taken  absolutely.  Examples  :  t>ag  ©ejtdjt'  uad)  Often 
getefyvt',  his  face  being  turned  to  the  east ;  t>CU  35(icf  nad)  fcettt 
33a'tcr(an&e  O.eroen'&et,  his  looks  being  turned  towards  his 
country ;  Me  itt'gcn  nad)  t>cm  £im'mcl  gmd)'tft,  his  eyes  being 
directed  towards  heaven  ;  tue'fen  llttVftcmfc  fooraus'gffcfct,  this 
circumstance  being  supposed  ;  fcen  (£cn>inn'  ab'gcredjnet,  the 
gain  being  deducted  ;  t>ic$  auS'geuommen,  this  being  excepted. 

Sometimes  the  past  participle  is  substituted  for  the  impera- 
tive mood  ;  as,  SKo'fen  auf  ton  \H3cg  gcjlreut',  unfc  fees  £arm$ 
DCVgcffcn !  Strew  roses  on  the  path,  and  forget  sorrow !  2)U 
©tu'bc  aufgerdttmt  !  Clear  the  room !  in  which  examples 
gcjU'CUt',  V>ergeffcn,  and  auf  gcvattmt,  are  past  participles. 

Exercises. 

I  asked  you  if  you  had3  been2  there1. 

They  praise  us  that  we  might4  return3  the1  compliment2. 

I  always2  thought1  that  he  would3  please2  you.1. 

Promise  me  that  you  will3  follow2  him1,  if  he  sets4  you1  the2 
example3. 

If  you  had3  known2  him1,  you  could  not4  have6  asked5  such2 
a1   question3. 

Are  you  satisfied  1  then  let  us  go. 

(May)  wisdom  be  your  guide. 

Had  I  not3  told4  it1  to2  them2,  they  would  have3  no1  guilt2. 

To  come,  to  see,  and  to  conquer,  were  almost  simultaneous  acts. 

I  saw  him  paint,  and  you  heard  him  sing. 

She  does  nothing  but  weep  and  lament. 


CH.  5. 


$••] 


SYNTAX  OF  THE  VERK. 


223 


It  avails  nothing  to2  say3  it1,  if  we  (do)  not  venture  to2  do3 
it1,  without  waiting3  any1  longer2. 

I  know  not  how  to  tell  her,  without  hurting3  her1   feelings2. 

You  have  wished  to3  see4  it1  accomplished2 ;  it  is  now  no 
more  to  be  altered. 

Rise  up,  and  move3  your1  hands2. 


to  ask,  fra'gen. 

if,  ob. 

there,  fra. 

to  praise,  (o'bot. 

that,  bamit'. 

compliment,  ^t'tigt'ett,  /. 

to  return,  ewnc'&Cnt. 

I  may,  id)  mag,  mix. 

to  think,  fccnt'cn,  mix. 

always,  im'mcr. 

that,  t>af}\ 

to  please,  gcfaHcn,  irr. 

to   promise,  VevfprccVcn,   irr. 

(Dat.) 
to  follow,  fol'gen.  (Dat.) 
I  will,  id)  voiii,  mix. 
example,  Vbti'fyiti,  n.  3.  b.  b. 
to  set,  gc'ben,  irr. 
to  know,  hlintUf  mix. 
1  can,  id)  fann,  mix. 
to  ask  such  a  question,   ci'UC 

fol'cfoe  §ra'ge  tfyun,  irr. 
satisfied,  bcfvie'fcigt. 
to  let,  (aff cru 
to  go,  ge'bcn. 
wisdom,  QOBeiS'fyctt,  /. 
guide,  (Sclct'tcrin,  /. 
to  tell,  fa'gen. 
no  guilt,  Hi'nz  <&d)\iit>. 
to  come,  fom'mcn. 
to  see,  fe'tjcu. 


to  conquer,  flc'gCU. 
almost,  bciua'fyc. 
simultaneous,  gleict/jettig. 
act,  J£>aut>'(uug,  /.  1.  t>. 
to  paint,  ma'Icn. 
to  hear,  fy&'ren. 
to  sing,  ftug'CU. 
nothing,  nic()t6. 
but,  al$. 

to  weep,  roet'nen. 

to  lament,  fta'gcn. 

to  avail,  from'men. 
to  venture,  roa'gcn. 
without,  ob'ne. 
any,  ir'geilb. 
long,  (ang. 
to  wait,  mar'ten. 

to  know,  unf  fen,  mix. 

how,  rote, 

feelings,  ©cfufyl',  n.  3.  b.  b. 

to  hurt,  foerlet'jen. 

to  wish,  MDUtt'fdjm 

to  accomplish,  t)0Ubriug'Ctt,mzz. 

now,  mm. 

more,  mztjt. 

to  alter,  dn'DCVU. 

to  rise  up,  auf  ftcfycn,  irr. 

your,  dcf.  art. 

hand,  *£an&,  /.  1.  b. 

to  move,  rc'gen. 


D.    The  Passive  Voice. 

The  passive  voice  of  neuter  verbs  is  employed  impersonally, 
is  in  Latin,  when  the  subject  of  the  verb  is  to  be  expressed  in 


224  SYNTAX  OF  THE  VERB.  [BOOK  II. 

an  indeterminate  manner.  Ex.  <£f$  uurfc  gcfatt'fcu,  They  run 
(Lat.  curritur)  ;  Q;6  UHlV'fce  getaujf,  There  was  dancing  (Lat. 
saltabatur). 

E.    The  Auxiliaries. 

When  the  same  auxiliary  belongs  to  more  than  one  verb, 
it  need  be  only  once  employed  ;  as,  %d)  t)<\'kt  CS  gcty&rt'  Unt> 
gefc'tyen,  I  have  heard  and  seen  it ;  QOBif  tya'ben  gcfcl)ric  ben, 
gclc'fen,  ItnD  gcfprocfo'Ctl,  We  have  written,  read,  and  talked.  It 
would  encumber  the  sentence,  to  express  the  auxiliary  more 
than  once  in  these  examples.  The  English  language  co- 
incides in  this  with  the  German.  But  the  latter  has  a  peculiarity, 
which  is  not  found  in  most  other  tongues  :  namely,  that  in  the 
perfect  and  pluperfect  tenses  the  auxiliaries  tya'bnt  and  fcin, 
when  placed  at  the  end  of  a  sentence,  may  be  omitted.  For 
example :  SD?ein  grennt)  fyat  mtr  gcfagt',  Dag  cr  3^'vcn  35ricf 
gclc'fen,  My  friend  has  told  me,  that  he  has  read  your  letter. 
After  gcle'fdt,  the  auxiliary  fya'frc,  is  to  be  understood.  It 
would  be  quite  as  well,  if  it  were  expressed,  though  sometimes 
the  omission  has  a  good  effect,  by  preventing  the  monotonous 
repetition  of  the  same  auxiliary  word.  The  auxiliary  ttHT'DCU/ 
though  at  the  end  of  the  sentence,  can  never  be  left  out. 

Exercises. 

The  trial  is  finished,  and  the  sentance  is  passed. 

He  would  have10  been9  taken3  to1  account2  and4  judged8 
by5  our6  law7,  if  he  had9  not2  judged4  him1self3  and5  abdica- 
ted8 his6  power7. 

As  soon  as  he  had10  arranged3  his3  affairs2,  and4  taken9 
leave8  of5  his6  friends7,  he12  departed11. 

trial,  SJUrfjt'th'Cit,  rti.  to  abdicate,  mc'Dcrtcgen. 

to  finish,  en'ftcn.  as  soon  as,  fo  balt>  a(6. 

sentence,  Uv'tfyeif,  n.  affair,  *!(n'gcfcgcnl)Cit//.  1.  fci 

to  pass,  fallen,  to  arrange,  bericl/ttgcn. 

to     take      to     account,  JUt*     from,  fcou.  (Dot.) 

SKcciycnfcfoafit  jic'fyen,  irr.  his  friends,  Mc  ©ei'nigcn. 

by,  nad).  (Dot.)  leave,  *Zibfc()ict),  m.  3.  b.  6. 

law,  <Sefc§',  re.  3.  b.  b,  to  take,  nclymcn,  irr. 

to  judge,  vicfj'tcn.  to  depart,  ab'vcifcn. 
power,  50?acl)t,  f. 


CH  5.  §  1.]  SYNTAX  OF  THE  VERB.  225 

F.    The  Verb  governing  Cases. 

RULE  I. 

The  Nominative  case,  as  the  object,  is  required, 

1.  By  the  following  verbs:  fcilt,  to  be;  ffict'bClt/  to  become; 
Mei'ben,  to  remain ;  fyci'fen,  to  be  called,  to  bear  a  name  ; 
fctei'nen,  to  seem.  Examples  :  gvicfe'ridj  rtxxv  tin  gvo'fet 
gclD'fyerv,  Frederic  was  a  great  general;  SDtcin  33vil'&er  \\l 
©olfcat'  geroov'Dcn,  My  brother  has  become  a  soldier;  ©r  bitibt 
tin  %t)0X,  toit  er  im'mci*  war,  He  remains  a  silly  man,  as  he 
always  was ;  2Mc'fet  SDiCnfd)  tycijt  tci*  O'kvjiC,  This  man  is  call- 
ed the  colonel ;  0:6  fcfjcillt  tin  glt'tCl*  tyU\\\,  It  seems  a  good 
plan.  The  nouns,  after  the  verbs,  are  here  in  the  nomina- 
tive case. 

2.  By  the  passive  voice  of  such  verbs,  as,  in  the  active, 
govern  a  double  accusative  :  for  example,  nett'ltCH/  to  call,  to 
name  —  (£r  rotrfc  tin  tljX'Udm  SOiaun  gcnannt',  He  is  called  an 
honest  man;  fyct'fCU,  to  call,  to  name;  tatt'fcn,  to  christen — 
3)a6  £int>  ijt  Jpeinticl)  getaufV  roou'Den,  The  child  has  been 
christened  Henry  ;  (J^ein'vicl),  is  here  the  nominative  case;) 
fcljel'tctt/  to  abuse  —  €v  roivD  cin  S5eti*fi'gcv  gefdjoften,  He  is 
abused  as  a  cheat  ;  fd)im'pfeu,  to  insult  by  opprobrious  ap- 
pellations—  (St  roarfc  cine  SDiem'mc  gefdumpft',  He  was  insulted 
as  a  coward.  Some  verbs  occur,  in  English,  with  two  accu- 
satives in  the  active,  and  two  nominatives  (namely,  one  as 
the  subject  before,  and  the  other  as  the  object  after  the  verb) 
in  the  passive  voice  ;  where,  in  German,  the  second  accusative 
is  construed  with  a  preposition.  Such  are  the  verbs,  to  ap- 
point, to  choose,  to  declare,  and  the  like  :  for  example,  (£y  i|l  umt 
3)0C'tCV  gfqtftCbP  IDOr'fcCH,  He  has  been  made  a  doctor  ;  (£l*  iff 
JUttt  SHtdytiT  cvnannt'  mor/fcen.  He  has  been  appointed  judge  ; 
&r  ttttf'fcc  fuv  ci'tten  ©pt£/(>ubcn  crtldvt',  He  was  declared  a 
thief.  Here  the  prepositions  Jtt  and  fur,  are  required,  while  in 
English  the  nominative  case  is  sufficient.  Sometimes  the  verb 
Utj'Vtn,  to  teach,  is  joined  with  a  double  accusative,  in  the 
active  voice ;  as,  je'man&Cll  SDUiftf'  IcfyTCU,  to  teach  a  person 
musick.  The  dative  also  is  used  with  the  verb  (d)TCU  —  ei'UCltt 
ct'n>a£  ittyttn,  to  teach  something  to  a  person. 

3.  The  reflective  verbs   are  followed  by  a  nominative,  aftej 


226  SYNTAX  OF  THE  VERB.  [BOOK  II. 

ate,  or  tt)ic,  as :  for  example,  Q;r  bctrctgt'  fid)  ate  ein  VCdjt'; 
fdjaffcnci*  SOTamt,  He  conducts  himself  as  an   honest  man  ;   Qstr 

jeidynet  fid)  ate  cin  gu'tec  ©ofoat'  ans,  He  distinguishes  him- 
self as  a  good  soldier.  But  it  must  be  observed,  that  this 
nominative  case  is  not  governed  by  the  reflective  verb.  The 
phrase  is  elliptical,  and  at  full  length,  would  be,  (£tr  betrdgt7 
fid),  ate  cin  fcdaffcbajfencv  SDlann  fid)  bctvac\t',  He  conducts 
himself,  as  an  honest  man  conducts  himself;  £r  £Ctd)'net  fid) 
au$,  ate  cin  gu'ta  ©ol&af  fid)  autf'jeictjnct,  He  distinguishes 

himself,  as  a  good  soldier  distinguishes  himself.  The  same 
takes  place  after  verbs  which  are  not  reflective;  as, 2)(T  ftna'bc 
fd)VCtbt  ttHC  Cin  SOTamt,  The  boy  writes  as  a  man  ;  for  S)er 
Stm'bt  fdjveibt,  vok  cin  SDTann  fcbreibt,  The  boy  writes  as  a 
man  writes.  If  the  case  be  referred  to  the  reflective  verb,  it 
must  be  the  accusative  :  for  example,  (£r.  £Ctgt  fid)  ate  ci'llCtt 
tftdyttgcn  gel&'fjewn;  He  shows  himself  an  able  general. 


Exercises. 

Although  he  seems7  to5  be6  a1  man2  of3  talent4,  he9  will8 
never  become3  an1  artist2,  but  remain3  a1  bungler2. 

He  was  at  first  called4  a1  great2  man3,  but  afterward  insult- 
ed3 (as)  a1  villain2. 

By  the  mark  (which)  they  put4  upon1  this2  pawn3,  they6 
made5  him  a  knight. 

He  first3  conducted1  himself2  toward  others  as  an  unprin- 
cipled man,  and  then2  treated1  himself3  as  his  bitterest 
enemy. 

although,  obglcid)'  villain,  SJerbrecb'ei*,  m. 

talent,  2ln'(a,qe,  /•  C.  to  insult,  fd)Cl'tcn,  irr. 

to  seem,  fd)Ct'ncn.  by,  burd).  (Ace.) 

never  nic'mate.  mark,  SHerf'jcidjcn,  «.  3.  a.  a. 

artist,  ^unjVlcr,  m.  upon,  an.  (Dat.) 

to  become,  mcv'bcn.  pawn,  35au'cv,  m-  3.  a.  C. 

but,  fon't>crn.  to  put,  an'brmgen,  mix. 

bungler,  ©tnm'pct',  m.  to  make,  mad)'cn. 

to  remain,  bfei'bcn.  knight,  @pt*ing'cv. 

at  first,  jttcrjt'.  to  conduct  one's  self,  fid)  bc- 

great,  gUOS.  fttt'gCJt,  irr. 

to  call,  nen'nen,  mix.  first,  juerjV, 

afterward,  nad)'l)Cl\  toward,  gc'gcit.  (Ace.) 


CH.  5.  §  1.]  SYNTAX  OF  THE  VERB.  227 

others,  an'&cve.  then,  fcann. 

unprincipled,  geroiffenfoS.  bitter,  bit'tcr. 

to  treat,  betyan'fceln.  enemy,  §cint>,  m.  3.  b.  6. 


RULE  II. 

The  Genitive  case  is  governed, 

1.  By  verbs  which  in  English  are  generally  followed  by  the 
preposition  of;  as,  an'ffagCU/  to  accuse  of;  befcltv'fcn,  to  be 
in  need  of,  (sometimes  construed  with  the  accusative  case)  ; 
fcefdjur&tgen,  to  accuse  of,  to  charge  with  ;  bevatt'ben,  to  rob  ; 
liberie' ben,  to  disburden  ;  tt)Ut''&igen,  to  deign,  to  think  worthy 
of.  The  thing  that  we  are  accused  of,  in  need  of,  charged 
with,  robbed  of,  freed  from,  thought  worthy  of,  is  put  in  the 
genitive  case,  and  the  person  in  the  accusative  :  for  example, 
je'man&eu  t>e£  SDtov'Dctf  an'flagen,  to  accuse  a  person  of  mur- 
der ;  je'maufccn  feci*  33crvat()cvci'  befdnil'Mgen,  to  charge  a 
person  with  treachery  ;  jc'mau&CU  fct'ucS  33cvm&'gen$  bevau'* 
ben,  to  rob  a  person  of  his  fortune;  jc'tttanfccn  fcer  207u'tjc 
uberfyc'ben,  to  free  a  person  from  trouble;  jc'ttiailfcCU  gvo'fev 
(£t)'vt  Wuv'Mgcil/  to  think  a  person  worthy  of  great  honor. 

2.  The  following  take  the  genitive  case  of  the  thing,  and 
the  accusative  of  the  person  :  but  they  may  also  be  placed  in 
some  other  construction  ;  geroafy'ren,  to  grant ;  CUtbld'fcn,  to 
strip ;  entfaffen,  to  dismiss ;  entla'fcen,  to  disburden ;  ent(e'= 
tHgen,  to  free  from,  to  acquit,  to  disencumber;"  cntfct'jCtt,  to 
displace;  ubevfub'ren  or  iibcvwci'jcn,  to  convict ;  nbeqen'gen, 
to  convince  :  V>crflcl)'crn,  to  assure  ;  twwet'fcn,  to  banish.  For 
example :  je'manfcen  fet'ne6  ^JOBun'fefjcS  gewafy'ren,  to  grant  to 
a  person  his  wish,  thU  which  he  wishes  :  ci'nen  £D?aiui  fet'ne£ 
2lm'tet?  entfet'jen,  to  discharge  a  man  from  his  office;  ftrf) 
Ci'liet*  $a|i  entle'fcigen,  to  disencumber  one's  self  of  a  burden; 
fren  @d)iif&igen  fei'nes  33crbved)'en£  ubevfub'ven,  to  convict  a 
guilty  person  of  his  crime ;  3d)  Vcvftdj'cvc  bid)  inci'nev  gmtnt>'= 
fdjaft,  I  assure  thee  of  my  friendship.  Those  beginning  with 
ent  and  ft'bev,  may  be  construed  with  the  preposition  tUMl,  and 
the  dative  ;  as,  je'manDen  fcOlt  fci'nct*  iajt  cntfa'&cu,  to  free  a 
person  from  his  burden;  je'manfcen  l>on  fet'nem  Sien'jle  enttaf-- 
fen,  to  dismiss  a  person  from  his  office;  je'mcuifcen  Von  fci'nem 
3frr'tl)umc  ftberjen'gcn,  to  convince  a  person  of  his  error, 
©cro&lj'vcn,   and  fcevficl/cvn,   are  more  frequently  joined  with 


228  SYNTAX  OF  THE  VERB.  [BOOK  II. 

the  dative  of  the  person,  and  the  accusative  of  the  thing  ;  as, 
3d)  gcrcafy'fC  &il*  fcci'nc  23it'tC,  I  grant  (to)  you  your  request ; 
3d)  \>ct*ftcl)'cve  CS  Mr,  I  assure  (it  to)  you.  33evfid)'ent  is  like- 
wise combined  with  the  preposition  X>0\\ ;  as,  %d)  kilt  fcon  l>exr 
@ad)'e  t)CVJld)'cvt,  I  am  assured  of  the  thing.  —  33clel)'ven,  has 
the  genitive  of  the  thing,  in  the  expression,  je'manfccn  ci'ne£ 
fccf'fevn  bcUtyvcw,  to  inform  a  person  of  what  is  better,  to  set 
him  right.     But  commonly  feotl  is  made  use  of —  (£r  t)<Xt  mid) 

Von  fcev  @ad)-'c  biltfytt'. 

3.  Several  reflective  verbs  are  construed  with  the  genitive 
case  of  the  thing.  Such  are,  fid)  an'mafcn,  to  claim  ;  as,  ftd) 
Ci'neS  %i'ttl$  an'mafcn,  to  claim  a  title   (more  frequently  with 

the  accusative,  fid)  ct'nen  %i'Ui  an'mafcn) ;  fid)  (ci'ncr  @ad/c) 
an'nc^men,  to  interest  one's  self  in  a  thing ;  fid)  bcDcnf'Ctt, 
to  consider;  fid)  beftn'ncn,  to  think  upon;  ftd)  bet>ic'ncn,  to 
make  use  of;  fid)  bcge'bcn,  to  resign,  to  give  up  ;  fid)  frcmad)'; 
tigen,  fid)  bcmei'jtcnt,  to  make  one's  self  master  of  a  thing,  to 
gain  possession  of  it;  ftd)  Clttfyal'tcn,  to  abstain  ;  fid)  cntfd)la^ 
gen,  to  get  rid  of  a  thing ;  fid)  Cntftn'nen,  to  recollect ;  fid) 
evte'men,  to  have  mercy,  to  have  compassion  ;  fid)  CVUt'ncw, 
to  remember ;  ftd)  Ct*tt)ct)'rcn,  to  resist ;  ftd)  fmt'en,  to  rejoice 
in,  to  enjoy ;  fid)  gctvo'jtcn,  to  hope  for  with  confidence  ;  ftd) 
tubmen,  to  boast  of;  ftd)  fd)d'mcn,  to  be  ashamed  ;  fid)  nntcr-' 
fang'Clt,  Wltewnn'fccn,  to  venture  on,  to  undertake ;  ftd)  fcctrfc'; 
|)Cn,  to  be  aware  of;  ftd)  iKt'gcm,  to  refuse.*  Also  some  im- 
personate ;  as,  (£6  vcitt  or  gct'CltV  mid),  I  repent ;  SUlid)  jam'mct't, 
I  pity,  am  sorry  for  ;  &$  fccriangt'  mid),  I  desire ;  Sj?  iOtxiXft)t^t, 
ftd)  (fcet  9)tu't)C,)  It  is  worth  (the  trouble).  Many  of  these 
verbs  also  admit  other  cases  and  prepositions. 

4.  The  verbs  fcin,  to  be,  and  nxr'frCU,  to  become,  have  the 
genitive  case  after  them,  in  some  phrases ;  as,  t>Cf  SJiCl'nnng 
fcin,  to  be  of  opinion  ;  ^it'tcnt?  fcin,  to  purpose  ;  ipan'fcelS 
ci'nig  tKV'fccn,  to  agree  upon  a  bargain. 

5.  The  following  govern  either  the  genitive,  or  the  accusa- 


*  The  reflective,  or  reciprocal  pronoun,  in  most  of  these 
verbs,  is  in  the  accusative  case  :  an'mafcn  has  it  in  the  dative 
when  it  is  construed  with  the  accusative  of  the  thing ;  as,  3d) 
ma'fC  mtV  t>ic£  an,  This  I  pretend  to. 


' 


CH.  5.  §  1.]  SYNTAX  OF  THE  VERB.  229 

tive,  the  former  being  more  usual  with  some  of  them,  and  the 
latter  with  others  ;  ad)' ten,  to  mind,  to  care  about ;  bcfclVfcit, 
to  want;  fccgelj'ren,  to  desire  ;  entbety'VCU,  to  want,  to  be  with- 
out;  cvro&fy'ucu,  to  mention;  gcuic'fen,  to  enjoy;  pjU'gen,  to 
foster,  to  take  care  of;  fdjO'UCll,  to  spare  ;  fpot'tcn,  to  mock  ; 
fcergeffcn,  to  forget ;  roav'tCU,  to  attend  to,  to  take  care  of;  as, 
fei'nc£  2Im'tcS  wat'ttn,  to  attend  to  one's  office.  —  (£ct>cn£'en, 

to  remember,  to  think  of,  has  the  genitive  after  it,  and  some- 
times the  preposition  an  with  the  accusative. 

The  combination  of  the  genitive  case  with  verbs  was  for- 
merly more  frequent,  than  it  is  at  the  present  day.  It  is  found 
in  old  writings  after  many  verbs,  which  now  take  other  cases, 
or  are  followed  by  the  prepositions.  For  instance,  to  express 
a  part  of  a  thing,  the  mere  genitive  was  put,  where  a  preposi- 
tion is  now  more  commonly  employed  ;  as,  2>f}  t>c6  23vo'&C£,  Eat 
of  the  bread  ;  ^rtnf'e  t>e$  QOBci'neS,  Drink  of  the  wine;  Stimm 
t>C$  (Bctrct'fcCi?/  Take  of  the  corn.  In  modern  language  it 
would  commonly  be,  3g  von  fc>em  SBvo'Dc,  ^rinf'e  x>on  fccm 
SBei'tte. 

Exercises. 

He  is  charged3  (with)  (the1)  ingratitude2  and  accused3  of 
(the1)  slander2,  and  no  one  takes  pity  on  him,  to4  free5  him1 
(from)  his2  imprisonment3. 

Deprived4  of1  his1  former2  friends3,  he6  finds5  no  lawyer 
who  will4  engage3  in3  his1  cause2. 

While  I  mention7  his1  good2  deeds3  in4  which4  we5  rejoice6, 
I9  am8  not  willing  to7  spare8  his1  errors2  of3  which3  he4  is6 
convicted5. 

I  (do)  not2  recollect1  the  circumstances  which  you  men- 
tioned. 

Give  up  the  power  which  you  have2  assumed1. 

We  (do)  not4  want1  your2  services3. 

ingratitude,    fcic    Un'&an?fcar=    to  free,  entte'btgen. 

Hit,  f.  former,  cental ig. 

to  charge,  befd)td'fci,qen.  to  deprive,  bei'AU'frfu. 

slander,  SBcvfaum'&img,  /.  to  find,  ftlt'fceft. 

to  accuse,  an'ffagen.  a  lawyer,  ciu  §Kcc()t6'gcf  carter, 

no  one,  nic'ttiant*.  cause,  @ad)'c,  f. 

to  take  pity,  fid)  crfcar'men.  to  engage  in,  fid)  an'ncbmen, 
imprisonment,  J^aft,  f.  irr. 

20 


230  SYNTAX  OF  THE  VERB.  [BOOK  II. 

I  will,  id)  Witt,  mix.  to  recollect,  ftd)  mn'ncrn. 

while,  roal/veilb.  circumstance,  *Um'ftant>,  m. 
deed,  $l)at,  /.  1.  t>.  3.  b.  b. 

to  rejoice,  fid)  ffeu'cn.  to  mention,  get>en£'en,  mix. 

to  mention,  tXXO&fynttl*  to  give  up,  fid)  bege'ben,  irr. 

to  be  willing,  QjDideng  feitt.  power,  (StvoaW,  f. 

error,  SScrtl'nmg,  /.  1.  fc.  to  assume,  ftd)  au'mafcil. 

to    be    convicted,   ftben&ic'fim  to  want,  betmv'fen. 

fciu.  service,  £>m\\V,  m.  3.  b.  b. 
to  spare,  fcfjo'itflt. 

RULE    III. 

The  Dative  case  is  used, 

1.  After  transitive  verbs,  which,  at  the  same  time,  govern 
the  accusative.  The  accusative  is  then  called  the  case  of 
the  thing,  and  the  dative  the  case  of  the  person :  for  exam- 
ple, ©e'bcn  @ie  t>em  SDfan'ne  bas  23ncb,  Give  the  book  to  the 
man.  £>em  SDian'nc  is  the  dative  case  of  the  person,  and 
fra£  25ttd)/  the  accusative  of  the  thing.  —  The  following  tran- 
sitives  take  the  dative  of  the  person  ;  ge'ben,  to  give  ;  net)'; 
men,  to  take  from  a  person  ;  fa'gett,  to  say,  to  tell ;  (V$atyUl\, 
to  tell,  to  relate;  ant'roovten,  to  answer;  bring'en,  to  bring; 
befeb'Iett,  to  command;  bqatyUn,  to  pay;  f  of  ten,  to  cost; 
btC'tCJl/ to  offer;  bot'gen,  to  lend;  Ui't)(\\,  to  lend;  glatt'ben, 
to  believe  ;  gon'nen,  not  to  envy,  not  to  grudge ;  £ UVgett,  to 
complain  of,  to  state  in  the  form  of  complaint ;  lie'feni,  to 
furnish  ;  lei'jten,  to  show,  to  render,  as,  SMen'jte  Ici'jUn,  to 
render  services;  et'faffen,  to  remit;  evune'Dent,  to  return,  to 
give  in  turn,  to  reply;    gebie'ten,   to  command;    gelo'ben,  to 

vow ;  erlan'ben,  to  permit ;  geftat'ten,  to  allow ;  wioevra'tfyen, 
to  dissuade  from  :  also  verbs  compounded  with  ab  ;  as,  ab'bitten, 
to  beg  pardon,  ci'ncm  ei'nen  ftctyin  ab'bitten,  to  beg  pardon 
of  a  person  for  a  fault;  ab'forfcevn,  to  demand  from;  abutting: 
en,  to  force  from ;  ab'ratfyen,  to  dissuade ;  ab'fd)lagen,  to  re- 
fuse ;  ab'fpvedjen,  to  give  sentence  against  a  person,  to  deny, 
ei'nem  et'roas  ab'fpvedjm;  flb'faufcn,  to  buy  of:  some  verbs  with 
an;  as,  an'bieten,  to  offer ;  an'rattyen,  to  advise;  an'benten,  to 
signify ;  an'fciebten,  to  attribute  falsely ;  an'^eigen,  to  an- 
nounce ;  and  others  :  some  with  bei ;  as,  bei'bvingen,  to  impart ; 
bei'legen,  to  attribute ;  bei'ltieflcn,  to  impute:  some  with  ent ; 
entveiffen,  to  snatch    away ;    entjie'fyen,  to  take  away,  &c. : 


CH.  5.  §  1.]  SYNTAX  OF  THE  VERB.  231 

some  with  ttn'fcCV;  as,  roifcClTvVtfycn,  to  dissuade.  To  these  may 
be  added  the  reflective  verbs,  fid)  an'mafcn,  to  claim,  to  pre- 
tend to  ;  fid)  ein'btlfccn,  to  fancy,  to  imagine  :  as,  3fd)  ma'fc  mif 
tax  %i'td  an,  I  pretend  to  the  title  ;  %d)  biCbe  mil*  t>cn  Um'-~ 
jtanD  cin,  I  imagine  the  circumstance.  After  fid)  an'mafcn, 
the  genitive  of  the  thing  may  be  put,  instead  of  the  accusative 
(Rule  II.  3.),  and  then  the  person  is  put  in  the  accusative;  as, 

3d)  ma'fc  mid)  bes  Xi'Ute  an. 

2.   After  intransitive  verbs;    as,  an'fyangen,  to  adhere  to; 

an'liegen,  to  apply  to,  to  solicit;  gefycVren,  and  an'gcfy6ucn,  to 
belong  to ;  be gcg'nen,  to  meet,  to  happen  to ;  bef  om'mcn,  to 
agree  with,  said  of  things  that  refer  to  health,  sometimes 
also  used  in  a  figurative  sense ;  befcov'jieben,  to  impend  ; 
bet'fallcn,  to  agree  with  a  person  in  opinion ;  bet'bommen,  to 
come  near,  to  get  at ;  bci'pjttd)tcn,  to  coincide  with  in  opinion  ; 
bet'ftefyen,  to  assist;  fcanf'en,  to  thank ;  bie'nen,  to  serve ;  fero'; 
fyen,  to  threaten ;  entflic'fyen,  entge'tyen,  to  escape ;  cntfprccb'cn, 

to  answer  to,  to  correspond  to;  and  other  compounds  with 
Cltt ;  ein'fallen,  to  occur  to  the  thoughts,  or  the  memory ; 
cin'gefyen,  to  enter  the  mind,  to  be  understood;  cin'rommen, 
to  enter  the  thoughts, to  enter  the  mind;  ctn'lcud)tcn,  to  be 
evident,  to  appear;  fol'gcn,  to  follow;  frofy'nen,  to  do  ser- 
vice without  pay ;  gcbltfy'vcn,  to  be  due  ;  gcbci'fycn,  to  suc- 
ceed, to  prosper;  gcbov'ebcn,  to  obey;  gefal'lcn,  to  please; 
gera'ctyen,  geiing'en,  to  succeed ;  gleiVben,  to  be  like ;  gejie'; 

men,  to  become,  to  befit ;  bd'fcn,  to  help  ;  llltt'jCU,  to  be  use- 
ful, to  be  of  use  ;  ob'licgen,  (ci'ner  ©acb'c),  to  apply  one's 
self  to  a  thing  —  also  (as  an  impersonal)  to  be  incumbent 
upon ;  nntcrltc'gen,  to  be  overcome,  to  yield ;  feba'ben,  to 
hurt;  febei'nen,  to  seem;  fd)mct'd)C(n,  to  flatter;  jhut'mt,  to 
check,  to  restrain ;  tVOt'jcn,  to  bid  defiance ;  rPCt/l'Clt,  to 
check ;  roei'cljen,  ant?'tt>cid)en,  to  give  way,  to  yield  ;  fid)  tt?U 
l>evfct'$cn,  to  oppose,  to  resist;  rc>tt>CV|U't)en,  to  resist;  rood's 
roollen,  to  wish  well ;  jn'fallcn,  to  fall  to ;  jn'ty&rcn,  to  listen 
to,  to  hear  ;  ju'gcfyovcn,  to  belong  to  ;  Jtt'fOtttttten,  to  become, 
to  be  suitable,  to  belong  to,  to  be  due  ;  jlt'l'Cbcn,  to  speak  to, 
to  exhort ;  and  other  compounds  with  Jit :  also  these  imper- 
sonals  ;  (££  afy'ltct,  or  afm'bct  mil',  I  have  a  misgiving,  I  fore- 
see ;  &$  btiiibt',  It  pleases ;  £>?  gcbrtcfjf,  It  is  wanting  ;  (£$  grant 
mit,  I  am  fearful ;  £t?  trdumt  mil*,  I  dream  ;  (£t?  fdiei'nct  mil*, 
or  £s  f6mmt  mil*  fcor,  It  seems  to  me;  <£$  fd)iriu'Dcft  mif,  I 


232  SYNTAX  OF  THE  VERB.  [BOOK   II. 

am  giddy ;  QsS   fdjatt'&cvt  mix,  I  shudder  ;  &g  fcevfdjfagt'  mil* 
nid)tt?,  It  makes  no  difference  to  me. 

3.  After  some  verbs  which  may  also  be  properly  used  with 
the  accusative :  an'? ommcn,  to  come  upon  —  SDiitr,  or  mid), 
t'ommt  §ltvd)t  an,  Fear  comes  upon  me ;  90itv,  or  mid),  t>aud)t, 
It  seems  to  me  (the  accusative  is  more  usual) ;  5t)tiv,  or  mid), 
t'hlt,  I  loathe.  J^ei'fcn,  to  bid,  to  desire,  occurs  with  the  da- 
tive of  the  person,  and  the  accusative  of  the  thing  —  c$Btt  tyat 
Ml*  t>a£  gefyft'fcn  ?  Who  desired  you  to  do  that  ?  but  the  person 
may  also  be  put  in  the  accusative,  933cv  fyat  bid)  t>a£  gcfyei'fcu  ? 
The  same  may  be  said  of  lefy'ren,  to  teach,  which  either  is 
followed  by  two  accusatives,  one  ,of  the  thing,  and  the  other 
of  the  person  ;  or  by  the  dative  of  the  person  and  the  accu- 
sative of  the  thing. 

Observation.  The  dative  expresses  advantage,  or  disad- 
vantage, and  answers  to  the  English  prepositions  to  and  for; 
as,  3)ir  fclnn'net  t>ie  ©on'ne,  For  thee  the  sun  shines;  2)tt* 
laciycn  Die  gcl'fccr,  To  thee  the  fields  smile;  £>ir  fyeu'len  t)ic 
QODin'fcC,  To  thee  (against  thee)  the  winds  howl. 

Exercises. 

• 

I  did  for  him  every  thing  {which)  he  commanded2  me1. 

I  told  him  so.  I  advised  him  to3  resist4  their1  flattery2,  and 
dissuaded  him  from4  lending5  them1  any2  thing3. 

(Do)  not3  refuse1  them2  what  they  demand2  from1  you1,  if 
it  belongs2  to1  them1. 

You  cannot3  get5  at4  him2,  as  long  as  she  defends2  Kim1. 

You  will  meet  with  (it  will  meet  you)  what  you  have2  de- 
served1 ;  it  will  do3  you1  good2. 

I  apply  myself  to  this  business,  although  it  is  net  incumbent 
upon  me. 

It  seemed  to  me  as  if  all  that  he  related2  to1  you1,  was  aimed 
at  me. 

I  fancied  it  to  myself,  although  I  shuddered4  at1  the2 
thought.3 

to  do,  (ci'jicn.  so,  t>aS,  (dem.  pron.) 

every  thing,  allet?.  to  advise,  va'tfynt,  irr. 

to  command,  bcfefy'lcn,  irr.  flattery,  @d)mcid)cfei',  /.  1.  t>. 

to  tell,  fa'acn,  to  resist,  wit>cv|U'I}cn. 


CH.  5.  §  1.]  SYNTAX  OF  THE  VERB.  233 

to  dissuade,  ab'ratfycn,  irr.         to  do  good,  rt>of?f  befom'men. 

any  thing,  tl''gent>  Ct'tt?a6.  to  apply  one's  self,  ob'ltcgCit. 

to  lend,  (ci'fycn.  business,  (Scfdwft',  n.  3.  b.  6. 

to  refuse,  fcerroci'gmi.  although,  nncrrofyh 

to  demand,  ab'foDCVU.  to     be     incumbent,    ob'Iicqcil. 

if,  »enn.  (See  Book  II.  Ch.  5.  §  2.  F.) 

to  belong,  gefyfc'vcn.  to  seem,  fc()ci'ucn,  irr. 

I  can,  id)  faun,  mix.  as  if,  a(S  ot\ 

to  get  at,  bei'fommcn.  to  relate,  n$al}'U\\. 

as   long    as,   fo    (ang  <l{$,   or     to  be  aimed  at,  gel'tCU,  irr. 

folaug'.  to  fancy,  ciu'bd&en. 

to  defend,  Wrtfyei'fcigClt.  at,  t)0l\  (Dat.) 

I  meet,  c$  begcg'net  miv.  thought,  (8c&ant'e,  m.  3.  c.  c. 

to  deserve,  Vev&te'nen.  I  shudder,  mil*  fd)au't>ert. 

RULE  IV. 

The  Accusative  is  governed  by  active  verbs  ;  as,  3>dj  lic'bc 
tttCiU  33a'ter(au&,  I  love  my  country. 

Neuter  verbs  also  may  sometimes  be  used  actively,  and  gov- 
ern an  accusative ;  as,  (Si'ucn  gu'tcit  ftampf  fam'pfnt,  To  fight 
a  good  fight ;  where  Mm'pfcn,  is  joined  with  the  accusative, 
though  it  is  generally  used  without  any  case. 

There  are  verbs  that  take  a  double  accusative  ;  as,  bei'fen, 
to  call ;  ncu'ucn,  to  name;  fdjcftcn,  to  abuse;  fdnm'pfni,  to  call 
by  an  opprobrious  name.  For  example  :  %d)  tyci'fe  (or  ncn'ltc) 
it)U  ct'ncil  £effcett,  I  call  him  a  hero  ;  (£r  fdnlt  (or  fcfjimpfte) 
itjtl  Ci'ncn  S5ctnVgcv,  He  called  him  a  cheat.  To  which  may 
be  added  fra'gcn,  to  ask,  as,  (Si'ncn  Ct'vrnU"  fra'gcn,  To  ask  a  per- 
son something  ;  but  here  it  is  as  well  to  make  use  of  a  pre- 
position ;  as,  (£t'ncn  um  Ct'rcaS  fra'gcn,  To  ask  a  person  about 
something.  Of  Icty'rcn,  to  tench,  and  fyci'fcn,  to  command, 
which  sometimes  have  a  double  accusative,  mention  has  al- 
ready been  made  (Rule  in.  3.) 

Exercises. 

He  lived  a  hero's  life,  and  died  a  hero's  death. 
He  calls  himself  a  self-taught  (man),  but  others  denominate 
him  a  bold  empiric. 

to  live,  (c'ben.  to  die,  jlcr'bcn,  irr. 

hero's  life,  Qd'MlxUimi,  n.  3.     hero's  death,  £cf  fcCtttOfc/  m.  3. 
a.  a,  b.  6. 

20* 


234  SYNTAX  OF  THE  VERB.  [BOOK  II. 

to  call,  lten'nett.  to  denominate,  fyei'fm. 

self-taught,  ftlb\V$tUt)Vt.  bold,  bcvrce'gCtt. 

but,  a'bcv.  empiric,  Qsmpi'rifef  m.  3.  a.  0. 
others,  (inhere. 


§  2.    ARRANGEMENT. 

A.  Indicative  Mood. 

The  Indicative  Mood  generally  stands  after  the  subject,  and 
before  the  object. 

Except, 

1.  Those  instances,  mentioned  in  Book  II.  Ch.  2.  §  2.  Rules 
i.  and  n. 

2.  When  the  verb  must  be  at  the  end,  that  is  to  say,  not 
only  after  the  subject,  but  also  after  the  object,  and  all  words 
connected  with  it.     This  is  necessary, 

(1.)  When  the  member  of  the  sentence,  to  which  the  verb 
belongs,  commences  with  a  relative  pronoun,  as,  t>ev,  roel'djCV/ 
TOW,  VoaS ;  or  a  relative  adverb,  as,  tttbct*',  from  whence ; 
fcavum'/  for  what ;  roarum',  n>c$fyafb'  or  rocsfyal'bcn,  rccsrce'gcu, 
for  which  reason,  for  which,  wherefore  ;  *  V>0U  IMn'UCU/  from 
whence  ;  \T>Q,  where  ;  and  the  compounds  of  it>0,  as,  reckon', 
linger/,  roomif,  roomtS',  &c.  Examples :  2)er  ©cfevifc'jteUev 
\\\  in  fdjdt'jcn,  TOel'c()cr  t>ie  SSefSi'&mmg  tcr  QBafyr'fyeit  ^tm 

*$tt>CC'f?e  fyat,  That  writer  is  to  be  esteemed,  who  has  the  pro- 
motion of  truth  for  his  object.  %<[)  ten'tte  ei'uen  £D?vinn,  t>n 
fid)  mit  SKecfct  mei'nen  grcunb  nennt,  I  know  a  man  who  justly 
calls  himself  my  friend.  ^Ba*  fcClU  iaf'tCl*  Uttt)  fccf'fctt  Stct'jcn 
folgt,  beret'tet  fid)  ci'ne  fcbmerj'ttdjcSKcu'c,  He  who  follows  vice 
and   its  charms,  prepares  for    himself   a  painful    repentance. 


*  The  signification  of  these  words  as  relatives,  must  be  dis- 
tinguished from  the  other  meanings  which  they  bear,  either  as 
adverbs  or  conjunctions.  3>a'l)CV,  thence,  therefore ;  fta'rmtt/ 
for  that  reason,  therefore  ;  roantm'/  IBCSroe'ciCH,  why,  for  what 
reason,  cause  the  subject  to  be  placed  after  the  verb. 


CH.  5    ^  2.]  SYNTAX  OF  THE  VERB.  235 

The  verb,  in  the  foregoing  examples,  is  at  the  end  of  that 
member  of  the  sentence,  to  which  the  relative  pronouns, 
WCfdjer/  t>CV,  roeu,  belong.  It  is  thus  with  the  adverbs  alluded 
to :  for  instance,  3)cv  Dxt,  roo  id)  tjtu'tt  met'ncn  greuno  fat), 
The  place  where  to-day  I  saw  my  friend.  ^OBofytn'  man  oatf 
2(u'ge  nut  roen'Det,  evblidt'  man  nidjte  ate  GHeno,  Wherever 
one  turns  one's  eve,  one  perceives  nothing  but  misery.  The 
verbs  fafy,  and  tr>CU/t»Ct,  are  put  last,  in  consequence  of  tt)0,  and 

roofytn'. 

(2)  The  verb  is  put  at  the  end,  after  interrogatives 
(whether  pronouns,  adverbs,  or  conjunctions),  when  they 
form  indirect  questions.  Examples :  (Si*  frdgt  mid),  reel*  t>ic'; 
fen  90?ov'gcn  bet  3»t)'nen  roar,  He  asks  me  who  was  with  you 
this  morning.  QOBiffen  @ie,  n&el'cljes  ^ncl)  tx  tyeu'te  in  bem 
©iiv'tcn  (&€  ?  Do  you  know  what  book  he  read  to-day  in  the 

garden  ?  ©a'gen  @ie  mix,  roas  fftr  ei'nen  (Bruno  er  fur  fein 

Zlus'Meibcn  atl'gibt,  Tell  me  what  ground  he  alleges  for  his 
staying  out.  3Ccr,  mefdjer,  rOaS  fat*  eilt,  interrogative  pro- 
nouns, serve  here  to  form  indirect  questions,*  and  the  verb 
stands  last.  3d)  ton  ntcl)t  fa'gen,  ton  e$  fid)  ju'getragen  l)at,  I 
cannot  tell  how  it  has  happened  ;   %d)  moclj'tc  ttnf'fen,  Ob  r-te'le 

tin'ti  bet  fet'jigev  fyeiffer  'iBit'ecruna,  auf  tern  gel'oc  fein  ton1* 

©en,  I  should  like  to  know,  whether,  during  the  present  hot 
weather,  many  people  will  be  in  the  field.  333te,  and  ob, 
constitute  indirect  questions,  and  the  verb  is  at  the  end. 

(3)  After  conditional,  causal,  and  consecutive  conjunc- 
tions. These  are:  ate,  t>a,  bettor',  t'ift,  bte,  bafevn';  OamiC  (in 
order  that) ;  Dafj,  auf  bag,  (in  order  that)  ;  falls,  tin  §al'(e,  (in 
case  that) ;  gletdwie' ;  intern'  (since,  because) ;  nactj&cm' ; 
nUU  (when  it  signifies  since,  after —  DTun  CS  eitt'Utat  gefclje'tyCtt 
ijr,  Since  it  once  has  been  done);  ob,  obfd)OU',  obgleid)',  ob- 
WOW,  frit,  and  fcitOem'  ;  fin'temat  (since,  whereas)  ;  fo 
(when  it  means,  if) ;  fo  ba(b,  or  fo  ba(t>  ate  ;  fo  lang'e  or  fo 
lang'e  ate;  fo  wit,  or  fo  roett  ate;  rodfy'renb,  rodfy'reno  bag; 


*  It  is  probably  understood  by  the  reader,  what  is  meant 
by  indirect  questions  :  but  there  will  remain  no  doubt,  if  we 
change  some  of  the  foregoing  into  direct  questions,  to  show 
the  difference,  viz.  3£rv  war  bn  %ty\m\  ?  Who  was  with  you* 
SBet'djeS  SSud)  fa$  er  ?  What  book  did  he  read  I 


236  SYNTAX  OF  THE  VERB.  [bOOK  II. 

rcetl ;   mm,  wmsUity,  rocnnfdjon' ;   wie,   roicttofyf,    too- 

fern',  tt?0  md)t.  To  these  is  to  be  added  the  comparative 
conjunction  je,  which,  beginning  the  prior  member,  removes 
the  verb  to  the  end.  Example  :  %  ( £  W  t>CU  2tuf ntfyt'  in  t>Ci* 
^tat>t  b  e  m  e  l*  f'  t  e,  When  he  perceived  the  tumult  in  the 
city;  35 e Do v'  id)  oni  3£alD  emtd)t'  fyat'te,  Before  I  had 
reached  the  wood ;  b  i  $  oie  ©on'ne  Me  evjtavv'ten  gcl'oer  auf - 

IdfCJl  10  1 1*  0,  till  the  sun  shall  loosen  the  congealed  fields ;  2)  a 
Oct'  (BcfanD'te  in  Sou'DOU  an'fam,  When  the  ambassador  ar- 
rived in  London ;  3  e  lano/er  oev  Sftnfi'fer  Me'fe  (Se'genjUnOc 
b  e  t  r  a  d)'  t  e  t  e,  Iff' to  mefyv  benmn'oerte  cr  fie,  The  more  the 
artist  contemplated  these  objects,  the  more  he  admired  them. 

By  the  force  of  the  aforesaid  conjunctions,  the  verb  is  put 
at  the  end  of  the  member  of  the  sentence  to  which  it  be- 
longs, and  sometimes  even  after  a  subordinate  member,  con- 
nected with  it.  For  example  :  £>a  id)  oen  SHann,  rocl'djer  fo 
C'Oel  geoadjt',  Cfy're  HUD  lie'be,  Since  I  honor  and  love  the 
man,  who  has  thought  so  nobly.  In  this,  the  principal  mem- 
ber is,  t>a  id)  oeu  90?ann  efy've  uuO  tie'be,  with  which  is  con- 
nected a  subordinate  or  secondary  member,  n>el'd)Cl*  fo  e'Oel 
9CDad)t',  and  the  verb  of  the  former  is  placed  after  this.  It 
need  not  necessarily  be  so  ;  for  the  sentence  might  also  run 
thus,  33a  id)  Den  Miami  efy've  tmt>  lic'be,  roel'djcr  fo  e'oef  ge- 
t>ad)t'.  It  depends  upon  euphony  and  perspicuity,  whether  the 
one  or  the  other  is  to  be  preferred. 

The  same  principles  apply  to  the  infinitive,  with  the  preposi- 
tion ju.  The  verb,  influenced  by  the  above  conjunctions,  may 
be  put  after  the  infinitive  ;  as,  QGDeil  id)  mid)  uid)t  JU  ^m^'m 
rofttt'fdjc,  Because  I  do  not  like  to  quarrel ;  or  before  it,  ^XBed 
id)  ntd)t  roun'fdjc,  tniel)  ju  janf'en.    When  the  infinitive,  with 

$U,  has  other  words  belonging  to  it,  for  instance,  cases  of  de- 
clension which  it  governs,  it  is  preferable,  on  account  of  the 
extent  which  it  then  assumes,  to  place  it  with  its  dependent 
words  after  the  verb,  lest  the  sentence  should  become  heavy 
and  intricate.  Ex.  33a  id)  nnmfciyte,  a(1emei'ue@ad)/en  fobalV 
ate  mSs'Itd)  in  @id)'evfyett  ju  bvina/en,  As  I  wished  to  bring 

all  my  things  in  safety,  as  soon  as  possible  ;  here  the  sentence 
would  be  rendered  heavy  by  placing  the  verb  ttntnfd)'te,  after 
the  infinitive  bving'eit. 

The  infinitive,  without  the  preposition  £U,  is  immediately 
governed  by  the  verb,  as  much  as  a  case  of  declension  ;  and 
the  verb,  under  these  circumstances,  must  stand  after  it ;  as, 

VBcnn  n  oas  *3ud)  fe'fcu  m^t  If  he  wil1  read  the  book' 


CH.  5.  §  2.] 


SYNTAX  OF  THE  VERB. 


237 


where  it  would  be  less  natural  to  let  the  infinitive  follow  after 
the  verb,  as,  ^OBeiltt  CV  rotll  MS  95 ltd)  lefeit. 

Exercises. 

Whoever  has  a  good  conscience.     He  who  understands  it 
The  color  with  which  the  wall  is  covered. 
Do  you  know  what  is  meant  by  it? 
Nobody  knows  whom  he  aims  at. 
As  soon  as  we  had  recovered  ourselves. 
Unless  all  this  be  a  delusion. 

The  more  he  saw  of  the  country,  so  much  the  more  he 
disliked  the  thought  of  returning. 

He  is  safe  if  he  will  follow  my  advice. 


whoever,  roer  tlltt*. 

good,  $ut. 

conscience,  (Sermf  fen,  n.  3.  a. 

he  who,  roev. 

to  understand,  fcCVfU'fyctt. 

color,  gar 'be,  /. 

with  which,  rDOtttit'. 

wall,  <2Bant>,  f. 

to  cover,  ttbfVjte'fyett,  irr. 

to  know,  rtnffeil,  mix. 

by  it,  &amit'. 

to  mean,  mci'ncn. 

nobody,  nic'maut*. 

at,  cutf.  (Ace.) 

to  aim,  ab'jtclctt. 

as  soon  as,  fo  bait)  al£. 


to  recover  one's  self,  fid)  er< 
(jo'ten. 

unless,  roofeni'  ltid)t. 

delusion,  idw'f djimg,  /- 

the  more,  je  nutjV. 

of,  bou.  (Dat.) 

country,  $ant>,  n.  3.  b.  e. 

to  see,  fc'fyctl,  irr. 

so  much  the  more,  t>cf  to  mel)r. 

I  dislike,  mil*  mtSfdllt',  irr. 

thought,  (Scfcauf'e,  m.  3.  c.  C. 

to  return,  JUVUrf't'cfyim 

safe,  ft'dKl*. 

advice,  SKatb,  m.  3.  b. 

to  follow,  fol'gctt.  {Dat.) 


B.  Subjunctive  Mood. 

The  Subjunctive  Mood,  as  to  position,  is  subject  to  the 
same  rules,  as  the  indicative.  When  it  denotes  a  wish,  or 
surprise,  it  often  begins  the  sentence  ;  as,  (Sc'be  e£  feet'  J£>im'= 
tticl!  May  Heaven  grant  it!  STOcfe'te  fcic  ©ou'nc  t>od)  fd)Ci'ncn ! 
Oh,  that  the  sun  would  shine  !  J^dt'tc  id)S  t>od)  uid)t  gegfauftt', 
I  should  not  have  thought  it !  This  is  always  the  case  when 
the  conditional  conjunction,  rtfCtttl/  if,  is  omitted  :  ^a'l'C  id) 
fytcv  geroc'fen,  Had  I  been  here  ;  for  9Bcnu  id)  fyicr  geroe'fen 
Vofr'Vt,  If  I  had  been  here. 


238  SYNTAX  OF  THE  VERB.  [BOOK  II. 

C.  Imperative  Mood. 

The  Imperative  precedes  the  personal  pronoun,  which  is 
the  subject,  io'bt  t>U,  praise  thou ;  lo'be  tX,  let  him  praise  ; 
io'btn  fte,  let  them  praise. 

D.  Infinitive  Mood. 

The  Infinitive  comes  after  the  object,  and  the  other  words 
of  a  sentence,  except  the  indicative  and  subjunctive,  when 
these,  for  reasons  assigned  before,  are  put  last.  Examples: 
St*  nmnfdjt  bie  iatci'nifdje  ©pva'dje  gninb'Iid)  in  lev'ucn,  He 
wishes  to  learn  the  Latin  language  accurately,  SDic'fcl*  SDTauit 
fann  Sng'lifd),  gvanjo'ftfd),  £>cutfd),  unb  DcvfciW&ene  an'bere 
©pra'cfeen  *00U  SttVO'pa  VC'tm,  This  man  can  speak  English, 
French,  German,  and  several  other  tongues  of  Europe,  let'* 
ttttt  and  ve'bcil  are  infinitives. 

This  rule  affects  the  future  tense,  because  it  is  com- 
posed of  an  infinitive  and  the  third  auxiliary.  The  infini- 
tive, here,  is  placed  in  the  same  manner,  as  in  the  exam- 
ples above    stated,  that  is  to  say,  after  the  object  and  other 

words ;  as,  3d)  roer'be  mov'geu  Me  (Se'gcnb  befe'fjen,  I  shall 
to-morrow  take  a  view  of  the  country.  SSefc'fycn  is  the  in- 
finitive, belonging  to  the  auxiliary  XOCt'bt,  with  which  it 
constitutes  the  future  tense  ;  but  this  connexion  does  not  al- 
ter its  position  in  the  sentence.  —  When  the  future  in  the  in- 
dicative or  subjunctive  mood  must  be  placed  at  the  end,  on 
account  of  some  preceding  word,  which  requires  that  colloca- 
tion, the  infinitive  that  is  used  in  forming  the  future  must  be 
put  before  the  auxiliary  ;    as,   93?an   glaubt,   baft  ber    Stai'fet 

xxiit  t>m  gtranjo'fm  gvie'&en  mactVen  roef'be,  It  is  thought  that 

the  Emperor  will  make  peace  with  the  French.  Here  the 
infinitive  mcKlVen,  is  before  the  auxiliary  tKt'be.  When  the 
future  tense  of  the  passive  voice  stands  in  this  predicament, 
the  auxiliary  verb,  in  the  indicative  or  subjunctive,  is  often 
put  before  the  infinitive,  which  is  done  to  prevent,  by  means 
of  the  intervening  participle,  the  immediate  repetition  of 
roev'ben :  for  example,  3>d)  evroav'te,  H§  *oerfd)te'beuc  @ad)'cn 
atad)  ttu'fevm  Jpau'fe  rocr'ben  gebt*ad)t'  focr'ben,  I  expect,  that 
several  things  will  be  brought  to  our  house. 

Sometimes  two  infinitives  stand  together,  one  of  which 
governs  the  other ;    then    the   governing  one  should    be   put 


CH.  5.  §  2.]  SYNTAX  OF  THE  VERB.  239 

after  that  which  is  governed  ;  as,  (St  WOfl'tC  fie  U\d)t  fyemn'= 
fouuncn  (affcit,  He  would  not  let  them  come  in.  Here  lap = 
fcit,  the  governing  infinitive,  is  preceded  by  the  other,  fycrciil's 
fcttuncu,  which  is  governed.  But  this  rule  is  not  always  ob- 
served, as  the  following  example  proves  ;  (£tr  tyat  it)\\  fc()0U 
mcfjr  alt?  jefyn'mat  rattf'jfcn  ijb'vni,  He  has  been  obliged  more 
than  ten  times  to  hear  him  —  instead  of  ^6'1'Cll  muf'fcn,  which 
is  also  used. 

The  infinitive  is  found,  now  and  then,  at  the  very  begin- 
ning of  a  sentence,  and  in  that  position  bears  a  strong  em- 
phasis ;  as,  SCcm'men  voiii  id)  jroav,  Come,  indeed,  I  will;  a'bctr 
fc&rci'ben  fcarf  ic()  utcl)t,  but  write,  I  must  not. 

The  infinitive  may  be  employed,  in  a  substantive  capacity, 
as  the  subject  or  object ;  and  is  then  placed  accordingly. 

E.  Participles. 

RULE  I. 

When  the  participle,  either  present  or  past,  is  used  as  an 
adjective,  it  has  its  position  accordingly.  It  precedes  the 
noun,  and  follows  the  case  it  governs ;  as,  bie  al'lc£  bde'bcn&e 
©Oit'ne,  the  all-animating  sun  ;  fcct*  Mm  23U§  gettof  fene 
23ftUm,  the  tree  struck  by  lightning. 

RULE  II. 

The  participle,  when  it  stands  in  apposition,  is  put  after 
the  words  with  which  it  is  connected  ;  as,  ba£  Vbud),  i)0U 
fcem  ^a'tcv  gcfd)vie'bcit,  the  book  written  by  the  father  ;  2)er 
al'te  gcl&'fyerr,  m'bet  bto'fycnfc  nod)  fcbmei'djcfafc,  fon'bcnt 
t'tt'fyig  bcfcfy'Ienb,  jtitt'tc  ben  flu'fhlljv,  The  old  general,  neither 
threatening  nor  flattering,  but  calmly  commanding,  quelled 
the  sedition. 

RULE    III. 

When  combined  with  the  auxiliary  verbs,  the  past  participle 
has  its  place  after  the  object  and  other  words  ;  and  is,  there- 
fore, generally  found  towards  the  end  of  the  sentence.  St*  ijt 
in  ion'&on  geroc'fen,  He  has  been  in  London  —  ift  gcroefen,  the 
participle  gc»C'fcu  at  the  end.  %d)  tja'be  fycu'tc  ba£  25ud)  ge-' 
le'fai,  I  have  read  the  book  to-day  —  \)b'bt  gcU'fCtt,     St'  UHVb 


240  SYNTAX  OF  THE  VERB.  [BOOK  II. 

mit  9ted)t  etn  gro'fer  ?D?ann  gencmnt',  He  is  justly  called  a 

great  man.  If  the  auxiliary,  by  the  power  of  some  pronoun  or 
conjunction,  be  removed  to  the  end,  the  past  participle 
stands  before  it ;  as,  2)ic  Xfyb'ttn,  Wl'd)l  V>0U  t>em  2)td)'ter.  gc= 
fdjil'&ert  ltiCV'^CH,  The  deeds  which  are  depicted  by  the  poet : 
the  auxiliary  TCCf'fccn,  at  the  end,  because  of  the  pronoun 
V0(i'd)t ;  the  participle,  gefdnl'bevt,   before  it.      %d)  tt>ei£   t$, 

roei(  id)  ten  SDlann  felbjt  gefe'fyen  t?abe,  I  know  it,  because  I 

have  seen  the  man  myself:  the  conjunction  YOtii,  removes  the 
verb  tjiX'bt  to  the  end,  and  the  participle  gefe'fyen,  precedes  it. 
—  When  the  past  participle  and  the  infinitive  of  an  auxiliary 
verb  come  together,  the  participle  is  placed  before  the  infini- 
tive; as,  gcle'fen  fya'ben,  to  have  read;  ge(tefrt'  roev'fccn,  to 
be  loved.  Should  it  so  happen,  that  the  participle,  the  infin- 
itive, and  the  verb  definite,  that  is  to  say,  either  the  indica- 
tive or  subjunctive,  meet  together  at  the  end  of  a  sentence, 
the  arrangement  may  either  be  thus,  participle,  infinitive, 
indicative  or  subjunctive,  £ftad)t>em'  id)  M$  33lld)  gck'fcit  Ijft's 
ben  lt>ei*'t>e,  After  I  shall  have  read  the  book  ;  or  the  verb 
definite,    may    be    put    before   the   participle   and   infinitive, 

Stad)&ein'  id)  t>a$  23  ud)  roev'&e  gete'fen  fya'ben. 

Examples. 

The  lame  courier.  A  much-promising  commencement. 
Three  roasted  apples.  Let  us  all,  hoping  (for)  the  best,  and 
prepared  for  the  worst,  persevere  in  our  undertaking.  They 
have  accomplished  their  task.  The  plant  which  is  describ- 
ed by  Linnaeus,  is  not  the  same.  Before  the  clock  shall  have 
ceased  striking. 

to  be  lame,  fyinf'en.  to  prepare,  faf'fen. 

courier,  230'te,  m.  %  a.  in,  in.  (Dat.) 

much,  Vief.  undertaking,  Untewefy'men,  n. 

to  promise,  toevfprecb'en.  3.  a. 

commencement,  Zhi'ftUlg/  m.        to  persevere,  befyrtV'ven. 

to  roast,  v&'ften.  task,  Idif'gabe,  /. 

apple  *2ty'fef,  m.  3.  a.  a.  to  accomplish,  tootfcn'tCH. 

let  us,  laffet  nn$.  plant,  spflton'&e. 

the  best,  fcas  93ep  te.  by,  fcon. 

to  hope,  fyoffen.  to  describe,  tefd)vet'ben,  irr. 

for,  anf.  (Ace.)  the  same,  (i>er,  t>ie,  t>a£)  nam'* 

the  worst,  t>a$  ©cfelimm'jte.  liclx. 


CH.  5.  §  2.]  SYNTAX  OF  THE  VERB.  241 

before,  c'fye.  to   cease     striking,    au£'fc()(a: 

clock,  ©(octc,  f.  gen,  irr. 

F.   Compound  Verbs. 

Separable  compound  verbs  have  the  particle  separated 
from  the  verb,  when  this  is  at  the  end  of  the  sentence  ; 
and  require  it  to  be  placed  after  the  object  and  other 
words,  including  even  a  relative  or  intermediate  member 
of  the  sentence.  3>cl)  ncty'me  3(71*  (Pcfcftenf'  mit  2>an£' bat  fait 
(lit,  I  receive  your  present  with  gratitude  ;  verb  an'ncfymcn,  to 
receive  —  the  particle  an,  at  the  end.  @ic  fa'men  in  2ln'fe; 
fyung  Mc'fcr  ©defe'e  bait  itkvcin',  They  soon  agreed  with  respect 
to  this  matter  ;  verb  itfcevctn'fammcn.  SUfy'men  @ic  M$ 
23nd)  mit,  Take  the  book  with  you;  verb  mit'nefymen.  (5r 
fat}  fcte'fe  35cge'(H,nl}citcH/  trel'djc  nun  nidjt  mefyr  ju  au'&ern 
fin l),  Vovau^',  He  foresaw  these  events  which  are  now  no  more 
to  be  altered.  But  the  particle  is  generally  put  at  the  end  of 
the  first  part  of  a  sentence  if  the  latter  part  is  merely  con- 
nected with  it  by  a  preposition  ;  as,  Q;r  fat)  VOraut?',  baf,  fctc'fc 
SJcgcfrcnfyeitcn  crfol'gcn  nntr'&cn,  He  foresaw  that  these  events 
would  follow.  In  this  sentence  the  particle  i)0?(Ut6',  before, 
cannot  stand  after  ronv'&cn.  When  the  verb,  in  consequence 
of  a  pronoun,  or  a  conjunction,  is  brought  to  the  end  of  the 
sentence,  the  particle  is  not  separated  from  it :  as,  2)a  id)  3fyt* 
©Cfcbcnf  mit  SDanf'fcavfait  an'ne^me,  As  I  received  your 
present  with  gratitude.  The  verb  (M'ncbmc  stands  last,  on 
account  of  the  conjunction  M,  and  remains,  for  this  reason, 
united  with  the  particle. 

The  infinitive  mood,  and  the  past  participle  have  their  place 
after  the  object,  and  at  or  near  the  end  of  the  sentence : 
therefore  the  particle  is  not  separated,  except  by  JU,  in  the 
infinitive,  and  by  ge,  in  the  past  participle ;  as,  mit  ]\l 
netjmen,  mit'genommen.  $U,  however,  does  not  always  ac- 
company the  infinitive.  From  what  has  been  said,  it  ap- 
pears, that  the  separation  principally  occurs  in  the  indicative, 
subjunctive,  and  imperative  moods. 

Exercises. 

May  it  serve  to  your  advantage. 
Praise  him. 

He  tries  to  find  the  philosopher's  stone. 

21 


242 


SYNTAX  OF  THE  ADVERB. 


[BOOK  II. 


I  shall  now  go  to  rest. 
They  hope  that  the  war  will  be  prolonged. 
He  predicts  that  one  after  the  other  will  be  arrested. 
Why  should  we  not2  bid4  him1  go3. 
He3  indeed4  can2not5  flatter1,  but  he  wishes  to  console. 
Give  up  this  plan  !     Could   I  foreknow  this  ?     They  have 
sent  off  the  girl.     He  continued  to  urge  him  eagerly. 


to,  pu  (Dat.) 

advantage,    33ov'ff)eU,    m.   3. 

b.  b. 
to  serve,  tue'nen. 
to  praise,  (o'bcn. 
to  try,  fid)  fcemiVfym. 
the    philosopher's    stone,    t)Cf 

©tein  fret*  c2I3ct'fcn. 

to  find,  jtn^cn. 

to  rest,  £ttv  SHu'tye. 

to  go,  fid)  bcge'ben. 

to  hope,  ijof  fen. 

that,  &a§. 

war,  XrtCg/  m. 

to   be  prolonged,   fid)   itt   fcte 

Ung'e  jic'fyen. 
to  predict,  t>orau$'fagcn. 
after,  nad).  (Dat.) 
to  arrest,  fcerfyaf  ten. 


why,  toatwn'. 

I  shall,  id)  foil,  mix. 

not,  nid)t. 

to  go,  ge'fyen. 

to  bid,  fyei'fen. 

to  flatter,  fd)mei/d)e[n. 

I  can,  id)  fann,  mix. 

indeed,  fvei'Iid). 

but,  a'bev. 

to  wish,  nntn'fdjen. 

to  console,  tvo'jten. 

to  give  up,  aufgeben,  irr. 

plan,  spian. 

to  foreknow,  fcOVauS'imflen. 
to  send  off,  fort'fcljitfen. 
girl,  SDU&'djen,  «.  3.  a.  a. 
to  continue,  fort' faf^l'ttl/  irr. 
eagerly,  tyefttg. 
to  urge,  ju'fe^en.  (Dat.) 


CHAPTER  VI. 


ADVERBS. 


ARRANGEMENT. 


RULE  I. 


An  adverb  joined  to  an  adjective,  must  always  stand  before 
it ;  as,  fefyr  gnt,  very  good  ;  nid)t  fd)(ed)t,  not  bad. 


CH.  6.]  SYNTAX  OF  THE  ADVERB.  243 


RULE  II. 


When  the  adverb  belongs  to  the  verb,  it  is  put  after  the 
verb  (unless  the  verb  be  at  the  end  of  the  sentence,  Book  II. 
Ch.  5.  §  2.  A.)  and,  in  general,  also  after  the  object.  (5l*  ht- 
tjan'Mit  t>cn  ®e'cicn|tan&  foorttejf'ficlj,  He  treats  the  subject 
excellently  ;  fcovtl'Cjf' lid)  is  the  adverb.  Such  adverbs,  how- 
er,  as  denote  time,  (for  example,  oft,  often  ;  fycUi'ftg,  fre- 
quently ;  fycu'tC,  to-day ;  gcf'tevn,  yesterday,  and  the  like,)  are 
commonly  placed  immediately  after  the  verb,  and  before  the 
object.  Besides  the  adverb  cannot,  with  propriety,  be  placed 
after  the  infinitive,  or  past  participle.  Moreover,  unless  the 
verb  be  at  the  end,  the  adverb  cannot  stand  between  the  sub- 
ject and  the  verb. 


RULE    III. 

For  the  sake  of  emphasis,  the  adverb  may  be  removed  from 
its  place  towards  the  beginning  of  the  sentence ;  as,  3>d)  f)<Vbc 
fycu'te  M$  $5ud)  gele'fcn,  I  have  to-day  read  the  book ;  which 
makes  the  notion  of  tjtU'tt,  to-day,  more  perceptible  than,  3d) 
tjil'bt  M$  *8ud)  fyeu'te  gelc'fcn.  This  seems  to  be  the  reason 
why  adverbs  implying  time,  are  commonly  placed  before  the 
object :  namely,  they  are  thus  rendered  more  distinct.  But 
to  make  the  emphasis  so  evident  that  it  cannot  be  mistaken, 
the  adverb  should  be  put  at  the  beginning;  JFJcu'tC  \)<\'b(  id)  t)a£ 
STilS'tjont  gcfc'fycn,  To-day  I  have  seen  the  rhinoceros,  [n  this 
remark  are  not  included  the  interrogative  adverbs,  such  as, 
rote,  how;  vpamt,  when;  l&awm',  why;  rOC6tt)C'gcn,  wherefore; 
H)0,  where;  which,  as  they  can  be  placed  nowhere  but  in 
the  beginning,  derive  no  particular  distinction  from  that  po- 
sition. 

There  are  adverbs  that  in  no  place  seem  to  be  susceptible 
of  an  emphasis,  viz.  those  which  express  chance,  probabili- 
ty, and  similar  vague  and  undefined  ideas  —  tucllcic'ot',  per- 
haps ;  fecrmuttj'Iid),  probably ;  nwfyr'fcfceittUdj,  very  likely ; 
and  others.  As  no  difference  arises,  in  the  purport  of  the 
sentence,  from  their  situation,  they  may  be  put  any  where, 
even  between  the  subject  and  the  verb,  where  no  other  ad- 
verb is  permitted  to  stand.  XHe'fcr  SDTaun  Incllctcbt'  retro  c$ 
ttiffen,  This  man  perhaps  will  know  it ;  ©cin  S5rn'DiT  &«£ 
mutl)'lid)  t)M  ifyttt  M$  gefefcric'ben,  His  brother  probably  has 


244  SYNTAX  OF  THE  ADVERB.  [BOOK  II. 

written  that  to  him.  If  they  have  any  effect  when  thus 
transposed,  it  may  be,  that  they  rather  give  force  to  the 
subject. 

The  negative,  utcl)t,  not,  has  its  station  commonly  after  the 
object;  as,  2)cv  SJTauu  tfylit  fci'uC  $P(ltcbt  nicfot,  The  man  does 
not  do  his  duty.  Here  the  action  of  the  verb  is  accompanied 
by  the  negative.  If  it  is  to  be  particularly  referred  to  the 
subject,  or  object,  or  any  other  word,  it  must  be  put  before 

such  word.  £fttc()t  SXeid^tfyum,  fon'oent  3«fric^enljett  mad)t 
tic  SD?cn'fd)CU  glud'tid),  Not  wealth,  but  contentment  makes 
men  happy.  In  this  instance,  the  negative  is  applied  to  the 
subject,  and  stands  before  it.     iaflft  \n\$  nid)t  fcen  33cvlu|V  fre£ 

©cijiffes,  fon'oevn  t>cn  ^oo  fo  feie'lev  treff'lid^er  @cc'Ieute 

befta'gcu,  Do  not  let  us  lament  the  loss  of  the  ship,  but  the 
death  of  so  many  fine  seamen.  The  negative  before  the 
object. 

Exercises. 

A  very  just  comparison.  He  experienced  quite  a  different 
treatment.  She  sang  this  air  beautifully.  They  wore  their 
best  dresses  yesterday.  It  is  by  no  means  decided.  In1  or- 
der1 to11  exlutricate12  himself2  as3  soon4  as5  possible6  from7 
his8  embarrassment9.  He  will  depart  to-morrow.  They  will 
probably  resort  to  this  measure.  He  has  not  received  your 
letter.  Do  not  trouble  yourselves  about  the  past,  but  think  of 
the  future. 

very,  fef)t\  to  decide,  nUfd)Ci'DCn,  irr. 

just,  vicl)'tig.  in  order,  um. 
comparison,      SSei'gieid)',      m.     as  soon  as,  fo  ba(o  a(£. 

b.  6.  possible,  mog'lid). 

to  experience,  erfafy'ven,  irr.  from,  aits'.  (Dat.) 

quite,  cjanj.  embarrassment,  ^BerdCgCtlfyeit, 
different,  Derfdjie'&Ctt.  /. 

treatment,  ^cbano'lltng,  /.  to  extricate,  {?crcUl$'jiel)Ctt. 

to  sing,  ftllg'en,  irr.  to-morrow,  mot'fttn. 

air,  %'x'u,  f.  to  depart,  ab'rcifcn. 

beautifully,  fd)6n.  probably,  roafyv'fdjeittftd). 

to  wear,  tva'gen,  irr.  to,  jit.  (Dat.) 

yesterday,  gcf'tcnt.  measure,  9Q?aS'vcgCi,  /. 

dress,  kith,  n.  3.  b.  e.  to  resort,  grei'ftlU 

by  no  means,  fei'neSrocgS.  letter,  SBvtcf,  m.  3.  b.  b. 


CH.  7.  §  1.]  SYNTAX  OF  THE  PREPOSITION.  245 

to  receive,  erfyaf  ten,  irr.  the  past,  t>as  ^evgang'ene. 

to  trouble  one's  self,  fid)  6c-     but,  a'bcr. 

hun'mevn.  to  think  of,  betxmr'en.  (Ace.) 

about,  um.  (Ace.)  the  future,  t>a6  ^n'tunfttge. 


CHAPTER  VII. 
PREPOSITIONS. 

§  1.  AGREEMENT  AND  GOVERNMENT. 

When  the  same  preposition  belongs  to  more  than  one  noun, 
it  need  be  only  once  expressed ;  as,  93on  mvi'nem  93a'ter,  mil'* 
Item  SSw'&et*  lint)  mci'net  ©d)roeftCl',  From  my  father,  my 
brother,  and  my  sister. 

Some  prepositions  govern  a  genitive,  some  a  dative,  some 
either  a  genitive  or  dative,  some  an  accusative,  and  some 
either  a  dative  or  an  accusative. 

1.   Prepositions  governing  the  Genitive. 

anjiatt',  instead  ;  as,  au|tatt'  1>C6  ^Ba'terS,  instead  of  the  father. 
&U\tt  is  sometimes  separated  from  an,  as,  an  Ktn'bes  fvatt, 
instead  of  a  child  ;  in  which  case,  this  last  word  may  also 
be  considered  as  a  substantive,  and  written  with  a  capital 
letter,  ©tatt,  place. 

(fyalb)  is  only  used  in  compounds  :  particularly,  ait'ferfyafb, 
out  of;  as,  an'ferfyalb  bc£  ipan'feS,  out  of  doors;  in'nevbalb, 
in,  within  ;  as,  in'ncvtyalb  t)rci'er  $a'a,e,  within  three  days  ; 
O'bertyalb,  above ;  as,  O'bei'fyalb  fret*  <&tnU,  above  the  town  ; 
lln'ttxtyblb,  below  ;  as,  nn'tevfyalb  fcci*  ©taDt,  below  the 
town. 

I)al'ben,  or  fyal'bei*  (when  the  noun  has  no  article  or  pronoun 
before  it),  on  account  of,  for  the  sake  of;  as,  t»e£  §Vte'DcnS 
fyat'ben,  for  the  sake  of  the  peace  ;  Ztf'ttrti  bal'bev,  on  ac- 
count of  age;  fcei'iiet*  iaf'tei*  tyal'bcn,  on  account  of  your 
vices.  J^al'bcn  is  often  joined  with  the  genitive  of  the  per- 
sonal pronouns,  id),  I,  &u,  thou,  lt»ir,  we,  &,c,  gen.  tnei'lter, 
of  me,  frei'nev,  of  thee,  nn'fer,  of  us,  &,c. ;  in  which  case  the 
final  v  of  these  genitives  is  either  changed  into  t,  or  a  t  is 

21* 


246  SYNTAX  OF  THE  PREPOSITION.  [BOOK  II. 

added  ;  as,  ttiei'netfyaffcen,  for  my  sake ;  fcCt'uetfyatbeu,  for 
thy  sake ;  fet'ncttyalben,  for  his  or  its  sake;  tut'fcvtfyaibctt, 
for  our  sake  ;  cu'vctfyalbcn,  for  your  sake  ;  ity'vcttyatbcu,  for 
her  or  their  sake.  It  is  also  joined  with  lt§,  of  that,  and 
H>e§/  of  what  or  which ;  as,  feejj'fyalb,  on  account  of  that ; 
tDCft'fyalb,  on  account  of  which  or  what. 

tucffetts',  on  this  side  of;  as,  fcieffettS  M  glltffc^,  on  this 
side  of  the  river. 

jeu'feitS,  beyond,  on  the  other  side;  as,  jcn'fettS  l>e$  ©an'geS, 
on  the  other  side  of  the  Ganges. 

h*afty  by  virtue  of;  as,  fvaft  tttei'tteS  Tlm'tCS,  by  virtue  of  my 
office. 

hut,  according  to,  conformably  ;  as,  [<X\lt  KS  O'tvigt^ttUctjett 
33efcfyte',  according  to  the  command  of  the  government. 

mit'tcl|t  or  Vcvmit'tet|t,  by,  by  means  of;  as,  mit'tdjt  or  t>et*- 
tntt'tcljt  fcci'lteS  ^Sci'jtatiDC^/  by  means  of  your  assistance. 

ltu'gcacl)tct  or  o()U'geacl)tet,  notwithstanding,  sometimes  pre- 
cedes and  sometimes  follows  the  noun  ;  as,  un'geacl)tet  after 
Jpiu'fccniijfe,  notwithstanding  all  impediments  ;  fei'ttCS  §(ei'= 
fct?  Uu'gCiUl)tCt,  notwithstanding  his  industry. 

im'rocit  or  ofcn'roeit,  not  far  from ;  as,  un'VDCtt  t)C6  £>0f'fe6/  not 
far  from  the  village. 

fccvmo'gc,  by  reason  or  virtue  of,  by  dint  of,  by  means  of;  as, 
V»enn6'gc  fei'nei*  ©etutrf ,  by  reason  of  his  birth  ;  fcerm&'ge 
HX  tt'bmtg,  by  dint  of  practice;  Dei'm&'ge  t>e<?  giet'feS,  by 
means  of  diligence. 

HD&fy'reuft,  during;  as,  YO&ij'VtnP  btV  $tlt,  during  the  time: 
Itotofttnt  t>c£  Sttie'geS,  during  the  war. 

Wgeu,  on  account  of,  because  of.  It  may  stand  before  or 
after  the  noun  ;  3d)  tfyat  Cd  mei'llCS  ^3a'tcrt5  iDc'gcn,  I  did  it 
because  of  or  on  account  of  my  father  ;  VDC'gCtt  fct'ueS 
§tci'fc£/  on  account  of  his  diligence.  GQDc'gCU  is  often 
joined  with  the  genitive  of  pronouns,  like  fyal'bctl ;  as,  met'* 
ItetrPCgcn,  for  my  sake  ;  fcefj'rocgen  on  account  of  that ;  V0t§'- 
TOCgCU/  on  account  of  which  or  what,  &,c. 

2.  Prepositions  governing  the  Dative. 

(Ut6,  out  of;  as,  a\l$  t>Ctn  55ct'tC,  out  of  bed. 

rttt'jVv,  out  of,  without,  besides ;  as,  au'jH'  Ot'b'nitUg,  out  of  or 

without  order ;  atl'fct  t>CC   ©tat)t,   out  of  the  city   or  town ; 

ait'fcv  t>mt  J^au'fC,    out  of   the  house;   au'fCV  \l\iv,   besides 

me. 


CH.  7.  §  l.j  SYNTAX  OP  THE  PREPOSITION.  247 

bti,  by,  near;    as,  bet  t>cm  4?ait'ff/  near  the  house;    bet  Dtr 

J^aufc,  by  the  hand, 
cntge'gen,  against,  towards;  as,  t>em  SOBin'OC  Cntge'gen,  against 

the  wind;  QQBtr  iDol'lcn  uu'fcun  gvcun'oc  entge'gen  ge'ijen, 

We  will  go  to  meet,  our  friend. 

gegenu'ber,  opposite  to;  as,  oem  Jpau'fc  gcgcmt'bcr,  opposite  to 
the  house.  It  may  be  separated  ;  as,  gc'gcn  mil*  u'ber,  op- 
posite to  me. 

mit,  with  ;  as,  mit  t>em  33a'tcr,  with  the  father. 

nad),  I.  after,  behind  ;  2.  to  or  towards,  with  names  of 
places,  and  verbs  expressing  motion ;  3.  according  to,  fol- 
lowing ;  as,  nad)  mix,  after  or  behind  me  ;  :l£ann  gc't)Ctt 
@ie  nad)  feci*  @tai?t?  When  do  you  go  to  town?  fci'ucv  ©C- 
bltrt'  m\d),  according  to  his  birth  ;  tcm  ©tro'me  nac(),  fol- 
lowing the  stream. 

ncbft  or  fammt,  together  with ;  as,  ncbjt  or  fammt  t>cm  33a'tcr, 
together  with  the  father. 

frit,  since  ;  as,  fett  t>cr  $nt,  since  the  time. 

Don,  from,  of,  by ;  as,  Don  mir,  from  me,  of  me ;  %)&$  (£>tbid)t' 
t|t  t)0tt  ifym,  That  poem  is  by  him. 

Dor,  before  ;  as,  Dor  mil*,  before  me. 

JU,  to,  at,  by,  on,  in  ;  as,  £lt  mir,  to  me  ;  £tt  ion'Oon,  at  or  in 
London;  jit  Jpau'fe,  at  home;.ju  3£af  fer,  by  water;  jit 
Ult'DC,  on  land  ;   Jit  git  fc,  on  foot. 

jnndcl)|t',  next  to ;  as,  Si*  fag  mir  JtmadjjV,  He  sat  next  to 
me. 

Jimn'&cr,  contrary  to,  against;  as,  mir  Jltttn'oer,  against  me. 

3.  Prepositions  governing  the  Accusative. 

fcltrd),  through  ;  as,  Ottrd)  t>en  ^aO,  through  the  wood ;  onrd) 
bid),  through  you. 

fur,  for ;  as,  fur  mtc(),  for  me;  fur  t>cn  sprcie?,  for  the  price. 

gc'gcn,  against,  opposite  ;  as,  gc'gcn  DCU  'vIBinD,  against  the 
wind  ;  gc'gcn  mid),  against  me  or  towards  me. 

gCJt  (contraction  of  gc'gcn),  towards,  is  applied  to  few  objects  ; 
as,  gen  ^im'mcf,  towards  heaven.  It  is  also  used  as  a  nau- 
tical phrase ;  as,  SftorD  gen  i)|t,  north  by  east. 

fonVr    \  w*tnout ;  as'  c^'nt  or  f°"/Dcl'  VMrffo  without  me. 
nm,  about ;  as,  um  ^tc  ©tat^C,  about  the  city  ;  urn  mid),  about  me. 
roi'DCr,  against,  in  opposition  to  ;  as,  ttu'fcer  mid),  cud),  \\)\\,  ftC, 
CS,  ftC,  against  me,  you,  him,  her,  it,  them. 


248  SYNTAX  OF  THE  PREPOSITION.  [BOOK  II. 

4.  Prepositions  governing  the  Genitive,  or  Dative ;    and  the 

Genitive,  or  Accusative. 

jufol'ge,  according  to,  before  the  substantive,  with  the  gen- 
itive :  as,  JltfoCgC  3tyW  SSffcfyfa',  according  to  your  com- 
mand :  but  after  the  substantive  with  the  dative  ;  as,  3^'t'Cm 
SScfetyf  Jltfot'gC,  according  to  your  command. 

(dug*?,  along,  generally  with  the  dative,  sometimes  with  the 
genitive  ;  as,  IdugS  fcem  ^c'gC,  along  the  way ;  and  some- 
times, (dllgS  t>C6  'IBc'geg,  along  the  way. 

ofy'lie,  without,  generally  with  the  accusative ;  as,  ofy'ne  mid), 
without  me  ;  but  in  some  phrases,  after  the  substantive,  with 
the  genitive  ;  as,  Jroei'jtte  o!)'ne,  without  doubt. 

5.  Prepositions  governing  the  Dative,  or  Accusative.* 

an,  at,  in,  on,  with  the  dative  ;  as,  an  ei'nctn  Or'te,  in  or  at  a 

place ;  as,  St*  ijt  an  al'len  £>l''ten,  He  is  at  or  in  every  place : 

but,  an,  to,  with  the  accusative :  as,  Q;r  ge'fyct  an  ai'ic  Dr'te, 

He  goes  to  every  place. 
attf,  in,  upon,  with  the  dative  ;  as,   3)aS  23ltd)  ticgt  anf  t>em 

%tfd)'C,  The  book  lies  upon  the  table:  but, auf,  into,  on,  with 

the   accusative  ;  as,  Sc'ge  t>a£   33lld)  anf  t>at  ^tfcl),  Lay  the 

book  on  the  table, 
fyill'tcr,  behind,  with  the  dative  ;  as,  <Ev  iji  fytn'ter  mil*,  He  is 

behind  me :  but  with  the  accusative,  in  (Er  \Uilt  fid)  i}U\'UX 

Wild),  He  places  himself  behind  me. 
in,  in,  with  the  dative ;   as,  (Sv  i|t  ill  fccm  ^int'mci',  He  is  in  the 

room :  in,   into,   with  the   accusative  ;  as,  Qsi:  gC'l)Ct  ill  tniS 

dimmer,  He  goes  into  the  room. 
llC'bcn,  next  to,  with  the  dative ;  as,  ®r  IDOfyllt  lic'fcen  lltci'ticm 

Jpatt'fc,  He  lives  next  to  my  house  :  but  with  the  accusative, 

in  (£r  £te'()et  ne'fcen  lltcin  £ant>,  He  moves  next  to  my  house, 

8.  e.  He  moves  into  the  house  next  to  mine. 
lYfcer,  above,  with  the  dative  ;  as,  (Si*  tttofynt  lYfocr  mil*,  He  lives 

over  or  above   me  :  but  iVfrct',   over,  with  the  accusative,  in 

(£u  fpving'ct  u'bn  mid),  He  jumps  over  me. 


*  If  they  signify  motion  or  rest  in  a  place,  the  dative  is 
used  ;  but  when  motion  to  a  place  is  expressed,  the  accusative 
is  used. 


CH.  7.  §  2.]  SYNTAX  OF  THE  PREPOSITION.  249 

Urittv,  among,  under,  below,  with  the  dative  ;  as,  (Jt*  ift  un'tcr 
fceit  ku'ttn,  He  is  among  the  people ;  Q;r  if!  lin'tCV  mtr,  He  is 
below  me  ;  (Eg  (tcgC  un'tev  Dcm  'Jt'fdK,  It  lies  under  the 
table  :  but  with  the  accusative,  in  (£r  ge'fyet  Ull'tcr  t>ie  *CU'te, 
He  goes  among  the  people  ;  <£t*  jteUt  [id)  uu'tcv  mid),  He 
places  himself  below  me  ;  3»cl)  rocv'fe  C6  Ull'tei*  frCU  'iifd),  I 
throw  it  under  the  table. 

t)0V,  before,  with  the  dative  ;  as,  33ov  t>eu  3ett,  Before  the 
time ;  33or  mtv  jtaub  cin  25aum,  Before  me  stood  a  tree : 
but  with  the  accusative,  in  (El*  gcbt  t)0V  Mc  $fyur,  He  goes 
before  the  door  ;  (£r  tvitt  t?or  &eu  SHid/tCf,  He  steps  before 
the  judge. 

jvrnfd)'eu,  between,  with  the  dative  ;  as,  (£v  ging  jroifd)'cn  t>tr 
UUt>  mil*,  He  walked   between   you   and  me  :  but  with  the 

accusative,  in  (Er  fcrdng'te  fid)  jroifdj'en  t>id)  unt>  mid),  He 
forced  himself  between  you  and  me. 


§  2.    ARRANGEMENT. 
RULE  I. 

The  preposition  always  continues  with  the  case,  and  is 
usually  prefixed  to  it. 

Jpal'bnt,  fyal'bfr,  entgc'gen,  jttroi'&cr,  are  constantly  put  after 
their  cases.  Surd),  nad),  gegemVbev,  un'geadjtet,  rce'gcn,  ju, 
jltfofgc,  sometimes  before,  and  sometimes  after.     See  §  1. 

RULE  II. 

The  preposition  together  with  its  case  may  be  looked  upon 
in  the  position  of  words,  as  an  adverb  ;  accordingly,  its  place 
is  after  the  object.  3d)  fya'be  ein'cn  SSvtef  aw?  S)cutfd)'Un& 
Cr()al'tCU,  I  have  received  a  letter  from  Germany. 

RULE    III. 

The  preposition  with  its  case  may  be  put  before  the  object, 
for  the  purpose  of  emphasis :  3>d)  fya'bc  atls?  2)cutfd)'tan&  Cl'ncn 
23vicf  cvbal'tcu  —  here  the  words  attt?  3)cutfd)1auD  acquire 
energy  from  their  position.  But  the  stress  is  most  forcible, 
when  the  preposition  is  placed  at  the  beginning  of  the  sen- 
tence :  2(us  £>eutfd)'Un&  tya'be  id)  ci'ncn  33rief  cvtyal'tcn,  From 
Germany  I  have  received  a  letter. 


250  SYNTAX  OF  THE  PREPOSITION.  [BOOK  II. 


RULE  IV. 


It  cannot  be  inserted  between  the  subject  and  the  verb,  un- 
less it  belongs  exclusively  to  the  former ;  as,  S)ct*  SOTanu  mtt 
i>em  blau'en  SKocte  t)Ht  e$  gettyau',  The  man  with  a  blue  coat 
(that  is  wearing  a  blue  coat)  has  done  it.  3^'UCV  mit  t>em 
2>e'gCU  fyat  t)te  %$at  bCgattg'CU,  That  one  with  the  sword  (that 
is,  he  who  has  the  sword)  has  committed  the  deed.  It  is  not 
said,  that  the  first  has  done  it  with  the  blue  coat,  or  that  the 
second  has  committed  the  deed  with  the  sword  ;  this  wotdd  be 
a  false  construction.  But,  from  the  collocation  of  the  words, 
it  is  to  be  understood,  that  the  one,  who  wears  a  blue  coat, 
is  charged  with  a  certain  deed,  and  the  other,  who  has  a 
sword,  has  committed  the  deed.  Therefore,  if  the  prepo- 
sition, with  its  case,  is  not  exclusively  referred  to  the  subject, 
it  cannot  be  put,  where  we  see  it  in  the  examples  adduced. 

RULE  V. 

If  an  adverb  and  preposition  meet  in  the  same  member  of 
a  sentence,  the  adverb  should  come  before  the  preposition, 
especially,  when  the  former  consists  only  of  one  or  two  syl- 
lables ;  for  example,  St  fcbveibt  gut  mtt  fcie'fer  ftc'fcCl*,  He 
writes  well  with  this  pen  ;  3Btv  ge'f)CU  fyeu'te  ttuf  t>ie  3agt>,  We 
go  a  hunting  to-day  ;  @ie  vet'feten  ci'lig  tutvel)  ion'&on,  They 
passed  hastily  through  London ;  (£v  rotvfc  mor'gcn  JU  mil*  fom'- 
meit/  He  will  come  to  me  to-morrow.  The  adverbs  gut,  fyeu'tC; 
Ct'lig,  mof'gen,  here  stand  before  the  preposition. 

Exercises. 

Since  this  event.  Contrary  to  my  wishes.  Opposite  our 
garden.  I  have  searched  after  this  circumstance  in  all  (the) 
records.  That  gentleman  with  the  solemn  air  has  made  the 
remark.     They  were  soon  put  to  flight. 

since,  feit.  (Dat.)  to  search  after,  iMcb'fovfdjetU 

event,  Qh'fig'utf},  n.  3.  b.  6.  gentleman,  JF>m*,  m. 

wish,  *(2Bunfcl),  m.  3.  b.  6.  solemn  air,  ItmtS'mtene,  f. 

contrary,  jumi'Der.  remark,  *8cmcrTuug,  /. 

opposite,  gegemVber.  to  make,  nwcfe'cn. 

garden,  ^©av'teu,  m.  3.  a.  a.        soon,  fcaffc. 

circumstance,    *Um'|taufc,  m.     to  put  to  flight,   ilt   fctC  gifadjt 

3.  b.  6.  fcl)(a'gCU,  irr. 
record,  ttr'ftttt&e,  /. 


CH.  8.  §  1.]  SYNTAX  OF  THE  CONJUNCTION.  251 

CHAPTER  VIII. 
CONJUNCTIONS. 

§  1.  AGREEMENT  AND  GOVERNMENT. 

The  Conjunction  fo 

is  employed  to  connect  a  sentence  when  the  prior  member  of 
it  begins  with  a  consecutive,  causal,  or  conditional  conjunc- 
tion. £>a  mx  hi  bet  ^aupt'fadjc  ci'nig  ftnt>,  fo  laf'fet  un$ 
nid)t  u'bci-  $(ei'nigteitfn  un$  cntjroci'eu,  As  we  agree  in  the 
essentials,  let  us  not  quarrel  about  trifles.     <333cun  man  fict)   in 

&cn  SBiffcufdjaftcii  aus'jetdjnen  mil,  fo  mug  man  uu'uutcr- 

bl*0d)C!ieu  §(ci£  bcftt'jcn,  If  a  person  would  distinguish  himself 
in  the  sciences,  he  must  possess  unceasing  industry.  ©0  is  not 
always  required  after  the  consecutive  and  causal  conjunc- 
tions, such  as  M,  when ;  a(S,  as  ;  ttne,  as  ;  XDtil,  because  :  but 
it  is  rarely  left  out  after  the  conditional  conjunctions,  such  as, 
roenn,  if;  ofcfdjon',  obgleicl)',  ttcnnfdjon',  roenngfeidj',  although. 
When  the  conditional  is  not  given  in  the  prior  member,  but 
understood,  it  is  common  to  make  use  of  fo  in  the  subsequent 
member  ;  as,  Jpat'te  id)  MS  geroujft',  fo  ttW've  icf)  uic()t  gefom's 
men,  Had  I  known  that,  I  should  not  have  come ;  which  stands 
for,  ^cittt  icf)  MS  gC^ujft'  Ijat'te,  If  I  had  known  that;  —  there- 
fore fo  must  be  inserted,  in  the  following  member.  It  is  to  be 
recommended  after  consecutive  and  causal  conjunctions,  when 
the  antecedent  member  is  of  some  length,  or  consists  of  several 
parts.  ©0  is  also  found  after  the  verb  in  the  imperative  mood, 
but  no  conjunction  ;  as,  SBcvtrau'e  itjva,  fo  roti'D  ei*  t>iv  fyet'fen, 
Trust  in  him,  and  he  will  help  thee. 

©0  is  used  when  obglcicl)',  obfefjou',  or  a  similar  word, 
meaning  though,  although,  precedes  :  bod),  yet,  or  a  synony- 
mous conjunction,  generally  follows.  Ob  Cf  glcict)  Jung  i|l,  fo 
t)at  cr  ooc()  fcie'fe  (Evfaty'ntng,  Although  he  is  young,  he  has 
nevertheless  great  experience. 


252  SYNTAX  OP  THE  CONJUNCTION.  [BOOK  II. 

§  2.    ARRANGEMENT. 


RULE  I. 


The  conjunction  is,  in  general,  placed  at  the  beginning  of 
the  sentence,  and  before  the  subject. 


RULE  II. 


1.  The   following  conjunctions  join   words  and  sentences 
without  changing  the  position  of  the  verb. 

owtv  and ;  as,  gcu'ev,  *uft,  Qhr'fce,  unfc  QGDaf'fcr  ftnt>  tic  Dicr 

Slemcn'te,  Fire,  air,  earth,  and  water  are  the  four  elements; 

SSir  gc'fycn  unt)  rc'Dcn  mit  ciuau'fcer,  We  walk  and  talk  with 

one  another. 
(Utd),  also,  too ;  as,  '•JBtl*  jlnt>   fi'Ofy,  tmt>  fie  and),  We  are  glad, 

and  they  too;   3d)  gUtl'be  e£  and),  I  think  so  too;   Jfpa'bcu 

©te  auc()  gctyoi't  ?   Have  you  heard  also  ? 

a'bet,   adciu',   fon'txrn,  but ;   as,  QBiv  ftnt»  bttvtxbf,  a'ber 

llid)t  cntmu'tfytget,  We  are  afflicted,  but  not  dismayed ;  QOBir 
ft'a'gcn,  atfein'  (a'ber)  nie'manb  ant'roortet,  We  ask,  but 
nobody  answers;  <2Div  fyo'rcu  nid)t$  (Su'tcs,  a'ber  aud)ltid)tS 
S56'feg/  We  near  no  good>  but  nothing  bad :  3tid)t  cr,  fon'Dcm 
ic^7  Not  he,  but  I ;  3d)  fya'be  e6  ntdjt  nut  gcfc'fyen,  forwent 

<X\ld)  get)5rt',  I  have  not  only  seen  it,  but  heard  it  also, 
fcort),  jct»0d)',  but,  nevertheless,  although,  yet;   as,  ©tc  fcrob'tClt 

iijm,  t>0d)  CV  bticb  jlaub^aft,  They  threatened   him,  but  he 

remained  constant ;  (£r  Mei'bct  &0d)  mcin  gmmt>,  He  remains 

nevertheless  my  friend  ;    £r  gCjtat'tCtC  C$,  jefcod)'  (ood))  WW'- 

gCtUC,  He  granted  it,  although  reluctantly, 
fccmt,  for,  because ;  as,  @ic  WlffCtt  eg,  t>euu  id)  fag'tC  C6  ify'ltCU, 

They  know  it,  for  or  because  I  told  (it  to)  them, 
ent'rocfccr,  either,  O'frcr,  or  ;   as,  (Snfttefcer  fie  ffnD  (or  ftn&  flc) 

fal'fdje  grcim'fce,  o'fcer  offeuba'rc   gcin'&C,   Either  they  are 

false  friends,  or  open  enemies. 
M'btV,  neither,  nod),  nor  ;  as,  @ie  fmt>  ttC'bcr  fytmg  rig  nod) 

Mtv'ftig,  They  are  neither  hungry  nor  thirsty, 
jraar,  however,  indeed  ;  as,  ©ic  ija'bcn  c$  par,  a'ber  nid)t  mit 

9flcd)t/  They  have  it  indeed,  but  not  with  justice. 

2.  The  conjunctions,  a'ber,  but,  and   (Utd),  also,  may  stand 
any  where  in  the  sentence.     At  the  beginning,  2t'bCV  mcin 


CH.  8.  §  2.]  SYNTAX  OF  THE  CONJUNCTION.  253 

55vtt'&cr  roei'gcrt  ftd),  But  my  brother  declines  it.  After  another 
conjunction,  2\i  a'bct*  mcin  UJvu'&cr  ftct)  iDci'gcrt.  After  an 
adverb,  Slim  a'bct*  bcfufytt'  Ct?  tic  fthlg'tyctt,  But  now  prudence 
commands  it ;  or  after  a  preposition  with  its  case,  9)iit   Ote'fcn 

icu'ten  a'bev  faun  id)  nictjts  an'fangett/  But  with  these  people  I 

can  do  nothing.  And  it  makes  no  alteration  in  the  influence 
of  other  words  upon  the  constitution  of  the  sentence.  Those 
for  instance,  which  bring  the  subject  after  the  verb,  retain  the 
same  power,  though  a'bct*  be  inserted  after  them  ;  as  appears 
from  the  preceding  examples.     It  may  also  be  placed  after  the 

subject,  £>ie  granjo'jen  a'bcr  l)a'6en  t>cn  (Ena/Idnpcvn  t>cn  &vtcg 
evtlavt'.  After  the  object,  3)ie  gvanjo'jcn  tya'bcn  t>cit  Sua/* 
(auftCl'll  DClt  ftrieg  a'bcr  crildrt'.  When  not  in  the  beginning 
of  the  sentence,  it  commonly  gives  energy  to  the  word  that 
precedes  it.  The  personal  pronouns  are,  generally,  put  be- 
fore it,  when  the  verb  has  quitted  its  original  place  ;  as,  2)  a  Cir 
a'bcr  mcl)t  fommt,  But  since  he  does  not  come;  2)aS  tmm'fcfent 
VDiv  a'bcr  nid)t,  But  this  we  do  not  wish  ;  2)aS  (ScId  ttcrlang'e 
id)  a'bcr,  But  the  money  I  demand.  —  What  has  been  remarked 
of  a'bcv,  may  be  applied  to  and) ;  though  perhaps  we  should 
say,  that  cutd)  has  nearly,  but  not  quite  the  same  license  of  po- 
sition. Moreover,  when  cutd)  is  placed  at  the  beginning  of  a 
sentence,  the  subject  may  be  placed  after  the  verb ;  which 
would  be  wrong  after  a'bcr.  Ex.  2Iud)  glaubt  fctn  SBa'tcr,  His 
father  also  believes;  or  2tud)  fetlt  25a' ter  glanbt,  Also  his  father 
believes. 

RULE    III. 

The  following  conjunctions,  when  taken  relatively,  require 
the  verb  to  be  placed  at  the  end  of  the  sentence  ;  but  their 
use  will  be  best  understood  by  examples,  as  they  are  not  al- 
ways used  as  relatives. 

&[$,  f  as,  when,  than,  like,  but.  bcmnad)',  ftn'temaf,  whereas* 

bettor',  before.  e'fye,  before. 

bi$,  till.  falls  or  im  gad,  in  case, 

ta,  when.  in  fo  fern,  in  so  much,  if. 

fca,  intent',  as,  since,  whilst.  nad)t>cm',  after,  after  that. 

t>aft,  that.  mil,  tirocil,  because, 

anf  &a§,  Damit',  in  order  that.  Ob,  whether. 


f  2Ug  has  sometimes  a  comparative  signification. 

22 


254 


SYNTAX  OF  THE  CONJUNCTION. 


[book  II. 


tt[6  ob,  as  if. 

ttenn,  if,  when. 

tto,  fo,  if. 

rcoferu',  fofevn',  ^afevn',  if. 

noo  nid)t,  if  not. 

un'geactjtef,    or    ol)n'3ead)tet, 

notwithstanding. 

O 


pbroofyf, 

obcilctct)',       j>  though,  although. 

obfdjon', 

iKmtvjleid)',  J 


3.  The  following  conjunctions  require  the  verb  to  be  placed 
at  the  end  of  the  sentence,  if  used  relatively  ;  but  otherwise 
the  verb  is  put  before  the  nominative. 


bafyer',  hence. 
bef^alb',  or      ' 
DeffyaFbCtt,  therefore, 

bejjroe'gen,        }hv  which 
ttm  fcel'imflen,  |  reason. 

oantm',  J 


tt>ofycr',  whence, 
rocj^alb'  or      "] 
actual' belt/        |  wherefore, 
Wcgroe'flflt/         }  for  which 
urn  mffroilkn,     reason. 
iMvum'/  J 


4.  The  following  conjunctions  require  certain  others  after 
them,  which  frequently  cause  the  nominative  to  be  placed 
after  the  verb. 


CUt'lDCDCf,  either, 
JDe'bet*,  neither, 
VOtil,  because, 
t>a,  when, 
je,  the, 

foroofyf,  as  well,  ) 
fobalo',  as  soon,  J 


jwatr,  indeed, 


wenn,  if, 


requires      O'bet*,  or. 
liod),  nor. 

fo. 
fo. 
je,  or  bef  to,  the. 

ate,  as. 

f  a'ber,  atfetn',  but. 

bod),  Den'nod),  or  ;ebOd)',  how- 
ever, yet. 

glcicfe'roofyf,  yet,  for  all  that, 
notwithstanding. 

fyinge'geit,  on  the  contrary. 

lltd)t$  Def'tO  roe'itigcr,  never- 
theless. 

fo* 


i 


L 


*  Observe,  the  word  fo  is  sometimes  a  conjunction,  some- 
times an  adverb,  and  sometimes  is  used  as  a  relative  pronoun. 
Examples.    1.  As  a  conjunction ;  ©0  it)U  Uc'bct,  tit  (Mi)  (te'beit, 


CH.  9.  §  2.]  SYNTAX  OF  THE  CONJUNCTION. 


2,55 


ttHC,  §U\d)tt)kf,  as,      requires 

fo,  so, 

nicfit,  not, 

nid)t  allein', )  j 

ntcbt  mxv,     S 

obgCeicfc', 

ofcfdjon', 

obroot)!', 

»cnn  fci&ott, 

roenn  aud), 

nneroofyC, 


fo. 
ft. 

fon'oern,  but. 
fon'oevn,  but. 


►  although, 


J 


f  fon  Dent, 

\  fon'oent  aud),  but  also. 

Cfo,  so. 

I  fo  —  oodj,  Den'nod),   however, 
<^       nevertheless. 

I  fo'  nidjts  bcf  to  roc'nigcr,  nev- 

[     ertheless. 


As  the  application  of  conjunctions  may  be  better  learned 
by  examples  than  by  rules,  the  following  sentences  are  sub- 
joined to  exemplify  their  use. 


2lte  mv  in  Mono  gegeffot 
fyat'ten,  (fo)  ging'en  n>iv  fya= 
frie'ven. 

©o  rott?  ate  ei'ne  9to'fc. 

£r  ijt  after  ate  idj. 

Sr  (jan'oelt  ate  (in  vec()t'-- 
fdjaffenev  30Taun. 

lik  n  ten  2luf  vuijv  in  ocr 
©tabt  bemevf  te. 

(£c  i\l  jroar  mein  getno  nicl)t, 
a'fcet  tod)  aud)  utd)t  mein 
gveuno. 

2*te  id)  in  Son'oon  antam. 

23i^  tie  @on'ne  Die  erjtwt's 
ten  gef'bev  auf  lofen  nuvt>. 

2) a  oer.  >£o'te  in  Son'oon 
anr'atn. 

23om  SDtov'gen  fcte  jnm 
OTeno. 


When  we  had  supped,  we 
took  a  walk  :  or  having  sup- 
ped, &c. 

As  red  as  a  rose. 

He  is  older  than  I. 

He  acts  like  an  honest  man. 

When  he  perceived  the  tu- 
mult in  the  city. 

He  is  not  my  enemy  in- 
deed, but  yet  he  is  not  my 
friend. 

When  I  arrived 'in  London. 

Till  the  sun  shall  loosen  the 
congealed  fields. 

When  the  messenger  arrived 
in  London. 

From  morning  till  evening. 


If  you  love  (those)  who  love  you.  2.  As  an  adverb ;  (£6  i\\  fo, 
ix»ie  id)  <Kfa#t'  f)a'be,  It  is  so,  as  I  said  ;  (2Die  fo  ?  How  so  ?  3.  As 
a  relative  pronoun  ;  £>a$  33ltd),  fo  (ml'd)($)  id")  gefaujt'  fja'be, 
The  book  which  I  have  bought. 


256 


SYNTAX  OF  THE  CONJUNCTION. 


[BOOK  II. 


£)a  idj  i>en  SDtatm,  roel'd^t- 
fo  c'bct  gefyan'oelt,  efy've  nnt> 
lie'k ;  or, 

£>a  id)  ben  SCftann  efy've  imfe 
lu'bi,  wl'd)w  fo  e'oel  a^an'-- 
t>c(t  tyat.  J 

2Benn  er  bag  53ud)  le'fen 
raid. 

3d)  faf?  es ;  fca'fyev  roeis  id) 

2Dot?er'  roif'fen  jlc  eg  ? 

©r  nutate  es  nid)t,  t>a'vnm 
fya'be  id)  e$  il)m  gefaflt'. 

S5et)0ty  id)  oen  3Ba(t>  ev= 
reidjt'  fyat'te. 

%[$  id)  t>iefen  SDtor'gen  an 
tern  gender  ffant),  (&a*|  faf) 
id?  t>ie  ©oloa'tcn  in  t>ic  &u\M 
fom'men. 

3n&em'  or  roeil  id)  an  t>em 
gen'jUv  |tant>,  faf)  id),  &c. 

2Bie  id)  an  i>em  gcn'Pev 
ftant»,  &c 

3) a  id)  an  t>em  gcn'jler 
ftan?\  &c. 

<2Bicn>oI)t'  er  fet^r  franf  iff, 
fo  ijt  Dod)  nod)  Jpoifmma. 
fcorfyan'cen,  bag  er  nne'oer  anf-- 
fommen  roev'oe,  (or  roiro.) 

3d)  foertnarij'c  bit  ntel)t  as- 
tern' mein  ipans,  fon'oern  and) 
Jfpa'be  nnt>  (£nt. 

3d)  erroaf  tete  3^'re  %\\'= 
funft  ntd)t,  fcef'to  grd'fcv  i|t 
met'ne  gmi'oe. 

3e  w'biger  tag  Sc'oen  i|t, 
oefto  gefdftef'ter  i|t  eg  jum 
Stadj'fcenfen, 

Qmt'rceber  M|t  en  tod,  o'oer 
tin  nm-jl  e^  rcev'oen. 


Since  I  honor  and  love  the 
man,  who  acted  so  nobly. 

If  he  will  read  the  book. 

I  saw  it ;  thence,  or  for  that 
reason,  1  know  it. 

Whence  do  they  know  it  ? 

He  did  not  know  it,  there- 
fore I  have  told  (it)  him. 

Before  I  had  reached  the 
wood. 

When,  or  as,  I  stood  at  the 
window  this  morning,  or  stand- 
ing at  the  window  this  morn- 
ing,  I  saw  the  soldiers  coming 
into  town. 

Whilst  I  was  standing  at  the 
window,  I  saw,  &,c. 

As  I  happened  to  stand,  or 
as  I  stood  at  the  window,  &,c. 

When,  or  since,  I  stood  at 
the  window,  &c. 

Although  he  is  very  ill,  yet 
there  is  room  to  hope  that  he 
will  recover. 

I  leave  to  thee  not  only  my 
house,  but  also  my  goods  and 
chattels. 

I  did  not  expect  your  arri- 
val, the  greater  therefore  is 
my  joy. 

The  more  quiet  life  is,  the 
more  fit  it  is  for  reflection. 

Either  thou  art  mad,  or  thou 
wilt  become  so. 


*  $)a,  in  such  cases,  is  frequently  omitted  and  understood. 


CH.  8.  §  2.]  SYNTAX  OF  THE  CONJUNCTION.  257 

(£v  fcfteu'et  roe'oet'  ©Ott  nod)         He  fears  neither  God   nor 

SDten'fcfoen,   roe'Det*    %0t>   nod)  men,  neither  death  nor  life. 

*e'ben. 

Ob  ifyrgfeid)  gcfc^Vt'  fctt>,fO         Although  you  are  learned, 

gtebt  eS  fcod)  (or  g(eid)'rool)l)  yet  there  is  still  much  that  you 

nod)  fciel,  t>a$  it)v  nid)t  roif'fct.  do  not  know. 

Ob  fie  gleid)  VCicl)   ftUO,  (0         Although  they  are  rich,  yet 

f&U'HCU   fte    t>od)    nid)C    ai'Un  they  cannot  help  every  body. 

ictt'tcn  bel'fen. 

ObwotyreSunmog'licljfdjiCtt,         Although  it  seemed  impos- 

nirtjttf  oef'to  roe'nigev  Veifltd)';  sible,     we     nevertheless     at- 

teu  »tv  e£.  tempted  it. 

3ntem'  id)  oafcon7  fpi'ad).  Whilst  I  was  speaking  of 

it. 

Ob  evgfeidjmein^Ct'tev  iff.         Although  he  is  my  cousin, 

fo  tommt  er  t>od)  ntd)C  JU  mil*,  yet  he  does  not  come  to  (see) 

me. 

Sr.  §at  e^  entwe'tei*  getfyan',         Either  he  has  done  it,  or  he 

o'oev  roivD  e^  nod)  tfynn.  will  do  it  yet. 

@te  t)at  mil*  un'rccljt  getfyan',         She  has  done  me  wrong,  yet 

fcen'uod)  will  id)  ityv  verge' ben.  I  will  forgive  her. 

©0   (etdK'gtaitbtg  er  i\\,  fo         He  is  equally  credulous  and 

tmt'log  i|t  er.  treacherous. 

@0    faug'e    et*    ftd)    in  Den         Whilst     he    kept     himself 

©d)ranr"en  DCr  SSefctjei'&cnfyett  within  the  bounds  of  modesty, 

fyielt,  war  id)  feitl  Cittfl'idjttgs  I  was  his  most  sincere  friend. 
|Ur  gxennb. 

Ob  et  gletd)  alt  tft,  fo  ty\t         Although  he  is  old,  he  still 

CI*  DOd)  OCU  DM'Ugett  ©ebrciltd)'  has  the  perfect  use  of  his  men- 

fet'ncr  (Set'ftegh-dfte.  tal  faculties. 

Sin  SCmfc  mnjj  md)t  mtv  ten         A  child   must  not  only  hon- 

33a'tcr,  fon'oern  and)  Die  Winf;  or  his    father,  but    also    his 

UX  C^VClt.  mother. 

©ebafo' (al$)  CStWrgefcfjIci's         As   soon    as   it   has  struck 

gen  I) at.  four. 

3Ud)Dem'   n?ir  %['U$  roofyl         After  having  well  examined 

nntevfnd)t'  fyat'ten.  every  thing. 

(5'tje  fcic  (Sloc'feanS'gefcfolas         Before  the  clock  has  done 

gen  t)at.  striking. 

3e  mefyr  id)   ttinf'e,  DeftO         The  more  I  drink,  the  more 

metyr  fya'be  id)  3)ur|t.  thirsty  I  am. 

3e  Idn'ger,  je  lie'ber.  The  longer,  the  dearer. 

22* 


25S  SYNTAX  OF  THE  CONJUNCTION.  TbOOK  II. 


L 


RULE    III. 

Some  conjunctions,  when  at  the  beginning,  cause  the  subject 
to  be  placed  after  the  verb.  They  are  t>a,  then  ;  fcatycv',  there- 
fore ;  Dann,  fcaratlf ,  then ;  fefflrum',  for  that  reason ;  fccmnad)', 
folg'Iid),  consequently ;  fceu'UOd),  jefcod)',  nevertheless ;  mm, 
jcfst,  now;  fo,  therefore ;  fyiuge'gen,  on  the  contrary  ;  iufcef'fett, 
meanwhile  ;  inglci'd)en,  likewise ;  frutm,  hardly  ;  within', 
therefore;  nod),  nor  ;  ubcvfctcS',  iVbvigcnS,  besides.  2)fl  frun 
btv  SDtanu,  Then  came  the  man  ;  SOfttfyttt'  tVVt  fid)  fcetlt  SSru'&er, 
Consequently  your  brother  mistakes.  Excepting  t>a,  all  of  them 
may  likewise  be  put  after  the  verb ;  as,  3)ev  SDfcltUl  gfaubt 
t>a^cr',  The  man  thinks  therefore  ;  %d)  %rori'flt  je&oct)',  I  doubt 
however,  gcr'nev,  fo(g'lid),  fyinge'gcn,  intcffcn,  inglei'cljen, 
&bevbU&,  lYbi'tgCttS,  may  even  stand  between  the  subject  and 
the  verb  :  Set*  33erfaf  jer  fcv'ncr  bc^aitp'tet,  The  author  more- 
over maintains.  2U'fO/  therefore  ;  fcod),  but;  tntW'kU,  either; 
rct'tn',  neither  ;  £tt>ar,  indeed  ;  are  to  be  added  to  the  forego- 
ing :  for  when  they  begin  a  sentence,  they  may,  like  these, 
bring  the  subject  after  the  verb,  though  it  is  not  necessary.  It 
is  right  to  say,  2U'fO  Dcr  95vit'&er  fyat  gefd)ric'bCtt,  The  brother 
then  has  written;  and,  TU'fo  fyat  bCV  95vtl'&er  gcfd)Vte'bcn. 
Likewise  thus :  2)er  35nt'&cv  tjat  al'fo  gefcljrie'ben,  and  £>cr 
25nt'fcCl*  al'fo  ty\t  gefdjrie'fccn.  By  this  transposition,  the  force 
of  the  sentence  may  be  varied,  which  is  no  small  advantage  in 
composition.  The  word  ndm'Ud),  namely,  which  should  be 
considered  as  a  conjunction,  may  be  included  among  those 
last  mentioned  :  but  when  at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence,  it 
sever  causes  the  subject  to  be  put  after  the  verb. 

Exercises. 

If  you  do  not  go  immediately.  Then  we  rejoiced.  She 
nevertheless  forgave  him.  Consequently  his  assertion  rests  on 
a  wrong  conclusion.  Namely,  the  question  arises,  whether  we 
shall  remain  or  not.  But  the  Tyrolese  were  not  discouraged. 
This  supposition  also  may  easily  be  refuted. 

if,  rocim.  to  rejoice,  ftd)  freu'ttt. 

immediately,  fogfeid)'.  nevertheless,  fccn'ltod). 

to  go,  ge'fyen,  irr.  to  forgive,  fcerge'ben,  irr. 

then,  t»a.  consequently,  fcemnad)'. 


CH.  9.]  SYNTAX  OF  THE  INTERJECTION.  259 

to  rest,  bmt'fycn.  or,  o'i>et\ 

assertion,  'QSctyaup'tMtg,  /.  but,  a'bcr. 

upon,  auf.  {Bat.)  Tyrolese,  fyvo'Uv,  m.  3.  a,  a, 

wrong,  falfd).  discouraged,  cntmu'tfyigt. 

conclusion,  @(blu§,  m.  3.  b.  t\  supposition,  ^cimu'ttjUUg,  /. 

namely,  uam'lid).  also,  auc(). 

question,  gttt'ge,  /.  may    be,    fafff   fid)     (literally, 

to  arise,  CUt|iC'l)Cn.  suffers  itself.) 

whether,  ob.  easily,  Ictcbt. 

to  remain,  blct'bcn.  to  refute,  rotbcrfc'gett. 


CHAPTER  IX. 
INTERJECTIONS. 

The  interjection  stands  quite  by  itself;  it  neither  governs 
nor  is  governed  by  any  other  part  of  speech.  Therefore, 
the  nominative  and  vocative,  being  independent  cases,  that  is, 
such  as  are  not  governed  by  a  preceding  word,  are  most  proper 
after  interjections.  lid) !  id)  un'glfltf  lidjer  SOtcnfd),  Ah  me ! 
unhappy  mortal !  £i !  bet*  ©d)vdf !  Ah!  the  rogue!  0!  roa£ 
fur  ein  ©djeu'fal !  O  !  what  a  horrible  object !  Ud) !  (ic'bcr 
gvcunD  !  Ah!  beloved  friend!  0!  tt}m'U\ltt  WXtW,  Ol 
dearest  father ! 

The  genitive  case  is  found  after  interjections  :  for  example, 
lid) !  DCS  STlcnDcS,  Ah !  the  misery !  0  !  Dcr.  gvcu'Dc,  Oh  !  what 
joy !  IXd) !  DCS"  Un'Dantbavcn,  Ah  !  the  ungrateful  wretch  !  spfui ! 
DCS  fd)am'(ofcit  20?cn'fd)CU  <   Fie !  what  a  shameless  man  ! 

The  dative  of  advantage,  or  disadvantage,  occurs  after 
certain  terms,  that  may  be  called  interjections,  though  they 
are  not  strictly  of  that  description;  as,  90Bof)l  tfym!  Happy 
him !  — 3Bot)t  Dcm  9D?cn'fd)CU,  Happy  the  man  !  —  SBcfy  mil* ! 
Woe  is  me ! 

The  position  of  the  interjection  is  arbitrary  ;  it  may  be 
placed  wherever  it  presents  itself,  according  to  the  emotion  of 
the  speaker  or  writer. 


BOOK   III. 


PROSODY. 


Prosody,  containing  the  principles  of  syllabic  division, 
quantity,  accent,  and  verse,  may  be  considered  as  the  syntax 
of  phonology,  i.  e.  the  doctrine  of  the  sounds  of  the  language, 
the  elements  of  which  form  the  first  part  of  this  grammar. 
See  Book  I.  Part  I.  Ch.  4. 


CHAPTER  I. 

DIVISION  OF  WORDS  INTO   SYLLABLES.* 

"  In  the  German  language  the  division  of  words  into  sylla- 
bles is  not  founded  upon  derivation,  but  on  pronunciation :• ;  we 
therefore  follow  the  principle,  Divide  as  you  speak."  f 

1.  The  letters  d),  fcl),  pfy,  and  tfy,  when  they  form  simple 
consonants,  can  never  be  disconnected  on  account  of  any 
alteration  of  the  word  in  which  they  occur ;  as,  Xud),  cloth, 
3Mfre£  (not  %ue*tyt0)-;  ^CUifcf),  exchange,  taitsfdjcn,  to  ex- 
change, (not  tauf-cfoen,) ;  sptyilofopf),  philosopher,  *pi)tlofo--p{)cn, 
philosopers;  SKatt),  counsellor,  9aa-~tl)C,  counsellors. 

2.  The  consonant  it  before  g  or  f  is  not  to  be  pronounced 
separately,  although  a  vowel  should  follow  the  g  or  f  ; 
because  the  combination  of  n  with  g  or  f  affects  the  pronun- 
ciation of  both  letters,  by  giving  them  a  nasal  sound.  Thus 
the  true  sound  of  the  verbs  ftug'=eit,  to  sing,  and  fcanf'en,  to 
thank,  would  be  spoiled  by  separating  them  in  this  manner, 
ftn-gen,  &an--fen. 


*  The  mode  of  dividing  words  into  syllables  would  not  have 
been  ranked  among  the  parts  of  prosody,  if  this  division  were 
not  founded  altogether  on  principles  of  elocution. 

t  Heinsius's  German  Grammar. 


CII.  2.]  QUANTITY.  261 

3.  A  word  compounded  of  several  words  is  divided  ac- 
cording to  the  words  of  which  it  consists.  Thus  QOBcvfftatt, 
workshop,  is  divided  2Bcrf--|liUt;  DOllcnfcCU,  to  perfect,  \>olI=eut>Ctt. 

4.  A  long  vowel  or  a  diphthong,  followed  by  a  simple  or 
compound  consonant,  is  pronounced  with  this  consonant,  if  it 
terminates  the  word ;  as,  gVUH,  green  ;  tttcij?,  most :  hut  if  a 
vowel  with  or  without  other  letters  is  added  to  its  end,  the 
consonant,  which  before  terminated  the  word,  becomes  the 
initial  of  the  additional  syllable ;  as,  gnVucv,  greener  ;  2Diei'« 
fttt/  master. 

5.  If  a  short  vowel  is  followed  by  a  double  consonant  and  a 
vowel,  the  two  consonants  of  which  the  double  one  consists,  are 
commonly  separated  in  pronunciation  and  spelling,  the  first  of 
them  being  joined  with  the  preceding  vowel,  and  the  second 
with  the  subsequent  vowel ;  as,  ©cl)if- ft,  vessels  ;  '•IDct-'tCl*, 
weather. 

6.  A  short  vowel,  followed  by  one  or  more  consonants  and  a 
vowel,  is  commonly  joined  in  pronunciation  with  the  consonant 
by  which  it  is  followed  ;  as,  c2i3ocl)=C/  week  ;  ^Siifrfj-e,  bushes  ; 
fc()er=JCH/  to  jest ;  gen-jhT,  window. 

Observation.  Many  German  authors  divide  words  into 
syllables  according  to  derivation,  without  regarding  their  pro- 
nunciation ;  and  others  divide  partly  according  to  the  former 
and  partly  according  to  the  latter.  We  have  in  this  grammar 
endeavoured  to  divide  every  word  conformably  to  its  true  pro- 
nunciation,—  taking  together  for  each  syllable  so  many  letters 
as  are  necessary  to  produce  each  of  the  component  sounds  of 
the  word. 

& 


CHAPTER  II. 

QUANTITY. 

The  quantity  of  a  syllable  consists  in  the  duration  of  its 
sound.  The  principal  difference  between  the  ancient  Greek 
and  Latin  lanjzuacres  and  the  German  as  well  as  other  modern 
languages,  in  respect  to  quantity,  consists  in  two  things. 
First,   there  are  in   the   ancient  languages  but  two  different 

7  O  O 


262  QUANTITY.  [BOOK  III. 

times  of  duration  by  which  the  quantity  of  syllables  is  deter- 
mined. They  are  either  long  or  short ;  and  there  is  but  one 
kind  of  length  and  of  shortness,  the  time  of  two  short  sylla- 
bles being  equal  to  one  long  syllable.*  In  German  there  is  a 
great  variety  of  longer  or  shorter  syllables  :  thus  in  the  word 
SBotymuigClt,  habitations,  the  syllable  QBol)  is  longer  than 
111111$,  which  surpasses  in  length  the  final  syllable  CU. 

The  German  also  differs  from  the  ancient  languages  in  its 
not  recognising  the  principle  of  position,  that  is,  the  effect  of 
the  meeting  of  two  consonants,  by  which  in  the  ancient  lan- 
guages the  preceding  syllable  is  rendered  long.  For  although 
the  concurrence  of  consonants  has  some  influence  upon  quantity 
in  German,  yet  this  influence  consists  in  nothing  else  than 
the  natural  effect  of  several  consonants  upon  pronunciation. 
They  lengthen  a  syllable  by  obstructing  its  utterance.  Thus 
Cilt  (indef.  art.)  is  shorter  than  cin$7  one  thing,  and  this  is 
shorter  than  C  til  ft,  once. 

To  facilitate  the  comprehension  of  quantity  in  German, 
three  different  times  of  duration  have  been  adopted  by 
prosodists,  the  long,  the  short,  and  the  middle  time,  which  are 
signified  by  these  three  signs,  -,  u,  and  o.t  One  long  syllable 
is  accounted  equal  to  two  short  ones  :  while  those  of  middle 
length  are  in  themselves  shorter  than  the  former,  and  longer 
than  the  latter  ;  but  may  sometimes  be  used  as  long,  and  some- 
times as  short  syllables. 

1.  The  following  syllables  are  long:  all  monosyllabic  nouns, 
adjectives,  and  verbs  (if  they  are  not  used  as  auxiliaries) ; 
moreover,  the  radical  syllable  of  every  word,  and  those  sylla- 
bles which  have  the  accent ;  |  as,  \S3cvt,  word  ;  gut,  good ; 
fcin  (fctjtt),  to  exist;  (Ei-frcit'ficfjcretj,  something  more  pleasant , 
ant'roortCll,  to  answer. 


*  Although  there  were  syllables  which  were  sometimes  pro- 
nounced long  and  sometimes  short  (ancipites),  yet  they  did  not 
form  a  medium  between  long  and  short,  but  were  pronounced 
either  long  or  short. 

f  This  sign  (v)  is  here  used  to  signify  the  middle  time,  as 
well  as  the  doiditfid,  i.  e.  either  short  or  long. 

|  The  nature  of  this  case  will  be  explained  in  the  next 
chapter. 


CH.  3.]  ACCENT.  263 

2.  The  following  syllables  are  short :  the  inseparable  parti- 
cles belonging  to  compound  verbs,  as,  be,  cut,  cmp,  CV,  gc,  fccr, 
JCV,  (pages  108 — 110);  the  unaccented  ending  of  words,  as 
t,  be,  tc,  (i,  cm,  cu,  ev,  CS,  ct ;  the  definite  article,  and  some 
adjective  and  adverbial  endings,  as,  en,  ltg,  lid),  and  ifc(). 
Examples,  berci'tcu,  to  prepare;  %it'ft,  depth;  (cr)  lic'bct, 
(he)  loves;  ir'c-cn,  earthen:  roafyr'licl),  truly;  rocibifcl),  ef- 
feminate. 

3.  The  following  syllables  are  of  middle  length :  mono- 
syllabic pronouns,  numerals,  prepositions,  conjunctions;  some 
adverbs,  interjections,  and  auxiliaries  which  consist  of  one  syl- 
lable ;  the  substantive  endings,  cnt>,  Mlg,  fcilt,  nig,  fcfoitft,  be  it, 
hit,  (see  page  20) ;  and  the  adjective,  adverbial,  and  participial 
endings,  bar,  fam,  cm,  icf)t,  tfd)t,  cub,  tit,  ttt,  cr|t;  as, 
id),  I;  brei,  three;  fur,  for;  roenu,  if;  nun,  now;  C!  O!; 
(er)  t?at  (geliebf),  (he)  has  (loved);  $dum'lcin,  little  tree; 
geijat-'mfebt,  clad  in  armour;  jUfccVbCVft,  first. 

Observation.  It  should  be  remembered,  that  this  classifica- 
tion of  syllables  according  to  their  length  is  only  an  approxima- 
tion to  a  correct  representation  of  their  quantity,  which  in 
many  cases  depends  on  other  circumstances  besides  those 
before  mentioned  ;  such  as  the  sense  of  the  words,  the  meeting 
of  certain  letters,  and  other  things,  which  cannot  be  taught  by 
rules,  but  must  be  acquired  by  induction,  as  one  becomes 
familiar  with  the  nature  of  the  language. 


CHAPTER  III. 

ACCENT. 

Accent  consists  in  laying  upon  a  particular  syllable  of 
a  word,  or  upon  a  certain  part  of  a  sentence,  a  greater  stress 
than  upon  the  rest.  Accordingly  there  are  two  kinds  of  ac- 
cent, that  which  is  laid  upon  a  particular  syllable,  and  that 
which  belongs  to  a  certain  part  of  a  sentence.  In  this  sen- 
tence, 2)ie  @vie'd)cn  maten  fieg'reid),  The  Greeks  were  victo- 
rious, the  accent  is  to  be  placed  on  (Svie'cbcn,  the  Greek?, 
if  the  intention  of  the  writer  is  to  exclude  the  idea  that 
the  enemies  of  the  Greeks  were  victorious  ;  but  it  must  be 


264  ACCENT.  [BOOK  III 

laid  upon  ficg'rcid),  victorious,  if  he  meant  to  assert  that  the 
Greeks  were  not  defeated,  but  gained  the  victory.*  This  rule 
applies  of  course,  as  well  to  words  of  one,  as  of  several  syl- 
lables. 

In  order  to  determine  which  of  several  syllables  of  a  word 
has  the  accent,  we  must,  according  to  the  above  principle, 
examine  which  of  them  is  the  most  important.  The  rela- 
tive importance  of  each  syllable,  on  which  the  place  of  the 
accent  depends,  is  determined  by  the  following  rule.  The 
greatest  stress,  and  consequently  the  accent,  lies  generally  on 
the  radical  syllable  of  the  word,  unless  it  be  compounded 
with  another  word  which  implies  a  negation  or  limitation  of 
the  radical  word.  In  this  case  the  word  which  is  joined  as  a 
limitation  takes  the  principal  accent ;  and  the  radical  syllable 
of  the  main  word  retains  only  a  secondary  accent.  Thus  the 
words  gc'fecit/  to  give  ;  (ScfcU'fdJflft/  company  ;  and  most  other 
words,  have  only  one  accent,  viz.  on  the  radical  syllable  of 
each  of  them  (§d\  fell).  But  in  the  words  auf  gc'beii,  to  give 
up,  SHci'fegefetTfdjaft,  company  for  travelling,  the  original 
words  are  essentially  modified  by  the  additions  (Utf,  SHci'fc ; 
these  therefore  take  the  principal  accent,  while  only  a  secon- 
dary stress  remains  on  the  radical  word.  In  speaking,  the 
principal  accent  is  generally  expressed  by  the  falling  and  the 
secondary  accent  by  the  rising  inflection  of  the  voice ;  in 
writing,  the  former  is  marked  by  the  sign  ('),  and  the  latter  by 
the  sign  ('),  after  the  last  letter  of  the  accented  syllable. 

It  is  to  be  observed  that  the  accent  is  not  moved  from  the 
radical  syllable  of  a  word  on  account  of  the  addition  of  a 
syllable  which  either  has  no  meaning  by  itself,  or,  at.  least,  by 
being  joined  to  another  word,  takes  entirely  the  nature  of  those 
particles  which  have  no  meaning  except  in  connexion  with 
other  words.  This  inseparable  connexion  makes  them  to  be 
considered  as  parts  of  the  radical  word,  rather  than  as  limi- 
tations of  its  original  meaning.  Thus,  with  respect  to  com- 
pound verbs,  the  inseparable  particles,  6c,  #C/  cut,  &,c  (pages 
108  —  HO),  do  not  alter  the  place  of  the  accent;  while  all  the 

*  Accordingly  the  question,  which  of  several  words  in  a 
sentence  is  to  have  the  accent,  cannot  be  determined  by  the 
part  of  speech  to  which  each  of  these  words  belongs,  but  only 
by  the  degree  of  importance  which  the  meaning  of  the  sen- 
tence assigns  to  each  of  them. 


CH.  3.]  ACCENT.  265 

separable  particles,  as  an,  on,  ab,  off,  an£,  out,  produce  that 
effect.  Examples  :  fet'jen,  to  place  ;  fccvfet'jeu,  to  displace ; 
ab'fct'jCU,  to  depose  ;  ge'fyen,  to  go  ;  ilbcvge'fycu  (inseparable), 
to  pass  over  without  noticing;  nbei'O/tyen  (separable),  to  go 
over  to  a  different  party.  Those  words,  however,  which  are 
compounded  with  nn,  form  exceptions  ;  because  this  negative 
particle  does  not  occur  by  itself,  and  nevertheless  produces  so 
great  an  alteration  of  the  sense  that  it  generally  takes  the 
principal  accent  ;  as,  fvcunfc'ltrf),  friendly  ;  nn'fvennolicb,  un- 
friendly;  gall,  case;  Un'fall,  accident.  The  verb  ant'roov'ten, 
to  answer,  composed  of  the  ancient  verb  WCV'ten,  to  represent 
in  words,  and  the  inseparable  ant,  forms  a  similar  exception. 
In  some  instances  the  sense  of  the  sentence  and  euphony 
alone  can  decide  which  of  two  syllables  ought  to  have  the 
principal,  and  which  the  secondary  accent;  whether,  for  ex- 
ample, we  ought  to  pronounce  Voffhnrimen,  or  tyeirfcm'mcu, 
perfect  ;  nn'entbet)V  lief),  or  ntfentbetyr'lirt),  indispensable. 
Sometimes  even  an  unaccented  syllable  may  be  marked  by  a 
particular  oratorial  accent ;    as  in  this  phrase,  SBtC'le    fya'ben 

itm  fcie'fe  (Efy'rc  fid)  be'roov'bcn,  a'bcv  ftei'ncv  l)at  fie  er'wotf* 

ben,  Many  have  aspired  to  this  honor,  but  no  one  has  obtain- 
ed it. 

Foreign  words,  which  are  Germanized  by  omitting  the  end- 
ings et?,  06,  tt£,  ilt£,  0,  a,  &,c,  have  the  accent  commonly  on 
the  final  syllable  ;  as,  %d)iiV  (Achilles)  ;  Ofytnp'  (Olympus); 
ConfuUt'  (consulatus) ;  93irgif  (Virgilius)  ;  Zlpoll'  (Apollo) : 
2)ipIom'  (diploma). 

Observation.  Accent  must  not  be  confounded  with  quan- 
tity. The  latter  consists  in  the  duration  of  the  sound  of  a 
syllable ;  while  the  accent  marks  the  degree  of  emphasis  em- 
ployed in  pronouncing  certain  syllables  or  words.  If  the  ac- 
cent is  on  a  long  syllable,  it  has  no  influence  upon  its  quanti- 
ty. But  when  it  happens  to  fall  on  a  short  syllable,  the 
accent  does  not  actually  make  the  syllable  a  long  one,  yet  it 
produces  a  similar  effect  on  its  pronunciation  ;  that  is,  the 
rapid  and  emphatic  manner  in  which  the  accented  syllable  is 
uttered,  is  followed  by  a  pause  preceding  the  pronunciation  of 
the  unaccented  syllables  ;  and  this  pause,  together  with  the 
accented  syllable,  equals  the  time  of  a  long  syllable,  according 
to  the  above  principles  of  quantity.  Examples :  SDTut'ter, 
mother;  QOBaffer,  water. 

OQ 

r+'J 


$66  VERSIFICATION.  [BOOK  III 


CHAPTER  IV. 


GERMAN  VERSE. 

The  German  verse  rests  on  a  double  foundation,  Rhythm, 
or  harmonious  measure ;  and  Consonance,  or  agreement  of 
sounds,  which  is  exemplified  principally  in  rhyme.  In  the 
ancient  Greek  and  Latin  poetry,  rhythm  alone  constituted  the 
verse.  For  although  we  find  rhyme  sometimes  employed 
(intentionally,  as  it  seems),  it  must  be  considered  as  an 
incidental  play  upon  certain  sounds,  rather  than  as  an  element 
of  versification.  In  German,  as  in  other  modern  languages, 
the  principle  still  prevails,  that  there  may  be  verses  without 
rhyme,  but  none  without  rhythm.  Nevertheless  it  is  certain, 
that  in  some  verses  the  rhythm,  and  in  others  the  rhyme  (or 
some  other  kind  of  consonance),  determines  the  character  of 
the  verse. 

§  1.   Of  Rhythm. 

The  German  language  is  capable  of  imitating  all  the  an- 
cient Greek  and  Roman  metres ;  accordingly  all  the  classical 
poetry  of  the  ancients,  even  the  choruses  of  the  dramatic 
poets,  have  been  translated  into  German  verses  of  the  same 
kind.  But,  in  indigenous  German  versification,  a  freer  use 
has  been,  and  may  be  made  of  the  rhythmical  powers  of  the 
language,  for  adapting  the  measure  entirely  to  the  meaning 
of  the  words,  without  confining  the  poet  to  other  rules  than 
that  measurement  of  time  to  which  the  composer  of  music  i3 
likewise  subjected. 

1.  The  ancient  Metres.  In  using  the  ancient  metres  for 
German  poetry,  the  above  principles  of  quantity  ought  to  be 
observed.  The  accent  has  no  direct  influence  in  this  kind  of 
versification  ;  except  so  far  as  it  coincides  with  the  principles 
of  quantity,  and  preserves  euphony  in  general. 

Each  foot  of  the  ancient  metres  may  be  rendered  in  Ger« 
man  either  by  one  or  by  more  words.  It  will  be  sufficient  U 
give  here  examples  of  all  the  feet  of  two  and  of  three  syl- 
lables. 


CH.  4.  §  1.]  VERSIFICATION.  267 

a.  Feet  of  two  syllables. 

Spondee,         -  -  ftnnjt'roevi,  work  of  art. 
Pyrrhich'ius,  u  u  ©rbfcrit',*  Sybarite. 
Trochee,         -  v  al'le,  all. 
Iambus,  v  -  (BettXltf,  force. 

b.  Feet  of  three  syllables. 

Molossus,  gfcf&fyaupt'mamt,  commander. 

Trib'rachys,  ^  o  u  Qtbtnt=Hit' ,*  blessed. 

Antibacchi'us,  --u  (Stu'roofyllCV,  inhabitant. 

Bacchi'us,  u--  (Scroalt'tfyat,  violence. 

Amphim'acer,  -  v  -  It  bergang,  transaction. 

Amphib'rachys,  u  -  v  ©cfufy'lc,  feelings. 

Dac'tylus,  -w  vHSan'bCvetr,  traveller. 

An'apsest,  u  u  -  Clamant',  diamond. 

The  following  specimens  will  be  sufficient  to  illustrate  the 
use  of  ancient  metres  in  German. 

Hexameter  and  Pentameter. 


— u~  u  I  — u— o  j  —  I  —  uu|—  uu  I  - 


tyib§'M)  erfcWC  @cl)fac()t'ruf;  n>il&  fdjmettcrtm  affe  $vom-- 

ye'ten, 
SHafd)  unc  t>ev  £[ang  in  fceu  iuft,  jKmn'tcn  t>tc  gcin'fcc  reiv 

an. 

Suddenly    sounded    the    battle   cry  ;    wildly  clanged   all   the 

trumpets, 
Quick  as  the  clangor  in  the  air,  we  rushed   against  the  enemy. 


*  As  every  word  of  more  than  one  syllable  has  one  of  these 
long,  the  pyrrhichius  and  tribrachys  can  be  formed  only  by 
monosyllables,  or  by  the  initial  or  final  syllables  of  words  of 
more  than  two  syllables.  Thus  in  the  above  examples  the  two 
first  syllables  of  ©t)bavit'  form  the  pyrrhichius,  and  the  three 
first  syllables  of  gebcncfcctt'  form  the  tribrachys. 


268 


VERSIFICATION. 


The  Sapphic  Stanza.* 


[book  III. 


u 

—   — 

—  u  u 

—   U 

—  U 

u 



—  o  u 

—    KJ 

—    U 

u 

—    ~ 

—  kj  *j 

—  V    KJ 

—  U 

—  Kf 

—  o 

Un'fer  Sag'roerf  en'bet  frcr  fKI'fc  @a6'tat, 
<2£ic  t>e$  SDftt'tagtf  ©litt  fcie  crfefjn'te  ?Oton&'«ad)t. 
©tvcbt  imt>  fyoflt  !  6i6  en&'lid)  t>ct?  emvgen  ©onn'tags 
SDtor'gen  cmpov'ttetgt. 

Our  daily  labor  the  still  sabbath  terminates,  as  the  desired 
moonlight  night  {terminates)  the  heat  of  noonday.  Strive,  and 
hope  !  till  finally  the  morning  of  the  eternal  Sunday  rises. 

Observation.  It  is  an  important  principle  particularly  in 
ancient  metres,  that  the  natural  division  of  every  verse  into 
words,  should  correspond  in  some  measure  with  its  division 
into  feet,  and  the  general  character  of  the  verse.  Thus,  a  too 
frequent  repetition  of  the  amphibrachys  spoils  the  character  of 
the  hexameter  ;  as, 

iieb'licl)  evton'ten  Me  gto'ten,  e£  fcftroefc'ten  t>te  Sanger  im 

$?rei'fe. 

Sweetly  sounded  the  flutes,  the  dancers  moved  in  a  circle. 

This  verse  might  be  mended  in  this  manner  ; 

2>ovt  tbnt  gl&'tenmujtf,  t>ovt  fdjroing'cn  fid)  Xfrntyv  im  ftrei'fe. 
There  sounds  the  music  of  flutes,  there  the  dancers  move 
in  a  circle. 

%  The  German  Rhythm.  The  metres  which  are  not  bor- 
rowed  from   the  Greeks,  but  originally  German,  are  on  the 


*  The  Sapphic  stanza  is  here  divided  according  to  the  sim- 
ple mode  of  the  old  grammarians ;  because  we  think  it  prefera- 
ble to  that  of  Ausonius.  We  also  think  that  the  uniform  caesura 
after  the  first  syllable  of  the  third  foot,  as  we  find  it  in  the 
odes  of  Horace,  cannot  be  considered  as  an  improvement  on 
the  original  metrical  construction  which  prevails  in  the  poeti- 
cal remains  of  Sappho. 


CU.  4.  §  1.]  VERSIFICATION.1  269 

whole  founded  upon  the  same  principles  of  quantity,  and  may 
generally  be  analyzed  into  feet,  like  the  ancient  metres.  But 
these  principles  of  quantity  and  metrical  division  are  modified 
by  accent,  euphony,  and  the  sentiment  that  is  to  be  expressed  : 
so  that  frequently  the  character  of  the  verse  cannot  be  deter- 
mined by  each  of  its  parts,  but  only  by  the  whole  of  a  poetical 
composition.  Accordingly  in  native  German  poetry  we  find 
many  deviations  from  the  above  stated  common  rules  of  quan- 
tity which  ought  strictly  to  be  adhered  to  in  imitating  the  an- 
cient metres.  Thus,  a  short  syllable  may  be  used  for  a  long  one 
particularly  when  it  ends  in  a  vowel,  or  in  a  liquid  consonant ; 
as  in  the  Iambic  measure  of  Burger's  Lenore. 

3Bie  fcon'tierten  fcie  SBrutf' en  ! 

How  the  bridges  thunder  ! 

On  the  other  hand,  long  syllables  may  be  used  for  short  ones, 
particularly  when,  from  the  sense  they  express,  they  are  com- 
paratively of  little  importance  in  the  sentence  in  which  they 
occur.     Thus  in  Schiller's  Maria  Stuart,  Mary  says,  — 

2)ort  Icctf  cin  gifefo'ev  t»cn  Sltadj'en  an ; 
2)iefc$  c'lenfcc  galjv'jcug  f  Sun'tc  mid)  vct'ten ! 

There  a  fisher  fastens  his  boat  to  the  shore ; 
This  miserable  vessel  micrht  rescue  me  ! 

Here  the  first  as  well  as  the  second  syllable  of  fcic'fcS  is  used 
as  short,  so  that  this  word  together  with  the  first  syllable  of 
e'(cnt>e  forms  an  anapaest,  and  all  the  emphasis  falls  on  e'Icnfce 
(even  such  a  miserable  skiff  as  this,  &,c.) 

But  in  most  cases  of  this  kind  it  cannot  be  said  strictly, 
that  short  syllables  are  used  as  long  ones,  or  long  syllables  as 
short  ones.  A  good  reader  will  take  care,  that  the  measure 
which  would  be  disturbed  by  pronouncing  a  certain  syllable 
according  to  its  natural  quantity,  be  restored  by  an  appropriate 
pause,  or  by  protracting  or  shortening  the  subsequent  or  pre- 
ceding words,  so  as  to  restore  the  general  character  of  the 
verse. 

The  most  common  measure  is  the  Iambic,  frequently  in- 
terspersed with  the  spondee  or  anapaest,  or  a  pyrrhichius  used 
as  an  iambus.     The  spondee  and  the  anapaest  occur  among 

23* 


270  VERSIFICATION.  [BOOK  III. 

the  iambuses  not  only  in  the  odd  places,  as  in  the  Greek  tri- 
meter, but  in  every  place.     Examples, 

£>an£,  2)anf  fctefen  freuufclidj  gvu'nen  33au'men  ! 

(@d)illev.) 

O  thanks,  thanks  to  these  friendly  green  trees ! 


u      u 


3a,  in  fcev  gcr'nc  fufylt  fid)  Die  SDtarfjt 
SJOBenn  jwt  ftcl)  ve&'ttdj  fie'ben.    (CS&fye.) 

Yes,  at  a  great  distance  the  power  is  felt,  when  two  love 
each  other  truly. 

Sometimes  the  iambic  measure  is  interrupted  by  a  trochee, 
for  the  sake  of  greater  emphasis. 

£ann  id)  fcodj  fitv  mid)  feltyt  nicljc  fprecfc'cn,  ofy'ne  m$ 

—        o 

@d)rcer  m  Dcrfta'gen.    (©djiflev.) 

I  indeed  cannot  speak    for   myself  without    accusing   you 
grievously. 

Next  to  the  iambic,  the  trochaic  measure  is  most  frequent ; 
oftentimes  mixed  with  spondees  and  dactyls  ; 


—      u     u 


£>ie  n>eit  tte'fcer  em  frcm'fces  ikt> 
Ills  \t)v  eig'nes  fy&'tm    (®6tl)e.) 

Who  like  to  hear  the  song  of  another,  rather  than  their 
own. 

•  The    amphibrachys    also   not   unfrequently  constitutes   the 
♦character  of  the  verse. 

<£$  fcon'nern  Die  J&S'fyen,  es  jit'tert  t>ev  ©teg, 

5Ktd)t  gvau'et  t>em  @d)itt'jcn  auf  fcbroinMcfcem  2Beg. 

The  heights  thunder,  the  bridge  trembles,  the  hunter  is  not 
afraid  on  the  dizzy  path. 

Other  verses  derive  their  character  from  the  dactyle,  the 
anapaest,  or  other  measures.  Besides  there  is  a  great  number 
of  mixed  verses ;  in  some  of  them   a  regular  change  of  cer- 


CH.  4.  §  1.]  VERSIFICATION.  271 

tain  feet  is  observed,  while  others,  like  the  hymns  of  Pindar 
and  the  choruses  of  the  Greek  drama,  vary  according  to  the 
sentiment  of  the  poet. 

Most  of  the  regular  verses  and  stanzas,  are  the  same  in 
German  and  in  English  ;  particularly  in  modern  German  poetry, 
since  the  bold  and  high-wrought  versification  of  the  twelfth 
and  thirteenth  centuries  has   given    way  to  simpler  measures. 

We  will  add  a  specimen  of  poetry,  the  rhythm  of  which  is 
not  determined  by  any  certain  measure,  but  by  the  sense  ot 
the  words  alone.  It  is  taken  from  Schiller's  Maria  Stuart 
When  the  queen  after  a  long  and  close  imprisonment  had  ob- 
tained permission  to  walk  in  the  park  near  the  castle,  she 
says  to  Lady  Kennedy,  her  nurse,  who  vainly  endeavoured  to 
follow  the  quick  step  of  the  queen,  — 

ia$  mid)  t>er  ucu'eu  grei'fyeit  genie'feit/ 

iafj  mid)  cin  SCtub  fein,  fei  es  mit ! 

Xtub  anf  t>em  gnVtteh  "Sep'picb  Dec  Q33ic'fcn 

spriVfen  Den  (eidyten,  geflit'gelten  ©clnutt. 

sBin  id)  Dent  ttn'ttern  (Sefang'nijj  ent|tte'gett, 

§i\it  fie  mid)  nid)t  mefyr,  Die  tiran'rige  (BruftT 

iafj  mid)  in  fooHen,  in  fcitr'ttigen  j&Vgen 

^rtnf'en  Die  frci'e,  lit  tjimm'(i(d)c  htft. 

0  2)anr",  2)anir  fcte'fen  freun&'lictj  gnVntn  33du'mcn, 

2Me  mei'netf  SCet'fct^  SDTan'ern  mtr  berjtec'f  en  ! 

3d)  rottl  mid)  fret  iinD  glncHid)  trau'men, 

^DDatnm'  ang  met'nem  fft'fen  3Bal)n  mid)  roec'fen  ? 

Umflngt'  mid)  nidjt  fccv  roei'te  £tm'metefel)oo$  ? 

SDie  SSfic'fe,  fret  unfc  fef'fefl&s, 

(Srgc'fycn  fid)  in  un'gemetfnen  SHan'mert. 

Sort,  veo  Die  grau'en  SftVbelberge  ra'gen, 

gangt  mei'nes  SKei'cfees  ©rfin'je  an  ; 

Unt)  Bie'fe  ■JBofr'en,  Die  nacl)  SJtittag  ja'gcn, 

©ie  fn'djen  granfretdjs  fer'nen  O'cean. 

giienfcc  ^DScI't'cn  !  ©eg'ier  ber  Sftfte ! 
SEBcr  mit  eudj  ttan'&erte,  mit  eud)  fdjtf  te! 
©rft'fet  mir  freuut»'(id)  meivi  ^n'genbfanD  ! 
3d)  bin  gefang'en,  id)  bin  in  35an'Den, 
2td),  id)  t>ab'  Jei'nen  anient  (SefanD'ten  \ 
grci  in  ittften  ijt  cure  95al)Tt, 
3()r  feifc  nid)t  i>icfcr  S^'ntgtn  un'tertfyan, 


272  VERSIFICATION.  [BOOK   III. 

Let  me  enjoy  the  new  freedom, 
Let  me  be  a  child,  be  one  with  me  ! 
And  on  the  green  carpet  of  the  meadows 
{Let  me)  try  the  light,  winged  step. 
Am  I  arisen  from  the  dark  prison, 
Does  the  sad  vault  no  longer  hold  me  1 
Let  me  in  full  and  thirsty  draughts 
Drink  in  the  free,  the  heavenly  air. 

0  thanks,  thanks  to  these  friendly  green  trees, 
Which  conceal  from  me  the  walls  of  my  dungeon ! 

1  will  dream  myself  free  and  happy  ; 
Why  wake  me  from  my  sweet  delusion  ? 

Does  not  the  wide  canopy  of  heaven  surround  me  ? 

My  looks,  free  and  unconfmed, 

Wander  over  immense  spaces. 

There,  where  the  grey,  misty  mountains  rise, 

The  boundary  of  my  kingdom  commences  ; 

And  these  clouds  which  hasten  towards  the  south, 

Seek  the  distant  ocean  of  France. 

Hastening  clouds,  sailors  of  the  air, 

Would  that  I  could  wander  and  sail  with  you  ! 

Salute  for  me  friendly  the  land  of  my  youth  ! 

I  am  imprisoned,  I  am  in  fetters, 

Alas,  I  have  no  other  messenger ! 

Free  in  the  air  is  your  path, 

You  are  not  subject  to  this  queen. 

The  first  three  lines  consist  of  alternate  dactyles  and  tro- 
chees. From  the  fourth  line  the  emphasis  rises,  as  Mary  con- 
trasts her  present  freedom  with  her  late  imprisonment ;  and 
the  metre  hastens  on  in  dactyls,  to  the  eighth  verse.  In  the 
ninth  verse  the  feeling  of  gratitude  changes  the  measure 
into  the  iambic,  which  continues  to  the  nineteenth.  From 
the  twentieth  verse  her  desire  of  deliverance  from  captivity 
in  England,  awakened  by  the  sight  of  the  distant  mountains 
of  Scotland,  and  the  clouds  flying  towards  France,  changes 
the  metre  again  into  that  of  the  first  three  lines,  which  de- 
scribe her  delight  in  her  deliverance  from  her  dungeon. 
The  alternate  dactyles  and  trochees  sometimes  terminate 
with  a  supernumerary  (catalectic)  syllable,  as  mit,  ©cl)l*itt/ 
(Sl-llft,  Ulft 


CH.  4.  §  2.]  VERSIFICATION.  273 


§  2.    Of  Consonance. 

Under  the  word  consonance  we  comprehend  three  princi- 
pal resemblances  between  successive  sounds  of  the  language, 
viz.  rhyme,  assonance,  and  alliteration. 

1.  Rhyme  consists  in  the  identity  of  certain  vowels  and 
consonants.  This  resemblance  may  exist  between  one, 
or  two,  or  three  syllables  occurring  in  different  words  ;  as, 
©d)ilb,  shield,  and  33i(t>,  image;  ic'kctl,  life,  and  fle'beu,  to 
give;  min'uiglid),  lovely,  and  m'ttiglidj,  intimately. 

In  a  rhyme  of  more  than  one  syllable  the  last  may  some- 
times consist  of  a  monosyllabic  word  ;  as, 

©ci'ucn  SOici'jkr 
iicbt  uut>  pvcijt  cr. 

He  loves  and  praises  his  master. 

The  rhyming  syllables  ought  to  be  of  the  same  quantity  ;  and 
in  rhymes  of  several  syllables  the  principal  emphasis  should 
be  on  the  first.  Therefore  we  cannot  make  |tcib'(id),  mor- 
tal, rhyme  with  Cfb(icl)',  imperfect  of  crMci'djcn,  to  grow  pale  ; 
but  we  may  make  it  rhyme  with  cvb'Iicf),  hereditary. 

The  rhyme  is  commonly  found  at  the  end,  but  sometimes 
(particularly  in  ancient  German  poetry)  also  in  the  course  of 
the  verse ;  as, 

%n$  dlad)t  errmidn' 
Set-  ©cu'ne  spradjt. 

Out  of  the  night  awakes  the  splendor  of  the  sun. 

In  a  monosyllabic  rhyme  the  beginning  of  the  rhyming 
syllables  should  not  be  the  same,  unless  the  two  words  ex- 
press quite  a  different  meaning.  In  rhymes  of  more  than 
one  syllable  this  remark  applies  to  the  first  of  those  syllables. 
—  Thus  we  cannot  make  mefy'rot,  to  augment,  rhyme  with 
Vevmet/vcU/  to  augment :  but  it  is  allowable  to  say, 

3e'£>cr  cr/lc  5DTcnfd)  V»cvc()'rc 

©ie'fen  ffllfo'tyxn  fcer  tyftidit  unt>  Qtyrc ! 

Let  every  noble  man  revere  this  martyr  of  duty  and  honor. 


274  VERSIFICATION.  [BOOK  III. 

We  must  notice  here  two  kinds  of  impure  rhymes  which 
occur  even  in  the  works  of  the  best  poets.  They  consist  in 
making  to  rhyme  together  vowels  or  consonants  of  a  similar 
but  not  the  same  sound.  With  respect  to  vowels,  we  remark 
as  being  made  to  rhyme  together,  e,  d,  and  6  ;  i  and  u ;  ti  and 
ett ;  as,  ©e'gCU,  blessing,  rcd'gen,  to  weigh,  and  mo'gen,  to  be 
able  ;  geillt),  enemy;  and  gmtttfc,  friend.  In  regard  to  con- 
sonants, the  sounds  of  fc  and  t  are  particularly  liable  to  be 
confounded  ;  as,  thus  gel'fca*,  fields,  and  $d'Ut,  palfrey. 

2.  Assonance  consists  in  the  rhyming  of  the  vowels  alone, 
and  consequently  differs  from  the  full  rhyme  by  the  dis- 
crepancy between  the  consonants ;  as,  mi(t>/  mild,  and  ^iufc/ 
child ;  iit'be,  love,  and  gvte'fce,  peace. 

Since  assonance  does  not  so  evidently  combine  several 
verses  as  rhyme,  it  is  commonly  oftentimes  repeated,  so  that 
frequently  the  same  assonance  connects  a  whole  poem.  — As- 
sonance is  not  so  frequently  used  as  rhyme. 

3.  Alliteration  consists  in  the  repetition  of  certain  conso- 
nants particularly  at  the  beginning  of  words.  It  is  most  com- 
mon that  the  same  consonant  which  begins  the  first  verse,  is 
repeated  in  the  course  of  the  same,  and  then  at  the  beginning 
of  the  next  verse.     Example, 

<2Bo{)t  in  t>e$  SBaf'fcee? 
aBit'Detfei-  Stn'famfeit 
£6vt'  id)  fcen  J^av'fenrlang, 
$bxt'  id)  fren  £ctt>'wf. 

Indeed  in  the  wildest  solitude  of  the  forest  I  heard  the 
sound  of  the  harps,  I  heard  the  call  of  the  heroes. 

Alliteration,  which  was  common  in  the  old  Scandinavian 
poetry,  is  now  rarer  than  the  two  other  kinds  of  consonance. 


APPENDIX. 


I. 

As  an  exercise  in  reading  and  translating  for  beginners,  we 
add  here  a  passage  of  the  New  Testament,  from  the  German 
version  of  Leander  Van  Esz. 


acts  ix.  1  — 28. 

1.  ©au'lus  fdjnanb'te  nod)  ^utl?  unb  2DZovi>  nn'Der  t>ie 
Sung'er  oes  £errn,  gtng  ju  oem  D'fcerprteffet. 

2.  ItnD  (ies  fid)  l>on  ifym  SSoK'madnsbviefe  nad)  2)ama$'ftt$ 
an  Die  ©miago'gen  ge'ben,  t'vaft  wel'cfter  cv  SDTan'nev  unD 
gvau'en,  Die  ev  ate  ftn'tydngev  Die'fev  4c^'re  fftn'be,  gebun'Deu 
nad)  3cvu'faUm  fftfy'ven  ftnn'te. 

3.  2Utf  Dic'fcv  SHci'fc,  fd)on  na'fye  bet  Samas'ftts,  umjtvafyfre 
ifyn  plo^'lid)  tin  iid)t  urn  £im'me(. 

4.  Qsv  fid  auf  Die  Sv'De,  unD  ^v'te  ci'ne  ©tim'me,  tie  jn  tfym 
fpvad) :  ©aid,  ©aid,  roaumV  fccrfblgjV  Du  micb  ? 

5.  (£v  fpvad) :  Jpevv !  tkv  t>i|"t  bit  ?  ©cv  Jpevv  fag'tc :  3d) 
bin  2>e'fu$,  ben  tot  i>crfol'c\e|t.  £$  roivb  t>ir  fd)ir>ev  roev'ben, 
nn'bev  ben  ©tadj'cf  ans'jnfcbfagen. 

6.  ^tt'tevnb  unb  angjVfceU  fpvad)  ev :  Jpcrr,  was  tttlljt  tot, 
baft  id)  tt}ttn  foil  ? 

7.  2)ev  Jpevv  ant'roortete  tfym :  ©te'be  auf,  unb  ge'fye  in  Ote 
<&tal>t,  oa  rcivb  biv  $tfw  roev'ben,  r»a$  tot  flntn  fotfjr.  25c* 
jtuqt'  jtan'oen  fei'ne  Stci'fcgefafyrten  Oa;  benn  fte  fyoYten  jroav 
Die  ©ttm'me,  fa'beu  a'bev  SRie'tnanb. 

8.  ©au'hts  jtanb  von  Der  Sv'be  auf,  fonn'tc  a'ber,  Da  ev  Die 
2tu  gen  off' nete,  Sftic'manb  fe'tyen.  2) a  naty'men  flc  tfyn  an  bev 
Jpanb,  unD  let'teten  ifyn  nad)  SJamatf'hts. 

9.  £>vet  ^a'gc  lana,  fat;  ev  uid)t,  unD  natym  roe'bev  ©pci'fe 
nod)  3:vanr*  jtt  fid). 

10.  9Zuu  vow  ju  SDamatf'htS  eiu  Snng'er^a'tttettS  ZCnani's 
as ;  ju  Dem  fpvad)  Dcv  Jpcvv  in  ei'nev  ©vfdjci'nnng :  Ztnani'a* ! 
£v  fpvad) :  £evv,  fytev  bin  id). 


276  APPENDIX. 

11.  £>afag'te  Oev  £evv  pi  ilmt:  <Befy'  unberjttg'fiefj  in  Oie 
fo'genannte  gcva'be  ©tva'fe  nnO  evfnn'Oige  oid)  in  3u'0a$  £an'* 
fe  nacb  ei'nem  @au'ln$  fcon  $av'fu$  ;  fcenn  e'ben  )cjt  bc'tet  Oie'; 
fcv  SDtann, 

12.  UnO  f)at  in  ei'ncv  Qsrfdm'tttmg  ei'nen  SD?ann,  Sfta'mens 
2(naui'a$,  ju  fid)  fyevein'fommen  gefe'^en,  t>eu  ifym  Die  £an'Oe 
anflegt,  urn  tyn  rcie'oev  fe'fyeno  jn  mad)'en. 

13.  Hnani'aS  enoie'Oevte  3fym :  £erv,  es  fya'ben  miv  SSie'le 
fcon  Oie'fem  93?an'ne  evjdfylt',  n>ie  Diet  23o'fe6  et*  Oet'nen  £ei'lu 
gen  ju  3>evn'falem  ju'gefitgt ; 

14.  Uub  and)  fyiev  fyat  ev  i>on  Oen  O'berpricftcnt  S3ofl'mac(jt, 
TXl'tt  in  25au'0e  jn  le'gen,  Oie  Oei'nen  Dta'men  an'rnfcn. 

15.  2)cv  JSperv  fptMd)  ju  ilmt:  ©e'fye  nnv  t)in;  e'ben  oie'fer 
tft  miv  ein  aus'evlefenes  ^Bcrf'jcug,  mid)  untev  ipei'oen,  fcov 
fto'nigen  nnt>  ten  Svin'Oevn  Spracltf  befaunt'  ju  mad)'en. 

16.  2>enn  id)  roev'De  ifym  jei'gcn,  roieoiel'  ev  fur  mei'nen  9ta'- 
men  lei'Oen  foil. 

17.  2(nam'as  gtng  alfo  fyin,  nun  in  0a£  Jpans,  (eg'tc  iljm 
tic  Jpdn'oe  auf  unt>  fag'te :  23nt'Dcu  ©aul !  Oev  £evv,  (3c'futf, 
Oev  tit*  anf  oem  "SBe'ge,  Oen  on  {fa'meft,  evfdnen')  fyat  mid)  gc-- 
fanot',  oamit'  on  nne'oev  fe'ijcnfc  unO  \>olX  oes  fyei'ligen  (&ti'\U$ 
roev'oeft. 

18.  @ogleid)'  roar's,  roie  roeun  ©dwp'pen  Don  fet'nen  W= 
gen  fte'lcu;  ev  fonn'te  rote'oev  fc'fyeu,  jtant>  anf  nnO  lies  ftd) 
tan'fen. 

19.  £)ann  ag  ev,  nnt>  fldvf'te  fid)  roie'oev.  Sftod)  ei'nige  $a'g* 
blieb  ev  bei  Oen  S&ng'cro  jn  X)ama$'r*u$  ; 

20.  UnO  fogleid)'  pve'oigte  ev  3e'fum  in  oen  ©mtago'gen,  Oafi 
ev  Oev  ©  o  I;  n  vS  o  t'  t  e  s  fei. 

21.  2£ne,  Die  il)n  fyovten,  evjtaun'ten  nnO  fpra'cfjcn :  3|t  ev 
e6  nid)t,  Oev  jn  3>evn'falem  toevtifgen  woll'te  Oie,  rocl'cbe  je'nen 
Sta'men  an'vufen  ?  3fa  geva'Oe  oa'vum  ijt  ev  fyiefyn*'  gehnn'meu, 
nm  fie  in  33cvfyaft'  ju  nc^'men,  uno  aw  t>ic  O'bcrpvicjUr  ju  ftber* 
lie'fevn. 

22.  ©au'lm?  gewann'  inoeffen  im'mev  mc()v  an  ^vafr,  fo  frag 
ev  Oie  3u'0en,  Oie  ju  3)amag'fm5  tooljn'tcn,  ganj  in  ^3enr>iv'vuug 
$rg'u,  inOem  ev  ftano^aft  bcljauv'tete :  oic'fev  \]l  Cljvtf'tms. 

23.  Si'ne  gcvau'me  Beit  uad)i;er'  fyici'ten  Oie  ^u'Ocu  SRatl? 
gufam'men,  ifyn  um'jtibvingcn. 

24.  2t'bev  il)'ve  3Iad)'^ellungeu  n?uv'ocn  oem  ©airlue  be- 
fannt'.  ^njwifcb'cn  l)ielt  man  ^ag  unO  Slactt  Oie  Xljo'xc  be= 
fejt',  um  it;n  ju  tot'tni. 

25.  2)a  ual}'men  it)n  Oi?  3ung'ev  Dcj?  Sdacl)t«  unO  lie'fen  il)tt 
in  ei'nem  ^ov'be  m  oer  SOtau'ev  l}inab'. 


APPENDIX.  277 

26.  £>a  er  fyieranf  nad)  Sevu'fafcm  hm,  fnd)'te  er  ftd)  an  Me 
3nng'cr  an' jufd)  It  efen ;  a'ber  al'le  fuvd)'tetcn  tfm,  gfanb'ten 
ntc^t,  &a§  et  etn  Sfttitg'er  fci. 

27.  2)a  nafym  fed)  SSar'nafoas  fei'ner  an,  fitfyi'te  ifyn  jn  fcen 
2ipof'teht  nnt>  crjafjl'te  ify'nen,  n>ie  ei*  anf  fei'nev  SKei'fc  ben 
£errti  gefe'fyen  nnt>  bag  Die'fer-  jn  ifym  gcve'fcet,  unfc  rote  frei'-- 
mftttytg  er.  ju  2)ama$'fris  fur  fcen  seamen  3>e'fn  ftd)  erfrdrt' 
(ja'fce. 

28.  25on  t>er  3rtt  an  |tant>  ev  jn  Scvu'fafem  in  focrtvau'tem 
Itm'gattge  mit  ify'ncn  unb  keriitn'fcigte  frei'mitttytg  t>en  Sta'men 
Se'iU/  l>es  Jfpevvn. 


II. 


FAMILIAR  DIALOGUES. 


(Sv'jUS  (Sefpr&d)'.  J'/rs^  Dialogue. 

(Sn'ten  SDTor'gen,  mein  £etT,  or 

§ttt  9t.  (i-  e.   the   family  Good  morning,  Sir,  or  Mr.  N., 

name),  grail  9t,  or  Madame,  Madam  or  Mrs.  N.,  Miss  N. 
mein  gran'lein,  or  3>ung'* 

fei*  2ft.  or  Mademoiselle.. 

(Sti'tcn  $ag,  mein  £cit,  K.  Good  day,  Sir,  &c. 

C&u'ten  2f  benfc.  Good  evening, 

©tt'te  9tad)t.  Good  night. 

^ie  beftn'&en  @ie  fic()  ?  How  do  you  do? 

©efyr  roofyl,  idj  fcanr" e  Sfy'nen.  Very  well,  I  thank  you. 

£s  iff  miv  (tcb  @ie  jn  fe'tyen.  I  am  glad  to  see  you. 

3d)  tyoffe  @ie  ftnb  root)!,  I  hope  you  are  well. 

9ttd)t  fe^r  mo^r.  Not  very  well. 

3d)  fya'be  @te  lang'e  nid)t  ge=  I  have  not  seen  you  for  a  long 

fe'ijen.  time. 

^O  flnt)  @ie  gewe'fen  ?  Where  have  you  been  ? 

24 


278  APPENDIX. 

3d)  Htt  in  spavin  gcme'fen.  I  have  been  in  Paris. 

QGBie  fcejtn'OCt  ftd)  3fyt*  §tW  How  does  your  brother  do  1 

$3tu'Det  ? 

(£x  i|t  jiem'Iid)  tt>ol)f.  He  is  tolerably  well. 

3d)   glau'k,   Ct   beftit'tet  fid)  I  believe  he  is  well. 

toof>(. 

©t  befano'  ftctj  gcf  tent  JTbenft*  He  was  well  last  night. 

rt>oi)L 

^ie  beftn'om  ftd)  3fyt  Jpevr  How    are    your    father    and 

SDa'tct    uno    3(;'te    giau       mother1? 

Wlut'ttt  ? 

OKct'uc  SDhtt'tet  bcftil'^et  ftd)  My  mother  is  not  well. 

nid)t  rootji 

©ie  befano'  ftd)  geftetll  ffllf*  She  was  ill  yesterday  morn- 

nid)t  roofyf.  ing. 

£>as  tl}Ut  mil*  (cit>.  I  am  sorry  for  it. 


3wei'teS  ©efptad)'.  Second  Dialogue. 

2&as  iff  oic  1%  ?  J  w  hat  °  cloclc  1S  ll  l 

(56  i|?  Ctn  Ufyf.  It  is  one  o'clock. 

(£g  ijt  jroMf  itfyt.  It  is  twelve  o'clock. 

%i '!!  !•"  2K?f !"?  s^If- 1 Ii  is  a  <iuarter  past  tweIve- 

gs  i|l  cm  23icv  tc(  auf  tine.     )    .       H         r 

(£6  t|t  {*alb  etng.  )  v 

(56  i\l  Otct  33tev'tc(  auf  eilt^.  It  wants  a  quarter  of  one. 

&$  x\x  ctn  33tcr'tet  auf  t>m.  It  is  a  quarter  past  two,,  * 

(£6  i\1  jroan'jig  SOtinu'tCU  nad)  It  is  twenty  minutes  past  two. 

jroei. 

(£6  i\\  jroan'jig  SDtimt'ten  t>0t*  It  is  twenty  minutes  to  eight. 

ad)t 

SBte  tiki  ift  Cg  auf  jctw  ?  How  much  does  it  want  often  ? 

&$  fefyft  jefytt  attimt'tcn  ju" 

(56  ift  funf  jig  SERirot'ten  auf 

jefjn. 
(56   i|t   jefyn   SDtttw'tttt   Dot 

<IBann  ftnt>  @ie  gefom'men  ?      When  did  you  come  ? 


>  It  wants  ten  minutes  of  ten. 


APPENDIX.  279 

3d)    Hm    un'gefdfyr   um   bier  I  came  about  four  o'clock. 

1%. 

(£g  fd)htg  C'fcen  ftc'bcu  Ufyr.  It  just  struck  seven  o'clock, 

^at  eg  fcljou  gcfcfeftl'gen?  Has  it  already  struck  ? 

£g  wirD  InxlD  ftdjt  fd)(a'gen.  It  will  soon  strike  eight. 

-3Bie  t>icl  fd)lagt  eg  jegt  ?  What  does  it  strike  now? 

Sg  mug  auf  bClt  @d)lag   ueuu  It  must  be  about  striking  nine. 

fetn. 

Sag  i|l  3^'t'C  £eit  JW  fWty's  That  is  your  time  for  break- 
jKtcreu,  utd)t  rcafyv  ?  fasting,  is  it  not  ? 


Sl'tt'teg  (Sefprdd)'.  TVhVt?  Dialogue. 

©pred)'en  ©ie  2)eutfd),  mcitt  Do  you  speak  German,  Sir? 

£ert  ? 

3d)  fpredj'C  Cg  cin  WC'ltig.  I  speak  it  a  little 

3d)  tn'VfU  fye  eg  bef'fer  aft?  id)  I  understand  it  better  than  I 

eg  fvredyen  (ami.  can  speak  it. 

©prceVcn  ©ie  mit  mir.  Speak  with  me. 

SBerjte'fyeu  @te  mid)  1  Do  you  understand  me? 

©jn-ed)'eu  ©ie  mit  ifym,  (u)l\)  Speak  with  him,  (her). 

Jpa'be  id)  vidj'tig  ftuVgefptodj*  Did  I  pronounce  right  ? 

en? 

^5ie  fm'ed)'en  ftfjt  $l\t  iDcutfcfj.  You  speak  German  very  well. 

©iu&  ©te  in  2)eutfd)'(anD   ge^  Have  you  been  in  Germany  ? 

roe'fen  ? 

Stein,  Ute'mafg.  No,  never. 

QOBie    lang'c   fya'fccn    ©ie    ge;  How    long    have    you    been 

fftttf  ?  learning? 

gttnf  sJ3to'nate.  Five  months. 

&*$  i\\  nut  ei'nc  htf'je  $eit ;  This  is   but   a  short  time  ;  I 

id)  roun'Dcvc  mid),   fcaft  ©ie  wonder   you  speak  so  well 

fd)  on  fo  $nt  fpveclj'cn.  already. 

SSevjtC'tyen  @ie  wag   ©ie  W-  Do  you  understand  what  you 

fen  ?  read  ? 

%d)  Wrjte'fye  mefyv  afg  id)  ve'=  I  understand  more  than  I  can 

fren  faun.  speak. 

933ie  nen'nen    ©ie    tag    auf  What  do  you  call  that  in  Ger- 

SMltfd)  ?  man  ? 

iaf'fett  ©ie  UUg  Seutfd)  fpvccl)^  Let  us  speak  German. 

en. 


280 


APPENDIX. 


2>ag  ifl  ein  gn'teg  WliVtd  eg 

ju  lev'nen. 
djflit  went  fpvcdj'cn  @ie  ? 
<2Bag  fa'gen  @ie  ? 
QOBofcon'  fpvccl/cn  @ie  ? 
@pred}'en  ©ie  ju  miv  ? 
©pvccb'cn  @ie  cin  rce'nig  Ian'-- 

tev. 


That  is  a  good  way  to  learn 

it. 
With  whom  do  you  speak  1 
What  do  you  say  1 
Of  what  do  you  speak  1 
Do  you  speak  to  me  1 
Speak  a  little  louder. 


SSiev'teg  ©efpvdd)'. 

30<W  ifl  e^  fiir  3Bet'tev  ? 
gg  tft  fd)6n  (fcbo'ncs)  aBeCter. 
©djeint  Die  ©on'ne  ? 
3a,  mein  £evv,  nnD  eg  ift  fe(;v 

roavm. 
Sag  SBet'tci*  Mi  ben  gan'jen 

c£ag  [ebon  geroe'fen. 
<2Bie  i|t  Da^  SBet'rer  ? 
(£g  ijt  nidjt  ju  warm  nnt>  nid)t 

ju  hit. 
£)ag  SBet'ter  fyat  ftdj  gedn'; 

fcevt. 
(Eg  ift  fef)v  nnn'tug. 
S>te  SBol'fen  ftnD  fefyv  Dicf. 
3d)  furclj'te  roir  metj'btn  Sfte'- 

gen  bet'om'men. 
(£g  vie'felt,  eg  unrfc  veg'nen. 
Qjg  nnvD  bait)  veg'nen. 
£g  fdngt  an  jn  veg'nen,  fdjuci'* 

en. 
£g    i|t    fefefeclj'tes    (fdjlccfct) 

Sg  i|t  fdnmtt'jig. 

£g  ijt  tvoe'fen,  nag,  veg'nid)t, 

ftitvmtfd),  win'&ig,  vcrdn'* 

t>evltd)eg  ^Det'tev. 
£>ag  OBet'tev  ftavr  ftdj  auf. 
Sie'fev  iHe'gen  rcivt>  bait)  fcov-- 

n'bev  fein. 
2Biv  rcev'fcen  X>on'nev  fya'ben. 
2>ev  £>on'nev  vollt. 


Fourth  Dialogue. 

What  kind  of  weather  is  it? 

It  is  fine  weather. 

Does  the  sun  shine  ? 

Yes,  Sir,  and  it  is  very  warm. 

The  weather  has  been  fine  the 

•whole  day. 
How  is  the  weather  ? 
It  is  neither  too  warm  nor  too 

cold. 
The  weather  has  changed. 

It  is  very  windy. 

The  clouds  are  very  thick. 

I  fear  we  shall  have  rain. 

It  drizzles,  it  will  rain. 

It  will  soon  rain. 

It  begins  to  rain,  to  snow. 

It  is  bad  weather. 

It  is  dirty  (weather). 
It  is   dry,  wet,  rainy,  stormy, 
windy,  changeable  weather. 

The  weather  clears  up. 
This  rain  will  soon  be  over. 

We  shall  have  some  thunder. 

The  thunder  roars. 


APPENDIX.  281 

gftllf  tc*  (Scfpvad)'.  Fifth  Dialogue. 

3&0  gc'fycn  @ic  fyin  ?  Where  are  you  going  1 

3d)  ge'fye  uacl)  Son'Don.  I  am  going  to  London. 

Cf  gc^t  Jtact)  S^Clttfcl)  lant).  He  is  going  to  Germany. 

T23o  roofynt  Cf  jcf?t  ?  Where  does  he  live  now? 

<£v  itoofynt  in  ocv  ©tat)t  £am  He  lives  in  the  town  of  Hano- 

no'toei*.  ver. 

©V  gefyt  tmt'd)   (t'tfccr)  gran^?  He  is  going  through  (by  the 

vetd)  atad)  t>Ct*  @d)tt)ca$.  vvay  of)  France  to  Switzer- 

land. 

fe  i|t  iat  (jtt)  Sdea'pcf,  SKoan,  He  has  been  in  (at)  Naples, 

QQDtCll  gciDCfcn.  Rome,  Vienna. 

SOlci'ne  ©d)tt>cf tear  a]?  in  (ju)  My  sister  has  been  at  Rome. 

SKoan  gen>e'fcn. 

CDtctn  S5l*U'Dcr  wax  in  1Lm\ltV:  My  brother  had  been  in  Am- 

oaan'  geroc'fen.  sterdam. 

3d)  ge'fyc  aaif  oat?  ianfc.  I  am  going  to  the  country. 

<2Bo  f oan'ancai  @ie  fyca:  ?  Where  do  you  come  from  ? 

3d)  fom'aaac  to  oat  ocan  iati'&c.  I  come  from  the  country. 

3d)    trom'ttie    toon    (atts?)    DCl*  I  come  from  (out  of)  the  city. 

©taot. 

3d)    fom'me   ans  (toon)  t>cr  I  come   out   of  (from)   the 

©tra'fe.  street. 

QGBtV  foan'men  toon  CCt*  33oVfe.  We  come  from  'Change. 

3ct)  ge'lje  nad)  £an'fe.  I  am  going  home. 

3d)    foan'ane  ans  (toon)    ret*  I  come  from  church. 
^tVdje. 

©ic  gctyt  in  tic  £ir'd)e.  She  is  going  to  church. 

£v  gefyt  nad)  J^an'fe.  He  is  going  home. 

3c()  fom'anc  aaas  t>em  jSinVaaacr.  I  come  out  of  the  room. 

@tc  tenant  aaaS  $n  ©tat'be.  She  comes  out  of  the  parlour. 

3c()  gc'l)c  in  t>ic  ^am'ancv,  in  I  am  going  into  the  chamber, 

t>ic  ^fldj'e,  ill  ocn   teller,         into  the  kitchen,  into   the 

K.  cellar,  &lc. 

©ie  flno  in  OCt*  ^aaat'anct*,  in  They  are  in  the  chamber,  in 

OCf   ftaKtVe,  in  oeiat  Ktl'lw,         the   kitchen,   in  the  cellar, 

ttt  OCan  ^O'fc,  K.  in  the  yard,  &c. 


III. 


GERMAN  ABBREVIATIONS. 


%.  € Ztono  Gtyriftt,    .    • 

2fntro.     .    .    .  2Cnt»o?t,    .    .    . 

2f.  $ mm  Xtfkmwt,    . 

2Cuf[.  ....  Zfoffoge,     .    .    . 

2(u$g SUtSgafce,      .    .    . 

au$g.      .    .    .  ausgenommen,     . 

§23 25uc(),  23aut>,     .    . 

£.  Sap.,  or  £ap.  ^apitcf,  or  £apitef, 

2) doctor,      .    .    . 

t>.  f) t>a£  fyeijt,      .    .    . 

l>.  i fcas  iff,      .    .    . 

fcnrgf fcergleidjen,   .    .    . 

<£to Sfcangelium,  .    . 

<£n> Siter,      .    .    .    . 

f.  or  folg.      .     .  folgenfc,  (si?ig.)     . 

ff. fo(geut>e,  (plur.) 

gr gvau,    .... 

geb geboven,  .    .    .    . 

gcjt gejtovben,  .    .    . 

<8v (Svof(()en,     .    .    . 

f).  @.      ...    fyciUge  @e()rifr,    . 
i?t\  £nt.  .    .    .  £err,  $ernt,     .    . 
3.  £.     ...    Seftt*  S^rifht*,  . 

I ties, 

2D?,  or  SDtaj.     .    3)?aje|tdt,  .    .    . 

SDtfcv SDtanufcHpt,      .    . 

St.  @.     ...    Sftacfofcfcvift,    .    . 
91,  $ States  Sejtament,  . 


in    the    year   of  our 
Lord. 
.  answer. 

Old  Testament. 
.  edition. 

edition. 
.  except. 

book,  volume. 

chapter. 
.  Doctor. 

that  means. 
.  i.  e.,  viz. 

of  this  kind. 
.  Gospel. 

your. 


} 


the  following. 


.  Lady,  wife. 

born. 
.  died. 

a   coin    in    Germany, 
[groat.) 
.  Holy  Scriptures. 

Mr.,  Sir,  Sirs,  Messrs. 
.  Jesus  Christ. 

read. 
.  Majesty. 

Manuscript. 
.  Postscript. 

New  Testament. 


APPENDIX. 


283 


ob ooer,     .    .    . 

SHcc SKccenfcnt,    .    . 

SKtfyfv,     .    .    .    $Hctd)g  %t)tUv, 

© @ette,      .    .    . 

©.  or  f.  .    .    .    ftefye,     .    .    . 
©c.  23?aj.      .    .  ©cine  SDtajejfat, 
©t ©anct,       .    . 


it.  a.  m. 
it.  o.  g. 
w.  f.  f. 
u.  f.  m. 
it.  f.  n>. 
SB.       . 


Skater,    .    .    .    . 
ttnt>  an&ere  mcfyv, 
unt>  t>  erg  (eid)  en, 
unt>  fo  fort  or  fewer, 
uno  fo  mefyr, 
into  fo  roeiter, 
S£er£,       .    .    .    . 


ton,      .    . 
3eile,       .    . 
jitm  25eifpie[, 
jum  Srempef, 


or. 

reviewer,  critic. 

rixdollar. 

page  (of  a  book). 

see,  vide. 

His  Majesty. 

Saint. 

dollar. 

&c,  farther. 

and  the  like. 

&c. 

verse, 
of,  from, 
line. 

for  example. 


CAMBRIDGE: 
CHARLES  FOLSOM,  PRINTER  TO  THE  UNIVERSITY. 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


THIS  BOOK  IS  DUE  ON  THE  LAST  DATE 
STAMPED  BELOW 


"!! 


14  19i5 


JAIH25  1917 


30m-l,'15 


/ 


.  '  .'» 


I 


